SINERGIE-SIMA 2018 CONFERENCE
Transformative business strategies
and new patterns for value creation
Extended Abstract
Ca’ Foscari University, Venice
Department of Management - San Giobbe, Cannaregio 873
14-15 June 2018
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding della Sinergie - Sima 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
Venice, 14-15 June 2018
Ca’ Foscari University, Venice
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
I Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding sono pubblicati online sul portale di Sinergie
http://www.sinergiejournal.it
© 2018 FONDAZIONE CUEIM
Via Interrato dell’Acqua Morta, 26
37129 Verona
www.cueim.it
II
Convegno Sinergie - Sima 2018
Transformative business strategies
and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018
Referred Electronic
Conference Proceeding
Extended Abstact
a cura di
Claudio Baccarani, Marco Frey, Gaetano M. Golinelli,
Alberto Pastore e Tiziano Vescovi
III
IV
Conference chairs
GAETANO M. GOLINELLI
CLAUDIO BACCARANI
ALBERTO PASTORE
MARCO FREY
TIZIANO VESCOVI
Sapienza Università di Roma
Università di Verona
Sapienza Università di Roma
Scuola Superiore S. Anna di Pisa
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Coordinamento scientifico
MARTA UGOLINI
GENNARO IASEVOLI
FEDERICO BRUNETTI
Università di Verona
Libera Università Maria SS. Assunta LUMSA, Roma
Università di Verona
International coordination
ANGELO A. CAMILLO
SANDRO CASTALDO
STEFANO BRESCIANI
Woodbury University, Los Angeles, USA
Università Bocconi, Milano
Università di Torino
Comitato scientifico
FRANCO CALZA
MICHELE CANO
LAURA COSTANZO
BO EDVARDSSON
MARIANGELA FRANCH
ERNESTINA GIUDICI
GIAN LUCA GREGORi
MICHAEL HAENLEIN
CHARLES HOFACKER
AMEDEO MAIZZA
CARMELA ELITA SCHILLACI
ALFONSO VARGAS-SÁNCHez
SALVIO VICARI
ROBERTO VONA
Università di Napoli Parthenope
University of the West of Scotland, UK
University of Southampton, UK
Karlstad University, Svezia
Università di Trento
Università di Cagliari
Università Politecnica delle Marche
ESCP Europe of Paris, Francia
Florida State University, USA
Università del Salento
Università di Catania
University of Huelva, Spagna
Bocconi Università di Milano
Università di Napoli Federico II
Comitato organizzatore locale
TIZIANO VESCOVI
MONICA CALCAGNO
FRANCESCA CHECCHINATO
STEFANO MICELLI
MICHELE TAMMA
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Università Ca’ Foscari Venezia
Redazione
FEDERICO BRUNETTI
PAOLA CASTELLANI
NICOLA COBELLI
ELENA GIARETTA
CHIARA ROSSATO
FRANCESCA SIMEONI
FEDERICO TESTA
VANIA VIGOLO
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
V
Redazione scientifica e organizzativa
ANGELO BONFANTI (Coordinatore)
FABIO CASSIA
LAURA CIARMELA
ADA ROSSI
ANNALISA ANDRIOLO
Università di Verona
Università di Verona
Sinergie
Sinergie
CUEIM
VI
VII
La Direzione e il Comitato Scientifico del Convegno di Sinergie
sono riconoscenti ai Referee che hanno collaborato
al processo di peer review dei paper
TINDARA ABBATE
Università di Messina
BARBARA AQUILANI
Università della Tuscia
VALERIA BELVEDERE
Università Cattolica Sacro Cuore
MICHELLE BONERA
Università di Brescia
GUIDO BORTOLUZZI
Università di Trieste
STEFANO BRESCIANI
Università di Torino
ANTHONY BUONO
Bentley University
MARIA ROSITA CAGNINA
Università di Udine
MONICA CALCAGNO
Università Cà Foscari
LUIGI CANTONE
Università di Napoli Federico II
ANTONELLA CAPRIELLO
Università Del Piemonte Orientale
FEDERICA CECCOTTI
Sapienza Università di Roma
CORRADO CERRUTI
Università di Roma Tor Vergata
ANDREA CHIARINI
Università di Ferrara
FRANCESCO CIAMPI
Università di Firenze
ALESSANDRA COZZOLINO
Sapienza Università di Roma
FRANCESCO CRISCI
Università di Udine
MONICA CUGNO
Università di Torino
MAREK ĆWIKLICKI
Cracow University of Economics
DANIELE DALLI
Università di Pisa
PATRIZIA DE LUCA
Università di Trieste
GIACOMO DEL CHIAPPA
Università di Sassari
MANLIO DEL GIUDICE
Link Campus University
VALENTINA DELLA CORTE
Università di Napoli Federico II
FRANCESCA FAGGIONI
Università di Roma Tre
MONICA FAIT
Università del Salento
ALBERTO FALINI
Università di Brescia
MARIA ANTONELLA FERRI
Universitas Mercatorum
VINCENZO FORMISANO
Università di Cassino e del Lazio Meridionale
MARIANGELA FRANCH
Università di Trento
LORIS GAIO
Università di Trento
MARCO GALVAGNO
Università di Catania
VIII
BARBARA GAUDENZI
Università di Verona
FRANCESCO IZZO
Università degli Studi della Campania Luigi Vanvitelli
BEATRICE LUCERI
Università di Parma
PIERPAOLO MAGLIOCCA
Università di Foggia
ANTONIO MAJOCCHI
Università di Pavia
VITTORIA MARINO
Università di Salerno
MICHELA CESARINA MASON
Università di Udine
AURELIO MAURI
Libera Università di Lingue e Comunicazione IULM
ALESSANDRA MAZZEI
Libera Università di Lingue e Comunicazione IULM
GAETANO MICELI
Università della Calabria
LAURA MICHELINI
Università Lumsa di Roma
ROBERTA MINAZZI
Università dell’Insubria
ARABELLA MOCCIARO LI DESTRI
Università di Palermo
ANDREA MORETTI
Università di Udine
FRANCESCA NEGRI
Università di Parma
COSTANZA NOSI
Università Lumsa di Roma
ANDREA PACI
Università di Firenze
GIOVANNA PEGAN
Università di Trieste
LUCA PELLEGRINI
Libera Università di Lingue e Comunicazione IULM
ANNA CLAUDIA PELLICELLI
Università di Torino
TONINO PENCARELLI
Università di Urbino Carlo Bo
ALESSANDRA PERRI
Università Cà Foscari
FRANCESCO POLESE
Università di Salerno
ANGELO PRESENZA
Università Del Molise
TOMMASO PUCCI
Università di Siena
ANDREA QUINTILIANI
Università Telematica Pegaso
ANTONIO RENZI
Sapienza Università di Roma
ANGELO RIVIEZZO
Università Del Sannio
MARCO ROMANO
Università di Catania
STEFANIA ROMENTI
Libera Università di Lingue e Comunicazione IULM
MARCELLO SANSONE
Università di Cassino e del Lazio Meridionale
FRANCESCO SCHIAVONE
Università di Napoli Parthenope
ALFONSO SIANO
Università di Salerno
PAOLA SIGNORI
Università di Verona
PIERPAOLO SINGER
Università di Salerno
IX
ANTONIO TENCATI
Università di Brescia
PIERPAOLO TESTA
Università di Napoli Federico II
MARIAPINA TRUNFIO
Università di Napoli Parthenope
ANNALISA TUNISINI
Università di Urbino
MARIA VERNUCCIO
Sapienza Università di Roma
DONATA VIANELLI
Università di Trieste
MILENA VIASSONE
Università di Torino
AGOSTINO VOLLERO
Università di Salerno
X
Al Lettore,
questo volume accoglie i full paper del Convegno Sinergie-Sima 2018 Transformative business
strategies and new patterns for value creation, Università Ca’ Foscari, Venezia, 14-15 giugno 2018.
Di norma, la trasformazione di un settore prende il via dall’adozione di una nuova tecnologia.
Tuttavia, ciò che rende possibili cambiamenti importanti di un settore è un modello di business che
connetta la nuova tecnologia con un bisogno di mercato, in modo da creare una nuova
combinazione nel processo di creazione del valore.
Lo scopo del Convegno è discutere dei modelli di business “trasformativi” e delle necessarie
evoluzioni strategiche come sfide per la gestione dell’impresa nel prossimo futuro, creando
relazioni tra studiosi, diffondendo la conoscenza in campo economico-manageriale e promuovendo
il contributo degli studiosi italiani al dibattito internazionale sui temi del management.
Claudio Baccarani, Marco Frey, Gaetano M. Golinelli, Alberto Pastore, Tiziano Vescovi
XI
XII
Cari Lettori e Convegnisti,
il call for paper del Convegno Sinergie-Sima 2018 ha previsto la possibilità di presentare extended
abstract oppure full paper. In totale sono pervenuti in redazione 115 extended abstract e 45 full
paper.
Per gli extended abstract, la valutazione dei contributi ricevuti è stata operata dal Comitato
Scientifico in base alla coerenza con il tema del Convegno e/o con gli studi management secondo i
Gruppi Tematici SIMA, alla chiarezza e alla rilevanza (anche potenziale) dei contenuti proposti.
Per i full paper, la procedura di valutazione dei contributi è stata condotta secondo il meccanismo
della peer review da parte di due referee anonimi, docenti universitari ed esperti dell’argomento,
scelti all’interno dell’Albo dei Referee della rivista Sinergie.
In particolare, i referee hanno seguito i seguenti criteri nella valutazione dei contributi:
- chiarezza degli obiettivi di ricerca,
- correttezza dell’impostazione metodologica,
- coerenza dei contenuti proposti con il tema/track del convegno e/o con gli studi management,
- contributo di originalità/innovatività,
- rilevanza in relazione al tema/track del convegno e/o agli studi management,
- chiarezza espositiva,
- significatività della base bibliografica.
L’esito del referaggio ha portato a situazioni di accettazione integrale, accettazione con
suggerimenti e non accettazione. In caso di giudizio discordante la decisione è stata affidata alla
Direzione Scientifica. Ogni lavoro è stato poi rinviato agli Autori completo delle schede di
referaggio per la valutazione delle modifiche suggerite dai referee, verificate in seguito dalla
Redazione della rivista Sinergie.
A seguito del processo di valutazione sono stati accettati 29 full paper e 115 extended abstract,
pubblicati in due distinti volumi. In questo volume dedicato ai full paper, i contributi sono articolati
nelle seguenti track:
TRACK DEL CONVEGNO
- Strategy between theory and practice
- Strategia tra teoria e pratica
- Rethinking strategy: strategic engagement for value creation
- Business models evolution: technology and beyond
- L’evoluzione dei modelli di business tra big data e tecnologia
- Marketing strategies to create customer value
- Business strategies for a better world
- Competition and collaboration in business
- La prospettiva del consumatore al valore
- Decision support systems, networks and strategy
- Strumenti manageriali per lo sviluppo di network e territori
- Crowdfunding as a new business model
- Off the Track - Contaminazioni al pensiero manageriale
TRACK SIMA
- Strategic management and corporate governance
- Innovation and technology management
- Entrepreneurship
- International business
- Tourism and culture management
- Sustainability
- Small and family business
- Retailing and service management
- Operations e supply chain management
- Marketing & Communication
XIII
Tutti i full paper di questo volume sono stati presentati e discussi durante il Convegno e pubblicati
online sul portale della rivista Sinergie (www.sinergiejournal.it).
Nel ringraziare tutti gli Autori per la collaborazione ci auguriamo che questo volume contribuisca a
fornire un avanzamento di conoscenze sui modelli di business “trasformativi” e sulle necessarie
evoluzioni strategiche come sfide per la gestione dell’impresa nel prossimo futuro.
La Direzione e il Comitato Scientifico
XIV
INDICE
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
Merging strategic and behavioural perspectives on corporate responses to climate change.
An empirical analysis of institutional and individual drivers of climate action
in the Italian manufacturing industry
NICCOLÒ MARIA TODARO, FRANCESCO TESTA, TIBERIO DADDI, FABIO IRALDO
“
3
Technology-driven store format: from impact on practice to impact on theory
VIRGINIA VANNUCCI, GAETANO AIELLO
“
9
Cresciute in fretta. Organizzazioni a rapida crescita: verso la creazione
di un approccio analitico “ad hoc”
LEONARDO POMPA, FULVIO FORTEZZA, GIOVANNI MASINO
“
13
La logica esperienziale applicata alle strategie del comparto fieristico: una review della letteratura
TONINO PENCARELLI, MARCO CIOPPI, ILARIA CURINA, FABIO FORLANI
“
17
Il rightshoring e le strategie di localizzazione delle attività delle imprese. Alcuni casi a confronto
ALESSANDRO BARONCELLI, VALERIA BELVEDERE, LUIGI SERIO
“
27
Effetti competitivi della sharing economy nei servizi ricettivi
AURELIO G. MAURI, ROBERTA MINAZZI, RUGGERO SAINAGHI
“
33
Ambidexterity e performance management. Un’evidenza empirica di implementazione
della strategia aziendale
DANIELE BINCI, CORRADO CERRUTI, STEFANO ANTONIO DONNARUMMA, PIERLUIGI PALMIGIANI
“
39
L’influenza della componente enogastronomica sul comportamento di viaggio degli italiani
ROBERTA GARIBALDI, ANDREA POZZI
“
47
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY: STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT FOR VALUE CREATION
Transformative strategies for employee engagement: managers and employees confronted
ALESSANDRA MAZZEI, LUCA QUARATINO, ALFONSA BUTERA, CHIARA FISICHELLA
“
53
Unpacking the good soldier syndrome: the role of authentic leadership
and organizational citizenship behavior
RICCARDO RIALTI, GIACOMO FABIETTI, LAMBERTO ZOLLO, CRISTIANO CIAPPEI
“
57
The financial attractiveness of business models: an analysis of sharing economy companies
LAURA MICHELINI, CECILIA GRIECO, GENNARO IASEVOLI
“
63
When open innovation drives business models evolution:
the case of business to business markets
TINDARA ABBATE, ANNA CODINI, BARBARA AQUILANI
“
69
On the way to business blockchainization: An empirical analysis of successful ICOs
DANIELA ANDREINI, GIUSEPPE PEDELIENTO, MARA BERGAMASCHI
“
73
Business model innovation in complex servitized systems:
the case of OBC in capital equipment SMEs
MARCO PAIOLA
“
77
Smart tourism destinations and its integration into territorial certifications
TINDARA ABBATE, ELVIRA TIZIANA LA ROCCA, ALFONSO VARGAS-SANCHEZ
“
83
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
XV
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Big data governance e PMI: evidenze dal distretto aerospaziale campano
FILOMENA IZZO, DOMENICO GRAZIANO, MARIO MUSTILLI
PAG.
91
Collusione, processi decisionali ed intelligenza artificiale
FABRIZIO IANNONI, ALBERTO PASTORE
“
97
L’innovazione digitale per le strategie di tailor made delle imprese del Made in Italy
nei mercati internazionali
GAETANO MACARIO, SAVINO SANTOVITO, SERGIO SALOMONE, RAFFAELE SILVESTRI
“
103
Il management del trasferimento tecnologico nell’ambito delle Strategie Regionali
di Specializzazione Intelligente (S3)
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI, FRANCESCO RICOTTA, ALFIO CARIOLA
“
107
Competences and performance in metal waste supply chain: lessons from Italy
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI, FRANCESCO RICOTTA, PINO VECELLIO
“
113
I teatri lirici italiani: efficienza, efficacia e ruolo della tecnologia
CLEMENTINA BRUNO, FABRIZIO ERBETTA, GIOVANNI FRAQUELLI, ANNA MENOZZI
“
119
Niche marketing: an exploration from the perspective of tourism businesses
ALBERTO MATTIACCI, ATTILIO BRUNI, FRANCESCA MAGNO, FABIO CASSIA
“
127
From traditional customer segmentation to buyer personas: new strategies to create customer value
GIORGIA SEPE, AUDUR HERMANNSDOTTIR, BIRGIT HAGEN, ANTONELLA CARCAGNÌ
“
133
Resources slack for social entrepreneurship: the genesis of social and strategic growth options
BEATRICE ORLANDO, ANTONIO RENZI, GIANLUCA VAGNANI, CRAIG WATTERS
“
139
CSR and organizational culture: the competitive advantage of organizations
MARCELA LEPORE
“
153
CSR strategy in the Internet era
PAOLO POPOLI
“
159
Enhancing entrepreneurship for social change in the Euro-Mediterranean Region:
Evidence from the UNIDO e4SC program
MICHAEL SHERIFF, MORENO MUFFATTO
“
165
Ethics perceived in IMIs socially responsible investments (SRIs):
some findings and perspectives on UK and Italian Asset Management companies
MAURO SCIARELLI, MARIO TANI, CATELLO GIOVANNI LANDI, LORENZO TURRIZIANI
“
171
Knowledge technology improvement in manufacturing systems.
Case analysis of ‘open strategy business model’
GIAN LUCA GREGORI, MARIA ROSARIA MARCONE
“
181
Advertising in extreme vs traditional sports. Is there a difference?
MICHELA C. MASON, ANDREA MORETTI, DANIELE SCARPI, FRANCESCO RAGGIOTTO
“
187
Who tells the story? Defining visual storytelling as a new territory in digital innovation narrative
REBECCA PERA
“
191
Le dinamiche coopetitive nell’ambito delle imprese multibusiness: un caso studio esplicativo
ROSANNA AMATA, GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO, ANNA MINÀ, PASQUALE MASSIMO PICONE
“
197
Il contributo della comunicazione al successo della strategia coopetitiva
SONIA C. GIACCONE, GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO, ALESSANDRA MAZZEI
“
201
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
XVI
TRACK - LA PROSPETTIVA DEL CONSUMATORE AL VALORE
Exploring creative brands’ digital storytelling impact on successful “self-portraits”:
A case study in Italian furniture brands
YUHONG ZHOU, JIE ZHANG, ROMANA ANDÒ
PAG.
209
La segmentazione della marca del distributore “premium”: la valutazione dei consumatori
in relazione ai fattori di scelta
GUIDO CRISTINI, CRISTINA ZERBINI
“
217
Discovering mobile instant messaging in the business: technology acceptance model
and customer perceived value on satisfaction and CRM performance
VITTORIA MARINO, LETIZIA LO PRESTI
“
223
ViviSmart. Analisi dell’efficacia di una campagna educativa sul comportamento
di consumo alimentare e lo stile di vita dei bambini
COSTANZA NOSI, ANTONELLA D’AGOSTINO, CARLO ALBERTO PRATESI
“
227
Exploring the critical incident technique as a method for the analysis of online customer reviews
EDWARD BOON, LAURA BOUGARY, ALESSANDRO BIGI, MICHELLE BONERA
“
231
Narrare il patrimonio storico e culturale dell’impresa per creare valore.
Una proposta di definizione dell’heritage marketing-mix
MARIA ROSARIA NAPOLITANO, ANGELO RIVIEZZO, ANTONELLA GAROFANO
“
237
How to involve customers in the service creation process through the web.
An investigation on some telecommunication firms
VALENTINA DELLA CORTE, GIOVANNA DEL GAUDIO, FABIANA SEPE
“
241
The dark side of big data: a new framework to understand and manage risks
SINEAD RODEN, FENG LI, ALBERTO NUCCIARELLI
“
253
3D printing and the impact on global value chains re-configurations
STEFANO DENICOLAI, GIOVANNA MAGNANI, ANTONELLA ZUCCHELLA
“
257
Il lato “Humane” dell’entrepreneurship: un nuovo modello per una nuova prospettiva
ROBERTO PARENTE, ROSANGELA FEOLA, VALENTINA CUCINO, MASSIMILIANO VESCI,
CHIARA CRUDELE, ANTONIO BOTTI, VALTER RASSEGA
“
265
Network inter-impresa ed opportunità imprenditoriali: il ruolo dei legami deboli
e forti nella formazione e nello sfruttamento delle opportunità imprenditoriali
GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO, GABRIELLA LEVANTI, ARABELLA MOCCIARO LI DESTRI
“
271
L’orientamento strategico delle Università. Verso una accountability “integrata”
STEFANIA DI CARLO
“
277
TRACK - DECISION SUPPORT SYSTEMS, NETWORKS AND STRATEGY
TRACK - STRUMENTI MANAGERIALI PER LO SVILUPPO DI NETWORK E TERRITORI
Strategic vision, sustainability, and self-organization control in the Ferrari’s city of Maranello
ANGELO RIVA, LUCIANO PILOTTI
“
285
Il rapporto tra marche locali e territorio di riferimento. Risultati di un’indagine esplorativa
GABRIELE QUALIZZA
“
293
“Turnà a ’ndomà”: un’analisi sulla destinazione d’uso dell’Ex Padiglione Expo
del Kuwait da parte del comune di Brembilla (BG)
MAURO CAVALLONE
“
299
Managing ICT platforms in service ecosystems: a strategic approach to value co-creation
PIERPAOLO SINGER, CARLO ALESSANDRO SIRIANNI, ANTONELLA MONDA, MARA GRIMALDI
“
305
XVII
TRACK - CROWDFUNDING AS A NEW BUSINESS MODEL
Equity crowdfunding: investigating the role of entrepreneurial quality in affecting
the success of the campaigns
CIRO TROISE, ELENA CANDELO, MARIO SORRENTINO
PAG.
315
Linguistic style of crowdfunding pitches: How does displayed narcissism
influence crowdfunding success?
SIMONA LEONELLI, FRANCESCA DI PIETRO, FRANCESCA MASCIARELLI
“
321
Il crowdfunding e le variabili predittive di successo: il caso Kickstarter
FRANCESCO CAPPA, RICCARDO MAIOLINI, MARIA ISABELLA LEONE, MICHELE PINELLI,
LORENZO RABBIA
“
325
L’influenza del linguaggio in una campagna di finanziamento di crowdfunding
RICCARDO MAIOLINI, FRANCESCO CAPPA, MARIA ISABELLA LEONE, MICHELE PINELLI,
GIULIA BEDI
“
329
The private equity model of value creation through innovation financing
ANNA GERVASONI, ALESSIA MUZIO, ANDREA ODILLE BOSIO, MARIA TERESA DI GRADO
“
335
“
345
Le euristiche nei processi decisionali delle nuove imprese
GIANNI LORENZONI
“
351
Anticorruption, risk management and governance. Features of a triple relationship
IRENE BUZZI, CLAUDIO NASSISI
“
361
New models of football governance: fan-ownership in UK and Italy
DANIEL TORCHIA, ANNA CLAUDIA PELLICELLI
“
367
Academic spin-offs’ team composition: a hypothesis of non-linear relationship
between team heterogeneity and growth performance
GIULIA TAGLIAZUCCHI, GIANLUCA MARCHI, BERNARDO BALBONI
“
371
The parent university influence over academic spin-offs: the case of four universities in Milan
ALESSANDRO BARONCELLI, MATTEO LANDONI
“
375
Una reinterpretazione della corporate governance alla luce della tecnologia blockchain:
nuove prospettive
SALVATORE ESPOSITO DE FALCO, NICOLA CUCARI
“
379
Strategic management and industry 4.0. An exploratory study through a manufacturing case study
ANDREA CHIARINI, VALERIA BELVEDERE
“
387
Internal and external perspectives on user innovation: what was left behind?
KHATEREH GHASEMZADEH, GUIDO BORTOLUZZI
“
393
Know who e know how: il ruolo degli intermediari per lo sviluppo di nuovi prodotti
GIUSEPPE CAPPIELLO
“
399
OFF THE TRACK - CONTAMINAZIONI AL PENSIERO MANAGERIALE
Ri-ri-ri-nascimento: guardare al passato e farlo diventare “altro da sé”,
una strategia identitaria per le imprese italiane
DANIELA CAVALLO
TRACK - STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT & CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
TRACK - INNOVATION AND TECHNOLOGY MANAGEMENT
XVIII
TRACK - ENTREPRENEURSHIP
The role of the entrepreneurial university in fostering women entrepreneurship: a cross-cultural study
MARIA CARMEN LAUDANO, LAMBERTO ZOLLO, CRISTIANO CIAPPEI, VINCENZO ZAMPI
PAG.
405
Entrepreneurship across cultures. A BR approach
CHIARA CANNAVALE, IMAN ZOHOORIAN NADALI
“
413
Antecedents and consequences of work-family conflicts: Italian women entrepreneurs’ experiences
SARA POGGESI, MICHELA MARI, LUISA DE VITA
“
417
Entrepreneurial ecosystems: a qualitative comparative analysis (QCA) of their similarities
and differences around the world
MARIA CRISTINA CINICI, ANTONIO CRUPI, DANIELA BAGLIERI
“
423
The impact of market orientation on research-based spin off performance:
emerging issues from an exploratory study
NICOLETTA BURATTI, LUCA PERSICO, GIORGIA PROFUMO
“
427
Il ruolo coesivo della passione imprenditoriale: nuove prospettive teoriche e risultati emergenti
da un’analisi esplorativa
ANDREA RUNFOLA, SILVIA RANFAGNI
“
431
A study on the causal-effect relationship linking the financial crisis, international trade
and the failures rate in the Italian iron kitchenware industry
MARIA GARBELLI
“
437
Le determinanti del “made in Sicily”: prime evidenze di un’indagine empirica internazionale
SONIA C. GIACCONE, ROSARIO FARACI, GRAZIANA MICALIZZI
“
449
Fattori di competitività per le imprese distrettuali nell’economia globalizzata
FABIO MUSSO, BARBARA FRANCIONI
“
455
Il modello della Tripla Elica e le determinanti delle intenzioni imprenditoriali
nei giovani ricercatori: un confronto internazionale
ROBERTO PARENTE, ROSANGELA FEOLA, VALENTINA CUCINO, MASSIMILIANO VESCI,
CHIARA CRUDELE, ANTONIO BOTTI, VALTER RASSEGA
“
463
Digitalization of value creation and value appropriation: the travel & tourism industry case
CHIARA ACCIARINI, PAOLO BOCCARDELLI
“
471
Chinese tourism in Europe: the determinants of destination competitiveness
ANTONIO USAI, FRANCISCO MONTES, DANIELE PORCHEDDU, MANLIO DEL GIUDICE
“
477
Masters of branding in Italian museums: not only a matter of masterpieces
ANNAMARIA ESPOSITO, ANGELA BESANA
“
485
Intercultural sensitivity in tourism and hospitality - strategies for value creation
ANNA IRIMIÁS, MARIANGELA FRANCH
“
489
Dinamiche co-evolutive nel turismo: Il Caso “Convenzione delle Alpi”
LUNA LEONI, MATTEO CRISTOFARO, SILVIA BAIOCCO
“
495
Tutela e valorizzazione del patrimonio culturale. Il caso Forum Sempronii
EMANUELA CONTI, LAURA BARATIN, TONINO PENCARELLI
“
501
Responsabilità sociale d’impresa e performance aziendali nel settore turistico:
un’analisi longitudinale nell’industria dell’ospitalità
STEFANO FRANCO, MATTEO GIULIANO CAROLI, FRANCESCO CAPPA, GIACOMO DEL CHIAPPA
“
509
TRACK - INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS
TRACK - TOURISM AND CULTURE MANAGEMENT
XIX
TRACK - SUSTAINABILITY
Restaurant sustainability: an exploratory study on client’s food waste composition, motivation,
habits and doggy bag adoption
LUDOVICA PRINCIPATO, LUCA SECONDI
PAG.
517
Sustainable business models in services: multiple case study in yacht tourism
CINZIA BATTISTELLA, MARIA ROSITA CAGNINA, LUCIA CICERO, NADIA PREGHENELLA
“
521
L’economia circolare come opportunità di business? Un’indagine esplorativa sulle imprese italiane
ANGELO DI GREGORIO, MARCO FREY, FRANCESCA CERUTI, LAURA GAVINELLI
“
527
Stakeholder engagement nelle pratiche di sostenibilità aziendale.
Un’indagine empirica condotta attraverso i corporate website
FRANCESCA CONTE, AGOSTINO VOLLERO, ALFONSO SIANO, CLAUDIA COVUCCI
“
535
“
543
Effective service recovery after privacy failure
FRANCESCA NEGRI, MARCO IEVA
“
551
The strategic evolution of fashion flagship stores
EDOARDO SABBADIN, SIMONE AIOLFI
“
557
Retail channels evolution in the car industry: early findings from the Volvo car ‘Studio’ experience
LUCIA PIZZICHINI
“
563
Multichannel integration, physical distance and consumers’ online purchase intention
MICHELA MATARAZZO, RICCARDO RESCINITI, FEDERICA DE VANNA
“
569
Comparing business models in the grocery retailing industry: a conceptual framework proposal
LUIGI CANTONE, VINCENZO BASILE, PIERPAOLO TESTA
“
575
Consumers’ privacy concern, trust and the trap of willingness to share information
SANDRO CASTALDO, MONICA GROSSO
“
581
L’adozione della tecnologia blockchain nel management della supply chain:
nuove prospettive di ricerca
ROBERTO VONA, NADIA DI PAOLA
“
587
Evaluating brands in online communities: it’s not just a matter of engagement
SILVIA RANFAGNI, MONICA FARAONI, CLAUDIO BECAGLI
“
591
L’innovazione digitale attraverso il networking nel settore agroalimentare
RAFFAELE SILVESTRI, FRANCESCO PETRUCCI, SAVINO SANTOVITO
“
597
Performance d’impresa e nuovi strumenti per una gestione sistemica del rischio
SERGIO SALOMONE, SAVINO SANTOVITO, MARIO SCICUTELLA
“
601
Dalla catena alla costellazione del valore: il collective impact e la sfida della riduzione della povertà
GIACOMO BÜCHI, ANNA CUGNO, MONICA CUGNO, REBECCA CASTAGNOLI
“
609
Blockchain e criptovalute: strumento di democratizzazione imprenditoriale o bolla speculativa?
GIOVANNA DOSSENA, FRANCESCA MAGNO, PASQUALE MASSIMO PICONE
“
615
TRACK - SMALL AND FAMILY BUSINESS
A social enterprise in Gomorrah-land: a tale of radical cultural entrepreneurship
and social innovation management
LILIA GIUGNI, NEIL STOTT, ROBERTO VONA
TRACK - RETAILING AND SERVICE MANAGEMENT
TRACK - OPERATIONS E SUPPLY CHAIN MANAGEMENT
XX
TRACK - MARKETING & COMMUNICATION
Opportunità e limiti nell’utilizzo del sito web in chiave esperienziale nel contesto dei centri commerciali
MARCO CIOPPI, ILARIA CURINA, TONINO PENCARELLI, ELISABETTA SAVELLI
PAG.
621
Ad ogni navigante il suo porto: la segmentazione nei marina
CLARA BENEVOLO, RICCARDO SPINELLI
“
627
Misurare la creazione di valore attraverso i social network digitali
STEFANIA ROMENTI, GRAZIA MURTARELLI
“
633
Content marketing e brand journalism: un’analisi esplorativa sull’uso di contenuti editoriali
per sviluppare la corporate reputation
CARLO ALBERTO PRATESI, LUDOVICA PRINCIPATO, DIOMIRA CENNAMO, GERMANA RUSSO
“
637
I millennials italiani e le nuove in-store technologies. Un’indagine esplorativa nel fast fashion
MARCO VALERIO ROSSI, MARIA VERNUCCIO, ALBERTO PASTORE
“
641
I fattori di scelta dei servizi professionali: il punto di vista delle imprese e delle società di consulenza
TONINO PENCARELLI, LINDA GABBIANELLI
“
651
XXI
Merging strategic and behavioural perspectives on corporate
responses to climate change. An empirical analysis of institutional
and individual drivers of climate action in the Italian
manufacturing industry
NICCOLÒ MARIA TODARO* FRANCESCO TESTA TIBERIO DADDI FABIO IRALDO**
Objective. The objective of the study is to combine the strategic management perspective on corporate responses
to climate change with elements of the organizational behaviour perspective in order to formulate and test a
comprehensive model of corporate engagement with climate action.
According to the strategic management perspective, companies pursue “win-win” solutions by implementing
climate strategies that are aligned with their overall business strategies, in the attempt to maximize both environmental
and business goals simultaneously (Hart and Ahuja, 1996; Kolk and Pinkse, 2005), According to corporate
sustainability research, the strategic management perspective ascribes corporate climate initiatives to proactive
environmental strategies that couple external normative pressures with internally-driven organizational improvements
achieved by means of enhanced efficiency and managerial capabilities, better reputation or reduced risk exposure
(Sharma and Vredenburg, 1998; Aragon-Correa and Sharma, 2003),
On the other hand, the organizational behaviour perspective investigates variability in companies’ climate
strategies, by exploring the role of individual-level behavioural and cognitive determinants of action (Bazerman, 2006;
Hoffman, 2010), This line of studies acknowledges the importance of intra-organizational factors in increasing the
variability of companies’ environmental strategies within similar normative and competitive settings (Sharma, 2000;
Cordano and Frieze, 2000), This line of corporate sustainability research assimilates insights from organizational
psychology and behavioural research by focusing on the micro-level foundations of pro-environmental behaviour
(Gond et al., 2017; Strauss et al., 2017),
To the best of our knowledge, no previous studies have attempted to combine the strategic management
perspective on climate action with features of behavioural research in the organizational context (Daddi et al., 2018),
Therefore, this study analyses the combined interactions between two sets of variables on the adoption of corporate
climate change initiatives: institutional pressures and individual factors.
The present study differentiates institutional pressures between externally-driven and internally-driven pressures.
On the one hand, externally-driven pressures account for regulatory pressures, competitive pressures and exposure to
climate risks. On the other hand, internally-driven pressures constitute pressures to achieve organizational benefits in
terms of improved environmental risk management, compliance to international management standards and enhanced
reputation (Levy and Kolk, 2002; Kolk and Pinkse, 2008),
As regards individual factors, managers’ awareness of climate change and their perceived control over
companies’ behaviour are considered. According to recent research, awareness of environmental issues is indeed one
important factor to motivate pro-environmental behaviour (Gadenne et al., 2009; Pinkse and Gasbarro, 2016),
Similarly, managers’ perceived authority to gain organizational support and mobilize resources for initiating proenvironmental initiatives is an essential antecedent of the adoption of environmental practices (Cordano and Frieze,
2000; Thompson and Hansen, 2012), This latter individual factor is operationalized according to the perceived
behavioural control (PBC) variable pertaining to Ajzen’s theory of planned behaviour (TPB) (Ajzen, 1985),
A further objective of the study is contributing to the understanding of corporate responses to climate change in
the manufacturing industry. This research distinguishes corporate responses to climate change based on their different
strategic orientation (Kolk and Pinkse, 2004), On one hand, internally-oriented measures are implemented within the
organizational boundaries. Such measures may envision reducing greenhouse gases (GHG) emissions from operations,
or investments in reducing infrastructures’ exposure to the potential extreme weather events (Hart and Ahuja, 1996;
Linneluecke and Griffiths, 2010), On the other hand, some companies may extend the scope of their climate strategies
*
**
PhD Student in Change & Complexity Management - Scuola Superiore Sant’Anna.
e-mail: niccolomaria.todaro@santannapisa.it
Associate Professor of Sustainability Management - Scuola Superiore Sant’Anna.
e-mail: francesco.testa@santannapisa.it
Researcher of Sustainability Management - Scuola Superiore Sant’Anna.
e-mail: tiberio.daddi@sssup.it
Full Professor of Sustainability Management - Scuola Superiore Sant’Anna
e-mail: f.iraldo@sssup.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
3
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.01
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
to involve actors along the supply-chain (Jira and Toffel, 2013), Supply-chain measures include, for instance,
cooperating with clients to reduce GHG emissions at the end of the supply chain or monitoring the climate vulnerability
of suppliers to avoid disruptions in procurement activities (Lee, 2012),
Based on these considerations, the study aims at empirically testing a comprehensive set of hypothesis, displayed
in the following graph.
Fig. 1: Hypothesis of the study
Source: Merging strategic and behavioural perspectives on corporate responses to climate change. An empirical analysis of
institutional and individual drivers of climate action in the Italian manufacturing industry. Extended Abstract. Todaro et
al., 2018
Methodology. Data were collected between July and September 2016, by means of an original questionnaire
survey developed by the authors of the present study. The survey was submitted online to a sample of 2,950 companies
operating in the Italian manufacturing industries extracted from the Italian Chamber of Commerce database. Selected
companies represents more than 80% of Italian value of production.
An introductory letter asked recipients to forward the survey to a member of the top management appointed to
strategy planning, environmental planning or climate change initiatives. As of October 2016, 620 responses were
collected, representing a 21% response rate. In particular, 487 completed and usable surveys were returned. Hence the
final response rate is 16,5%.
Most of the respondents belong to medium or large-sized firms. In terms of employees, 50% of the companies in
the sample employs 50 to 250 employees, while 44% employs more than 250 employees. Small firms and micro-firms
represent the 6% of the final sample. The sample encompasses a wide array of diverse manufacturing sectors, ranging
from food manufacturing, to pharmaceutical and metallurgical sectors.
Respondents in the final sample hold managerial positions in the environmental or safety management field. Most
respondents identified themselves as Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) managers. Other positions include CEOs,
energy management, risk management and operations managers. More than 40% of the respondents has more than 16
years of working experience in their current company, while 37% reports a 6 to 15 years working experience in their
current position. Therefore, personal data suggest that respondents are well informed about their companies’ decisionmaking and strategy planning processes on environmental issues.
Data have been analysed by means of a factor analysis. All constructs provide high scale reliability coefficients. In
particular, Cronbach’s coefficient alphas are higher than 0.7 for all constructs considered in the model (Cortina,
1993), Finally, by means of a structural equation model (SEM), we analysed the relations between latent variables, in
order to test the hypothesis (Hair et al., 2010),
Findings. The preliminary findings provided by the SEM are displayed in the following graph. Correlation
coefficients are provided for each significant relationship.
4
MERGING STRATEGIC AND BEHAVIOURAL PERSPECTIVES ON CORPORATE RESPONSES TO CLIMATE CHANGE
Fig. 2: Results of the structural equation model
Source: Merging strategic and behavioural perspectives on corporate responses to climate change. An empirical analysis of
institutional and individual drivers of climate action in the Italian manufacturing industry. Extended Abstract. Todaro et
al., 2018
Fit statistics provide support for the goodness of the model. In particular, a comparative fit index (CFI) higher
than 0.9, a root mean squared error of approximation (RMSEA) about 0.06, and standardized root mean squared
residuals (SRMR) about 0.07 indicate good model fit (Medsker et al., 1994; Rigdon, 1996),
The preliminary results of the SEM indicate a positive and significant relationship both between the externallydriven pressures (i.e. coercive regulation, competitive pressures) and decision-makers’ awareness of climate change
and PBC, supporting Hypothesis 1.a and 1.b. The relation between the exposure to climate risk and decision makers’
awareness of climate change is positive and significant, while the relation between risk exposure and decision makers’
PBC is not significant. Therefore, according to the results, Hypothesis 2.a is supported, while Hypothesis 2.b is not. At
the organizational level of analysis, the relation between internally-driven pressures (i.e. pressures to improve
reputation, environmental risk management and conform to international standards) and internally-oriented climate
action is positive and significant, as well as the relation between internally-driven pressures and supply-chain
measures. Therefore, Hypothesis 3.a and 3.b are supported. At the individual-level of analysis, the relations between
decision makers’ PBC and climate action is positive and significant, for both internally-oriented climate action and
supply-chain climate action. Accordingly, Hypothesis 4.a and 4.b are supported. On the other hand, the relations
between decision makers’ awareness of climate change and climate action is not significant. Therefore, Hypothesis 5.a
and 5.b are not supported.
Research limits. The present research is affected by the typical limitations of behavioural research in the
organizational context. Based on an extensive literature review aimed at identifying the most significant cognitive
factors that underpin executives’ decision-making processes, the study have taken into considerations a small set of
individual-level variables (i.e. PBC and awareness) to account for decision makers’ cognitive processes under
uncertainty. However, according to previous contributions to behavioural research, an extensive array of variables may
prove useful for explaining decision making processes in the organizational context, such as attitudes towards the
behaviour, risk propensity, knowledge about the behaviour, values and beliefs (Sutton, 1998), Decision makers’
cognitive dynamics indeed constitute multi-faceted and highly complex processes hardly grasped by a limited set of
variables. However, this limitation constitutes also a valuable opportunity for future research.
Furthermore, some methodological limitations associated with the use of survey instruments may limit the
reliability of the preliminary results (Tourangeau and Yan, 2007), In particular, we collected data from a single source
within each organization at only one time. This approach may expose the results to risk of common method variance.
However, remedies were adopted to limit these potential biases while constructing the questionnaire. Such as: avoiding
vague concepts; avoiding complicated syntax and unfamiliar terms to minimize item ambiguity; keeping questions
simple, specific, and concise; avoiding the use of bipolar numerical scale values and providing verbal labels for the
midpoints of scales and guaranteeing respondent anonymity (King and Bruner, 2000),
5
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
Lastly, the study’s exclusive focus on the Italian manufacturing industry limit the generalizability of the results.
Practical implications. The results of the study provides several implications for practitioners and policy makers
at different levels of analysis. The combination of the strategic management and behavioural perspectives sheds light on
how the interaction between institutional, organizational and individual-level factors may drive a proactive corporate
approach to climate issues (Bansal and Roth, 2000),
First, at institutional level, the results confirm the relevant role of externally-driven institutional pressures, in the
form of direct “command and control” regulation and market pressures, as drivers of environmental awareness in the
organizational context (Hypothesis 1.a) (Testa et al., 2012), In the aftermath of the Paris Agreement, the expectation of
more stringent regulations on GHG emissions play indeed a major role in enhancing climate change awareness within
the industry sector. Similarly, the relation between exposure to climate risk and awareness (Hypothesis 2.a) highlights
the importance of implementing adequate measures for monitoring and assessing climate-related risks at the
organizational level. Being very complex systems, business enterprises are indeed exposed to a broad spectrum of
climate risks, ranging from physical harms of machineries and infrastructures, to less noticeable harms like changes in
the demand of products and services or reputational damages (Winn et al., 2011),
Second, the relation between externally-driven pressures and PBC (Hypothesis 1.b) suggests that direct regulation
and competitive market pressures affect the perceived empowerment of decision makers towards climate action.
Perceived control over the implementation of climate initiatives depends upon the arrangement of adequate resources
and the appointment of clear responsibilities within the organization (Thompson and Hansen, 2012), Of course, climate
action is not mentioned in the job description of any specific managerial figure. However, the lack of appropriate
governance and formal responsibilities may constitute a barrier to the effective adoption of climate initiatives, both
internally-oriented and at supply-chain level (Hypothesis 4.a, 4.b), Taken together, the above mentioned results suggest
that the interaction between direct regulation, market pressures and climate risk exposure may provide considerable
incentives for investments in climate strategies, for instance, in terms of anticipating future regulation on one side,
maintaining competitive advantage and avoiding climate risk (Lash and Wellington, 2007; Orsato et al., 2015),
At the same time, internally-driven pressures emerge to be effective drivers of climate action (Hypothesis 3.a, 3.b),
Besides mitigating GHG emissions, improving the resource efficiency of production activities may lead to considerable
cost reductions, governmental incentives or regulatory reliefs, as well as enhanced operations management capabilities
(Hart & Ahuja, 1996), Similarly, the renovation of plants, machineries or infrastructures may be associated, besides
carbon reduction, to a cost-cutting strategy (Gasbarro et al., 2014), Less obvious are the internal benefits achievable by
means of supply-chain measures, which may require considerable efforts in coordinating diverse stakeholders. These
results point at the economic viability of climate investments as a major driver of climate action in the Italian
manufacturing sector, therefore underlining the need of introducing rewarding mechanisms for climate-resilient
investments.
Lastly, the study demonstrates that decision makers’ awareness of climate issues does not significantly relate with
corporate climate action (Hypothesis 5.a, 5.b), As previously mentioned, given the limited set of individual-level
variables considered in the present study, this result may highlight that other behavioural factors may affect decision
makers’ cognitive process under uncertainty besides awareness of climate issue. At this stage, however, this result
further corroborates previous implication concerning the relevance of internal benefits and efficient governance in
motivating climate initiatives.
Originality of the study. The originality of the study consists in focusing on climate issue as a valuable research
field for unifying different theoretical perspectives on corporate pro-environmental stances and advancing a more
comprehensive understanding of the phenomenon. Accordingly, the present study draws from strategic management
theory and organizational behaviour theory to formulate and test a comprehensive model of corporate responses to
climate change that takes into consideration the contextual normative drivers, as well as the organizational and
individual factors that may determine climate action.
While the strategic management perspective is useful to shed light on the range of feasible and appropriate
organizational actions, the organizational behaviour perspective can further explain variability in corporate behaviour
based on individual-level factors. On the one hand, the present study adopts neo-institutional theory to account for the
diverse institutional and normative pressures underlying the adoption of climate initiatives (DiMaggio and Powell,
1983), On the other hand, it relies on behavioural research to investigate how members of the organization interpret
and enact contextual pressures and stimuli within the organizational context. At this regard, Ajzen’s theory of planned
behaviour (TPB) is adopted, being a reliable theoretical foundation for research linking individuals’ cognitive
predispositions to behaviour (Conner and Armitage, 1998),
Keywords: climate change; manufacturing industry; institutional theory; theory of planned behaviour
References
AJZEN I. (1985), “From intentions to actions: A theory of planned behaviour”, In Kuhl J., Beckmann J. (Eds.), Action-control: From
cognition to behavior (pp. 1 l-39), Springer, Heidelberg.
6
MERGING STRATEGIC AND BEHAVIOURAL PERSPECTIVES ON CORPORATE RESPONSES TO CLIMATE CHANGE
ARAGÓN-CORREA J.A., SHARMA S. (2003), “A contingent resource-based view of proactive corporate environmental strategy”,
Academy of Management Review, vol. 28, n. 1, pp. 71-88.
BANSAL P., ROTH K. (2000), “Why companies go green: A model of ecological responsiveness”, Academy of Management
Journal, vol. 43, n. 4, pp. 717-736.
BAZERMAN M.H. (2006), “Climate change as a predictable surprise”, Climatic Change, vol. 77, n. 1-2, pp. 179-193.
CONNER M., ARMITAGE C.J. (1998), “Extending the theory of planned behavior: A review and avenues for further research”,
Journal of Applied Social Psychology, vol. 28, n. 15, pp. 1429-1464.
CORDANO M., FRIEZE I.H. (2000), “Pollution reduction preferences of US environmental managers: Applying Ajzen’s theory of
planned behavior”, Academy of Management journal, vol. 43, n. 4, pp. 627-641.
CORTINA J.M. (1993), “What is coefficient alpha? An examination of theory and applications”, Journal of Applied Psychology, vol.
78, n. 1, pp. 98.
DADDI T., TODARO N.M., DE GIACOMO M.R., FREY M. (2018), “A systematic review of the use of organization and
management theories in climate change studies”, Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 27, n. 4, pp. 456 - 474
DIMAGGIO P., POWELL W.W. (1983), “The iron cage revisited: Collective rationality and institutional isomorphism in
organizational fields”, American Sociological Review, vol. 48, n. 2, pp. 147-160.
GADENNE D.L., KENNEDY J., MCKEIVER C. (2009), “An empirical study of environmental awareness and practices in SMEs”,
Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 84, n. 1, pp. 45-63.
GASBARRO F., RIZZI F., FREY M. (2016), “Adaptation measures of energy and utility companies to cope with water scarcity
induced by climate change”, Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 25, n. 1, pp. 54-72.
GOND J.P., EL AKREMI A., SWAEN V., BABU N. (2017), “The psychological microfoundations of corporate social
responsibility: A person-centric systematic review”, Journal of Organizational Behavior, vol. 38, n. 2, pp. 225-246.
HAIR J.F., BLACK W.C., BABIN J.B., ANDERSON R.E. (2010), Multivariate Data Analysis, seventh ed. Prentic Hall, Upper
saddle River, NJ.
HART S.L., AHUJA G. (1996), “Does it pay to be green? An empirical examination of the relationship between emission reduction
and firm performance”, Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 5, n. 1, pp. 30-37.
HOFFMAN A.J. (2010), Climate change as a cultural and behavioral issue: Addressing barriers and implementing solutions
Organizational Dynamics, vol. 39, n. 4, p.295-305.
JIRA C., TOFFEL M.W. (2013), “Engaging supply chains in climate change”, Manufacturing & Service Operations Management,
vol. 15, n. 4, pp. 559-577.
KING M.F., BRUNER G.C. (2000), “Social desirability bias: A neglected aspect of validity testing”, Psychology and Marketing, vol.
17, n. 2, pp. 79-103.
KOLK A., PINKSE J. (2004), “Market strategies for climate change”, European Management Journal, vol. 22, n. 3, pp. 304-314.
KOLK A., PINSKE J. (2005), “Business response to climate change: Identifying emergent strategies”, California Management
Review, vol. 47, n. 3, pp. 6-20
KOLK A., LEVY D., PINKSE J. (2008), “Corporate responses in an emerging climate regime: The institutionalization and
commensuration of carbon disclosure”, European Accounting Review, vol. 17, n. 4, pp. 719-745.
LASH J., WELLINGTON F. (2007), Competitive advantage on a warming planet, Harvard Business Review, vol. 85, n 3, pp. 94105.
LEE S.Y. (2012), “Corporate carbon strategies in responding to climate change”, Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 21, n.
1, pp. 33-48.
LEVY D.L., KOLK A. (2002), “Strategic responses to global climate change: Conflicting pressures on multinationals in the oil
industry”, Business and Politics, vol. 4, n. 3, pp. 275-300.
LINNENLUECKE M.K., GRIFFITHS A. (2010), “Corporate sustainability and organizational culture”, Journal of world business,
vol. 45, n. 4, pp. 357-366
MEDSKER G.J., WILLIAMS L.J., HOLAHAN P.J., (1994). “A review of current practices for evaluating causal models in
organizational behavior and human resource management research”, Journal of Management, vol. 20, n. 2, pp. 439-464
ORSATO R.J., DE CAMPOS J.G.F., BARAKAT S.R., NICOLLETTI M., MONZONI M. (2015), “Why join a carbon club? A study
of the banks participating in the Brazilian “Business for Climate Platform”, Journal of Cleaner Production, vol. 96, n. 38, pp.
387-396.
PINKSE J., GASBARRO F. (2016), “Managing physical impacts of climate change: An attentional perspective on corporate
adaptation”, Business & Society, 0007650316648688.
RIGDON E.E., (1996), “CFI Versus RMSEA: A comparison of two fit indexes for structural equation modeling”, Structural
Equation Modeling, vol. 3, n. 4, pp. 369-379.
SHARMA S. (2000), “Managerial interpretations and organizational context as predictors of corporate choice of environmental
strategy”, Academy of Management Journal, vol. 43, n. 4, pp. 681-697.
SHARMA S., VREDENBURG H. (1998), “Proactive corporate environmental strategy and the development of competitively
valuable organizational capabilities”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 19, pp. 729-753.
STRAUSS K., LEPOUTRE J., WOOD G. (2017), “Fifty shades of green: How microfoundations of sustainability dynamic
capabilities vary across organizational contexts”, Journal of Organizational Behavior, vol. 38, n. 9, pp. 1338-1355.
SUTTON S. (1998), “Predicting and explaining intentions and behavior: How well are we doing?”, Journal of Applied Social
Psychology, vol. 28, n. 15, pp. 1317-1338.
TESTA F., STYLES D., IRALDO F. (2012), “Case study evidence that direct regulation remains the main driver of industrial
pollution avoidance and may benefit operational efficiency”, Journal of Cleaner Production, vol. 21, n. 1, pp. 1-10.
THOMPSON D.W., HANSEN E.N. (2012), “Institutional pressures and an evolving forest carbon market”, Business Strategy and
the Environment, vol. 21, n. 6, pp. 351-369.
TOURANGEAU R., YAN T. (2007), “Sensitive questions in surveys”, Psychological Bulletin, vol. 133, n. 5, pp. 859.
WINN M., KIRCHGEORG M., GRIFFITHS A., LINNENLUECKE M.K., GÜNTHER E. (2011), “Impacts from climate change on
organizations: a conceptual foundation”, Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 20, n. 3, pp. 157-173.
7
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
8
Technology-driven store format:
from impact on practice to impact on theory
VIRGINIA VANNUCCI* GAETANO AIELLO
Objectives. Retailing settings have changed dramatically during the years, especially with the advent of
technologies enhancing services and digital touchpoints in store. The point of sale witnesses to constant changes
prompted by continuous progress in technologies that effectively modified retail landscapes, providing innovative,
entertaining and interactive tools to search, compare, and purchase products (Roggeveen et al., 2016; Pantano and
Dennis, 2017). This trend towards more technological-based retail settings impacts especially on retail format, because
of the reshaping of traditional store according to the implementation of new technologies in store. An example of the
change in retail format is the new concept of store operated by Argos in the United Kingdom. Argos is a British
catalogue retailer that operates in the United Kingdom and in Ireland. The company trades both through physical
stores and online, offering more than 60.000 products in more than 800 stores and with 1 billion of online visitors for
year. It sells consumer goods, and since 2016 when became part of the grocery retailer Sainsbury’s, is specialized on
home furniture with low prices. In the last years Argos introduced a new concept store, where are placed tablets instead
of catalogues near the fast track service to collect the orders in a very few time. The use of tablet allows to better
visualizing a large number of product and save the space of the point of sale to be closer to the city center.
Furthermore, the position of tablets near the fast track reduces the queue and speeds up the shopping experience. This
example of technology-driven store format innovation explains how the implementation of technologies could impact on
the store format. It is also an example of digitalization of the store, one of the most significant on-going transformations
in the retail sector.
Indeed, retailers are continuously innovating in order to attract more consumers, serve them better, overcome the
competition, and take advantage from the implementation of digital technologies (Miotto and Parente, 2015). However,
the innovation literature in retailing is relatively new and fragmented. Recent researches highlights various innovation
practices in the sector by exploring institutional change, characteristics of retail innovation, innovation output within
various functional areas of a retail business, new retail technologies or channels to market. More focused research
addresses innovation in specific functional areas such as retail planning, format and product development, shopper
marketing, packaging, pricing, promotion or logistics (Shankar et al., 2011; Hristov and Reynolds, 2015). In the last
years, the literature on retail innovation is shifted to the digitalization of retailing and many studies are discussing
about the type of innovation (incremental vs radical) that the digitalization has caused on retail industry (Hristov and
Reynolds, 2015; Hagberg et al., 2016).
The digitalization has a long history in retailing, with the emergence of Internet the implication for retailing are
increased. These implications include changing business opportunities, business models, forms of commerce,
purchasing process, and the transformation of local shops into global markets (Hagberg et al., 2016). Initially, the
digitalization has been addressed in terms of e-commerce, considering the online channel separates from the offline
one. However, the impact of the online channel is greater than previously hypothesized, it includes the transformation
of physical products into digital services, consumer recommendations in social media, and the incorporation of digital
devices into the purchasing process (Pauwels et al., 2011). Furthermore, it is increased the use of mobile devices for
the shopping experience, changing the consumer practices and behaviors. Mobile devices provide additional features,
such as barcode scanning, location-based services, and near field communication (Ström et al., 2014). These mobile
devices are converting the internet into an element in physical stores, facilitating the emergence of new retail formats,
such as pop-up stores and click-and-drive purchasing, in addition to enabling information retrieval, testing, ordering,
payment, and various services in brick-and-mortar stores (Hagberg et al., 2016). The digitalization of retailing, with
the advent of new technologies that support the shopping experience, impacts especially on the store format. As
extensively discussed in literature, the retail format is “the physical embodiment of a retail business model” (Reynolds
et al. 2007; p.4) and refers to “the structure for sequencing and organizing the selected retailing activities into
coherent processes that fulfill the customer experience” (Sorescu et al., 2011; p. S5). More specifically, the format
represents a combination of each element of the retail mix, such as product, price, presentation, promotion, personnel,
service and location (Levy and Weitz, 2008; Sorescu et al., 2011). This is the reason why customers choose different
*
PhD Student - University of Florence
e-mail: virginia.vannucci@unifi.it
Full Professor of Management - University of Florence
e-mail: gaetano.aiello@unifi.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
9
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.02
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
formats accordingly to their needs. In the past years, the choice of store formats has expanded dramatically driven
mainly by changes in the design of the customer interface and by channel coordination decisions. Customer interface
design concerns the way in which a retailer structures the exchange process with its customers. Interface decisions
require not only the positioning of the store in terms of pricing, assortment, and overall design, but also require
selecting the structure of the interface itself (e.g. kiosks, store-within-a-store, catalogs, e-commerce, or mobile
commerce). With regards to channel coordination, the multiplicity of touchpoints now available to reach the same
customer, require retailers to coordinate online and offline channels using a multichannel strategy (Miotto and
Parente, 2015). To this effect, literature reports the affirmation of modern retailing, which is characterized by more
competitive formats, broader assortment, modern facilities, and implementation of digital technologies (Aithal, 2012).
Retail format development is an important part of retail research because format represents a key touchpoint with
customers and the core of retail strategy. The literature on store format is rich, yet fragmented in its empirical
delimitations as well as methodological and conceptual framework. It would seems as though the research on store
format decisions and the effects of such decisions has focused especially on the context of grocery retailing, providing
an opportunity to extend the empirical scope to other retail sectors, such as durable goods or general merchandize
(Hultman et al., 2017). Indeed, is clear in the retailing field the importance of the evolution of retail formats,
accordingly to the many frameworks proposed to understanding this phenomenon.
The Wheel of Retailing proposed by McNair (1958), suggests a process that starts with new retailers that enter the
market as, low margin, low price, low status institutions. The cycle begins with retailers attracting customers by
offering low price and low service. During the time the format becomes more attractive, improving its services and
products in order to boost prices once it has become established. Over a period of time these retailers want to expand
their markets and begin to stock more merchandise, provide more services, and open more convenient locations. This
trading up process increases the retailer’s costs and prices, creating opportunities for new low price retailers to enter
the market.
The environmental theory (Dreesmann, 1968; Forester, 1995) adapted from Darwin’s theory of natural selection
for the retail context, affirms that retail evolution responds to the changes in environment and consumer needs.
The Retail Accordion, proposed by Hollander (1981) considers product assortment as the main driver for format
innovation, so the retail evolution follows a continuous movement of expansion and contraction of product assortment.
Retail formats go from outlets with wide assortments to specialized narrow line store merchants and then back again to
the more general wide assortment institution. This theory establishes two phases: the expansion phase, when the
assortment grows in width but declines in depth, and the contraction phase, when the opposite takes place. Based on
Conflict Theory (Bliss, 1967), the dialectic process (Gist, 1968; Maronick and Walker, 1974) offers another explanation
for the evolution of retail institutions, as it implies that the new format is the synthesis of two conflicting and opposite
forces. Gist (1968) proposed that an existing retail institution is challenged by its competitor because it has competitive
advantages over the existing retail institution. As time passes, the first retail institution imitates the characteristics of
competitor to upgrade its existing characteristics and finally creates a new retail institution. So, the theory proposes
that retailers mutually adapt, borrowing characteristics from competitors. The dialectic process suggests that opposite
format retailers tend to adapt to each other: the blend of the two previous formats generates a new format.
The Big Middle model proposed by Levy et al. (2005), aims to describe and explain how the retailing and
institutions evolved into the big main stream retailers. The concept of the Big Middle is defined as the marketspace “in
which the largest retailers compete in the long run, because there is where the largest number of potential customers
reside” (Levy et al, 2005; p.85). According to the Big Middle model, retail institutions tend to originate as either
innovative or low-price formats, and the successful ones’ transit to the Big Middle, a hybrid of the two that appeals to a
much larger customer base and providers great value for a broader array of merchandise (Levy et al. 2005). In
contrast, “in trouble” retailers are unable to develop a competitive advantage or deliver high levels of relative value.
The competitors of the big middle retailers are either another big middle player, or a significant number of specialized
or low-price retailer competing for the middle consumer market. Based on the Big Middle hypotheses, retail institutions
and formats can be classified in four formats: innovative or specialized, low price, Big Middle, and in trouble (retailers
unable to offer a competitive advantage compared to their competitors).
Tab. 1: Main theoretical contribution on store format evolution
Reference
McNair (1958)
Dreesmann (1968); Forester (1995)
Hollander (1981)
Gist (1968); Maronik and Walker (1974)
Levy et al. (2005)
Theory
The Wheel of Retailing
The Environmental Theory
The Retail Accordion
The Dialectic Process
The Big Middle
Source: Authors’ elaboration
Despite the many theories that support and explain the evolution of retailing, none is supporting the evolution of
retailing due to the advent of digital technologies in store that reshape the store format and impact in consumer
experience. This research aims to overlap this gap in the literature starting from the direct observation of what
happened to the format of stores that has implemented digital technologies.
10
TECHNOLOGY-DRIVEN STORE FORMAT: FROM IMPACT ON PRACTICE TO IMPACT ON THEORY
Particularly, the purpose is to deeply analyze: How change the sales area with the introduction of digital
technologies? How change the disposition of the spaces in the store after the introduction of digital technology? If there
are effectively changes on the store format due to the introduction of digital technologies in store, how they impact also
on the theories of retailing evolution?
Methodology. The current study is exploratory in nature; as it aims to investigate how change the retail format
with the implementation of digital technologies in store. Thus, the research employs a qualitative approach based on a
case study to achieve a comprehensive understanding of the technology-driven store format. As stated by Yin (2003)
and Cao (2014) a case study method is useful to gain in-depth understanding of the changes in a retail context,
particularly after the adoption of new technologies in a physical point of sale. Data will be collected in London, UK as
is one of the most innovative cities in Europe at retail level. Particularly, authors will collect evidences from three
different stores of the same fashion retailer: the first one that is traditional, without digital technologies in the store; the
second one that was born as a traditional store but in which have been inserted digital technologies during the last
year; and, finally, the third one characterized only by the presence of digital technologies.
Findings. We expect to show how the store format changes according to the introduction of digital technologies.
Results should give evidence of the differences in terms of layout and display of the store caused by the implementation
of digital technologies. This should be the starting point to hypothesize a new concept of store format where the digital
technologies are predominant. Furthermore, this study could be useful to further investigate if the digital technologies
are a radical or incremental innovation for retail stores and how they impact on the broader phenomenon of
onmichannel retailing.
Research limits. As an exploratory research, this study should be replicated considering different case studies.
Future research should analyze different sectors, as grocery and health and beauty sectors to understand if the
evolution of the store is similar to the one that is happening in the fashion industry. Furthermore, it could be useful
present some interviews with store managers to validate the findings emerged from this study.
Practical implication. This article could be useful to managers to understand how is changing the store format,
supporting their decision on technological-driven store format implementation with practical evidences. Furthermore,
this study could be a starting point to hypothesize a new framework that can show the evolution of store format with the
implementation of new technologies in store, as a consequence of the retail digitalization.
Originality of the study. This research aims to analyze the effective impact of digital technologies on store format
to understand how the store evolves with this new technological advent. Particularly, it analyzes the evolution of store
format in the fashion retail sector, the one that is less investigated in literature, accordingly to Hultman et al. (2017).
Furthermore, with the analysis of multiple case study that explain what is going on the retail practices, this study could
be a starting point to a definition of a new theory that explain the retail format evolution caused by the implementation
of digital technologies.
Key words: Retailing; retail format innovation; technology-driven store format; digital technology; retailing theories
References
AITHAL R.K. (2012), “Marketing channel length in rural India: Influence of the external environment and rural retailer buyer
behavior”, International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, vol. 40, n. 3, pp. 200-217.
BLISS P. (1967), “Schumpeter, the big disturbance and retailing”, in Gist R.R. (Ed.), Management Perspectives in Retailing, John
Wiley, New York, NY.
CAO L. (2014), “Business model transformation in moving to a cross-channel retail strategy: A case study”, International Journal of
Electronic Commerce, vol. 18, n. 4, pp. 69-96.
DREESMANN A.C.R. (1968), “Patterns of evolution in retailing”, Journal of Retailing, vol. 44, n. 1, pp. 64-81.
FORESTER M. (1995), “Darwinian theory of retailing”, Chain Store Age, August, p. 8.
GIST R.R. (1968), Retailing: Concepts and decisions, Wiley COMPLETARE CON CITTA’.
HAGBERG, J., SUNDSTROM, M., & EGELS-ZANDÉN, N. (2016), The digitalization of retailing: an exploratory framework.
International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, vol. 44, n. 7, pp. 694-712.
HRISTOV L., REYNOLDS J. (2015), “Perceptions and practices of innovation in retailing: Challenges of definition and
measurement”, International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 126-147.
HOLLANDER S.C. (1981), “Retailing theory: some criticism and some admiration”, Theory in retailing: Traditional and
nontraditional sources, Chicago, IL.
HULTMAN J., JOHANSSON U., WISPELER A., WOLF L. (2017), “Exploring store format development and its influence on store
image and store clientele-the case of IKEA’s development of an inner-city store format”, The International Review of Retail,
Distribution and Consumer Research, vol. 27, n. 3, pp. 227-240.
LEVY M, GREWAL D., PETERSON R., CONNOLLY B. (2005), “The concept of the ‘big middle’”, Journal of Retailing, vol. 81,
n. 2, pp. 83-88.
11
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
LEVY M., WEITZ B. (2008), Retailing Management, 7th edition McGraw-Hill/Irwin.
MARONICK T.J., WALKER B.J. (1975), “The dialectic evolution of retailing”, in Barnett Greenberg (Ed.), Proceedings of the
Southern Marketing Association, Georgia State University, Atlanta, GA.
MCNAIR P.M. (1958), “Significant trends and developments in the post war periods”, in Smith, A.B. (Ed.), Competitive Distribution
in a Free High Level Economy and its Implications for the University, University of Pittsburg Press, Pittsburg, CA.
MIOTTO A.P., PARENTE J.G. (2015), “Retail evolution model in emerging markets: apparel store formats in Brazil”, International
Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, vol. 43, n. 3, pp. 242-260.
PANTANO E., DENNIS C. (2017), “Exploring the origin of retail stores in Europe: Evidence from Southern Italy from the 6th
century BCE to the 3rd century BCE”, Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services, vol. 39, pp. 243-249.
PAUWELS K., LEEFLANG P.S., TEERLING M.L., HUIZINGH K.E. (2011), “Does online information drive offline revenues?:
Only for specific products and consumer segments!”, Journal of Retailing, vol. 87, n. 1, pp. 1-17.
REYNOLDS J., HOWARD E., CUTHBERTSON C., HRISTOV L. (2007), “Perspectives on retail format innovation: relating theory
and practice”, International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, vol. 35, n. 8, pp. 647-660.
ROGGEVEEN A.L., NORDFÄLT J., GREWAL D. (2016), “Do digital displays enhance sales? Role of retail format and message
content”, Journal of Retailing, vol. 92, n. 1, pp. 122-131.
SHANKAR V., INMAN J.J., MANTRALA M., KELLEY E., RIZLEY R. (2011), “Innovations in shopper marketing: current
insights and future research issues”, Journal of Retailing, vol. 87, n. 1, pp. S29-S42.
SORESCU A., FRAMBACH R.T., SINGH J., RANGASWAMY A., BRIDGES C. (2011), “Innovations in retail business models”,
Journal of Retailing, vol. 87, n. 1, pp. S3-S16.
STRÖM R., VENDEL M., BREDICAN J. (2014), “Mobile marketing: A literature review on its value for consumers and retailers”,
Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services, vol. 21, n. 6, pp. 1001-1012.
YIN R.K. (2003), Case study research: Design and methods, Calif: Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks.
12
Cresciute in fretta.
Organizzazioni a rapida crescita: verso la creazione
di un approccio analitico “ad hoc”
LEONARDO POMPA* FULVIO FORTEZZA GIOVANNI MASINO
Obiettivi. Malgrado la questione della crescita organizzativa sia da sempre al centro del dibattito accademico, la
ricerca in ambito manageriale non ha ancora analizzato in maniera sistematica le condizioni in presenza delle quali
possono prendere vita le cosiddette organizzazioni esponenziali (Ismail, 2013). La crescita rapida è un fenomeno che si
presenta con sempre maggiore frequenza negli odierni contesti economici. Oggi, infatti, esistono innumerevoli esempi
di giovani imprese che, nel giro di pochi anni, fanno registrare livelli di crescita che in passato potevano essere
raggiunti solo dopo decenni di investimenti. Da questo punto di vista esiste, dunque, una chiara difformità in termini di
dinamiche espansive tra le organizzazioni che crescono in modo più “tradizionale” e le organizzazioni che, invece,
crescono “rapidamente”. In generale, una crescita accelerata diventa altamente probabile in presenza di una
disruptive innovation (Bower and Christensen, 1995), vale a dire un’innovazione che è in grado di creare un nuovo
mercato e che riesce, rapidamente appunto, a trasformarsi da elemento trainante un mercato di nicchia ad elemento
cruciale per un mercato mainstream (Christensen, 1997). Le organizzazioni che crescono velocemente sono davvero
diverse dalle organizzazioni che conosciamo già? Quali sono i fattori di contesto che favoriscono la crescita rapida? A
queste e ad altre domande simili vogliamo cercare di rispondere attraverso il nostro studio.
L’obiettivo dello studio che proponiamo è quello di analizzare le condizioni (esterne ed interne) in presenza delle
quali un’organizzazione può crescere rapidamente. Partendo dallo studio di innumerevoli contributi teorici, propri
della letteratura economica e manageriale, abbiamo cercato di ricostruire un quadro concettuale di riferimento
funzionale allo scopo di comprendere se e in che modo le caratteristiche di scenario e le peculiarità organizzative
possano portare ad una crescita esponenziale. Nello specifico, abbiamo considerato tre condizioni esterne: il supporto
pubblico alla ricerca (Berman, 1990; McMillian e Hamilton III, 2003; Toole, 2012) la dotazione infrastrutturale
(Morrison e Schwartz, 1996; Mazzucato, 2015) e il sistema normativo (Aghion et al., 2005; Blind, 2012). Dall’altra
parte, abbiamo fatto coincidere il concetto di condizioni interne con quello di organizational capabilities (Grant, 1996;
Dosi et al., 2001; Lun et al., 2015). Conclusa la fase teorica dello studio, ci proponiamo di testare la validità degli
schemi concettuali dal punto di vista pratico. Lo scopo, in questo senso, è quello di raccogliere evidenze empiriche che
ci consentano di comprendere in che misura la concettualizzazione teorica sia valida e in che misura, al contrario, essa
debba essere ripensata. In questo modo saremo in grado di conseguire due scopi. Il primo è sicuramente quello di
giungere alla creazione di un modello teorico fortemente aderente alla realtà. Il secondo, a più ampio respiro, è quello
di fornire utili suggerimenti sia in ottica organizzativa, che in ottica di public policies. Siamo certi, infatti, che per
intercettare agevolmente le possibilità di crescita occorra, da una parte, un tessuto organizzativo favorevole al
cambiamento rapido e, dall’altra, uno scenario economico in nulla ostile alla virtuosa trasformazione dei modelli di
business. La figura 1 sintetizza l’approccio concettuale attraverso cui cercheremo di conseguire gli obiettivi appena
esposti.
*
Assegnista di Ricerca – Università di Ferrara
e-mail: leonardo.pompa@unife.it
Associato - Università di Ferrara
e-mail: fulvio.fortezza@unife.it
Ordinario - Università di Ferrara
e-mail: giovanni.masino@unife.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
13
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.03
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
Fig. 1: Il quadro concettuale di riferimento
Fonte: elaborazione propria
Metodologia. L’approccio metodologico proposto consiste nella strutturazione di un appropriato case study
design (Yin, 2013). Riteniamo che quella del caso studio sia la metodologia più adeguata ai nostri fini, in quanto quello
che andiamo ad osservare è un fenomeno decisamente ancorato alla contemporaneità e, proprio per questo,
assolutamente inedito. Questo particolare spiega come mai ad oggi risulti pressoché impossibile attingere a dati storici
e, di conseguenza a studi pregressi. Su questo versante risulterebbe ugualmente impossibile optare per metodologie
alternative come, ad esempio, la meta-analisi. In generale, l’idea è quella di seguire uno schema metodologico così
strutturato:
1) Domande di ricerca alla base del caso studio
2) Descrizione delle unità di analisi
3) Raccolta di dati
4) Proposizioni
5) Interpretazione dei risultati
Risultati. Fino a questo momento lo studio è stato condotto solo sul fronte della teoria. Da questo punto di vista
siamo giunti alla conclusione che non vi sia un legame diretto tra condizioni (esterne ed interne) di scenario e crescita
rapida, in quanto tale relazione risulta mediata dalla presenza di almeno un’innovazione dirompente. La figura 2
sintetizza efficacemente tutte le proposizioni. Nel dettaglio:
Proposizione 1: Un’organizzazione può crescere rapidamente se la ricerca pubblica nel suo ambiente di
riferimento è favorevole alla nascita di innovazioni dirompenti.
Proposizione 2: Un’organizzazione può crescere rapidamente se la dotazione infrastrutturale nel suo ambiente di
riferimento è favorevole alla nascita di innovazioni dirompenti.
Proposizione 3: Un’organizzazione può crescere rapidamente se il sistema normativo nel suo ambiente di
riferimento non è ostile alla nascita di innovazioni dirompenti.
Proposizione 4: Un’organizzazione può crescere rapidamente se il complesso delle sue capacità è favorevole allo
sviluppo e/o all’acquisizione di innovazioni dirompenti.
Proposizione 5: Un’innovazione dirompente può condurre ad una crescita rapida (5/a) se l’organizzazione riesce
a rendere tale innovazione “attrattiva” (5/b) e se il tasso di adozione di tale innovazione è adeguatamente elevato
(5/c).
Le proposizioni rappresentano i risultati della prima parte della ricerca. Esse verranno utilizzate come base di
partenza per l’approccio metodologico finalizzato alla raccolta di evidenze empiriche. Queste ultime potranno
confermare o smentire quanto evidenziato fino a questo momento.
14
CRESCIUTE IN FRETTA. ORGANIZZAZIONI A RAPIDA CRESCITA: VERSO LA CREAZIONE DI UN APPROCCIO ANALITICO “AD HOC”
Fig. 2: Una sintesi grafica delle proposizioni risultanti dalla parte teorica dello studio.
Si tratta di concettualizzazioni che saranno sottoposte ad un’attenta prova di validità pratica nel corso della conduzione
del caso studio
Fonte: elaborazione propria
Limiti della ricerca. Ogni caso studio ha degli evidenti limiti a livello di interpretazione dei risultati. Questi,
infatti, possono essere adeguati a spiegare il fenomeno in questione, ma limitatamente allo specifico contesto
all’interno del quale lo studio ha preso vita. La sfida, da questo punto di vista, sarebbe creare tanti multiple case study,
quanti sono i contesti in cui il fenomeno della crescita rapida sta prendendo o ha già preso vita. L’augurio è che i
ricercatori sviluppino in futuro un marcato interesse per questo fenomeno, in modo da ampliare la portata della
ricerca e, nel lungo periodo, poter disporre di studi sistematici ed empiricamente sempre più rigorosi. Solo in questo
modo potrà diventare veramente affidabile un qualunque approccio di stampo inferenziale.
Implicazioni pratiche. Dal punto di vista pratico, riteniamo che uno studio di questo genere possa generare
impatti su almeno due fronti. Innanzitutto, sarà possibile sviluppare un ventaglio ampio di suggerimenti per tutte quelle
imprese che intendano crescere in maniera più rapida o che, pur crescendo già a ritmi sostenuti, desiderino conservare
il trend il più a lungo possibile, ma in un’ottica di chiara sostenibilità. In secondo luogo, lo studio potrà tramutarsi in
un utile strumento di sostegno alle istituzioni che si occupano della concezione e dell’implementazione di public
policies finalizzate alla promozione dell’innovazione e dello sviluppo delle imprese. Come si evince dall’impianto
teorico che proponiamo, infatti, nessuna tendenza alla crescita può utilmente essere attivata in assenza di un ambiente
economico e legislativo favorevole all’innovazione, soprattutto quella dirompente.
Originalità del lavoro. Mancando quasi del tutto un approccio sistematico al fenomeno delle organizzazioni
esponenziali, il nostro studio si prefigge il non semplice obiettivo di colmare una lacuna speculativa ingente nel mondo
della ricerca di stampo economico-manageriale. L’intento è quello di creare un precedente metodologico e teorico,
fortemente ancorato alla realtà, che ponga la dovuta enfasi su un orizzonte di studio quasi totalmente inesplorato. Ci
auguriamo, in questo modo, che altri ricercatori facciano nascere in futuro altrettanti filoni di ricerca miranti alla
comprensione di una questione tanto variegata quanto affascinante.
Parole chiave: disruptive innovation; fast-growing organizations; organizational change
Bibliografia
AGHION P., BLOOM N., BLUNDELL R., GRIFFITH R., HOWITT P. (2005), “Competition and innovation: an inverted-U
relationaship”, Quarterly Journal of Economics, vol. 120, n. 2, pp. 701-728.
BERMANN E.M. (1990), “The economic impact of industry-funded university R&D”, Research Policy, n. 19, pp. 349-355.
BLIND K. (2012), “The influence of regulations on innovation: A quantitative assessment for OECD countries”, Research Policy,
vol. 41, n. 2, pp. 391-400.
BOWER J.L., CHRISTENSEN C.M. (1995), “Disruptive technologies: catching the wave”, Harvard Business Review, JanuaryFebruary.
CHRISTENSEN C.M. (1997), The Innovator’s Dilemma, Harvard Business School Press, Boston MA.
DOSI G., RICHARD R.R., WINTER S.G. (2001), The nature and dynamics of organizational capabilities, Oxford University Press.
15
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
GRANT R.M. (1996), “Prospering in dynamically-competitive environments: organizational capability as knowledge integration”,
Organization Science, vol. 7, n. 4, pp. 375-387.
ISMAIL S. (2013), Exponential Organizations, Why new organizations are ten times better, faster and cheaper than yours (and what
to do about it), Diversion Books, New York.
LUN Y.H.V., SHANG K., LAI K., CHENG T.C.E. (2016), “Examining the influence of organizational capability in innovative
business operations and the mediation of profitability on customer satisfaction: an application in intermodal transport
operators in Taiwan”, International Journal of Production Economics, n. 171, pp. 179-188.
MAZZUCATO M. (2015), “The innovative state. Governments should make markets, not just fix them”, Schumpeter’s Heirs,
January/February.
MCMILLIAN G.S., HAMILTON III, R.D. (2003), “The impact of publicly funded basic research: an integrative extension of Martin
and Salter”, Ieee Transactions on Engineering Management, vol. 5, n. 2, pp. 184-191.
MORRISON C.J., SCHWARTZ A.E. (1996), “State infrastructure and productive performance”, American Economic Review, vol.
86, n. 5, pp. 1095-1111.
TOOLE A.A. (2012), “The impact of public basic research on industrial innovation: evidence from the pharmaceutical industry”,
Research Policy, n. 41, pp. 1-12.
YIN R.K. (2013), Case study research: design and methods, SAGE Publications, 5th edition.
16
La logica esperienziale applicata alle strategie del comparto fieristico:
una review della letteratura
PENCARELLI TONINO* CIOPPI MARCO CURINA ILARIA FORLANI FABIO**
Obiettivi. Le fiere vengono definite, in maniera sistematica dalla letteratura di settore, come “eventi che uniscono
in un’unica location, gruppi di fornitori, appartenenti ad uno stesso settore industriale, il cui principale obiettivo è
quello di presentare, in un contesto fisico, i propri prodotti/servizi” (Black, 1986). A distanza di più di 30 anni, le fiere
rappresentano ancora oggi un business di primo piano e un volano per l’economia globale ed europea (Tafesse, 2014).
In particolare, nel contesto europeo (il cui sistema industriale è composto principalmente da imprese di piccole e
di medie dimensioni), le fiere si confermano come uno dei canali comunicativi più efficaci per promuovere prodotti e
servizi, contattare nuovi clienti e soprattutto per ottenere l’ingresso in nuovi mercati (UFI, 2016; Chu e Chiu, 2013;
Smith et al., 2004).
In letteratura, l’attenzione verso il ruolo dello strumento fiera diventa un argomento sistematico di ricerca a
partire dal decennio 1980-1990 (Soilen, 2013). In quegli anni, i lavori dedicati alla tematica fieristica sottolineavano
soprattutto l’importanza delle fiere in un’ottica puramente promozionale/di vendita, in qualità di luoghi di incontro fra
domanda e offerta (Aloui 2016; Li 2015; Rodriguez et al., 2015; Çobanoğlu e Turaeva 2014; Soilen 2013; Tafesse e
Korneliussen 2012; Kirchgeorg et al., 2010; Bathelt e Schuldt 2008; Power e Jansson 2008; Herbig et al., 1998).
Il focus quindi era principalmente rivolto agli obiettivi di vendita dello strumento fiera a scapito di quelli nonselling (Menon e Manoj, 2013).
Al contrario, negli ultimi anni, in seguito anche ai recenti cambiamenti socio-economici che hanno caratterizzato
l’ultimo decennio (Rodriguez et al., 2015; Menon e Manoj, 2013; Kirchgeorg et al., 2010) si è assistito ad una graduale
inversione di tendenza: accanto infatti ad un interesse crescente verso la tematica fieristica, emerge una sempre
maggiore attenzione, della letteratura, verso l’analisi dello strumento fiera in qualità di componente essenziale del
marketing mix (Rinallo et al., 2016; Menon e Manoj, 2013; Prado-Roman et al., 2012; Sasaka, 2012) e di leva
strategica in grado di conseguire obiettivi di vendita e non (Çobanoğlu and Turaeva 2014; Soilen 2013).
In questo modo, le fiere evolvono così da meri strumenti promozionali e di vendita a piattaforme di scambio
relazionale/informativo in grado di contribuire a: [1] costruire la brand identity delle aziende partecipanti (Chu e
Chiu, 2013); [2] instaurare rapporti informativi e relazionali fra gli stakeholder fieristici (Li, 2015; Cop e Kara, 2014);
[3] presentare gli sviluppi tecnologici/innovativi del mercato e di specifici settori (Aloui, 2016); [4] creare
apprendimento e conoscenza, accedere a nuove tecnologie, identificare nuovi trend di mercato e potenziali partner
(Rodriguez et al., 2015); [5] costruire relazioni fra gli attori fieristici presenti, raccogliere informazioni di mercato (De
Freitas e Da Silva, 2013; Tafesse e Korneliussen, 2012); [6] costruire network relazionali (Soilen, 2010; Evers e
Knight, 2008); [7] sviluppare strategie di benchmarking (Çobanoğlu e Turaeva, 2014); [8] mettere in scena momenti
emozionali e di apprendimento mediante la partecipazione attiva degli attori fieristici (Rinallo et al., 2010).
Nel complesso, quindi, emerge da una prima analisi della letteratura, come le fiere rappresentino ormai da anni
un argomento di ricerca di grande interesse (Rodriguez et al., 2015; Gottlieb et al., 2014; Tafesse, 2014; Prado-Roman
et al., 2012; Tafesse e Korneliussen, 2011), recentemente caratterizzato da profondi cambiamenti, che hanno condotto
inevitabilmente ad un’evoluzione dello strumento fiera (in termini definitori, dei ruoli e delle funzioni ad esso
assegnati).
Partendo quindi dalla complessità definitoria e concettuale dello strumento fiera (e in particolare focalizzandosi
sulla sua dimensione relazionale ed esperienziale), il principale obiettivo del presente lavoro è quello di identificare se
il ruolo esperienziale della fiera rientra o meno fra le principali tendenze emergenti dalla letteratura di settore più
recente (2010-2017). In particolare, la domanda di ricerca è la seguente: Fra le principali tendenze fieristiche
caratterizzanti la letteratura di settore più recente (2010-2017) emerge anche la dimensione esperienziale dello
*
**
Ordinario in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli studi di Urbino Carlo Bo
e-mail: tonino.pencarelli@uniurb.it
Associato in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli studi di Urbino Carlo Bo
e-mail: marco.cioppi@uniurb.it
Dottoressa di ricerca in Economia e Management - Università degli Studi di Urbino Carlo Bo
e-mail: ilaria.curina@uniurb.it
Ricercatore in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli studi di Perugia
e-mail: fabio.forlani@unipg.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
17
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.04
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
strumento fiera? In caso affermativo, qual è il ruolo assunto dai diversi attori fieristici (espositori, visitatori,
organizzatori) nel processo di costruzione del valore in un’ottica esperienziale?
Metodologia. Per rispondere alla domanda di ricerca, il presente lavoro adotta una review sistematica della
letteratura (Galvagno, 2017) focalizzata sugli articoli di business & management pubblicati fra il 2010 e il 2017 e
specificatamente dedicati alla tematica delle fiere. Nello specifico, il processo di review è stato suddiviso in tre fasi
principali: [1] raccolta degli articoli; [2] sistematizzazione/selezione; [3] analisi approfondita del database finale.
Partendo dal presupposto che l’identificazione di keywords specifiche e appropriate, rispetto all’ambito di analisi,
rappresenta il primo step necessario per un processo sistematico di review (Tranfield et al., 2003), in una prima fase
sono state identificate le stringhe di ricerca più idonee (“Trade show*”; “Trade fair*”), le quali sono state
successivamente impiegate in un processo sistematico di ricerca.
Scopus e Web of Science sono i database utilizzati, i quali hanno permesso di filtrare i risultati per [1] area
tematica (business, management e accounting); [2] tipologia di documento (articolo); [3] intervallo temporale di
pubblicazione (2010-2017). Mediante l’adozione di questi due database, si è proceduto con la ricerca di articoli
contenenti i termini “trade show” e “trade fair” nei loro titoli, keywords o abstract. Queste specifiche stringhe di
ricerca sono state scelte in quanto Kirchgeorg et al., (2010) affermano, nel loro articolo, come il termine “trade fair”
possa essere considerato sinonimo di “trade show”. In seguito alla lettura degli abstract dei paper selezionati, sono
stati eliminati, dal database, tutti gli articoli che non si sono specificatamente dedicati alla tematica in esame.
In caso di ambiguità (abstract che non hanno permesso di identificare in maniera chiara il livello di attenzione del
paper verso lo studio della tematica fieristica), si è proceduto con la lettura dei full text. Al termine di questo processo
sistematico, si è giunti ad un database finale composto da 84 articoli.
Risultati. Al fine di rispondere alla prima parte della domanda di ricerca (Fra le principali tendenze fieristiche
caratterizzanti la letteratura di settore più recente [2010-2017] emerge anche la dimensione esperienziale dello
strumento fiera?), si è proceduto con una content analysis dei paper selezionati nella fase precedente, che ha permesso
di estrarre i principali trend emergenti (Tab. 1) dalla letteratura più recente dedicata alla tematica delle fiere.
Tab. 1: Trend emergenti (2010-2017)
Trend emergenti
Relationship marketing
Internationalization process
Experience logic marketing
New media presence
2010
7
2
4
3
2011
6
3
1
2012
6
2
3
2013
2
2
1
3
2014
7
3
2
3
2015
10
2
4
1
2016
3
6
1
1
2017
4
2
3
Totale
45
20
18
14
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
Nel complesso, l’analisi tematica dei paper selezionati ha permesso di identificare quattro principali tendenze
emergenti dalla letteratura fieristica contemporanea.
Accanto ai tradizionali approcci di gestione dello strumento fiera, emergono nuove modalità di organizzazione
degli eventi (Rinallo et al., 2016; Alberca-Oliver, 2015; Oromendia et al., 2015; Sarmento et al., 2015a; 2015b; 2015c;
Bettis-Outland et al., 2010; Kirchgeorg et al., 2010) sempre più focalizzati sulla creazione di network relazionali
(collaborazioni fra l’ente fiera e associazioni di categoria, società organizzatrici di eventi esterne) e su contesti
internazionali (individuazione di partner esteri, fusione di eventi internazionali). Allo stesso tempo, dalla review
emerge un interesse crescente, da parte della letteratura, verso l’impatto emozionale che l’evento fieristico può
generare nei suoi partecipanti (Experience logic marketing).
L’attenzione della letteratura si sposta così da finalità organizzative puramente commerciali dello strumento fiera
ad aspetti strategico-organizzativi legati alla sua dimensione emozionale/esperienziale, in qualità di fattore chiave per
l’efficacia complessiva della performance fieristica (Gottlieb et al., 2014; Bjorner and Berg 2012; Rinallo et al., 2010).
L’impatto emozionale deve essere però ricercato non solo nella fase di pianificazione/realizzazione dell’evento
fieristico, ma anche e soprattutto mediante l’adozione di un approccio strategico omni-channel, fondamentale per
gestire, in maniera sistematica, i canali fieristici online (siti web, social media, fiere virtuali) e offline e per offrire di
conseguenza ai visitatori un’esperienza fieristica integrata (Gottlieb e Bianchi 2017; Singh et al., 2017; Wu e Wang
2016; Chongwatpol 2015; Dawson et al., 2014; Sarmento et al., 2014; Tafesse 2014; De Vaujany et al., 2013; Melles
2013; Tafesse e Korneliussen 2013; Geigenmuller 2010; Kirchgeorg et al., 2010; Ling-Yee 2010).
Focalizzandosi specificatamente sulla tendenza riguardante il ruolo della logica esperienziale applicata al
comparto fieristico e sull’importanza crescente della componente di entertainment nella gestione fieristica, dalla
review emerge come la letteratura di settore non si sia occupata, in maniera sistematica, della dimensione
esperienziale dell’evento fieristico, nonostante esso rappresenti uno dei pochi casi di marketing esperienziale B2B
proposto da Pine e Gilmore (1999) nel loro libro.
Al contrario, il palcoscenico fieristico offre un’ampia gamma di stimoli sensoriali (suoni, odori, colori, fisicità)
ricchi di informazioni e di elementi di intrattenimento. Ne consegue quindi come le fiere rappresentino a tutti gli effetti
piattaforme esperienziali in cui i visitatori possono immergersi in un mix di stimoli sensoriali, processi cognitivi,
risposte emozionali, attività relazionali e comportamenti attivi (Rinallo et al., 2010).
18
LA LOGICA ESPERIENZIALE APPLICATA ALLE STRATEGIE DEL COMPARTO FIERISTICO: UNA REVIEW DELLA LETTERATURA
Nel complesso, durante il periodo di analisi selezionato (2010-2017), 18 articoli hanno tentato di applicare i
modelli e i metodi concettuali, mutuati dalla letteratura sul marketing esperienziale, al settore fieristico, focalizzando in
particolare la loro attenzione sul ruolo delle diverse categorie di stakeholder nel processo di trasformazione delle fiere
in piattaforme esperienziali (Tab. 2).
Al fine di rispondere alla seconda parte della domanda di ricerca (Qual è il ruolo assunto dai diversi attori
fieristici [espositori, visitatori, organizzatori] nel processo di costruzione del valore in un’ottica esperienziale?),
mediante un processo di content analysis, specificatamente effettuato sui 18 articoli dedicati alla dimensione
emozionale dell’evento fieristico, è stato possibile identificare i diversi ruoli esperienziali assunti dalle tre principali
categorie di stakeholder fieristici: visitatori, espositori e organizzatori.
Tab. 2: Fiere e logica esperienziale: Le diverse categorie di stakeholder indagati
Stakeholder
Espositori
Visitatori B2B
Visitatori B2C
Organizzatori
Altri stakeholder
2010
3
3
1
2011
2012
1
2
1
1
2013
1
2014
1
1
1
2015
3
2
1
2016
1
1
2017
1
1
Totale
10
9
4
2
1
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
Dal punto di vista dei visitatori, le fiere diventano fonti di apprendimento di primaria importanza, dal momento
che la ricerca di informazioni rappresenta una delle principali motivazioni di partecipazione fieristica.
In particolare, Rinallo et al., (2010) propongono la metafora degli eventi fieristici come “embodied experiences”
per sottolineare come il processo di acquisizione informativa, da parte dei visitatori, durante un evento fieristico
presenti dinamiche profondamente diverse (ricchezza informativa, sensoriale, fatica fisica) rispetto a quelli
caratterizzanti altri mezzi comunicativi.
Oltre alla componente informativa, l’evento fieristico offre ai visitatori anche opportunità relazionali (Sarmento et
al., 2014), che consentono loro di incontrare stakeholder di interesse, di stabilire e di mantenere legami con attori di
rilievo appartenenti al proprio settore (Momsen, 2010). In questo modo, i visitatori stessi diventano un’importante
fonte di conoscenza grazie all’attivazione di conversazioni informali, nate spontaneamente all’interno dei padiglioni
fieristici, che contribuiscono alla diffusione di informazioni rilevanti su prodotti e su fornitori.
Insieme alla dimensione informativa/cognitiva e relazionale, i palcoscenici fieristici offrono inoltre un fattore di
svago mediante l’organizzazione di cocktail e la partecipazione ad eventi di natura sociale, il cui principale obiettivo è
quello di rafforzare i legami creati durante la manifestazione fieristica.
Nel complesso, quindi, attraverso la partecipazione ad eventi fieristici, i visitatori possono condividere, con altri,
momenti di vario genere, testare prodotti e seguire dimostrazioni in tempo reale (Kim e Mazumdar, 2016) in qualità di
audience attivo e di co-creatori delle esperienze fieristiche stesse (Rodriguez et al., 2015; Gottlieb et al., 2014).
Partendo da questi presupposti, Bjorner e Berg (2012) evidenziano come le fiere rappresentino a tutti gli effetti
piattaforme interattive, in cui comunità temporanee di visitatori prendono vita grazie alla condivisione di esperienze
create attivamente da tutti gli attori coinvolti nello spettacolo fieristico. Così come i consumatori contemporanei
desiderano essere immersi in contesti emozionali in cui poter vivere esperienze memorabili (Carù e Cova, 2006), allo
stesso modo i visitatori fieristici desiderano partecipare attivamente all’evento fieristico mediante l’utilizzo di tutti e
cinque i sensi: sense (test dei prodotti); feel (partecipazione a show emozionali); think (partecipazione a presentazioni
tecniche/seminari); act (partecipazione attiva a specifici eventi all’interno della manifestazione fieristica stessa) e
relate (partecipazione a cene sociali, cocktail).
Per quanto riguarda l’analisi della logica esperienziale applicata alla prospettiva degli espositori, Soilen (2010)
sottolinea nel suo lavoro come le fiere siano evolute, negli ultimi anni, da luoghi di vendita a veri e propri festival,
focalizzandosi soprattutto sul ruolo assunto dagli espositori in questo processo di trasformazione.
In particolare, Rinallo et al., (2010) evidenziano come le esperienze offerte dagli espositori riguardino soprattutto
la possibilità, per i visitatori, di osservare, di esaminare e di poter toccare con mano, in un contesto altamente
interattivo e professionale, campioni, prodotti e prototipi, che diventano a loro volta veri e propri promemoria visivi in
grado di far rivivere l’esperienza fieristica una volta terminato l’evento. Allo stesso tempo, gli espositori possono
organizzare eventi all’interno dei propri stand (dimostrazioni di prodotti, eventi sociali e di intrattenimento, seminari
tecnici e conferenze). Nel loro lavoro, Bloch et al., (2017) analizzano proprio come le decisioni di design possano
influenzare l’attrattività degli stand, luogo principale in cui le preferenze e decisioni dei buyer nascono e si sviluppano
(Kim e Mazumdar, 2016; Gilliam, 2015; Gopalakrishna et al., 2010; Soilen, 2010).
Gli espositori diventano, in questo modo, una delle principali fonti di apprendimento e di informazione fieristica
(Sarmento et al., 2015; Sarmento et al., 2014), attraverso i quali i visitatori possono accedere a conoscenze
difficilmente raggiungibili mediante altri mezzi di comunicazione.
Nel complesso, quindi, le esperienze dei visitatori fieristici sono influenzate da due categorie di fornitori:
espositori e organizzatori. I primi, in particolare, sono chiamati a creare esperienze replicando nei propri stand quello
che Schmitt definì nel 1999 come “set di experience providers” (presenza simultanea di persone, prodotti,
comunicazioni visive, spazi fisici e suoni). Considerando, inoltre, che fra i diversi elementi costituenti l’esperienza
19
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
fieristica, la presenza fisica dei prodotti e la dimensione relazionale rappresentano per i visitatori prerogative assolute,
gli espositori saranno chiamati a migliorare costantemente questi due elementi esperienziali, garantendo ai propri
visitatori un personale in-stand competente e preparato (Rinallo et al., 2010).
Gli organizzatori fieristici rappresentano la seconda categoria di fornitori esperienziali, il cui principale ruolo è
quello di gestire lo spazio fieristico, mediante la creazione di aree informative e di relax e l’organizzazione di eventi di
natura tecnica e ludica/di intrattenimento. Nel complesso, in un contesto fieristico caratterizzato dalla proliferazione di
eventi e dalla scarsità di risorse a disposizione di espositori e di visitatori, gli organizzatori saranno necessariamente
chiamati a offrire eventi sempre più ricchi dal punto di vista sensoriale ed emozionale. Gli organizzatori assumono
così, secondo una logica esperienziale, il ruolo di regista dello spettacolo fieristico, a cui spetta il compito di
selezionare i partecipanti (espositori, buyer, aziende), progettare la mappa degli stand/percorsi dei visitatori ed
organizzare, in generale, il palcoscenico in cui le esperienze fieristiche (co-create da tutti gli attori presenti) saranno
messe in scena.
Limiti della ricerca. La ricerca rappresenta un primo tentativo di sistematizzazione della letteratura fieristica
contemporanea secondo una logica esperienziale. È quindi interesse degli autori, approfondire in futuro tale tematica
in un’ottica maggiormente di management, mediante interviste in profondità dirette alle diverse categorie di
stakeholder fieristici al fine di comprendere se i risultati emersi dalla presente ricerca coincidono con le strategie
adottate effettivamente dagli operatori del settore o se, al contrario, emergono discrepanze che necessitano di essere
investigate.
Implicazioni pratiche. Da un punto di vista manageriale, il presente lavoro ha permesso di identificare e di
classificare i principali ruoli che le diverse categorie di stakeholder dovrebbero assumere nel processo di gestione
esperienziale dell’evento fieristico. Nello specifico, infatti, le performance delle manifestazioni fieristiche sono
particolarmente influenzate dalla qualità e dalla quantità di esperienze proposte e organizzate dai principali fornitori
fieristici: gli espositori e gli organizzatori.
Gli organizzatori assumono innanzitutto il ruolo di registi, chiamati a pianificare le esperienze dei visitatori ad un
livello macro, mediante la selezione e il casting degli attori (espositori, buyer, compagnie partecipanti) e la
progettazione del palcoscenico (pianificazione della mappa degli stand e dei percorsi). Per conseguire questi obiettivi,
gli organizzatori dovrebbero focalizzare maggiormente la loro attenzione sulla creazione di atmosfere emozionali
mediante l’offerta di show, musica live, momenti informativi e di intrattenimento. Allo stesso tempo, essi sono chiamati
a ridurre la fatica fisica e mentale dei visitatori mediante l’inclusione di aree relax, l’offerta di molteplici fonti
informative (sito web, mappa degli espositori) e mediante una selezione e distribuzione accurata degli espositori.
Nel complesso, quindi, il ruolo principale attribuito agli organizzatori, secondo una logica esperienziale, è quello
di creare il contesto ideale in cui visitatori ed espositori possano sfruttare al massimo la loro presenza in fiera
(Gottlieb et al., 2014; Rinallo et al., 2010).
Gli espositori diventano, a loro volta, attori fondamentali, chiamati a trasformare i loro stand in spazi emozionali,
contribuendo in questo modo alla conversione delle fiere in piattaforme di intrattenimento di successo. L’atmosfera
caratterizzante gli stand può infatti influenzare direttamente gli stati d’animo dei visitatori e di conseguenza la loro
propensione ad acquistare (Gottlieb et al., 2014; Tafesse e Korneliussen, 2012). In particolare, le strategie degli
espositori dovrebbero essere formulate partendo dalla consapevolezza che gli eventi fieristici non rappresentano
unicamente canali di vendita, ma al contrario essi diventano luoghi in cui i visitatori non solo ricercano informazioni
su prodotti e servizi, ma anche e soprattutto momenti di svago ed esperienze uniche da vivere a 360 gradi (Rinallo et
al., 2010).
In altre parole, di fronte a un visitatore che ricerca ambienti stimolanti, gli espositori sono chiamati a presentare i
propri prodotti in una maniera sempre più creativa ed emozionale (mediante ad esempio la presenza di uno staff
esperto, la presentazione di prodotti o prototipi che i visitatori possono portare via come promemoria della loro
esperienza in fiera, dimostrazioni di prodotti), incentivando, al contempo, la creazione di network
professionali/relazionali (mediante l’incentivazione di incontri casuali e di interazioni sociali in aree specifiche dei
propri stand, l’organizzazione di concorsi, seminari tecnici, cocktail).
Al fine di rendere la dimensione emozionale della fiera realmente performante, i visitatori saranno a loro volta
chiamati a trasformarsi in veri e propri co-produttori e co-creatori delle esperienze vissute durante l’evento.
In particolare, secondo la logica esperienziale, i visitatori dovranno partecipare ed immergersi attivamente nello
spettacolo fieristico, stabilendo relazioni interattive con altri attori, costruendo e mantenendo network professionali e
relazionali, assimilando e diffondendo informazioni su prodotti e fornitori, condividendo esperienze, testando prodotti e
partecipando ad eventi sociali.
Nel complesso, dalla review emerge come tutti i partecipanti all’evento fieristico debbano contribuire alla sua
creazione: gli organizzatori (registi); gli espositori (i principali attori dello spettacolo fieristico) e i visitatori (audience
attivo, co-autori e co-produttori dell’esperienza fieristica complessiva), confermando in questo modo come gli eventi
fieristici facciano parte, a tutti gli effetti, dell’economia delle esperienze. La tabella 3 sintetizza i principali ruoli e
compiti che le differenti categorie di stakeholder dovrebbero assumere secondo una logica esperienziale.
20
LA LOGICA ESPERIENZIALE APPLICATA ALLE STRATEGIE DEL COMPARTO FIERISTICO: UNA REVIEW DELLA LETTERATURA
Tab. 3: Ruoli e compiti degli stakeholder fieristici secondo la logica esperienziale
Stakeholder
RUOLO PRINCIPALE
VISITATORI
TRASFORMAZIONE IN UN
AUDIENCE ATTIVO E IN
CO-PRODUTTORI DELLE
ESPERIENZE VISSUTE
DURANTE L’EVENTO
ESPOSITORI
TRASFORMAZIONE DEGLI
STAND FIERISTICI IN
SPAZI ESPERIENZIALI
ORGANIZZATORI
CREAZIONE DI CONTESTI
ESPERIENZIALI
(SELEZIONE DEGLI
ATTORI, PROGETTAZIONE
DEL PALCOSCENICO,
MASSIMIZZAZIONE DEGLI
EFFETTI ATMOSFERICI)
Componenti esperienziali
(in ambito fieristico)
Componente
Componente di
Componente cognitiva
relazionale
intrattenimento
PRINCIPALI COMPITI
Assimilare e diffondere
conoscenze su prodotti e Stabilire relazioni
su fornitori, testare
con altri attori
prodotti, partecipare a
fieristici, costruire
Partecipare a eventi
dimostrazioni,
e mantenere
di svago
raccogliere informazioni
network
(mediante contatti
relazionali e
diretti, raccolta di
professionali
opuscoli, brochure)
Incentivare
Reclutare staff esperto,
Presentare stand
incontri casuali e
presentare in maniera
emozionali (in
interazioni sociali
creativa prototipi e
un’ottica visiva),
in aree specifiche
prodotti, organizzare
organizzare eventi
degli stand,
dimostrazioni, proporre
sociali (cene,
organizzare
seminari tecnici
cocktail)
concorsi
Offrire momenti di
apprendimento e
informativi mediante
fonti informative
multiple (sito web,
mappe degli espositori)
Includere aree di
relax, selezionare
in maniera attenta
distributori ed
espositori
Proporre show,
spettacoli musicali,
eventi ludici/di
intrattenimento di
diversa natura
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
Originalità del lavoro. Il lavoro ha permesso di identificare e di sistematizzare tutti gli articoli di business &
management, pubblicati fra il 2010 e il 2017, e specificatamente dedicati alla tematica fieristica. Attraverso l’adozione
di un’analisi tematica, è stato inoltre possibile identificare le principali tendenze emergenti dalla letteratura fieristica
contemporanea. In secondo luogo, il lavoro ha analizzato le dinamiche del comparto fieristico in una logica
esperienziale, identificando ed evidenziando i ruoli assunti da ciascuna categoria di stakeholder nel processo di
trasformazione delle fiere in piattaforme interattive ed esperienziali.
Parole chiave: Trade show; experiential logic; marketing esperienziale; content analysis.
Bibliografia
ALBERCA-OLIVER P., RODRÍGUEZ-OROMENDÍA A., PARTE-ESTEBAN L. (2015), “Measuring the efficiency of Trade
Shows: A Spanish case study”, Tourism Management, vol. 47, pp. 27-137.
ALOUI C. (2016), “Optimal capacity sharing of a two sided monopoly platform: the case of a Trade Fair”, Economic Modelling, vol.
54, 2016, pp. 276-288.
BATHELT H., SCHULDT N. (2008), “Between luminaires and meat grinders: International trade fairs as temporary clusters”,
Regional Studies, vol. 42, n. 6, pp. 853-868.
BETTIS-OUTLAND H., CROMARTIE J.S., JOHNSTON W.J., LEILA BORDERS A. (2010), “The return on trade show
information (RTSI): a conceptual analysis”, Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 268-271.
BJÖRNER E., BERG P. (2012), “Strategic creation of experiences at Shanghai World Expo: a practice of communification”,
International Journal of Event and Festival Management, vol. 3, n. 1, pp. 30-45.
BLACK R. (1986), The Trade Show Industry: Management and Marketing Career Opportunities, Trade Show Bureau, East Orleans,
MA.
BLOCH P.H., GOPALAKRISHNA S., CRECELIUS A.T., SCATOLIN MURAROLLI M. (2017), “Exploring booth design as a
determinant of trade show success”, Journal of Business-to-Business Marketing, vol. 24, n. 4, pp. 237-256.
CARÙ A., COVA B. (2006), “How to facilitate immersion in a consumption experience: Appropriation operations and service
elements”, Journal of Consumer Behaviour, vol. 5, n. 1, pp. 4-14.
CHONGWATPOL J. (2015), “Integration of RFID and business analytics for trade show exhibitors”, European Journal of
Operational Research, vol. 244, n. 2, pp. 662-673.
CHU M.C., CHIU S.M. (2013), “Effective marketing strategies to attract business visitors at Trade Shows”, International Journal of
Business and Management vol. 8, n. 24, pp. 64-72.
ÇOBANOGLU E., TURAEVA V. (2014), “Effects of the Pre-show, At-show and Post-show Firm Activities on Trade Show
Performance Measurement”, Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences, vol. 150, pp. 762-771.
21
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
COP R., KARA R.T. (2014), “The role of Trade Fairs in industrial marketing: a research on defence industry Trade Fairs”, Journal
of Management Marketing and Logistics, vol. 1, n. 3, pp.156-172.
DAWSON B.K., YOUNG L., TU C., CHONGYI F. (2014), “Co-innovation in networks of resources-A case study in the Chinese
exhibition industry”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 43, n. 3, pp. 496-503.
DE FREITAS SANTOS J., DA SILVA P.B.M. (2013), “Participate (or not) in international Trade Fairs? Decision factors of
Portuguese managers”, Revista de Management Comparat International, vol. 14, n. 5, pp. 689-703.
DE VAUJANY F.X., CARTON S., DOMINGUEZ-PERY C. & VAAST E. (2013), “Moving closer to the fabric of organizing
visions: The case of a Trade Show”, Journal of Strategic Information Systems, vol. 22, n. 1, pp. 1-25.
EVERS N., KNIGHT J. (2008), “Role of international Trade Shows in small firm internationalization: a network perspective”,
International Marketing Review, vol. 25, n. 5, pp. 544-562.
GALVAGNO M. (2017), “Bibliometric literature review: An opportunity for marketing scholars”, Mercati e competitività, vol. 4, pp.
7-15.
GEIGENMULLER A. (2010), “The role of virtual Trade Fairs in relationship value creation”, Journal of Business and Industrial
Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 284-292.
GILLIAM D.A. (2015), “Trade show boothscapes”, Journal of Marketing Management, vol. 31, n. 17/18, pp. 1878-1898.
GOPALAKRISHNA S., ROSTER C.A., SRIDHAR S. (2010), “An exploratory study of attendee activities at a business trade show”,
Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 241-248.
GOTTLIEB U., BIANCHI C. (2017), “Virtual trade shows: Exhibitors’ perspectives on virtual marketing capability requirements”,
Electronic Commerce Research and Applications, vol. 21, 2017, pp. 17-26.
GOTTLIEB U., BROWN M., FERRIER L. (2014), “Consumer perceptions of Trade Show effectiveness: Scale development and
validation within a B2C context”, European Journal of Marketing, vol. 48, n. 1/2, pp. 89-107.
HERBIG P., O’HARA B., PALUMBO F.A. (1998), “Trade Show: who, what, why”, Marketing Intelligence and Planning, vol.16, n.
7, pp. 425-435.
KIM T., MAZUMDAR T. (2016), “Product Concept Demonstrations in Trade Shows and Firm Value”, Journal of Marketing, vol.
80, n. 4, pp. 90-108.
KIRCHGEORG M., JUNG K., KLANTE O. (2010), “The future of Trade Shows: insights from a scenario analysis”, Journal of
Business and Industrial Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 301-312.
LI Y. (2015), “Trade Shows in the Globalizing Knowledge Economy”, Journal of Economic Geography, vol. 15, n. 4, pp. 841-842.
LING-YEE L. (2010), “Antecedents and effect of internet implementation for Trade Shows”, Journal of Business and Industrial
Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 272-283.
MELLES J. (2013), “A reality check for sales and marketing”, Laser Focus World, vol. 49, n. 1, pp. 31-34.
MENON S., MANOJ E. (2013), “A Study of Exhibitor Firms at a Tourism Trade Show”, International Journal of Marketing and
Business Communication, vol. 2, n. 2, pp. 64-73.
MOMSEN H.H. (2010), “Harvesting education”, Printwear vol. 23, n. 9, pp. 32-34.
OROMENDÍA A.R., PAZ M.D.R., RUFÍN R. (2015), “Research note: Relationship versus transactional marketing in travel and
tourism trade shows”, Tourism Economics, vol. 21, n. 2, pp. 427-434.
PINE B.J., GILMORE J.H. (1999), The experience economy: work is theatre & every business a stage, Harvard Business Press.
POWER D., JANSSON J. (2008), “Cyclical clusters in global circuits: Overlapping spaces in furniture Trade Fairs”, Economic
Geography, vol. 84, n. 4, pp. 423-448.
PRADO-ROMÁN C., BLANCO-GONZÁLEZ A., DÍEZ-MARTÍN F. (2012), “Efficiency of the exhibitors at art Trade Show”,
International Journal of Arts and Commerce, vol. 1, n. 6, pp. 47-54.
RINALLO D., BATHELT H., GOLFETTO F. (2016), “Economic geography and industrial marketing views on trade shows:
Collective marketing and knowledge circulation”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 61, 2016, pp. 93-103.
RINALLO D., BORGHINI S., GOLFETTO F. (2010), “Exploring visitor experiences at trade shows”, Journal of Business &
Industrial Marketing, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 249-258.
RODRÍGUEZ A., REINA M.D., RUFÍN R. (2015), “Relationship quality and exhibitor's performance in leisure trade shows”, E+ M
Ekonomie a Management, vol. 3, n. 128, pp. 129-143.
SARMENTO M., SIMÕES C., FARHANGMEHR M. (2015a), “Applying a relationship marketing perspective to B2B trade fairs:
The role of socialization episodes”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 44, 2015, pp. 131-141.
SARMENTO M., FARHANGMEHR M., SIMÕES C. (2015b), “A relationship marketing perspective to trade fairs: insights from
participants”, Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, vol. 30, n. 5, pp. 84-593.
SARMENTO M., FARHANGMEHR M., SIMÕES C. (2015c), “Participating in Business-to-Business Trade Fairs: Does the Buying
Function Matter?”, Journal of Convention & Event Tourism, vol. 16, n. 4, pp. 273-297.
SARMENTO M., SIMÕES C., FARHANGMEHR M. (2014), “B2B Interactions at Trade Fairs and Relationship Quality: A
Conceptual Approach”, Advances in Business Marketing and Purchasing, vol. 21, 2014, pp. 167-189.
SASAKA P.S. (2012), “The Effectiveness of Trade Shows and Exhibitions as Organizational Marketing Tool (Analysis of Selected
Companies in Mombasa)”, International Journal of Business and Social Science, vol. 3, n. 22, pp. 219-230.
SCHMITT B. (1999), “Experiential marketing”, Journal of Marketing Management, vol. 15, n. 1/3, pp. 53-67.
SINGH F., PAURAV S., KALAFATIS P. (2017), “IT usage for enhancing trade show performance: evidence from the aviation
service”, Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, vol. 32, n. 3, pp. 398-408.
SMITH T.M., GOPALAKRISHNA S., SMITH P.M. (2004), “The complementary effect of Trade Shows on personal selling”,
International Journal of Research in Marketing, vol. 21, n. 1, pp. 61-76.
SØILEN K.S. (2013), Exhibit Marketing and Trade Show Intelligence - Successful Boothmanship and Booth Design, Springer
Verlag, Berlin.
SØILEN K.S. (2010), “Boosting innovation and knowledge through delocalization: market intelligence at Trade Shows”, Problems
and Perspectives in Management, vol. 8, n. 3, pp. 200-207.
TAFESSE W. (2014), “Understanding how resource deployment strategies influence trade show organizers’ performance
effectiveness”, European Journal of Marketing, vol. 48, n. 5-6, pp. 1009-1025.
TAFESSE W., KORNELIUSSEN T. (2013), “Examining the effect of using multiple media tools on the marketing performance of
organizations in a trade campaign environment”, Journal of Marketing Communications, vol. 19, n. 3, pp. 215-227.
22
LA LOGICA ESPERIENZIALE APPLICATA ALLE STRATEGIE DEL COMPARTO FIERISTICO: UNA REVIEW DELLA LETTERATURA
TAFESSE W., KORNELIUSSEN T. (2012), “Identifying factors affecting consumers purchase incidence at retail Trade Shows”,
Journal of Retailing and Consumer Services, vol. 19, n. 4, pp. 438-444.
TAFESSE W., KORNELIUSSEN T. (2011), “The dimensionality of Trade Show performance in an emerging market”, International
Journal of Emerging Markets, vol. 6, n. 1, pp. 38-49.
TRANFIELD D., DENYER D., SMART P. (2003), “Towards a methodology for developing evi-dence-informed management
knowledge by means of systematic review”, British Journal of Management, vol. 14, n. 3, pp. 207-222.
UFI (2010-2017), Global Exhibition Industry Statistics.
WU X., WANG C. (2016), “Research on designing the official websites of trade shows based on user experience”, Journal of
Convention & Event Tourism, vol. 17, n. 3, pp. 234-246.
23
TRACK - STRATEGY BETWEEN THEORY AND PRACTICE
24
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA
E PRATICA
Il rightshoring e le strategie di localizzazione delle attività delle imprese. Alcuni casi a confronto
ALESSANDRO BARONCELLI, VALERIA BELVEDERE, LUIGI SERIO
Effetti competitivi della sharing economy nei servizi ricettivi
AURELIO G. MAURI, ROBERTA MINAZZI, RUGGERO SAINAGHI
Ambidexterity e performance management. Un’evidenza empirica di implementazione
della strategia aziendale
DANIELE BINCI, CORRADO CERRUTI, STEFANO ANTONIO DONNARUMMA, PIERLUIGI PALMIGIANI
L’influenza della componente enogastronomica sul comportamento di viaggio degli italiani
ROBERTA GARIBALDI, ANDREA POZZI
Il rightshoring e le strategie di localizzazione delle attività
delle imprese. Alcuni casi a confronto
ALESSANDRO BARONCELLI* VALERIA BELVEDERE LUIGI SERIO
Obiettivi. Il recente fenomeno di reshoring nelle economie occidentali rende il dibattito molto fertile, sia a livello
accademico che manageriale, con particolare riferimento alle ragioni per le quali diverse decisioni di offshoring si
sono dimostrate nel tempo poco efficaci. Se da una parte il riferimento alle politiche protezionistiche sembra essere
mediaticamente il nodo centrale del dibattito, emerge chiara la necessità di allargare la prospettiva di analisi e
riflettere sulle scelte di localizzazione in un quadro più ampio, ragionando sia in chiave di opportunità di contesto
esterno che di decisioni endogene alle imprese che ne influenzano la consistenza. Questo articolo si pone l’obiettivo di
affrontare il tema della localizzazione delle attività produttive con un focus sul processo decisionale sottostante, al fine
di individuare i fattori che più di altri sono in grado di influenzare le decisioni di offshoring/reshoring.
Metodologia. Negli ultimi anni diversi contributi, sia di natura accademica che di natura spiccatamente
pubblicistica, hanno messo in luce l’aumento del fenomeno del reshoring, inteso come la decisione di trasferire le
attività produttive nel paese di origine dell’azienda. (Stentoft et al., 2016). La scala di tale nuova tendenza sembra
essere particolarmente consistente (De Backer et al., 2016). Si consideri oggi che il 14% delle aziende che operano a
livello globale sta prendendo in considerazione opzioni di reshoring o nearshoring e il 38% di questi pensa che i loro
concorrenti abbiano già intrapreso questo processo (Tate e Bals, 2017). L’entità di questi numeri ha suscitato molta
attenzione tra i ricercatori; attualmente il fenomeno è studiato da diverse prospettive, che vanno dalle motivazioni a
supporto della scelta, alla struttura di governance, alle opzioni geografiche delle attività trasferite o da trasferire
(Fratocchi et al., 2015). Di fatto, mentre nelle prime fasi del suo sviluppo, la rilevanza della dimensione politica è stata
centrale; “portare a casa posti di lavoro” è stata la priorità fattuale e retorica del ragionamento, attribuendo al tema
del reshoring potenzialità rivelatesi in un secondo tempo largamente sopravvalutate (Tate, 2014). Soltanto
recentemente è apparso sempre più chiaro che la maggior parte di queste iniziative sono guidate da decisioni aziendali
deliberate e volontarie, spesso determinate dalla necessità di superare i problemi (ad esempio relativi all’allineamento
dei processi, alla qualità, alla flessibilità, al capitale umano) generati da processi di offshoring infruttuosi.
Perseguire una strategia di reshoring pone problemi specifici, principalmente riguardo a dove localizzare le
attività produttive, e riguardo a chi dovrebbe dirigerle; in altre parole riguarda la governance del sistema di
operations management (Gray et al., 2013). Sulle scelte di localizzazione, le alternative a una produzione offshore
possono essere il paese di origine della società madre o un paese appartenente alla regione dell’impresa, come il
Messico e il Canada per gli Stati Uniti. La prima soluzione è esattamente ciò che viene chiamato “reshoring” mentre il
secondo è noto come “nearshoring” (Fratocchi et al., 2015; Gray et al., 2013). Quest’ultimo aspetto, relativo alle scelte
di operations management, richiama le problematiche legate alle decisioni di make-or-buy, che possono configurare il
perimetro delle operations svolte all’interno dell’azienda. L’ampio numero di combinazioni di queste scelte e il
significativo grado di varietà delle soluzioni offshore che può avere un’impresa mostrano chiaramente quanto sia
complesso decidere se e come delocalizzare delle attività. Anche le teorie proposte per inquadrare tali problemi, vale a
dire l’Economia dei costi di transazione e la Resource Based View, suggeriscono soluzioni diverse e incompatibili in
particolare per la struttura di governance, fornendo così un’ulteriore conferma alla complessità intrinseca del processo
di offshoring / reshoring (McIvor, 2013).
Nella letteratura sull’Operations Management, le scelte di localizzazione sono osservate dalla prospettiva della
coerenza strategica, in base al quale le logiche progettuali e gestionali che modellano il sistema operativo dell’azienda
devono garantire una coerenza complessiva tra la strategia competitiva dell’azienda, i suoi obiettivi di miglioramento
funzionale e le componenti, hardware e software del suo sistema di produzione (Belvedere e Gallmann, 2014; Wisner e
Fawcett, 1991; Leong et al., 1990; Skinner, 1974; 1969). In tale contesto, sia le decisioni di delocalizzazione degli
ultimi anni possono essere viste come “attenzioni e tratti” comuni a molte imprese che, in caso di offshoring, cercano
per lo più di trarre vantaggio in particolare dalle opportunità di riduzione dei costi offerte dalle scelte di ubicazione in
*
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
e-mail: alessandro.baroncelli@unicatt.it
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
e-mail: valeria.belvedere@unicatt.it
Docente a contratto - Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore
e-mail: luigi.serio@unicatt.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
27
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.05
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
paesi emergenti (Gylling et al., 2015; Tate 2014; Tate et al., 2014; Gray et al., 2013; Kinkel e Maloca, 2009), e nel
caso di reshoring cercano di aumentare la reattività dei loro processi logistici e / o più adeguatamente affrontare le
pressioni esercitate dalle parti interessate per quanto riguarda le questioni di sostenibilità ambientale e sociale
(Ellram, 2013; Ellram et al., 2013; Gray et al., 2013).
Se inquadriamo la decisione di delocalizzazione / reshoring in una prospettiva di coerenza strategica, è
innanzitutto necessario identificare le prestazioni operative che possono essere influenzate dalla decisione sulla
localizzazione. La letteratura su perfomance produttive e logistiche converge su una comune tassonomia che può essere
così articolata (Grando et al., 2007; Neely et al ., 2005; 1995; Leong et al., 1990): 1) costo, considerato come capacità
di raggiungere un efficiente utilizzo delle risorse produttive; 2) qualità, principalmente intesa come conformità alle
specifichetecniche; 3) tempo, riferito alla capacità di produrre e consegnare velocemente e in modo affidabile; 4)
flessibilità, considerata come la capacità di un sistema di reagire a un’esigenza di cambiamento in modo rapido ed
economico.
Oltre a queste caratteristiche, la letteratura ha anche evidenziato gli effetti straordinari che operazioni e processi
logistici possono avere sulle prestazioni ambientali e sociali dell’azienda, che ora è accettata come la quinta
dimensione della tassonomia sul tema (Belvedere e Grando, 2017; Gauthier, 2005; Elkington, 1997). Emerge nei
contributi più recenti come la maggior parte delle decisioni di reshoring delle attività produttive mirino a superare i
problemi determinati da precedenti progetti di offshoring, il cui impatto complessivo sulle caratteristiche di
performance era sfavorevole (Stentoft et al., 2016). Per quanto riguarda le dimensioni di “costo”, gli svantaggi più
comuni di offshoring si riferiscono all’aumento dei costi di manodopera e logistica (Tate 2014; Tate et al., 2014),
all’aumento delle attività di coordinamento e in generale ai costi di transazione (Gylling et al., 2015; Gray et al., 2013;
Kinkel and Maloca, 2009), alla produttività (Pearce, 2014), alle misure dei lotto di produzione (Canham e Hamilton,
2013). Per quanto riguarda la qualità, diverse esperienze di offshoring riportano lo scarso grado di conformità alle
specifiche raggiunte negli stabilimenti esteri (Joubioux e Vanpoucke, 2016, Stentoft et al., 2015; Arlbjorn e Mikkelsen,
2014; Tate et al., 2014). Anche riguardo la dimensione tempo e flessibilità, la decisione di produrre all’estero tramite
strutture di proprietà o soluzioni di outsourcing spesso porta a tempi di consegna più lunghi, nonché a una minore
affidabilità di produzione e logistica che si è tradotta in una maggiore esposizione al rischio di volatilità della
domanda (Fratocchi et al., 2016; Bailey e De Propris, 2014; Fratocchi et al., 2014). Concentrandosi sul tema della
sostenibilità, dal momento che le normative ambientali e del lavoro tendono a diventare sincronizzate e standardizzate
nei paesi a economia avanzata, gli incentivi che favoriscono l’offshore nei paesi regolamentati in maniera
approssimativa perdono di senso, mentre aumenta il rischio per la reputazione del marchio dell’azienda (Ellram, 2013;
Ellram et al. , 2013; Gray et al., 2013).
Tuttavia, secondo Fratocchi et al. (2015), diverse decisioni di re-shoring non sono correttivi a decisioni prese in
fase di offshoring, piuttosto a cambiamenti nel contesto aziendale e nei fattori specifici dell’impresa. Queste fanno
riferimento a differenze culturali, cambiamenti nelle politiche fiscali, disponibilità di nuove tecnologie di produzione,
riduzione dei divari di produttività tra paesi o tendenze sfavorevoli nei tassi di cambio delle valute o scelte politiche
emergenti volte a rafforzare la produzione interna, come le politiche di rimpatrio di attività manifatturiere da parte
degli Stati Uniti dopo Elezione di Trump (Fratocchi et al., 2015; Stentoft et al., 2015; Arlbjorn and Mikkelsen, 2014;
Bailey and De Propris, 2014; Tate et al., 2014; Ellram et al., 2013; McIvor, 2013). I fattori specifici dell’impresa, a
loro volta, possono includere la vicinanza ai centri di ricerca e sviluppo che possono favorire le capacità di
innovazione dell’azienda, le minacce alla protezione della proprietà intellettuale, il valore strategico del “Made in”, la
necessità di essere più vicini al cliente (Joubioux e Vanpoucke, 2016; Fratocchi et al., 2016; Stentoft et al., 2015;
Bailey and De Propris, 2014; Tate, 2014; Tate et al., 2014; Canham e Hamilton, 2013; Gray et al., 2013).
Diversi contributi hanno indagato, infine, sulla varietà di competenze che devono essere possedute a imprese con
un footprint internazionale (Ferdows, 1997). A questo proposito, è stato dimostrato empiricamente che l’efficacia di
una scelta di delocalizzazione deve tenere conto delle competenze peculiari dello stabilimento offshore (ad esempio,
presidiare i processi tecnici, gestire i fornitori locali e la logistica, contribuire al processo di sviluppo di nuovi
prodotti, gestire le supply chain globali ecc.) e del suo grado di autonomia rispetto alla casa madre.
La review della letteratura sull’Operations Management evidenzia l’esistenza di un numero di fattori determinanti
del successo di una scelta di localizzazione. Questi possono essere sintetizzati come segue:
Coerenza strategica della scelta di localizzazione con la strategia competitiva dell’azienda e con la sua strategia
operativa;
Condizioni dell’ambiente di riferimento, che si riferiscono a cambiamenti nei fattori esogeni capaci di influenzare
l’esito di una scelta di localizzazione;
Fattori specifici dell’impresa, in riferimento alle specificità del settore e delle operations aziendali, e alle
competenze distintive su cui poggia il vantaggio competitivo.
In questo contesto, le scelte di offshoring e reshoring possono essere viste come esiti di un processo decisionale
che, se eseguito correttamente, porta a una scelta di “rightshoring”, che integra e pondera con maggiore attenzione le
opzioni di offshoring. Affrontare questo problema è importante perché, in primo luogo, alcuni dei fattori sopra
menzionati non sono stati adeguatamente discussi nella letteratura esistente (Bals et al., 2016; Fratocchi et al., 2015).
Inoltre, il notevole numero di fallimenti nelle iniziative di offshoring, alla base delle attuali iniziative in risposta di
reshoring o nearshoring, dimostra che il relativo processo decisionale è ancora eseguito in maniera poco strutturata e
questo lo rende un argomento di fondamentale importanza sia per gli accademici che per i professionisti (Tate e Bals,
2017; Bals et al., 2016; Joubioux e Vanpoucke, 2016).
28
IL RIGHTSHORING E LE STRATEGIE DI LOCALIZZAZIONE DELLE ATTIVITÀ DELLE IMPRESE. ALCUNI CASI A CONFRONTO
Questo lavoro presenta i risultati preliminari di uno studio in corso di svolgimento, che intende capire come e
perché i fattori sopra citati possono influenzare le decisioni sulla localizzazione, determinandone il buon esito nel
tempo. L’analisi empirica presentata adotta il metodo del multiple case study, ritenuta la più coerente per le finalità del
nostro lavoro (Yin, 2003, Voss et al., 2002; Meredith, 1998; McCutcheon and Meredith, 1993; Eisenhardt, 1989). Sulla
base della letteratura esistente, è stato sviluppato il framework di riferimento rappresentato nella Figura 1.
Fig. 1: Il modello teorico di riferimento
Condizioni
dell’ambiente
esterno
Coerenza
strategica
Successo
della scelta di
localizzazione
Fattori
specifici
dell’impresa
Fonte: Elaborazione propria
A causa della vasta gamma di fattori specifici che possono essere trovati nelle tre tipologie di determinanti
descritte nella Figura 1, è stato deciso di esaminare diversi casi studio, ciascuno con le proprie specificità in termini di
settore, strategia competitiva, dimensioni, struttura della proprietà. Ai fini del paper sono stati considerate 8 case
history. In tutti questi casi, l’unità di analisi principale è stata una specifica decisione di localizzazione di attività presa
nel recente passato (offshoring o reshoring).
Le interviste e la raccolta dei dati sono state effettuate secondo un protocollo di ricerca finalizzato ad affrontare i
principali costrutti del quadro di riferimento. A tal fine, sono stati intervistati sia il responsabile delle operations, sia i
manager direttamente coinvolti nella decisione dell’ubicazione o in grado di riferire riguardo la storia e i suoi risultati.
Risultati. I risultati preliminari emersi dallo studio dei casi sono sintetizzate nelle Tabelle 1a e 1b, che descrivono
brevemente le dimensioni dell’azienda, la sua posizione competitiva, l’unità di analisi di ciascun caso studio (es.
progetto di offshoring, progetto di reshoring, produzione attuale) e i fattori rilevanti (tra quelli descritti nel framework
di riferimento in Figura 1) che hanno determinato il successo / fallimento del progetto o hanno plasmato la
configurazione attuale. In particolare, per ogni tipologia di fattori, abbiamo riportato quegli aspetti che hanno guidato
la decisione sulla posizione iniziale e / o che ne hanno determinato il successo / fallimento.
Tab. 1a: Informazioni sintetiche sui casi (A - D)
Dimensioni*
Posizione competitiva
Unità di Analisi
Coerenza strategica
Fattori ambientali nel
business
Fattori specifici propri
Caso A
Media
Leader mondiale
Reshoring
-
Velocità
dinamismo
flessibilità
Rilevanza della
reattività
Caso B
Grande
Fra i leader mondiali
Modalità di produzione
attuale
- Qualità
Regolamentazione
Fonte: Elaborazione propria
*
In base alla definizione dimensionale delle imprese stabilita dall’Unione Europea.
29
Caso C
Piccola
Nicchia
Modalità di produzione
attuale
- Flessibilità
produttiva
- Rilevanza
della
reattività
- Made in Italy
- prossimità con il
cliente
Caso D
Media
Leader mondiale
Modalità di produzione
attuale
- Flessibilità
produttiva
- Prossimità
cliente
con
il
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
Tab. 1b: Informazioni sintetiche sui casi (E H)
Dimensioni*
Posizione competitiva
Unità di Analisi
Coerenza strategica
Fattori ambientali nel
business
Fattori specifici propri
Caso E
Piccola
Nicchi
Reshoring
- Qualità
Caso F
Media-Grande
Nicchia
Modalità di produzione attuale
- Qualità
- Flessibilità nei lotti di
produzione
- flessibilità di prodotto
Caso G
grande
Leader mondiale
Offshoring
- Costo
Caso H
Grande
Fra i Leader mondiale
Offshoring
- Costo
- Prodotto Flessibilità
- Crescente
divario
nella produttività
Prossimità con il cliente
Prossimità
cliente
con
il
Fonte: Elaborazione propria
Come si può vedere nelle Tabelle 1a e 1b, tutte le imprese osservate in questo studio hanno riflettuto soprattutto
sulla rilevanza dei fattori di “Coerenza strategica” nella decisione di localizzazione. Infatti, a prescindere dall’unità di
analisi, tutti gli intervistati hanno sostenuto che uno dei principali driver della decisione riguardava la necessità
/opportunità di migliorare la performance operativa. Tra i più citati, il costo, la qualità del prodotto e la flessibilità
(nelle sue varie forme) sembrano essere le aree di interesse più rilevanti, la cui sottovalutazione può determinare una
successiva decisione di rimpatrio o addirittura la decisione di rinunciare a un’opzione di delocalizzazione.
I “fattori ambientali del business” (considerati come cambiamenti avvenuti nel settore) sono stati menzionati da
tre società (A, C ed E), tutte operanti nel settore del fashion. Infatti, le società A e C hanno evidenziato la crescente
rilevanza del concetto di reattività alle richieste del mercato e di innovazione continua, che richiedono processi di
produzione e consegna rapidi. Le pressioni competitive hanno portato l’azienda A ad avvicinare geograficamente al
mercato la sua produzione; l’azienda C ha deciso di non apportare alcuna modifica al suo processo di produzione, già
baricentrato in Italia. D’altra parte, la società E ha evidenziato che l’aumento della produttività dei paesi occidentali
rende l’opzione di delocalizzazione meno attraente.
Passando ai “fattori specifici dell’impresa”, in due casi (B e C), si è fatto riferimento esplicito alle specificità delle
loro industrie, che sono, nel caso B, il rigido sistema normativo, e nel caso C la rilevanza del “Made in Italy”. Questi
fattori hanno portato entrambe le aziende alla decisione di mantenere il loro sistema di produzione in Italia.
Nell’ambito dei “fattori specifici dell’impresa” sono incluse anche le questioni relative alla necessità di
integrazione operativa con le altre funzioni aziendali. Questa condizione è stata menzionata da quattro aziende (C, D,
F e H) e in tutti i casi è stata evidenziata la rilevanza della prossimità al cliente. In effetti, la necessità di far fronte alla
volatilità della domanda (interfaccia con Marketing & Sales) e di adattare i prodotti alle esigenze dei clienti locali
(interfaccia con R & S) sta diventando sempre più rilevante nell’ottimizzazione dei processi produttivi.
Limiti della ricerca. Questo contributo presenta i risultati di uno studio esplorativo, condotto su un numero
limitato di casi che, date le finalità della ricerca, sono stati selezionati intenzionalmente in settori tra loro diversi. Di
conseguenza, gli spunti empirici offerti da questo lavoro dovranno essere testati con ulteriori approfondimenti, che
testino la validità dei risultati in imprese accomunate dalla appartenenza allo stesso settore, oltre che da analoghe
caratteristiche del sistema produttivo.
Implicazioni pratiche. Questo paper si basa sui contributi esistenti su offshoring / reshoring e su quelli che
riguardano la decisione sulla localizzazione, con riferimento particolare alla letteratura di Operations Management
(Fratocchi et al., 2016; Fratocchi et al., 2015; Tate, 2014; Tate et al ., 2014; Ellram, 2013; Ellram et al., 2013; Gray et
al., 2013; McIvor, 2013). Come affermato da studi recenti (Tate e Bals, 2017, Joubioux e Vanpoucke, 2016), non esiste
un luogo che possa essere considerato ottimale per ogni azienda, poiché vari fattori, sia endogeni che esogeni, possono
determinare il risultato finale di una delocalizzazione o di una scelta di reshoring. In questo lavoro abbiamo voluto
esplorare il concetto di “rightshoring”, cercando di capire se e come i fattori rilevanti evidenziati in letteratura
possano guidare il successo di una localizzazione (Bals et al., 2016) ; Fratocchi et al., 2016; Joubioux e Vanpoucke,
2016; Fratocchi et al., 2015; Sten-toft et al., 2015; Arlbjorn e Mikkelsen, 2014; Bailey e De Propris, 2014; Tate et al.,
2014; Tate, 2014; Ellram et al., 2013; McIvor, 2013; Gray et al., 2013).
I primi risultati derivanti dal nostro studio confermano che tutti i fattori presenti nel nostro quadro teorico
svolgono un ruolo nel processo decisionale relativo alla localizzazione e al suo buon esito.
In questo contesto, sarà necessario indagare ulteriormente la sequenza corretta in cui tali fattori e condizioni
abilitanti dovrebbero essere considerati nel processo decisionale, in modo da abbandonare immediatamente possibili
iniziative che sono inadatte per l’azienda, soprattutto in chiave operativa. Il nostro studio mostra che la maggior parte
dell’attenzione è dedicata ai fattori di “Coerenza strategica”, mentre gli altri acquisiscono rilevanza in una fase
successiva, quando un investimento è già stato fatto e può essere difficilmente invertito.
Nel medio lungo termine, ci aspettiamo che nel mondo occidentale il reshoring sarà potenziato dal miglioramento
delle imprese nei segmenti superiori dei loro mercati e dall’uso di tecnologie manifatturiere avanzate che permettono
30
IL RIGHTSHORING E LE STRATEGIE DI LOCALIZZAZIONE DELLE ATTIVITÀ DELLE IMPRESE. ALCUNI CASI A CONFRONTO
di incidere sull’economia della produzione, rendendo molto meno labour-intensive il processo.
Oltre alle implicazioni gestionali di un approccio di rightshoring alle decisioni di localizzazione strategica, i
risultati di questo studio mostrano interessanti implicazioni di politica industriale e fiscale. Di fatto, i governi di tutto il
mondo hanno utilizzato, annunciato o pianificato incentivi finanziari nel tentativo di attrarre le aziende a tornare nei
loro paesi. La logica di queste politiche mira a sostenere la crescita economica e la creazione di posti di lavoro.
Tuttavia, è importante non sovrastimare l’impatto del reshoring sui posti di lavoro e l’efficacia degli incentivi fiscali
sulla decisione delle imprese di riportare indietro le attività che avevano precedentemente delegato.
Da un lato, ridurre il carico fiscale sul lavoro e sviluppare competenze chiave, ampliare l’accesso alle misure
finanziarie, sostenere le imprese innovative e ridurre i costi di capitale attraverso le agevolazioni fiscali sono
certamente le politiche che migliorano l’ambiente e la competitività delle imprese nazionali. Peraltro ciò contribuirà
probabilmente ad attrarre investimenti stranieri e potrebbe anche aiutare alcune aziende a rimpatriare attività
precedentemente delocalizzate all’estero.
Dall’altro, i primi risultati della nostra ricerca suggeriscono che significativi incentivi fiscali non
necessariamente soddisfano l’obiettivo di indurre le aziende a tornare nei loro paesi quando le decisioni di
delocalizzazione sono basate su molteplici fattori, oltre al semplice abbassamento dei costi operativi. In questo quadro
è prevedibile immaginare che la decisione delle aziende sul trasferimento delle loro attività sarà probabilmente guidata
da un nuovo posizionamento strategico nel mercato globale, piuttosto che dall’esistenza di incentivi fiscali di per sé.
Originalità del lavoro. Il principale elemento di originalità di questo studio consiste nell’affrontare il tema
dell’offshoring/reshoring nella prospettiva dei processi decisionali, con l’intento di verificare quali fattori possano
incidere sul successo della decisione adottata.
Parole chiave: reshoring; rightshoring; operations management; scelte di localizzazione.
Bibliografia
ARLBJØRN J.S., MIKKELSEN O.S. (2014), “Backshoring manufacturing: Notes on an important but under-researched theme”,
Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management, vol. 20, n. 1, pp. 60-62.
BAILEY D., DE PROPRIS L. (2014), “Manufacturing reshoring and its limits: the UK automotive case”, Cambridge Journal of
Regions, Economy and Society, rsu019.
BALS L., KIRCHOFF J.F., FOERSTL K. (2016), “Exploring the reshoring and insourcing decision making process: toward an
agenda for future research”, Operations Management Research, vol. 9, n. 3-4, pp. 102-116.
BELVEDERE V., GALLMANN F. (2014), “The alignment among competitive strategy, operations improvement priorities and
manufacturing and logistics performance measurement systems. Evidence from a case-based study”, In Models and Methods
in economics and management science (pp. 221-241), Springer International Publishing.
BELVEDERE V., GRANDO A. (2017), Sustainable Operations and Supply Chain Management, John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken, NJ.
BOOTH T. (2014) “Here, There and Everywhere”, The Economist Newspaper, 19 Jan. 2013. Web. 22 Dec. 2014.
CANHAM S., HAMILTON R.T. (2013), “SME internationalisation: offshoring, “backshoring”, or staying at home in New Zealand”,
Strategic Outsourcing: An International Journal, vol. 6, n. 3, pp. 277-291.
DE BACKER K., MENON C., DESNOYERS-JAMES I., MOUSSIEGT L. (2016), “Reshoring: myth or reality?”, OECD Science,
technology and industry policy papers, no. 27, OECD Publishing, paris.http://dx.doi.org/10.1787/5jm56frbm38s-en
EISENHARDT K.M. (1989), “Building Theories from Case Study Research”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 14, n. 4, pp.
532-550.
ELKINGTON J. (1997), Cannibals with forks: The Triple Bottom Line of 21st century business, Capstone Publishing Ltd, Oxford.
ELLRAM L.M. (2013), “Offshoring, reshoring and the manufacturing location decision”, Journal of Supply Chain Management, vol.
49, n. 2, pp. 3-5.
ELLRAM L.M., TATE W.L., PETERSEN K.J. (2013), “Offshoring and reshoring: an update on the manufacturing location
decision”, Journal of Supply Chain Management, vol. 49, n. 2, pp. 14-22.
FERDOWS K. (1997), “Making the most of foreign factories”, Harvard Business Review, n. 75, pp. 73-91.
FRATOCCHI L., ANCARANI A., BARBIERI P., DI MAURO C., NASSIMBENI G., SARTOR M., ZANONI A. (2016),
“Motivations of manufacturing reshoring: an interpretative framework”, International Journal of Physical Distribution &
Logistics Management, vol. 46, n. 2, pp. 98-127.
FRATOCCHI L., ANCARANI A., BARBIERI P., DI MAURO C., NASSIMBENI G., SARTOR M., VIGNOLI M., ZANONI A.
(2015), “Manufacturing back-reshoring as a nonlinear internationalization process”, In The future of global organizing (pp.
365-403), Emerald Group Publishing Limited.
FRATOCCHI L., DI MAURO C., BARBIERI P., NASSIMBENI G., ZANONI A. (2014), “When manufacturing moves back:
concepts and questions”, Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management, vol. 20, n. 1, pp. 54-59.
GAUTHIER C. (2005), “Measuring corporate social and environmental performance: The extended lifecycle assessment”, Journal of
Business Ethics, vol. 59, n. 1-2, pp. 199-206.
GRANDO A., TAPIERO C.S., BELVEDERE V. (2007), “Operational performances in manufacturing and service industries:
conceptual framework and research agenda”, International Journal of Business Performance Management, vol. 9. n. 2, pp.
110-126.
GRAY J.V., SKOWRONSKI K., ESENDURAN G., JOHNNY RUNGTUSANATHAM M. (2013), “The reshoring phenomenon:
what supply chain academics ought to know and should do”, Journal of Supply Chain Management, vol. 49, n. 2, pp. 27-33.
GYLLING M., HEIKKILÄ J., JUSSILA K., SAARINEN M. (2015), “Making decisions on offshore outsourcing and backshoring: A
case study in the bicycle industry”, International Journal of Production Economics, vol. 162, pp. 92-100.
31
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
JOUBIOUX C., VANPOUCKE E. (2016), “Towards right-shoring: a framework for off-and re-shoring decision making”,
Operations Management Research, vol. 9, n. 3-4, pp. 117-132.
KINKEL S., MALOCA S. (2009), “Drivers and antecedents of manufacturing offshoring and backshoring-A German perspective”,
Journal of Purchasing and Supply Management, vol. 15, n. 3, pp. 154-165.
LEONG G.K., SNYDER D.L., WARD P.T. (1990), “Research in the process and content of manufacturing strategy. OMEGA
International Journal of Management Science, vol. 18, n. 2, pp. 109-122.
MCCUTCHEON D.M., MEREDITH J.R. (1993), Conducting case study research in operations management”, Journal of Operations
Management, vol. 11, n. 3, pp. 239-256.
McIVOR R. (2013), “Understanding the manufacturing location decision: the case for the transaction cost and capability
perspectives”, Journal of Supply Chain Management, vol. 49, n. 2, pp. 23-26.
MEREDITH J. (1998), “Building operations management theory through case and field research”, Journal of Operations
Management, vol. 16, n. 4, pp. 441-454.
NEELY A., GREGORY M., PLATTS K. (1995), “Performance measurement system design. A literature review and a research
agenda”, International Journal of Operations and Production Management, vol. 15, n. 4, pp. 80-116.
NEELY A. (2005), “The evolution of performance measurement research: Developments in the last decade and a research agenda for
the next”, International Journal of Operations and Production Management, vol. 25, n. 12, pp. 1264-1277.
PEARCE J.A. (2014), “Why domestic outsourcing is leading America’s reemergence in global manufacturing”, Business Horizons,
vol. 57, n. 1, pp. 27-36.
SKINNER W. (1969), “Manufacturing - missing link in corporate strategy”, Harvard Business Review, May-June, pp. 136-145.
SKINNER W. (1974), “The focused factory”, Harvard Business Review, May-June, pp. 113-121.
STENTOFT J., MIKKELSEN O.S., JOHNSEN T.E. (2015), “Going local: a trend towards insourcing of production?”, Supply Chain
Forum: An International Journal, vol. 16, n. 1, pp. 2-13.
STENTOFT J., OLHAGER J., HEIKKILÄ J., THOMS L. (2016), “Manufacturing backshoring: a systematic literature review”,
Operations Management Research, vol. 9, n. 3-4, pp. 53-61.
TATE W.L. (2014), “Offshoring and reshoring: US insights and research challenges”, Journal of Purchasing and Supply
Management, vol. 20, n. 1, pp. 66-68.
TATE W.L., BALS L. (2017), “Outsourcing/offshoring insights: going beyond reshoring to rightshoring”, International Journal of
Physical Distribution & Logistics Management, vol. 47, n. 2/3.
TATE W.L., ELLRAM L.M., SCHOENHERR T., PETERSEN K.J. (2014), “Global competitive conditions driving the
manufacturing location decision”, Business Horizons, vol. 57, n. 3, pp. 381-390.
VOSS C., TSIKRIKTSIS N., FROHLICH M. (2002), “Case research in operations management”, International Journal of
Operations and Production Management, vol. 22, n. 2, pp. 195.
WISNER J.D., FAWCETT S.E. (1991), “Link firm strategy to operating decisions through performance measurement”, Production
and Inventory Management Journal, vol. 32, n. 3, pp, 5-11.
YIN R.K. (2003), Applications of Case Study Research - second edition, Sage publications, U.S.A.
32
Effetti competitivi della sharing economy nei servizi ricettivi
AURELIO G. MAURI* ROBERTA MINAZZI RUGGERO SAINAGHI
Obiettivi. L’evoluzione delle tecnologie dell’informazione e della comunicazione avvenuta nell’ultimo decennio
ha influenzato fortemente la distribuzione dei servizi alberghieri innescando nuove dinamiche competitive (Buhalis e
Law, 2008; Buhalis e Leung 2018) in un business già caratterizzato da forte complessità (Casarin, 1996; Rispoli e
Tamma, 1996). Lo sviluppo delle Online Travel Agency (OTA) (Toh et al. 2011) e delle più recenti piattaforme peer-topeer, che operano secondo il modello della sharing economy, ha profondamente modificato la struttura del settore
ricettivo. In particolare, la sharing economy e le nuove forme distributive online di servizi di alloggio hanno
significativamente sviluppato la commercializzazione di servizi di “non-hotel accommodation” che inoltre non
risultano più solo limitati alle fasce di mercato con minore capacità di spesa e leisure (HVS, 2014). Queste tendenze
hanno la capacità di impattare negativamente sulle performance degli hotel (Xie e Kwok, 2017) che, specie in alcuni
segmenti di mercato e per certi livelli di servizio, incontrano nuovi temibili concorrenti (HVV, 2014; HNN, 2014) e una
maggiore visibilità di affittacamere privati, B&B e di tutte le altre forme di non-hotel accommodation (Minazzi, 2017).
Alcuni studi (Balaguer e Pernías, 2013; Becerra et al., 2013) hanno già evidenziato che le tariffe alberghiere risultano
negativamente influenzate dal numero e dalla prossimità di hotel concorrenti. Ora questa concorrenza ulteriore (extraalberghiera) è inoltre rappresenta da competitor difficili da monitorare con le tecniche tradizionali e per di più oggetto
di diverse regolamentazioni (Guttentag, 2015)
La sharing economy sta profondamente modificando i modelli di consumo (Botsman e Rogers, 2010), anche nel
business turistico (Tussyadiah e Pesonen, 2016) rappresentando un'alternativa valida per soddisfare una varietà di
bisogni dei consumatori in cerca di un alloggio. Il modello di business sviluppato da Airbnb è considerato un esempio
di “disruptive innovation” (Guttentag, 2015; Markides, 2016; Boswijk, 2017; Guttentag e Smith, 2017). Nel campo
alberghiero, alcuni studi hanno evidenziato che l’entrata di Airbnb nel mercato ha avuto un impatto negativo e
quantificabile sui ricavi soprattutto per gli hotel di fascia media ed economica che sono risultati più vulnerabili alla
maggiore concorrenza di Airbnb (Zervas et al., 2015 and 2017; Guttentag e Smith, 2017). Partendo da tale rapporto di
sostitutività, Mody et al. (2017) analizza il servizio offerto da hotel e Airbnb evidenziando come Airbnb sembri offrire
una migliore esperienza rispetto agli alberghi.
La maggior presenza, visibilità e facilità di commercializzazione di servizi di alloggio turistico non alberghiero
impatta sulla struttura di offerta delle destinazioni mutandone sia la dimensione quantitativa sia quella qualitativa. Ciò
può avere importanti conseguenze a livello competitivo per le strutture alberghiere operanti nel territorio. Conseguenze
tanto maggiori nella misura in cui, con maggiore frequenza, i viaggiatori considerano la ricettività non alberghiera
come un’alternativa all’ospitalità alberghiera, se non addirittura la prima scelta. Un passo fondamentale nel processo
di acquisto del cliente, che prenota online, è la selezione della piattaforma da utilizzare. Le piattaforme peer-to peer
hanno guadagnato terreno e oggi si affiancano alle OTA nella distribuzione del servizio ricettivo. Peraltro, le OTA al
loro interno danno uno spazio sempre più consistente a forme di ricettività non alberghiera. Ne scaturisce che, a fronte
della richiesta del cliente di una certa destinazione, di una certa data e di un certo livello di servizio vengono
congiuntamente proposti dalle piattaforme soluzioni alberghiere e non alberghiere concorrenti.
Le più recenti evoluzioni del modello di business Airbnb, con l’apertura della piattaforma a boutique hotels e
B&B, confermano anche il suo ruolo concorrenziale nei confronti delle principali OTA anche in considerazione delle
commissioni molto inferiori richieste (Minazzi, 2017). Per questi motivi il business “non-hotel accommodation” sta
diventando un campo di investimento per grandi gruppi alberghieri e della distribuzione turistica.
In considerazione dei fenomeni precedentemente illustrati, il presente lavoro si propone di indagare i rapporti di
concorrenza e sostitutività fra servizi di alloggio offerti da alberghi (hotel), servizi di alloggio non alberghieri
(affittacamere, B&B) e servizi di alloggio venduti tramite piattaforme di sharing economy (quali Airbnb). Si tratta di
servizi considerati diversi oppure i viaggiatori li percepiscono come soluzioni di alloggio fra loro alternative?
*
Associato di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - IULM University (Italy)
e-mail: aurelio.mauri@iulm.it
Associato Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - University of Insubria (Italy)
e-mail: roberta.minazzi@uninsubria.it
Associato Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - IULM University (Italy)
e-mail: ruggero.sainaghi@iulm.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
33
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.06
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
Metodologia. I rapporti di concorrenza e sostitutività fra servizi di alloggio offerti da alberghi (hotel) e servizi
di alloggio non alberghieri sono studiati mediante un’indagine esplorativa. In particolare, è stato elaborato un
questionario online somministrato a un gruppo di giovani adulti, i cosiddetti Millennials, il segmento più dinamico nel
mercato dei viaggi online (Veiga et al., 2017) e particolarmente esperto nelle scelte di acquisti turistici, anche con
canali e formule innovative. Tale metodologia è conforme a studi pregressi (Mauri e Minazzi, 2013). Infatti, il consumo
collaborativo è associato alle caratteristiche socio-demografiche degli utilizzatori e la letteratura suggerisce una
maggiore rilevanza delle fasce d’età più giovani (Guttentag, 2015; Tussyadiah e Pesonen, 2016; Godelnik, 2017;
Amaro et al. 2018).
Un primo step ha riguardato la progettazione del questionario di indagine testato su un focus group di studenti di
Laurea Magistrale composta da circa 20 studenti rappresentativi del gruppo Millennials (giovani adulti con istruzione
universitaria). Il questionario è stato elaborato mediante il software SurveyMonkey ed è poi stato distribuito tramite
una piattaforma universitaria di e-learning.
Per quanto riguarda le domande dell’indagine, una prima sezione del questionario intende verificare se in sede di
scelte di prenotazione le soluzioni extra-alberghiere si sovrappongono a quelle alberghiere e in che misura. In
particolare, il quesito specifico si riferisce a Airbnb perché considerato in letteratura il principale esempio di
piattaforma peer-to-peer nel settore dell’ospitalità (Guttentag, 2015; Ert et al., 2016; Oskam e Boswijk, 2016). 150
milioni di ospiti hanno scelto dal 2008 questa piattaforma che conta 3 milioni di offerte in 65.000 città e 191 paesi del
mondo (Airbnb, 2017).
Una seconda parte dell’indagine ha l’obiettivo di individuare i criteri più utilizzati per le scelte del luogo di
pernottamento e la loro importanza relativa. Per l’individuazione di tali criteri, si è in primis fatto riferimento a quanto
rilevato dalla letteratura in materia (Tussyadiah e Pesonen, 2016; Guttentag e Smith, 2017; Guttentag, et al., 2017). La
lista iniziale è stata integrata sulla base di quanto è emerso dal focus group.
Una terza parte, infine, contiene una serie di quesiti riguardanti variabili socio-demografici e comportamentali
degli intervistati: i canali di acquisto, l’età del rispondente, la frequenza delle prenotazioni, i motivi dei viaggi.
I partecipanti all’indagine sono in totale 240 studenti universitari per il 76,7% di sesso femminile. Per quanto
riguarda la frequenza del soggiorno, la maggior parte (55,2%) ha soggiornato da 4 a 10 volte fuori casa nell’ultimo
anno. Infine, la motivazione leisure risulta nettamente prevalente rispetto alla business anche in considerazione del
profilo degli intervistati.
Risultati. La ricerca evidenzia i seguenti risultati. Prima di tutto emerge la tendenza a utilizzare prevalentemente
per la prenotazione piattaforme online, anche di diverso tipo (il 90% prenota sulle OTA e il 45% su siti di sharing
economy). Per contro, appare ridotto l’impiego delle forme di vendita tradizionale e di siti proprietari delle strutture
ricettive. Questo primo risultato conferma la precedente letteratura sul tema dell’evoluzione della distribuzione
turistica con l’avvento delle nuove tecnologie (Toh et al., 2011; Law et al., 2015). Tema centrale poichè in funzione del
canale di prenotazione cambia la marginalità per il soggetto che gestisce la struttura ricettiva.
Emerge anche la significativa sostitutività che intercorre fra i servizi di alloggio: quasi l’84% dei rispondenti
considera contestualmente e comparativamente strutture alberghiere e non alberghiere. La Tabella 1 mostra il grado di
sostitutività fra hotel e servizi di alloggio non alberghieri (affittacamere, B&B) e servizi di alloggio venduti tramite
piattaforme di sharing economy (quali Airbnb). Come si può notare una significativa maggioranza esprime una
valutazione positiva ossia riscontra un elevato livello di sostitutività fra hotel e servizi non alberghieri quali B&B e
Airbnb. Il grado di sostitutività risulta leggermente maggiore nel confronto fra hotel e B&B, rispetto a Airbnb
probabilmente a causa della maggiore conoscenza di queste prime formule di alloggio non alberghiero da parte della
clientela. La formula del B&B risulta infatti consolidata e già offerta in vendita da tempo dalle principali OTA.
Nell’ambito dei criteri di scelta della struttura nella quale alloggiare (Tabella 2) i più rilevanti risultano:
1. la posizione (location). Ciò conformemente al vecchio adagio dell’hotellerie che alla domanda su quali sono i 3
principali elementi di successo di un albergo rispondeva: location, location, location.
2. Il prezzo. Le tariffe si dimostrano ancora un elemento importante (Book et al., 2015). Questo da un lato conferma
la principale motivazione per la scelta di Airbnb evidenziata dalla letteratura: la convenienza rispetto ai canali
più tradizionali (Guttentag, 2015; Priporas et al., 2017 ). Peraltro, si osserva che l’ospitalità non alberghiera non
sia limitata alle fasce del mercato con minore capacità di spesa e che si accresce sempre di più l’importanza di
fattori culturali e sociali nella scelta come indicato al successivo punto 5. In questo quadro l’allargarsi della
concorrenza può operare pressioni sul prezzo degli hotel.
3. La sicurezza. Si tratta di un aspetto, sia in termini di safety e di security, da non trascurare specie nella sharing
economy e in contesti ove sia presente il terrorismo. Tale risultato conferma precedenti studi che evidenziano la
dimensione della sicurezza come uno dei fattori più critici nella percezione della qualità del servizio di Airbnb
(Forgacs e Dimanche, 2016; Priporas et al., 2017).
4. Le recensioni dei clienti. Hanno la capacità di influenzare sia le aspettative sia le intenzioni di acquisto della
clientela. Lo studio contribuisce al filone di studi sul tema de ruolo del passaparola confermando l’importanza
delle recensioni dei clienti nell’influenzare le scelte e le intenzioni di acquisto della clientela (Mauri e Minazzi,
2013; Ladhari e Michaud, 2015; Viglia et al., 2016; Liang et al., 2018).
5. Possibilità di vivere un’esperienza “locale”. Soprattutto nel caso della scelta di Airbnb, la motivazione legata alla
ricerca di autenticità e di entrare in contatto con la popolazione locale risulta particolarmente importante. Questo
risultato supporta la letteratura sul tema che identifica nel rapporto con fra host e guest un primo passo per
34
EFFETTI COMPETITIVI DELLA SHARING ECONOMY NEI SERVIZI RICETTIVI
6.
entrare in contatto con la cultura locale (Liang et al., 2018). Nonostante un criterio nella scelta delle piattaforme
collaborative come Airbnb sia ancora fortemente legata alla ricerca della convenienza, si rileva anche in questo
studio una crescente importanza del ruolo di fattori sociali e culturali nella scelta supportando gli studi di Ikkala
and Lampinen (2015), Lee et al. (2015), Möhlmann (2015) e Zhu et al., (2017).
Brand conosciuto. Si osserva che alcuni aspetti, come il brand della catena, risultano di minore rilevanza, anche
nel veicolare un’informazione adeguata alle esigenze della clientela, meglio soddisfatta dalle recensioni degli
ospiti. Si riscontra rispetto al passato quindi una perdita di significatività del brand nella determinazione del
prezzo (Wang e Nicolau, 2017).
Tab. 1: Nello scegliere la struttura dove pernottare quanto consideri un B&B/Airbnb sostituto di un hotel?
(Valori da 1 = per nulla a 5 = moltissimo) (Valori percentuali)
Fonte: nostre elaborazioni
Tab. 2: Aspetti più rilevanti considerati nella scelta della struttura ricettiva (valori da 1 a 5). Medie ponderate
Posizione (location)
Prezzo
Sicurezza
Recensioni dei clienti
Durata del soggiorno
Possibilità di vivere un'esperienza "locale"
Caratteristiche e dimensioni della camera
Personalizzazione del servizio
Brand conosciuto
Possibilità di socializzazione
4,6
4,3
4,2
4,0
3,8
3,5
3,2
2,8
2,7
2,5
Fonte: nostre elaborazioni
Infine, l’indagine empirica condotta mostra come i Millennials e in particolare il segmento maggiormente istruito
(oggetto di approfondimento nel presente lavoro di ricerca) mostra una particolare predisposizione sia alla sharing
economy, sia al superamento della distinzione tra strutture alberghiere e non alberghiere. È quindi ragionevole
attendersi una significativa accelerazione nelle dinamiche competitive tra le varie forme di offerta man mano che i
Millennials sostituiranno altri segmenti di domanda (per effetto delle dinamiche demografiche).
Limiti della ricerca. Lo studio si trova attualmente in una fase esplorativa e presenta quindi alcuni limiti. Il
campione dovrà essere necessariamente ampliato per comprendere una più ampia fascia di età con occupazione e
motivazioni differenti, al fine di diventare rappresentativo del viaggiatore italiano. Questo secondo livello di
approfondimento dell’analisi potrebbe essere poi replicata anche per altre nazionalità per studiare i diversi modelli di
consumo dei viaggiatori. Inoltre, il campione composto da studenti universitari condiziona la motivazione del viaggio
indagata. Circa il 95% dei rispondenti dichiara di aver viaggiato prevalentemente ed esclusivamente per motivi di
vacanza. Per il futuro risulta utile estendere la ricerca anche il rapporto di sostitutività percepito dai viaggiatori
business.
Implicazioni pratiche. Dal punto di vista delle implicazioni manageriali, cambia il quadro dei concorrenti che
costituiscono il cosiddetto competitive set di una struttura alberghiera e che comunemente sono monitorati, anche
mediante provider di dati come STR, ai fini delle politiche di pricing e revenue management, nonché di misurazione e
controllo delle performance. Nello specifico, il presente contributo conferma il significativo rapporto di sostitutività fra
strutture alberghiere e “non-hotel accommodation” confermando l’importanza che le imprese alberghiere debbano
avere una visione più ampliata della concorrenza e che tale visione debba essere supportata da strumenti operativi di
monitoraggio e controllo. Inoltre, i risultati relativi ai criteri di scelta degli ospiti possono offrire utili informazioni per
35
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
la definizione delle future strategie di sviluppo di operatori alberghieri ed extra-alberghieri. Infine, i risultati e i più
recenti sviluppi del modello di business di Airbnb confermano l’opportunità per gli alberghi singoli di qualsiasi fascia
di servizio (specialmente B&B e boutique hotels) di considerare le piattaforme collaborative, e in particolare Airbnb,
come eventuale canale di distribuzione dei propri servizi.
Originalità del lavoro. Il presente studio contribuisce alla letteratura su vari temi di grande rilevanza
nell’attuale contesto economico-sociale. Seppur la Sharing economy sia stata oggetto di vari studi, pochi si sono
concentrati sui rapporti di concorrenza e sostitutività fra servizi di alloggio offerti da alberghi (hotel), servizi di
alloggio non alberghieri (affittacamere, B&B) e servizi di alloggio venduti tramite piattaforme di sharing economy
(quali Airbnb). Questo argomento risulta centrale per le sue implicazioni sui modelli di consumo della clientela e sulla
struttura competitiva del business ricettivo. I risultati del presente lavoro contribuiscono a sviluppare la letteratura sul
tema confermando il ruolo di concorrenti delle piattaforme peer-to-peer nel business della ricettività turistica, in
particolare Airbnb (Zervas, Proserpio e Byers, 2015, 2017).
In un contesto caratterizzato prevalentemente da studi a carattere qualitativo (Liang et al. 2018), l’indagine,
seppur ancora in forma esplorativa e con i limiti precedentemente indicati, adotta un approccio empirico e contribuisce
a fornire risultati anche di natura quantitativa.
Parole chiave: sharing economy; Airbnb; concorrenza; hospitality; hotels.
Bibliografia
AMARO S., ANDREU L., HUANG S. (2018), “Millenials’ intentions to book on Airbnb”, Current Issues in Tourism, pp. 1-15, doi:
10.1080/13683500.2018.1448368.
BALAGUER J., PERNÍAS J.C. (2013), “Relationship between spatial agglomeration and hotel prices. Evidence from business and
tourism consumers”, Tourism Management, vol. 36, June, pp. 391-400.
BECERRA M., SANTALÓ, J., SILVA, R. (2013), “Being better vs. being different: Differentiation, competition, and pricing
strategies in the Spanish hotel industry”, Tourism Management, vol. 34, February, pp. 71-79.
BOOK L.A., TANFORD S., MONTGOMERY R., & LOVE C. (2015), “Online traveler reviews as social influence: Price is no
longer king”, Journal of Hospitality & Tourism Research, vol. 42, n. 3, pp. 445-475.
BOSWIJK A. (2017), “Transforming Business Value through Digitalized Networks: A Case Study on the Value Drivers of Airbnb”,
Journal of Creating Value, vol. 3, n. 1, pp. 104-114.
BOTSMAN R., ROGERS R. (2010), What’s mine is yours: the rise of collaborative consumption. HarperCollins: NY.
BUHALIS D., LAW R. (2008), “Progress in information technology and tourism management: 20 years on and 10 years after the
Internet-The state of eTourism research”, Tourism Management, vol. 29, n. 4, pp. 609-623.
BUHALIS D., LEUNG, R. (2018), “Smart hospitality-Interconnectivity and interoperability towards an ecosystem”, International
Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 71, April, pp. 41-50.
CASARIN F. (1996), Il marketing dei servizi turistici. Specificità e varietà, Giappichelli, Torino.
ERT E., FLEISCHER A., MAGEN, N. (2016), “Trust and reputation in the sharing economy: the role of personal photos in Airbnb”,
Tourism Management, vol. 55, pp. 62-73.
FORGACS G., DIMANCHE F. (2016), “Revenue challenges for hotels in the sharing economy: facing the Airbnb menace”, Journal
of Revenue and Pricing Management, vol. 15, n. 6, pp. 509-515.
GODELNIK R. (2017), “Millennials and the sharing economy: Lessons from a ‘buy nothing new, share everything month’project”,
Environmental Innovation and Societal Transitions, vol. 23, June, pp. 40-52.
GUTTENTAG D. (2015), “Airbnb: disruptive innovation and the rise of an informal tourism accommodation sector”, Current issues
in Tourism, vol. 18, n. 12, pp. 1192-1217.
GUTTENTAG D., SMITH S., POTWARKA L., HAVITZ M. (2017), “Why Tourists Choose Airbnb: A Motivation-Based
Segmentation Study”, Journal of Travel Research, vol. 57, n. 3, pp. 342-359.
GUTTENTAG D.A., SMITH S.L. (2017), “Assessing Airbnb as a disruptive innovation relative to hotels: Substitution and
comparative performance expectations”, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 64, July, pp. 1-10.
HNN (2014), The impact of the sharing economy on hotels.
HVS (2014), Airbnb’s Inroads into the Hotel Industry.
IKKALA T., LAMPINEN A. (2015), “Monetizing network hospitality: hospitality and sociability in the context of Airbnb”, in
Proceedings of the 18th ACM Conference on Computer Supported Cooperative Work & Social Computing. ACM, February.
pp. 1033-1044.
JONES P. (1999), “Operational issues and trends in the hospitality industry”, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol.
18, n. 4, pp. 427-442.
KARATEPE O.M., TIZABI L.Z. (2011), “Work-related depression in the hotel industry: a study in the United Arab Emirates”,
International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, vol. 23, n. 5, pp. 608-623.
KARNANI A., WERNERFELT B. (1985), “Multiple point competition”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 6, n. 1, pp. 87-96.
KIM J.Y., CANINA L. (2011), “Competitive sets for lodging properties”, Cornell Hospitality Quarterly, vol. 52, n. 1, pp. 20-34.
LADHARI R., MICHAUD M. (2015), “eWOM effects on hotel booking intentions, attitudes, trust, and website perceptions”,
International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 46, April, pp. 36-45.
LAW R., LEUNG R., LO A., LEUNG D., FONG L.H.N. (2015), “Distribution channel in hospitality and tourism: Revisiting
disintermediation from the perspectives of hotels and travel agencies”, International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality
Management, vol. 27, n. 3, pp. 431-452.
36
EFFETTI COMPETITIVI DELLA SHARING ECONOMY NEI SERVIZI RICETTIVI
LEE D., HYUN W., RYU J., LEE W.J., RHEE W., SUH B. (2015), “An analysis of social features associated with room sales of
Airbnb”, in Proceedings of the 18th ACM Conference Companion on Computer Supported Cooperative Work & Social
Computing, ACM., pp. 219-222.
LIANG L.J., CHOI H.C., JOPPE M. (2018), “Understanding repurchase intention of Airbnb consumers: Perceived authenticity,
electronic word-of-mouth, and price sensitivity”, Journal of Travel & Tourism Marketing, vol. 35, n. 1, pp. 73-89.
MARKIDES C. (2006), “Disruptive innovation: In need of better theory”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 23, n. 1,
pp. 19-25.
MAURI A.G., MINAZZI R., NIETO-GARCIA M., VIGLIA G. (2018), “Humanize your business. The role of personal reputation in
the sharing economy”, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 73, July, pp. 36-43.
MAURI A.G., MINAZZI R. (2013), “Web reviews influence on expectations and purchasing intentions of hotel potential
customers”, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 34, September, pp. 99-107.
MINAZZI R., “The travel distribution system and Information and Communication Technologies (ICT)” in Dixit, S. K. (Ed.),
(2017), The Routledge Handbook of Consumer Behaviour in Hospitality and Tourism. Taylor & Francis.
MODY M.A., SUESS C., LEHTO X. (2017), “The accommodation experiencescape: A comparative assessment of hotels and
Airbnb”, International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, vol. 29, n. 9, pp. 2377-2404.
MÖHLMANN M. (2015), “Collaborative consumption: determinants of satisfaction and the likelihood of using a sharing economy
option again”, Journal of Consumer Behaviour, vol. 14, February, pp. 193-207.
OSKAM J., BOSWIJK A. (2016), “Airbnb: the future of networked hospitality businesses”, Journal of Tourism Futures, vol. 2, n. 1,
pp. 22-42.
PRIPORAS C.V., STYLOS N. , RAHIMI R., VEDANTHACHARI L.N. (2017), “Unraveling the diverse nature of service quality in
a sharing economy: A social exchange theory perspective of Airbnb accommodation”, International Journal of
Contemporary Hospitality Management, vol. 29, n. 9, pp. 2279-2301.
RISPOLI M., TAMMA M. (1996), Le imprese alberghiere nell’industria dei viaggi e del turismo, Cedam, Padova.
TOH R.S., DEKAY C.F., RAVEN P. (2011), “Travel planning: searching for and booking hotels on the internet”, Cornell
Hospitality Quarterly, vol. 52, n. 4, pp. 388-398.
TUSSYADIAH I.P., PESONEN J. (2016), “Impacts of peer-to-peer accommodation use on travel patterns”, Journal of Travel
Research, vol. 55, n. 8, pp. 1022-1040.
VEIGA C., SANTOS M.C., ÁGUAS P., SANTOS J.A.C. (2017), “Are millennials transforming global tourism? Challenges for
destinations and companies”, Worldwide Hospitality and Tourism Themes, vol. 9, n. 6, pp. 603-616.
VIGLIA G., MINAZZI R., BUHALIS D. (2016), “The influence of e-word-of-mouth on hotel occupancy rate”, International
Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, vol. 28, n. 9, pp. 2035-2051.
WALLSTEN S. (2015), “The competitive effects of the sharing economy: how is Uber changing taxis”, Technology Policy Institute,
June, n. 22, pp. 1-21.
WANG D., NICOLAU J.L. (2017), “Price determinants of sharing economy based accommodation rental: A study of listings from
33 cities on Airbnb.com”, International Journal of Hospitality Management, vol. 62, April, pp. 120-131.
XIE K.L., KWOK L. (2017), “The effects of Airbnb’s price positioning on hotel performance”, International Journal of Hospitality
Management, vol. 67, October, pp. 174-184.
ZERVAS G., PROSERPIO D., BYERS J.W. (2017), “The rise of the sharing economy: Estimating the impact of Airbnb on the hotel
industry”, Journal of Marketing Research, vol. 54, n. 5, pp. 687-705.
ZERVAS G., PROSERPIO D., BYERS J.W. (2015), “The impact of the sharing economy on the hotel industry: evidence from
Airbnb’s entry into the Texas market”, Proceedings of the Sixteenth ACM Conference on Economics and Computation, pp.
637-637.
ZHU G., SO K.K.F., HUDSON S. (2017), “Inside the sharing economy: understanding consumer motivations behind the adoption of
mobile applications”, International Journal of Contemporary Hospitality Management, vol. 29, n. 9, pp. 2218-2239.
37
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
38
Ambidexterity e performance management.
Un’evidenza empirica di implementazione della strategia aziendale
DANIELE BINCI* CORRADO CERRUTI STEFANO ANTONIO DONNARUMMA
PIERLUIGI PALMIGIANI**
Obiettivi. Questo lavoro si propone di analizzare l’implementazione di un modello di business di una grande
multi-utility italiana attraverso il concetto di ambidexterity, uno dei più importanti concetti concernenti la performance
organizzativa (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2013) e il vantaggio competitivo sostenibile (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2008).
Coniato da Duncan (1976), attraverso l’idea di struttura duale, l’ambidexterity rappresenta la capacità organizzativa
di perseguire simultaneamente la tensione tra exploration ed exploitation (March, 1991), tensione ricca di elementi
conflittuali (Danneels, 2002). L’exploration è, infatti, principalmente orientata al lungo periodo e al futuro attraverso
logiche di ricerca, sperimentazione e scoperta conducendo l’organizzazione ai rischi di “failure trap” per una
debolezza del focus sulla capacità di realizzazione: “returns to exploration are more uncertain, more distant in time,
and sometimes a threat to existing organizational units” (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2008, p. 189), mentre l’exploitation è
orientata al breve periodo e al presente, con logiche di refinement, efficienza, ed implementazione (March, 1991,
Raisch e Birkinshaw, 2008), esponendo l’organizzazione ai rischi di “competency trap” in quanto focalizzata sui
risultati di breve periodo “Such organizations [exploitation oriented] will become dominant in the short-run, but will
gradually become obsolescent and fail” (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2008, p. 189). Queste differenti prospettive richiedono
differenti approcci in termini di competenze, sistemi, struttura e cultura, ad esempio in termini di autonomia,
flessibilità, e propensione al rischio. La letteratura suggerisce diverse tipologie per gestire la dicotomia generata dal
concetto di ambidexterity. Alcuni autori (ad es. Tushman e O’Reilly III, 1996), traendo spunto dalla letteratura sul
punctuated equilibrium (Gersik, 1991) descrivono l’ambidexterity come separazione temporale di alternanza tra
exploration ed exploitation, altri invece si riferiscono all’ambidexterity strutturale (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2004)
suggerendo di perseguire entrambi i processi simultaneamente secondo l’idea che unità organizzative diverse si
debbano differenziare per raggiungere l’ambidexterity (Benner e Tushman, 2003). Altri autori si soffermano sul
concetto di contestualità (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004), che differisce dai precedenti poiché fondato sulla costruzione di
“a set of processes or systems that enable and encourage [managers] to make their own judgments about how to divide
their time between conflicting demands for alignment and adaptability’’ (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004, p. 211).
Quest’ultima concezione rappresenta potenzialmente un modello più sostenibile della “separazione strutturale” e
“temporale” perché facilita l’adattamento al contesto della singola unità organizzativa, non solo di alcune specifiche
unità come accade nel modello duale, dove i processi sono mantenuti separati e coordinati ad un livello superiore
(Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004). La capacità di gestire l’allineamento e l’adattamento simultaneamente consente di
superare l’inerzia strutturale che deriva da un’enfasi eccessiva sulla continuità e sull’exploitation, ossia la
focalizzazione nell’intraprendere attività correnti in modo efficiente, superando la trappola delle competenze, ed
evitare di accelerare in una direzione di cambiamento che potrebbe richiedere la ricostruzione di procedure e regole
consolidate senza considerare impatti e benefici, rischiando la trappola del fallimento (Levinthal e March, 1993).
Nonostante siano stati analizzati importanti elementi concettuali legati all’ambidexterity, soprattutto in termini di
relazioni con il concetto di performance e di innovazione (Cao e Zhang, 2009, Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004, He e Wong,
2004, Lubatkin et al., 2006) risultano poche evidenze sostanziali e sistematiche di come si possa implementare un
progetto orientato a caratterizzare l’organizzazione in una modalità ambidestra (Durisin e Todorova, 2012, Lavie e
Rosenkopf, 2006, Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004). In particolare, non sembrano essere stati indagati in modo approfondito
gli elementi che consentono ad un’organizzazione di perseguire una strategia di ambidexterity. Partendo da questo gap
di letteratura, lo studio mira a rispondere alla seguente domanda di ricerca: “come può essere generato ed
implementato un sistema di tipo ambidestro? Quali sono i meccanismi che contribuiscono all’ambidexterity?”. Tali
domande sono collocate in un contesto reale di osservazione e studio rappresentato da una multi-utility che opera nel
campo dei servizi pubblici, la quale ha impostato una nuova strategia e un nuovo piano di azione, orientati sia a
*
**
Ricercatore Post Doc - Università degli Studi di Roma “Tor Vergata”
e-mail: binci.daniele@gmail.com
Full Professor of Management - Università degli Studi di Roma “Tor Vergata”
e-mail: corrado.cerruti@uniroma2.it
Acea SPA. “Amministratore Delegato”
e-mail: StefanoAntonio.Donnarumma@aceaspa.it
Acea SPA. “Direttore Sviluppo del Capitale Umano”
e-mail: Pierluigi.Palmigiani@aceaspa.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
39
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.07
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
migliorare le performance di breve periodo che a proiettarsi in una dimensione innovativa, al fine di rendere
sostenibile il proprio vantaggio competitivo.
Metodologia. La ricerca è incentrata su un case study longitudinale di un progetto di cambiamento organizzativo
in fase di sviluppo, finalizzato ad implementare un nuovo modello di generazione di valore (business model), a seguire
del nuovo Piano Industriale. Vista la finalità dello studio, orientata a descrivere e comprendere quali sono i
meccanismi abilitanti un contesto di tipo ambidestro, il problema della ricerca è stato definito a partire dal confronto
costante dell’osservazione empirica (business) con la letteratura (concetto teorico), per definire in modo specifico gli
elementi di analisi (variabili della ricerca), seguendo un percorso induttivo e deduttivo (Van De Ven, 2007). Per questo
le fonti (Tabella 1) si sono focalizzate, data la natura on-going del progetto e i suoi primi mesi di implementazione, su
un processo di data collection eterogeneo, quale:
1. Analisi documentale: consistente in presentazioni, report, documentazione aziendale, che ha consentito una
costruzione attendibile degli eventi accaduti nel periodo considerato e delle logiche sottostanti. In particolare
l’analisi documentale ha rappresentato la principale sorgente per costruire cronologicamente e sostanzialmente
gli elementi rilevanti del progetto (Piano Industriale, Modello Valoriale, Meccanismi Operativi);
2. Osservazione:
a. Diretta: orientata a raccogliere informazioni legate al contesto in fase di studio (staff meeting, riunioni,
incontri informali legati al progetto), formalizzata attraverso research note relative alle dinamiche di
implementazione del progetto in corso (e delle relative variabili come il modello culturale, o il sistema di
performance management);
b. Partecipante: orientata a contribuire, con il team di progetto, alla costruzione dei diversi aspetti collegati ai
meccanismi operativi del progetto, formalizzata attraverso research note;
Tab. 1: Fonti della ricerca
Fonti
Primarie
Primarie
Tot
Secondarie
Secondarie
Tot
Data collection
Riunione Team Operativo
Riunione TMT
Presentazion i Business
Book Aziendali (manuali, schede, raccolte)
Quantità (h-p.)
9 (2,5 h)
2 (2h)
11 (26.5 h)
3 (40 p.)
5 (60 p.)
8 (100 p.)
Fonte: Nostra elaborazione
Il problema della ricerca che nasce come problema operativo è quindi legato alla necessità di migliorare le
performance aziendali, così come previsto dal business plan (Piano Industriale), attraverso l’interiorizzazione di nuovi
valori (cultura del miglioramento e dell’innovazione) focalizzati, in prima battuta, sulle persone, in particolare
attraverso la riprogettazione e l’implementazione del sistema di “performance management”, cuore di tutto il
meccanismo di creazione di valore aziendale (rappresentato da KPI, margine operativo, ma anche da un clima
collaborativo e solido).
Fig. 1: Modello concettuale
LIVELLO DI ANALISI
CONCETTO TEORICO
BUSINESS
PROCESSO
INPUT
ATTIVITA’
OUTPUT
VARIABILI
DELLA RICERCA
STRATEGIA
BUSINESS PLAN
PLANNING
CULTURA
INNOVAZIONE
MIGLIORAMENTO
AMBIDEXTERITY
STRUMENTI
PERFORMANCE
MANAGEMENT
PROCESSI
GOAL SETTING
FEEDBACK
INCENTIVI
CREAZIONE DI VALORE
KPI;
EBITDA;
Fonte: Nostra elaborazione
40
EXPLORATION
EXPLOITATION
DISCIPLINE
TRUST
SUPPORT
STRETCH
VANTAGGIO
COMPETITIVO SOSTENIBILE
AMBIDEXTERITY E PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT. UN’EVIDENZA EMPIRICA DI IMPLEMENTAZIONE DELLA STRATEGIA AZIENDALE
Evidenze
Piano industriale e Modello Valoriale. L’emergere del concetto di ambidexterity
L’azienda analizzata ha impostato una nuova strategia e un nuovo piano di azione, orientati sia a migliorare lo
status quo, che a proiettarsi in una dimensione innovativa al fine di rendere sostenibile il proprio vantaggio
competitivo. Dai dati analizzati (in particolare dalle riunioni) emerge la volontà di costruire uno stretto legame tra il
piano industriale, il modello valoriale su cui si fondano i comportamenti delle persone e i meccanismi operativi.
Seppure non esplicitamente menzionata come categoria concettuale, l’idea di un orientamento ambidestro emerge in
particolare dal sistema valoriale. Esso, infatti, si caratterizza per un forte orientamento alla creazione di valore sia in
termini di capacità di realizzare risultati di business di breve periodo che di capacità di porre in essere azioni
rischiose, intraprendenti ed innovative di più lungo periodo, facendo leva sulla trasversalità organizzativa e sul lavoro
di gruppo (fig. 2. Sistema valoriale).
Fig. 2: Sistema valoriale dell’azienda analizzata
Fonte: Documentazione interna Acea
In diversi episodi osservati in cui sono state discusse le caratteristiche e lo sviluppo del sistema valoriale, è
emersa l’idea di tale orientamento, non solo documentata nella carta dei valori, ma anche fortemente pensata e voluta
dal management. In letteratura è stato ampiamente discusso il ruolo dei valori, quale diretta espressione della cultura
organizzativa (Schein, 2004), ossia il sistema di credenze degli individui (Denison, 1996) fondamento
dell’organizzazione, e di come essa debba essere in linea con le finalità organizzative. Infatti, dai dati raccolti durante
l’osservazione, risulta che l’articolazione di una visione comune è quanto sta emergendo in azienda, visione che
dovrebbe facilitare la costruzione di un’identità condivisa promuovendo la fiducia, la cooperazione e una prospettiva
di lungo termine. In linea con la letteratura, che evidenzia la centralità di una “articulation of a common vision and
values that provide for a common identity across the exploitative and exploratory units” (O’Reilly III e Tushman, 2011,
p. 9), per sviluppare una cultura ambidestra, il sistema valoriale analizzato è incentrato su un mix di valori orientati
all’innovazione, al lavoro di gruppo e alla concreta capacità realizzativa degli obiettivi. Emerge in particulare l’enfasi
legata all’importanza di combinare l’orientamento all’implementazione (tipico dell’exploitation) con quello
dell’innovazione (tipico dell’exploration), uno degli snodi chiave dell’ambidexterity (March, 1991). La sfida di
costruire una cultura in cui le persone siano portate a realizzare obiettivi e allo stesso tempo a pensare ed agire in
modo sfidante è dichiarato nei (Fig. 2) tre principali elementi del modello valoriale (Fonte: Documentazione interna di
progetto, 2018).
Orientamento all’innovazione (Intraprendenza): focalizzazione sulla capacità di interpretare e anticipare il
futuro, riconoscere e cogliere le opportunità, promuovere lo sviluppo (sia etico che sostenibile) e dimostrare la
capacità di fare il bene comune;
Orientamento al team (Lavoro di gruppo): focalizzazione sull’idea di creare e mantenere relazioni positive e un
clima collaborativo, basato sulla fiducia e sulla motivazione, al fine di trasformare idee in progetti con autenticità,
coinvolgimento, passione e perseveranza;
Orientamento alla realizzazione (Realizzazione): focalizzazione sulla nella capacità di concretizzare progetti che
creino valore aziendale prendendo decisioni funzionali e imparando dall’esperienza, realizzando iniziative, gestendo
l’incertezza, l’ambiguità e il rischio, ponendosi in modo proattivo, con coraggio e concretezza.
41
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
I diversi episodi osservati hanno confermato la focalizzazione del management sull’importanza del sistema
valoriale quale condizione centrale per la generazione di valore, ponendosi, la cultura organizzativa, come condizione
abilitante all’interno del quale un contesto ambidestro può fiorire. Si evidenzia, tuttavia, come il processo culturale
abbia rappresentato solo un antecedente per la costruzione del sistema ambidestro, che trova concreta applicazione nel
modo in cui l’azienda interpreta e definisce gli obiettivi operativi. Uno dei meccanismi operanti a questo livello è il
sistema di performance management.
Il sistema di Performance Management e l’ambidexterity contestuale
Come ampiamente analizzato in letteratura (Schein, 2004, Argyris et al., 1985), la cultura organizzativa è un
frame (theory espoused) all’interno del quale trovano concreta applicazione i processi e i comportamenti delle persone
(theory in use). L’allineamento di valori e comportamenti è agevolato da meccanismi operativi strettamente collegati ai
sistemi valoriali: “the content of work systems [HR practices] should be largely driven by the strategic goals and
values of the organisation” (Bowen e Ostroff, 2004, p. 206). Il sistema di performance management rappresenta uno di
questi strumenti abilitanti, un meccanismo operativo (Rugiadini, 1979) “through which managers ensure that
employees’ activities and outputs contribute to the organization’s goals, by knowing what activities and outputs are
desired, observing whether they occur, and providing feedback to help employees meet expectations” (Noe et al., 2012,
p. 224). Esso è un meccanismo cardine guidato dal sistema culturale e dalla strategia che consente di creare le
condizioni per ottenere risultati positivi attraverso l’esplicitazione e l’impostazione degli obiettivi individuali e di
gruppo, i quali vengono approvati, condivisi e successivamente valutati. Il sistema di “performance management”
dell’azienda, è, infatti, intrinsecamente collegato alla capacità di abilitare l’ambidexterity (Patel et al., 2012, Gibson e
Birkinshaw, 2004) esprimendo la concreta applicazione del modello valoriale ed indicando i criteri di creazione di
valore aziendale e le relative modalità di distribuzione. Come risulta dalla documentazione analizzata le caratteristiche
del sistema di performance management sono in linea con l’idea di ambidexterity, nello specifico, contestuale (Gibson
e Birkinshaw, 2004). Infatti, aldilà dell’unità di appartenza della risorsa (che si trovi in unità più o meno innovative), il
meccanismo di definizione degli obiettivi è decentrato e la relativa scelta e allocazione tra innovazione e stabilità viene
decisa a livello di singola persona, andando ad incentivare comportamenti con differente gradiente di innovazione
(exploration ed exploitation), collegandoli ai premi di risultato, e quindi utili per mantenere elevata la generazione di
valore per l’azienda stessa. Emerge, in particolare, una forte attenzione alle persone (attraverso strumenti innovativi
quali l’utilizzo dell’instant feedback da parte del capo e dei clienti interni) e al supporto nello sviluppo manageriale,
nella valutazione del capo, basata anche su altri soggetti (es. clienti interni), ed infine nel consolidamento della
meritocrazia e nel supporto all’identificazione degli high performer.
Goal Setting e Feedback: il contesto organizzativo
La documentazione analizzata e le note a supporto della ricerca hanno evidenziato come il sistema di
performance management si articoli in due processi chiave, il goal setting ed il feedback (collegato al sistema
incentivante), all’interno dei quali si esprime la performance delle persone. Questi processi contribuiscono
concretamente all’implementazione operativa delle attività, fornendo il contesto per una implementazione efficace
dell’ambidexterity contestuale, in particolare di quello che viene identificato come “discipline” e “stretch” da un lato e
“trust” e “support” dall’altro (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004).
Assegnazione iniziale dell’obiettivo: il goal-setting
Il processo di goal-setting, definito come “a theory of motivation that explains what causes some people to
perform better on work-related tasks than others” (Locke e Latham, 2013, p. 3) agevola la persona nell’identificazione
degli obiettivi (da un punto di vista della realizzabilità e del collegamento con il business) che intende perseguire
durante l’anno, affinché gli stessi siano concretamente implementati. Nel caso analizzato, il processo del goal-setting
rappresenta un aspetto “hard” dell’ambidexterity (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004) combinazione di “discipline” che
“induces members to voluntarily strive to meet all expectations generated by their explicit or implicit commitments”, e
di “stretch”, “an attribute of context that induces members to voluntarily strive for more, rather than less, ambitious
objectives” (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004, p. 213). Esso è strutturato, coerentemente con il sistema valoriale, dando
enfasi ad un set di obiettivi che le persone possono scegliere, impostati in funzione del mix tra stabilità e innovazione
che la strategia aziendale intende promuovere, orientando le persone:
1) ad essere innovative;
2) a lavorare in squadra;
3) alla implementazione effettiva degli obiettivi.
Le caratteristiche che emergono dall’analisi dei dati sono relative all’orientamento dell’azienda verso obiettivi
sfidanti e trasversali piuttosto che ristretti all’interno delle aree funzionali. Il mix stabilità-innovazione garantisce
l’orientamento all’innovazione dell’azienda configurando diverse tipologie di obiettivi che la persona può decidere di
impostare. Ad esempio, un obiettivo può essere scelto in continuità rispetto un processo esistente, il quale non viene
modificato rispetto lo status quo, o viceversa, un obiettivo può caratterizzarsi per essere estremamente discontinuo
rispetto al passato, e introdurre quindi un elemento di innovazione radicale 1. Per il lavoro di squadra il ragionamento
è analogo, essendo definito da diversi ambiti operativi, che si classificano in funzione della complessità e della
trasversalità degli obiettivi. Ad esempio, un obiettivo può richiedere il contributo di persone che non hanno interessi
1
La gradazione di orientamento all’innovazione nell’attuale sistema di performance management è stata impostata con tre
differenti gradienti denominati come: continuità (coerenza con il passato), miglioramento (sforzo di introduzione di elementi
migliorativi) ed innovazione (discontinuità con il passato).
42
AMBIDEXTERITY E PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT. UN’EVIDENZA EMPIRICA DI IMPLEMENTAZIONE DELLA STRATEGIA AZIENDALE
comuni o convergenti, per cui il lavoro di squadra diventa estremamente complesso da gestire, o viceversa, gli interessi
sono comuni, configurando una maggiore semplicità nel lavoro di squadra. Infine il grado di implementazione
dell’obiettivo è definita dalla relativa quantificazione rispetto un target, avendo un peso percentuale sulla base
dell’importanza dell’area di risultato individuata, della responsabilità correlata al ruolo ricoperto e del tipo di
influenza che la prestazione ha sul concreto ottenimento del risultato. Il processo di goal-setting con l’istituzione di
standard chiari di performance e di comportamento attesi che inducono le persone a soddisfare le aspettative esplicite
o implicite rispetto gli obiettivi aziendali, ma anche meccanismi “stretch-oriented”, attributi del contesto che inducono
i membri a cercare volontariamente obiettivi anche più ambiziosi, al di fuori della loro “comfort zone” è quindi
assimilabile ad una logica ambidestra, di carattere contestuale, supportando le persone nella scelta di allocare
obiettivi sia di exploitation che di exploration.
Feedback (ed incentivi)
Il processo di feedback supporta la riduzione della distanza tra obiettivi assegnati e concreto raggiungimento
attraverso informazioni che indicano al performer quanto bene stia svolgendo un’attività o progredendo rispetto un
obiettivo. Esso svolge due ruoli principali (Locke e Latham, 2013).
1) stimola la definizione degli obiettivi per una performance controllabile consentendo alle persone di dirigere gli
sforzi verso il raggiungimento dell’obiettivo;
2) consente di migliorare le prestazioni attraverso il confronto con i risultati, soprattutto se abbinato ad un percorso
di crescita personale, e di ricompense amministrative, basate sull’applicazione di meccanismi premiali.
Il sistema di feedback ed il sistema incentivante, coerentemente con il processo di “discipline” e di “stretch”
rappresentano, a livello empirico, l’aspetto soft dell’ambidexterity contestuale, espressa attraverso processi di
costruzione di fiducia e di supporto (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004) finalizzati a diffondere un clima di collaborazione
orizzontale inter-funzionale, di valutazione, oggettività ed obiettivi sfidanti. Dall’analisi dei dati è emersa una forte
attenzione verso la costruzione di meccanismi di fiducia (verso i capi e i colleghi) per creare un clima positivo (Faisal
Ahammad et al., 2015) nel rispetto degli impegni reciproci, e migliorare la percezione di equità nei processi decisionali
(ad es. come le persone contribuiscono e come sono incentivate). Essa si alimenta creando coinvolgimento attraverso il
dialogo costante, la ricerca di un rapporto costruttivo nella relazione capo-collaboratore, e l’esplicitazione e la
continuità del percorso di comunicazione. È inoltre rafforzata, nel sistema analizzato dagli incontri frequenti con i
manager per monitorare l’andamento della performance (ad es. rispetto la realizzazione, o i comportamenti agiti
collegati all’obiettivo), anche in una modalità real-time, grazie alla sincronia tra azione e feedback, senza dover
attendere il successivo processo di revisione formale delle performance. Oltre alla fiducia, il meccanismo di feedback si
basa sul supporto, il quale “induces members to lend assistance and countenance to others. Mechanisms that allow
actors to access the resources available to other actors, freedom of initiative at lower levels, and senior functionaries
giving priority to providing guidance and help rather than to exercising authority” (Gibson e Birkinshaw, 2004, p.
215). Il supporto è una concreta espressione del processo di feedback poiché indirizza concretamente le persone
rispetto gli obiettivi impostati attivando percorsi di coaching affinché le persone possano focalizzarsi sia sul
miglioramento degli aspetti comportamentali, come l’orientamento al lavoro di gruppo, che su quelli realizzativi. Esso
trova completamento nel processo di erogazione degli incentivi conseguenti al processo di valutazione della
prestazione, operando alla fine del periodo, e considerando sia i comportamenti che i risultati ottenuti, le criticità e le
problematiche incontrate.
Limiti della ricerca. I primi risultati ottenuti da questa ricerca evidenziano come l’implementazione di un sistema
ambidestro sia fortemente connesso al modello culturale e ai meccanismi operativi dell’azienda (in particolare al
sistema di performance management). Il modello culturale definisce il frame all’interno del quale si dovrebbero
conformare le azioni e le strategie operative, attraverso i meccanismi che ne abilitano l’implementazione. Tuttavia
poiché il progetto è ancora in fase di implementazione, non sono stati prodotti effetti e risultati rilevanti da un punto di
vista delle evidenze empiriche. La ricerca non ha, infatti, ancora analizzato l’impatto del sistema ambidestro in termini
di efficacia, impatto per il quale ci si aspetta un incremento di generazione del valore sotto forma di maggiori progetti
innovativi, di miglioramento dei KPI e del margine operativo lordo.
In particolare non è stato possibile analizzare, ancora, sebbene inquadrati nel contesto osservato:
1) L’impatto della connessione tra il modello culturale e l’efficacia dell’ambidexterity contestuale, in termini di reali
ricadute sulle performance organizzative (e sulla sostenibilità del vantaggio competitivo);
2) Le dinamiche degli elementi che costituiscono il cuore dell’ambidexterity contestuale, ossia “discipline”,
“stretch”, “trust” e “support”, elementi ricorsivi che producono valore attraverso la reciproca interazione e la
cui analisi può aiutare ulteriormente a comprendere i meccanismi abilitanti di un sistema ambidestro.
Altro aspetto che si configura come importante, seppur non analizzato, è relativo alla comprensione delle reazioni
delle persone, in termini di accettazione e resistenza, al nuovo impianto culturale ed operativo che inserisce le stesse
all’interno di un percorso di bilanciamento tra exploration ed exploitation.
Implicazioni pratiche. Questo studio ha analizzato i meccanismi empirici che possono essere attivati per
condurre l’organizzazione verso una ambidexterity di tipo contestuale. Essi, come risulta dall’analisi, sono
rappresentati:
dalla cultura organizzativa (valori);
dal sistema di performance management;
43
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
dalla configurazione dei relativi sotto processi (goal-setting e feedback-valutazione);
dalle variabili sottostanti definite come “discipline”, “stretch”, “trust” e “support”.
Partendo dal presupposto di una relazione positiva tra performance e ambidexterity, questo studio fornisce alcune
concrete indicazioni per i manager che si trovino ad elaborare e sostenere strategie competitive per l’organizzazione,
in particolare di carattere ambidestro.
La prima riguarda l’importanza di progettare meccanismi operativi “in tensione”, basati sul modello
dell’ambidexterity contestuale, una condizione base per consentire al sistema organizzativo di proiettarsi in una
dinamica di generazione di ricchezza nel presente e di capacità di sopravvivenza nel lungo periodo. Impostare il
meccanismo di performance management in una logica ambidestra rappresenta un elemento centrale per realizzare
una strategia competitiva, in quanto si pone come snodo operativo tra la cultura organizzativa e le performance.
La seconda implicazione, complementare alla prima, riguarda la rilevanza di un impianto culturale e valoriale
che funga da abilitatore ad un corretto sistema di gestione della prestazione e quindi del comportamento ambidestro:
“the challenges of managing paradox are […] also cultural and cognitive in nature” (Benner e Tushman, 2015, p.
504). Il collegamento tra strategia, valori e meccanismi operativi rappresenta un fattore abilitante dell’ambidexterity
organizzativa, e quindi può creare le premesse per una sostenibilità organizzativa di lungo periodo.
La terza implicazione riguarda la possibilità di considerare il meccanismo di performance management come
strumento in grado di abilitare l’ambidexterity contestuale, andando a definire in modo strutturato come le persone
bilancino i loro obiettivi e compiti tra innovazione ed exploitation.
Originalità. Nonostante il concetto di ambidexterity sia stato molto enfatizzato in letteratura, ci sono poche
ricerche focalizzate sui processi e meccanismi che possono favorirne l’implementazione in contesti organizzativi reali.
In linea con questo gap, il presente studio si caratterizza per introdurre le condizioni empiriche di implementazione di
un sistema ambidestro, analizzate in una logica longitudinale, e dando evidenza ad alcuni elementi (valori e sistemi di
performance management) che possono favorire l’allineamento aziendale ad un vantaggio competitivo sostenibile
attraverso una modalità operativa apparentemente paradossale. In particolare, si evidenzia come l’implementazione
dell’ambidexterity debba partire dalla riconcettualizzazione della cultura e dei valori, per poi trovare concreta
applicazione in sistemi (come quello di performance management), che opportunamente strutturati consentano di
creare le condizioni per la creazione di un vantaggio competitivo sostenibile. Rispetto le precedenti ricerche, che hanno
enfatizzato i processi legati all’ambidexterity contestuale (fiducia, supporto, disciplina e stretch), questo studio, oltre
ad analizzarne longitudinalmente l’implementazione, ne estende l’analisi anche ai meccanismi e ai concetti abilitanti.
Key words: ambidexterity; innovazione; strategia; change management; business plan, performance management
Bibliografia
ARGYRIS C., PUTNAM R., SMITH D.M. (1985), Action science. Concepts, Methods, and Skills for Research and Intervention, San
Francisco, CA, Jossey-Bass.
BENNER M.J., TUSHMAN M.L. (2003), “Exploitation, exploration, and process management: the productivity dilemma revisited”,
Academy of Management Review, vol. 28, n. 2, pp. 238-256.
BENNER M.J., TUSHMAN M.L. (2015), “Reflections on the 2013 decade award “exploitation, exploration, and process
management: the productivity dilemma revisited” ten years later” Academy of Management Review, vol. 40 n. 4, pp. 497-514.
BOWEN D.E., OSTROFF C. (2004), “Understanding HRM-firm performance linkages: the role of the strength of the HRM system”,
Academy of Management Review, vol. 29, n. 2, pp. 203-221.
CAO Q., GEDAJLOVIC E., ZHANG H. (2009), “Unpacking organizational ambidexterity: Dimensions, contingencies, and
synergistic effects”, Organization Science, vol. 20, n. 4, pp. 781-96.
DANNEELS E. (2002), “The dynamics of product innovation and firm competences”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 23, n. 12,
pp. 1095-1121.
DENISON D.R. (1996), “What is the difference between organizational culture and organizational climate?A native’s point of view
on a decade of paradigm wars”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 21, n. 3, pp. 619-654.
DUNCAN R. (1976), “The ambidextrous organization: Designing dual structure for innovation”, in: R. Kilman L.P. (ed.) The
management of organizational design. New York: North-Holland.
DURISIN B., TODOROVA G. (2012), “A Study of the Performativity of the “Ambidextrous Organizations” Theory: Neither Lost in
nor Lost before Translation”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 29, n. S1, pp. 53-75.
FAISAL AHAMMAD M., MOOK LEE S., MALUL M., SHOHAM A. (2015), “Behavioral Ambidexterity: The Impact of Incentive
Schemes on Productivity, Motivation, and Performance of Employees in Commercial Banks”, Human Resource
Management, vol. 54, n. S1, pp. s45-s62.
GERSIK C.J.G. (1991), “Revolutionary change theories: a multilevel exploration of the punctuated equilibrium paradigm”, Academy
of Management Review, vol. 16, n. 1, pp. 10-36.
GIBSON C.B., BIRKINSHAW J. (2004), “The antecedents, consequences, and mediating role of organizational ambidexterity”,
Academy of Management Journal, vol. 47, n. 2, pp. 209-226.
HE Z.L., WONG P. K. (2004), “Exploration vs. exploitation: An empirical test of the ambidexterity hypothesis”, Organization
Science, vol. 15, n. 4, pp. 481-94.
LAVIE D., ROSENKOPF L. (2006), “Balancing exploration and exploitation in alliance formation”, Academy of Management
Journal, vol. 49, n. 4, pp. 797-818.
LEVINTHAL D.A., MARCH J.G. (1993), “The myopia of learning”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 14, pp. 95-112.
44
AMBIDEXTERITY E PERFORMANCE MANAGEMENT. UN’EVIDENZA EMPIRICA DI IMPLEMENTAZIONE DELLA STRATEGIA AZIENDALE
LOCKE E.A., LATHAM G. (2013), New Developments in Goal Setting and Task Performance.
LUBATKIN M.H.Z., SIMSEK Y.L., VEIGA J.F. (2006), “Ambidexterity and performance in small- to medium-sized firms: The
pivotal role of TMT behavioral integration”, Journal of Management, vol. 32, n. 5, pp. 1-27.
MARCH J.G. (1991), “Exploration and exploitation in organizational learning”, Organization Science, vol. 2, n. 1, pp. 71-87.
NOE R.A., HOLLENBECK J.R., GEHRART B., WRIGHT M.P. (2012), Gestione delle risorse umane, Apogeo, Milano.
O’REILLY III C.A., TUSHMAN M.L. (2013), “Organizational ambidexterity, past, present, and future”, Academy of Management
Perspectives, vol. 27, n. 4, pp. 324-338.
O’REILLY III C.A., TUSHMAN M.L. (2004), “The Ambidextrous Organization”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 82, April, pp. 7481.
O’REILLY III C.A., TUSHMAN M.L. (2008), “Ambidexterity as dynamic capability: Resolving the innovator’s dilemma”,
Research in Organizational Behavior, vol. 28, pp. 185-206.
O’REILLY III C.A., TUSHMAN M.L. (2011), “Organizational ambidexterity in action: how managers explore and exploit”,
California Management Review, vol. 53, n. 4, pp. 5-22.
PATEL P. C., TERJESEN S., LI D. (2012), “Enhancing effects of manufacturing flexibility through operational absorptive capacity
and operational ambidexterity”, Journal of Operations Management, vol. 30, n.3, pp. 201-220.
RAISCH S., BIRKINSHAW J. (2008), “Organizational Ambidexterity: Antecedents, Outcomes, and Moderators”, Journal of
Management, vol. 34, n. 3, pp. 375-409.
RUGIADINI A. (1979), Organizzazione d’impresa, Milano, Giuffrè editore, Torino.
SCHEIN E. (2004), Organizational culture and leadership, Jossey-Bass, San Francisco, CA.
TUSHMAN M.L., O’REILLY III C.A. (1996), “Ambidextrous Organizations: managing evolutionary and revolutionary change”,
California Management Review, vol. 38, n. 4, pp. 8-30.
VAN DE VEN A.H. (2007), Engaged Scholarship. A guide for organizational and social research, Oxford University Press, New
York.
45
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
46
L’influenza delle componente enogastronomica sul comportamento
di viaggio degli italiani
ROBERTA GARIBALDI* ANDREA POZZI
Obiettivi. In un mondo sempre più aperto e globalizzato, il turista ricerca esperienze autentiche e locali. La
presenza di bellezze artistiche e paesaggistiche di elevato pregio non rappresenta più l’elemento discriminante nel
processo decisionale, il turista vuole avere la possibilità di entrare in contatto e conoscere la cultura e la comunità del
luogo (Richards & Wilson, 2006; Wei-Li et al., 2016). In questo contesto, l’enogastronomia ha assunto una rilevanza
assai maggiore di quella avuta in passato, poiché sa racchiudere e veicolare tutti quei valori che il turista
contemporaneo ricerca, ossia rispetto della cultura e delle sue tradizioni, autenticità, sostenibilità, benessere psicofisico ed esperienza (Scarpato, 2002; Du Rand & Heat, 2006; Richards, 2012; Getz et al., 2014). A livello globale,
numerosi studi e ricerche confermano l’accresciuto interesse verso questa nuova modalità di viaggio. Nella sola
Europa sono circa 600 mila le vacanze all’insegna dell’enogastronomia e oltre 20 milioni quelle che includono attività
enogastronomiche (UNWTO, 2012; 2017). Per quanto riguarda l’Italia, un numero crescente di turisti viaggia alla
scoperta delle produzioni locali e partecipa ad esperienze a tema (Unioncamere e Isnart, 2014; Coldiretti, 2016;
Garibaldi et al., 2016; ENIT, 2017; Garibaldi 2018). Sebbene i dati mostrino come l’interesse verso la vacanza
enogastronomica sia in forte crescita anche nel nostro Paese, esistono ancora pochi studi empirici sulle caratteristiche
di chi partecipa alle attività enogastronomiche nel corso della propria vacanza (Corigliano, 2002; Montanari, 2009;
Romano & Natilli, 2009; Asero & Patti, 2011). Il presente contributo cerca di colmare questa lacuna e vuole restituire
un quadro dettagliato e aggiornato dell’interesse e della fruizione dei turisti italiani alla proposte enogastronomiche.
Nello specifico verrà analizzato il comportamento nel corso dei tre momenti chiave del processo decisionale: prima
della vacanza (ragioni del viaggio e fonti di informazione utilizzate), durante (esperienze enogastronomiche ed altre
attività) e dopo il viaggio (soddisfazione e ritorno).
Metodologia. Il presente contributo contiene i risultati di una ricerca condotta dall’Università degli studi di
Bergamo nel mese di Luglio 2017 su un campione rappresentativo della popolazione italiana con metodo CAWI
(Computer Assisted Web Interview). Il campione è stato estratto in modo casuale semplice dal panel di individui e
risulta essere rappresentativo della popolazione internet con quote per sesso, età ed area geografica (regioni). Le quote
sono state calcolate sulla base della popolazione generale (dati Istat 2017) e delle proporzioni specifiche di
popolazione con accesso a Internet (dati Audiweb-Doxa 2016). L’universo di riferimento consiste nelle persone che
hanno un’età superiore a 18 anni e che hanno svolto negli ultimi 12 mesi una vacanza che prevedesse almeno un
pernottamento o un viaggio in un luogo distante almeno 80 km dalla residenza abituale. Agli intervistati è stato
somministrato un questionario composto da 25 domande (di cui 7 socio-demografiche) che hanno riguardato
l’influenza della componente enogastronomica nella scelta della meta, nei comportamenti di viaggio e nella
soddisfazione della vacanza, ossia i tre momenti chiave del processo decisionale. Il numero di interviste effettuate è
stato pari a 1.167, di cui valide 1.001 (86%).
*
Risultati. I principali risultati possono essere così riassunti:
L’enogastronomia come ragione di viaggio. L’enogastronomia rappresenta oggi una componente dell’offerta
turistica di un territorio assai apprezzata dai turisti italiani in viaggio sia nel Paese che al di fuori del confini
nazionali. Negli anni recenti numerose indagini ne hanno valutato l’attrattività, sia a livello regionale che
nazionale (Unioncamere e Isnart, 2014; Coldiretti, 2016; Garibaldi et al., 2016; ENIT, 2017; Garibaldi 2018),
evidenziando un crescente interesse da parte della domanda. Dall’indagine condotta risulta che il 30% degli
italiani sono stati almeno una volta negli ultimi tre anni turisti enogastronomici - ossia turisti che hanno svolto un
viaggio o una vacanza con pernottamento con motivazione primaria l’enogastronomia (Stone & Migacz, 2016).
L’interesse verso questa tipologia di vacanza va a toccare più generazioni ed è quindi diventata una esperienza
ricercata in modo trasversale, con forte coinvolgimento tra chi è nato tra il 1960 e il 1980 (i membri della
“Generazione X”).
Fonti di informazione. Nonostante l’avvento del web il 50% degli italiani si affida ai i consigli e le
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli studi di Bergamo
e-mail: roberta.garibaldi@unibg.it
Assegnista di ricerca - Università degli studi di Bergamo
e-mail: andrea.pozzi@unibg.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
47
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.08
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
raccomandazioni di parenti e amici, che quindi rimangono ancora le principali fonti per raccogliere informazioni
prima della partenza e spesso sono da stimolo alla visita di una destinazione enogastronomica. Il ruolo di
Internet è comunque molto forte, e gioca un ruolo fondamentale nel processo di scelta. Il 33% ricerca
informazioni nei siti web a tema enogastronomic il 33% in Facebook, il 22% in TripAdvisor.. La ricerca evidenzia
un ulteriore e importante elemento: i mezzi di comunicazione tradizionali quali riviste cartacee e sezioni di
giornali dedicate ai viaggi o all’enogastronomia rappresentano ancora una utile e preziosa fonte di informazioni.
La ricerca delle informazioni non si conclude però prima dell’inizio del viaggio, ma, anzi, prosegue nel corso del
suo svolgimento. L’utilizzo di Internet appare molto diffuso, dato che consente facilmente e velocemente di
reperire informazioni sui luoghi e leggere i commenti degli utenti che vi sono già stati.
Esperienze enogastronomiche svolte nel corso della vacanza. Per esperienza enogastronomica s’intende
un’esperienza turistica attraverso cui il turista può scoprire e sperimentare l’enogastronomia locale. In questo
studio sono state considerate 20 esperienze legate sia al food che al beverage. I risultati indicano che gli italiani,
quando viaggiano, ricercano una pluralità di esperienze enogastronomiche. Non si limitano a scoprire i prodotti
tipici del luogo, ma desiderano conoscere e sperimentare la cultura enogastronomica in tutte le sue sfaccettature.
Fra le esperienze più popolari, dopo il mangiare piatti tipici del luogo in un ristorante locale, vi sono la visita a
mercati agricoli e l’acquisto di cibo e bevande da un food truck. Emerge inoltre un generale ed elevato
apprezzamento per le proposte legate al vino e alla birra, come festival ed eventi tematici e visite ai luoghi di
produzione. Un dato confermato da studi precedenti, i quali hanno evidenziato che l’Italia, insieme a Francia e
Spagna, risulta essere uno dei Paesi dove si riscontra una maggiore inclinazione al viaggio beverage invece che
al viaggio food (Stone & Micagz, 2016; Garibaldi et al., 2016). Interesse che va ben oltre le singole attività: il
66% degli italiani è solito assaggiare i vini del territorio in almeno la metà dei viaggi fatti, circa il 57% le
produzioni brassicole locali. Il margine di crescita per lo sviluppo di offerte tematiche appare però ancora ampio,
nonostante gli alti tassi di partecipazione registrati. L’indagine ha evidenziato un gap tra le esperienze desiderate
e fruite, molto forte per alcune di esse - ad esempio andare alla scoperta di cibo con un esperto enogastronomico
e partecipare ad un viaggio enogastronomico di più giorni organizzato da un’agenzia di viaggio o da un Tour
Operator.
Altre attività nel corso della vacanza. Nel corso della propria vacanza, gli italiani tendono ad abbinare
all’enogastronomia attività di vario genere. La visita ai musei, monumenti ed altre attrazioni culturali sia nella
località che in quelle vicine è quella maggiormente praticata insieme alla scoperta di tutto ciò che la destinazione
sa e può offrire (rispettivamente dal 67% e dal 65% degli italiani). A seguire, lo shopping, la partecipazione ad
eventi culturali o tour guidati di vario genere, la pratica di attività sportive. Questo dato suggerisce due evidenze:
in primo luogo, la vacanza enogastronomica è legata alla vacanza culturale, la scoperta del cibo e delle bevande
locali è una forma di fruizione del patrimonio culturale di un territorio; in secondo luogo, le destinazioni che si
accingono a sviluppare un’offerta enogastronomica devono essere capaci di coniugare qualità e quantità,
rafforzando i legami tra questa proposta e le altre esistenti sul territorio al fine di soddisfare la pluralità di
esigenze di questi turisti. La scelta dei turisti tende infatti a ricadere su quelle destinazioni che offrono un’offerta
ampia e varia oltre che caratteristica del luogo.
L’aspetto “sociale” della vacanza enogastronomica. L’enogastronomia è oggi un fenomeno sociale, una moda, una
tendenza: sempre più persone si appassionano, ne parlano e condividono esperienze (Episteme, 2013; Censis,
2015). Ciò vale non solo nella vita quotidiana, ma anche nel corso del viaggio. Il 53% degli italiani è solito fare
fotografie dei cibi e delle bevande consumate e il 49% condivide queste esperienze enogastronomiche sui
principali social media (es. Facebook e Instragram) e sui siti di recensioni (TripAdvisor). Ma l’aspetto “sociale”
della vacanza enogastronomica non riguarda solo il desiderio di parlare e condividere le proprie esperienze, ma
si estende anche a quelle esperienze che facilitano la socializzazione. Si pensi, ad esempio, alle esperienze di
social eating: il 25% degli italiani dichiara di aver pranzato o cenato in casa di persone non conosciute in almeno
la metà dei sui viaggi. Un valore che, seppure in crescita, appare più basso rispetto a quello degli altri Paesi dove
tali esperienze sono più diffuse (Stone & Migacz, 2016; Garibaldi et al., 2016).
Ricordo, raccomandazione e ritorno. Quando soddisfacenti, le esperienze enogastronomiche creano un ricordo
duraturo e favoriscono la diffusione di una buona reputazione della destinazione. Il 62% raccomanda la
destinazione a parenti, amici e colleghi nel caso in cui l’aspetto enogastronomico l’abbia soddisfatto, il 61% è
propenso a ritornare nella destinazione. L’enogastronomia si configura quindi come un potente mezzo di
marketing territoriale, in grado di aumentare la visibilità e l’attrattività della destinazione. Inoltre, si conferma
essere anche uno strumento di promozione al di fuori dei suoi confini geografici: basti pensare che il 63% degli
intervistati afferma che alcuni prodotti e ristoranti fanno loro tornare in mente i viaggi fatti mentre il 52% è solito
acquistare le produzioni tipiche anche una volta tornato a casa.
Limiti della ricerca. Il presente contributo restituisce una mera descrizione del fenomeno nei suoi tratti
essenziali, nello specifico l’influenza della componente enogastronomica su un campione rappresentativo della
popolazione italiana prima della vacanza (ragioni del viaggio e fonti di informazione utilizzate), durante (esperienze
enogastronomiche ed altre attività) e dopo il viaggio (soddisfazione e ritorno). Si tratta di una base di partenza, a
partire dalla quale sarà poi necessario procedere con un’analisi di tipo inferenziale per approfondire la conoscenza di
un così ampio fenomeno.
48
L’INFLUENZA DELLE COMPONENTE ENOGASTRONOMICA SUL COMPORTAMENTO DI VIAGGIO DEGLI ITALIANI
Implicazioni pratiche. I risultati della ricerca confermano che la vacanza enogastronomica rappresenta una
delle modalità di viaggio più dinamiche e ricercate. Sebbene un buon pranzo con prodotti locali abbia sempre
rappresentato un elemento fondamentale nella vacanza, oggi il turista si mostra sempre più interessato ad andare oltre
al semplice consumo dei prodotti tipici e aspira a conoscerne le origini, i processi e le modalità di produzione e,
attraverso questi, il territorio, le vicende storiche, artistiche e sociali, la vita delle persone del luogo. Questa forma di
vacanza è molto apprezzata dai turisti italiani, tanto che l’enogastronomia è sempre più considerata una motivazione
primaria e non solo una componente accessoria del viaggio. Un’offerta ricca e di qualità, e che sa coniugare questa
componente con le altre proposte del territorio, è ciò che essi ricercano attivamente. I turisti italiani, analogamente ai
viaggiatori di altri Paesi (cfr. TAMS, 2001; Spark et al., 2005; TIA & Edge, 2006; Mandala Research, 2013; Stone &
Migacz, 2016), vogliono scoprire e sperimentare l’enogastronomia in tutte le sue sfaccettature e non limitarsi al
singolo prodotto. A partire dalle principali evidenze emerse è possibile trarre due principali spunti di riflessione, uno
riguardante il turista/consumatore e l’altro l’organizzazione dell’offerta nella destinazione. Anzitutto, il crescente
interesse verso l’enogastronomia non è tanto legato ad una moda ma ad uno stile di vita generale che sta spostando
l'attenzione su nuovi valori e che sta conciliandosi con i nuovi modi che il recente sviluppo tecnologico, economico
sociale sta imprimendo al modo di vivere e relazionarsi. Aspetto caratterizzante del fenomeno è che al crescente
interesse si affiancano attitudini e atteggiamenti del consumatore innovativi. In particolare, l’enogastronomia assume
un ruolo di fattore attivo o in alcuni casi dei driver nei viaggi o nelle escursioni degli italiani. Il consumo del cibo e
bevande si integra quindi con la dinamica del turismo. Su questo contesto si innestano un sistema di valori che rendono
il profilo del consumatore enogastronomico una figura sempre che ricerca esperienze basate su stimoli variegati e che
si stanno sempre più consolidando e diffondendo nell’attuale società. In secondo luogo emerge chiaramente come, a
livello di destinazione, non si tratti solo di un problema di qualità dell’offerta, ma anche di quantità e di integrazione. E
ciò vale anche per il nostro Paese, spesso menzionato tra le mete di turismo enogastronomico più desiderate al mondo.
L’Italia è tra i più ricchi di biodiversità e, a livello di produzioni, si connota per l’approccio sostenibile e possiede il
maggior numero di prodotti agroalimentari a denominazione di origine e a indicazione geografica riconosciuti
dall'Unione Europea (Garibaldi, 2018). Queste eccellenze costituiscono un valore aggiunto per l’economia
agroalimentare, permettendo alle nostre imprese di mantenere alti livelli di competitività sul mercato globale . Questo
potenziale, tuttavia, rimane ancora parzialmente inespresso nel suo legame con la cultura ed il turismo. Alla grande
forza attrattiva spesso non corrisponde un’offerta strutturata in grado di soddisfare le esigenze di questa domanda.
Alla luce di quanto emerso, risulta possibile delineare alcuni temi per accrescere la consapevolezza del tema della
valorizzazione del patrimonio enogastronomico attraverso il turismo perché, da un lato attraverso lo scambio turistacomunità locale il patrimonio può evolversi ed arricchirsi, dall’altro può essere uno modo per diversificare le attività
economiche rurali, concorrendo ad innovarle in modo creativo. Appare quindi opportuno stimolare una maggiore
integrazione tra i comparti della produzione agroalimentare e del turismo, adottare politiche per incentivare uno
sviluppo armonioso del segmento approntando le necessarie modifiche normative, favorire la formazione su più livelli,
cercare di connettere Globale e Locale al fine di ridare valore economico, sociale e culturale alle produzioni locali in
un contesto allargato e, infine, sostenere l’adozione delle nuove tecnologie digitali da parte delle imprese del settore.
Originalità del lavoro. Il presente contributo presenta alcuni dati di una ricerca condotta dall’Università degli
studi di Bergamo e dalla World Food Travel Association sul turismo enogastronomico italiano (cfr. Garibaldi, 2018).
Nello specifico, l’analisi sulla domanda i cui risultati sono stati presentati nel presente contributo si basa sul medesimo
impianto metodologico della ricerca condotta da Stone & Migacz (2016) per conto della World Food Travel
Association in 10 Paesi nel mondo. Ciò conferisce una certa solidità scientifica al lavoro svolto oltre che consente di
fare alcune considerazioni in merito alla situazione italiana rispetto all’andamento internazionale. Inoltre, le riflessioni
conclusive nascono da un’attenta lettura del fenomeno sia dal punto di vista della domanda che dell’offerta - la cui
analisi non è stata presentata in questo contributo -, e ciò ha permesso non solo di fornire una misura oggettiva della
dimensione del fenomeno ma anche di descrivere le relazioni esistenti.
Parole chiave: Enogastronomia; Turismo; Profilo del turista; Esperienze enogastronomiche.
Bibliografia
ASERO V., PATTI S. (2011), “Wine tourism experience and consumer behaviour: The case of Sicily”, Tourism Analysis, vol. 16, n.
4, pp. 443-460.
COLDIRETTI (2016), Vacanze: COLDIRETTI/IXE’, spese a tavola salgono a record di 12 mld, disponibile all’indirizzo:
http://www.coldiretti.it/News/Pagine/494---19-Luglio-2016.aspx
CORIGLIANO M. A. (2002), “The route to quality: Italian gastronomy networks in operation”, in Hjalager A.M., Richards G. (a
cura di), Tourism and gastronomy, Routledge, Londra, pp. 166-185.
DU RAND G.E., HEATH E. (2006), “Towards a framework for food tourism as an element of destination marketing”, Current
Issues in Tourism, vol. 9, n. 3, pp. 206-234.
ENIT-AGENZIA NAZIONALE DEL TURISMO (2017), Il turismo enogastronomico in Italia, disponibile all’indirizzo:
http://www.enit.it/images/stories/comunicatistampa/turismo%20enogastronomico_cartella%20stampa-2.pdf
GARIBALDI R., STONE M. J., MIGACZ S., POZZI A. (2016), Supplement to 2016 Food Travel Monitor: Italian Travelers, World
Food Travel Association, Portland OR.
49
TRACK - STRATEGIA TRA TEORIA E PRATICA
GARIBALDI R. (2018), Primo Rapporto sul Turismo Enogastronomico Italiano 2018, Centro Editoriale Librario Studium
Bergomense CELSB, Bergamo.
GETZ D., ROBINSON R., ANDRESSON T., VUJICIC, S. (2014), Foodies & Food Tourism, Goodfellow Publishers Limited,
Oxford.
MANDALA RESEARCH LLC (2013), The American Culinary Traveller Report, Mandala Research, Alexandria.
MONTANARI A. (2009), “Geography of taste and local development in Abruzzo (Italy): project to establish a training and research
centre for the promotion of enogastronomic culture and tourism”, Journal of Heritage Tourism, vol. 4, n. 2, pp. 91-103.
RICHARDS G., WILSON J. (2006), “Developing creativity in tourist experiences: A solution to the serial reproduction of culture?”,
Tourism Management, vol. 27, pp. 1209-1223.
RICHARDS G. (2012), “Food and the tourism experiences: major findings and policy orientations”, in D. Dodd (a cura di), Food
and the Tourism Experience, OECD, Parigi, pp. 13-46.
ROMANO M. F., NATILLI M. (2009), “Wine tourism in Italy: New profiles, styles of consumption, ways of touring”, Tourism: An
International Interdisciplinary Journal, vol. 57, n. 4, pp. 463-475.
SCARPATO R. (2002), “Sustainable gastronomy as a tourist product”, in A.M. Hjalager, G. Richards (a cura di), Tourism and
Gastronomy, Routledge, Londra, pp. 132-152.
SPARK B., ROBERTS L., DEERY M., DAVIED J., BROWN L. (2005), Good Living Tourism: Lifestyle Aspects of Food and Wine
Tourism, Cooperative Research Centre for Sustainable Tourism, Gold Coast.
TRAVEL ACTIVITIES AND MOTIVATION SURVEY-TAMS (2001), Wine and Culinary, Lang Research Inc., Toronto.
TRAVEL INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION AND EDGE RESEARCH - TIA AND EDGE (2007), Profile of Culinary Travellers: 2006
edition, Travel Industry Association, Washington DC.
UNIONCAMERE E ISNART (2014), Customer care turisti. Rapporto annuale, ISNART S.c.p.A. Istituto Nazionale Ricerche
Turistiche, Roma.
UNWTO-WORLD TOURISM ORGANIZATION (2012), Global Report on Food Tourism, UNWTO, Madrid.
UNWTO-WORLD TOURISM ORGANIZATION (2017), Second Global Report on Gastronomy Tourism, UNWTO, Madrid.
WEI-LI HUNG, YI-JU LEE, PO-HSUAN HUANG (2016), “Creative experiences, memorability and revisit intention in creative
tourism”, Current Issues in Tourism, vol. 19, n. 8, pp. 763-770.
50
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY:
STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT
FOR VALUE CREATION
Transformative strategies for employee engagement: managers and employees confronted
ALESSANDRA MAZZEI, LUCA QUARATINO, ALFONSA BUTERA, CHIARA FISICHELLA
Unpacking the good soldier syndrome: the role of authentic leadership
and organizational citizenship behavior
RICCARDO RIALTI, GIACOMO FABIETTI, LAMBERTO ZOLLO, CRISTIANO CIAPPEI
Transformative Strategies for Employee Engagement:
Managers and Employees Confronted
ALESSANDRA MAZZEI* LUCA QUARATINO ALFONSA BUTERA CHIARA FISICHELLA**
Objectives. A transformative business model needs new patterns for value creation. Strategies to enhance employee
engagement are among the most relevant elements in the business value co-creation. In fact, as companies, suppliers
and customers create value through interactions among them (Galvagno and Dalli, 2014), employees are the primary
characters who represent their companies and contribute to the process of value co-creation. Employee behaviors
during interactions with customers and stakeholders, that are consistent with the firm’s brand values, affect the brand
performance in terms of overall brand evaluation and customer-based brand equity (de Chernatony, 1999; Henkel et
al., 2007; Sirianni et al., 2013). Thus, employee engagement has several positive outcomes related to competitive
advantage (Albrecht et al., 2015; Mazzei, 2018a). In particular those advantages are: return on assets, profitability,
and market value (Macey et al., 2009); customer satisfaction (Saks, 2006); attitudinal, behavioral and performance
related outcomes (Demerouti and Cropanzano, 2010); employee task and extra-role performance (Saks, 2006; Rich et
al. 2010; Christian et al., 2011; Anitha, 2014); brand building, company advocacy, innovation, stakeholder
relationships, crisis prevention and management (Mazzei, 2010; Heide and Simonsson 2011 and 2018; Frandsen and
Johansen, 2011; Kim and Rhee, 2011; Kang and Sung, 2017). Engagement also positively affects employee retention
(Berger, 2011), job crafting (Albrecht et al., 2015) and the extent to which employees voice their ideas, suggestions and
concerns (Kahn, 1990; Morrison, 2014; Albrecht et al., 2015).
The growing number of studies shows a huge need for knowledge on strategies to sustain employee engagement.
In particular, the extant literature does not include studies developed in Italy. The researchers conducted a study based
on a survey on a sample of large Italian companies (Mazzei et al., 2017), a survey on a snowball sample of employees,
13 case studies and 10 interviews to experts in the field of employee engagement. The aim of this study has been to
investigate what are the communication and human resource practices and initiatives that companies implement to
engage employees and create an organizational context conducive to engagement. This presentation is based on the
comparison between the points of view of managers and employees emerging from the two surveys.
Methodology. An extensive literature review on employee engagement theories has been done to clarify employee
engagement definition, components and drivers. Then two field surveys were conducted.
The first was a CAWI (Computer Assisted Web Interview) survey on a sample of large companies operating in Italy
carried out addressing managers responsible for people engagement. The researchers used a stratified random sample
of Italian companies with more than 500 employees. The survey was conducted between October 2016 and February
2017. 375 organizations were included in the sample and 261 received the questionnaire. Follow-up phone calls were
used to achieve 173 questionnaires collected, with a response rate of 46 per cent considering the total sample (Mazzei
et al, 2017).
The second was a CAWI survey on employees. To reach them the researcher used snowball sampling criteria
(Patton, 2002). This sampling method consists in identifying some key-informants for the research purpose and in using
their social network to include other participants who meet the eligibility criteria. Those participants became both part
of the sample and at the same time informants to achieve other contacts. In this way the chain of social relations allows
to collect a large number of responses and "the snowball gets bigger and bigger as you accumulate new informationrich cases" (Patton, 2002: 237). The eligibility criteria included employees working: i) in a company excluding
consultant, teacher or public sector; ii) not in communication and human resources professional areas, in order to not
include in the sample participants with professional skills based on the research area. This survey was conducted
between November 2017 and January 2018. Through snowball collect method 147 questionnaires were completed.
For both the surveys, questionnaires were developed leveraging on the results of the literature review and of 10 in*
**
Associate Professor of Management - Università IULM
e-mail: alessandra.mazzei@iulm.it
Assistant Professor of Management - Università IULM
e-mail: luca.quaratino@iulm.it
Adjunct Professor of Management - Università IULM
e-mail: alfonsa.butera@iulm.it
Assistant Researcher of Management - Università IULM
e-mail: c.fisichella@virgilio.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
53
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.09
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY: STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT FOR VALUE CREATION
depth interviews, involving a snowball sample of professionals and consultants who are experts in the employee
engagement field. Data analysis included descriptive statistics as frequencies, means and standard deviations;
reliability and validity tests of the measurement scales, adapted by previous tested models in international literature;
construction of some composite indicators.
Findings. The researcher compared the results of the survey on managers responsible for people engagement with
those of the survey on the employees to better understand the motivating and inhibiting factors of employee
engagement.
The comparison between the two points of view has shown that the level of engagement of collaborators in Italian
companies is unsatisfactory. For managers, engagement is mainly a psychological state and not a behavioral attitude
or intention. Employees feel engaged above all in their work rather than in their company and do not translate this state
of mind into an effort that goes beyond minimal expectations.
From the survey on employees, it emerges that younger people are less engaged and give less importance to
inclusive relationships. This difference between generations will need further investigation in the future to address
specific engagement strategies for generations. The level of employee engagement is higher in companies that adopt a
horizontal organizational model, strategies based on innovation (instead of cost minimization), which have a formal
function of internal communication, and which make limited use of temporary workers.
For both managers and employees internal communication is relevant for engagement, although less than human
resource management practices. Managers responsible for people engagement rely more than employees on internal
communication tools such as intranet and newsletters. While employees would rather appreciate relational
communication and dialogue with managers. Human resources management practices are important for both samples
but reveal other differences: managers tribute more relevance to consolidated practices such as internal job posting
and job rotation, while employees are more interested in practices such as retraining and smart working, that increase
the personal level of employability and autonomy.
The most disengaging factors are inconsistency of company decisions, arrogance, cynicism and indifference of
managers. The influence of those factors is dangerous: even in presence of practices that generate engagement, those
disengaging factors neutralize their positive effect.
According to employees, the daily working life aspects, such as cleanliness and decorum, are crucial for
engagement. If they do not receive adequate attention they can produce disengagement. It seems that basic work
conditions, often taken for granted, could be an effective engagement lever. The digitalization of work processes is
appreciated by employees for its impact on efficiency, but not for its ability to improve relations and quality of work.
Employees consider the procedures for performance evaluation and career progression less fair and transparent
than managers do. The perceptions of the managers and the statements of the employees about employee
communication behaviors are aligned. Prosocial voice barely prevails compared to prosocial silence (they are almost
equally present), for both managers and employees. This seems to indicate a weak context of voice in these companies.
Prosocial voice and prosocial silence are more spread according to managers than to employees. Whereas antisocial
silence and voice are more spread according to employees. This indicates that employees have a more negative view on
their own communication behaviors than managers. For both managers and employees, antisocial organizational
behaviors consist mostly in silence. The context of silence is intensified by the irrelevance attributed to formal voice
systems, such as whistleblowing policies, as highlighted by the survey on managers. Those policies are internationally
established as good to prevent white-collars crimes but in Italy is still difficult to promote voice through whistleblowing
even in large companies.
Findings from the surveys on managers (Mazzei, 2018b; Mazzei et al., 2017) show how Italian companies have a
low level of employee engagement and that they mostly adopt hierarchical relational approach with their employees, do
not adopt developmental human resources management practices, and present an unfair organizational justice climate.
These managerial approaches determine a disengaging workplace context leading to weakly engaged and supportive
employee behavior. It emerges that, because of this poor approach to employee engagement, Italian companies miss
opportunities for transformational strategies when employees interact with company stakeholders and customers.
Several contextual factors affect the managerial approaches to employee engagement adopted by companies. Relevant
factors are the nationality of company’s majority owners, with Italian companies presenting a less engaging relational
approach and less developmental human resources management practices compared to foreign companies; the listing
on stock exchanges, with listed companies showing a more inclusive relational approach and more developmental
human resources management practices when compared to non-listed organizations; the focus on the national market,
with Italian companies that operate only in the domestic market showing a less inclusive relational approach, less
developmental human resources management practices and a less fair organizational justice climate in comparison
with multinational companies (both Italian-owned companies and non-Italian owned ones).
The survey on employees confirmed the positive impact of a horizontal organizational model and limited recourse to
temporary workers on the level of employee engagement, which were not confirmed by the survey on managers. These
are important results for further research.
One of the most important challenges emerging from the study is a paradox: companies look for strategies aiming to
employee engagement while at the same time they are focused on short-term results, cost reduction and flexibility. To
this end, companies adopt hierarchical organizational model and hire contingent workers. This study allows to
consider such practice inhibitors of the employee engagement.
54
TRANSFORMATIVE STRATEGIES FOR EMPLOYEE ENGAGEMENT: MANAGERS AND EMPLOYEES CONFRONTED
On the overall, the study confirms the role of internal communication and developmental human resources
management practices as factors that contribute to the creation of organizational context that encourage dialogue,
mutual exchange, freedom of expression and open communication. In one word: keen to employee prosocial
communication behavior, i.e. engaged behavior.
Research limits. The first survey involved managers dealing with employee engagement in sample companies. They
expressed their perceptions about observed employee behaviors and about the relevance of communication and
managerial practices for employee engagement deployed in their organizations. This can be considered a limit of this
first study, which has been overcome by the second study involving employees.
The survey on employees has the limit of having a convenience sample that includes employees from different
companies. The researchers tried to find a company, but it was not possible. This should be already considered as a
result of the study. The results should be considered a first exploration of the phenomenon. Despite this limitation, the
research presented here is the first breakthrough in Italy on these issues and therefore provides a relevant cognitive
contribution.
From a conceptual point of view, this study adopted the perspective of companies on employee engagement, and
considers it as positive in any case. Further studies should investigate the costs and risks of engagement for employees.
For example, the tension between benefits of engagement as career advancements and work satisfaction on one side,
and the possible costs in terms work-life unbalance on the other side. This calls for future studies on the so called
“sustainable engagement” (Sonnentag, 2003; Aggerholm et al., 2011) a new strategy for the employee engagement in
the future.
Practical implications. Several practical implications emerge from the study, underlining the need for
transformative strategies for employee engagement. First, companies should pursue a more engaging relational
approach, adopting the organizational structures and policies and managerial practices aimed at enhancing the
employee engagement and freedom of expression. Second, they should try to create an organizational justice climate
characterized by fairness and consistency in the procedures concerning the treatment of employees. Third,
organizations should invest in developmental human resources management practices, overcoming mere administrative
forms of management. Furthermore, companies should adopt horizontal organizational models. Finally, the survey on
employees, underline the need of engagement strategies that strengthen the psychological contract between the
company and its employees: protections for workers, tenured positions, and autonomy. This study underlines that
companies need transformative strategies for employee engagement, mainly based on mutual trust relations.
Originality of the study. The study represents the first study conducted in Italy comparing managerial practices
adopted by companies in order to affect employee engagement with the perceptions of employees on the most relevant
factors for employee engagement.
Key words: engagement; internal communication; employee behavior; disengagement
References
AGGERHOLM H.K., ANDERSEN S.E., THOMSEN C. (2011), “Conceptualising employer branding in sustainable organisations”,
Corporate Communications: An International Journal, vol. 16, n. 2, pp. 105-123.
ALBRECHT S.L., BAKKER A.B., GRUMAN J.A., MACEY W.H., SAKS A.M. (2015), “Employee engagement, human resource
management practices and competitive advantage: An integrated approach”, Journal of Organizational Effectiveness: People
and Performance, vol. 2, n. 1, pp. 7-35.
ANITHA J. (2014), “Determinants of employee engagement and their impact on employee performance”, International Journal of
Productivity and Performance Management, vol. 63, n. 3, pp. 308-323.
BERGER B. (2011, June 3), “What employee engagement means for new PR pros”, PRWeek.
CHRISTIAN M.S., GARZA A.S., SLAUGHTER J.E. (2011), “Work engagement: a quantitative review and test of its relations with
task and contextual performance”, Personnel Psychology, vol. 64, n. 1, pp. 89-136.
DE CHERNATONY L. (1999), “Brand management through narrowing the gap between brand identity and brand reputation”,
Journal of Marketing Management, vol. 15, n. 1/3, pp. 157-179.
DEMEROUTI E., CROPANZANO R. (2010), “From thought to action: Employee work engagement and job performance”, in
BAKKER A.B., LEITER M.P. (Eds.), Work engagement: A handbook of essential theory and research, Psychology Press,
Hove, pp. 147-163.
FRANDSEN F., JOHANSEN W. (2011), “The study of internal crisis communication: Towards an integrative framework”,
Corporate Communications: An International Journal, vol. 16, n. 4, pp. 347–361.
GALVAGNO M., DALLI D. (2014), “Theory of value co-creation: a systematic literature review”, Managing Service Quality, vol.
24, n. 6, pp. 643-683.
HEIDE M., SIMONSSON C. (2011), “Putting coworkers in the limelight: new challenges for communication professionals”,
International Journal of Strategic Communication, vol. 5, n. 4, pp. 201-220.
HEIDE M., SIMONSSON C. (2018), “Coworkership and engaged communicators: A critical reflection on employee engagement”,
in JOHSTON K., TAYLOR M. (Eds.), Handbook of Communication Engagement, John Wiley & Sons, West Sussex, UK.
HENKEL S., TOMCZAK T., HEITMANN M., HERRMANN A. (2007), “Managing consistent employee behaviour: Relevance and
managerial control of behavioural branding”, Journal of Product & Brand Management, vol. 1, n. 4/5, pp. 310-320.
55
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY: STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT FOR VALUE CREATION
KAHN W.A. (1990), “Psychological conditions of personal engagement and disengagement at work”, The Academy of Management
Journal, vol. 12, n. 1, pp. 692-724.
KANG M., SUNG M. (2017), “How symmetrical employee communication leads to employee engagement and positive employee
communication behaviors: the mediation of employee-organization relationships”, Journal of Communication Management,
vol. 21, n. 1, pp. 82-102.
KIM J.N., RHEE Y. (2011), “Strategic thinking about employee communication behavior (ECB) in public relations: testing the
models of megaphoning and scouting effects in Korea”, Journal of Public Relations Research, vol. 23, n. 3, pp. 243-268.
MACEY W.H., SCHNEIDER B., BARBERA K.M., YOUNG S.A. (2009), Employee Engagement: Tools for Analysis, Practice, and
Competitive Advantage, Wiley-Blackwell, Malden, WA.
MAZZEI A. (2010), “Promoting active communication behaviours through internal communication”, Corporate Communications:
An International Journal, vol. 15, n. 3, pp. 221-234.
MAZZEI A. (2018a), “Employee Engagement”, in HEATH R.L., JOHANSEN W. (Eds.), The International Encyclopedia of
Strategic Communication, Wiley-Blackwell, Boston.
MAZZEI A. (2018b), Engagement e disengagement dei collaboratori, FrancoAngeli, Milano.
MAZZEI A., QUARATINO L., RAVAZZANI S., BUTERA A., FISICHELLA C., PEDRAZZINI V. (2017), “Value co-creation and
the role of employee engagement and its drivers”, in Value co-creation: management challenges for business and society.
Referred Electronic Conference Proceedings Sinergie-SIMA 2017, Università degli Studi di Napoli Federico II, June 15-16.
MORRISON E.W. (2014), “Employee voice and silence”, Annual Review of Organizational Psychology and Organizational
Behavior, vol. 1, n. 1, pp. 173-197.
PATTON M.Q. (2002), Qualitative research and evaluation methods (third edition), Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, CA.
RICH B.L., LEPINE J.A., CRAWFORD E.R. (2010), “Job engagement: Antecedents and effects on job performance”, Academy of
Management Journal, vol. 53, n. 3, pp. 617-635.
SAKS A.M. (2006), “Antecedents and consequences of employee engagement”, Journal of Managerial Psychology, vol. 21, n. 7, pp.
600-619.
SIRIANNI N.J., BITNER M.J., BROWN S.W., MANDEL N. (2013), “Branded Service Encounters: Strategically Aligning
Employee Behavior with the Brand Positioning”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 77, n. 6, pp. 108-123.
SONNENTAG S. (2003), “Recovery, work engagement, and proactive behavior: A new look at the interface between nonwork and
work”, Journal of Applied Psychology, vol. 88, n. 3, pp. 518-528.
56
Unpacking the Good Soldier Syndrome:
The Role of Authentic Leadership
and Organizational Citizenship Behavior
RICCARDO RIALTI* GIACOMO FABIETTI LAMBERTO ZOLLO CRISTIANO CIAPPEI**
Objectives. The importance of Authentic Leadership (AL) within management studies has increased dramatically
since the beginning of the 21st Century (Clapp-Smith et al., 2009). Numerous episodes of corporate misconduct and
government malfeasance occurred during the last two decades have led to a loss of confidence of civil society in both
corporate and political leaders (Peus et al., 2011). This has called for the development of a more genuine typology of
leadership that, basing on commonly held values and contemporary societal challenges, is able to work for the greater
good in a more effective way (Rosenthal et al., 2009; Peus et al., 2011).
Current literature on AL theoretically posits that investing in the development of authentic leaders, as those
leaders acting “in accordance with deep personal values and convictions, to build credibility and win the respect and
trust of followers” (Avolio et al., 2004, p. 806), may vehicle the achievement of several accomplishments by the
followers (Avolio, 2004). In particular, authentic leadership has been positively associated with work commitment and
effort, job satisfaction and, lastly, with work performance (Peus et al., 2011). However, while the relationship between
AL and Work Performance (WP) has been analysed extensively from a theoretical point of view, empirical evidence on
the existence of such relationship remain quite scarce. Moreover, the analysis of the mechanisms underlying the
relationship remains underdeveloped (Gardner et al., 2011).
Hence, the purpose of the present paper is to unpack the relationship between AL - in its four components, namely
balanced processing, internalized moral perspective, relational transparency and self-awareness - and WP, by
exploring the underlying mechanisms. To do this this, the paper relies on two main theoretical concepts: LeaderMember Exchange theory (LMX), suggesting that leaders develop a different and heterogeneous exchange relationship
with each subordinate (Liden and Maslyn, 1998; Anand et al., 2017); and Organizational Citizenship Behavior (OCB),
as an “individual behaviour that is discretionary, not explicitly recognized by the formal reward system, and that in the
aggregate promotes the effective functioning of the organization” (Organ, 1988, pag. 4).
Specifically, the paper proposes a conceptual model to evaluate the moderating effect of Organizational
Citizenship Behavior - Individual (OCB-I), and Organizational Citizenship Behavior - Organization (OCB-O), and
Followership on the relationship between AL and Work Performance.
Methodology. We administered a structured survey to 500 employees of Esselunga S.p.A. and were able to collect
212 valid responses (equal to 42.4% as a response rate). The measures used in the survey are the following. Authentic
Leadership was measured through the instrument validated by Walumbwa et al. (2008), which is composed of four subdimensions, (1) self-awareness (α = 0.79), (2) balance processing of information (α = 0.77), (3) internalized moral
perspective (α = 0.84), and (4) relational transparency (α = 0.86).
OCB-I (α = 0.72) was captured with the Williams and Anderson’s (1991) instrument, which is composed of two
sub-dimensions, (1) altruism and (2) courtesy (see also Rego, 2010). OCB-O (α = 0.71) was captured with the same
instrument (Rego, 2010; Williams and Anderson, 1991) which is composed of the other three sub-dimensions of
organizational citizenship, namely (1) sportsmanship, (2) conscientiousness, and (3) civic virtue.
Followership (α = 0.61) was measured with the Hollander and Kelley’s (1992) instrument, specifically using the
Italian version of the scale (Gatti et al., 2014).
Finally, Work Performance (α = 0.76) was measured with the Kuvaas’ (2006) instrument. All the constructs used
in the survey show reliable Cronbach’s Alpha values, hence all of them were retained in the analysis.
In Table 1 the Pearson’s r values of correlations are reported. As shown, all the correlations show significant r
values.
*
Ph.D. student in Business Administration and Management - University of Florence
e-mail: riccardo.rialti@unifi.it
Post doc in Management - University of Siena
e-mail: giacomo.fabietti@unisi.it
Post doc in Management - University of Florence
e-mail: lamberto.zollo@unifi.it
** Full Professor of Strategic Management - University of Florence
e-mail: cristiano.ciappei@unifi.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
57
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.10
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY: STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT FOR VALUE CREATION
Tab. 1 Correlation Matrix
RT
IMP
BPI
SA
OCB-O
OCB-I
FOL
WEP
RT
1
,806**
,802**
,818**
,393**
,338**
,526**
,356**
IMP
BPI
SA
OCBO
OCBI
FOL
WEP
1
,777**
,796**
,375**
,396**
,618**
,376**
1
,826**
,371**
,321**
,515**
,363**
1
,420**
,354**
,616**
,394**
1
,600**
,449**
,512**
1
,465**
,560**
1
,611**
1
** p-value < 0.01.
RT = relational transparency
IMP = internalized moral perspective
BPI = balance processing of information
SA= self-awareness
OCB-O = organizational citizenship behavior toward organization
OCB-I = organizational citizenship behavior toward individual
FOL = followership
WEP = work performance
Source: Authors’ elaboration
Next, Structural Equation Modeling (SEM) was used to test the hypothesized relationships. Particularly, AMOS
was used as the main statistical software (Arbuckle, 2013). First, a measurement model was built to assess the fitting
and validity of the proposed model (Zollo et al., 2017a; b; 2018). Absolute fitting indexes were firstly assessed,
particularly the relative Chi-square index (Cmin/Df = 2.694), the Global Fitting Index (GFI = 0.945), and the Root
Mean Square Error of Approximation (RMSEA = 0.060). All these values are acceptable (Bagozzi and Yi, 1988). Then,
relative fitting indexes were calculated, particularly, the Comparative Fitting Index (CFI = 0.933), the Normed Fit
Index (NFI = 0.938), and the Incremental Fit Index (IFI = 0.917). All these values are higher than the required
threshold of 0.900, thus being acceptable (Bagozzi and Yi, 1988). Hence, the validity of our proposed model is
demonstrated. The second step of SEM procedure is the structural model, which computes the factor loadings and the
regression weights referring to the hypothesized relationships (see Figure 1).
Fig. 1: Structural model
Source: Authors’ elaboration
Results. The results of the research as summarized in Table 2.
Tab. 2: Regression weights
Standardized regressione weights
ALOCB-0
AL FOL
AL OCB-I
FOL WEP
OCB-I WEP
Estimate
,472
,759
,474
,410
,523
Source: Authors’ elaboration
58
UNPACKING THE GOOD SOLDIER SYNDROME: THE ROLE OF AUTHENTIC LEADERSHIP AND ORGANIZATIONAL CITIZENSHIP BEHAVIOR
Our results indicate that Authentic Leadership positively impacts on (a) OCB-O (β = +0.472; p-value < 0.01), (b)
OCB-I (β = +0.474; p-value < 0.01), and (c) Followership (β = +0.759; p-value < 0.01). Moreover, both OCB-I (β =
+0.472; p-value < 0.01) and Followership β = +0.472; p-value < 0.01) positively impact on Work Performance. These
results provide statistical support to our hypothesized relationships. Instead, OCB-I does not significantly impact on
Work Performance.
Research Limitations. The present research is limited in at least two aspects, both related with the selected
sampling procedure. The first one is related to the non-probabilistic sample used in this research. Indeed, while we
administered the sample to employees working for the same organization, the sample falls within the broader category
of convenience samples (Landers and Beherend, 2015). This is particularly true whether we take into account that the
500 employees are not representative of the whole population of Esselunga’s employees. Next, our sample is crosssectional in nature (Johnson and Hall, 1988). Hereby, the sample is not longitudinal and the results did not take into
consideration the temporal course of events during a longitudinal period of time.
Moving from these two considerations, the results of the present research are not fully generalizable. The
research, hence, must only be considered as exploratory. Yet, the results of the research may still be considered useful
as a basis to extend the existing knowledge on the explored topic and as an interesting framework to build future
researches on.
Discussion and Practical Implications. Several meaningful insights emerged from the research. First, we
attempted to unpack the “good-soldier syndrome”. Indeed, we identified several antecedents of this phenomenon by
focusing on the importance of AL for OCB-O and OCB-I. Specifically, it emerged how AL is a relevant antecedent of
OCB-I. Authentic leaders are in fact an example for employees and may in this way represent a source of inspiration.
Then, employees may act as “good-soldiers” for the firm being more eager to pursue organizational goals in an
altruistic but still effective way (Hollander and Kelly, 1992; Zollo et al., 2017b). Next, it emerged how authentic
leadership may positively generate followership. Leaders may then motivate employees to follow their “orders” and
this may improve work performances (Walumbwa et al., 2008).
From a practitioners’ perspective, the results provide several interesting suggestions. Particularly, it emerged
how leaders wishing to improve employees’ work performances need to act as authentic leaders. They should be
transparent, act as moral motivator, be the example employees need to follow, and process information coming from
the workforce. In this perspective, a possible solution may be implementing systems to gather employees’ feedbacks and
reply in a reasonable time. Moreover, leaders need to focus on maintaining a moral code of conduct that may be
followed by employees. Finally, leaders must be transparent with employees about organizational expectations. Indeed,
this is the most suitable way to make employees good “soldiers”, generate followership and improve their work
performances.
In regard of the selected case, it is possible to assess that results may be deeply influenced by the overall positive
perceptions Esselunga’s employees had of the founder Bernardo Caprotti (1926-2016), who was an authentic leader
capable to inspire employees’ behavior.
Originality of the Study. The paper contributes to AL theory by exploring the mechanisms underlying the
relationship between AL and WP, overcoming the traditional, “straightforward” perspective about AL and WP.
Therefore, it provides some insights about possible additional elements that can be exploited in better defining the
concept of AL from a theoretical point of view. Moreover, the paper provides empirical evidence on the relationship
between AL and WP, contributing to overcome the theory-dominated literature on AL. In this regard, it is important to
underline that while AL in the US context has been widely analyzed, such a phenomenon has received scant attention in
European contexts, especially in Italy. This reinforces the value of the paper, which may represent the first step in the
exploration of AL within different European national contexts.
Keywords: Authentic Leadership; Leader-Member Exchange Theory; Organizational Citizenship Behavior; Work
Performance
References
ANAND S., VIDYARTHI P., ROLNICKI S. (2017), “Leader-member exchange and organizational citizenship behaviors:
Contextual effects of leader power distance and group task interdependence”, The Leadership Quarterly,
https://doi.org/10.1016/j.leaqua.2017.11.002.
ARBUCKLE J. (2013), AMOS 22. User’s Guide. SmallWaters Corporation, Chicago (IL).
AVOLIO B.J., GARDNER W.L., WALUMBWA F.O., LUTHANS F., MAY D.R. (2004), “Unlocking the mask: A look at the
process by which authentic leaders impact follower attitudes and behaviors”, Leadership Quarterly, vol. 15, n. 6, pp. 801-823.
BAGOZZI R.P., YI Y. (1988), “On the evaluation of structural equation models”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, vol.
16, n. 1, pp. 74-94.
CLAPP-SMITH R., VOGELGESANG G.R., AVEY J.B. (2009), “Authentic leadership and positive psychological capital: the
mediating role of trust at the group level of analysis”, Journal of Leadership and Organizational Studies, vol. 15, n. 3, pp. 227240.
59
TRACK - RETHINKING STRATEGY: STRATEGIC ENGAGEMENT FOR VALUE CREATION
GARDNER W.L., COGLISER C.C., DAVIS K.M., DICKENS M.P. (2011), “Authentic leadership: A review of the literature and
research agenda”, The Leadership Quarterly, vol. 22 n. 6, pp. 1120-1145.
GATTI P., TARTARI M., CORTESI C.G., GHISLIERI C. (2014), “A contribution to the Italian validation of Kelley’s followership
questionnaire”, TPM. Testing, Psychometrics, Methodology in Applied Psychology, vol. 21, n. 1, pp, 67-87.
HOLLANDER E.P., KELLY D.R. (1992), “Appraising relational qualities of leadership and followership”, International Journal of
Psychology, vol. 27, n. 3-4, pp. 289-289.
JOHNSON J.V., HALL E.M. (1988), “Job strain, work place social support, and cardiovascular disease: a cross-sectional study of a
random sample of the Swedish working population”, American Journal of Public Health, vol. 78, n. 10, pp. 1336-1342.
KUVAAS B. (2006), “Work performance, affective commitment, and work motivation: The roles of pay administration and pay
level”, Journal of Organizational Behavior, vol. 27, n. 3, pp. 365-385.
LANDER R.N., BEHEREND T.S. (2015), “An inconvenient truth: Arbitrary distinctions between organizational, Mechanical Turk,
and other convenience samples”, Industrial and Organizational Psychology, vol. 8, n. 2, pp. 142-164.
LIDEN R.C., MASLYN J.M. (1998), “Multi-dimensionality of leader-member exchange: An empirical assessment through scale
development, Journal of Management, vol. 24, n. 1, pp. 43-72.
ORGAN D. (1988), “Organizational Citizenship Behavior: The Good Soldier Syndrome”, Lexington: Lexington Books.
PEUS C., WESCHE J.S., STREICHER B., BRAUN S., FREY D. (2012), “Authentic Leadership: An Empirical Test of Its
Antecedents, Consequences, and Mediating Mechanisms”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 107, n. 3, pp. 331-348.
REGO A. (2010), “Organisational justice and citizenship behaviors: A study in the Portuguese cultural context”, Applied Psychology,
vol. 59, n. 3, pp. 404-430.
ROSENTHAL S.A., MOORE S., MONTOYA R.M., MARUSKIN L.A. (2009), “National Leadership Index 2009: A National Study
of Confidence in Leadership”, Cambridge, MA: Center for Public Leadership, Harvard Kennedy School, Harvard University.
WALUMBWA F.O., AVOLIO B.J., GARDNER W.L., WERNSING T.S., PETERSON S.J. (2008), “Authentic leadership:
Development and validation of a theory-based measure”, Journal of Management, vol. 34, n. 1, pp. 89-126.
WILLIAMS L.J., ANDERSON S.E. (1991), “Job satisfaction and organizational commitment as predictors of organizational
citizenship and in-role behaviors”, Journal of Management, vol. 17, n. 3, pp. 601-617.
ZOLLO L., LAUDANO M.C., CIAPPEI C., ZAMPI V. (2017a), “Factors affecting universities’ ability to foster students’
entrepreneurial behaviour: An empirical investigation”, Journal of Management Development, vol. 36, n. 2, pp. 268-285.
ZOLLO L., FALDETTA G., PELLEGRINI M.M., CIAPPEI C. (2017b), “Reciprocity and gift-giving logic in NPOs”, Journal of
Managerial Psychology, vol. 32, n. 7, pp. 513-526.
ZOLLO L., YOON S., RIALTI R., CIAPPEI C. (2018), “Ethical consumption and consumers’ decision making: the role of moral
intuition”, Management Decision, vol. 56, n. 3, pp. 692-710.
60
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION:
TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
The financial attractiveness of business models: an analysis of sharing economy companies
LAURA MICHELINI, CECILIA GRIECO, GENNARO IASEVOLI
When open innovation drives business models evolution: the case of business to business markets
TINDARA ABBATE, ANNA CODINI, BARBARA AQUILANI
On the way to business blockchainization: An empirical analysis of successful ICOs
DANIELA ANDREINI, GIUSEPPE PEDELIENTO, MARA BERGAMASCHI
Business model innovation in complex servitized systems: the case of OBC in capital equipment SMEs
MARCO PAIOLA
Smart tourism destinations and its integration into territorial certifications
TINDARA ABBATE, ELVIRA TIZIANA LA ROCCA, ALFONSO VARGAS-SANCHEZ
The financial attractiveness of sharing business models
LAURA MICHELINI* CECILIA GRIECO GENNARO IASEVOLI
Objectives. The sharing economy can be considered a real, relevant, and tangible opportunity rather than a
temporary distraction, a passing fad, or a threat (BCG, 2017). Great examples of the potential of sharing has been
demonstrated by Airbnb in the hospitality industry and Uber in the mobility industry. According to the CB Insight the
most valuable private company in the world is Uber, valued at $68B. Airbnb, since its start in 2008, has raised more
than $3 billion and in its March 2017 funding round, was valued at about $31 billion (CNBC, 2017).
Both the companies are examples that online platforms and sharing concept can be powerful drivers of business
model and value innovation. Between 2013 and 2016 the amount of venture capital investment in sharing economy
companies grew from $US 3 billion to $US 30 billion (Rinne A., World Economic Forum, 2017). According to BCG
Report (2017) in 2010, 85 companies raised $US 130 million, while in 2016 420 companies raised over $US23.4
billion. However, the total size of the sharing economy is much harder to estimate because most of the platform
providers are private. However, in the general context of sharing economy although some start-ups have enjoyed great
success, many others have failed (Cheng et al., 2016) showing that the concept and the potential of sharing economy
need to be properly understood. Against this background, this study aims to explore the interaction between business
models dimensions and financial attractiveness. In particular, the main aim of the research is to identify which are the
dimensions of business model that drive the obtainment of funds.
To reach this aim we first selected from the literature the main dimensions of sharing business models and the
related variables. Then, we used these variables to classify the business models of 160 sharing platforms identified from
the Crunchbase database. Finally, a one-way ANOVA was performed to infer results.
The evolution of the literature of sharing economy shows that one of the main issue that drawn the attention of
scholars over the years has been the meaning of the concept. Great effort has been made by scholars to give a unique
definition able to capture the main meaning of sharing and identify the boundaries of the phenomenon. For this reason,
definitions of sharing economy range from a “broad” to a “narrow” interpretation of the concept, as a continuum
(Acquier et al., 2017; Habibi et al., 2017).
According to the narrow interpretation, in sharing economy “two or more people may enjoy the benefits (or costs)
that flow from possessing a thing (Belk, 2007, p. 127)”. According to Belk the so called “true-sharing” encompasses
temporary access as opposed to ownership, and the use of digital platforms, and it does not include any type of
compensation.
In a middle perspective some authors pointed out that the notion of sharing idle capacities is central because it
distinguishes the practice of sharing goods from on-demand personal services. Sharing is thus defined as “consumers
granting each other temporary access to under-utilized physical assets (“idle capacity”), possibly for money” (Frenken
and Schor, 2017, p. 5) and as “socioeconomic system enabling an intermediated set of exchanges of goods and services
between individuals and organizations which aim to increase efficiency and optimization of under-utilized resources in
society (Muñoz and Cohen, 2017 p.21).
More recently, several authors suggest a broad interpretation of the concept. In particular Codagnone et al.,
(2016 a, p.22) state that “the expression sharing economy is commonly used to indicate a wide range of digital
commercial or non-profit platforms facilitating exchanges amongst a variety of players through a variety of interaction
modalities (P2P, P2B, B2P, B2B, G2G) that all broadly enable consumption or productive activities leveraging capital
assets (money, real estate property, equipment, cars, etc.) goods, skills, or just time”.
However, authors also agree in considering the concept of sharing as an umbrella term/construct (Acquier et al.,
2017; Habibi et al., 2017) that encompass heterogeneous practices and activities.
Starting from this outcome, scholars have highlighted the need to go beyond the definitions and to identify
conceptual framework that are useful for systematizing knowledge and concepts. As Acquier et al. (2017) pointed out
“instead of adding a new definition to an already long list, we argue that there is a need for an organizing framework
that allows mapping out and making sense of the different perspectives on the sharing economy (p. 1)”.
*
Associate Professor in Management - University of LUMSA
e-mail: l.michelini@lumsa.it
Post-doctoral Fellow in Management - University of Rome Tor Vergata
e-mail: cecilia.grieco@uniroma2.it
Full Professor of Management - University of LUMSA
e-mail: iasevoli@lumsa.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
63
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.11
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
Accordingly, many scholars have recently proposed different useful frameworks to systematize the multiple
perspectives of sharing economy and to capture the wide range of activities and business models that are considered to
be part of the sharing economy (see Table 1).
One of the first proposals has been made by NESTA in 2014. Only recently, after numerous definitions have been
investigated in literature, and thanks to a better knowledge and diffusion of sharing models, many scholars have
developed integrated frameworks useful to shed light on the different specificities of these models.
These frameworks differ from each other according to the adopted perspective and methodology. Some authors
focused on a business model approach hence variables used for the classification were raised from business model
literature. In particular, Tauscher and Laudien, (2017) developed an integrative framework and carried out a cluster
analysis on 100 marketplaces and identified six distinguishable types of marketplace business models. Munoz and
Cohen (2017) assessed 36 firms in the sharing economy using seven variables. The authors identified five business
models typologies. While Zhang et al. (2018) identified the main typologies of consumer value proposition from a
customer’s perspective.
Other scholars have carried out research aimed at identifying the main dimensions/key aspects/ foundational
cores that characterize sharing systems ((Lago and Sieber, 2016; Schor, 2017; Schor and Fitzmaurice, 2015; Löbbers
et al., 2017; Frenken and Schor , 2017; Habibi et al., 2017; Acquier et al., 2017; Codagnone et al., 2016a; Plewnia and
Guenther, 2018; Michelini et al., 2018).
Tab. 1: Main theoretical frameworks on sharing economy.
AUTHOR/S
NESTA (2014)
Lago and Sieber, 2016
Kortmann and Piller, 2016
Munoz and Cohen, 2017
Schor (2017) ; Schor and
Fitzmaurice (2015)
Löbbers et al. (2017)
Frenken and Schor (2017)
Habibi et al., 2017
Acquier et al., 2017
Tauscher and Laudien (2017)
Codagnone et al., (2016a)
Plewnia, and Guenther (2018)
Michelini et al., (2018)
Zhang et al. (2018)
MAIN FINDINGS
Provides a conceptualization of collaborative models characterized by four types of
collaborative platforms (consumption, production, learning and finance) and four market
delivery models (B2B; B2C; P2P; C2B).
Using a business-process perspective the authors identified three key aspects: (1) market
access, (2) resource allocation and (3) governance.
Identification of nine emergent business models delineated by two major axes: 1) stages of
value creation during the product life cycle: production, consumption, and circulation. 2) three
types of collaboration corresponding to the business model’s level of openness: firms,
alliances, and platforms.
By using seven variables (Governance Mission Resources Funding Interaction Technology
Platform) the authors identified five business models typologies (crowd-based tech,
collaborative consumption, business to crowd, Spaced-based and low-tech, Utopian sharing
outlier)
The sharing practices fall into four major categories-recirculation of goods, exchange of
services, optimizing use of assets, and recirculation of goods.
The research provides a sharing economy business development framework. The framework is
characterized by four types of purpose (collaborative consumption, production, learning and
finance) and three core components (peer provider, platform provider and peer consumer).
Sharing is characterised by three defining characteristics: consumer-to-consumer interaction,
temporary access and physical goods and three forms of platforms: on-demand economy;
product-service economy, second-hand economy.
Provides a practical framework “The sharing/exchange continuum with scores” useful to
classify the different forms of sharing
Sharing is characterised by three foundational cores: (1) Access economy, (2) Platform
economy and (3) Community-based economy
Development of an integrative framework and identification of six clearly distinguishable types
of marketplace business models
Classified platforms according to a profit-non profit continuum and interaction modality (peercentred/led or instead organisation-centred/led.
Identification of the four main dimensions that characterize sharing systems (shared good or
service, market structure, market orientation, industry sector).
In the food sharing context the authors identified three types of platform (sharing for money,
sharing for charity and sharing for community) by the use of 8 categories and 26 related
variables.
By focussing on consumer value proposition (CSV) analysed from the customers perspective
the authors identified the following types of CSV: technical, economic, social and emotional
value
Source: own elaboration.
Analyzing the future research lines, it emerges that there is now a need to go one step further the theoretical
framework by addressing the sharing opportunities. In particular, scholars pinpoint: the need to investigate the role of
business models and their wider implications as well as the characteristics and behaviour of entrepreneurs (Sheng et
al., 2017); the interactions between context, business model innovation, and stakeholder value creation (Dreyer et al.
2017) the impact of sharing economy on the different stakeholders involved (Acquier et al., 2017)
64
THE FINANCIAL ATTRACTIVENESS OF BUSINESS MODELS: AN ANALYSIS OF SHARING ECONOMY COMPANIES
In order to contribute to the discussion about the sharing economy, the purpose of this paper is to understand if
business models with specific characteristics are more able to obtain funds.
Methodology. The sample for this study was drawn from firms listed in Crunchbase in June 2017. Crunchbase
summarizes information on technology sector with a particular focus on Internet start-ups. The “Pro” Version is a
database of the startup ecosystem consisting of investors, incubators and start-ups, which comprises around 500,000
data points profiling companies, people, funds, fundings and events useful for discovering industry trends, investments,
and news about hundreds of thousands of companies globally. From startups to Fortune 500s, and with over 31 million
users, Crunchbase is one of the world’s most relied upon business information platform. As of April 5th, 2018, the
database of CrunchBase included more than 100,000 firms and funding rounds.
Crunchbase is nowadays used by managers and scholars to track the fast-changing world of start ups, and for
scientific research (Block and Sander, 2009; Marra et al. 2016; De Lange, 2017, Dalle et al., 2017).
For the purpose of our study, firms were selected from Crunchbase using the following keywords: “sharing
economy”, “collaborative economy” and “Peer-2-Peer economy”. The final sample is represented by 160 companies
operating in 46 different categories. Single companies have been our unit of analysis. Table 2 shows the process
implemented to extract the final dataset.
Tab. 2: Sampling selection process
Sampling selection step
Companies included in the database (excluding companies duplicates in more than one database)
Companies excluded because closed
Companies excluded because not funded (or without any information about funding)
Companies excluded because without website( or website not in English or with very few information or because they
were not sharing companies)
Final sample
Number
752
64
369
159
160
Source: own elaboration.
After the sample selection, we identified a set of dimensions and variables on the basis of the existing literature, in
order to classify the company’s business model (see Table 3).
Tab. 3: Business Models dimensions and variables
BM dimensions
Variables
Value proposition Economic
Experience
Social
Rent
Key activities
Exchange
Crowdfunding
Recirculation
Key process
Revenue model
B2B
B2C
C2B
C2C
Subscription
Transaction
Advertising
Freemium
Description
Facilitating transaction
Service exchange
Connecting people
Increase the utilization of durable assets via rental
or free use
Labour and service exchange sites
Crowdfunding sites
Recirculation of goods (resale or gifting of used
goods)
Business to business
Business to consumer
Consumer to business
Peer to peer
A periodically fee is charged by the platform
provider independent of peer usage.
The platform provider retains a certain percentage
of the transaction value after successfully
matching supply and
demand
The sale of advertising is the main source of
revenue
the platform provider offers basic services or
usage for free. Additional features and benefits
are subject to charge.
References
Habibi et al., 2017; Tauscher and
Laudien, 2017; Zhang et al.,
2018
Gururaj, 2015; Rainer, Prince
and Watson, 2015; Schor, 2017
NESTA, 2014; Codagnone et al.,
2016a; Michelini et al. 2018;
Tauscher and Laudien, 2017
Tauscher and Laudien, 2017;
Löbbers et al., 2017
Source: own elaboration
Furthermore, the following related variables has been investigated:
Industry: money, goods, food, services, transportation, space (Owyang, J., 2015; Cohen and Munoz, 2016;
Plewnia, and Guenther, 2018);
65
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
Typology: mainly goods, mainly services (Plewnia and Guenther, 2018);
Geography: global / local (Michelini et al., 2018).
The next step involved the analysis of platform websites. All variables were coded binary and weighted equally.
“Inter-judge reliability” was measured by the ratio of coding agreements to the total number of coding decisions
(Kassarjian, 1977). In this study, three academic judges were involved in the coding process, and the reliability
coefficient was 97%.
Findings. In order to explore the interaction between business models dimensions and financial attractiveness a
one-way ANOVA between groups was conducted to compare the mean scores of total funds received across the four
different business models dimensions. The main results of the data analysis are summarized in Table 4.
Tab. 4: One-way ANOVA results
Logfund *
VALUE PROPOOSITION
Logfund *
KEY PROCESS
Logfund *
KEY ACTIVITY
Logfund *
REVENUE
Between groups
Within groups
Total
Between groups
Within groups
Total
Between groups
Within groups
Total
Between groups
Within groups
Total
Sum of squares
7,825
178,867
186,692
8,265
178,427
186,692
14,815
171,877
186,692
1,777
184,915
186,692
Df
2
157
159
3
156
159
3
156
159
3
156
159
Mean square
3,912
1,139
F
3,434
Sig.
0,035**
2,755
1,144
2,409
0,069*
4,938
1,102
4,482
0,005**
0,592
1,185
0,500
0,683
Notes: **p<0.05; *p<0.1;
Source: own elaboration.
The results show that average total funds among groups with different value proposition and key activity were
significantly different (at 0.05 level). In particular, data shows that business models with an “economic” value
proposition has received on average of $102.692.766 while business models with “experience” and “social” value
proposition received on average respectively of about $ 5.077.112 and $ 79.318.736. As for the key activities, data
shows that business model that increase the utilization of durable assets via rental or free use (rent) receive on average
more funds ($95.882.894) compared to those whose key activity is “exchange” ($49.497.248), “crowdfunding”
($56.508.863) and “recirculation” ($11.982.192).
Furthermore, results show that the average total funds among groups with different key process were significantly
different (at 0.1 level). In particular, C2C business models received on average of $85.031.920, followed by B2B
($18.940.463) while B2C and C2B received both on average of about $ 2.5 million.
Moreover results put in evidence that the average total funds among groups with different revenue model were not
significantly different.
Finally a one-way ANOVA was performed to verify if there were any significant differences among companies
operating in different industries and geographical area (local versus global) or characterized by a typology of the offer
(main product versus main services).
Results show that the average total funds were significantly different (at 0.1 level) only among platforms that
operate in different industries. In particular, companies in the “space” industry received on average of $202.823.787,
followed by transport ($112.799.062) while good received on average $12.901.319, service $4.594.818 and food
$973.084.
Results from the empirical analysis put in evidence that business models that 1) offer economic advantages and
aim to facilitate transaction; 2) increase the utilization of durable assets via rental or free use; 3) have a C2C process
and 4) operate in the “space” or “transport” industry are more able to attract investments.
Results empirically confirm some common understanding of sharing economy as a phenomenon boosted by the
ability to be convenient and cost-effective. Research has shown that the major motivations behind sharing is economic
and rational; opting for the sharing economy is often chosen for lower costs as well as higher utility and convenience
(BCG, 2017; Kathan et al. 2016). Business models that are able to emphasize these benefits can meet the market needs,
and this further increases their ability to attract funds. Furthermore, the study is consistent with Codagnone et al.
(2016b) stating that the definition of sharing platforms should focus on P2P activities, as most of the policy concerns
are found there and highlighted dominance and market power of P2P platform operators as commercial businesses.
In conclusion, the research provides some preliminary evidences useful both for startups and incumbents
concerning which are the relevant business models dimensions that can offer more possibility to attract funds.
66
THE FINANCIAL ATTRACTIVENESS OF BUSINESS MODELS: AN ANALYSIS OF SHARING ECONOMY COMPANIES
Research limits. Despite its contributions, this paper does have some limitations, above all the selected sample,
that examined a wide but not complete set of platforms, and the categorization process (despite the authors’ efforts to
guarantee a high level of inter-judge reliability). Future research providing advancements in the field should focus on
understanding the economic and financial performance of the platforms in the medium and long term.
Practical implications. The research provides some preliminary evidences about the business models dimensions
that offer more possibility to attract funds. In this sense, it can be useful both for start-ups and incumbents.
Originality of the study. The research pushes the existing literature a step forward and beyond a mere
theoretical framework of sharing economy business models, by carrying out an empirical research that investigates the
relation between business models dimensions and the ability to attract funds.
Keywords: sharing economy; business models; financial attractiveness; business model platforms
References
ACQUIER A., DAUDIGEOS T., PINKSE J. (2017), “Promises and paradoxes of the sharing economy: An organizing framework”,
Technological Forecasting and Social Change, vol. 125, December, pp. 1-10.
BCG
HENDERSON
INSTITUTE
(2017),
What’s
Next
for
the
Sharing
Economy?
Available
at:
https://www.bcg.com/publications/2017/strategy-technology-digital-whats-next-for-sharing-economy.aspx [Accessed March
20, 2018]
BLOCK J., SANDER P. (2009), “What is the effect of the current financial crisis on venture capital financing? Empirical evidence
from US internet start-ups”, Venture Capital: An International Journal of Entrepreneurial Finance, vol. 11, n. 4, pp. 295-309
CHENG M. (2016), “Sharing economy: A review and agenda for future research”, International Journal of Hospitality Management,
vol.57, August pp. 60-70.
CODAGNONE C., BIAGI F., ABADIE F. (2016a), “The Passions and the Interests: Unpacking the ‘Sharing Economy’. Institute for
Prospective Technological Studies”, JRC Science for Policy Report EUR 27914 EN, doi:10.2791/474555.
CODAGNONE C., MARTENS B. (2016b), Scoping the Sharing Economy: Origins, Definitions, Impact and Regulatory Issues.
Institute for Prospective Technological Studies Digital Economy Working Paper 2016/01. JRC100369
COHEN B., MUÑOZ P. (2015), “Sharing cities and sustainable consumption and production: towards an integrated framework”,
Journal of Cleaner Production, vol. 134, Part A, October, pp. 87-97.
DALLE J., DEN BESTEN M., MENON C. (2017), “Using Crunchbase for economic and managerial research”, OECD Science,
Technology and Industry Working Papers, 2017/08.
DE LANGE D. (2017), “Start-up sustainability: An insurmountable cost or a life-giving investment?”, Journal of Cleaner
Production, vol. 156, 10 July 2017, pp. 838-854.
FRENKEN K., SCHOR J. (2017), “Putting the sharing economy into perspective”, Environmental Innovation and Societal
Transitions, vol. 23, June pp. 3-10.
GHEZZI A., GASTALDI L., LETTIERI E., MARTINI A., CORSO M. (2016), “A role for startups in unleashing the disruptive
power of social media”, International Journal of Information Management, vol. 36, n. 6, pp. 1152-1159.
GURURAJ R. (2015), The rise of the sharing economy; The Indian landscape, Kolkata: Ernst & Young L.L.P. Retrieved from
http://www.ey.com/Publication/vwLUAssets/ey-the-rise-of-the-sharing-economy/$FILE/ey-the-rise-of-the-sharingeconomy.pdf
HABIBI M.R., DAVIDSON A., LAROCHE M. (2017), “What managers should know about the sharing economy”, Business
Horizons, vol. 60, n. 1, pp. 113-121.
KASSARJIAN H.H. (1977), “Content analysis in consumer research”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 4, n. 1, pp. 8-18.
KATHAN W., MATZLER K., VEIDER V. (2016), “The sharing economy: Your business model’s friend or foe?”, Business
Horizons, vol. 59, n. 6, pp. 663-672.
KATHAN W., MATZLER K., VEIDER V. (2016), The sharing economy: Your business model’s friend or foe?. Business Horizons,
vol. 59, n. 6, pp. 663-672.
LAGO A., SIEBER S. (2016), “The Keys of the Collaborative Business Model: The Mechanisms That Matter”, IESE Insight, n. 30,
Third Quarter, pp. 15-23
MARRA A., ANTONELLI P. DELL’ANNA L., POZZI C. (2015), “A network analysis using metadata to investigate innovation in
clean-tech - Implications for energy policy”, Energy Policy, vol. 86, November, pp. 17-26.
MICHELINI L., PRINCIPATO L., IASEVOLI G. (2018), “Understanding Food Sharing Models to Tackle Sustainability
Challenges”, Ecological Economics, vol. 145, March, pp. 205-217.
MUNOZ P., COHEN B. (2017), “Mapping out the sharing economy: A configurational approach to sharing business modelling”,
Technological Forecasting and Social Change, vol. 125, December, pp. 21-37.
NESTA
(2014),
Making
sense
of
the
UK
collaborative
economy,
available
online
at
https://www.nesta.org.uk/sites/default/files/making_sense_of_the_uk_collaborative_economy_14.pdf
OWYANG J., (2015), Collaborative Economy Honeycomb 2. Web Strategy (available at: http://www.webstrategist.com/blog/2014/12/07/ [Accessed March 20, 2018]).
PLEWNIA F., GUENTHER E. (2018), “Mapping the sharing economy for sustainability research”, Management Decision, vol. 56,
n. 3, pp. 570-583.
RAINER K., PRINCE B., WATSON H. (2015), “Managment Information Systems”, in Rainer K., Prince B., Watson H.,
Managment Information Systems (pp. 243-244), Wiley, Massachusetts.
67
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
SCHOR J.B. (2017), “Does the sharing economy increase inequality within the eighty percent?: findings from a qualitative study of
platform providers”, Cambridge Journal of Regions, Economy and Society, vol. 10, n. 2, pp. 263-279.
TÄUSCHER K., LAUDIEN S.M. (2017), “Understanding platform business models: A mixed methods study of marketplaces”,
European Management Journal. Available online 21 June (in press).
ZHANG T.C., GU H., JAHROMI M.F. (2018), “What makes the sharing economy successful? An empirical examination of
competitive customer value propositions”, Computers in Human Behavior. Available online 13 March 2018 (in press).
68
When Open Innovation drives Business Models Evolution:
the case of Business to Business Markets
TINDARA ABBATE* ANNA CODINI BARBARA AQUILANI
Objectives. The paper intends to shed light on how firms, operating in B2B, develop an Open Business Model, by
searching and exploiting knowledge of a large variety of external entities to produce innovative technological solutions.
The paper explores the following research questions: how do Open Innovation drives Business Model development in
B2B markets? In particular, how do B2B firms create and capture value by leveraging ideas, concepts and knowledge
from external sources?
The Business Model concept has increasingly gained relevance within different fields of research (Zott et al.,
2011), including the strategy theory (e.g. Casadesus-Masanell and Ricart, 2010; Teece, 2010), innovation and
technological management (e.g. Zott et al., 2011) and the emergent literature focused on e-business (e.g., Amit and
Zott, 2001; Berman, 2012). Other researcher have examined both its use in different theoretical approaches and its
evolution and interpretations over time (e.g., Zott et al. 2011; Spieth et al., 2014; Wirtz et al., 2016).
Accordingly to Massa et al. (2014), three interpretations of the concept and function of Business Model have been
developed by the management literature: 1) the Business Model as an empirical phenomenon or attribute of real firms
(Massa et al., 2014); 2) the Business Model as a cognitive-linguistic or cognitive structure or mental schema,
characterized by different concepts and relations in order to deliver managerial understanding of the design of value
creating activity systems and exchanges; and 3) the Business Model as a manifestation of formal conceptualization or
representation or description of how an organization effectively intends to function and, consequently, to achieve its
objectives. Although the three above mentioned interpretations are effectively suitable, the emergent literature
underlines that the approach focused on activities, including the resources and capabilities, can be useful and unifying
(Zott and Amit, 2010). In detail, the definition of business model proposed by Zott and Amit (2010) and assumed in this
study, describes a BM as a “set of activities, as well as the resources and capabilities to perform them - either within
the firm, or beyond it through cooperation with partners, suppliers or customers” (p. 219). An activity in a focal firm’s
business model can be observed as “the engagement of human, physical and/or capital resources of any party to the
business model (the focal firm, end customers, vendors, etc.) to serve a specific purpose toward the fulfillment of the
overall objective” (Zott and Amit, 2010, p. 217). However, it is the concept of activity system that becomes more
relevant because it represents a set of interdependent organizational activities centered on a focal firm, contemplating
those performed by its partners, vendors, customers. Specifically, “The firm’s activity system may transcend the focal
firm and span its boundaries, but will remain firm-centric to enable the focal firm not only to create value with its
partners, but also to appropriate a share of the value created itself” (Zott and Amit, 2010, pp. 217-218).
Then, the activity systems approach addresses the issues related to how firms conduct business, how they provide
value to their different and numerous stakeholder and how they connect factors and product markets. The Open
Innovation approach underlines the centrality of business model (Chesbrough, 2003) because it fulfils the following
functions:1) to articulate the value proposition; 2) to identify a market segment and specify the revenue generation
mechanism; 3) to design the structure of the value chain required to create and distribute the offering and
complementary assets; 4) to define the revenue mechanism(s); 5) to estimate the structure of costs and profit potential;
6) to explain the position of the firm within the value network linking suppliers and customers; and 7) to define the
competitive strategy (Chesbrough, 2010). In addition, the Open Innovation approach underlines that firms have to
actively seek people of genius from both outside and inside the organizational boundaries to provide necessary fuel for
their business models (Chesbrough, 2006). Specifically, firms have to open their Business Model “by actively searching
for and exploiting outside ideas and by allowing unused internal technologies to flow to the outside, where other firms
can unlock their latent economic potential”(Chesbrough, 2007, p. 22). Therefore, the choice requires that firms define
those ways to create, deliver and capture value in conjunction with external sources that are consistent with open
innovation perspective (Vanhaverbeke, 2017) by activating efficacious collaborative relationships. Although several
scientific contributions are focused on this stream of literature, little is known about how firms operating in B2B need
to design and develop their open business models by interacting and collaborating with outside knowledge sources.
*
Associate professor of Management - University of Messina
e-mail: abbatet@unime.it
Associate professor of Management - University of Brescia
e-mail: anna.codini@unibs.it
Full Professor of Management - University “Tuscia” of Viterbo
e-mail: b.aquilani@unitus.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
69
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.12
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
Methodology. In the empirical part, the paper performs a case study. Using a longitudinal approach when
describing the evolution of three different technologies developed by the selected company, the study investigates how
Business Model can be developed in the B2B market, using an explorative qualitative analysis based on a single case
study (Mintzberg, 1979; Mintzberg and Waters, 1982; Eisenhardt, 1989). The case study has been preferred to other
qualitative methodology, firstly, because considered to be suitable for examining the “how” and “why” questions (Yin,
2013). Secondly, because longitudinal real-time studies are considered particularly useful to study processes of change
and development in organizations (Barley, 1990; Van de Ven, 1993).
The case study here selected is the case of COPAN, an Italian family business company founded in 1979 as a
distributor and manufacturer of various laboratory products. The selection of this case study in order to investigate the
Business Model development in B2B was not a chance. For COPAN Business Model development, the adoption of an
open approach to innovation was the main driver, considering that the company evolved along the years, developing
different businesses beside the core business of laboratory products.
Additionally, the study developed multiple project studies, even within the same case, enabling to face the limits
related to a single case study method. This is the reason why the paper can be considered as a multiple case study.
The technological projects the paper analyzed were developed thanks to an Open Innovation approach where the
external contributions - mostly the key-customers’ones - enabled the company to get into new profitable businesses.
This led the company to create new companies within Copan Group, each one responsible for a specific business and
developing different business models.
The first technological project is the COPAN Flock Technology. This solution was developed thanks to an open
approach, exploiting the technology used for clothes hanger and developed by COPAN to create an innovative solution
for sample collection, transport and preservation developed for diagnostic, biotechnology and life science companies.
The second technological project was developed within COPAN Wasp, the company providing laboratory
automation systems for sample processing in the Microbiology laboratory. The development of the technologies in this
area - such as WASPLab® technology - was customer-driven, considering that it was born from the need of
microbiology laboratories to move samples from front end processing. Specialists acting in this business (consultants
and surgeons in the hospitals) constantly supported the technology development.
The third technological project was developed in COPAN NewLab Engineering, the recently established company
in charge of the development of instruments for the DNA databasing industry. To meet the need of Forensic DNA
Laboratories and Police Laboratory for consumables properly manufactured with minimal risk of contaminating
human DNA, during sample collection and handling in crime scene forensic investigations, COPAN developed different
customized solutions for rapid DNA testing.
Although the general fit of the case study with the research questions, gathering longitudinal data on business-tobusiness relationships implies serious challenges (Anderson, 1995). In order to overcome them, the study applies a
triangulation method integrating multiple data sources in a multi-method design, as recommended by Jick (1979).
Therefore, the study used multiple data sources: a) academic contributions, research studies; b) reports on firm
business activities, company web sites, official dossiers, Internet documents, published interviews; and c) in-depth
interviews with the main involved actors, elaborating questions derived from the literature review, especially describing
the innovation process driving the new technologies ideation and development as the key-elements of the Business
Models.
In order to drive data collection a theoretical framework has been developed basing on the Business Model and
Open Innovation literature. Particularly, the first section of the case study follows a longitudinal approach describing
the business evolution of the selected company, since 1979 when the company was founded till today focusing on some
key events. As the described key events correspond to the entry by the company into new businesses, the actual asset of
the Group (including different units dealt with the different businesses) was then detailed.
The second part of the case study is focused on the technological projects. For each project the new project
development stages are described and, after that, the key elements of the framework are analysed. Osterwalder &
Pigneur (2010) suggested a practical framework, called the Business Model Canvas, that firms can use to develop and
change (new) business models, and thereby create, deliver and capture value for their customer. Based on Osterwalder
& Pigneur (2010), the framework we used for data collection considers the Business Model as articulated in four areas
and nine building blocks. The four areas - the Product, Customer Interface, Infrastructure Management and Financial
Aspects - can be easily divided in nine building blocks namely: value proposition, target customer, distribution channel,
relationship, value configuration, capability, partnership, cost structure and revenue model (Osterwalder, 2004).
For each project we collected information about the new project development, so that the open approach emerged;
after that we collected information about the four areas and the nine blocks for each project. The business models we
created for each project were then compared one to each other, and discussed in order to answer to the main research
questions.
Findings. As data collection aimed to define the key elements of the business models of each project is actually
going on, hereby we report the first results of the case study, mostly focused on the business evolution of the company.
Since its inception, COPAN has been a family business. Founded in 1979, the company began as a distributor and
manufacturer of various laboratory products. The company was initially founded by a chemical engineer specializing in
Biotechnology Processing and named COPAN standing for the Italian acronym, “COadiuvanti per ANalisi”. In 1982
70
WHEN OPEN INNOVATION DRIVES BUSINESS MODEL EVOLUTION: THE CASE OF BUSINESS TO BUSINESS MARKETS
the company began to produce swabs, and, as a consequence of the business development adopting technological
advances in pre-analytics, it changed the COPAN acronym to “COllection and Preservation for ANalysis”.
In 1992, COPAN and began to invest in technology and entered into the automation sector with the invention of
the Ghibli, for large scale production of its products. After a progressive expansion of the company on the foreign
markets, starting from 2003, the company began an interesting process of business evolution leading it to innovate in its
core business and to diversify in new businesses too.
In 2003 COPAN invented FLOQSwabs the patented floq swabs, the innovative solution for sample collection,
transport and preservation developed for diagnostic, biotechnology and life science companies and leveraging the
technology used for clothes hanger. In 2007 COPAN the first WASP®, Walk-Away Specimen Processor, the first
laboratory automation systems for sample processing in the Microbiology laboratory was invented. In 2016 NewLab
Engineering offices in charge of the development of instruments for the DNA databasing industry opened in Brescia,
Italy.
As a result of this business evolution, actually the COPAN Group is composed of six companies: COPAN Italia,
COPAN Flock Technologies, COPAN NewLab Engineering, COPAN Diagnostics, Inc., COPAN Wasp and COPAN
Innovation Shanghai Limited.
Except the case of COPAN Innovation Shanghai Limited managing clinical product sales and business-to-business
projects specifically for the Chinese market, the other companies of the Group are specialized in the different
businesses the company developed over the years. So, COPAN Flock Technologies is dedicated solely to developing
innovative sample collection, transport and preservation solutions for diagnostic, biotechnology and life science
companies. COPAN Wasp provides laboratory automation systems for sample processing in the Microbiology
laboratory. COPAN’s WASP®, Walk-Away Specimen Processor, is a comprehensive system encompassing all aspects
of automated specimen processing, planting and streaking, Gram slide preparation, enrichment broth inoculation and
dispensing of antibiotic disks for Antibiotic Susceptibility Testing. COPAN WASP® also manufactures WASPLab®, a
sophisticated barcode driven Microbiology specimen processor and work-up system, connects with WASP® using a
conveyor track. NewLab is the division in charge of OEM automations for diagnostic companies, and of the
development of two instruments for the DNA databasing industry: CPA 200™ and CPA300™.
Even data collection is actually going on, the first analysis the paper performed showed how, in the case of
COPAN, Open Innovation affected Business Model evolution. In this case exploiting internal medical, scientific and
engineering expertise as opening up to new external contributions led the company to get into clinical, pharmaceutical,
industrial and forensics field, developing new profitable businesses. Comparing the evolution of the three selected
technologies using a longitudinal perspective the features of the related business models (in terms of the four Areas of
Product, Customer Interface, Infrastructure Management and Financial Aspects, articulated in the nine blocks of value
proposition, target customer, distribution channel, relationship, value configuration, capability, partnership, cost
structure and revenue model) emerged. This should shed a light on the main drivers of the business model evolution,
including Open Innovation approach.
Research limits. Even considering that data collection is actually going on and that this is a work-in-progress
project, the main limit is in the methodology. Albeit we tried to justify the case study as the most suitable methodology
considering the aim of the paper, a single case study does not allow to generalize, and this is the reason why we are
going to collect data on additional case studies in the future.
However, the specific approach we used for the case study should allow us to overcome some of the main limits
related to the usage of this methodology. First of all, the study developed multiple project studies, in order to compare
the Business Model evolution in three different cases even within the same company. This is also coherent with the aim
of the paper, considering that, in this specific case study, the adoption of an open approach led to the Business Model
evolution. This aim also justifies the adoption of a longitudinal perspective in describing the development of the
different projects and the consequent Business Model evolution. In addition, considering the serious challenges implied
in gathering longitudinal data on business-to-business relationships (Anderson, 1995), the study applied a triangulation
method integrating multiple data sources.
Practical implications. The paper offers some valuable managerial implications for firms in B2B. Specifically, the
case study analysis introduces an interesting example of a firm that is oriented to change its Business Model by the
opening up of its internal innovation processes/activities and the contribution of external knowledge, acquired,
integrated and combinated with the internal knowledge base. In particular, the study underlines the importance for B2B
firms to clearly identify the potential configuration of key resources, partners and activities both within and beyond
their organizational boundaries, expanding their perspective to define an appropriate business model can allow to
create and capture value from the ideas and innovative solutions developed with the collaboration of external
knowledge sources. Supporting the idea that there is a need for an industrial network approach to business model
analysis, the first results of our case study evidence the opportunity for B2B companies to get engaged with networkembedded Business Models rather than maintaining the past firm-centric Business Model (Bankvall et al., 2017). In this
respect, firms have to orient their efforts towards the identification of adequate position within these open-network,
trying to connect different external actors, and also to define efficacious competitive strategy by which obtain a
competitive advantage over rivals (Chesbrough, 2010). Undoubtedly, the change of perspective required mainly the
adoption of concrete attitude towards business model experimentation (Chesbrough, 2010).
71
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
Originality of the study. The paper integrates two different research streams, i.e. Open Innovation and Business
Model, illustrating a case of firm operating in B2B. In particular, the study contributes to the debate on Business Model
by investigating how firms in B2B design and implement a Business Model in order to acquire and transfer external
knowledge flows to develop innovative technological solutions and, thus, improve firm performances. Recently some
Authors (Stott et al., 2018) investigated whether there is any difference between B2B and B2C markets in how the idea
of Business Model change can or should be applied. Even though data collection is actually going on, our case study
supports the idea that in B2B business model should include the internal/external network/ecosystem (partners,
suppliers, channels etc.) and be featured as an explicit part of the relationship with key customers and suppliers
underpinning the value delivered from them or obtained from them.
Key words: Business Model; Innovation; Open Innovation; B2B markets; technological projects; multiple case study.
References
AMIT R., ZOTT C. (2001), “Value Creation in E-Business”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 22, n. 6/7, pp. 493-520.
ANDERSON J.C. (1995), “Relationships in business markets: exchange episodes, value creation and their empirical assessment”,
Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, vol. 23, n. 4, pp. 346-350.
BANKVALL L., DUBOIS A., LIND F., “Conceptualizing business models in industrial networks”, Industrial Marketing
Management, vol. 60, pp. 196-203.
BARLEY S.R. (1990), “Images of Imaging: Notes on Doing Longitudinal Field Work”, Organization Science, vol. 1, n. 3, pp. 185197.
BERMAN S.J. (2012), “Digital transformation: Opportunities to create new business models”, Strategy & Leadership, vol. 40, n. 2,
pp. 16-24.
CASADEUS-MASANELL R., RICART J.E. (2010), “From Strategy to Business Models and onto Tactics”, Long Range Planning,
vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 195-215.
CHESBROUGH H.W (2003), Open Innovation: The New Imperative for Creating and Profiting from Technology, Harvard Business
School Press, Boston, MA.
CHESBROUGH H.W. (2006), Open Business Models: How to Thrive in the New Innovation Landscape, Harvard Business School
Press, Boston, MA.
CHESBROUGH H.W. (2007), “Why Companies Should Have Open Business Models”, MIT Sloan Management Review, vol. 48, n.
2, pp. 22-28.
EISENHARDT K.M. (1989), “Building Theories from Case Study Research”, The Academy of Management Review, vol. 14, n. 4,
pp. 532-550.
JICK T.D. (1979), “Mixing Qualitative and Quantitative Methods: Triangulation in Action”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol.
24, n. 4, pp. 602-611.
MASSA L., TUCCI C.L., AFUAH A. (2014), “A Critical Assessment of Business Model Research”, Academy of Management
Research, vol. 11, n. 1, pp. 73-104.
MINTZBERG H. (1979), The Structuring of Organizations, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.
MINTZBERG H., WATERS J.A. (1982), “Tracking strategy in an entrepreneurial firm”, Academy of Management Journal, vol. 25,
n. 3, pp. 465-499.
SPIETH P., SCHNECKENBERG D., RICART J.E. (2014), “Business model innovation: State of the art and future challenges for the
field”, R&D Management, vol. 44, n. 3, pp. 237-247.
STOTT R.N., STONE M., FAE J. (2016), “Business models in the business-to-business and business-to-consumer worlds - what can
each world learn from the other?”, Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing”, vol. 31, n. 8, pp. 943-954.
TEECE D. J. (2010), “Business Models, Business Strategy and Innovation”, Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2-3, pp. 172-194.
VAN DE VEN A.H. (1993), An Assessment of Perspectives on Strategic Change, in Zan L., Zambon S., Pettigrew A.M. (Eds.),
Perspectives on Strategic Change, Kluwer Academic Press, Dordrecht.
VANHAVERBEKE W. (2017), Managing Open Innovation in SMEs, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK.
YIN R.K. (2014), Case Study Research Design and Methods (5th ed.), Sage Publication, Thousand Oaks, CA.
WIRTZ B.W., PISTOIA A., ULLRICH S., GOTTEL V. (2016), “Business models: Origin, development and future research
perspectives”, Long Range Planning, vol. 49, n. 1, pp. 36-54.
ZOTT C., AMIT R. (2010), “Business Model Design: An Activity System Perspective”, Longe Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2/3, pp.
216-226.
ZOTT C., AMIT R., MASSA L. (2011), “The Business Model: Recent Developments and Future Research”, Journal of
Management, vol. 37, n. 4, pp. 1019-1042.
Websites
http://www.copangroup.com/
72
On the way to business blockchainization:
An empirical analysis of successful ICOs
DANIELA ANDREINI* GIUSEPPE PEDELIENTO MARA BERGAMASCHI
Objectives. Among the myriad of changes that are reshaping the functioning of established markets and business
models - e.g. e-commerce, mobile commerce, social media, artificial intelligence, internet of things, etc. - blockchain
technology is credited as the most disruptive of our times (Shrier et al., 2016; Mattila, 2016). In a nutshell, a blockchain
is a distributed database of records, or public ledger of all transactions or digital events that have been executed and
shared among participating parties. Each transaction is verified by consensus of a majority of the participants in the
system avoiding the presence of a single, centralized authority. Once entered, information are visible to everybody and
can never be modified or deleted (Crosby et al., 2016). According to Tapscott and Tapscott (2017) blockchain
technology has five basic principles. 1. Distributed database: each party on a blockchain has access to the entire
database and its complete history. Every party can verify the records of its transaction partners directly, without an
intermediary. 2. Peer-to-peer transmission: communication occurs directly between peers instead of through a central
node. Each node stores and forwards information to all other nodes. 3. Transparency: every transaction and its
associated value are visible to anyone with access to the system. Each node, or user, on a blockchain has a unique 30plus-character alphanumeric address that identifies it. Users can choose to remain anonymous or provide proof of their
identity to others. Transactions occur between blockchain addresses. 4. Irreversibility of records: once a transaction is
entered in the database, the records cannot be altered. 5. Computational logic: the digital nature of the ledger means
that blockchain transactions can be tied to computational logic and in essence programmed.
Due to its basic features blockchain technology found forerunning applications in the financial sector (Iansiti and
Lakhani, 2017) and its usage became popular with the creation of a parallel circuit of digital currencies, named
cryptocurrencies. Cryptocurrencies (such as the worldwide known Bitcoin and Ethereum) - like traditional payment
systems-are aimed at moving monetary tokens between people through the changing of account entries, but with two
major differences. First, the database that is used to record payments between people is public, rather than the
privately held account databases of the normal banking system. Second, the intermediaries that change that database
are a decentralized network of people (called miners), rather than a central bank running its own private software
systems.
However, equating blockchain to cryptocurrencies is misleading (Swan, 2015) as the application of the blockchain
technology does not necessarily lead to the creation of a cryptocurrency.
The blockchain technology in fact can be used to radically change several established businesses like shipping,
cloud storage, music distribution, accounting, and real estate. For example, the blockchain-based company Everledger
(everledger.io) provides a distributed register that ensures the authenticity of diamonds, and certifies all the processes
that the stones go through, from extraction and cutting, to sales and insurance. On the other side, the application of the
blockchain technology has opened the door for the creation of completely new business models that would have not
existed without an adequate technological backbone. An example is the gaming industry where games like Cryptokitties
or Spell of Genesis, are built of a new business model where gamers are allowed to play and, at the same time, to trade
and monetize digital assets obtained through gaming. In general, every established business in which transactions are
made through a centralized actor, are liable of a process of blockchainization, a neologism that we introduce to the
current literature to signify every business and every business model that can leverage on peer-to-peer transactions
thanks to blockchain technology.
The blockchain has therefore stimulated companies and entrepreneurs to develop new business models, and to
innovate the way through which they can gain the capitals necessary to finance their creation and growth. This is done
through the creation of project-based cryptocurrencies that are sold in exchange of capitals given by investors. The
process through which new cryptocurrencies are created and distributed to financers is called ‘initial coin offering’
(ICO).
*
Associate Professor of Management - University of Bergamo
e-mail: daniela.andreini@unibg.it
Assistant Professor of Management - University of Bergamo
e-mail: giuseppe.pedeliento@unibg.it
Associate Professor of Management -University of Bergamo
e-mail: mara.bergamaschi@unibg.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
73
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.13
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
ICOs are public offers of new cryptocurrencies in exchange of existing ones, aimed at to finance projects and
raise early capital. The typical pattern is for a startup to produce a white paper that describes its business model and
technical approach. The white paper includes details about the functions that the cryptocurrency issued during the ICO
will perform and the process through which it will be created. The value of the cryptocurrency will then be tightly
connected with the evolution of the business and with its ability to generate profits and returns on investment made. For
this reason, despite of their label, cryptocurrencies are more similar to financial assets than to traditional currencies
due to their implicit higher volatility (Yermack, 2013; Glaser et al., 2014).
Recent data about ICOs reveal a highly dynamic market. In the third quarter of 2017, loans made through ICO
reached $1.3 billion, five times the investments made by venture capital funds in the same quarter. The ICO is a
revolutionary tool in business venturing, because it allows overcoming the strict barriers to capital access of
institutional investors and banks. In addition, it is also revolutionary compared to other form of unconventional peerto-peer financing like crowdfunding as it allows for erasing the intermediation of central platforms like Kickstarter or
Indiegogo.
According to FINMA1 (the Swiss Financial Market Supervisory Authority) in order to assess an ICO, it is essential
to understand the tokens and the smart contracts that allow the development of blockchain-based business models.
Tokens are the blockchain-base units issued by ICOs through which investors can access the digital blockchainbased public fund-raising. FINMA categorize tokens as follow:
Payment tokens comparable to simple “cryptocurrencies”, without being connected to other functionalities or
projects. In some cases, tokens can develop functionality and recognition as means of payment only over time.
Utility tokens that aim at providing access to a digital use or service.
Investment token assets, such as shares of real values, companies, revenues or the right to dividends or interest
payments. The token must therefore be assessed, in relation to its economic function, as an action, a bond or a
derivative financial instrument
A Smart Contract, instead, is the “translation” or “transposition” of a contract into a code in order to
automatically verify the fulfillment of certain conditions (control of basic data of the contract) and to automatically
perform actions (or make available so that certain actions can be performed) when the conditions determined between
the parties are reached and verified. With smart contracts, it is possible to carry out transactions equivalent to those of
securitization, without the need to set up a vehicle company (cost reduction) and with the advantage of greater
traceability and transparency of transactions guaranteed by the blockchain.
Thus, ICOs are part of the more general concept of business model innovation based on the involvement of users
(tokenholders) in the creation of value. The tech-intensive nature that characterizes the ICO projects enable the
creation of digital platforms as meeting points between the tokenholders from all over the world. The outcome is the
creation of integrated communities, based on social relations and sharing a collective benefit.
However, despite blockchainized business models and ICOs are to date gaining momentum, we still have little
knowledge about investments made and business sectors that are under the radar of the blockchain revolution.
The goal of this paper hence is to keep track of this dynamic and growing market. Through a thorough analysis of
the prominent consolidated ventures resulted from successful past ICOs, and the investigation of the most capitalized
upcoming ICOs, this paper aims to enlighten the impact of blockchain technology on industries and business models. In
particular, the research answers to the following questions. How can ICOs be categorized? What are the industries
mostly affected by ICOs? What are the business models that fit better with this technology? What are the features of the
business models more affected by the blockchain technology? What are the industries less interested to such a
phenomenon?
Methodology. Data about ICOs were collected through three different public directories that provide compelling
details about ICOs. These are icobench.com; icorating.com; coinmarketcap.com. These public repositories besides
containing basic information about the firm or the project to be funded, also allow to access he “white paper” where
details about the ICO are reported permitting to gain exhaustive details about the ICO itself and the venture to be
financed. Only ICOs with a minimum market capitalization of $5 million dollars were considered in the analysis
leading to the identification of 360 cases. This cut-off allowed us to choose the ICOs that attracted higher interest by
investors. The analysis of white papers was performed through content analysis a widely used technique for making
inferences by objectively and systematically identifying specified characteristics of messages’’ (Holsti, 1969). As part of
a constructionist paradigm, content analysis is a useful and flexible tool for approaching a nascent phenomenon like
ICO, the understanding of it and the key issues related to it.
This approach requires reading and re-reading data in iterative cycles to identify themes and to make inferences
of them. In details, the content analysis was deployed with the aim to: provide an overview of different types of ICOs
launched; identify the industries that are more frequently under the radar of blockchain innovators; understand which
components and architecture of the business model the new venture strives at changing (Foss and Saebi, 2017); trace
the main characteristics of the market related to ICOs.
Findings. Results of the analysis reveal several layers through which the revolution brought by blockchain
technology to existing business models and extent industries can be read. Most of the analyzed ICOs are based on an
1
https://www.finma.ch/en/news/2018/02/20180216-mm-ico-wegleitung/
74
ON THE WAY TO BUSINESS BLOCKCHAINIZATION: AN EMPIRICAL ANALYSIS OF SUCCESSFUL ICOS
underlying mechanism of value co-creation involving both producers and consumers and granting access to monetary
and non-monetary returns to both parties. In these blockchain platforms, consumers can play with a relatively few effort
both the consumer and the producer role. We found that current ICOs are mostly aimed at generating disruptive
dynamics in established markets and to completely change the way in which such establish markets work. Only a few of
the ICOs that are to date available in the three repositories analyzed can be framed as incremental innovations of
established business models.
The analysis allowed us to identify the businesses and respective business models that are more frequently subject
to a blockchainization process and to unveil differences among them. A bold finding stemming from our analysis is that
the large majority of new blockchain based firms operate in consumers’ markets. Like any other networking technology,
the blockchain technology responds to Metcalfe’s law, according to which “the value of a telecommunications network
is proportional to the square of the number of connected users of the system” (Alabi, 2017). In few words, the number
of users at the application layer is essential for the success of a blockchain application.
In addition, the results offer interesting insights to make inferences about two main issues. First, on how the
application of the blockchain technology is promoting radical changes in established businesses and in established
business models. In a way, blockchainization of established businesses can be interpreted as a way (so far market
aligned, see Martin and Schouten, 2014) to counteract the established market and its underlying mechanisms (Giesler,
2008; Thompson and Coskuner-Balli 2007). Second, on how new block-chain based ventures that are active in the same
business differ among them. We found that there is not a single way to blockchainize an established business but that
despite blockchain is at its early stage, new ventures are already seeking for differentiation. Besides these two relevant
themes, findings also allow shedding lights about the dynamics of the demand, i.e. allow understanding the type of
businesses that receive greater interest - valued in terms of capital collected - permitting to make inferences about the
future and expansive trends of the blockchain technology and of its application to the business domain.
Our expected results can described according to two different level of analysis. We draw descriptive results
related to distribution and concentration of ICOs on the basis of the following criteria: industry, products/services
traded, nationality, promoters, release date and amount of funds raised, type of blockchain (public vs. private), token
offered (security vs. utility), smart contract underpinning the coin offering (type of trading contracts between
participants), rate of success in each industry. We then depict qualitative results about the type of business models
pursued according to target markets, value proposition, sources of revenues, and change that coin creators strive at
provoking at the industry level. We finally discuss interpretative results based on findings drawn with previous
descriptive and qualitative findings. Specifically, by looking at how examples of blockchainization will change
established and new businesses, we will provide a framework of observation of such a phenomenon.
Research limits. Despite this research brings novel insights about the application of the blockchain technology,
three main limits have to be put forward. First, the analysis is limited only to three databases and considers only those
projects that are above a minimum threshold. Findings drawn are thus necessarily a partial representation of the whole
market of blockchain based firms and of extent ICOs. The second relates to the lack of information related to
performance achieved by newly established firms relying on the blockchain technology related to number of customers
acquired, revenues generated, and profits gained. Last, a further limitation deals with the lack of a compelling analysis
about capital gains generated by coins created by new ventures. Although data collected allow capturing an important
information about new venture financed, i.e. the amount of funds collected, we do not have any information related to
returns gained by investors once that the firm financed has started its operations.
Practical implications. Considering the scant research on the topic of blockchain and on the wider trend of
application of this technology to the business domain, a process that we labelled ‘blockchainization’, findings drawn in
this research have bold implication for business practices. One the one hand, they allow gaining a preliminary but
compelling understanding of investments made in new blockchain based businesses and to paint a picture of those that
are more than others subject to the blockchain transformation. On the other, offer a synthetic compendium for those
interested in investing in new blockchain based initiatives on the basis of the results achieved by first movers (in terms
of capitals collected) and on the basis of business sectors that are more exploited or underexploited. Finally, results of
the analysis also offer a finer-grained reflection on dynamics of business models innovations that can be envisioned
throughout the deployment of the blockchain technology.
Originality of the study. The scant literature on blockchain is mainly focused on explaining what is blockchain
and how it works. This paper is the first to provide a compelling exploratory analysis about current and upcoming
applications of this innovative technology to the business domain.
Keywords: Blockchain; ICOs; business models; blockchainization
References
ALABI K. (2017), “Digital blockchain networks appear to be following Metcalfe’s Law”, Electronic Commerce Research and
Applications, vol. 24, July-August, pp. 23-29.
75
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
CROSBY M., PATTANAYAK P., VERMA S., KALYANARAMAN V. (2016), “Blockchain technology: Beyond bitcoin”, Applied
Innovation, vol. 2, June, pp. 6-10.
HOLSTI O.R. (1969), Content analysis for the social sciences and humanities. Addison-Wesley Pub. Co.
IANSITI M., LAKHANI K.R. (2017), “The truth about blockchain”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 95, n. 1, pp. 118-127.
GIESLER M. (2008), “Conflict and compromise: drama in marketplace evolution”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 34, n. 6, pp.
739-753.
GLASER F., ZIMMERMANN K., HAFERKORN M., WEBER M.C., SIERING M. (2014), “Bitcoin - Asset or Currency? Revealing
Users’ Hidden Intentions”, Proceedings of the ECIS conference (Tel Aviv). Available at SSRN:
https://ssrn.com/abstract=2425247. Accessed April 9th 2018.
MARTIN D.M., SCHOUTEN J.W. (2013), “Consumption-driven market emergence”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 40, n. 5,
pp. 855-870.
MATTILA J. (2016), “The Blockchain Phenomenon - The Disruptive Potential of Distributed Consensus Architectures”, ETLA
Working Papers 38, The Research Institute of the Finnish Economy. Accessed April 9th 2018.
SHRIER D., WU W., PENTLAND A. (2016), “Blockchain & infrastructure (identity, data security)”, MIT Connection Science, pp.
1-18. Available at connection.mit.edu. Accessed April 9th 2018.
SWAN M. (2015), Blockchain: Blueprint for a new economy, O’Reilly Media, Sebastopol.
TAPSCOTT D., TAPSCOTT A. (2017), “How blockchain will change organizations”, MIT Sloan Management Review, vol. 58, n. 2,
pp. 10-13.
THOMPSON C.J., COSKUNER-BALLI G. (2007), “Countervailing market responses to corporate co-optation and the ideological
recruitment of consumption communities”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 34, n. 2, pp. 135-152.
YERMACK D. (2015), “Is Bitcoin a real currency? An economic appraisal”, in David L., Kuo C. (Ed.), Handbook of digital
currency. Bitcoin, Innovation, Financial Instruments, and Big Data, pp. 31-43.
76
Business model innovation in complex servitized systems:
the case of OBC in capital equipment SMEs
MARCO PAIOLA*
Objectives. Cranes, off-road and on-road automotive industries have lately engaged in offering use-based
services, in which the object of supplier customer relation is not based on a product, but on a service. Machine as a
service (MAAS) and Output-based Contracting (OBC) solutions have appeared also in capital equipment production
industries, that are far less glamorous than automotive world-class manufacturers, but are as well important in our
local systems of production and innovation. These strategic movements are strictly related to the recent technological
scenario. Nowadays, digitalization (and in particular technologies like IOT, Cloud platforms, Big Data analysis) is
pushing innovative firms to use services in order to create entirely new business models, finally migrating from the
product-centric approaches to (digital) service-oriented ones (Rymaszewska et al., 2017). Unfortunately, B2B firms
recognize that the possibility of accessing richer sources of data specific to their customer is greater than ever, but they
lack a clear and defined strategy that encompasses the use of those data (Lilien, 2016). The object of this research
project is to study how digitalization has affected firms' business models, with a special attention to medium-sized
capital equipment companies involved in Output Based Contracting. Little research work has been done to date on this
topic, that has a disrupting impact on the aforementioned companies.
Methodology. As OBC is a relatively new research topic (especially if related to IOT), we designed an
exploratory research based on a cross-analysis of a multiple-case study, using information coming from experts’
interviews and selected case studies with the aim of getting detailed information regarding firms’ approaches to the
selected research topic. First data have been collected from several in-depth face-to-face semi-structured interviews
with firms’ key-informants like CEOs or top managers in charge of IOT-related activities. Those interviews are the
initial part of an ongoing articulated investigation program that will have subsequent meetings in the forthcoming
months. Research methodology is in line with prescriptions coming from well-known specific literature on case-study
research (Eisenhardt, 1989; Yin, 1994). The empirical setting followed conceptual considerations, aiming at describing
different challenges faced by SMEs (Miles and Huberman, 1994). The involved firms are all Italian manufacturing BtoB
firms, that operate in industries and activities compliant to the research objectives. We deliberately excluded large
MNEs.
As one can notice (Table 1) the industries covered are: Packaging machinery, Pharmaceutical equipment,
Refrigeration equipment, Confectionary machinery. Companies are very often characterized by segment or niche
focalization, with a consequent specialization of resources, capabilities, product and services. Acknowledging the
different roles firms can play in the often very articulated BtoB supply chains, we focused on BtoB OEMs firms with a
direct sales model (Paiola, 2017), in order to be sure that the firms could boast a direct relation to the end user and any
connection with its needs and wishes, and no intermediate subject could interfere with the fulfillment of the OBC.
Tab. 1: Empirical cases: outline of firms’ characteristics
Position in the
value chain
Original
Equipment
Manufacturers
(OEMs)
Sales
model
Direct
Industries involved
Packaging
machinery,
Pharmaceutical
equipment,
Refrigeration
equipment,
Confectionary machinery
Number and hour of
interview
4 in-depth cases, 7
personal
face-to-face
interviews
Interviewees roles
CEOs,
CTOs,
CIOs, Marketing
& Sales managers
Findings. Connected products are transforming both business and consumer markets, making space for brand
new data-based service-oriented business models (Porter and Heppelmann, 2014;2015). For many manufacturers, this
is definitely the time for Business Model (BM) experimentation, especially regarding BM that traditionally don’t belong
to the manufacturing culture, such as service-based ones. Recent literature identifies three service-based approaches
that may change the classical equipment provider role of OEMs: availability provider, performance provider, solution
industrializer (Kowalkowski et al., 2015). In the new landscape, companies which succeed in extending the service
*
Associate Professor of Management - University of Padova
e-mail: marco.paiola@unipd.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
77
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.14
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
business are the ones that obtain comprehensive information on customer needs and use them to reshape their strategy.
Traditional methods of obtaining such information (wide-ranging market research, workshops with selected customers,
etc.) - that have always been important sources of ideas for developing new services (Gebauer et al., 2005) - are now
being transformed and amplified by the nature and the magnitude of new sources of business information such as IOT.
In particular, the impact of a transition toward use-based business models and especially OBC and MAAS
contracting entails the following modifications in companies’ strategies:.
From smart products to smart services: Digital, information rich, in a word “smart” products impact on firms’
strategies basically for the smart services they are capable to origin and supply (Allmendinger and Lombreglia, 2005).
It is not a case that a goods-based concept as Internet of Things has recently been paralleled by a new and
intellectually intriguing concept of “Internet of Services”. Digitalization of products may actually introduce a new
breed of both the types of BtoB services we introduced earlier. As regards the services supporting the customer (SSC)’s
side (Mathieu, 2001), use-based business models based not on the property and simple access to machines’ functions,
but on specifically contracted notions of performance associated with the use of the machine, such as process
optimization services, business optimization services and business transformation services are gaining importance. in
this field IOT and related technologies are acting as business innovation engines, and are going to call for a lot of
firms’ investments in the forthcoming years (Noventum, 2016; SAS, 2016). When manufacturers are offering OBC and
MAAS, the traditional practice of making profit by transactional sales of spare parts and product-related services are
no longer viable (Windahl and Lakemond, 2010). The servitization literature shows that profitability is transitioning
from “transaction-based product business” to “relationship-based service business” (Oliva and Kallenberg, 2003),
and from ownership-based business models to use-based ones. The latter questions are connected with different other
topics, beginning from the following, that is the transition of firms’ business models.
Business Models innovation: Starting from a comprehensive study that lists 55 inter-sectorial Business Models
(BM) (Gassmann et al., 2014), Fleisch et al., (2014) have selected the ones that are going to be influenced the most by
IOT technologies. In particular, BM archetypes as Guaranteed Availability, Pay per Use, Solution Provider, and
Performance-Based Contracting are supported by the functions of remote usage and condition monitoring available via
IOT. BM transformation poses serious challenges to firms: a strategic model has to take into account major impacts on
value drivers such as efficiency, complementarities, lock-in, and novelty—and the linkages among them (Amit and Zott,
2001). Changes to business model - even when not disrupting - can lead to conflicts with supply chains configurations,
and the resistance to experimentations that different firms may oppose to change, and with previous technologies
(Christensen, 1997). In addition, corporate cognitive functions of selecting and valuating information about new BMs
are based on the dominant logic of old successful ones (Chesbroug, 2010), potentially leading to miss potentially
valuable uses of technologies. Firms use to face the complexity of the transition with pragmatism: the impact of digital
technologies on different areas of the business model (such as the value proposition), can be projected to be managed
in a three-scale gradual impact magnitude, that is enhancing, extending and redefining the existing firms’ business
models (Berman 2012). Regarding what are the elements of a business model, Osterwalder and Pigneur (2010)
developed the Business Model Canvas, that has become a well-established framework for practitioners and firms to
describe their business models and analyse them in order to find new strategic alternatives. The model is composed of
nine building blocks, that cover the different types of firms’ economics, from marketing to production to finance,
namely: Value propositions, distribution channels and customer relationships; key resources, key activities and key
partners; revenue streams and cost structure. This model has been used to rethink strategies by large firms all over the
world, and will be the base of some considerations also in this paper later on. To deliver Outcome-Based Contracting
firms have to shift from the traditional product based model to an outcome business model, that is a particular case of
use-based business models (Visnjic et al., 2017). OBC as a target business model for BtoB OEMs in the capital
equipment industry can be with no doubt valued as a redefinition of the BM, that impacts on every building block. In
particular, the modifications of BM affect firms’ internal and external processes and interdependencies, especially
involving reconfiguration of internal capabilities, value and pricing models, revenue and cost structures, and power
and collaboration in the value system (Vendrell-Herrero et al., 2017).
Supply chains positions and ecosystems: Digital transformation has affected and changed the value created by
different parties in the offering (Arnold et al., 2016). In many different industries, the use of data coming from sensors
embedded in machines and products is enabling new forms of relations with key clients. Some years ago, Wise and
Baumgartner (1999) encouraged companies to look at the value chain from the customer’s perspective, in the effort of
seizing and exploiting downstream opportunities for creating new product and service concepts. The “downstream
gaze” of many popular cases of servitization involving large companies has highlighted the increasing importance of
downwards activities that traditionally have been neglected or underestimated by both OEMs and distributors (Auramo
and Ala-risku, 2005). In OEMs’ service-led experiences, it is not uncommon to run into the parallel phenomenon of
“Horizontalisation”, that is the need to build competences to be able to service also competitors’ products (Bundschuh
and Dezvane, 2003). This horizontal movement - that adds and leverage on the vertical direction of “going
downstream” – often calls in turn for an additional scouting of specialized third-party service providers, contributing
to substantiate mature digital transformation processes as complex and interrelated ecosystems of firms participating in
the production of product-service systems, with the resulting outcome of an incremental need for new competences in
managing the network of participating companies (Dahlstrom et al., 2016). Success increasingly depends on
collaborating with other companies that have complementary competencies and co-capabilities (Batista et al., 2017),
and individual companies no longer compete alone but rather as supply chains or ecosystems.
78
BUSINESS MODEL INNOVATION IN COMPLEX SERVITIZED SYSTEMS: THE CASE OF OBC IN CAPITAL EQUIPMENT SMES
Mindsets, competences and financial challenges: OBC has massive implications for many traditional marketing
management frameworks. Firstly, adopting advanced service-based business models, firms have to cope with new
notions of ownership and asset management (Neely, 2008 p. 105). Modern real-time KPIs measurement in operations
management, along with the ubiquitous nature of data guaranteed by communication technologies, allow firms to make
some moves into performance-based business models (Huxtable and Schaefer 2016). In fact, new business models
bolstered by data collection and information processing need also new capabilities. Gebauer et al., (2017), for example,
identify three organizational capabilities for pay-per-use services: (a) financing pay-per-use services, (b) aligning costs
to product usage, and (c) collaborating with customers. In fact, in OBC companies focus on solving problems from the
customer’s perspective. When a company commits in such an activity, it assumes the (high) risk of achieving a certain
output as the basis for compensation (Reinartz and Ulaga, 2008). Consequently, the pricing of the new services should
be based on a deep knowledge of the product, its pros and cons, and on an accurate calculation of the products’ range
of optimal activity and use. Pricing strategies are therefore strictly interrelated with contractual details, and represent
an important operational topic on which manufacturing firms have to experience. In addition, servitization implies that
firms won’t simply sell products. Instead, long term contracts with customers are signed, changing consequently the
nature and timescale of market relationships. Thus, servitization involves a shift from transactional to relational
marketing, and companies may not have the competences necessary to deal with this new situation satisfactorily and
different organizational adjustments have to be put in place in order to cope with this problem. Technological platforms
may also be at the base of new relations with customers, with a peculiar role being played by information modules, as
core elements for successful servitization alongside products and services (Cenamor et al., 2017). Servitization
represents also a compelling challenge for companies’ sales functions, since it can change the mere nature of what is
being sold: this may give birth to some culture - related issues. In fact, one of the reasons manufacturers may not be
able to make service activities as profitable as expected, is that they tend to use services as “incentives” to sale. Being
crystallized in the supplier – customer relation mechanisms, this habit can therefore constitute a strong resistance to
change (Neely, 2008). Furthermore, there is also a question of scale of the business, that leads manufacturers to
compare new service contracts’ impact to that of the traditional product selling. In Gebauer et al., (2005) words, “they
do not see the sale of a $50,000 service contract, as compelling as the sale of a $1 million machine”. Finally, timescalerelated challenges are connected to the specific contractual relationship often implied by servitization: complex PSS
and solutions often make firms engage in multi-year partnerships (Davies et al., 2007), with the consequent need of
being able to manage and constantly monitor risk and exposure.
The case for Medium-sized Enterprises peculiarity: Unlike large corporations, SMEs call for a specific treatment
when it comes to deal with their specific challenges and behavior in servitization (Gebauer et al., 2010). Firstly, minor
enterprises are less certain about what their business is going to become and what will their position be in the new
scenarios. In fact, the need to continue to perform well in the current business while simultaneously conducing the
experimentation of new BM is particularly challenging for smaller firms. In addition, the earnings coming from the new
experimental models are far less than those coming from established ones and that is an additional reason that calls for
caution. Also the professional competences inherent in activities such as big data analysis, highlight a critical
competence gap for SMEs. Those changes are particularly challenging for minor firms in financial, organizational and
strategic terms: their limited resource-base and their market position allow them to deal with IoT-based innovation in a
way very different from large firms (Laudien and Daxbock, 2016). As previous studies have pinpointed, other relevant
critical points may arise in relation to the distance from the end-customers, the type and nature of distribution channels
and the articulation of the value chain, in which frequently SMEs have limited bargaining power and need to
orchestrate ecosystems of partners in order to fill capability gaps, and add value to end customers (Gebauer et al.,
2013; Paiola et al., 2012). Unfortunately, this may be far outside the comfort zone of many manufacturers. In
particular, literature has pinpointed the main requisites of SMEs supply chain strategies, underlining aspects like their
need of guidance in strategic planning, the opportunity to focus and excel in a restricted number of activities and
capability, the critical importance of decision-making capabilities and the need of constantly monitoring and modify if
needed their competitive positions to respond rapidly to changing conditions (Lim et al., 2006).
Practical implications. The field research led us to observe some of the transformations described in the
literature at work. Firms are offering services that can be the base for new value-added offerings: predictive
maintenance, warranty modelling, consumption control, energy savings, and customized utilization of the product. In
some cases, MaaS concepts (Machine-as-a-Service) are being introduced, with a completely new billing system based
on equipment’s efficiency (better uptime and improved process efficiency) or actual rate of utilization. In these cases
service BMs experimentation has led to a completely new (and deeper) relation with key clients. On the whole, the
transition poses different challenges to SMEs, regarding their ecosystems, their business models and their strategic
marketing decisions.
Positioning strategies in the value chains: moving downstream: As far as value chains positioning strategies are
involved, our research shows a clear tendency of OEMs to look downstream to the final user firms. Many companies
are trying to regain direct contacts with final-user firms de-intermediating distribution channels, and designing more
customized services or even completely new solutions. Unfortunately, BtoB marketing strategies of minor firms have not
always been forward-looking, and very little concern has thus been directed to post-sale services is perceived as
burdensome and preferably outsourced to third parties. In this picture, the real occasion to stay in contact with the
customer is to be “reinvented”, in order to make some steps downstream.Managers feel they have no choice than
79
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
developing new capabilities in order to upgrade their patrimony. On the one side, they are turning to the old
servitization’s school imperatives, such as leveraging on their existing Installed Base in order to find a way to convey
new services and nurture new relations; in this area they end up realizing the need for new competences such as
marketing capabilities regarding the management of the relations with end users. On the other side, they are beginning
to look differently and with much more attention to their supply chains, in order to seize useful competences and
crafting an ecosystem of partners to involve in the strategic change. Finally, and quite surprisingly, even the players
that are close to the end user firms have a strong resistance to take digital transformation seriously. Frequently the
feelings managers have in this transition phase are disarming: “Our strategic vision is partial, we do not have a clear
idea of the role we could play in the value system”. This is to be connected to cultural and the industry dominant logic
prevalence, that prove to play an important role in the transformation.
Business model innovation: As regards the challenge of manipulating the firm’s business model, it is definitely an
activity perceived as difficult and risky, and very often firms don’t even possess the internal capabilities to face such a
difficult task (here the importance of external KIBS). In any case, firms that have made some experiences with new
business models, are trying to integrate them in the traditional strategy, ending up in building a “multi-model”
strategy. The ability of crafting a strategy in which different business models and approaches coexist is definitely a
critical capability in this phase. New business models experimentation regards the previously labelled “digitally
charged” ones: simpler and viable modifications are dealt with first, and big changes are subsequent, showing some
initiative in solution provision. The connected Installed Base (IB) allows the firm to envision the creation of a large
data base regarding customers’ use of selected product-lines, that in turn can be the base of new product and service
development in the future, such as razor and blade and lock-in models, or even performance-based and use-based
services. As a general rule, the initial approach to the transition can be defined as defensive or at least reactive. Even if
the potentialities of a deep use of data for the business are quite clear for the management, at the very beginning firms
approach the envisioned investments with a pragmatic attitude, improving in the first place basic product or service
areas like warranty control or product optimization, remaining in a well-known environment and leveraging on
capabilities they possess or can control. In one case packaging machines are being equipped with TCP/IP protocol and
WIFI gateways in order to access cloud services, that are at the moment used to initiate maintenance ticketing and
warranty management support. In other case the same technological outfit is the base for more sophisticated
experimentations, like in the case of a performance-based contracting relationship with key-clients with remote
equipment management and remarkable productivity gains contractually granted (and honored). Table 2 briefly reports
preliminary findings related to BM modifications.
Tab. 2: Business Models (BMs) change
Position in
value chain
OEMs
the
Sales
model
Direct
Industries involved
Problems
Solutions
Predictive maintenance; Guaranteed
Availability;
Performance-based
contracting; Solution providing.
Lack of CRM capabilities
Corporate identity crisis
Capability
sourcing;
Experimentation.
Marketing strategies modifications: In many cases, the major consequence of business models transition has been
the change of the type of the customer and the nature of the relationship underneath. Some advanced experimentations
that have been able to reach the final user firms with a digital-based value proposition, suffer in fact of an “identity
crisis” due to the clash between the traditional manufacturing identity and the new role that calls for multiple and
direct interactions with final users and requests competences and resources they don’t possess. A new world of pricing
strategies and contractual editing is opening up for companies that are exploring use-based and performance-based
business models. For example, in one case a capital equipment supplier (OEM) engaged with a key client in order to
guarantee given levels of overall equipment efficiency (OEE), assuming all the risks of not being capable to reach the
promised performances. That completely changed the context in which such company was used to manage customers
relationships, that until that moment were based on the sale of a product and some ancillary pre and post-sale services.
Firstly, the object of the sale changed, and that was a big change from an ownership-based approach to a use-based
one. Secondly, the need to operate its own produced machines instead of the customer and on behalf of the customer,
changed the timescale of the relation: that circumstance had to be negotiated as well as other terms like price levels. As
regards pricing, in this case, at first an experimental price fixation has been put in place, but having no experience the
prudential level of guaranteed output revealed to be poorly fixed. The OEM needed to re-negotiate it since the
productivity gains registered where much higher than forecasted and this would have seriously penalized the supplier.
The client-company was finally willing to re-negotiate contractual agreements regarding price, recognizing the value
and preciousness of the supplier’s capabilities. This circumstance testifies for the fact that in digital servitization, like in
more traditional servitization processes, pricing strategies are strictly interrelated with contractual details, and
represent an important operational topic on which manufacturing firms have to experience: being able to face the
(inevitable) pitfalls that characterize the first steps in this new world is a matter of loyalty and fairness of suppliercustomer relations.
80
BUSINESS MODEL INNOVATION IN COMPLEX SERVITIZED SYSTEMS: THE CASE OF OBC IN CAPITAL EQUIPMENT SMES
Research limits and Originality of the study. The study presented in this extended abstract - although not
permitting consistent generalization - has valuable impact both on theory and practice. In our research, we
underscored different problems that SMEs face in the adoption of advanced use-based business models, like OBC and
MAAS. Those advanced and complex projects are in place or are being explored and studied by OEMs with direct
contact with end-user firms, due to the valuable opportunity of changing and upgrading the relation with the customer.
IOT-based process optimization services or initial IOT-based business optimization services are being experimented in
some restricted nonetheless already durable projects. As a final note, we underline that digital transformation is not
perceived as a mere technology phenomenon. As one CEO said: “it all depends on the customer: if he hasn’t changed
his business model, no or little appreciation of innovation efforts will be encountered by OEMs”. Future research will
concern the deepening and enlarging of the sample at the base of the present work.
Key words: Digital transformation; Service Business Models; Output-based Contracting; Capital Equipment; SMEs;
Italy.
References
ALLMENDINGER G., LOMBREGLIA R. (2005), “Four Strategies for the Age of Smart Services”, Harvard Business Review,
October, pp. 131-145.
AMIT R.C., ZOTT. C. (2001), “Value creation in e-business”, Strategic Management Journal, Vol. 22, n. 6/7, pp. 493-520.
ARNOLD C., KIEL D., VOIGT K. (2016), “How The Industrial Internet Of Things Changes Business Models In Different
Manufacturing Industries”, International Journal of Innovation Management, vol. 20, n. 8, pp. 1640015-1 - 1640015-25.
AURAMO J., ALA-RISKU T. (2005), “Challenges for going downstream”, International Journal of Logistics Research and
Applications, vol. 8, n. 4, pp. 333-345.
BATISTA L., DAVIS-POYNTER S., NG I., MAULL R. (2017), “Servitization through outcome-based contract - A systems
perspective from the defence industry”, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 192, pp. 133-143.
BERMAN S.J. (2012), “Digital transformation: opportunities to create new business models”, Strategy & Leadership, vol. 40 n. 2,
pp. 16-24.
BUNDSCHUH R.G., DEZVANE T.M. (2003), “How to make after sale services pay off”, The McKinsey Quarterly, n. 4, pp. 116127.
CENAMOR J., RÖNNBERG SJÖDIN D., PARIDA V. (2017), “Adopting a platform approach in servitization: Leveraging the value
of digitalization”, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 192, pp. 54-65.
CHESBROUGH H. (2010), “Business model innovation: opportunities and barriers”, Long Range Planning, Vol. 43, pp. 354-363.
CHRISTENSEN C. (1997), The Innovator’s Dilemma, Harvard Business School Press, Cambridge
DAHLSTRÖM P., DESMET D., SINGER M. (2017), “The seven decisions that matter in a digital transformation: A CEO’s guide to
reinvention”, Digital McKinsey, February.
DAVIES A., BRADY T., HOBDAY M. (2007), “Organizing for solutions: systems seller vs. systems integrator”, Industrial
Marketing Management, Vol. 36, n. 2, pp. 183-193.
EISENHARDT K.M. (1989), “Building Theories from Case Study Research”, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 14, n. 4, pp.
532-550.
FLEISCH E., WEINBERGER M., WORTMANN F. (2014), “Business Models and the Internet of Things”, Bosch IOT Lab White
Paper. August.
GASSMANN O., FRANKENBERGER K., CSIK M. (2014), “The St. Gallen business model navigator”, University of St. Gallen,
Institute of Technology Management, Working Paper.
GEBAUER H., FLEISCH E., FRIEDLI T. (2005), “Overcoming the service paradox in manufacturing companies”, European
Management Journal, Vol. 23, n. 1, pp. 14-26.
GEBAUER H., PAIOLA M., EDVARDSSON B. (2010), “Service business development in small and medium capital goods
manufacturing companies”, Managing Service Quality, Vol. 20, n. 2, pp. 123-139.
GEBAUER H., PAIOLA M., EDVARDSSON B. (2012), “A capability perspective on service business development in small and
medium-sized suppliers”, Scandinavian Journal of Management, Vol. 28, n. 4, pp. 321-339.
GEBAUER H., JENNINGS SAUL C., HALDIMANN M., GUSTAFSSON A. (2017), “Organizational capabilities for pay-per-use
services in product-oriented companies”, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 192, pp. 157-168.
HUXTABLE J., SCHAEFER D. (2016), “On Servitization of the Manufacturing Industry in the UK”, Procedia CIRP, Vol. 52, pp.
46-51.
KOWALKOWSKI C., WINDAHL C., KINDSTRÖM D., GEBAUER H. (2015), “What service transition? Rethinking established
assumptions about manufacturers' service-led growth strategies”, Industrial Marketing Management, Vol. 44, n. 2, pp. 59-69.
LAUDIEN SVEN M., DAXBÖCK B. (2016), “The influence of the industrial internet of things on business model design: a
qualitative-empirical analysis”, International Journal of Innovation Management, Vol. 20, n. 8, pp. 16-40.
LILIEN G.L. (2016), “The B2B knowledge gap”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, Vol. 33, n. 3, pp. 543-556.
LIM R.Y.G., BAINES T., TJAHJONO B., CHANDRAPRAKAIKUL W. (2006), “Integrated strategic supply chain positioning for
SMEs: an empirical study”, The International Journal of Logistics Management, vol. 17, n. 2, pp. 260-276.
MATHIEU V. (2001), “Product services: from a service supporting the product to a service supporting the client”. Journal of
Business & Industrial Marketing, Vol. 16, n. 1, pp. 39-58.
MILES M. B., HUBERMAN A.M. (1994), Qualitative data analysis, Sage, Thousand Oaks.
NEELY A., (2008), “Exploring The Financial Consequences Of The Servitization Of Manufacturing”, Operations Management
Research. vol. 2, pp. 103-118.
NOVENTUM SERVICE MANAGEMENT, The Advanced Services Group Research, Aston Business School (2016).
“Manufacturers’ advanced services: IOT as the key to profitability and growth”, White Paper.
81
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
OLIVA R., KALLENBERG R. (2003), “Managing the transition from products to services”, International Journal of Service
Industry Management, vol. 14, n. 2, pp.160-172.
OSTERWALDER A., PIGNEUR Y. (2010), Business Model Generation: A Handbook for Visionaries, Game Changers, and
Challengers, Wiley, New York.
PAIOLA M., GEBAUER H., EDVARDSSON B. (2012), “Service Business Development in Small- to Medium-Sized Equipment
Manufacturers”, Journal of Business-to-Business Marketing, Vol. 19, n. 1, pp. 33-66.
PAIOLA M. (2017) “Digital transformation and servitization: opportunities and challenges for SMEs”, in West S., Gebauer H.,
Baines T., Proceedings of the Spring Servitization Conference: Internationalization through servitization, 15-17 may 2017,
Lucerne, Switzerland.
PORTER M.E., HEPPELMANN J.E. (2014), “How smart connected products are transforming competition”, Harvard Business
Review, November, pp. 65-88.
PORTER M.E., HEPPELMANN J.E. (2015). “How smart connected products are transforming companies”, Harvard Business
Review, October, pp. 97-114.
REINARTZ W., ULAGA W. (2008), “How to sell services more profitably”, Harvard Business Review, Vol. 86, pp. 90-96.
RYMASZEWSKA A., HELO P., GUNASEKARAN A. (2017), “IoT powered servitization of manufacturing - an exploratory case
study”, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol.1 92, pp. 92-105.
SAS INSTITUTE (2016). “Internet of things: visualise the impact”.
VENDRELL-HERRERO F., BUSTINZA O.F., PARRY G., GEORGANTZIS N. (2017), “Servitization, digitization and supply chain
interdependency”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 60, pp. 69–81.
VISNJIC I., JOVANOVIC M., NEELY A., ENGWALL M. (2017), “What brings the value to outcome-based contract providers?
Value drivers in outcome business models”, International Journal of Production Economics Vol. 192, pp. 169-181.
WINDAHL C., LAKEMOND N. (2010), “Integrated solutions from a service-centered perspective: Applicability and limitations in
the capital goods industry”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 39, n. 8, pp. 1278-1290.
WISE, R., BAUMGARTNER, P. (1999), “Go downstream: the new profit imperative in manufacturing”, Harvard Business Review,
September/October, pp. 133‐41.
YIN R. K. (1994), Case study research: Design and methods, Sage Thousand Oaks.
82
Smart Tourism Destinations and its integration into
Territorial Certifications
TINDARA ABBATE* ELVIRA TIZIANA LA ROCCA ALFONSO VARGAS-SANCHEZ
Objectives. In a global world, it is a fact that territories (cities, districts, provinces, regions, countries) strongly
compete for attracting private investors, public funding and tourists for promoting local development and people
welfare. In this context, territorial certifications have been institutionalized in an attempt to gain attractiveness and
competitiveness in that race, reinforcing territorial branding. Two examples, among others, are Cittaslow and Smart
City (or Smart Tourism Destination, particularly).
As a result, territorial managers are under an increasing pressure and burden, with a proliferation of standards
that makes their jobs more and more complex. Within this framework, once Cittaslow and Smart Tourism Destination
certifications were chosen as examples of territorial certifications, the analysis of both was carried out in an attempt to
find out possible overlappings, questioning ourselves about how close or far they are taking into account their
requisites. In other words, the questioning about the level of interrelation between them and their potential capacity of
integration are the main objectives of this paper.
Methodology. The methodology used consists of library search and the exam of previous literature review on the
subject of Smart Tourism Destination and Territorial Certifications. The library search encompasses offline and online
materials, such as scientific articles, chapters, etc. References were mainly found in online databases such as ISI Web
of Science, Scopus, Science Direct and Google Scholar. The advance search was focused on Smart City, Smart
Tourism, Smart Tourism Destination and territorial certifications. In this respect, the case of territorial certification
here selected is Cittaslow; this movement, in a form of Association, is an interesting example that has expanded across
national boundaries, including currently around 241 cities in 30 countries worldwide, representing a global network of
small-sized cities.
Findings. The smart city approach, which has received considerable attention in the last years, has been applied
to the tourism sector under the term “smart destination”. Its foundation is in the potential of the advances of
information and communication technologies (ICTs) to address issues of great impact such as sustainability, universal
accessibility and innovation, with solutions based on these technologies.
In general, smartness (or intelligence) is related to the ability to understand and solve problems using knowledge
(based on data and information) in the best possible manner. In this effort, recent developments in the capacity of
integrating and treating huge volumes of structured and unstructured data (Big and Open Data) has been extremely
useful.
Nevertheless, it is still a confusing term in practice, often utilized in political agendas and by tech companies to
sell their solutions. Thus, its conceptualization is essential, together with its implications on tourism governance, once
assumed that “despite these concerns, smart tourism is an incredible promising scenario that results in more
convenient, safe, exciting and sustainable living spaces for both residents and tourists, more personalized and therefore
more relevant tourism experiences, and even greater opportunities for new services, business models and markets to
emerge as a result of more flexible structures and different perspectives on value creation” (Gretzel et al., 2015, p.
185). Or, more synthetically: “a strategic tool for tourism development” (Gretzel et al., 2015, p. 175).
A literature review on Smart Tourist Destinations can be found in Vargas-Sánchez (2016), who, in addition, offers
the following definition, which was raised based on the contributions of two panels of experts formed by academics and
professionals, respectively: “A STD is one that, from a shared vision by the actors involved in it, is based on an
extensive use of cutting-edge technologies in order to create an advanced digital space through an integrated network
of management systems, platforms and, in short, of all kind of data (on mobility, energy consumption, etc.)- able to
improve the whole management of the destination and, therefore, its differentiation and competitiveness. This will
enable a more effective and efficient accessibility to products / services that make up the offer, adding value through
*
Associate Professor of Marketing - University of Messina
e-mail: abbatet@unime.it
Assistant Professor of Management - University of Messina
e-mail: tlarocca@unime.it
Full Professor of Strategic Management - University of Huelva (currently Visiting Professor at University of Messina)
e-mail: vargas@uhu.es
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
83
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.15
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
their customization and promoting tourist’s interaction (before, during and after the visit) with the destination and
his/her integration in it. A STD is built on the values of innovation and sustainability, working to improve the tourist’s
experience and enhance the quality of life of local communities (residents)” (pp. 189-190).
According to Yoo and Gretzel (2016, 420): “Smart destinations rely on a number of ‘smart’ technologies, most
prominently sensors, beacons, RFID (radio-frequency identification) and NFC (near-field communication) in
combination with smartphones and mobile apps to allow the integration between physical and virtual destination
layers”.
Spain has been the pioneer country in establishing the requirements of a management system for Smart Tourist
Destinations through the norm UNE 178501:2016, accredited by the Spanish Association for Standardization and
Certification (AENOR). More specifically, this standard …
…specifies the requirements to establish, implement, maintain and improve a management system for a Smart
Tourism Destination that adequately considers innovation, the use of technologies, universal accessibility and
sustainability in that destination (innovation, technology, accessibility and sustainability are the four pillars on
which the management of a STD stands). It is applicable to all types of tourist destinations, regardless of their
character (holiday, urban, natural, etc.), size (municipal or supramunicipal) and nature of their managing body;
…has been designed to be used independently, although it can be aligned or integrated with other management
systems (this point has a particular relevance for our purposes);
…can be used to demonstrate compliance with the requirements established therein against a third party.
Figure 1 displays the structure of this norm, from which a managing body with enough competencies can develop
and implement a management policy for the tourist destination and establish objectives, goals and action plans linked
to the above mentioned four pillars. It is guided to continuously improve the experience of the tourist (before, during
and after the trip), as well as increase the competitiveness and strengthen the positioning of the destination, improving
at the same time the quality of life of residents.
Fig. 1: Structure of the Spanish norm UNE 178501:2016 on Management System of Smart Tourism Destinations (MSSTD)
Source: Moutinho et al., 2018, pp. 170-172.
In the past few years, Spain has led the definition of a new model of tourism development based on maximizing
tourism competitiveness and governance, guaranteeing sustainability of tourist destinations and seizing the
opportunities of ICT and innovation to face the challenges of the complex international environment. As a result, a
Smart Destination has been characterized as an innovative tourist destination, built on state-of-the-art technological
infrastructures, that guarantees sustainable development, promotes universal accessibility, facilitates visitors’
interaction with the destination and increases the quality of the tourism experience, while improving residents’ quality
of life.
The aim is to improve the positioning of Spain as a world tourism destination, seeking new mechanisms to boost
innovation in destinations through the deployment and development of ICT in order to create differential and highly
competitive services. A further aim has been to set up a standardized framework that establishes the minimum
requirements to classify tourism destinations as “Smart Destinations” aligned with the trend towards Smart Cities.
Within this framework, a STD is intended to guarantee, using the power of technology and innovation, the
sustainable development of the tourist area; accessible to everyone, in addition, it facilitates the visitors’ interaction
with and integration into their surroundings, increases the quality of the experience at the destination, while also
improving the quality of life of its residents.
The result of this reconversion is to stimulate increased competition through innovation, leading to an improved
perception of the destination and a greater productive capacity for companies, quantitatively generating an
improvement in the residents' quality of life.
84
SMART TOURISM DESTINATIONS AND ITS INTEGRATION INTO TERRITORIAL CERTIFICATIONS
Destinations seeking to become STDs must implement a re-valorization strategy aimed at increasing
competitiveness through an enhanced exploitation of their natural and cultural attractions, the creation of additional
innovative resources, and improvements in the efficiency of their production and distribution processes. The ultimate
goal is to stimulate sustainable development and facilitate visitors’ interaction with the destination.
In fact, the Smart Destination Reference Model has been designed so that tourist destinations and businesses can
successfully cope with transformations and challenges derived by the new economic, social and technological
environment worldwide. This model was conceived and managed by SEGITTUR (State Company for Innovation and
Tourism Technology Management), under the Secretary of State for Tourism commands, which has already developed
several pilot projects of pre-diagnosis, diagnosis and design of the action plan in a number of destinations, both inside
and outside the country.
Besides, as indicated above, Spain has led a process of standardization for tourist destinations, along with the
National Association of Standardization (AENOR), and has already published the first official standard of its kind, the
UNE 178501:2016 Management System for Smart Destinations: Requirements, which follows ISO high level structure
directives (a summary of its requisites is displayed in table 1). A second standard is being developed in order to
complement the former, under the denomination PNE 178502 Indicators and tools for Smart Destinations.
Tab. 1: Spanish Norm Une 178501:2016 on Management System of Smart Tourism Destinations (MSSTD)
Axis
Innovation
Technology
Universal
Accessibility
Sustainability
Requisites
The MSSTD must:
a.-Acquire a continued commitment to innovation and incorporate this axis into its strategy.
b.-Have resources (human, technical and financial) to develop its innovation strategy.
c.-Develop the following functions: identify and analyse problems and opportunities; analyse and select innovation ideas; plan, monitor and control,
and execute the portfolio of innovation actions; perform their measurement, analysis and improvement; perform the registration, monitoring and
control of results documentation; perform the protection and exploitation of results.
d.-Use the following innovation tools: technology surveillance, technology forecasting and creativity.
e.-Study and analyse each idea based on the necessary technology for its development, the requirements of universal accessibility and sustainability,
as well as other internal and external parameters. Those that have the greatest potential for viability should be selected and included in the
corresponding plan.
The MSSTD must:
a.-Ensure the existence of telecommunications infrastructure (especially wireless) so that tourists can be connected (permanently or almost
permanently) through a wide variety of devices, with a quality connection and sufficient security guarantees.
b.-Implement Business Intelligence or Tourist Intelligence tools.
c.-Promote the development of applications or platforms that allow, on a bilateral basis, the permanent communication between the destination and
the tourist (before, during and after the trip).
d.-Facilitate and implement tools and technological solutions that allow tourists to interact with the destination before traveling, during their stay and
after the trip, with sufficient guarantees of security and confidence.
e.-Arrange or promote the development of infrastructures, devices or instruments that allow tourists to know the destination and all its components
(transport, beaches, museums, etc.) regardless of whether they have special needs (universal accessibility).
f.-Implement or promote technological solutions that allow the security of tourists' personal data.
g.-Implement or promote technological solutions that allow greater environmental sustainability of the destination.
h.-Implement or promote the development of technological solutions that contribute to the improvement of physical security in the destination.
i.-Arrange, develop or implement technological solutions in the management of the destination to improve its competitiveness.
The MSSTD must:
a.-Acquire a documented commitment to improve the universal accessibility of the destination and ensure compliance with the requirements both in
the public and private management.
b.-To have means (human, technical and financial) dedicated to the management of the universal accessibility of the destination.
c.-Perform a documented diagnosis in order to determine to what extent the requirements contemplated in the legislation on universal accessibility
are met.
d.-Establish a plan of action for the improvement of universal accessibility.
e.-Agree the scope of the actions promoted in the universal accessibility plan with stakeholders, both public and private ones.
f.-Establish participation mechanisms for stakeholders, including entities that represent users.
g.-Ensure the training and competence in terms of universal accessibility of the people who participate in the process of execution of the action plan
(destination managers, professionals of the tourism sector in the public and private spheres ...).
h.-Provide information on universal accessibility services, as well as on the accessibility conditions of the destination's tourist offer.
i.-Make promotion of the accessible offer and facilitate its marketing.
j.-Carry out a follow-up of the plan of action of universal accessibility and a periodic evaluation of the fulfilment of the objectives and the actions
carried out. Likewise, it must manage the incidents that occasionally arise.
k.-Ensure compliance with universal accessibility measures established in the aforementioned action plan.
l.-Work on the continuous improvement of universal accessibility in an integral manner throughout the tourist offer, promoting awareness among
stakeholders, as well as promoting compliance with current legislation and applicable voluntary reference regulations.
The MSSTD must acquire a documented commitment to improving the sustainability of the destination and integrate that commitment into its
strategy in a transversal manner, from several perspectives:
a.-Protection of economic activity. It must: promote decent and innovative work opportunities, as well as training for local employment and digital
skills; ensure safety (physical safety of buildings, facilities and transport, including emergency procedures, food safety and health response); develop
resilience (adaptability of tourist services to the needs and requirements of tourists).
b.-Environmental protection. It must be responsible for the measurement of environmental parameters; the control and follow-up of the public
transport system and pedestrian mobility.
c.-Quality of life. It must consider ethnic and social integration; gender equality; health (both public and private health services for tourists).
d.-Socio-cultural impact of tourist activities. It must take into account aspects such as: the interaction between citizens and tourists; the sports,
recreational, leisure offer; the preservation of the natural and cultural heritage.
e.-Territorial cohesion. It must favour the culture of social responsibility and the involvement of stakeholders.
Source: own elaboration.
Territorial certifications play a crucial role for the development of policies in order to redefine the local
competitive dynamics with respect to the economics, social and sustainable dimensions (Ritchie and Crouch, 2000;
Lorenzini et al., 2011). According to Honey and Stewart (2002) territorial certification is “the procedure that audits
and gives written assurance that a facility, product, process, service or management system meets specific standards. It
85
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
awards a logo or seal to those that meet or exceed baseline criteria or standards that are prescribed by the program”
(pp. 4-5).
The governance of the territory requires the participation of a multitude of actors emphasizing a strategic
convergence among different actors in order to implement an integrated model of management and related tools for the
development of the attractiveness and competitiveness of the area (Ritchie and Ritchie, 1998; Crouch and Ritchie,
1999; Morgan et al., 2002). In this way, the area can achieve economic, social, cultural and environmental benefits
(Pechlaner et al., 2005; Ko, 2005; Martini, 2005; Hall 2008; Dinica, 2009). Neto (2007) points out that the territorial
certifications represent “a way of promoting the territory as a tourist destination, but also, and mainly, to attract
investment and populations, to promote the companies located in it as well as their products and to increase the
portfolio of established companies” (Lorenzini et al., 2011, p. 2).
In this context, Cittaslow Association is an interesting case of analysis. Since its creation in 1999 by Paolo
Saturnini (Mayor of Greve di Chianti in Italy), in collaboration with other Mayors, the Cittaslow Association has
expanded across national boundaries, including currently over 240 cities in 30 countries worldwide and becoming a
global network of small-sized cities (town must have no more than 50,000 residents), discovering the place’s culture
and value, fostering the commitment of local community members and promoting alternative paths to sustainable
development under the constraints and negative effects of the globalization (Pink, 2008; Nilsson et al., 2011).
The main principles of the Association are the following: to draw up and implement energy and environmental
policies; to implement coherent infrastructural policies; to promote policies for urban quality; to encourage the
production and use of local foodstuffs, to safeguard local production; to promote the quality of hospitality and
awareness among all citizens; to promote the use of technologies that facilitate sociability and cooperation among local
producers (Cittaslow, 2017a). Cittaslow certification is given to small-cities that agree to work towards a set of goals
aimed at improving the quality of life of their citizens and visitors, and at sharing ideas, experiences and knowledge
across the national and international Cittaslow networks (Miele, 2008). In order to obtain the certification and to
participate in the Association, a destination must meet at least 50% of the Cittaslow criteria consisting of a set of
aspects linked with specific policies and grouped into some categories (energy and environmental policy, infrastructure
policies, quality of urban life policies, agricultural / turistic and artisan policies, hospitality / awareness and training,
social cohesion and partnerships) (table 2).
Tab. 2: Essential requisites to become Cittaslow
Energy
and
Environmental
Policy
Infrastructure
Policies
Quality
Urban
Policies
of
Life
Agricultural,
Touristic and
Artisan
Policies
Policies
for
Hospitality,
Awareness and
Training
Social
Cohesion
Partnerships
Air quality conservation*; Water quality conservation *; Drinking water consumption of residents;
Urban solid separate waste collection*; Industrial and domestic composting; Purification of sewage disposal*; Energy saving in buildings and public
systems; Public energy production from renewable sources; Reduction of visual pollution, traffic, noise; Reduction of public light pollution*; Electrical
energy consumption of resident families; Conservation of biodiversity.
Efficient cycle paths connected to public buildings; Length (in km) of urban cycle paths created over the total number of km of urban roads *; Bicycle
parking in the interchange areas; Planning of ecomobility as an alternative to private cars*; Removal of architectural barriers*; Initiatives for family life
and pregnant women*; Verified accessibility to medical services; “Sustainable” distribution of merchandise in urban centres; Percentage of residents
that commutes daily to work in another town*
Planning for urban resilience**
Interventions of recovery and increasing the value of the civic centres (street furniture, tourist signs, aerials, urban landscape mitigation conservation)*
Recovery / creation of social green areas, with productive plants and / or fruit trees**
Urban liveableness (“home-work”, nursery, company hours, etc.)
Requalification and reuse of marginal areas*
Use of ICT in the development of interactive services for citizens and tourists*
Service desk for sustainable architecture (bio-architecture, etc)*
Cable network city (fibre optics, wireless)*
Monitoring and reduction of pollutants (noise, electrical systems etc)*
Development of telecommuting
Promotion of private sustainable urban planning (passive house, building materials, etc.)
Promotion of social infrastructure (time based currency, free cycling project, etc.)
Promoting of public sustainable urban planning (passive house, building materials, etc.)*
Recovery / creation of productive green areas, with productive plants and/or of fruit within the urban perimeter**
Creation of spaces for the commercialization of local products*
Protection /increasing value of workshops- creation of natural shopping centres*
Metre cubes of cement (net infrastructure) in green urban areas
Development of agro-ecology**; Protection of handmade and labelled artisan production (certified, museums of culture, etc )*; Increasing the value of
working techniques and traditional crafts*; Increasing the value of rural areas (greater accessibility to resident services)*; Use of local products, if
possible organic, in comunal public restaurants (school canteens etc)*; Education of flavours and promoting the use of local products, if possible organic
in the catering industry and private consumption*; Conservation and increasing the value of local cultural events*; Additional hotel capacity
(beds/residents per year)*; Prohibiting the use of gmo in agriculture; New ideas for enforcing plans concerning land settlements previously used for
agriculture.
Good welcome (training of people in charge, signs, suitable infrastructure and hours )*
Increasing awareness of operators and traders (transparency of offers and practised prices, clear visibility of tariffs)*
Availability of “slow” itineraries (printed, web etc)
Adoption of active techniques suitable for launching bottom-up processes in the more important administrative decisions
Permanent training of trainers and / or administrators and employees on cittaslow themes**
Health education (battle against obesity, diabetes etc.)
Systematic and permanent information for the citizens regarding the meaning of cittaslow (even preemptively on adherence)*
Active presence of associations operating with the administration on cittaslow themes
Support for cittaslow campaigns*
Insertion/use of cittaslow logo on headed paper and website*
Minorities discriminated; Enclave/neighbours; Integration of disabled people; Children care; Youth condition; Poverty; Community association;
Multicultural integration; Political participation; Public housing; The existence of youth activity areas, and a youth center.
Support for Cittaslow campaigns and activities; Collaboration with other organizations promoting natural and traditional food; Support for twinning
projects and cooperation for the development of developing countries covering also the spread philosophies of cittaslow.
* = Obligatory requirement; ** = Perspective requirements
Source: own elaboration from Cittaslow (2017b).
86
SMART TOURISM DESTINATIONS AND ITS INTEGRATION INTO TERRITORIAL CERTIFICATIONS
The analysis of Smart Tourism Destinations and territorial certifications -in terms of their main characteristics,
objectives and requirements- underlines the existence of a relevant complementarity between the principal components
of these two standards linked to territorial development. In effect, the Cittaslow certification assumes a relevant role to
strongly encourage the relationships among economic development, social well-being and environmental sustainability
at local level. However, the management system of this certification might be inspired in the Smart Tourism Destination
model, including its methods and principles, as it would stimulate the creation of an significant basis for innovation,
information and knowledge transfer and sharing, by promoting and sustaining the emergence of a new smart tourism
ecosystem in the current challenging and competitive scenario.
Based on this strand, the idea of a Smart Cittaslow should be conceptualized, guided to promote the adoption of a
smartness concept within the Cittaslow cities in order to improve their processes of knowledge transfer among all the
different stakeholders involved within the local network, as well as their urban and tourism competitiveness under an
effective sustainability perspective. In this respect, two different steps are suggested. Firstly, the city should obtain the
Cittaslow certification according to its requisites, displayed in table 2, by observing and working towards a set of goals
aimed at improving the quality of life of their citizens and visitors, and at sharing ideas, experiences and knowledge
across the national and international Cittaslow network (Miele, 2008; Presenza, Abbate and Micera, 2015; Presenza,
Abbate and Perano, 2015). Then, as a second phase, the model of Smart Tourism Destination should be adopted for the
management of the Cittaslow territorial system in order to provide methods and hard/soft smartness components to
make knowledge and information accessible to all the stakeholders, facilitating their interaction within an integrated
ecosystem. Additionally, the model should stimulate the definition and adoption of available mechanisms that allow
them to participate and create value in the innovation processes applied to places. According to Buhalis (2015, n.p.),
the Smart Tourism Destination model “is fostered by open innovation, supported by investments in human and social
capital, and sustained by participatory governance in order to develop the collective competitiveness of tourism
destinations to enhance social, economic and environmental prosperity for all stakeholders”.
Research limits. The study explores two certifications with the aim to find out possible overlappings as a result of
the analysis of relevant literature in these fields. Therefore, the conceptual framework is still in its nascent stage and,
consequently, requires empirical evidence. Additionally, the relationships between Smart Tourism Destination and
territorial certifications are effectively under-researched and it might be worthwhile designing a qualitative analysis to
widen the understanding of the potential relationships between these two concepts before embarking in a quantitative
research efforts.
Practical implications. From a theoretical point of view, the envisage of a potential integrated framework, whose
details must still be developed. From a managerial point of view, this work encourages local actors and policy makers
to use these tools for strategic planning of a territory in harmony with historical, artistic and cultural heritage of the
area. It’s important for policy makers to exploit and realize the territorial certifications’ potential by implementing
actions for the sustainable development of the territories, thus managing to keep the brand promises. To move in this
direction, the development of the above-mentioned integrated theoretical framework would be undoubtedly helpful.
Originality of the study. The originality of this theoretical study is the proposal of the “Smart Territorial
Certification” (STC) concept. In fact, the smart management of a territorial certification would enhance its
effectiveness through the use of cutting-edge technology and the possibilities they bring to having access of relevant
data and, consequently, to making better decisions based on a more detailed information and a deeper level of
knowledge about the matter under study.
Nowadays it is hard to image a territorial certification, and the corresponding territorial branding, without the
support of tech developments and not guided under the principles of innovation, sustainability and universal
accessibility, more and more often broadly assumed. Therefore, the guidelines provided by the certification of Smart
Tourism Destinations can be extremely valuable and generally applicable to the management of standards such as
Cittaslow or others of similar character. It would be as an “umbrella paradigm” able to assist and upgrade the
development of any territorial certification, leading to a renovated Smart Territorial Certification (as the suggested
Smart Cittaslow). In other words, the MSSTD summarized in table 1 would be as a new force to enhance the
performance of the territorial standard under consideration, favouring their effectiveness and consolidation. Therefore,
the complementarities between both should be emphasized, in the sense that the implementation of a smart system for
the management of the territorial certification would improve its performance.
The process, in a nutshell, would embrace two wide phases: firstly, the award of the desired territorial
certification, according to its specific requirements, and secondly the application of the recent smart paradigm to the
management system of that certification. Following this rationale, a STC could be defined, in this initiation stage, as a
territorial certification endowed of a smart management system able to enhance the certification performance through
the use of state-of.the-art technologies and a data driven logic for the encouragement of innovation, sustainability and
accessibility in its various chapters, without altering its essence.
As far as we know, this is the first attempt in the scientific literature intended to integrate both concepts, which
until now had been considered separately. In our opinion, its integration open an ample room of possibilities for a
better management and promotion of territories and for, necessarily, further research in this field and under this new
perspective.
87
TRACK - BUSINESS MODELS EVOLUTION: TECHNOLOGY AND BEYOND
Key words: Smart Tourism Destinations; Territorial Certifications; Cittaslow; Smartness; Smart Territorial
Certifications.
References
AENOR (2016), Sistema de gestión de los destinos turísticos inteligentes, UNE 178501:2016, Published: 20/04/2016. Retrieved
from: http://www.aenor.es/aenor/normas/normas/fichanorma.asp?tipo=N&codigo=N0056506 (20/12/2016).
BUHALIS D. (2015), “Working definitions of smartness and smart tourism destination”, Available at: http://
buhalis.blogspot.co.uk/2014/12/working-definitions-of-smartness-and.htm (accessed 23 March 2018).
CITTASLOW (2017a), Information about how to become a certified Cittaslow. Retrieved from Cittaslow Association
http://www.cittaslow.org
CITTASLOW (2017b), Cittaslow International Charter, 12 May 2017, http://www.cittaslow.org
CROUCH G.I., RITCHIE J.R:B. (1999), “Tourism, Competitiveness, and Societal prosperity”, Journal of Business Research, vol.
44, n. 3, pp. 137-152
DINICA V. (2009), “Governance for sustainable tourism: a comparison of international and Dutch visions”, Journal of Sustainable
Tourism, vol. 17, n. 5, pp. 583-603.
GRETZEL U., KOO C., SIGALA M., XIANG Z. (2015), “Special issue on smart tourism: convergence of information technologies,
experiences, and theories”, Electronic Markets, vol. 25, n. 3, pp. 175-177.
GRETZEL U., SIGALA M., XIANG Z., KOO C. (2015), “Smart tourism: foundations and developments”, Electronic Markets, vol.
25, n. 3, pp. 179-188.
HALL C.M. (2008), Tourism planning: Policies, processes and relationships (2nd ed.), Prentice-Hall, London.
HONEY M., STEWART E. (2002), “Introduction”, in Honey M. (Ed.), Ecotourism and Certification: Setting Standards in Practice,
Island Press.Washington, DC, pp. 1-32.
KO T.G. (2005), “Development of a tourism sustainability assessment procedure: a conceptual approach”, Tourism Management,
vol. 26, n. 3, pp. 431-445.
LORENZINI E., CALZATI V., GIUDICI P. (2011), “Territorial brands for tourism development”, Annals of Tourism Research, vol.
38, n. 2, pp. 540-560.
MARTINI U. (2005), Management dei sistemi territoriali. Gestione e marketing delle destinazioni turistiche, Giappichelli, Torino.
MIELE M. (2008), “Cittaslow: Producing Slowness against the Fast Life”, Space and Polity, vol. 2, n. 1, pp. 135-156.
MORGAN N., PRITCHARD A. (2002), “Contextualizing destination branding”, in Morgan N., Pritchard A., Pride R. (Eds.),
Destination branding, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford (pp. 10-41).
MOUTINHO L., VARGAS-SANCHEZ A., MORAL-MORAL M. (2018), “Technology Management in Tourism”, in Moutinho L.,
Vargas-Sanchez A. (Eds.), Strategic Management in Tourism, CABI, Wallingford (UK), pp. 165-180.
NETO P. (2007), “Strategic planning of territorial image and attractability”, in Matias A., Nijkamp P., Neto P. (Eds.), Advances in
modern tourism research, Physica Verlag, New York, pp. 233-256.
NILSSON J.H., SVARD A.C., WIDARSSON A., WIRELL T. (2011), “CittàSlow eco-gastronomic heritage as a tool for destination
development”, Current Issues in Tourism, vol. 14, n. 4, pp. 373-386.
PECHLANER H., FISHER E., HAMMAN E.M. (2005), “Creating the valuable basis of competitive advantages of destinations”, in
P. KELLER, T. BIEGER, Innovation in Tourism, AIEST, St Gallen.
PINK S. (2008), “Sense and sustainability: The case of the slow city movement”, Local Environment, vol. 13, n. 2, pp. 95-106.
PRESENZA A., ABBATE T., MICERA R. (2015), “The Cittaslow Movement: Opportunities and Challenges for the Governance of
Tourism Destinations”, Tourism Planning & Development, vol. 12, n. 4, pp. 479-488.
PRESENZA A., ABBATE T., PERANO M. (2015), “The Cittaslow certification and its effects on sustainable tourism governance”,
Enlightening Tourism: A Pathmaking Journal, vol. 5, n. 1, pp. 40-64.
RITCHIE J.R.B., CROUCH G.I. (2000), “The competitive destination: a sustainability perspective”, Tourism Management, vol. 21,
n. 1, pp. 1-7.
RITCHIE J.R.B., RITCHIE R.J.B. (1998), “The branding of tourism destinations - past achievements and future challenges”, in
Keller P. (Ed.), Destination Marketing - Reports of the 48th AIEST Congress, Marrakech. pp. 89-116.
VARGAS-SANCHEZ A. (2016), “Exploring the concept of Smart Tourist Destination”, Enlightening Tourism: A Pathmaking
Journal, vol. 6, n. 2, pp. 178-196.
YOO H-H., GRETZEL U. (2016), “The Role of Information and Communication Technologies (ICTs) in Marketing Tourism
Experiences”, in Sotiriadis M., Gursoy D. (Eds.). The Handbook of Managing and Marketing Tourism Experiences, Emerald,
Bingley (UK), pp. 409-428.
Websites
http://www.cittaslow.it
http://www.segittur.es/en/inicio/index.html
88
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI
DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Big data governance e PMI: evidenze dal distretto aerospaziale campano
FILOMENA IZZO, DOMENICO GRAZIANO, MARIO MUSTILLI
Collusione, processi decisionali ed intelligenza artificiale
FABRIZIO IANNONI, ALBERTO PASTORE
L’innovazione digitale per le strategie di tailor made delle imprese del Made in Italy
nei mercati internazionali
GAETANO MACARIO, SAVINO SANTOVITO, SERGIO SALOMONE, RAFFAELE SILVESTRI
Il management del trasferimento tecnologico nell’ambito delle Strategie Regionali
di Specializzazione Intelligente (S3)
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI, FRANCESCO RICOTTA, ALFIO CARIOLA
Competences and performance in metal waste supply chain: lessons from Italy
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI, FRANCESCO RICOTTA, PINO VECELLIO
I teatri lirici italiani: efficienza, efficacia e ruolo della tecnologia
CLEMENTINA BRUNO, FABRIZIO ERBETTA, GIOVANNI FRAQUELLI, ANNA MENOZZI
Big data governance e PMI:
evidenze dal distretto aerospaziale campano
FILOMENA IZZO* DOMENICO GRAZIANO MARIO MUSTILLI
Obiettivi. Negli ultimi decenni, un processo continuo di sviluppo che ha il suo fulcro in Internet e, più in generale,
nelle tecnologie digitali, sta investendo l’intera società, portando alla diffusione di una economia digitale, non più
ristretta all’ambito ICT1. Di fatto, si parla ormai già da qualche tempo di quarta rivoluzione industriale - o Industria
4.0 - «caratterizzata dall’integrazione dei processi fisici con nuovi processi digitali, dall’utilizzo delle informazioni a
supporto delle attività di fabbrica e dall’ottimizzazione dell’esecuzione dei processi operativi» 2
Tra le innovazioni tecnologiche che contribuiscono a definire l’Industria 4.0, vi sono il Cloud computing3,
l’Internet delle Cose (IoT) 4, l’Intelligenza artificiale/aumentata5 e i Big Data & Analytics. Se le prime possono essere
considerate tecnologie abilitanti, in quanto sviluppano soluzioni e miglioramenti attraverso esperienze di ricerca
capaci di rivitalizzare il sistema produttivo6, l’ultima è contemporaneamente abilitante ma anche input essenziale di
tutte le altre.
Proprio su Big Data & Analytics e sul loro impatto per le aziende del Distretto Aerospaziale Campano (DAC), si
focalizza il presente progetto di ricerca. In particolare le domande di ricerca a cui si intende rispondere sono le
seguenti:
1. Quale è il livello di maturità delle PMI del DAC nell’adozione di soluzioni di Big Data & Analytics e perchè?
2. Quale è il livello di maturità delle competenze aziendali legate alla gestione, analisi e governance dei sistemi di
Big Data & Analytics?
3. Quale è l’approccio strategico delle imprese nella gestione delle soluzioni di Big Data & Analytics?
*
1
2
3
4
5
6
Ricercatrice in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università della Campania “Luigi Vanvitelli”, Capua (CE)
e-mail: filomena.izzo@unicampania.it
Cultore della materia in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università della Campania “Luigi Vanvitelli”, Capua (CE)
e-mail: domenico.graziano@unicampania.it
Ordinario in Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università della Campania “Luigi Vanvitelli”, Capua (CE)
e-mail: mario.mustilli@unicampania.it
Cfr. ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018.
Trombetta et al., 2014, p. 22. La cronologia delle prime tre rivoluzioni industriali può essere così sintetizzata: prima rivoluzione
industriale (XVIII-XIX sec.), caratterizzata dall’introduzione della macchina a vapore che, con la sua potenza, moltiplicò la
capacità di lavoro permettendo lo sviluppo di nuovi prodotti e di un nuovo modo di produrre; seconda rivoluzione industriale
(XIX-XX sec.), che con la catena di montaggio ed il concetto di suddivisione del lavoro diede il via alla produzione di massa ed
all’abbassamento dei costi di produzione; terza rivoluzione industriale (seconda metà del XX sec.), che portò all’incremento
della qualità e dell’efficienza produttiva grazie all’introduzione dell’elettronica, dell’informatica e della robotica in fabbrica
(Poli, Martini e Petronio, 2014).
Secondo la definizione del NIST-United States National Institute of Standards and Technology, il «Cloud Computing è un
modello per consentire un accesso tramite rete ad un insieme di risorse di calcolo configurabili (reti, server, storage, applicazioni
e servizi) che possono essere istanziate e rilasciate con un minimo sforzo di gestione ed interazione con il service provider»
(ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018, p. 38). Oggi molti business ricorrono ai servizi offerti su Cloud, utilizzando varie
applicazioni (CRM, ERP, Office automation, posta elettronica, eCommerce, servizi di audio e video streaming, piattaforme di
calcolo in ambito Big Data etc.). Per maggiori approfondimenti, si rimanda a ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018.
Esistono diverse definizioni dell’Internet of Things; in estrema sintesi, si può dire che l’IoT «consiste in una moltitudine di
oggetti fisici dotati di un’interfaccia digitale per connettersi a Internet, diventando di fatto degli smart objects […], dando
un’identità elettronica alle cose e ai luoghi dell’ambiente fisico […]. Tutto ciò è reso possibile dalla trasformazione dei dati e
delle informazioni in conoscenza, attraverso metodologie e processi di raccolta ed elaborazione, nonché di scambio informativo,
in virtù di particolari caratteristiche e capacità» (ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018, p. 45). Per maggiori approfondimenti,
si rimanda a ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018.
Per Intelligenza Artificiale si intende «l’abilità di un computer di svolgere funzioni e ragionamenti tipici della mente umana»
(ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018, p. 57); più recentemente, e concentrandosi sul ruolo di aiuto che l’Intelligenza
Artificiale può svolgere nel supportare un individuo nel processo decisionale e nell’acquisizione di ulteriore conoscenza, si sta
facendo strada anche una nuova definizione, quella di Intelligenza Aumentata. Nell’ambito delle tecnologie relative ai sistemi
intelligenti, tra i campi di applicazione più interessanti vi sono la Realtà Virtuale e la Realtà Aumentata.
Secondo la definizione data dalla Commissione Europea, le tecnologie abilitanti sono tecnologie «ad alta intensità di conoscenza
ed associate a elevata intensità di R&S, a cicli di innovazione rapidi, a consistenti spese di investimento e a posti di lavoro
altamente qualificati» (Commissione Europea, 2012, pp. 2-3). In quanto tali, le tecnologie abilitanti hanno una particolare
rilevanza perché alimentano il valore della catena del sistema produttivo, innovando processi, prodotti e servizi in tutti i settori.
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
91
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.16
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
4.
Quali sono le barriere verso l’adozione di un approccio maturo ai Big Data?
Metodologia. Per ottenere l’impatto desiderato sul business dell’azienda, è necessario, secondo Barton e Court
(2012) un approccio integrato di data sourcing, elaborazione di modelli e trasformazioni organizzative.
Per quel che riguarda il primo punto, spesso le aziende posseggono già i dati di cui necessitano ma i manager
semplicemente non sanno come le informazioni che se ne possono trarre possono essere usate per prendere decisioni
chiave; i manager hanno inoltre bisogno di avere una visione più “creativa” sulle potenzialità che possono esserci in
dati esterni o provenienti da nuove fonti (ad es., i social media, o i sensori). A volte, le infrastrutture tecnologiche
esistenti ostacolano l’acquisizione, l’archiviazione e l’analisi di nuovi dati; in questi casi, i manager possono
rispondere alle esigenze dei Big Data a breve termine collaborando con i CIO per stabilire le priorità, vale a dire
identificare e collegare velocemente i dati più rilevanti da usare per le analisi, mentre si pianificano e realizzano i
cambiamenti tecnologici necessari, che a volte richiedono periodi lunghi (Prufer e Schottmüller, 2017).
Se i dati sono importanti, miglioramenti necessari per acquisire vantaggio competitivo arrivano dall’adozione di
modelli di analisi che consentono ai manager di prevedere e ottimizzare i risultati. In genere, il più efficace approccio
alla costruzione di un modello parte raramente dai dati, bensì dall’identificazione delle opportunità di business per poi
determinare come il modello può migliorare le performance. Inoltre, un rischio da evitare è la costruzione di modelli
troppo complessi per essere facilmente utilizzabili (Varian, 2013).
Usare i Big Data richiede anche un cambiamento nell’organizzazione aziendale; molto spesso, infatti, c’è una
differenza tra la cultura e le competenze aziendali esistenti e le tattiche emergenti per sfruttare con successo gli
Analytics. In breve, i nuovi approcci non sono allineati con come le aziende oggi arrivano a prendere le decisioni, o
falliscono nel fornire progetti chiari per realizzare gli obiettivi di business. I tools sembrano essere disegnati per
esperti in modelli piuttosto che per persone sul front line. Per ottenere un cambiamento, è necessario sviluppare
Analytics rilevanti per il business che possano essere utilizzati in maniera semplice e inserirsi nei processi e nelle
azioni che portano alle decisioni di tutti i giorni; incorporare gli Analytics in strumenti semplici per i front lines,
separando gli esperti statistici e sviluppatori software dai manager che usano gli insight data-driven. È anche
necessario aggiornare le competenze, i manager devono arrivare a vedere gli Analytics come centrali per risolvere
problemi e identificare opportunità (McKinsey 2011, 2016; Schepp e Wambach, 2016; Stucke e Grunes, 2016)
Nel progetto di ricerca, la metodologia, tesa a investigare il rapporto tra PMI del DAC e Big Data, è attualmente
in corso di progettazione. L’indagine prevede una fase desk, con la raccolta di dati e informazioni disponibili, e una
fase on field, con l’invio di un questionario di rilevazione e lo svolgimento di interviste semistrutturate in profondità. Al
termine dell’indagine, si analizzeranno e interpreteranno i dati raccolti.
Risultati.
FASE 1 DEL PROGETTO DI RICERCA (febbraio - maggio 2018). Nella prima parte del progetto di ricerca, si
cerca di identificare con chiarezza cosa si intende per Big Data, espressione oggi ampiamente usata, seppure non
sempre in maniera pertinente, e di fornire una panoramica sintetica su strumenti e tecniche di analisi, da un lato, e
sulle nuove figure professionali ad essi associate, dall’altro.
Ogni 60 secondi si registrano 98.000 tweets, 695.000 post Facebook, 11 milioni di messaggi, 698.445 ricerche di
Google, 168 milioni di email inviate e 217 nuovi utenti web mobile senza contare il numero sconosciuto ma elevato di
sensori e altri devices che generano dati7. Con tale mole di dati ma, soprattutto, con la loro pervasività, appare chiaro
come, nell’economia digitale, l’accesso, la raccolta, l’elaborazione e l’utilizzo dei dati assumano una sempre maggiore
rilevanza in tutti i settori.
Tuttavia, ancora più importante dei dati in sé, è la capacità di estrarre valore dalla loro analisi: è con questa
capacità (nota come Analytics), infatti, unita alla disponibilità a costi sempre più ridotti degli strumenti di raccolta,
elaborazione e analisi, che i dati si trasformano in informazioni che trainano innovazione e crescita economica e
sociale (FTC, 2016; Evans, 2016; Cohn, 2015; Cisco, 2012).
Già nel 2013, la Commissione Europea ha identificato nella catena del valore il fulcro della futura “economia
della conoscenza”, capace di determinare opportunità di sviluppo digitale anche nei settori più tradizionali (European
Commission, 2013). La value chain, composta da una serie di passaggi successivi necessari affinché dai dati
considerati si possa generare valore, mostra chiaramente come il dato costituisca l’input fondamentale ma anche che,
per far sì che quel dato sia utilizzato nei processi decisionali aziendali, è necessario passare attraverso successive fase
di analisi, di gestione attiva e di archiviazione. Solo in questo modo, i dati possono portare valore all’impresa
(Bourreau, 2017; Accenture, 2016; Curry, 2014; Pwc, 2016).
Per comprendere meglio il valore dei Big Data, appare opportuno partire dalla loro definizione; dal punto di
vista accademico, però, va sottolineato come solo di recente si stia tentando di approfondire concetti, nomenclature e
tecnologie legate al fenomeno Big Data. La rapida evoluzione delle tecnologie e la loro contemporanea, e altrettanto
rapida, adozione da parte di soggetti sia pubblici sia privati, infatti, ha fatto sì che gli studiosi non avessero modo,
almeno inizialmente, di fare i dovuti approfondimenti.
7
Secondo le stime, ogni giorno vengono prodotti circa 2,5 exabyte di dati (ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018).
92
BIG DATA GOVERNANCE E PMI: EVIDENZE DAL DISTRETTO AEROSPAZIALE CAMPANO
Secondo alcuni esperti i Big Data si definiscono in base a Volume, Velocity e Variety (le cosiddette tre V di
Laney)8, cui successivamente sono stati aggiunti altri fattori quali Veracity, Variability e Value:
con Volume, si fa riferimento banalmente alla quantità di dati, dell’ordine di grandezza di multipli di terabyte e
petabyte9;
con Velocity si fa riferimento, da un lato, alla velocità di generazione dei dati e, dall’altro, a quella di analisi
degli stessi10;
con Variety invece ci si riferisce alla eterogeneità dei dati, in altre parole all’esistenza di dati di diverso genere
(strutturati, semistrutturati e non strutturati)11;
con Veracity ci si riferisce all’affidabilità dei dati (o delle relative fonti) 12;
con Variability, al fatto che i flussi di dati possono essere altamente inconsistenti e presentare picchi periodici13,
infine, la variabile Value può essere riferita sia al valore, vale a dire al potenziale economico e sociale, dei dati,
sia al fatto che i Big Data sono spesso caratterizzati da una bassa densità di valore, cioè è necessario archiviarne
molti per ottenere risultati apprezzabili.
In conclusione, si può sostenere che non esiste una definizione ufficiale dei Big Data; tuttavia, tenendo conto delle
caratteristiche appena descritte, è possibile determinare cosa può essere definito Big Data e cosa no. Per Valerdi
(2017), un esempio chiaro di ciò che non è da far rientrare nell’ambito dei Big Data è Wikipedia: la famosa
enciclopedia on line è, infatti, composta da dati testuali che potrebbero trovare spazio in una sola pen drive (e non
possiede quindi la caratteristica di Volume), non cambia spesso (non c’è Velocity), è costituita da testi e immagini
(manca la Variety), ed è sottoposta a continue verifiche (non c’è, quindi, Veracity dei dati).
In ambito Big Data e Analytics, le tecnologie per trarre vantaggio dai dati sono elemento necessario ma non
sufficiente; per cogliere appieno le enormi potenzialità insite nei Big Data, infatti, occorrono anche persone dotate di
adeguate abilità, competenze e mentalità. Si tratta, infatti, di essere in grado di porre le giuste domande, di riconoscere
i pattern descrittivi di determinati fenomeni, di predire i comportamenti ed effettuare assunzioni basate su fatti ed
evidenze supportate dai dati. Inoltre, poiché i Big Data hanno un impatto trasversale all’interno delle aziende, sono
necessari anche nuovi modelli di governance, nuove modalità di gestione delle attività legate agli Analytics.
A questo scopo, da alcuni anni, molte organizzazioni stanno introducendo nuove figure professionali come il Data
Scientist14 e il Chief Data Officer (CDO). Il primo è un professionista in grado di gestire e condurre analisi sui dati in
modo da estrarne valore e da riconoscere opportunità di business; il Data Scientist è, quindi, dotato di un alto livello di
formazione interdisciplinare15, ma anche di curiosità, elemento necessario per fare scoperte nel mondo dei Big Data, e
di knowledge deployment, ovvero di capacità di comunicazione delle analisi svolte al management aziendale
(Politecnico di Milano, 2017)16.
Il Chief Data Officer, invece, è una figura di tipo manageriale cui è affidato il compito di guidare e coordinare le
risorse che lavorano sulla Data Science; ha, inoltre, la responsabilità di definire e sviluppare strategie utili sia per la
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
In un articolo pubblicato nel 2001 da Doug Laney, l’autore rappresentò graficamente tre assi successivamente passati alla storia
come “Big Data 3V’ Model”, sebbene non vi si facesse un esplicito riferimento all’espressione Big Data e l’intero articolo
riguardasse le problematiche inerenti la gestione dei dati con riferimento ad applicazioni di eCommerce. Per altri riferimenti, si
cfr. Chen, Chiang e Storey, 2012; Kwon, Lee e Shin, 2014; Gartner Inc., TechAmerica Foundation, 2012).
Vale la pena ricordare che si tratta di un valore relativo, vale a dire che è difficile stabilire una soglia oltre la quale i dati passano
a essere Big Data in quanto vi sono diverse variabili, soprattutto tecnologiche, da prendere in considerazione quali, ad es., la
capacità dei supporti di memorizzazione.
Per avere un ordine di idee sulla rapidità di creazione di dati si pensi a quanto accade con alcuni dei principali Social Network:
secondo alcune stime del 2016, solo Facebook genera circa 10 miliardi di “like” ogni giorno da parte di 1,09 miliardi di utenti,
mentre su Instagram vengono condivise più di 95 milioni di immagini al giorno con una media giornaliera di 4,2 miliardi di
“like” e, infine, su YouTube si registrano oltre 400 ore di contenuti caricati dagli utenti ogni minuto di ogni singola giornata
(ITMedia Consulting-ASK Bocconi, 2018, p. 14). Rispetto alla velocità con cui vengono generati e resi accessibili i dati, la
necessità di analizzarli ad una velocità analoga risulta, in alcuni casi, altrettanto rilevante: nel giro di microsecondi, infatti, può
essere necessario decidere se vale la pena acquisire un determinato dato, confrontandolo preliminarmente con altre informazioni
disponibili e valutandone quindi la rilevanza.
Per dati strutturati si intendono, ad es., quelli presenti in tabelle all’interno di un foglio di lavoro o di database relazionali (e che
si stima costituiscano solo il 5% di tutti i dati esistenti); per semistrutturati, quelli dei documenti in XML, un linguaggio testuale
per lo scambio dei dati sul web; per quelli non strutturati, infine, file di testo, immagini, audio, video.
Questa caratteristica è stata definita da IBM (Valerdi, 2017); un esempio della inaffidabilità insita in alcune fonti di dati è fornito
dai sentimenti espressi dai consumatori attraverso i Social Media.
La Variability dei Big Data è stata introdotta da SAS, azienda leader nel settore degli Analytics; un’ulteriore caratteristica
definita da SAS è Complexity, in riferimento al fatto che «i dati arrivano da molteplici fonti, il che rende difficile collegare,
abbinare, ripulire e trasformare i dati trasversali» (https://www.sas.com/it_it/insights/big-data/what-is-big-data.html).
Nel loro articolo dal titolo “Data Scientist: The Sexiest Job of the 21st Century”, Davenport e Patil affermano che Il termine Data
Scientist è stato coniato nel 2008 dallo stesso Patil e da Jeff Hammerbacher, all’epoca responsabili di progetti di Data e Data
Analytics a LinkedIn e Facebook (Davenport e Patil, 2012).
Secondo Bellini (2017, https://www.bigdata4innovation.it/big-data/big-data-analytics-data-science-e-data-scientist-soluzioni-eskill-della-data-driven-economy/), le competenze specifiche richieste ai Data Scientist comprendono: informatica, project
management, matematica e analisi, statistica, conoscenza di business (intesa come conoscenza del core business aziendale e dei
relativi mercati), comunicazione e rappresentazione grafica, soft skill.
Politecnico di Milano, 2017.
93
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
gestione del ciclo di vita del dato – dalla raccolta fino alla sua distribuzione e conservazione – sia per la valorizzazione
dei dati come business asset. Secondo Gartner (2017), nonostante si tratti di una figura relativamente nuova, il ruolo
del Chief Data Officer in azienda sta già cambiando, passando da responsabile della governance e della qualità dei
dati, ad abilitatore di una vera e propria cultura del dato in azienda.
Oggi migliaia di Data Scientist lavorano sia in start-up sia in aziende consolidate; tuttavia la domanda supera di
gran lunga l’offerta, e la carenza di queste figure professionali rischia di essere uno dei maggiori ostacoli per lo
sviluppo delle imprese. Appare quindi necessario, secondo quanto sostenuto anche dal McKinsey Global Institute,
investire sulla formazione di figure professionali adeguate e, ancor più, far crescere la consapevolezza del valore dei
dati all’interno di tutta l’organizzazione. Ciò consentirebbe di superare alcuni ostacoli che si registrano oggi nelle
aziende, laddove non è chiaro dove queste figure professionali si collochino, né come possano dare valore aggiunto né
come se ne possano misurare le performance.
FASE 2 DEL PROGETTO DI RICERCA (giugno - agosto 2018)
Nella seconda fase del progetto si approfondirà l’utilizzo dei Big Data, in termini sia quantitativi sia qualitativi,
da parte delle aziende in Italia e nel mondo; una particolare attenzione sarà data, per il contesto italiano, alle PMI.
Infine, la seconda parte si concluderà con un focus sulla situazione nel settore aerospaziale, con la presentazione
di alcuni case studies.
FASE 3 DEL PROGETTO DI RICERCA (settembre - novembre 2018)
Nella terza parte, si darà conto dell’indagine, tesa a investigare il rapporto tra PMI del DAC e Big Data:
l’indagine prevede una fase desk, con la raccolta di dati e informazioni disponibili, e una fase on field, con l’invio di un
questionario di rilevazione e lo svolgimento di interviste semistrutturate in profondità.
Al termine dell’indagine si analizzeranno e interpreteranno i dati raccolti, i cui risultati confluiranno nel report di
ricerca.
Limiti della ricerca. Allo stato attuale, i principali limiti del progetto di ricerca possono essere identificati in due
punti: da un lato, la limitata quantità di contributi accademici che hanno investigato il rapporto Big Data e aziende
non consente di riferirsi ad un corpus di studi, riflessioni, dibattiti, già consolidati 17; dall’altro, l’innovazione digitale
cresce e si modifica ad una tale velocità che risulta alquanto difficile “scattare delle fotografie” del fenomeno Big Data
& Analytics senza correre il rischio che esse appaiano, nel giro di poco tempo, già ingiallite.
Implicazioni pratiche. Il progetto di ricerca prevede l’elaborazione di linee guida a supporto delle aziende del
DAC per un potenziale percorso evolutivo in tema di Big Data.
Originalità del lavoro. La maggior parte degli studi sull’argomento, pochissimi in accademia a livello
internazionale, si concentrano sulle grandi imprese, lo studio che si propone, invece, pone attenzione alle PMI che
operano in un settore strategico per il nostro Paese quale quello aerospaziale.
Parole chiave: big data; PMI; data governance; distretto aerospaziale campano
Bibliografia
ACCENTURE (2016), Digital disruption: The growth multiplier.
AGID (2017), Task Force sull’Intelligenza Artificiale, White Paper IA.
ARUN K., JABASHEELA L. (2014), “Big Data: Review, Classification and Analysis Survey”, International Journal of Innovative
Research in Information Security (IJIRIS).
BARTON D., COURT D. (2012), Making advanced analytics work for you, HBR.
BOLLIER D. (2010), The promise and peril of big data, The Aspen Institute, Washington, DC.
BOURREAU M., DE STREEL A., GRAEF I. (2017), “Big Data and Competition Policy: Market Power, Personalised Pricing and
Advertising”, SSRN, https://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=2920301
CHEN H., CHIANG R.H.L., STOREY V.C. (2012), “Business intelligence and analytics: From big data to big impact”, MIS
Quarterly, vol. 36, n. 4, pp. 1165-1188.
CHUN-WEI T., CHIN-FENG L., HAN-CHIEH C., ATHANASIOS V.V. (2015), “Big data analytics: a survey”, Journal of Big
Data, vol. 2, n. 21 pp. 2-32
CISCO (2012), The Cloud Value Chain Exposed, White Paper
COHN B.L. (2015), “Data Governance: A Quality Imperative in the Era of Big Data, Open Data and Beyond”, ISJLP, vol. 10, n. 3,
p. 811-826.
COLANGELO G., MAGGIOLINO M. (2017), “Big Data as a Misleading Facilities”, European Competition Journal, vol. 13, n. 2-3,
pp. 249-281.
CURRY
E.
(2014),
The
Big
Data Value
Chain,
European
Data
Forum
Report
https://www.data17
Alla carenza di studi accademici sopperiscono, almeno in parte, le ricerche e gli approfondimenti svolti da grandi società di
consulenza quali BCG (Boston Consulting Group), Oliver Wyman, Deloitte, Accenture etc.
94
BIG DATA GOVERNANCE E PMI: EVIDENZE DAL DISTRETTO AEROSPAZIALE CAMPANO
forum.eu/sites/default/files/EDF2014-Report.pdf
EUROPEAN COMMISSION DG CONNECT (2013), A European strategy on the data value chain.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION DG CONNECT, (2016,a) Definition of a research and innovation policy leveraging Cloud Computing
and IoT combination.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION, (2014), Towards a thriving data-driven economy.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION, (2016,b), European Cloud Initiative - Building a competitive data and knowledge economy in Europe.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION (2017), European Data Market study
EVANS D.S. (2016), “Multisided platforms, dynamic competition, and the assessment of market power for internet-based firms”,
Coase-Sandor Working Paper Series in Law and Economics, n. 753
FTC (2016), Big Data. A Tool for Inclusion or Exclusion? https://www.ftc.gov/system/files/documents/reports/big-data-toolinclusion-or-exclusion-understanding-issues/160106big-data-rpt.pdf
GAL M.S., RUBINFELD D.L. (2016), Access Barriers to Big Data, http://arizonalawreview.org/pdf/59-2/59arizlrev339.pdf
GARTNER IT GLOSSARY. http://www.gartner.com/it-glossary/bigdata/
IZZO F. (2017), Musei e tecnologie, Cedam, Padova
KWON O., LEE N., SHIN B. (2014), “Data quality management, data usage experience and acquisition intention of big data
analytics”, International Journal of Information Management, vol. 34, n. 3, pp. 387-394.
LANEY D. (2001), 3-D data management: Controlling data volume, velocity and variety. Application Delivery Strategies by META
Group
Inc.
http://blogs.gartner.com/doug-laney/files/2012/01/ad949-3D-DataManagement-Controlling-Data-VolumeVelocity-and-Variety.pdf
MCKINSEY GLOBAL INSTITUTE (2011), Big data: The next frontier for innovation, competition, and productivity.
MCKINSEY GLOBAL INSTITUTE (2016), The Age Of Analytics: Competing In A Data-Driven World.
OSSERVATORIO BIG DATA ANALYTICS & BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE (2017). Big data: lo scenario di mercato, Politecnico
di Milano, School of Management.
PRUFER J., SCHOTTMÜLLER C. (2017), Competing with Big Data, Tilburg Law School Legal Studies Reseach Paper Series No.
06/2017.
PWC (2016), Industry 4.0: Building the digital enterprise.
SCHEPP N.P., WAMBACH A. (2016), On Big Data and Its Relevance for Market Power Assessment, Journal of European
Competition Law & Practice, vol. 7, n. 2, 120-124.
STUCKE M., GRUNES A., (2016), Big Data and Competition Policy, Oxford University Press. Available at SSRN:
https://ssrn.com/abstract=2849074
TECHAMERICA FOUNDATION’S FEDERAL BIG DATA COMMISSION. (2012). Demystifying big data: A practical guide to
transforming the business of Government. http://www.techamerica.org/Docs/fileManager.cfm?f=techamericabigdatareportfinal.pdf
TROMBETTA S., CHIADÒ C., COLLINA L., GIORDANO L. (2014), “Verso un’organizzazione digitally skilled”, In La
trasformazione digitale, A.V. HBR
VARIAN H.R. (2014), “Beyond Big Data”, Business Economics, vol. 49, n. 1, pp. 27-31.
95
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
96
Collusione, processi decisionali ed intelligenza artificiale
FABRIZIO IANNONI* ALBERTO PASTORE
Obiettivi. È possibile realizzare intese restrittive attraverso l’intelligenza artificiale? In quale misura gli
algoritmi utilizzati dalle imprese possono facilitare il raggiungimento - o garantire la stabilità - di accordi collusivi?
Sotto la spinta del processo innovativo, e nel più ampio contesto della digitalizzazione, vi sono diversi temi con cui
lo strategic management e l’industrial organization sono chiamate a confrontarsi: sharing economy, big data, ecommerce, piattaforme digitali, multi-sided markets (Lambrecht e Tucker, 2017; Colangelo, 2016).
In questo quadro, recenti linee di ricerca si sono soffermate sul ruolo che gli algoritmi possono giocare in termini
di autonomia decisionale, sia per i consumatori (Gal e Elkin-Koren, 2017) che per le imprese (Ezrachi e Stucke, 2016).
La maggior parte dei contributi, tuttavia, ha posto l’attenzione sui rischi per la concorrenza derivanti dall’utilizzo di
algoritmi (Salil K. Mehra, 2016; Harrington, 2017). Per contro, minor rilievo è stato dato all’analisi delle efficienze e
degli effetti pro-concorrenziali della data-driven economy. Questi ultimi, peraltro, sono stati studiati nell’ambito del
rapporto impresa-mercato: algoritmi ed intelligenza artificiale ottimizzano i processi aziendali, da un lato, e riducono
tempi e costi di transazione per i consumatori, dall’altro (OECD, 2017).
Il paper si concentra sull’impatto che gli algoritmi possono giocare nel rapporto tra imprese concorrenti,
evidenziandone sia il potenziale pro-competitivo che quello potenzialmente collusivo.
Metodologia. La ricerca ha un taglio teorico. Il paper analizza i principali contributi sviluppati in letteratura, e
propone un diverso framework concettuale alla luce del quale rileggere il rapporto tra algoritmi e collusione.
Collusione ed intelligenza artificiale: lo stato dell’arte
In che modo l’intelligenza artificiale può danneggiare il processo concorrenziale? L’idea di base è quella per cui,
qualora le decisioni (su prezzi, quantità etc.) venissero unilateralmente elaborate attraverso l’intelligenza artificiale, la
probabilità di osservare condotte parallele tenderebbe ad aumentare. In particolare, nel caso in cui gli algoritmi
utilizzati siano simili, o addirittura i medesimi, il risultato a cui ciascuna impresa perviene sarà prossimo a quello
ottenuto dalle altre, con effetti sul mercato sostanzialmente identici a quelli che si avrebbero in presenza di un cartello.
Ezrachi e Stucke, in particolare, hanno elaborato un’utile tassonomia, individuando quattro tipologie di rischi
collusivi derivanti dall’utilizzo di algoritmi:
Messenger: in tale categoria rientrano i casi in cui un algoritmo fornisce supporto alle imprese nell’attuazione e
nel monitoraggio di un accordo preesistente.
Hub and Spoke: si riferisce al caso di un algoritmo in grado di facilitare accordi orizzontali tra operatori. Negli
Stati Uniti, ad esempio, Uber dispone di un algoritmo che, tenendo conto della domanda e dell’offerta (nelle
diverse zone della città, al variare delle fasce orarie e delle condizioni atmosferiche), stabilisce il prezzo di una
corsa. Il problema, in questo caso, non risiede tanto nel collegamento tra algoritmo e singolo autista, quanto
nell’insieme di tali accordi: una fascia di relazioni verticali, simili tra loro, che portano a collusione orizzontale.
Fig. 1: L’algoritmo di pricing utilizzato da Uber
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
*
PhD student in Business Management - Sapienza Università di Roma
email: fabrizio.iannoni@uniroma.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Sapienza Università di Roma
email: alberto.pastore@uniroma1.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
97
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.17
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Predictable Agent: in questo caso si immagina che, in un dato settore, ciascuna impresa possa costruire ed
utilizzare autonomamente un proprio algoritmo, in grado di anticipare gli scenari futuri di mercato e di suggerire
reazioni opportune ai vari cambiamenti.
Autonomous Machine: nel quarto scenario ipotizzato da Ezrachi e Stucke, gli algoritmi di cui al punto precedente
sono anche in grado di prendere decisioni autonome, a partire da un obiettivo specifico che viene loro assegnato
(per esempio quello di massimizzare i profitti dell’impresa). A questa categoria appartengono gli algoritmi in
grado di imparare ed elaborare dati in modo dinamico, sostituendo, in definitiva, il soggetto decisore.
Fig. 2: Tipologie di algoritmi
Fonte: nostra elaborazione da Ezrachi and Stucke, 2016
Algoritmo, condotta, performance
Il parallelismo dei comportamenti, come noto, può derivare sia da interazioni concorrenziali “sane”, che da
accordi. All’interno di un determinato settore, le imprese possono comportarsi in modi simili e adottare le medesime
strategie grazie a reciproci adattamenti razionali, posti in essere da ciascun giocatore, in risposta ai comportamenti
degli altri e/o alle contingenze di mercato. Ad esempio, un’impresa potrebbe valutare i cambiamenti dei bisogni dei
consumatori, i prodotti offerti dai competitors, l’evoluzione della regolamentazione di settore, e poi decidere le proprie
strategie per conseguenza. Tuttavia, anche le altre imprese potrebbero muoversi sulla base delle medesime
considerazioni, giungendo a risultati complessivamente simili (McGee and Thomas, 1986; Fiegenbaum and Thomas,
1995).
Mantenere la propria autonomia decisionale, evitando lo scambio di informazioni rilevanti con i concorrenti, non
significa operare come se questi non fossero presenti sulla scena. Il termine com-petere, per definizione, implica un
rapporto, un confronto con qualcun altro, e la teoria dei giochi esamina proprio le situazioni di interazione strategica,
in cui il risultato ottenuto da ciascuno dipende non solo dalle sue azioni, ma anche da ciò che fanno gli altri. Negli anni
’70, per differenziarsi dalla rivale, Pepsi iniziò a vendere la propria bevanda in bottiglie di plastica (più leggere e facili
da trasportare rispetto alle bottiglie di vetro, utilizzate fino a quel momento), ed in breve tempo, Coca Cola fece la
medesima cosa. Per contro, negli anni ’80, Coca Cola decise di lanciare sul mercato un nuovo prodotto, Coca-Cola
Light (in seguito affiancata dalla Zero), per venire incontro alla crescente sensibilità per la salute ed il benessere, da
parte di una fascia rilevante di consumatori. Di nuovo, Pepsi rispose a tono, lanciando sul mercato la Pepsi One,
rivolgendosi al medesimo target di mercato. E ancora, nel 2002, fu Coca Cola a debuttare sul mercato con la Vanilla
Coke - e poco più tardi la rivale rispose lanciando la Pepsi Vanilla. E la battaglia continua, tanto nella varietà dei
prodotti offerti (come le bevande al gusto limone) quanto in termini di investimenti pubblicitari.
A volte, il fatto che imprese concorrenti pongano in essere i medesimi comportamenti non è sintomo di accordi o
inefficienze ma, al contrario, è espressione concreta dell’interazione competitiva - il “botta e risposta” che al mercato
fa bene - e che porta profitto per le imprese, da un lato, e benefici per i consumatori, dall’altro.
La letteratura economica ha indagato estensivamente tali meccanismi dal punto di vista teorico, attraverso
modelli che spiegano l’interazione competitiva in termini di prezzo (Bertrand, 1883), quantità (Cournot, 1838), nello
spazio (Hotelling, 1929) o attraverso una sequenza di mosse e contromosse (Stackelberg, 1934).
In questo quadro, proponiamo di seguito un framework interpretativo che integra quello avanzato da Ezrachi e
Stucke, analizzando l’impatto degli algoritmi e dell’intelligenza artificiale all’interno di relazioni competitive, da un
lato, e collusive, dall’altro.
Intelligenza artificiale - strumento competitivo o cooperativo
Un processo competitivo “sano” costringe le imprese ad un reciproco confronto, a volte particolarmente intenso
(Kim e Mauborgne, 2005), che si gioca a colpi efficienza, innovazione, qualità e varietà dei prodotti e servizi offerti,
con ripercussioni positive sul benessere dei consumatori e sul total welfare (Williamson, 1968; Elzinga, 1977; Tirole,
1988).
In questo scenario, gli algoritmi che velocizzano/ottimizzano il processo decisionale possono intensificare la
pressione competitiva: se le imprese dispongono di tecnologie in grado di elaborare in real time notevoli quantitativi di
dati, possono monitorare con crescente efficacia le dinamiche di mercato e/o le strategie dei concorrenti e, per
conseguenza, reagire più velocemente e con maggiore precisione.
In altri termini, l’intelligenza artificiale e, più in generale, l’innovazione tecnologica, se utilizzate come “arma”
competitiva, possono inasprire la concorrenza ed aumentare il grado di rivalità di un settore, accelerando il processo
di “adattamento razionale” di ciascuno, al variare delle mosse e contromosse dei diversi giocatori.
98
COLLUSIONE, PROCESSI DECISIONALI ED INTELLIGENZA ARTIFICIALE
Per converso, invece di competere, le imprese possono utilizzare congiuntamente il proprio potere di mercato. Su
questo fronte, occorre distinguere tra collusione esplicita e tacita, posto che, in entrambi i casi, questa comporta uno
slittamento dell’equilibrio: monopolio puro e concorrenza perfetta rappresentano forme di mercato diametralmente
opposte, che raramente trovano riscontro nella realtà imprenditoriale. Nel concreto, è più probabile osservare
situazioni “a metà strada”, ad esempio di oligopolio (nel settore bancario o delle telecomunicazioni) o di concorrenza
monopolistica (tipicamente nel settore moda o della ristorazione). Muovendosi da un estremo all’altro si modificano
per conseguenza anche le dinamiche competitive e gli equilibri di mercato: situazioni strutturalmente intermedie tra la
concorrenza ed il monopolio portano ad equilibri intermedi. Pertanto, in tali contesti, le imprese realizzano profitti
superiori rispetto a quelli ottenibili in concorrenza perfetta, ma inferiori a quelli di monopolio.
Il senso economico del trust è fondamentalmente questo: muovendosi “in blocco”, le imprese cercano di passare
da questa “zona di mezzo”, in cui ottengono i profitti di oligopolio, verso un punto in cui ripartirsi i profitti di
monopolio.
Fig. 3: Significato “economico” delle intese restrittive
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
Tale shifting può essere raggiunto in due modi diversi: attraverso un accordo esplicito, oppure tramite collusione
tacita.
Nel primo caso, la determinazione delle decisioni strategiche di ciascun giocatore (quali prezzi praticare, quali
innovazioni sviluppare, quali prodotti e servizi offrire, in quali quantità, in quali paesi, etc.), non è più il riflesso di
scelte razionali - individualmente elaborate in un contesto di incertezza - ma è invece il risultato di una concertazione,
che causa un decremento di efficienza sia in termini statici che dinamici (Ghezzi e Olivieri, 2013). In questo scenario, il
processo di adattamento intelligente viene inevitabilmente compromesso: nessuna autonomia decisionale, non servono
congetture su ciò che faranno gli altri, i prezzi si concordano, i mercati si possono ripartire.
In caso di intese esplicite, quindi, gli algoritmi possono rappresentare un avanzato supporto tecnologico ad un
cartello preesistente. Questa ipotesi sembra in qualche modo riconducibile alla prima categoria proposta da Ezrachi e
Stucke, in cui l’algoritmo altro non è che lo strumento attraverso il quale si concretizza un accordo, già determinato a
monte tra le parti. Non cambia la sostanza, ma il modo, la strada con cui si giunge all’accordo, e le difficoltà di
competition enforcement possono aumentare in relazione alla sofisticazione tecnica dello strumento utilizzato.
Tra l’altro, ripensando ai casi Alitalia/fuel surcharge e, più recentemente, Eturas, sembra che comunque le
Competition Authorities europee abbiano saputo inquadrare in chiave Antitrust alcuni, per quanto semplici, algoritmi,
che facilitavano la definizione di un prezzo focale o la fissazione di un certo livello di sconti, massimi, da praticare. In
particolare, già nel 2002, l’Autorità Garante della Concorrenza e del Mercato ha sanzionato diverse compagnie aeree
per aver concertato l’applicazione di un supplemento tariffario, correlato all’aumento del prezzo del carburante. Tale
incremento - chiamato appunto fuel surcharge - veniva definito attraverso i sistemi di prenotazione. La pratica
concordata era coordinata, in particolare, da Alitalia, che grazie ad un (primordiale) algoritmo forniva il prezzo focale
agli altri competitors, che erano (più o meno) liberi di aderire. Sulla stessa linea, nel 2014, l’Autorità di Concorrenza
Lituana ha sanzionato Eturas ed altre trenta agenzie di viaggio, che utilizzavano una piattaforma comune per
uniformare il livello di sconti da applicare.
Ma c’è anche un altro tipo di “adattamento razionale”: ben prima dei big data e dell’intelligenza artificiale, la
teoria dei giochi ha consentito di far luce sulla possibilità di osservare comportamenti convergenti da parte delle
imprese, senza necessità di ricorrere ad un accordo esplicito (Fonseca e Normann, 2012; Spagnolo, 1999;
McCutcheon, 1997). In altri termini, anche l’equilibrio di cartello può esser frutto di un calcolo matematico, un
ragionamento di convenienza economica. Tale equilibrio, per stare in piedi, deve essere giocato, unilateralmente, da
tutti i concorrenti.
Si consideri il caso di un duopolio omogeneo in cui le imprese competono sul prezzo. Se i giocatori adottano una
prospettiva di lungo periodo, immaginando di interagire per un arco di tempo potenzialmente illimitato, per entrambi
può essere conveniente cooperare (invece che violare l’accordo), fissando i prezzi di monopolio †. Il flusso di profitti
†
In un’ottica multiperiodale, le imprese possono adottare la seguente strategia, denominata trigger strategy: nel primo periodo,
entrambe fissano unilateralmente il prezzo di monopolio, Pm, dividendosi a metà i relativi profitti di monopolio. Nelle interazioni
successive, ciascuna impresa valuta cos’ha fatto l’altra in precedenza: se ha rispettato il “tacito accordo”, continuerà a fissare il
prezzo di monopolio. Viceversa, se ha “tradito l’accordo”, fissando un prezzo leggermente inferiore per conquistare l’intero
99
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
che i cartellisti possono ottenere nel tempo può essere superiore rispetto ai profitti ottenibili nel breve periodo,
tradendo.
Pertanto, è possibile che imprese concorrenti riescano ad uniformare le proprie condotte, indirizzandole verso
equilibri non competitivi, senza accordarsi esplicitamente: comunicare non serve, il cartello di lungo periodo è la
soluzione matematica, l’equilibrio più conveniente per tutti.
Ciò detto, vi sono diversi fattori che facilitano la collusione e che, in qualche misura, ne garantiscono la stabilità:
a struttura di mercato concentrata, b) simmetria dimensionale e tecnologica delle imprese, c) strutture di costo
comparabili, d) fattori istituzionali/regolamentari, e) elevato tasso di crescita del mercato, f) frequenza con cui le
imprese interagiscono tra loro, anche in settori diversi ‡.
In aggiunta, vi sono anche fattori che ostacolano la collusione. Tra questi, il fatto che spesso vi è un ritardo di
osservazione tra il momento in cui l’impresa pone in essere un dato comportamento, ed il momento in cui gli altri
competitors se ne rendono conto. Non sempre le iniziative di un giocatore sono osservabili immediatamente, da tutti gli
altri, con precisione, e ciò offre il destro per riduzioni segrete di prezzo, aumenti di quantità o, in altri termini, per
tradire eventuali accordi senza che i compagni di cartello se ne accorgano, o almeno non subito.
Anche in questo caso, verosimilmente, gli algoritmi possono facilitare il mantenimento di equilibri collusivi,
perché riducono il grado di asimmetria informativa: tradire il cartello conviene poco, ciascun giocatore sa che gli altri
sono in grado di monitorare “in diretta” le sue eventuali deviazioni. L’aumento di trasparenza sul mercato riduce gli
incentivi a tradire, incrementando, quindi, la stabilità del cartello.
Considerazioni conclusive.
Nel complesso, le riflessioni sopraesposte consentono di affermare che, se si inquadra l’intelligenza artificiale
come uno strumento a disposizione delle imprese (Cormen et all., 2010), il suo impatto sul processo competitivo può
prendere due direzioni diverse. Se tale strumento è utilizzato in un contesto di concorrenza effettiva può accendere la
rivalità di settore e rendere più rapido ed efficace il gioco di mosse e contromosse tra le imprese. Viceversa, se
utilizzati in modo distorto, gli algoritmi possono contribuire a danneggiare il processo concorrenziale, sia in caso di
cartelli espliciti, rappresentando sofisticati strumenti di supporto all’accordo, sia in caso di collusione tacita,
aumentando la trasparenza sul mercato e riducendo gli incentivi per le imprese a deviare da intese collusive.
Fig. 4: Possibili effetti dell’intelligenza artificiale sul processo concorrenziale
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
mercato, nelle interazioni successive l’impresa fisserà il prezzo pari al costo marginale, “rompendo” la collaborazione. La
stabilità dell’accordo nell’ambito di un supergioco dipende dalla sua convenienza implicita rispetto all’ipotesi di deviazione dallo
stesso. Per un dato livello del tasso di sconto δ, le imprese raggiungono tacitamente l’equilibrio di Nash fissando entrambe il
prezzo di monopolio.
1
1
Formalmente, la collusione è stabile se: 𝜋𝑚
≥ 𝜋𝑚
2
1−𝛿
Generalizzando la formalizzazione (Cfr. H. Varian, 2010), dati n giocatori coinvolti in un cartello, è possibile ipotizzare che, se
l’accordo termina a causa della deviazione di qualcuno, nei periodi successivi la competizione si giochi à la Cournot.
𝜋
𝜋
In tal caso il cartello è stabile se: 𝜋𝑚 + 𝑚 > 𝜋𝑑 + 𝑐
‡
E quindi per: 𝑟 <
Formalmente: 𝛿 =
𝜋𝑚 − 𝜋𝑐
𝜋𝑑 − 𝜋𝑚
𝑟
𝑟
ℎ(1+𝑔)
1+
𝑟
𝑓
dove: δ = tasso di sconto, r = tasso di interesse annuale, f = frequenza con cui le imprese possono modificare i prezzi in ogni
periodo, h = probabilità che l’industria continui ad esistere nel periodo successivo, g = tasso di crescita del mercato.
Un paio di esempi: con riferimento al valore di f, la collusione è più probabile tra imprese che interagiscono quotidianamente,
come le imprese che operano nel settore energetico o delle comunicazioni, rispetto a quelle che interagiscono raramente, come gli
alberghi invernali che fissano i prezzi con cadenza annuale.
Quanto al valore di h, il senso è che la collusione in mercati altamente innovativi, in cui i prodotti sono velocemente soggetti ad
obsolescenza, è meno probabile rispetto a quella che può toccare settori stabili, come pasta, energia elettrica, cemento, petrolio.
100
COLLUSIONE, PROCESSI DECISIONALI ED INTELLIGENZA ARTIFICIALE
Limiti della ricerca. Il lavoro ha un taglio esclusivamente teorico e costituisce semplicemente un primo studio
embrionale su un tema di forte attualità, da sviluppare per una formulazione più completa e compiuta. Future linee di
ricerca possono analizzare l’impatto dell’intelligenza artificiale sui processi di decision making sia attraverso casi di
studio, sia attraverso analisi empiriche.
Originalità del lavoro e implicazioni pratiche. Gruppi strategici, adattamento razionale, strategie collusive
sono temi estensivamente trattati nell’ambito dell’economia d’impresa e dell’organizzazione industriale. Tuttavia, i
processi di informatizzazione e digitalizzazione modificano continuamente le modalità d’ingresso e le interazioni tra
imprese all’interno dell’arena competitiva, rappresentando una fonte costante per lo sviluppo di riflessioni ulteriori.
Le considerazioni proposte consentono una rilettura del rapporto tra intelligenza artificiale e collusione.
L’approccio adottato, in particolare, contribuisce a colmare un gap nella letteratura di riferimento, evidenziando il
potenziale pro-competitivo dell’intelligenza artificiale, e circoscrivendone con maggior precisione la portata
anticoncorrenziale.
Parole chiave: Antitrust, collusione, algoritmi, intelligenza artificiale, processi decisionali.
Bibliografia
AGHION P., BLOOM N., BLUNDELL GRIFFITH R., HOWITT P. (2005), “Competition and Innovation: An Inverted-U
Relationship”, Quarterly Journal of Economics, vol. 120, n. 2, pp. 701-728.
BAKER J.B. (2007), “Beyond Schumpeter vs. Arrow: How Antitrust Fosters Innovation”, Antitrust Law Journal, vol. 74, n. 3, pp.
575-602.
BOWER J.L., CHRISTENSEN C.M. (1995), “Disruptive Technologies: Catching the Wave”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 73, n.
1, pp.43-53.
BERTRAND, J. (1883), “Review of Théorie Mathématique de la Richesse Sociale and Recherches sur les Principles Mathématique
de la Théorie des Richesses”, Journal des Savants, n. 68, pp. 499-508.
BRODLEY J.F. (1987), “The Economic Goals of Antitrust: Efficiency, Consumer Welfare, and Technological Progress”, 62
N.Y.U.L. REV. 1020, 1023.
CHAN KIM W., MAUBORGNE R. (2017), Oceano blu: cambiare. Oltre la competizione. Cinque passi vincenti per stimolare la
fiducia e creare nuova crescita, Rizzoli, Milano.
COLANGELO G. (2016), “Big data, piattaforme digitali e antitrust”, Mercato, Concorrenza, Regole, Il Mulino, Bologna, pp. 419424.
CORMEN H.T., LEISERSON E.C., RIVEST L.R., STEIN C. (2010), Introduzione agli algoritmi e strutture dati, McGraw-Hill,
INSERIRE CITTA’, 3/ed.
COURNOT A. (1838), “Recherches sur les Principles Mathématique de la Théorie des Richesses”, L. Hachette, Paris.
ELZINGA G.K. (1977) “The Goals of Antitrust: Other Than Competition and Efficiency, What Else Counts?” University of
Pennsylvania Law Review vol. 125, n. 6, pp. 1191-1213.
EZRACHI A., STUCKE E.M., (2017), Artificial Intelligence & Collusion: When Computers Inhibit Competition, University of
Illinois Law Review, vol. 2017, n. 5, pp. 1776-1810.
FONSECA A. M., HANS-THEO N. (2012) “Explicit vs. tacit collusion-The impact of communication in oligopoly experiments”,
European Economic Review, Volume 56, Issue 8, pp. 1759-1772.
FRAAS G.A., GREER F.D. (1977), “Market Structure and Price Collusion: An Empirical Analysis”, The Journal Of Industrial
Economics, vol. XXVI, vol. 26, n. 1, pp. 21-44.
GAL M.S., ELKIN-KOREN N. (2017), “Algorithmic Consumers”, Harvard Journal of Law and Technology, vol. 30, n. 2, pp. 309352.
HANSSON S.O. (1994), “Decision Theory - A Brief Introduction”, Department of Philosophy and the History of Technology, Royal
Institute of Technology (KTH), Stockholm.
HARRINGTON E.J. (2017), Developing Competition Law for Collusion by Autonomous Price-Setting Agents, University of
Pennsylvania.
HOTELLING H. (1929), “Stability in Competition”, The Economic Journal vol. 39, n. 153, pp. 41-57.
KATZ M.L., SHAPIRO C. (1999), Antitrust in Software Markets” in Eisenach J.A., Lenard T.M. (eds.), “Competition, Innovation
and the Microsoft Monopoly: Antitrust in the Digital Marketplace, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
McCUTCHEON BARBARA, (1997), “Do meetings in smoke-filled rooms facilitate collusion?” Journal of Political Economy, vol.
105, n. 2, pp. 330-350.
MCGEE J., THOMAS H. (1986), “Strategic groups: Theory, research and taxonomy”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 7, n. 2,
pp. 141-160.
SALIL K.M. (2016), “US v. Topkins: can price fixing be based on algorithms?”, Journal of European Competition Law & Practice,
vol. 7, n. 7, pp. 470-474.
SHAPIRO C., VARIAN H.R. (1999), Information Rules. A Strategic Guide to the Network Economy, Harvard Business School
Press.
SPAGNOLO G. (1999), “On Interdependent Supergames: Multimarket Contact, Concavity and Collusion”, Journal of Economic
Theory, vol. 89, n. 1, pp. 127-139.
STACKELBERG H. (1934), Market Structure and Equilibrium, Vienna, Springer, XIV, p 134.
WILLIAMSON E. O. (1968), “Economies as an Antitrust Defense: The Welfare Tradeoffs”, The American Economic Review, vol.
58, n. 1, pp. 18-36.
101
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
102
L’innovazione digitale per le strategie di tailor made delle imprese
del Made in Italy nei mercati internazionali
GAETANO MACARIO* SAVINO SANTOVITO SERGIO SALOMONE RAFFAELE SILVESTRI**
Obiettivi: I continui mutamenti dell’ambiente circostante le imprese, italiane ed estere, caratterizzato da una
costante incertezza e da un’elevata liquidità delle relazioni e una fluidità (Bauman 2005, 2011) degli scenari globali,
nonché da una competizione internazionale sviluppata non solo attraverso l’utilizzo dei canali distributivi tradizionali,
definiti off-line, ma anche attraverso l’utilizzo di sistemi innovativi tecnologici e digitali, connessi alla tecnologia di
internet (on-line), stanno indirizzando, da alcuni anni, sempre di più le imprese verso scelte di digital innovation
(Prasad et al., 2017, Micelli, 2015, Silvestrelli, 2014, Santovito, 2011).
Le imprese sono sempre più chiamate a dover essere innovatrici (Vescovi, 2017), adeguandosi ai notevoli
cambiamenti, generando innovazione (Baccarani e Golinelli, 2014) e individuando, in tempi rapidi, nuovi business
model (Teece, 2010) e nuove strategie, utilizzando e valorizzando nell’impresa gli strumenti della tecnologia,
sviluppata negli ultimi venti anni anche attraverso internet (Vescovi, 1999, 2000, Collesei et al., 2001, Vescovi e
Checchinato, 2004 ).
Dunque, impiegando le più moderne tecnologie di innovazione digitale, le imprese possono individuare nuovi
modelli di business e possono rivedere le strategie da attuare, definendo ed applicando nuove strategie customer
oriented, focalizzate sulla differenziazione, per esempio orientate alla personalizzazione dei prodotti (Song e Adams,
1993), in relazione alle esigenze, ai gusti e ai desideri del consumatore globale, nonché attraverso una co-creazione dei
prodotti (Prahalad et al., 2004, Polese et al., 2017), realizzati su misura (tailor made) (Manfredi, 2016, Cedrola et al,
2011).
In questo modo le imprese non realizzano una semplice mass customization (Wind e Rangaswamy, 2001), ma
cercano di conquistare segmenti di nicchia nei mercati, aumentando la propria value proposition con una forte
componente di servizi di pre-vendita e di post-vendita, amplificando l’attenzione sull’esperienza del consumatore,
concentrandosi soprattutto sul momento della conoscenza delle esigenze del consumatore e della sua esperienza
d’acquisto (customer experience).
In tal senso per le imprese è fondamentale individuare e attuare delle strategie di marketing esperienziale (Gentile
et al., 2006) per aumentare il legame tra l’impresa e il consumatore, offrendo a quest’ultimo un’esperienza ed
un’emozione indimenticabili (Ferraresi e Schmitt, 2006), vissute proprio nel momento della co-creazione dei prodotti.
Un’approfondita conoscenza del consumatore, anche attraverso un’auto-profilazione del consumatore, delle sue
esigenze e del suo comportamento d’acquisto, diviene sempre più importante per poter attuare una strategia di tailor
made da parte delle imprese.
Dunque il consumatore diviene sempre più protagonista (prosumer) (Toffler, 1980) nel processo di creazione del
prodotto (Bartoletti et al., 2012), fornendo non solo le sue caratteristiche personali (nel caso del Business to Consumer
- B2C) o aziendali (nel caso del Business to Business - B2B), ma anche le proprie esigenze e i suoi comportamenti di
acquisto, permettendo alle imprese di poter incrementare la propria conoscenza del mercato e la propria capacità di
risposta alle future esigenze degli stessi clienti, ma soprattutto contribuendo alla co-creazione del valore (Cova et al.,
2011, Dalli, 2009).
E’ necessario saper ascoltare i consumatori per comprendere i loro bisogni e per poter realizzare o co-creare
prodotti su misura (Aquilani B. et al., 2015).
In questo contesto liquido, indeterminabile e imprevedibile, le imprese tradizionali delle 4A (alimentare,
abbigliamento, arredamento e automazione) del Made in Italy, per diventare sempre più competitive nei mercati
internazionali, devono essere capaci di evolversi e di divenire sempre più imprese “palindrome” (Santovito , 2017), in
quanto sistemi aperti (Golinelli, 2017) capaci di adattarsi ai continui cambiamenti dell’ambiente esterno (Scicutella,
2011), attraverso un cambiamento di prospettiva interpretativa e decisionale (Dalli e Fornari, 2014).
*
**
Adjunct Professor of International Marketing - Università di Bari Aldo Moro
e-mail: gaetano.macario@uniba.it
Associate Professor of Web Marketing and Innovation Management - Università di Bari Aldo Moro
e-mail: savino.santovito@uniba.it
PhD, Adjunct Professor of Management - Università di Bari Aldo Moro
e-mail: sergio.salomone@uniba.it
PhD, Adjunct Professor of Marketing - Università di Bari Aldo Moro
e-mail: raffaele.silvestri@uniba.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
103
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.18
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Anche le imprese dei suindicati settori tradizionali del Made in Italy devono, dunque, essere capaci di affrontare
notevoli “rivoluzioni” nei sistemi organizzativi aziendali e nei propri business models (Lanlan et al., 2017), pur
essendo fortemente legate ad una produzione spesso artigianale (Della Corte et al., 2013, Granelli, 2013) , dove la
produzione realizzata a mano, con metodi e macchinari tradizionali, e il legame con un sapere fare tradizionale del
territorio (Macario e Santovito, 2016) di appartenenza sono drivers di successo importanti per il posizionamento
strategico nei segmenti del lusso, soprattutto dei settori delle 3 F (Food, Fashion e Furniture), più orientati alla
produzione di beni di consumo per la persona e per l’abitazione.
Si ritiene che l’implementazione di strategie di prodotto basate sulla personalizzazione e sulle esigenze dei
consumatori, siano delle strategie applicabili e preferibili soprattutto dalle imprese di dimensione medio grande
(Pasetto, 2015) che hanno un’organizzazione efficiente e un’ottima gestione della supply chain (Confindustria Digitale,
2016, Prometeia, Fondazione Nord Est, 2015, Fotina C, 2018).
Tuttavia, anche le Micro e le Piccole e Medie Imprese (PMI) si stanno innovando e saranno sempre più orientate
a modificare i propri business model, trasformando di conseguenza le proprie organizzazioni interne, i propri processi
e rivedendo le proprie strategie di marketing internazionale nei mercati esteri, in una nuova cultura d’impresa “4.0”,
inclusiva e di network (Kotler, 2017), coinvolgendo i consumatori nei processi di creatività (Siano et al., 2014).
Infatti, molte imprese di dimensione piccola e micro, di recente costituzione (c.d. start-up), attraverso
l’individuazione e l’attuazione di business model fondati sull’innovazione digitale, si orientano da subito, con facilità e
successo, verso i mercati internazionali, tanto da poterle considerare delle born global firms (Rennie, 1993, Moen,
2002, Knight e Cavusgil, 2004) .
E’ importante considerare che l’innovazione digitale riguarda non solo gli aspetti delle strategie di prodotto o di
processo (Cedrola et al., 2011), ma anche le altre variabili strategiche del marketing mix, considerando che la
personalizzazione delle stesse strategie di marketing mix è possibile solo dopo aver svolto un’attenta fase di problem
setting, unitamente ad un’attenta osservazione del profilo del consumatore e soprattutto un’accurata customer
experience management (Schmitt B.H., 2010, Meyer e Schwager, 2007, Richardson, 2010), in cui osservare le esigenze
del consumatore, le dinamiche del suo comportamento verso la scelta e l’eventuale acquisto del prodotto.
Questo permette alle imprese di poter individuare, in modo puntuale, le strategie di marketing mix internazionale
più opportune, come un’adeguata e dedicata comunicazione e una differenziazione del prezzo (dynamic pricing), in
relazione alla combinazione dei diversi fattori (Popescu et al., 2007, Huang et al., 2014).
Si ritiene, dunque, anche in conseguenza degli stimoli originati dalla risposta delle imprese alla crisi economica
dell’ultimo decennio e degli incentivi statali per un adeguamento delle imprese italiane verso la digitalizzazione, che vi
sia un trend in costante crescita verso l’innovazione digitale delle imprese del Made in Italy, che devono divenire
sempre più competitive nei mercati internazionali.
Pertanto, l’obiettivo del presente contributo è quello di approfondire e sistematizzare la letteratura di
management inerente la tematica, contribuendo al dibattito dell’attuale letteratura, cercando di comprendere come le
imprese dei settori tradizionali del Made in Italy realizzano questo cambiamento di business model, utilizzando
l’innovazione digitale per realizzare strategie di tailor made e come riescono a co-creare valore nei mercati esteri,
attraverso una personalizzazione, che tiene conto anche dei fattori culturali e normativi dei paesi esteri.
Metodologia. La ricerca si basa su una metodologia di tipo qualitativo, attraverso l’analisi di diversi casi di
studio (multiple case study) (Yin, 1993, 2003), che permetterà di realizzare altresì una comparazione tra i business
model utilizzati dalle imprese esaminate e le rispettive performance ottenute in relazione all’applicazione delle
strategie di tailor made, realizzate per la crescita nei mercati internazionali, attraverso l’utilizzo innovativo delle
diverse tecnologie digitali.
Dopo una preliminare analisi di un più esteso campione di imprese innovatrici, appartenenti ai settori tradizionali
delle 4 A (Alimentare, Abbigliamento, Arredamento e Automazione) del Made in Italy, in diverse regioni italiane, è
stata già selezionata una limitata casistica di PMI, in alcune regioni dell’Italia e soprattutto nelle regioni di Puglia e
Basilicata, che hanno già realizzato in questi ultimi anni sistemi di innovazione digitale per la personalizzazione e la
realizzazione su misura dei propri prodotti, alle quali sarà sottoposta un’intervista in profondità.
Risultati. Da una prima fase di confronto della letteratura di management analizzata e da una preliminare analisi
delle imprese della casistica selezionate si intuisce che molte delle imprese dei settori tradizionali del Made in Italy, sia
start-up innovative sia imprese storiche, di seconda generazione, hanno fatto leva sull’innovazione digitale per
affermarsi nella competizione globale (born global firms) oppure per sopravvivere alla crisi economica, divenendo
maggiormente o nuovamente competitive nei mercati nazionali ed internazionali.
Per le imprese storiche le maggiori spinte all’innovazione sono spesso derivate dalla volontà di sopravvivenza e
di miglioramento della competitività nei mercati nazionali ed esteri, in modo da incontrare in tempi rapidi e diretti le
esigenze dei consumatori.
Diverse sono le modalità di innovazione digitale nelle imprese storiche, spesso orientate ad investire molto nelle
strutture tecnologiche hardware e meno in quelle software e tantomeno nella formazione del capitale umano verso una
metodologia di problem setting e di cambiamento culturale e gestionale “4.0”, che contempli un’apertura e una
flessibilità delle menti dei singoli imprenditori e delle organizzazioni verso nuovi modelli di business e attraverso
l’acquisizione di maggiori competenze digitali.
104
L’INNOVAZIONE DIGITALE PER LE STRATEGIE DI TAILOR MADE DELLE IMPRESE DEL MADE IN ITALY NEI MERCATI INTERNAZIONALI
Per le imprese artigianali, o legate ad una produzione tradizionale, l’innovazione digitale non comporta sempre
ed automaticamente un’innovazione dei processi e dei macchinari, che implicherebbero la perdita dell’unicità del
prodotto artigianale, richiesto dagli acquirenti in tale segmento di nicchia, ma in molti casi comporta soprattutto
un’innovazione nella relazione con i consumatori dei mercati nazionali ed esteri e facilita la realizzazione di prodotti
sempre più unici e personalizzati, capaci di generare particolari emozioni nell’acquirente.
La sfida più grande per le imprese storiche è la gestione del cambiamento interno che i processi dell’innovazione
digitale comportano, soprattutto per imprese Business to Consumer, che già presidiano da anni diversi mercati esteri,
attraverso i canali di distribuzione tradizionali (off-line).
Mentre le imprese di nuova costituzione (start-up) sono generate e fondate su un modello di business innovativo,
che utilizza in modo principale la tecnologia del digitale e di internet per comunicare, ma soprattutto per offrire al
consumatore un’esperienza d’acquisto emozionante, soddisfacente, che risponda alle sue esigenze in modo diretto e
semplice.
Limiti della ricerca. Il presente studio presenta il limite principale di un’analisi di tipo qualitativo svolta su un
numero limitato di casi aziendali, anche se appartenenti a territori e a settori economici diversi. La successiva
estensione della casistica delle imprese selezionate e la comparazione dei diversi casi di studio permetterà di ridurre la
possibilità di errore e di cattiva interpretazione dei risultati e di ottenere la generalizzazione analitica (Yin 1993, 2003)
dei risultati della ricerca.
Implicazioni pratiche. Attraverso il presente progetto di ricerca si intende contribuire all’attuale ed importante
dibattito della letteratura di management sull’innovazione e sull’internazionalizzazione delle imprese, nonchè di poter
iniziare a delineare un possibile modello di competitività e di creazione del valore delle imprese del Made in Italy nei
mercati internazionali, attraverso l’innovazione digitale e le strategie di tailor made.
Originalita’ del lavoro. Confronto multisettoriale di imprese tradizionali del Made in Italy, di differenti regioni
italiane, che attraverso l’innovazione digitale, attuano strategie di tailor made per migliorare la competitività nei
mercati internazionali, verificandone le performance e mirando ad un possibile modello di competitività internazionale
per le imprese del Made in Italy.
Parole chiave: Innovazione digitale; Tailor Made; Business Model; Made in Italy; Value co-creation; Born globals
firms
Bibliografia
AGENDA DIGITALE, Aziende industry 4.0 italiane, ecco quali e come sono in https://www.agendadigitale.eu
AQUILANI B., ABBATE T., D’AMICO A., GATTI C. (2015), “Co-creare prodotti e processi con i clienti: i servizi degli Open
Innovation Intermediaries (OII)”, Sinergie Italian Journal of Management, n. 98, pp. 311-329
BACCARANI C., GOLINELLI G.M. (2014), “Le parole dell’innovazione”, Sinergie Italian Journal of Management, n. 94, pp. IXXIV
BARTOLETTI R. (2009), “Il lato B della barbie”, in Mazzoli L. (a cura di), Network Effect. Quando la rete diventa pop, Torino:
Codice Edizioni. Bartoletti R., Paltrinieri R. (2012), “Consumo e prosumerismo in rete: processi di creazione di valore,
Produzione, consumo, prosumerismo: la natura del capitalismo nell’era del ‘prosumer’ digitale”, in Sociologia della
comunicazione, n. 43, pp. 7-14.
BAUMAN Z. (2005), Vita liquida, trad.it, Laterza, Roma-Bari
BAUMAN Z. (2011), Modernità liquida, trad.it, Laterza, Bari
CEDROLA E., BATTAGLIA L. (2011), “Piccole e medie imprese e internazionalità: strategie di business, relazioni, innovazione”,
Sinergie, n. 85, pp. 71-92
CHESBROUGH H.W. (2006), Open Innovation: The new imperative for creating and profiting from technology, Harvard Business
Press
COLLESEI U., CASARIN F., VESCOVI T. (2001), Internet e i Cambiamenti nei Comportamenti di Acquisto del Consumatore,
Micro & Macro Marketing, a. X, n. 1, pp. 33-50
CONFINDUSTRIA DIGITALE - ASSINFORM, (2016), Il Digitale in Italia, 2016: Mercati, Dinamiche, Policy, Roma
COVA B., DALLI D., ZWICK D. (2011), “Critical perspectives.on consumers’ role as ‘producers’: Broadening the debate on value
co-creation in marketing processes”, Marketing Theory, vol. 11, n. 3, pp. 231-241, SAGE.
DALLI D., FORNARI D. (2014), Le discontinuità d’impresa. Dal mondo degli orologi al mondo delle nuvole, Egea SpA, Milano
DALLI D. (2009), “Il ruolo dei consumatori nel processo di creazione e redistribuzione del valore di mercato. Elementi teorici,
evidenze empiriche e spunti critici”, XXXII Convegno AIDEA “Le risorse immateriali nell’economia delle aziende”,
Ancona, 24-25 Settembre 2009.
TEECE D.J. (2010), Business Models, Business Strategy and Innovation, Long Range Planning, n. 43, Elsevier Ltd.
DELLA CORTE V. ZAMPARELLI G., MICERA R. (2013), “Innovation in tradition-based firms: dynamic knowledge for
international competitiveness”, European Journal of Innovation Management, vol. 16, n. 4, pp. 405-439
FERRARESI M., SCHMITT B.H. (2006), Marketing Esperienziale, Franco Angeli, Milano
FOTINA C. (2018), Il «dinamismo integrato» delle imprese traina l’Italia, IL SOLE 24 ORE, 22 MARZO 2018 N. 80
105
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
GENTILE C., LAMBERTI L., NOCI G., SPILLER N. (2006), Il Marketing Esperienziale come elemento incentivante
all’instaurazione di rapporti di collaborazione lungo la supply-chain: un’indagine esplorativa nel contesto dei beni di lusso, in
Atti della XVII Riunione Scientifica Annuale dell’Associazione Italiana di Ingegneria Gestionale, Roma 12-13 ottobre 2006
GOLINELLI G.M., (2017), L’approccio Sistemico Vitale (ASV) al governo dell’impresa, Wolters Kluwer Italia, Milano
GRANELLI A. (2013), L’attualità dell’artigianato e la sua “Anima Digitale, Quaderni di ricerca sull’artigianato, Rivista di
Economia, Cultura e Ricerca Sociale dell’Associazione Artigiani e Piccole Imprese Mestre CGIA.
HUANG Y.S., HSU C.S., HO J.W. (2014), “Dynamic pricing for fashion goods with partial backlogging”, International Journal of
Production Research, vol. 52, n. 14, pp. 4299-4314
KALEVI K., JANTUNEN A., PUUMALAINEN K., SAARENKETO S, TUPPURA A. (2011), “Innovation and internationalization
as growth strategies: The role of technological capabilities and appropriability”, International Business Review, vol. 20 Issue n.
5, pp. 508-520, Elsevier Ltd
KNIGHT G., CAVUSGIL S. (2004), “Innovation, organizational capabilities, and the born-global firm”, Journal of International
Business Studies, vol. 35, n. 2, pp. 124-141
KOTLER P. (2017), Marketing 4.0: dal tradizionale al digitale, Ulrico Hoepli Editore S.p.A., Milano.
LANLAN C., NAVARE J., JIN Z. (2017), Business model innovation: How the international retailers rebuild their core business
logic in a new host country, International Business Review, Elsevier Ltd.
MACARIO G., SANTOVITO S. (2016), “Le strategie di marketing internazionale attraverso il connubio tra il genius loci e i prodotti
del Made in Italy”, in (a cura di) Napolitano M.R., Marino V., Cultural Heritage e Made in Italy, Editoriale Scientifica, Napoli
MANFREDI P. (2016), “L’economia del su misura; artigiani, innovazione, digitale”, Marsillo Editori SpA, Venezia
MEYER C., SCHWAGER A. (2007), “Understanding Customer Experience”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 85, n. 2, pp. 1-11
MICELLI S. (2015), “La diffusione delle tecnologie”, in “Make in Italy: Il 1° rapporto sull’impatto delle tecnologie digitali nel
sistema manifatturiero italiano” a cura di Prometeia - Fondazione Nord Est
MOEN O. (2002), “The born globals. A new generation of small European exporters”, International Marketing Review, vol. 19, n. 2,
pp. 156-175.
PASETTO A. (2015), “Artigiani digitali e piccole imprese poco digitalizzate? Le opportunità offerte dall'Internet economy”,
Microimpresa, n. 38, Padova University Press, Padova
POLESE F., MELE C., GUMMESSON E. (2017), “Value co-creation as a complex adaptive process”, Journal of Service Theory
and Practice, vol. 27, n. 5, pp. 926-929.
POPESCU I., WU Y. (2007), “Dynamic Pricing Strategies with Reference Effects”, Operation Research, vol. 55, n. 3, pp. 413-429.
PRAHALAD C.K., RAMASWAMY V. (2004), “Co-Creation Experiences: The Next Practice in Value Creation”, Journal of
Interactive Marketing, vol. 18, n. 3 pp. 5-14.
PRASAD K., PHANI K.P., SHALINI M., (2017), Digital Manufacturing- Applications Past, Current, and Future Trends, Procedia
Engineering, n. 174 (2017), Eselvier Ltd.
PROMETEIA - FONDAZIONE NORD EST (2015), Make in Italy: Il 1° rapporto sull’impatto delle tecnologie digitali nel sistema
manifatturiero italiano,
RENNIE M.W. (1993), “Born Global”, The Mckinsey Quarterly, vol. n. 4, pp. 45-52.
RICHARDSON A. (2010), “Understanding Customer Experience”, Harvard Business Review, October 2010.
SANTOVITO S. (2011), “Innovazione digitale e problematiche di gestione d’impresa”, Rivista di Economia e Commercio, vol. n. 1
pp. 23-41, ALECUB, Bari.
SANTOVITO S. (2017), L’impresa palindroma, Cacucci Editore, Bari
SCHMITT B.H. (2010), Customer Experential Management. A revolutionary approach to connecting with your customers, John
Wiley & Sons.
SCICUTELLA M. (2011), La gestione d’impresa, Cacucci Editore, Bari
SIANO A., GOLINELLI C.M, DELLA VOLPE M., VOLLERO A., CONTE F. (2014), “Oltre il manufacturing: l’impresa diventa
content provider?”, in Atti del XXVI Convegno annuale di Sinergie, Università di Cassino e del Lazio Meridionale, 13-14 novembre
2014, Università di Cassino e del Lazio Meridionale, Sinergie Italian Journal of Management, vol. n. 98, pp. 551-560.
SILVESTRELLI S. (2014), “Innovazioni gestionali e nuove relazioni sistemiche per la competitività dell’impresa”, Sinergie, vol. n.
94, pp. 3-26.
SONG J.H., ADAMSC.R. (1993), Differentiation Through Customer Involvement in Production or Delivery, Journal of Consumer
Marketing, vol. 10, n. 2
TOFFLER A. (1980), The Third Wave, Bantam Books, New York.
VESCOVI T. (1999), “Internet, marketing e imprese minori: quali problemi?”, Micro & Macro Marketing, Rivista quadrimestrale a.
VIII, vol. 2, pp. 247-264.
VESCOVI T. (2000), “Internet communication: the Italian SME case”, Corporate Communications: An International Journal, vol. 5,
Issue n. 2, pp. 107-112.
VESCOVI T., CHECCHINATO F. (2004), “Strategie Web nelle PMI: un’analisi plurisettoriale”, in Marchi G.; Nardin G., Internet
nell’industria dell’abbigliamento, Franco Angeli, Milano
VESCOVI T. (2015), Lezioni inattese di Management. Persone, mercati, imprese, incanti e sorprese, Giappichelli, Torino
WIND J., RANGASWAMY A. (2001), Customerization: the next revolution in mass customization, Journal of Interactive
Marketing, vol. 15, n. 1, pp. 13-32.
YIN R.K. (1993), Applications of case study research, Newbury park, CA, Sage
YIN R.K. (2003), Lo Studio di caso nella Ricerca Scientifica. Progetto e metodi, Armando Editore, Roma
106
Il management del trasferimento tecnologico
nell’ambito delle Strategie Regionali di Specializzazione Intelligente
(S3)
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI* FRANCESCO RICOTTA ALFIO CARIOLA
Obiettivi. Lo sviluppo continuo di tecnologie di frontiera, la nuova rivoluzione industriale e i cambiamenti nei
gusti dei consumatori richiedono alle imprese l’implementazione di nuovi modelli di business per affrontare il
cambiamento ed essere competitive sul mercato internazionale. Poiché gli asset necessari per portare a compimento i
processi di sviluppo delle innovazioni possono non essere presenti tutti in una singola impresa, diviene fondamentale la
capacità di reperire all’esterno competenze specialistiche e tecnologie innovative. Si creano così i presupposti per un
sistema di relazioni a rete che renda più efficace ed efficiente lo scambio di conoscenze e l’attivazione di processi di
trasferimento tecnologico, che rappresentano oramai una strada obbligata per la competitività di territori ed imprese.
A livello nazionale e internazionale, i policy maker stanno unanimemente investendo molto sulle attività di
trasferimento tecnologico. A livello Europeo, con la nuova programmazione 2014-2020, l’attenzione verso le attività di
trasferimento tecnologico è cresciuta, anche in seguito alla nuova politica di coesione. Quest’ultima, infatti, si
concentra sullo sviluppo economico e sociale dei territori guidato dall’innovazione e gestito attraverso un nuovo
modello di governance multilivello e multistakeholder: la strategia di specializzazione intelligente (di seguito S3) con la
finalità di individuare le priorità di investimento in ricerca, sviluppo e innovazione che completano le risorse e le
capacità produttive di un territorio per costruire vantaggi comparati e percorsi di crescita sostenibile nel medio e
lungo termine. Le S3, regionali e nazionale, rappresentano il quadro strategico per il disegno e l’attuazione degli
interventi delle politiche di ricerca, sviluppo tecnologico e innovazione.
Dunque, in un contesto di open innovation per le imprese e il sistema della ricerca, dove le policy pubbliche
sull’innovazione e il trasferimento tecnologico sono concentrate sull’attuazione della S3 mediante cospicui investimenti
pubblici e dove, spesso gli stakeholders locali non sono consapevoli del valore aggiunto della S3 e delle potenzialità
attuative, è d’obbligo proporre una riflessione. Quali sono i modelli di trasferimento tecnologico che riescono a
supportare gli stakeholders locali e i policy maker ad attuare efficaci ed efficienti politiche di trasferimento tecnologico
e di valorizzazione della ricerca? Quali sono i driver strategici ed operativi in grado di garantire un efficace ed
efficiente gestione delle tecnologie e del trasferimento tecnologico nel contesto della S3? È possibile modellizzare le
strutture di trasferimento tecnologico rispetto al ruolo che rivestono nei territori, coerentemente con la S3?
Partendo da un esame della letteratura e ricorrendo a un’analisi di due casi studio, il presente lavoro ha l’obiettivo di
offrire una riflessione sulle variabili strategiche e organizzative che le strutture preposte al trasferimento tecnologico
potrebbero adottare, nell’ambito delle Strategie di Specializzazione Intelligente Regionali (S3) e puntare su migliori
performance per l’ecosistema dell’innovazione. Inoltre, propone una riflessione su un modello evolutivo delle strutture
di trasferimento tecnologico e di valorizzazione della ricerca (d’ora in poi STEVR), nella prospettiva della S3.
La letteratura economico-manageriale ha posto molta attenzione sulle funzioni e sul ruolo svolto dalle strutture di
intermediazione (Swamidass e Vulasa, 2009; Balderi, Daniele e Piccaluga, 2012); per di più diversi studi hanno
contribuito a comprendere le funzioni che tali strutture devono porre in essere per migliorare le performance di
trasferimento tecnologico (Bianchi et al., 2011). Secondo Siegel, Waldman e Link (2003), le strutture di interfaccia
devono analizzare il potenziale commerciale dell’invenzione tenendo conto prevalentemente delle prospettive di
successo nell’industria e sul mercato. Tale compito enfatizza l’importanza del ruolo del personale dedicato al
trasferimento tecnologico, la loro rete di relazioni e la loro capacità di valutare le tecnologie. Nell’ottica di Clarysse,
Tartari e Salter (2011), le strutture di intermediazione più performanti dedicano poco tempo alle attività di creazione di
spin-off e investono molto in attività formali legate alla protezione delle tecnologie e alla loro valorizzazione. Hsu e
Bernstein (1997) sottolineano l’importanza di alcune attività strategiche come il networking con i licenziatari,
l’adozione di approcci customer-driven nei confronti delle aziende, il coinvolgimento dei ricercatori nella fase di
commercializzazione e l’accettazione di quote di equity da parte dei TTO. Bianchi et al. (2011) evidenziano alcune
attività tipiche delle strutture di intermediazione: l’attività di networking, un’attività costante di scouting dei risultati
della ricerca, la presenza di processi strutturati di assessment delle tecnologie e la standardizzazione di procedure ben
*
Docente a contratto di Marketing Internazionale - Università della Calabria
e-mail: mariacarmela.passarelli@unical.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università Sapienza di Roma
e-mail: francesco.ricotta@uniroma1.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università della Calabria
e-mail: alfio.cariola@unical.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
107
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.19
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
definite ma flessibili, sono caratteristiche che generano migliori performance di trasferimento tecnologico negli atenei e
negli enti di ricerca. Le istituzioni intermedie (o ponte) dovrebbero erogare servizi congiunti a tutta la rete locale di
attori, come per esempio scuole di specializzazione, bandi internazionali, progetti industriali comuni, contratti di
programma con grandi imprese, progetti di ricerca cooperativa tra PMI, fondi regionali per imprese nuove, progetti
congiunti di R&S. Altri studi (Passarelli e Costabile, 2014; Passarelli e Cariola, 2016) evidenziano che le strutture di
intermediazione non solo dovrebbero concentrarsi sulle attività core di valorizzazione della ricerca e trasferimento
tecnologico (tra cui brevettazione, licensing, cessioni, contratti di R&D, etc.), ma dovrebbero anche porre maggiore
concentrazione sull’offerta di competenze e tecnologie di cui gli atenei e i centri di ricerca, che operano nei contesti
locali, sono dotati, mappando e catalogando competenze, tecnologie e laboratori; inoltre dovrebbero implementare
efficaci ed efficienti servizi di valorizzazione della ricerca in collegamento con il sistema industriale, oltre che
impostare un lavoro sinergico con gli enti che rappresentano il sistema delle imprese e che conoscono più da vicino le
loro esigenze di innovazione.
La letteratura più recente si è concentrata sul ruolo delle strutture di trasferimento nell’ambito della quadrupla
elica (Miller et al, 2018), evidenziando l’esigenza di comprendere nuove funzioni e nuovi modelli in un contesto
caratterizzato non solo da imprese e sistema della ricerca ma anche dal governo pubblico e dai consumatori.
In tale filone di ricerca si posiziona il presente contributo che rappresenta lo starting point di un progetto di
ricerca più ampio.
Poiché i territori sono il principale locus dove la conoscenza nasce e si sviluppa, la diffusione dell’innovazione
può essere favorita da strutture di “interfaccia” che spesso nascono come progetti (pubblici/pubblico-privati/privati),
nell’ambito di call a valere su Fondi Europei (diretti o indiretti) e poi possono evolvere in strutture stabili che,
addirittura possono essere agenzie regionali/nazionali per l’innovazione.
Metodologia. Il presente lavoro intende offrire un contributo alla letteratura sul trasferimento tecnologico,
focalizzandosi sulle variabili strategiche e operative delle Strutture di trasferimento tecnologico e di Valorizzazione
della ricerca STEVR, evidenziando, altresì come tali strutture evolvono, coerentemente con la S3. La metodologia
utilizzata è quella caso studio multiplo. Nello specifico sono state analizzate nel dettaglio due strutture di trasferimento
tecnologico che operano in due sistemi locali innovativi considerati di “eccellenza” in Italia: l’Agenzia per lo Sviluppo
Tecnologico dell’Emilia Romagna Soc.Cons.p.A. – ASTER e T3 Innovation della Basilicata. I casi oggetto di analisi
sono stati identificati partendo dai risultati forniti dall’ultimo rapporto annuale dell’Innovation Union Scoreboard
(2017). Per ciascun caso sono stati indagate sia le variabili strategiche sia quelle operative. Lo studio è ancora in
corso ed è stata avviata la raccolta di materiale secondario da diversi siti web, da report settoriali e mediante le
interviste ad alcuni operatori del trasferimento tecnologico e ad alcuni policy maker.
Risultati. Il primo caso analizzato è T3 Innovation. Nata nel 2017, T3 Innovation (Technology, Transfer,
Transformation) è la nuova struttura di trasferimento tecnologico della Regione Basilicata, in attuazione, della S3
(Smart Specialization Strategy), da parte del Dipartimento Politiche di Sviluppo, Lavoro, Formazione e Ricerca
regionale, nell’ambito del Programma Fesr Basilicata 2014/2020. È frutto della collaborazione di un raggruppamento
di imprese che operano da anni nel settore della consulenza strategica e dell’innovazione (PwC Advisory SpA, I3P,
Fleurs International Noovle, premium partner di Google Cloud). Il progetto si inserisce all’interno delle iniziative che
la Regione Basilicata ha voluto mettere in campo nell’attuazione della “Strategia Regionale di Specializzazione
Intelligente” (S3), volte a favorire la crescita del livello di competitività del sistema produttivo e del sistema della
conoscenza regionale principalmente nelle cinque aree di specializzazione: Aerospazio, Automotive, Bio-Economia,
Energia, Industria Culturale e Creativa. T3 Innovation sta diventando il punto di riferimento di imprese, ricercatori e
giovani startupper che, attraverso il trasferimento tecnologico, potranno produrre fattori di innovazione in grado di
impattare sulla catena del valore e della conoscenza. L’obiettivo è quello di favorire sia una maggiore competitività del
tessuto produttivo che di strutturare un ecosistema dell’innovazione in Basilicata in grado di interagire in modo
proficuo nel più ampio sistema internazionale.
L’organigramma di T3 è a matrice ed è strutturato orizzontalmente per cluster (dove ogni cluster corrisponde ad
una delle Aree di Specializzazione della Regione Basilicata), verticalmente per funzioni (Servizi di Trasferimento
Tecnologico per il Sistema della ricerca, Servizi di Trasferimento Tecnologico per il Sistema Imprese, Servizi di
Trasferimento Tecnologico per la creazione di startup, Servizi a supporto alle strategie regionali in tema di
innovazione). Il team di lavoro è composto da 24 professionisti specializzati sui temi dello sviluppo d’impresa, della
valorizzazione della ricerca e della creazione di startup. Lo sviluppo delle relazioni tra gli attori dell’Ecosystem
Regione Basilicata ed i servizi offerti al Sistema Imprese e al Sistema Ricerca (beneficiari) sono supportati dalla
Piattaforma di Management of Innovation, oltre che dalle attività operative de visu svolte dagli Innovation advisor,
verso il sistema delle ricerca, le imprese, gli sturtupper, le startup e le spin off. I beneficiari, infatti, hanno a
disposizione la consulenza delle risorse messe a disposizione dal TTO, nell’ambito di un percorso definito “journey”.
Oltre ai servizi offerti ai beneficiari (imprese, ricerca e startupper) e basati fondamentalmente sulla sensibilizzazione
rispetto alla S3 e rispetto al valore aggiunto della consulenza nell’ambito dell’innovazione e del trasferimento
tecnologico, il grande valore aggiunto che T3 Innovation offre è legato anche al supporto dell’amministrazione
regionale mediante “Il servizio di supporto alla S3”. Tale servizio si basa sul presupposto che la credibilità di una
strategia sta oggi nella sua intrinseca capacità di rimodellarsi dinamicamente, senza perdere coerenza. T3 si pone la
sfida di essere un elemento rispondente al mutamento dei contesti e degli scenari. Poichè questa sfida possa essere
108
IL MANAGEMENT DEL TRASFERIMENTO TECNOLOGICO NELL’AMBITO DELLA STRATEGIE REGIONALI DI SPECIALIZZAZIONE INTELLIGENTE
raccolta e affrontata è imprescindibile una condizione di “esercizio” della strategia: un coinvolgimento non
occasionale e sostanziale degli stakeholders nelle dinamiche di aggiornamento scalare. L’attività di entrepreneur and
research discovery fa leva sull’ascolto territoriale e su tutti gli stakeholders, facendo emergere nuovi soggetti e nuove
relazioni. Essa porta al contempo ad una maggiore coerenza programmatica che deriva dall’allineamento e dalla
messa in rete degli attori. Oltre alle attività che vengono realizzate durante l’esecuzione del Servizio, una valutazione
efficace delle dinamiche innovative e degli impatti viene realizzata intercettando e dialogando direttamente con i
principali attori dell’ecosistema regionale. L’importanza della fase di ascolto e dialogo nel processo di costruzione del
Priority Setting è funzionale alla taratura dei servizi erogati da T3. L’esecuzione delle attività previste dal Progetto T3
Innovation rappresentano un’antenna preferenziale per cogliere variazioni nell’implementazione della strategia di
specializzazione intelligente e per ri-orientare on-going la definizione di nuove politiche economiche a supporto delle
aree di specializzazione. Utilizzando un approccio bottom up, T3 è in grado di cogliere le esigenze di innovazione delle
imprese, di identificare i risultati della ricerca più promettenti e le idee di business e fungere da catalizzatore
dell’ecosistema regionale dell’innovazione. T3 Innovation, infatti, si propone come elemento privilegiato di supporto
dei meccanismi di controllo e aggiornamento che la governance della S3 ha previsto di realizzare. L’attività è
finalizzata ad alimentare un sistema di generazione e gestione della conoscenza che possa consentire una governance
efficace del processo della Strategia, mettendo a disposizione dell’Amministrazione regionale uno strumento di
gestione della conoscenza funzionale a realizzare un continuo fine-tuning della S3. L’approccio è orientato verso il
concetto di “specializzazione” che non viene inteso in termini riduzionistici ma come sistematizzazione di una visione
socio-economica che, accanto al potenziamento dei tessuti tecnologici e produttivi di punta, guardi in prospettiva a
percorsi contaminazione tecnologica intersettoriale (cross fertilization), intercettando iniziative e potenzialità
realmente innovatrici, potenziando le area della S3.
L’analisi del caso evidenzia alcuni driver operativi e strategici. A livello strategico, emerge che T3 Innovation si
sta rendendo promotore della creazione di una Struttura di “regia” per lo sviluppo territoriale e la valorizzazione della
ricerca scientifica, che funge da “attivatore” e rappresenta un elemento di shock del Sistema. La Struttura sta
attivando i primi meccanismi di coordinamento delle relazioni tra gli stakeholder, anche mediante una Innovation
Platform, al fine di stimolare la consapevolezza degli stakeholders rispetto alla S3 e promuovere la creazione di legami
tar i diversi attori del sistema . Il sistema di governance in questa fase assume una forte connotazione gerarchica, in un
rapporto esecutore – governo pubblico. I legami tra gli stakeholder territoriali risultano ancora deboli sia nelle Aree
della S3 che tra le Aree della S3 e c’è poca consapevolezza rispetto ai benefici che si possono trarre dall’attuazione
della S3. T3, dunque, ha proprio il compito incrementare (in forza e in numero) i legami tra gli stakeholders nelle
singole Aree della S3 e tra le singole Aree della S3 e diffondere la cultura della S3, valorizzando i risultati della
ricerca, promuovendo progetti di innovazione e supportando la creazione di startup.
A livello operativo, ad oggi, si evidenzia una attenzione rilevante da parte di T3 verso lo sviluppo delle cinque
aree di specializzazione della S3. I servizi erogati ai beneficiari sono fortemente customizzati e l’assistenza da parte di
T3 è costante e si concentra sia sulla creazione delle reti corte che di reti lunghe; i rapporti tra Innovation advisor e
beneficiari avvengono sia mediante rapporti diretti, sia mediante l’utilizzo di una piattaforma di machine learning,
coinvolgendo anche i consumatori finali (living lab models). Il confronto quotidiano con i beneficiari da parte di T3,
garantisce anche il supporto all’amministrazione regionale nell’aggiornamento della S3 e nella formulazione di
politiche pubbliche in attuazione dei fondi strutturali.
L’altro caso oggetto di analisi è l’ Agenzia per lo Sviluppo Tecnologico dell’Emilia Romagna Soc.Cons.p.A. ASTER. È una società consortile di cui fanno parte la Regione Emilia-Romagna, le università, gli enti di ricerca
nazionali operanti sul territorio (CNR ed ENEA), l’Unione regionale delle Camere di Commercio e le associazioni
imprenditoriali regionali. ASTER coordina la Rete Regionale di Alta Tecnologia, mentre gli attori del sistema regionale
per la ricerca e l’innovazione in Emilia-Romagna collaborano nel rispetto di un Accordo di Programma Quadro tra la
Regione, le università, i centri di ricerca per la realizzazione della RRAT nell’ambito dell’Attuazione dell’Asse I attività
1.1 del POR-FESR 2007-2013 e del patto consortile per le attività della società ASTER S.Cons.p.A. È una struttura
nata nella precedente programmazione Europea ma, che è stata in qualche modo anticipatrice del modello di
specializzazione intelligente proposto dall’Europa, tramite l’implementazione della Rete Regionale dell’Alta
Tecnologia che costituisce il perno del sistema dell’innovazione, voluto dal governo regionale e coordinato da ASTER.
La Rete Alta Tecnologia è costituita da laboratori di ricerca industriale e da centri per l'innovazione, localizzati
nei Tecnopoli presenti sul territorio; essa raggruppa le istituzioni accademiche e i centri di ricerca pubblici della
regione per offrire competenze, strumentazioni e risorse al sistema produttivo (14 Centri per l'Innovazione, 10
Tecnopoli, 82 Laboratori). La rete contiene tutto il proprio patrimonio di conoscenze, strutture e strumentazioni per
creare nuovi prodotti e materiali, migliorare le prestazioni e ottimizzare i processi (1.052 Competenze). I laboratori
della Rete danno risposte concrete alle esigenze delle imprese e offrono strutture e competenze in grado di garantire
una ricerca industriale di eccellenza. La Rete valorizza a livello industriale i risultati della ricerca e funziona da
incubatore di nuove idee e soluzioni per innovare prodotti e processi, anche con il coinvolgimento dei consumatori
finali.
La mission di ASTER consiste nella promozione dell’innovazione del sistema produttivo, nello sviluppo di
strutture e servizi per la ricerca industriale e strategica, nella collaborazione tra ricerca e impresa, nella
valorizzazione del capitale umano impegnato in questi ambiti, nonché nell’internazionalizzazione del sistema della
ricerca e delle imprese. Il processo di trasferimento tecnologico adottato da ASTER è basato sul co-develompment; le
azioni sono volte a incrementare gli investimenti e l’impiego di risorse umane in R&S nelle imprese, stimolare le
109
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
imprese nell’attivare collaborazioni con le università e gli enti di ricerca, promuovere percorsi completi (ricerca,
sviluppo precompetitivo, brevettazione) e avviare nuove iniziative imprenditoriali professionali volte alla
valorizzazione economica dei risultati della ricerca. Si tratta di un approccio che opera in un sistema innovativo
maturo, all’interno del quale le imprese vivono in un contesto innovativo dinamico e hanno già la consapevolezza che
per innovare devono attingere dall’esterno le risorse che non possiedono in house. In ASTER opera uno staff di broker
che, su richiesta delle aziende, offrono assistenza e servizi e organizzano visite e scambi presso aziende, università e
centri di ricerca nazionali e internazionali, con l’obiettivo di individuare i fabbisogni tecnologici delle imprese e
instaurare nuove collaborazioni. Le visite aziendali rappresentano un momento concreto di incontro tra le strutture di
ricerca e le realtà produttive del nostro territorio, efficace per trasformare le competenze in innovazione reale.
Essendo ormai da tanti anni il detentore di conoscenza tacita e codificata della regione Emilia Romagna, ASTER
ha supportato la Regione Emilia-Romagna nell'individuazione delle Priorità Tecnologiche regionali: imprese, sistema
della ricerca pubblica e privata e organizzazioni sono stati coinvolti in una consultazione pubblica su Ricerca &
Innovazione, individuando 4 priorità strategiche e 5 aree di specializzazione di interesse per la loro attuale importanza
economica e sociale e per il loro potenziale di crescita. Oggi continua la sua leadership a supporto all’amministrazione
regionale nell’aggiornamento della S3 e nella formulazione di politiche pubbliche in attuazione dei fondi strutturali.
L’Emilia Romagna, dunque è un sistema regionale innovativo alquanto maturo, vivace e dinamico, nel quale
bastano poche azioni mirate ed efficaci per mettere in moto meccanismi moltiplicativi vincenti. L’Emilia-Romagna è
una regione in cui nell’ecosistema dell’innovazione c’è una rete di protagonisti diffusi che favorisce la circolazione
della conoscenza e la generazione di idee innovative, in cui conviene, a livello di individui ed imprese, investire
nell’apprendimento, nella conoscenza e nell’innovazione e in cui la spesa pubblica in ricerca ha già un elevato
moltiplicatore privato.
In questa configurazione, i diversi stakeholder presentano forti e stabili legami tra loro; hanno interessi ed obiettivi
perfettamente allineati, vicinanza culturale, cognitiva e sociale e forte consapevolezza dei potenziali spillover positivi
che si possono generare dall’attuazione della S3.
In tale contesto, la STEVR funge da soggetto “designer” di nuove strategie e nuovi servizi in un sistema a rete dove la
consapevolezza rispetto alla S3 è forte e dove i legami tra i vari stakeholder nelle Aree della S3 e tra le Aree della S3
sono forti .
A livello operativo ASTER evidenzia una chiara organizzazione in Piattaforme che segue le aree di specializzazione
della S3 Emilia Romagna. Tali piattaforme sono ormai consolidate e i servizi verso i diversi beneficiari sono ben
delineati e avvengono prevalentemente in modo virtuale. In tale contesto l’obiettivo non è stimolare i legami nelle Aree
e tra le Aree della S3 ma, garantire la creazione e il consolidamento di reti lunghe, guardando al panorama Europeo e
internazionale, mediante strumenti ormai consolidatati e autorevoli.
La lettura dei due casi evidenzia che l’attuazione della S3, implica dunque un ripensamento delle strutture di
trasferimento tecnologico le quali, da generaliste sono chiamate a rispondere in modo sempre più incisivo al
paradigma della specializzazione.
I due casi presentati, evidenziano due tipologie di driver: strategici e operativi.
A livello strategico, i risultati dell’analisi suggeriscono che le strutture di valorizzazione e trasferimento
tecnologico (STEVR) evolvono nel perimetro della S3. Tale evoluzione è legata a due concetti chiave:
la densità dei legami tra gli attori del SRI e
la consapevolezza degli stakeholders di operare nel contesto della S3. Quest’ultima variabile è legata alla
conoscenza della strategia regionale da parte degli stakeholders, della funzione che riveste sui territori e dei
vantaggi legati alle politiche di attuazione.
Intersecando le 2 variabili, si possono definire diverse tipologie di Strutture di Trasferimento tecnologico e
valorizzazione della ricerca scientifica anche seguendo un processo evolutivo.
Tab. 1: Modelli di STEVR
Consapevolezza S3
BASSA
ALTA
LEGAMI TRA STAKEHOLDER
DEBOLI
ATTIVATORE- RAFFORZATORE
ANIMATORE
FORTI
DESIGNER
Fonte : ns elaborazione
Nei contesti in cui la consapevolezza degli stakeholders rispetto alla S3 è bassa, qualunque sia la tipologia dei
legami tra i vari stakeholder nelle Aree della S3 e tra le Aree della S3, la struttura STEVR dovrebbe assumere un ruolo
di “attivatore-rafforzatore” delle relazioni tra attori del Sistema regionale (imprese, enti di ricerca, governo pubblico,
finanziatori e consumatori) e diventare un “sensibilizzatore” rispetto alla S3. L’obiettivo di una STEVR di questo tipo è
orientare dal punto di vista strategico il sistema della ricerca e quello imprenditoriale verso una valorizzazione delle
risorse, il più coerente possibile con la vocazione del territorio. Inoltre, deve cambiare il paradigma di pensiero degli
stakeholders verso il tema dell’innovazione e il trasferimento tecnologico, facendo percepire loro il valore aggiunto dei
servizi che, in attuazione della S3, la struttura STEVR può offrire. Ciò genera discontinuità nel Sistema stesso.
Nei contesti in cui la consapevolezza degli stakeholders rispetto alla S3 è Alta e i legami tra i vari stakeholder
nelle Aree della S3 e tra le Aree della S3 sono forti, la struttura STEVR dovrebbe invece assumere un ruolo di
110
IL MANAGEMENT DEL TRASFERIMENTO TECNOLOGICO NELL’AMBITO DELLA STRATEGIE REGIONALI DI SPECIALIZZAZIONE INTELLIGENTE
catalizzatore di esigenze di innovazione e di risultati della ricerca verso le reali esigenze del mercato. In tale contesto,
infatti, l’ecosistema è attivo e dinamico gli stakeholders operano in un sistema di network. La STEVR qui può rivestire
il ruolo di “designer” di nuove strategie e politiche pubbliche per conto del governo regionale, anche mediante
l’identificazione di eventuali nuove Aree di specializzazione intelligente e nuovi servizi, pur continuando a offrire
servizi di innovazione e trasferimento tecnologico ad alto valore aggiunto per gli stakeholders.
Nei contesti invece in cui la consapevolezza degli stakeholders rispetto alla S3 è Alta, e i legami tra i vari
stakeholder nelle Aree della S3 e tra le Aree della S3 sono deboli, l’ecosistema è attivo e dinamico ma gli stakeholders
operano in modo autonomo. La struttura STEVR dovrebbe puntare sulla qualità delle attività operative erogate agli
stakeholders assumendo un ruolo di “animatore” di nuovi servizi per i beneficiari/stakeholders e consumatori finali,
finalizzati a creare e intensificare i legami tra di essi.
In tale modellizzazione, T3 Innovation rappresenta un attivatore, mentre ASTER un Designer.
Implicazioni pratiche. Nel contesto Europeo delle Smart Specialization Strategy (S3), la presenza di strutture di
trasferimento tecnologico, incentiva le imprese a ripensare ai loro modelli di business e al loro modo di generare
innovazione e trasferimento tecnologico. Il coinvolgimento di tutti gli attori nel processo innovativo e l’approccio
bottom up orientano meglio le politiche pubbliche offrendo alle imprese migliori opportunità di sviluppo. Il sistema
della ricerca ha più opportunità di proporsi nel mercato delle tecnologie, uscendo dalle “torri d’Avorio” e generando
innovazioni utili per il mercato finale. La presenza di STEV in attuazione della S3 inoltre, offre alle imprese
l’opportunità di sviluppare nuovi prodotti e processi utilizzando tecnologie di frontiera; dall’altra parte, spinge il
sistema della ricerca a lavorare su linee di ricerca che possano trovare applicazioni concrete e possano garantire la
loro scalabilità su varie aree strategiche.
In tal modo si crea un sistema economico dinamico in cui l’innovazione si “co-sviluppa” tra i vari stakeholders
che operano sul territorio; ciò incrementa le performance sia di Trasferimento tecnologico (brevetti, proof of concept,
spin off, licenze, etc) che di innovazione (nuovi prodotti, nuovi processi, etc), incrementando anche la customer
satisfaction.
Diverse sono le implicazioni per gli stakeholders dell’innovazione e per i policy makers. Nello specifico nella
progettazione di una STEVR, diventa fondamentale l’analisi del contesto di riferimento. Inoltre, una struttura STEVR,
di concerto con il governo regionale, nel tempo, deve essere capace di modificare il proprio assetto organizzativo in
relazione al ciclo di vita del sistema locale in cui opera, altrimenti è destinata a scomparire con evidenti inefficienze
per tutto il sistema innovativo. Dunque, per garantire a sé stessa condizioni di sopravvivenza e sviluppo, la struttura
STEVR deve sviluppare la capacità di modificare il proprio modello e le relazioni organizzative alla luce delle
specifiche condizioni di contesto in cui la stessa struttura interviene. Inoltre, in un contesto S3, le STEVR, devono
comunque ripensare anche al sistema interno di competenze e risorse da impiegare nelle attività strategiche ed
operative.
Limiti della ricerca. I risultati dei casi, contribuiscono a raccogliere dati primari utili a sviluppare modelli di
trasferimento tecnologico nell’ambito della quadrupla elica. Tuttavia, non forniscono risultati generalizzabili. Future
ricerche si concentreranno sull’analisi causale tra i servizi ricevuti dalle imprese da parte delle strutture STEVR e le
loro performance (economico finanziarie e di innovazione).
Originalità del lavoro. Il lavoro si inquadra nella recente letteratura sul trasferimento tecnologico che fa
riferimento alla quadrupla elica e propone una lettura dei modelli di valorizzazione della ricerca e trasferimento
tecnologico nel perimetro della S3, che rappresenta ormai l’approccio di frontiera proposto dalla Commissione
Europea a cui imprese, ricerca, governi pubblici e mercato devono far riferimento.
Parole chiave: trasferimento tecnologico; valorizzazione della ricerca; Strategia di specializzazione intelligente..
Bibliografia
BALDERI C., DANIELE C., PICCALUGA A. (2012), “Gli uffici di trasferimento tecnologico delle città italiane: numeri ma non
solo numeri”, Economia e Politica Industriale, vol. 39, n. 4, pp. 135-159
BIANCHI M., CHIARONI D., CHIESA V., FRATTINI F. (2011), “Exploring the role of human resources in technology outlicensing: an empirical analysis of biotech newtechnology-based firms”, Technology Analysis & Strategic Management, vol.
23, pp. 825-849.
CLARYSSE B., TARTARI V., SALTER A. (2011), “The Impact of Entrepreneurial Capacity, Experience and Organizational
Support on Academic Entrepreneurship”, Research Policy, vol. 40, n. 8, pp. 1084-1093
HSU D.H., BERNSTEIN T. (1997), “Managing the University Technology Licensing Process: Findings from Case Studies”, Journal
of the Association of University Technology Managers, vol. 9, n. 9, pp. 1-33
MILLER K., MCADAM R., MCADAM M. (2018), “A systematic literature review of university technology transfer from a
quadruple helix perspective: toward a research agenda”, R&D Management, vol.48, n. 1, pp. 7-24.
PASSARELLI M., CARIOLA A. (2016), “L’evoluzione dei modelli di trasferimento tecnologico - parte prima”, Sistemi&Impresa,
vol. Settembre
111
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
PASSARELLI M., CARIOLA A. (2016), “L’evoluzione dei modelli di trasferimento tecnologico - parte seconda”, Sistemi&Impresa,
vol. ottobre/novembre
PASSARELLI M., COSTABILE M. (2014), “Un approccio manageriale al trasferimento tecnologico: un’analisi di benchmarking sui
TTO universitari europei”, Economia e Politica Industriale, vol. 41, n. 4, pp. 265-297
SIEGEL D.S., WALDMAN D.A., ATWATER L., LINK A. (2003a), “Commercial Knowledge Transfers from Universities to Firms:
Improving the Effectiveness of University-Industry Collaboration”, The Journal of High Technology Management Research,
vol. 14, n. 1, pp. 111-133
SWAMIDASS P.M., VULASA V. (2009), “Why University Inventions Rarely Produce Income? Bottleneeks in University
Technology Transfer”, The Journal of Technology Transfer, vol. 34, n. 4, pp. 343-363
112
Competences and performance in metal waste supply chain:
lessons from Italy
MARIACARMELA PASSARELLI* FRANCESCO RICOTTA PINO VECELLIO
Objectives. The aim of the paper is to understand with competences are involved along the life cycle of the waste
supp,ly chain. Our effort is to answer the following question: how a mixed ownership works along the waste metal
supply chain? Which competences (involved in the different phases of the supply chain) are able to generate positive
firms’ performance? The present paper proposes an exploration of the different ownership models for firms operating
in this sector, in order to define the impact of the different orientation and consequently, the definition of different
business model on performance.
Performance is a common focus of study in both theoretical and empirical economics. Particularly, there is a growing
interest in developing and implementing accurate performance measures for the waste sector, and so providing useful
information to a number of relevant stakeholders, from managers of utilities, to regulatory bodies and policymakers,
thus enabling them to make more informed decisions on which practices and regulations favour the industry. Moreover,
the issue of the relationship between ownership and performance has also at the core of the debate in the waste industry
(Marketline, 2016).
The waste management industry consists of all municipal solid waste (MSW) - including non-hazardous waste
generated in households, commercial establishments and institutions, and non-hazardous industrial process wastes,
agricultural wastes and sewage sludge.
Some people disregard the need for recycling solid waste especially metal. The World Commission on
Environment and Development (1987: 16) defines sustainability as development which “meets the needs of the present
without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs”.
Although almost every kind of metal can be recycled again and again without degradation of properties, currently,
only 30 percent of metal is recycled. Nearly 40 percent of worldwide steel production is made using recycled steel.
Around 42 percent of crude steel in the United States is made of recycled materials. In the United States alone, around
100 million steel and tin cans are used every day. Steel and iron are the most recycled materials in the world due in
part to the opportunity to recover large structures as well as the ease of reprocessing. The use of magnets in the sorting
process enables recyclers to easily separate them from the mixed waste stream. Every year, around 400 million tons of
metal is recycled worldwide. Currently, the single most recycled consumer product in the U.S. is the aluminum can.
Throwing away a single aluminum can waste energy equivalent to the same can filled with gasoline. The current overall
metal recycling rate of around 30 percent is not acceptable given the recyclability of almost every kind of metal, and
challenges remain with respect how to recapture more material for recycling. The expansion of community recycling
programs and public awareness help in this regard.
Against this sectorial background, this paper revisits the effect of marketing and innovation competences owned
by public and private ownership, on firms’ performance.
The study is the “starting point of a research project” and it is organized as follows. The first paragraph
concentrated on waste market trends. then, the paper describe the metal life cycle and the waste supply chain. The third
paragraph focuses on the literature background. The fourth paragraph is concentrated on research methodology and
results. Conclusions and implications are in the last part of the paper.
According to the last report of Marketline (2016), the European Waste Management industry has been growing at
a very slow rate over the past five years but is expected to loose the momentum even more over the forthcoming years
up to 2021. The European Waste Management industry is expected to generate total revenues of $31, 058.2m in 2016,
representing a compound annual growth rate (CAGR) of 0.2% between 2012 and 2016. In comparison, the German
industry will decline with a compound annual rate of change (CARC) of -0.1%, and the UK industry will increase with
a CAGR of 2.2%, over the same period, to reach respective values of $7, 706.9m and $3, 347.6m in 2016. The
management of waste in Europe continues to improve, however, the European economy currently still loses a
significant amount of potential 'secondary raw materials' such as metals, wood, glass, paper and plastics. Industry
*
Docente a contratto di Marketing internazionale - Università della Calabria
e-mail: mariacarmela.passarelli@unical.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università Sapienza di Roma,
e-mail: francesco.ricotta@uniroma1.it
PhD. Dipartimento di Scienza Aziendali e Giuridiche - Università della Calabria
e-mail: pino.vecellio@unical.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
113
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.20
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
consumption volume is forecast to increase with a CAGR of 0.1% between 2012-2016, to reach a total of 320.5 million
tons in 2016. The industry's volume is expected to rise to 323.5 million tons by the end of 2021, representing a CAGR of
0.2% for the 2016-2021 period. In terms of household waste alone, each person in Europe produces, on average, half of
tonne of such waste. Only 40% of it is reused or recycled and in some countries more than 80% still goes to landfill.
The performance of the industry is forecast to follow a similar pattern with an anticipated CAGR of 0.1% for the fiveyear period 2016 - 2021, which is expected to drive the industry to a value of $31, 178.8m by the end of 2021.
Comparatively, the German and UK industries will decline with CARCs of -1% and -0.5% respectively, over the same
period, to reach respective values of $7, 312.2m and $3, 265.2m in 2021. Specifically, Germany accounts for 24.8% of
the European waste management industry value; United Kingdom accounts for a further 10.8% of the European
industry and Italy 10%.
In 2021, the European waste management industry is forecast to have a value of $31.2 billion, an increase of 0.4%
since 2016.
Metals are ubiquitous in today’s society(Nuss and Eckelman 2014); there are few materials or products where
metals are absent or have not played a role in their production. While a century ago, the diversity of metals employed
was limited to perhaps a dozen in common uses such as infrastructure and durable goods, today’s technologies utilizes
virtually the entire periodic table. For example, the number of elements employed in integrated circuits used in most
electronics products has increased from only twelve elements in 1980 to more than sixty elements today, while
electronic products themselves are used in an increasing number of applications. Similarly, the elemental complexity of
superalloys, which are a class of materials to allow the operation of turbines and jet engines at high temperatures and
under corrosive environments, has increased over time as new alloying elements (e.g., rhenium, tantalum, hafnium) are
added. Future global demand for metals is expected to increase further as a result of urbanization and new
infrastructure construction in developing countries, widespread use of electronics, and transitions in energy
technologies The use of renewable energy technologies, such as photovoltaic and wind power, is expected to result in
an increased demand for both bulk metals (e.g., iron, copper) and specialty metals (e.g., rare earths) when compared to
today’s largely fossil-based systems. While increased future demand for primary metals could be reduced through
dematerialization, substitution with other metallic or non-metallic resources, and increased metals end-of-life recycling
rates, a recent study by(Graedel et al. 2011) indicates that current end-of-life recycling rates for only eighteen metals
(out of a total of sixty) are above 50%. These include silver, aluminum, gold, chromium, copper, iron, manganese,
niobium, nickel, lead, palladium, platinum, rhenium, rhodium, tin, titanium, and zinc. For many of the specialty metals,
such as scandium and yttrium, as well as the rare earth elements, end-of-life recycling rates were found to be less than
1%. The production of primary (virgin) metal typically includes ore mining and concentrating, smelting or separation,
and refining to obtain the element in its metallic form, with a variety of processing routes available. In each stage,
impurities and byproducts are separated and the concentration of the metal in the final product increases.
Thus, by focusing on metal waste, the last report of Marketandmarket (2016) shows that the metal recycling
market size is projected to to reach USD 406.16 Billion by 2020, at an estimated CAGR of 7.95% (2015-2020).
With accelerated urbanization, growth in infrastructural activities, and increasing industrialization, there is a
rapidly increasing need for metal products. Consequently, a sustainable metals management system has to consider
both the environmental, social, and economic spheres of sustainability and many aspects of a metals life cycle.
Metals are valuable materials that can be recycled again and again without degrading their properties. Scrap
metal has value, which motivates people to collect it for sale to recycling operations.
In addition to a financial incentive, there is also an environmental imperative. The recycling of metals enables us
to preserve natural resources while requiring less energy to process than the manufacture of new products using virgin
raw materials. Recycling emits less carbon dioxide and other harmful gasses. More importantly, it saves money and
allows manufacturing businesses to reduce their production cost. Recycling also creates jobs.
Metals are essential, versatile and can be used in a number of ways. The most common recyclable metals include
aluminum and steel. The other metals for example silver, copper, brass and gold are so valuable that they are rarely
thrown away to be collected for recycling.
The cycle for metals is initiated by choices in product design: which materials are going to be used, how they will
be joined, and which processes are used for manufacturing. Choices made during design have a lasting effect on
material and product life cycles. They drive the demand for specific metals and influence the effectiveness of the
recycling chain during end of life (EOL). The finished product enters the use phase and becomes part of the in-use stock
of metals. When a product is discarded, it enters the EOL phase. It is separated into different metal streams (recyclates
), which have to be suitable for raw materials production to ensure that the metals can be successfully recycled. In each
phase of the life cycle metal losses occur. The life cycle of a metal is closed if EOL products are entering appropriate
recycling chains, which leads to scrap metal in the form of recyclates displacing primary metals. The life cycle is open
if EOL products neither are collected for recycling nor enter those recycling streams that are capable of recycling the
particular metal efficiently. Open life cycles occur as a result of products discarded to landfills, products recycled
through inappropriate technologies (e.g., the informal sector) whereby metals are not or only inefficiently recovered,
and metal recycling in which the functionality (i.e., the physical and chemical properties) of the EOL metal is lost
(nonfunctional or “open-loop” recycling). A related distinction between open and closed material systems is made in
life cycle assessment (ISO 2006), in which a material system is only considered closed when a material is recycled into
the same use(Graedel et al. 2011).
The detailed waste metal supply chain includes different phases, that are described in the following figure.
114
COMPETENCES AND PERFORMANCE IN METAL WASTE SUPPLY CHAIN: LESSONS FROM ITALY
Fig. 1: Process of waste metals
Industry
Disposal
Collection
Recycling
Decontamination/Remediation
Fonte: ns Elaborazione
Strategic management literature suggests that the origin of a competitive advantage for a firm comes from the
resources, the capabilities and the competences owned by a firm. Such resources are related to the ownership, because,
different owners pursue different goals and possess different incentives and competences (Asquer 2017, 2018).
Distinctive marketing competences (Laing 2003) in the public services ask for a perception that the pattern of
service utilization and behaviour in respect of public services is likely to differ significantly from that in respect of
private services, requiring, it has been suggested, a reframing of current models of consumer behaviour. Although it is
argued that the psychology of the citizen is poorly understood in comparison to the understanding of the psychology of
the consumer (Walsh 1994), it is nonetheless possible to identify a number of key dimensions in which citizenship
behaviour is perceived as qualitatively different from consumer behaviour. Consequently, distinctive marketing
competences related to the citizen, are usefull when the firm enter the market of public service. Public ownership has
more orientation to the public services market; As Wanna et al. (1992) assert, the adoption of the marketing concept by
public organisations may facilitate the provision of services suitable to citizens’ demands and more carefully guided to
those that need them most. Moreover, public owners offer reputational capital, especially in the startup phase of the life
cycle. The reputation effects, in fact, may influence asset values, especially when government can influence the
subsequent performance (and value) of an enterprise through regulation or political interference. Reputation is also
related to the risk. For example, the poor post-privatization performance by Spanish enterprises required the state to
heavily discount subsequent asset sales, in some cases offering ‘money-back’ guarantees (Jenkinson, 1998). Boardman
and Vining (1989) concluded that private corporations perform better than state-owned enterprises, but interestingly,
mixed enterprises perform no better and often worse than state-owned enterprises.
Public ownership alone, however, is lack of entrepreneurial competences and also of propensity to innovation
competences (De Alessi, 1983; (Rodrigues and Tavares 2017)(Alfiero et al. 2017).
The property rights school suggests that when a firm has no dominant residual claimant over its profits then it will
be operated inefficiently. Others contend that while state owned firms may be concerned with profitable operation, they
must also pursue other objectives, which impairs their ability to achieve efficiencies and financial objectives. Moreover,
because no distinct individual or group can clearly benefit from a public firm’s profits, no one has the incentive to
monitor or hold public managers accountable for their decisions. As a consequence of weak monitoring, public choice
theorists suggest that politicians and bureaucrats may substitute their own goals and preferences, such as employment
and prestige, over efficiency and productivity considerations. Consequently, property rights theorists contend that
private ownership is inherently superior to state ownership (De Alessi, 1983). Recent empirical evidence comparing the
performance of enterprises before and after privatization suggest that private ownership in competitive markets may
represent the necessary conditions for improved performance. However, others have suggested that a single model of
ownership and competition cannot be expected to be superior for all industries in all countries. In this regard, the
attributes of mixed ownership models represent an interesting and little investigated development in the debate (Vining
and Weimer 2015).
Methodology . The first step we took in order to precisely identify the firms upon which conducting our analyses, was
to focus our attention on which type of companies are involved in the entire sector of waste management. After a careful
browse of the European industrial activity classification list, that assigns a four digit number to each firm according to
its activity (Nace code), we identified four codes suitable for our investigation: Collection, Treatment, Recovery,
Decontamination. We gathered accounting data for all the Italian companies whose Nace codes were the ones we
identified, thanks to availability of Bureau van Dijk Orbis database, which includes European privately held and
publicly traded companies that satisfy specific criteria. Data about the institutional context have been downloaded
either from the web site of Istat (The Italian National Institute of Statistics) or the web site of Banca d’Italia (the central
bank of the Republic of Italy). The time span covered by this empirical analysis refers to the period 2008-2016.
We propose a quantitative explorative analysis by using a a simple OLS model whose variable are described in
table below. We considered county level fixed effects. Moreover, year fixed effects are included as control.
115
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Concerning the variables, the dependent variable to be analyzed is the profitability of firms involved in the
management of waste industry, measured both as the level of sales and as the level of operating revenues. We
considered either accounting and ownership dependent variables or variables describing the local institutional context.
The local context features are crucial for firm success. The levels of local financial development and social capital as
well as the levels of local enforcement and crime, have a great influence on firm performance. This is why we introduce
a set of variables describing the institutional context at local level, along with the usual firms financial variables, in
order to understand how the presence in the shareholder base of the public sector influences firms performance.
Tab. 1: Variables
Variables
Dependent variables
Profitability1
Descriptions
It is measured as the natural logarithm of firms sales. It is led by one year in the robustness
analysis
Independent and institutional context variables
Age
Age of firms measured in years
Dummy member of a group
Dummy equal to 1 if the firm is part of a broader group, 0 otherwise
Dummy financial institution
Dummy equal to 1 if in the board there is at least a financial institution, 0 otherwise
Weak public presence
Dummy equal to 1 if a public institution owns shares in a range greater than 0 and lower or equal
than 50 percent
Strong public presence
Dummy equal to 1 if a public institution owns shares in a range greater than 50 percent
Dummy patent
Dummy equal to 1 if the firm owns at least a patent, 0 otherwise
Cashstock
Continuous variable expressing the amount of cash and equivalents owned by the firm scaled by
the total of assets of firm itself
Tangibility
Continuous variable expressing the amount of tangible assets owned by the firm scaled by the total
of assets of firm itself
Stock
Continuous variable expressing the amount of firm's assets held in the form of raw materials, work
in progress and finished goods. They are scaled by the total of assets of firm itself
Dummy Debt short
Dummy equal to 1 if the firm has short term debt, 0 otherwise
Dummy Debt long
Dummy equal to 1 if the firm has long term debt, 0 otherwise
Trials duration
Average duration of civil trials duration at county level measured in days
Non performing bank loans
Total amount of non performing bank loans at county level
Voting
Percentage of people, at county level, who cast their votes either in politic or administrative
elections
Extortions
Number of extortions reported for each county
Fonte: ns Elaborazione
At this stage of analysis, we split every subsamples into two parts according to their age median (calculated in
years) in order to discriminate young and mature firms. Table 4 lists the medians for each subsample: Collection (9),
Treatment (7) , Recovery (13), Decontamination (13).
In order to corroborate our findings, we performed the same analyses seen above with the dependent variables led
by one year.
Findings. Consistent with the marketing (reputational and networking) and the innovation frameworks (De Alessi,
1983) a mixed ownership model could be the winner along firms’ life cycle.
Recovery stage is mainly dominated by Public intervention, in the form of equity support and patent both in the
short and long run. As has been clearly showed above, those variables are the main source of performance over time
even if the effect size is declining, thus suggesting that this stage is dominated by innovation competence related to
replication and exploitation of technologies developed in the first stage of firms life.
Decontamination stage claim for a radical change in the business and organizational model. In the short run, our
model seems to be unable to define the key performance driver. Only age and group membership shows a positive effect
on performance but with a moderate effect while a strong presence of public institution as shareholders negatively
affect firms sales. Over the long run innovation measured by patent has an effect on performance as one of the main
drivers.
The following tables show the main results.
116
COMPETENCES AND PERFORMANCE IN METAL WASTE SUPPLY CHAIN: LESSONS FROM ITALY
Tab. 2: Performance of young firms in the waste management sector with weak public presence
Collection
Treatment
Recovery
<= 9 years
<= 7 years
<= 13 years
Profitability1
Profitability1
Profitability1
Age
0.451***
0.302**
0.205***
(0.000)
(0.014)
(0.000)
Dummy member of a group
0.156
0.103
0.476***
(0.404)
(0.718)
(0.000)
Dummy financial institution
-0.406
0.302
0.197
(0.370)
(0.524)
(0.212)
Voting
0.00163
-0.138
0.0117
(0.927)
(0.213)
(0.233)
Non performing bank loans
0.0517
0.272
-0.0353
(0.240)
(0.245)
(0.155)
Extortions
-0.0166
0.0661
-0.0244
(0.611)
(0.227)
(0.157)
Trials duration
-0.000951
-0.000392
0.000647
(0.336)
(0.880)
(0.204)
Weak public presence
0.421
-8.188***
-1.828***
(0.413)
(0.002)
(0.000)
Dummy patent
2.293***
1.675
0.923***
(0.000)
(0.287)
(0.004)
Cashstock
-4.117***
-3.052***
-3.584***
(0.000)
(0.000)
(0.000)
Tangibility
-0.945**
-1.974***
-1.188***
(0.015)
(0.000)
(0.000)
Stock
4.743***
-0.227
4.061***
(0.000)
(0.879)
(0.000)
Dummy Debt short
1.131***
1.811***
0.972***
(0.000)
(0.000)
(0.000)
Dummy Debt long
0.690***
0.993**
0.974***
(0.006)
(0.023)
(0.000)
Observations
1112
498
3332
R2
0.540
0.560
0.428
Adjusted R2
0.488
0.457
0.407
p-values in parentheses. * p < 0.10, ** p < 0.05, *** p < 0.01. Year fixed effects are included as controls.
Remediation
<= 13 years
Profitability1
0.358***
(0.000)
0.315**
(0.034)
-1.556***
(0.000)
-0.0127
(0.328)
0.0761**
(0.014)
-0.00486
(0.852)
-0.000568
(0.430)
0.730*
(0.088)
0.528
(0.347)
-3.034***
(0.000)
-2.210***
(0.000)
-0.852
(0.167)
1.053***
(0.000)
0.356**
(0.036)
1257
0.488
0.443
Fonte: ns Elaborazione su dati ORBIS
Tab. 3: Performance of mature firms in the waste management sector with weak public presence
Collection
Treatment
Recovery
Remediation
> 9 years
> 7 years
> 13 years
> 13 years
Profitability1
Profitability1
Profitability1
Profitability1
Weak public presence
-1.286***
-1.903***
-1.789***
-0.391
(0.000)
(0.000)
(0.000)
(0.265)
Control variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Institutional variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Observations
3417
2231
5692
1486
R2
0.478
0.485
0.345
0.441
Adjusted R2
0.459
0.458
0.330
0.405
p-values in parentheses. * p < 0.10, ** p < 0.05, *** p < 0.01. Year fixed effects are included as controls.
Remediation
> 13 years
Profitability2
Fonte: ns Elaborazione su dati ORBIS
Tab. 4: Performance of young firms in the waste management sector with strong public presence
Collection
Treatment
Recovery
<= 9 years
<= 7 years
<=13 years
Profitability1
Profitability1
Profitability1
Strong public presence
-0.421
8.188***
1.828***
(0.413)
(0.002)
(0.000)
Control variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Institutional variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Observations
1112
498
3332
R2
0.540
0.560
0.428
Adjusted R2
0.488
0.457
0.407
p-values in parentheses. * p < 0.10, ** p < 0.05, *** p < 0.01. Year fixed effects are included as controls.
Fonte: ns Elaborazione su dati ORBIS
117
Remediation
<= 13 years
Profitability1
-0.730*
(0.088)
Yes
Yes
1257
0.488
0.443
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Tab. 5: Performance of mature firms in the waste management sector with strong public presence
Collection
Treatment
Recovery
> 9 years
> 7 years
> 13 years
Profitability1
Profitability1
Profitability1
Strong public presence
1.286***
1.903***
1.789***
(0.000)
(0.000)
(0.000)
Control variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Institutional variables
Yes
Yes
Yes
Observations
3417
2231
5692
R2
0.478
0.485
0.345
Adjusted R2
0.459
0.458
0.330
p-values in parentheses. * p < 0.10, ** p < 0.05, *** p < 0.01. Year fixed effects are included as controls.
Remediation
> 13 years
Profitability1
0.391
(0.265)
Yes
Yes
1486
0.441
0.405
Fonte: ns Elaborazione su dati ORBIS
The above results highlight that in the waste metal supply chain, there is the need to adapt the business model of
firms both to the stage of the life cycle and to each phase of the supply chain. Is not possible to define a unique business
model for the waste metal sector. Consequently, also the typology of competences involved along the supply chain are
different. Anyway, the presence of the public and the private ownership is always necessary, because in a balanced
way, they are able to provide the right competences to grow. Specifically, public owner has more orientation to the
public services; the adoption of the marketing competences by public organisations may facilitate the provision of
services suitable to citizens’ demands and more carefully guided to those that need them most. Moreover, public owner
offers other marketing competences related to the reputational capital, especially in the startup phase of the life cycle.
The accumulation of such competences asks for other competences across the lifecycle. However, public ownership is
lack of entrepreneurial competences and also of innovative propensity competences, so, especially in the more
innovative phases of the process, the dominance of a private ownership is necessary.
Research limits. The main limitation of the paper are related to the fact that it doesn’t consider all the possible
variables that in an hyibrid ownership model can be caught. Further steps in the research project will provide a survey
with the aim to identify an extensive number of drivers able to measure different items for each competence
Practical implications. These results give suggestions to the entrepreneurs along with policy makers. From one
side, the entrepreneurs can better identify an adequate business model to implement and consequently, competences
and resources; policy makers, in the implementation activity of European found should also take into account the
heterogeneity of competences necessary to set up a new firm and/or to expand the established.
Originality of the study. The study goes beyond purely looking at ownership along the supply chain and also
across the life cycle of firms.
Key words: business model; waste industry; supply chain ; competences.
References
ALFIERO S., ELBA F., ESPOSITO A., RESCE G. (2017), “The Impact of Environmental Factors on the Measurement of
Managerial Efficiency in the Italian Waste Management Sector: Framework and Empirical Evidence”, International Journal
of Public Administration, vol. 40, n. 10, pp. 820-32.
ASQUER A. (2017), Regulation of infrastructure and utilities: public policy and management issues, Springer.
MARKETLINE (2016), Waste Management in Europe, December
NUSS P., ECKELMAN M.J. (2014), “Life Cycle Assessment of Metals: A Scientific Synthesis”, PloS One, vol. 9, n. 7, pp. e101298.
REPORT (2016) “Metal Recycling Market by Metal Type (Ferrous, Non-Ferrous), Scrap Type (Old Scrap, New Scrap), End-Use
Sector (Construction, Automotive, Equipment Manufacturing, Shipbuilding, Others), Equipment (Shredders, Granulating
Machines, Others) - Forecast to 2020”, Marketandmarket.
RODRIGUES M., TAVARES A.F. (2017), “The Same Deep Water as You? The Impact of Alternative Governance Arrangements of
Water Service Delivery on Efficiency”, Journal of Strategic Contracting and Negotiation, vol. 3, n. 2, pp. 78-101.
VINING A.R., WEIMER D.L. (2015), “The Challenges of Fractionalized Property Rights in Public-Private Hybrid Organizations:
The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly”, Regulation & Governance, vol. 10, n. 2, pp. 161-78.
118
I teatri lirici italiani: efficienza, efficacia e ruolo della tecnologia
CLEMENTINA BRUNO* FABRIZIO ERBETTA GIOVANNI FRAQUELLI ANNA MENOZZI**
Obiettivi. L’opera lirica nasce in Italia agli inizi del XVII secolo; passeranno circa quarant’anni prima che
questa forma d’arte si trasformi da fenomeno di corte in spettacolo a pagamento per il popolo (o almeno per la
borghesia) e, quindi, “per il teatro”. Il primo teatro lirico in attività fu il teatro San Cassiano a Venezia (1637). Da
quel momento i teatri lirici si diffusero a macchia d’olio in tutto il vecchio continente, prima, e nel Nord America, poi,
fino a vantare ai nostri giorni una distribuzione territoriale che appare corretto definire globalizzata (Agid e
Tarondeau, 2010).
Purtroppo, il processo di produzione dello spettacolo “opera” presenta, dal punto di vista economico, le criticità
comuni alle arti performative in genere, prima fra tutte la “malattia di Baumol” (Baumol e Bowen, 1965). Il termine
punta a delineare la situazione per cui in questo settore (delle arti performative, appunto), caratterizzato da scarsi o
nulli incrementi di produttività legati al progresso tecnologico, si affronti una costante e fisiologica difficoltà a far
fronte a costi che, al contrario, crescono, poiché i prezzi dei fattori produttivi tendono a seguire l’andamento medio
dell’economia (dove il progresso tecnologico porta, invece, i suoi benefici). Di qui nasce la costante necessità di
garantire la sopravvivenza del settore attraverso sussidi pubblici o privati (Agid e Terondeau, 2010; Trevisan, 2017).
In Italia la produzione lirica è gestita da un elevato numero di enti teatrali. I teatri lirici maggiori, tuttavia, sono
gestiti da 14 “Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche”. L’attività delle Fondazioni è, come dicevamo, pesantemente sussidiata
attraverso contributi pubblici, tra cui spicca il ruolo del FUS, il Fondo Unico per lo Spettacolo, istituito nel 1985 allo
scopo di finanziare lo spettacolo dal vivo. Tuttavia, come si è detto, dal punto di vista economico la produzione di
spettacoli è un’attività in cui è estremamente difficile giungere alla copertura dei costi, e il comparto dell’opera è, con
tutta probabilità, quello che presenta costi di produzione più alti. Non è quindi sorprendente che molte delle
Fondazioni si siano trovate ad affrontare pesanti situazioni di crisi economico-finanziaria. In questo quadro generale,
la legge Bray interviene nel 2013 ad apportare una importante riforma nel sistema, modificando la governance delle
Fondazioni e introducendo incentivi al miglioramento dell’efficienza.
L’approccio generale della riforma appare condivisibile. E’ pur vero, infatti, che nell’ambito delle “performing
arts” il progresso tecnologico difficilmente permette consistenti incrementi di produttività, ma questo non implica che
all’interno del settore non si riscontrino margini di miglioramento, almeno in termini di allineamento a quelle che
possono essere le “migliori pratiche”. In secondo luogo, probabilmente, il progresso tecnologico può supportare in
modo molto limitato l’attività di produzione in senso stretto, ma l’ICT fornisce notevoli opportunità nell’ambito del
marketing e della comunicazione, che possono essere efficacemente sfruttate dai teatri lirici con opportune scelte
strategiche. Per esempio, Hausmann e Poellmann (2013) segnalano come i teatri tedeschi facciano largo uso dei social
media e come questi possano rappresentare uno strumento molto efficace per il marketing, partendo dalla
comunicazione, passando per il supporto delle ricerche di mercato, per arrivare dell’attività di management
dell’innovazione e della reputazione. Focalizzato sulle Fondazioni italiane è, invece, lo studio di Mich e Peretta (2017).
Gli autori ne analizzano le strategie “web”, con particolare riferimento alla possibilità e facilità di utilizzo su
dispositivi mobili. Sottolineano come tali scelte giochino un ruolo chiave nel coinvolgimento delle (potenziali) fasce di
pubblico giovane e giovanissimo, fattore molto importante nell’ambito di un prodotto culturale fruito da un’utenza più
anziana rispetto alle altre forme di spettacolo. Gli stessi autori sottolineano il contributo della produzione operistica
all’attrattività dell’Italia come destinazione turistico-culturale.
Alla luce di quanto discusso, appare dunque di estremo interesse un lavoro di misurazione delle performance
delle Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche, al fine di individuare i modelli manageriali che caratterizzano le best practices del
settore. L’analisi che qui si propone riguarda una ricerca in corso ed estende, sotto il profilo metodologico e in merito
alla base dati, un precedente studio sullo stesso tema (Bruno, Erbetta, Menozzi e Fraquelli, 2017). Si tratta di
un’analisi di efficienza dell’attività delle Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche Italiane basato sul metodo della Data
Envelopment Analysis (che verrà meglio descritto nel paragrafo successivo). Inoltre, si cercano (tramite una
*
**
Assegnista di Ricerca - Università del Piemonte Orientale
e-mail: clementina.bruno@uniupo.it
Associato di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università del Piemonte Orientale ed Hermes Ricerche
e-mail: fabrizio.erbetta@uniupo.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università del Piemonte Orientale
e-mail: giovanni.fraquelli@uniupo.it
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università del Piemonte Orientale ed Hermes Ricerche
e-mail: anna.menozzi@uniupo.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
119
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.21
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
regressione di second stage) le determinanti dell’efficienza, ossia i fattori che possono impattare sulla performance
misurata. Innanzi tutto, verranno valutate le scelte strategiche relative alla presenza online dei teatri lirici (in termini
di presenza sui social media, oppure di utilizzo di internet come canale di vendita). In questo modo si potrà dare
riscontro empirico ai citati lavori che sottolineano l’opportunità del ricorso ai canali “online”. Inoltre, si controllerà
per l’effetto di altri fattori, quali le scelte di esternalizzazione, l’impatto delle riforme, la localizzazione geografica e i
flussi turistici che coinvolgono l’area in cui il teatro ha sede.
Metodologia. Come menzionato nel paragrafo precedente, questo studio propone un’analisi di valenza strategica
basata sul confronto delle performance delle Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche italiane. Il lavoro si avvale della
metodologia nota come Data Envelopment Analysis (DEA), introdotta da Charnes et al. (1978) sulla base del
contributo di Farrell (1957). Il metodo permette di costruire misure di efficienza relativa (cioè calcolata tramite il
confronto di ciascuna unità del campione con le migliori unità dello stesso campione). L’approccio utilizzato permette
di modellizzare praticamente ogni processo di produzione, e la misura di efficienza esprime la capacità (e l’abilità) di
una certa impresa (o ente) nella trasformazione degli input (fattori della produzione) in output (il prodotto o servizio
erogato). Le imprese “migliori” in questo processo di trasformazione (pienamente efficienti) giaceranno sulla
“frontiera” delle “best practices”, mentre le altre imprese (inefficienti), giaceranno al suo interno e la loro misura di
efficienza dipenderà dalla distanza rispetto alla frontiera stessa. La metodologia si basa sulla programmazione lineare,
ed è completamente deterministica, quindi non tiene conto di alcuna componente di errore casuale, ma presenta il
grande vantaggio di essere molto più flessibile rispetto agli approcci di tipo econometrico che richiedono la
specificazione di una forma funzionale.
Spostando ora l’attenzione sul modello vero e proprio, si consideri un processo di produzione che utilizza M input
(X) per produrre N output (Y); la misura di efficienza di una data impresa appartenente al campione sarà calcolata
come (Bogetoft e Otto, 2011; Coelli et al., 2005):
𝑚𝑎𝑥𝜙,𝜆1,…,𝜆𝐽
𝑠. 𝑡.
𝜙
𝑗
𝑜
≥ ∑𝐽𝑗=1 𝜆𝑗 𝑥𝑚 ,
𝑥𝑚
𝑗
𝜙 𝑦𝑛𝑜 ≤ ∑𝐽𝑗=1 𝜆𝑗 𝑦𝑛 ,
𝜆𝑗 ≥ 0
∑ 𝜆𝑗 = 1
𝑚 = 1, … , 𝑀
𝑛 = 1, … , 𝑁
Nella formulazione descritta, 𝜙 rappresenta l’”efficiency score”, ossia la misura di efficienza, in un’ottica
“output oriented”. Esso esprime cioè se e quanto sarebbe possibile, per ciascuna unità considerata, espandere la
propria produzione a parità di fattori utilizzati, fino al raggiungimento della frontiera. Per le unità efficienti,
ovviamente, nessuna espansione è possibile, in quanto giacciono già sulla frontiera. Esse avranno dunque score pari a
uno. Le unità inefficienti invece presenteranno un potenziale di espansione e avranno scores superiori a uno e tanto
maggiori quanto più ampia è la loro distanza dalla frontiera stessa. La frontiera è costituita dalla combinazione lineare
delle unità efficienti. L’ultimo vincolo, infine, introduce rendimenti di scala variabili (Banker et al., 1984), ossia
impone che ogni unità sia confrontata con “best performers” di dimensione simile alla propria.
Fig. 1: Modello DEA output oriented con rendimenti di scala variabili
Y
C
D’
B
D
A
0
X
Fonte: nostra elaborazione
Si consideri ad esempio la tecnologia produttiva riportata nella Figura 1. Si tratta di una semplicissima
120
I TEATRI LIRICI ITALIANI: EFFICIENZA, EFFICACIA E RUOLO DELLA TECNOLOGIA
tecnologia che utilizza un solo input (X, riportato sull’asse orizzontale) per produrre un solo output (Y, riportato
sull’asse verticale). Le imprese presenti nel campione sono A, B, C e D. Le prime tre rappresentano delle best-practice
in relazione alle loro combinazioni input-output (in quanto non ci sono altre imprese più a “Nord-Ovest” rispetto alla
loro posizione nel grafico) e quindi giacciono sulla frontiera, rappresentata dalla linea spezzata che le congiunge.
L’impresa D invece giace all’interno della frontiera, risultando quindi inefficiente. Essa potrebbe infatti migliorare la
propria produzione di output (a parità di input) espandendola fino a raggiungere la frontiera stessa, ossia fino al punto
D’. L’efficiency score dell’impresa D è dato dal rapporto tra il suo livello di output ottimale (rappresentato dal
0𝐷 ), che è un valore maggiore di uno ed
segmento ̅̅̅̅̅
0𝐷′) e il livello di output effettivamente realizzato (segmento ̅̅̅̅
esprime la possibile espansione di output realizzabile dall’impresa D. Per le imprese sulla frontiera tale rapporto
risulterà, evidentemente, pari all’unità.
I modelli DEA tendono a produrre scores di efficienza biased in senso ottimistico. Ciò accade in quanto la
frontiera è costruita sulla base di un campione osservato di dimensione finita, che è solo una delle possibili
realizzazioni ottenibili rispetto all’universo di riferimento. Conseguentemente, l’insieme delle combinazioni inputoutput effettivamente esistenti potrebbe essere più ampio di quello osservato e da ciò dipende l’esistenza del bias.
Simar e Wilson (1998, 2000) propongono un approccio basato su metodi di bootstrapping utilizzabile per la correzione
del bias e per analisi di inferenza sui valori di efficienza calcolati attraverso l’approccio DEA. Infatti, il bootstrapping
permette, attraverso una complessa procedura basata sul ricampionamento ripetuto, di ottenere una distribuzione per
ciascuno score di efficienza che permette la correzione del bias e l’inferenza statistica.
In questo lavoro si applicherà un approccio DEA con bootstrapping e correzione del bias a un dataset contenente
dati e informazioni sulla maggior parte delle Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche italiane, osservate nel periodo 2010-2016
(il panel non è bilanciato). Il dataset contiene dati economico finanziari e dati relativi alla produzione (titoli,
rappresentazioni, spettatori) delle Fondazioni. E’ in corso l’espansione della base dati per includere rilevanti
informazioni relative all’utilizzo di canali di vendita online e dei social network.
La struttura del dataset permette la costruzione di modelli DEA rispondenti a diverse esigenze. Un primo
approccio può coinvolgere il concetto di efficienza in senso stretto, quando si voglia misurare la produzione in termini
di titoli e rappresentazioni prodotte (le variabili più direttamente collegate ai costi operativi). Tuttavia è ragionevole
pensare che un teatro lirico non debba avere solo, o prevalentemente, obiettivi in termini di efficienza (massimizzazione
della produzione date le risorse a disposizione). La sua attività deve necessariamente risultare anche efficace, cioè in
grado di attrarre il pubblico e incontrarne i gusti. Un modello che misuri anche l’efficacia dovrebbe quindi includere
tra gli output la presenza di spettatori. Il confronto tra le due tipologie di modelli è potenzialmente in grado di
suggerire numerosi spunti di riflessione, soprattutto quando si consideri l’effetto delle variabili determinanti
dell’efficienza.
Questo lavoro propone infatti anche una regressione di “second stage” in cui i valori di efficienza calcolati
tramite DEA vengono regrediti su una serie di variabili che possono, potenzialmente, impattare sull’efficienza stessa.
Seguendo l’approccio suggerito da Simar e Wilson (2007), si utilizzerà un modello di regressione troncata (che tiene
conto del fatto che gli scores di efficienza hanno un limite inferiore in corrispondenza del valore uno) con
bootstrapping, che nella regressione di second stage garantisce la validità dell’inferenza statistica:
𝜙 = 𝑧𝛽 + 𝜀 ≥ 1
Le variabili indicate con z sono le potenziali determinanti dell’efficienza, mentre il vettore 𝛽 include i parametri
ad esse associati, interpretabili come quelli di una regressione tradizionale. Come si è detto, tra le variabili
considerate, di particolare interesse sono l’utilizzo degli strumenti online, le scelte di esternalizzazione, l’impatto delle
riforme, la localizzazione geografica e la presenza di flussi turistici, oltre a eventuali interazioni tra le stesse.
Risultati. Poiché si tratta di una ricerca in corso, è possibile in questa fase delineare risultati attesi. Il nuovo
approccio metodologico, ancorché basato un dataset ancora ridotto, evidenzia margini di inefficienza piuttosto
importanti da recuperare, anche se un notevole miglioramento di performance sembra caratterizzare il settore negli
anni successivi alla riforma. Coerentemente con i risultati dello studio precedente, le performance appaiono
scarsamente correlate rispetto ai flussi turistici, mentre una correlazione positiva emerge rispetto alle spese per servizi
e per le scritture di personale artistico, ma solo quando la produzione viene misurata “a valore”, ossia in termini di
ricavi.
Appare plausibile che, anche a seguito dell’ampliamento della base dati, tali tendenze vengano confermate. La
presenza di un ventaglio più ampio di potenziali determinanti dell’efficienza permetterà, come si è detto, un’analisi di
regressione (troncata), dove si vuole testare l’effetto simultaneo delle variabili, con focus particolare sull’utilizzo della
tecnologia internet nell’ambito del marketing e della comunicazione. Coerentemente con quanto suggerito da Baumol e
Bowen (1965), ci si aspetta che i fattori tecnologici abbiano impatto scarso o nullo sulla performance misurata sulla
base di modelli di efficienza in senso stretto. Al contrario, è plausibile che costituiscano, come sottolineato nei citati
lavori sul tema, un valido supporto all’espansione dell’audience e alla gestione dei rapporti con gli utenti, impattando
quindi positivamente sulla performance misurata con modelli che tengano conto, appunto, della presenza più o meno
vasta di spettatori, che cattura aspetti di efficacia della gestione. Infine, un punto interessante da analizzare è costituito
dalla presenza di sinergie tra le variabili determinanti l’efficienza (verificabile testando interazioni tra le stesse
nell’ambito dell’analisi di regressione), ad esempio tra flussi turistici e utilizzo di tecnologie internet.
121
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
Limiti della ricerca. Probabilmente il limite maggiore della ricerca è rappresentato dal numero di osservazioni
della base dati, “fisiologicamente” non ampio in considerazione dell’ambito su cui verte l’analisi. Infatti, anche
avendo a disposizione l’intero universo, le Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche italiane sono complessivamente 14. Il
problema è parzialmente superabile sviluppando l’analisi su una serie storica di dati: tale opportunità (per la quale si
è deciso di optare nell’ambito di questa analisi), permette di aumentare il numero di osservazioni a disposizione.
Inoltre, un’accurata selezione delle variabili, sia nella fase della determinazione dell’efficienza (primo stadio), sia nella
fase dell’analisi di regressione (secondo stadio) è di fondamentale supporto ai fini del superamento dei limiti, in
termini di flessibilità, imposti dalle dimensioni della base dati.
Implicazioni pratiche. Le implicazioni pratiche del lavoro proposto sono molteplici. Da un lato, infatti, esso
produce una rigorosa analisi del posizionamento strategico delle Fondazioni Lirico-Sinfoniche, che risulta interessante
per gli enti stessi ma anche per il legislatore, poiché la base dati copre il periodo immediatamente precedente e
immediatamente successivo alla riforma introdotta con la Legge Bray del 2013. Inoltre, l’analisi delle determinanti
dell’efficienza fornisce informazioni utili su quali elementi e, in particolare, su quali scelte strategiche trovino supporto
i miglioramenti delle performance. Ovviamente, si tratta di informazioni di enorme valore dal punto di vista
manageriale.
Originalità del lavoro. Il lavoro proposto si contestualizza nel filone, non ampio ma radicato, dell’analisi della
performance degli enti con finalità culturali e, in particolare, dei teatri. Gli esempi in letteratura sono numerosi. Per
citarne alcuni, a livello internazionale, appare utile ricordare il lavoro di Marco-Serrano (2006), che si basa sulla
Data Envelopment Analysis al fine di analizzare l’efficienza di un campione di teatri spagnoli operanti a livello locale
nell’area di Valencia, riscontrando peraltro margini di recupero rilevanti in termini di incremento della produzione.
L’approccio DEA, tuttavia, non appare essere il più frequentemente utilizzato nell’ambito della letteratura empirica del
settore. In un altro interessante contributo, Zieba e Newman (2013) si basano su un modello di Stochastic Frontier
Analysis (SFA - la principale opzione econometrica alternativa all’approccio DEA) per valutare le performance di un
campione di teatri tedeschi, verificando altresì l’effetto della forma organizzativa dei teatri stessi (che possono
assumere la forma di enti di diritto pubblico o di diritto privato). Con focus sul settore teatrale italiano, appare utile
ricordare il contributo di Fazioli e Filippini (1997), orientato alla stima di una funzione di costo (quindi non
direttamente ad una valutazione di efficienza), ove si segnalano i potenziali risparmi di costo derivanti dallo
sfruttamento di economie di scala e di diversificazione. In Castiglione, Infante e Zieba (2017) si utilizza ancora
l’approccio SFA, che tiene anche conto dei fattori determinanti dell’efficienza, quali la qualità del contesto istituzionale
e le competenze. Anche la scala operativa appare giocare un ruolo importante.
In relazione allo specifico settore di attività considerato, quello dei teatri d’opera, il contributo più rilevante
nell’ambito della letteratura manageriale è, secondo la nostra opinione, il già citato studio di Agid e Tarondeau
(2010). Gli autori propongono un’analisi comparativa (a livello internazionale) dell’attività gestionale e strategica di
un campione di importanti teatri lirici, diversi per dimensioni, ubicazione geografica e approcci strategici adottati.
Spesso l’analisi proposta dagli autori fa riferimento all’intero campione, ma non mancano approfondimenti riferiti a
casi specifici di particolare interesse. Oltre ad un confronto di strategie, il lavoro propone anche la comparazione di
una serie di indicatori economici e di produzione, quali numero di rappresentazioni, presenze di spettatori per
rappresentazione, numero di produzioni realizzate, costo medio per rappresentazione, costo medio per biglietto
venduto, prezzo medio per biglietto venduto, autonomia finanziaria (rapporto tra prezzo e costo medio per biglietto),
tasso di saturazione dei posti disponibili. Inoltre, attraverso un’analisi multivariata si propone di identificare l’impatto
di particolari fattori su alcuni degli indicatori considerati.
Rispetto alla letteratura esistente, il lavoro che qui si propone presenta diversi elementi di novità. Innanzi tutto, si
utilizza il metodo DEA, raramente utilizzato nell’ambito del settore dell’attività teatrale, soprattutto con riferimento ai
teatri lirici. Il principale vantaggio di esprimere la performance attraverso una misura di efficienza come lo score
DEA, rispetto all’utilizzo di una serie di indicatori come nell’ultimo studio citato, non sta nel diverso contenuto
informativo del risultato (al contrario, il lavoro di Agid e Tarondeau fornisce linee guida fondamentali nella scelta
delle variabili), ma nella capacità di sintetizzare le informazioni di performance in un unico indice: il metodo DEA,
infatti, trova il suo principale ambito di applicazione in contesti multidimensionali, quando è importante considerare
simultaneamente una molteplicità di input e, soprattutto, di output (ad es. rappresentazioni, audience, capacità di
generare ricavi). L’unicità della misura di performance è di grandissimo supporto a scopi comparativi, per la
costruzione di “ranking”, dove la simultanea presenza di più indicatori “parziali” potrebbe creare problemi a livello
di coerenza dei risultati (Bogetoft e Otto, 2016). La metodologia viene inoltre implementata, come si è detto, con un
approccio rigoroso dal punto di vista statistico (DEA a due stadi con bootstrapping). Tuttavia, il principale elemento
innovativo è rappresentato dall’ambito di applicazione. Il focus è infatti su un settore teatrale particolare come quello
dei teatri lirici italiani di cui, oltre a produrre una valutazione della performance, si propone anche un’analisi in
chiave strategica. Si intende infatti testare la bontà di alcune scelte (strategiche, appunto) quali l’utilizzo della
tecnologia internet, valutandole nel particolare periodo dell’implementazione di una riforma nazionale che vede tra i
suoi principali obiettivi proprio quello di promuovere e incentivare comportamenti virtuosi dal punto di vista
dell’efficienza, verificando quindi la coerenza tra intenzioni del legislatore e scelte degli enti.
Parole chiave: Efficienza; Performance; Data Envelopment Analysis; Arti Performative; Tecnologia.
122
I TEATRI LIRICI ITALIANI: EFFICIENZA, EFFICACIA E RUOLO DELLA TECNOLOGIA
Bibliografia
AGID P., TARONDEAU J. (2010), The management of opera: an international comparative study, Palgrave Macmillan,
Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire, England.
BANKER R.D., CHARNES A., COOPER W.W. (1984), “Some models for estimating technical and scale inefficiencies in Data
Envelopment Analysis”, Management Science, vol. 30, n. 9, pp. 1078-1092.
BAUMOL W.J., BOWEN W.G (1965), “On the performing arts: the anatomy of their economic problems”, The American economic
review, vol. 55, n. 1/2, pp. 495-502.
BOGETOFT P., OTTO L. (2010), Benchmarking with Dea, Sfa, and R, Springer Science & Business Media, New York.
BRUNO C., ERBETTA F., FRAQUELLI G., MENOZZI A. (2017), “Efficienza e sostenibilità economica dell’attività dei teatri lirici
italiani”, Annali del turismo, n. 1.
CASTIGLIONE C., INFANTE D., ZIEBA M. (2017), “Technical efficiency in the Italian performing arts companies”, Small
Business Economics, pp. 1-30.
CHARNES A., COOPER W.W., RHODES E. (1978), “Measuring the inefficiency of decision making units”, European Journal of
Operational Research, vol. 2, n. 6, pp. 429-444.
COELLI T.J., RAO D.S.P., O’DONNELL C.J., BATTESE G.E. (2005), An introduction to efficiency and productivity analysis,
Springer Science & Business Media, New York.
FARRELL M.J. (1957), “The measurement of productive efficiency”, Journal of the Royal Statistical Society Series A (General),
vol. 120, n. 3, pp. 253-281.
FAZIOLI R., E FILIPPINI M. (1997), “Cost structure and product mix of local public theatres”, Journal of Cultural Economics, vol.
21, n. 1, pp. 77-86.
HAUSMANN A., POELLMANN L. (2013), “Using social media for arts marketing: theoretical analysis and empirical insights for
performing arts organizations”, International Review on Public and Nonprofit Marketing, vol. 10, n. 2, pp. 143-161.
MARCO-SERRANO F. (2006), “Monitoring managerial efficiency in the performing arts: A regional theatres network perspective”,
Annals of Operations Research, vol. 145, n. 1, pp. 167-181.
MICH L., PERETTA R. (2017), “Mobile Web Strategy for Cultural Heritage Tourism: A Study on Italian Opera Houses”, in FuiHoon Nah F., Tan C., (a cura di), HCI in Business, Government and Organizations. Interacting with Information Systems.
LNCS 10293, Springer, Cham, Switzerland.
SIMAR L., WILSON P.W. (1998), “Sensitivity analysis of efficiency scores: how to bootstrap in nonparametric frontier models”,
Management Science, vol. 44, n. 1, pp. 49-61.
SIMAR L., WILSON P. W. (2000), “A general methodology for bootstrapping in non-parametric frontier models”, Journal of
applied statistics, vol. 27, n. 6, pp. 779-802.
SIMAR L., WILSON P.W. (2007), “Estimation and inference in two-stage, semi-parametric models of production processes”,
Journal of econometrics, vol. 136, n. 1, pp. 31-64.
TREVISAN P. (2017). Reshaping Opera: A Critical Reflection on Arts Management, Cambridge Scholars Publishing.
ZIEBA M., NEWMAN C. (2013), “Organisational Structure and Managerial Efficiency: A quasi-experimental analysis of German
public theatres”, Homo Oeconomicus, vol. 29, n. 4, pp. 497-534.
123
TRACK - L’EVOLUZIONE DEI MODELLI DI BUSINESS TRA BIG DATA E TECNOLOGIA
124
TRACK
MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE
CUSTOMER VALUE
Niche marketing: an exploration from the perspective of tourism businesses
ALBERTO MATTIACCI, ATTILIO BRUNI, FRANCESCA MAGNO, FABIO CASSIA
From traditional customer segmentation to buyer personas: new strategies to create customer value
GIORGIA SEPE, AUDUR HERMANNSDOTTIR, BIRGIT HAGEN, ANTONELLA CARCAGNÌ
Niche marketing:
an exploration from the perspective of tourism businesses
ALBERTO MATTIACCI* ATTILIO BRUNI FRANCESCA MAGNO FABIO CASSIA**
Objectives. Driven by the diversification of travellers’ needs and wants (Hassan, 2000; Hsu et al., 2002;
McKercher, 2016) and by technological and digital developments (Gretzel et al., 2015), niche tourism is rapidly
expanding as a possible response to tourism massification or ‘mass-ness’ (Novelli and Robinson, 2005). Tourists
increasingly tend to see themselves as ‘individuals’ and search for very specific tourism products to express their
identity (Rihova et al., 2015). At the same time, the offerings of tourism firms - not only of the small-sized ones - tend to
focus on specialty businesses to satisfy tourists searching for specific experiences (Benur and Bramwell, 2015; Lew,
2008; Pine and Gilmore, 1999; Wilhelm Stanis and Barbieri, 2013). In addition, new technologies provide effective
tools to identify and serve new tourism market niches (Wu et al., 2016). As a result, the number of niche tourism forms
is expanding, ranging from astro-tourism (Soleimani et al., 2018) to energy tourism (Frantál and Urbánková, 2017).
However, while the growth of niche tourism has been acknowledged in many studies (e.g., Lew, 2008; Powell and
Iankova, 2016; Wilhelm Stanis and Barbieri, 2013), this phenomenon been mostly researched from the perspective of
niche tourism destinations (Benur and Bramwell, 2015; Morgan and Pritchard, 2006). However, the perspective of
tourism businesses targeting market niches has been almost completely overlooked. The purpose of this paper (which is
the first step of an ongoing research project) is to contribute to fill this gap by exploring the contents and features of
niche marketing from the view of tourism businesses (hospitality businesses, travel agencies and tour operators).
To build the theoretical background for this research we draw on available studies about market niches and niche
marketing developed in the marketing field of studies. A market niche has been defined as a “small market consisting of
an individual customer or a small group of customers with similar characteristics or needs” (Dalgic and Leeuw, 1994,
p. 40). Hence, while a segment addresses a homogeneous group of people, a niche focuses on individuals (Dalgic and
Leeuw, 1994) and on individualized products (Schaefers, 2014). In detail, the distinctive features of a niche are (a) the
limited size of the business owing to its innovative nature and to the specificities of the target and (b) the offering of a
specialty product, without perfect substituting offerings in the same category (c) which delivers higher value compared
to the average offerings in the same category and (d) which is immediately recognizable by customers for its originality
(Mattiacci, 2008; Mattiacci and Ceccotti, 2008).
A market niche may be targeted both by a small firm and by a specific business unit of a large firm (which
simultaneously targets the mass market through other business units). To identify and approach a market niche, firms
adopt niche marketing which has been defined in several ways. According to Shani and Chalasani (1992, p. 34), “it is
the process of carving out a small part of the market whose needs are not fulfilled. By specializing along market,
customer, product, or marketing mix lines, a company can match the unique needs”. A more comprehensive definition
is provided by Toften and Hammervoll (2013, p. 280) who clearly identify the contents of niche marketing which is “the
process of carving out, protecting and offering a value product to a narrow part of a market that displays differentiated
needs”. In this study we draw on this last definition and we explore niche marketing from the perspective of tourism
businesses along the three activities highlighted by Toften and Hammervoll: (a) carving out, (b) protecting and (c)
offering a value product.
Methodology. This study adopts a qualitative approach to address the research question, i.e. to explore the
contents and features of niche marketing from the tourism businesses’ perspective. Data were collected using semistructured interviews (McCracken, 1988). The choice of the informants reflected a theoretical sampling approach
(Eisenhardt, 1989) guided by the intention to gain a comprehensive overview of the phenomenon under investigation.
Therefore, informants’ selection was guided by the following criteria:
a) covering both the production and the distribution stages of the tourism supply chain. Therefore, similarly to
previous research about tourism businesses’ marketing (Bruni et al., 2017), this study encompasses hospitality
*
**
Full Professor of Marketing - Sapienza University of Rome
e-mail: alberto.mattiacci@uniroma1.it
Research fellow of Marketing - Sapienza University of Rome
e-mail: attilio.bruni@uniroma1.it
Researcher of Management - University of Bergamo
e-mail: francesca.magno@unibg.it
Researcher of Management - University of Verona
e-mail: fabio.cassia@univr.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
127
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.22
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
businesses, tours operators and travel agencies (both traditional and online travel agencies);
including niche players, mass marketers and players that simultaneously target (through specific offerings, brands
and/or business units) both the mass market and market niches;
c) as regards niche players, considering the perspective of both aware niche players (those that in their websites
explicitly or implicitly present themselves as niche players) and likely niche players (those that do not present
themselves as niche player but show some cues - such as the offering of specialty products - that suggest that they
are likely to be niche players);
d) complementing the analysis by collecting the perspective of actors with a comprehensive view on the tourism
industry such as tourism consultancy businesses and infomediaries.
As a result, 27 businesses were selected (see table 1 for details) and one respondent for each business was interviewed.
Participants were mostly marketing managers who had a level of experience in the tourism industry ranging from 6 to
30 years and who worked in either national or international firms. The interview schedule was articulated into four
main sections (niche and tourism; the consumers of tourism niches; niche and technology in tourism; marketing and
management of tourism niches) and was developed with the support of six tourism experts and scholars. The interviews
were recorded and transcribed verbatim. The textual data was analysed using template analysis (King, 2012; King and
Brooks, 2017), which is based on the hierarchical organization of codes which reflect different levels of analysis depth.
To guide the analysis, we used three high-level predefined codes corresponding to three activities making up niche
marketing according to Toften and Hammervoll’s (2013) definition: (a) carving out, (b) protecting and (c) offering a value
b)
product.
Tab. 1: Firms participating in the study
Aware niche players
Likely niche players
Mass marketers and
player targeting both
mass market and niches
Other
businesses
(tourism
consultancy
businesses
and
infomediaries)
Hospitality businesses
Tour operators
Ecolodge Langhe. Small
relaxing resort (A- Group
Tourism)
2. Sotto le Cummerse - Albergo
diffuso
3. Al
Borgo.
Residence,
Apartment & Rooms
4. La Piana dei Mulini Albergo diffuso
5. Italy Bike Hotels
15. Concerto. Fine Italian Hotels
16. Club Viaggi Resort
6. Il Sipario Musicale
7. Viaggi dell’Elefante Limited edition
8. Altreculture di Atlante
Viaggi Srl
9. Sardegna Insolita (TO by
Terre Insolite)
1.
17. Alidays
18. Planet Viaggi
20. Alpitour
Travel agencies and Online
Travel Agencies (OLTA)
10. I viaggi di Maurizio Levi
11. Viaggi Avventure nel mondo
12. Kel 12. Cultura del Viaggio
13. Kailas Viaggi & Trekking
14. Turismo Sostenibile 5 Terre
19. RE. Residenze D’Epoca.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
Bestwestern Italia
Choice Hotels
Una Hotels
Accor Hotels
GECO
Gestioni
e
consulenze alberghiere
26. Valica. Tourism Marketing
Company
27. Trivago
Source: our elaboration
Findings. Guided by the three high-level codes derived by Toften and Hammervoll’s definition of niche marketing
(carving out, protecting, offering a value product), the analysis revealed a richness of sub-themes which were organised
around five levels of codes corresponding to five levels of analysis depth (see table 2 for the final template). In this
abstract, only the findings related main themes will be summarised.
128
NICHE MARKETING: AN EXPLORATION FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF TOURISM BUSINESSES
Tab. 2: The final template
1. Carving out
1.1 Anticipation of future trends (weak signals) in the travel market
1.2 Novelty of the idea
1.2.1 Identifying travelers’ unmet arguments, themes, interests, values or passions (the multiplicity of niches)
1.2.2 The role of creativity
1.3 Tourism supply-driven vs. tourism demand-driven process
1.4 Use of digital technology for identifying niches (scouting)
2. Protecting
2.1 Anti-competitive approach: juxtaposition instead of contrast to avoid/slow down imitation and massification
2.1.1 Emphasis on the specialty of the niche offering
2.2 Economic protection: the challenge of profitability (charging price premiums)
2.3 Proactive innovation to ensure niche relevance over time
2.4 Loyalty management to minimize the impact of customer defection on business, as a result of being tuned in with the
customers before, during and after the travel
2.5 Niche protection in the case of firms addressing both the mass market and niches
2.5.1 The use of a specific brand for the niche offering
3. Offering a valued product
3.1 Specificities of tourism niche products
3.1.1 Products as experiences, contents and travel themes
3.1.1.1
Combining product orientation with customer orientation to guarantee offering’s uniqueness and
consistency with evolving customer needs
3.1.2 Product value through the consistency with a customer’s set of values and desires
3.1.3 Quality excellence, perfection, uniqueness
3.1.4 Low levels of cognitive (more than economic) accessibility to the product
3.2 The production process of niche tourism products
3.2.1 Personalization through a consultancy process
3.2.1.1 One-to-one relationship (traveler-consultant) before, during and after the travel
3.2.1.1.1 Customer’s trust with his/her consultant and/or travel guide
3.2.1.2 Understanding customers’ needs and expectations through conversations and empathy
3.2.1.2.1 Sharing interests, passions, travel culture and experience
3.2.1.2.2 Discussing travel expectations with highly-competent travelers
3.2.1.3 Travel experience co-creation with customers through dialogue
3.2.1.3.1 Crafting a personalized travel experience by selecting a unique mix of experiential ingredients
3.2.2 The role of technology and of the web
3.2.2.1 CRM technologies to profile and manage customers
3.2.2.2 Digital technologies to support travel co-creation and co-design
3.2.2.3 Digital technologies to facilitate contact and dialogue along the entire customer journey
3.3 Resources and competences as the key factor for the production of tourism niche products
3.3.1 Human capital as the key resource
3.3.2 Competences’ specialization (searched for and recognized by travelers) for the provision of a niche product
3.3.2.1 In-depth knowledge of destinations and of suppliers (e.g., accommodation facilities) and their offerings
combined with direct travel experience to provide valuable consultancy (providers as experts)
3.3.2.2 Internal support to the consultant through team work (e.g. sharing specializations, themes, travel
experiences)
3.3.2.3 Information management competence
3.3.2.4 Relationship management competence
3.4 Distribution of niche products
3.4.1 Direct distribution vs. indirect distribution
3.4.2 Distributor selection
3.4.2.1 The impact of distributor’s personnel competences
3.4.2.2 Selection of niche distributors to convey the distinctive features of the travel
3.4.3 Cooperation through distribution channels
3.5 Communication of niche products
3.5.1 Word of mouth (WOM) stimulation
3.5.2 Integration between traditional WOM and web and digital tools
3.5.3 Direct, personal contacts (e.g. events, fairs, public relations, mail, telephone)
3.5.4 The impact of technology to reach dispersed niche customers
Source: our elaboration
a)
carving out: as regards the identification of market niches, the results highlighted the need to perceive weak
signals to anticipate future trends. In fact, when a trend is already known or registered by statistics it is usually
too late to pursue a niche marketing strategy. For effective carving out, it is essential to identify unmet or only
partially satisfied arguments, themes, interests, values or passions which are relevant for a few people. The
absence of structured methods or data that support this process makes it a complex task to accomplish. Therefore,
129
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
firms should iteratively rely on creativity to intercept weak signals. As one interviewee noted: “Only through the
creativity you can do the difference on the market […] novelty is the first driver of a niche strategy”. The collected
information also reveals that “carving out” is simultaneously a demand-driven process (e.g., through the
identification of new values and interests expressed by individuals,) and a supply-driven process (e.g., the creation
and invention of innovative tourism products) which may be supported by technological tools: “Technology is an
instrument for niches scouting […] all the information in the web can be beneficially used for this purpose”. In the
process of carving out, the consistency between new opportunities and firm’s identity should be preserved. As one
interviewee reported “the firm must be responsive to tourism demand but simultaneously it must be careful of not
losing its identity”.
b) protecting: the competitive and economic sustainability of market niches is a challenging task for tourism
businesses. Some informants noted that niches are likely to evolve to mass markets over time (massification),
owing both to the growing popularity of some new trends and to competitors’ moves. To slow down imitation and
massification, firms tend to focus on developing strong relationships with the specialized players of the supply
chain, thus establishing entry barriers. In addition, it is essential to continuously and proactively assess the
relevance of the niche over time and to innovate the offering, by preserving a firm’s identity and positioning over
time. Moreover, protecting the economic viability of a niche, requires the ability to charge a price premium
corresponding to the extra value that the customer attaches to the offering’s specialty. Ultimately, the collected
information emphasizes the need for businesses to focus on customer loyalty to protect their niches. In fact, even
low levels of customer defection may be dangerous for niche businesses as their customer base is small. As
regards niche protection in the case of firms addressing both the mass market and niches, the findings highlight
the need of using a clearly separated marketing strategy (and brand) for the niches and the mass markets to avoid
the dilution of the niche brand and offering.
c) offering a valued product: to successfully serve tourism market niches the products should be conceived as
experiences, contents and travel themes. In fact, customers are not interested in the value of the product per se but
in the consistency of the product with their values, passions and interests as individuals. Moreover, product
specialty is a critical success factor for niche businesses. The analysis also underlines that the provision of niche
products is a kind of consultancy process which requires to establish one-to-one conversations and empathy
between the consultant and the customers. In fact, as reported by one interviewee: “a niche, before being a
business, is to be conceived as forma mentis […] sharing passion, culture and specialization”. Through this
empathy it is possible for the firm to understand the customer’s deep values, interests and expectations, thus
setting the premises for the co-creation of a carefully personalized tourism experience. Attention to details is a
condition for successfully offering a valued product to niche customers. On this point an interviewee noted: “the
tourist product must be developed with an obsession for details”. Niche customers are often well-informed and
increasingly high-competent, but they may select tourism products which are not consistent with their expectations
and needs. The intimacy between the consultant and the customer is then important because for example it makes
it possible for the consultant to discourage the customer from choosing specific products. This dialogue does not
end with the purchase of the tourism product but continues along the entire customer journey and it is facilitated
by the technological tools. As one interviewee highlighted “technology is an extraordinary diffusion platform
which, when properly used and linked to social networks, may convey and strengthen a brand’s identity and
specificities […] but above all the digital world is a fundamental partner to stimulate and establish contacts and
dialogue with the traveler, making the offering more transparent”.
Specific competences and resources emerged as pivotal for the co-creation of niche products. Above all,
participants consistently reported the key role of the human capital, in terms of consultants’ endowment of knowledge
and experience and of relational capabilities. As one interviewee emphasized “it is fundamental to personally visit
places and destinations, to directly analyze each single supplier’s tourism product”. Moreover, team work is extremely
important to share specialized themes, experiences and passions and to enrich the distinctive features of the travel
offerings. Information management was also repeatedly mentioned as highly relevant because consultants need to
recall and combine a huge amount of information to develop a specific tourism product for each customer.
Finally, distribution and communication must be consistent with the offering of a valued product. In particular,
when direct distribution is not feasible, niche businesses are ‘forced’ to distribute their products through selected
channels (such as traditional and online travel agencies). Selecting the right distributors and cooperating with them
represents a major issue for niche players. Above all, the analysis emphasizes the need that a distributor’s personnel
competences are well developed and consistent with the niche players offering. As regards communication of niche
tourism firms, the findings emphasize the need to combine the traditional word of mouth with the new digital and social
tools. In detail, through the digital world, touch points along the whole customer journey may be established to keep the
dialogue with the customer always on.
Research limits. While this work represents the first step of a developing research, and therefore an initial effort
to fill the knowledge gap about tourism businesses’ niche marketing, several limitations should be underlined. First, the
study aims to provide an overview of the contents and features of niche marketing from the tourism businesses’
perspective without focusing on the distinctive features of the hospitality, travel agency and tour operator sectors.
Exploring the specificities of niche marketing in each of these sectors (and focusing on each player) represents the next
step of this research project. In addition, each of the themes highlighted by the template analysis (such as, for example,
130
NICHE MARKETING: AN EXPLORATION FROM THE PERSPECTIVE OF TOURISM BUSINESSES
the resources and competences needed for the production of niche products) would deserve a further in-depth
examination. Finally, information was collected from players competing in the Italian market. While the findings may
be reasonably extended to other contexts, further details about niche marketing may be identified by considering other
countries with different levels of maturity of the tourism industry.
Practical implications. The results of this paper provide actionable insights to tourism firms interested to
pursuing a niche marketing strategy. In detail, the analysis highlights the marketing processes and capabilities required
to successfully carve out, serve and protect a market niche in tourism.
Originality of the study. While several studies have examined niche marketing from the perspectives of tourism
destination and demands, this work intends to address the relevant gap about niche marketing from the perspective of
tourism businesses. In detail, it contributes to advance knowledge on this issue, by providing an initial analysis of the
contents and the features of niche marketing for tourism businesses. These initial findings of a wider research project
may be also extended beyond the tourism industry to enrich available knowledge about the niche marketing strategy.
Key words: niche tourism; niche marketing; hospitality; travel agencies; tour operators; marketing
References
BRUNI A., CASSIA F., MAGNO F. (2017), “Marketing performance measurement in hotels, travel agencies and tour operators: a
study of current practices “, Current Issues in Tourism, vol. 20, n. 4, pp. 339-345.
BENUR A.M., BRAMWELL B. (2015), “Tourism product development and product diversification in destinations”, Tourism
Management, vol. 50, pp. 213-224.
DALGIC T., LEEUW M. (1994), “Niche marketing revisited: Concept, applications and some European cases”, European Journal of
Marketing, vol. 28, n. 4, pp. 39-55.
EISENHARDT K.M. (1989), “Building Theories from Case Study Research”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 14, n. 4, pp.
532-550.
FRANTÁL B., URBÁNKOVÁ R. (2017), “Energy tourism: An emerging field of study”, Current Issues in Tourism, vol. 20, n. 13,
pp. 1395-1412.
GRETZEL U., SIGALA M., XIANG Z., KOO C. (2015), “Smart tourism: foundations and developments”, Electronic Markets, vol.
25, n. 3, pp. 179-188.
HASSAN S.S. (2000), “Determinants of market competitiveness in an environmentally sustainable tourism industry”, Journal of
Travel Research, vol. 38, n. 3, pp. 239-245.
HSU C.H., KANG S.K., WOLFE K. (2002), “Psychographic and demographic profiles of niche market leisure travelers”, Journal of
Hospitality & Tourism Research, vol. 26, n. 1, pp. 3-22.
KEVILL A., TREHAN K., EASTERBY-SMITH M. (2017), “Perceiving ‘capability’within dynamic capabilities: The role of ownermanager self-efficacy”, International Small Business Journal, vol. 35, n. 8, pp. 883-902.
KING N. (2012), “Doing template analysis”, in Symon G., Cassell C. (eds.) Qualitative organizational research: core methods and
current challenges, Sage, London.
KING N., BROOKS J. (2017), Template analysis for business and management students, Sage, London.
LEW A. A. (2008), “Long tail tourism: New geographies for marketing niche tourism products”, Journal of Travel & Tourism
Marketing, vol. 25, n. 3-4, pp. 409-419.
MATTIACCI A. (2008), Nicchia e competitività. Strategie di focalizzazione per la competizione globale, Carocci, Roma.
MATTIACCI A., CECCOTTI F. (2008), “Nicchia e competitività: prospettive per il consumer marketing nella nuova
globalizzazione”, Micro & Macro Marketing, vol. XVII, n. 2, pp. 229-258.
MCCRACKEN G. (1988), The long interview, Sage, Newbury Park, CA.
MCKERCHER B. (2016), “Towards a taxonomy of tourism products”, Tourism Management, vol. 54, pp. 196-208.
MORGAN N.J., PRITCHARD A. (2006), “Promoting niche tourism destination brands: Case studies of New Zealand and Wales”,
Journal of Promotion Management, vol. 12, n. 1, pp. 17-33.
NOVELLI M., ROBINSON M. (2005). “Niche tourism: an introduction”, in Novelli M. (ed.) Niche Tourism. Contemporary issues,
trends and cases, Elsevier, Amsterdam.
PINE B.J., GILMORE J.H. (1999), The Experience Economy: Work Is Theater and Every Business a Stage, Harvard Business
School Press, Boston.
POWELL R., IANKOVA K. (2016), “Dark London: Dimensions and characteristics of dark tourism supply in the UK capital”,
Anatolia, vol. 27, n. 3, pp. 339-351.
RIHOVA I., BUHALIS D., MOITAL M., GOUTHRO M.B. (2015), “Conceptualising customer-to-customer value co-creation in
tourism”, International Journal of Tourism Research, vol. 17, n. 4, pp. 356-363.
SCHAEFERS T. (2014), “Standing out from the crowd: niche product choice as a form of conspicuous consumption”, European
Journal of Marketing, vol. 48, n. 9/10, pp. 1805-1827.
SHANI D., CHALASANI S. (1992), “Exploiting niches using relationship marketing”, Journal of Consumer Marketing, vol. 9, n. 3,
pp. 33-42.
SOLEIMANI S., BRUWER J., GROSS M.J., LEE R. (2018), “Astro-tourism conceptualisation as special-interest tourism (SIT)
field: a phenomonological approach”, Current Issues in Tourism, pp. 1-16.
TOFTEN K., HAMMERVOLL T. (2013), “Niche marketing research: status and challenges”, Marketing Intelligence & Planning,
vol. 31, n. 3, pp. 272-285.
131
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
WILHELM STANIS S.A., BARBIERI C. (2013), “Niche tourism attributes scale: a case of storm chasing”, Current Issues in
Tourism, vol. 16, n. 5, pp. 495-500.
WU C., HO G.T., LAM C.H., IP W., CHOY K.L., TSE Y.K. (2016), “An online niche-market tour identification system for the
travel and tourism industry”, Internet Research, vol. 26, n. 1, pp. 167-185.
132
From traditional customer segmentation to buyer personas:
new strategies to create customer value
GIORGIA SEPE* AUDUR HERMANNSDOTTIR BIRGIT HAGEN ANTONELLA CARCAGNÌ**
Objectives. The aim of this research paper is to shed light on the role of buyer personas in building customized
and highly reliable marketing strategies in the food industry. More specifically, the goal is to build and illustrate a
reliable and valid methodology to create buyer personas that allows to discuss and compare traditional consumer
segmentation techniques and related concepts such as brand personification and customer oriented postures. The paper
is part of a larger international research on consumer segmentation in the food sector, in particular fish products,
which involves five European countries. Illustrated with the Italian case, this paper presents first insights in order to
explore how a segmentation enriched with in-depth interviews and observation can help create a reliable process to
identify buyer personas. Thus, it starts from the role of consumer segmentation, and then it explores the available
definitions of buyer personas, seen as an archetype craft driven from both primary and secondary data collected on a
potential customer of a specific product or service. Accordingly, a buyer persona represents a composite picture of a
“real” person who buys or could buy a product or service and it includes her motivations, her behaviors, connections
with the product itself (Revella, 2011) and her environment. In a complex, uncertain and discontinuous competitive
environment (Teece, 2010), firms need to know exactly who their customers are and what they want, in order to design
and implement effective marketing strategies and to build a sustainable competitive advantage.
Market segmentation involves dividing a heterogeneous market into a number of smaller homogeneous markets
(Smith, 1956), in which consumers within each segment share similar characteristics (Han et al., 2014). Market
segmentation methods can be broadly divided into two main approaches: the a priori approach and the post-hoc
approach (Han et al., 2014). The first approach segments the market based on the prior knowledge or speculated
factors that are associated with consumers, services or products, whereas the second approach splits the market based
on the analysis of market data.
More in depth, segments can consider demographic and psychographics factors, attitudes and/or behaviors and
can be rigorously defined through quantitative analysis of data (Adlin and Pruit, 2010). After the segmentation process,
the group of consumers belonging to a specific segment can be described in a somewhat general way based on the
shared common characteristics of members. Nevertheless, the description can ben enriched by going deeper, creating
the so called “personas”, hence making the potential consumers more like a real person. A persona is the
representation of a segment of actual users, presented as a fictous, imaginary person (Adlin and Pruitt, 2010; An et al.,
2016, Blomquist and Arvola, 2002; Jansen et al., 2017), but the description of a persona is much richer and more
graphic than a description of a segment. Personas have been used for several years, for example in software
development and marketing, as a method for enhancing engagement, identification and reality (Grudin and Pruitt,
2002). Moreover, they have received much attention in Design Thinking and innovation, with the attempt to design and
offer customer-centric products and services. Indeed, in Design Thinking, buyer personas play a relevant role in
product design and creation phases, since companies ask designers to “create ideas that better meet customers’ needs
and desires” (Brown, 2008; p. 69). Indeed, one of the most important benefits deriving from building buyer personas is
the possibility to identify more than specific clusters and to design grounded marketing strategies that can lay not only
on demographic or behavioral factors, but also on specific needs of consumers. Using personas takes the focus to the
customer and increases the likelihood of being customer-centered (Adlin and Pruitt, 2010; Chisnell et al., 2006; Friess,
2015; Grudin and Pruitt, 2002), since they utilize the power of narrative and storytelling to enhance attention, memory
and organization of detailed user data.
The main reason why personas are often ignored is related to the perception of their credibility, since their
construction seems to be dissociated from methodological rigor and empirical data (Adlin and Pruitt, 2010).
Chapman and Milham (2006) argue that there are different opinions among researchers and software designers
regarding the method used to create personas, ranging from strong advocacy to skepticism.
*
**
Ph.D. Management - Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore - Milan
e-mail: giorgia.sepe@unicatt.it
Adjunct professor, University of Iceland
e-mail: audurhermannsdottir@hi.is
Assistant Professor, University of Pavia
e-mail: birgit.hagen@unipv.it
Post doc researcher, Bicocca University, Milan
e-mail: a.carcagni@campus.unimib.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
133
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.23
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
Literature on how to build personas is relatively young and methods used to create personas are evolving with
increased technology. Ana et al. (2016) show a method where it is possible to generate reasonably rich and continually
updated personas in real time, using online social media and other data by incorporating social media analytics. In a
similar way, Jansen et al. (2017) propose a method to identify meaningful user segments based on large scale, real
time, user data from major online social media platforms.
Personas are shared ideas around who the consumers are and in a way they are intended to “come to life” in the
minds of the people within the organization, also by putting a face on the consumer (Adlin and Pruitt, 2010). Indeed,
the persona is given a name, a face, gender, age, ethnicity, educational achievements, socioeconomic status,
occupations, families, friends, pets, clothes and possessions. They also have needs, life stories, goals and tasks (An et
al., 2016) and this is the reason why during the design process, the design team tries to satisfy the persona’s needs and
goals (Blomquist and Arvola, 2002).
To this regard, a recent stream of research has developed the “jobs-to-be-done” theory (Christensen et al., 2016),
according to which firms should focus on the job the customer wants to get done, and it involves more needs and
expectations. Indeed, as the authors confirm, when someone buys a product, she “hires” the product to help do a job
and if it works, the process happens again, whereas if it goes wrong, the product is “fired”.
Thus, despite the primary importance of creating customer-centric approaches still no empirical studies have
explored how to create reliable methods to build buyer personas that could help in defining and implementing effective
marketing strategies.
Methodology. The paper applies a mixed-method approach, through both a survey and in-depth interviews and
observation. First, a survey was built on previous literature on consumer behavior in general (Ailawadi et al., 2001;
Candel, 2001) and on studies on consumer behavior regarding in particular fish related products (EUMOFA, 2016;
European Commission, 2016; ISMEA, 2014; Pieniak et al., 2007). Although the original questionnaire of the
international research was built in English, a version of the survey was translated in Italian, considering possible bias
deriving from translation. Indeed, calibration and translation equivalence were established through iterative backtranslations procedures (Cavusgil and Das, 1997; Sekaran, 1983). Data were collected through an online survey
delivered during July 2017 adopting a stratified random sample along the following dimensions: age, gender,
geographic location and education (Lohr, 2010), which can help in producing a representative sample (Reynolds et al.,
2003). The survey was composed by Likert-points questions, where respondents were asked questions related to their
socio-demographics, motivations, consumption behavior etc.
A factor analysis was carried on to validate the survey, first using an explanatory factor analysis (EFA) and then
using a confirmatory factor analysis (CFA) to validate the factor structure provided by EFA. Latent class analysis was
employed to segment the market(s), yielding a 6-cluster solution in Italy. The segment profiles, in a subsequent step,
were matched and further enriched with qualitative data gathered through in-depth interviews of fish consumers in the
Italian country in order to develop multiple and multifaceted personae. The interview guide was prepared by all the five
international members of the research and to ensure common understanding of the aims and meaning of each question
to be asked during the interviewing process, the interviewers from each country participated in a workshop to discuss
and refine questions.
At the beginning of the interviews, respondents were informed of the procedure of the interview and they signed a
written consent form to allow the use of results. In the first stage, participants were asked questions about food in
general, meals, food shopping and cooking, their behavior and how they categorized foods depending also on their
specific needs. The second step included global perception and categorization, with regard to consumption, motives and
barriers, purchase, storage, awareness and image of fish, finalized by a sorting task. The aim of the sorting task was to
reveal how people differentiate between fish species, what species are similar/dissimilar etc. The third part included
exploration of several aspects of shopping and consumption behavior for each of the focus species.
Interviewees were recruited though agencies using a snowball technique and received an incentive. Criteria used
to enroll participants were based on socio-demographic and behavioral characteristics of subjects, which were age,
gender, frequency of consumption of fish (low, average, high), living location costal (within 30 minutes drive from
coast) or inland.
Preliminary findings. Empirical data allowed building a grounded process to create and elaborate reliable buyer
personas. Findings show what an ex post elaboration of personas is, based on empirical data collected through both
quantitative and qualitative methods.
The following picture shows the process we propose to build personae. In a first step, the segmentation represents
the basis on which to ground and from which to develop further personae through in-depth interviews as well as
observation.
134
FROM TRADITIONAL CUSTOMER SEGMENTATION TO BUYER PERSONAS: NEW STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
Fig. 1: The process to create a buyer persona
Source: own elaboration
For example, through quantitative analysis with Latent Class Analysis we identified country-specific consumer
segments. In Italy we identified seven distinct segments, namely a healthy & environmentally conscious segment, the
brand-convenience-taste oriented consumer, the group of self-efficacious cooking artists, a local connoisseur group,
people who look for convenience a good prices, a self-efficacious & pragmatic consumer and the segment of indifferent
consumers.
In order to illustrate the process, we discuss one of the segments, the local connoisseur, which represents the
biggest and a growing segment in Italy. This is the group of consumers who know everything about fish (because of
high values across self-efficacy items), who use its versatility and experiment with new formats or recipes. Here,
according to segmentation results, relatively young women (with small family) strongly emphasize the healthnutritional aspect and underline easy digestion. This group of consumers also favours local origin. They pay attention
to environment and sustainability issues and indicate the preference for a (local) brand or seller. Emphasizing value for
money, they do not trade off quality for price (but would instead go for a cheaper species or stock the fish in order to be
flexible). They prefer wild fish, are indifferent to bones, and are inclined to traditional preparation. Their consumption
is medium-high (mainly seabream, seabass, less cod and salmon in a wide range of formats) with an expenditure that is
the highest across all Italian segments. These consumers buy in the supermarket or at the fishmonger and do not
indicate any sources of information.
Now, in a second step, we assign interviewees to segments and deepen insight with in-depth interviews. Taking
again the segment of the local connaisseur, we derive the persona of Marta when matching segment profile and
interview insight. Marta, our interviewee, lives in Genova, with her husband and her son who works in Milan but comes
to visit them during weekends. She is in her fifties (she does not want the state her exact age), is very conscious of her
role and responsibility of housewife and mother, as she is not working. She is extremely proud of her husband and son
who both pursue or have pursued a career (her husband has retired). The family is “gourmet-type” but at the same time
pays attention to nutritional and health aspects, consuming only high-quality fish. Marta is perfectly capable of
evaluating the fish. High quality expectations however do not come with spending foolishly. Marta says that if the local
seabream is too expensive she goes for the fresh sardines instead but she would never substitute the wild seabream with
farmed seabream. She also snobs Salmon, a species she simply does not consider when selecting fish. Marta mentions
that she has special recipees for her families’ special occasions. She has her trusted fishmonger, who informs her about
new preparations, and she goes for dedicated shopping, a “duty” she enjoys. Marta, as a person, mirrors the attention
she gives to her family and to food. Her hair is perfectly done, she is dressed in a conservative, chic, all but flamboyant
style and her language is sophisticated. Marta is one example to illustrate one persona of the local connaisseur, while
Eugenio is another persona, a young man, living together with two other students and taking over the role of the cook,
not only to avoid the “horrible food” his companions would produce but to fully enjoy and control it. He is a
connaisseur with lower resources, different consumption occasions, stories and much less attention to detail but also he
reflects the overall profile of our segment and represents a second, distinctive persona.
Overall, the iterative process of refining from segments through the help of qualitative interviews by focusing on
the jobs-to-be-done as relevant factors to create personas, allowed creating a model of buyer persona for this first part
of the research.
Research limits. Our research is work in progress and as such needs further refinement and a crosscheck of
Italian results within Italy (e.g. with other segmentation approaches) and with other countries involved in the research
project.
Practical implications. Overall, the paper proposes a methodology grounded in marketing science to develop
personae, which are highly valuable if translated into marketing strategy, specifically in terms of identifying and
creating new and more market niches, and in developing customer-centric responses and marketing programs.
Originality of the study. This is the first empirical study that aims to build a reliable method to create buyer
personas from segmentation and illustrates it with concrete consumer data.
Key words: customer value; segmentation; buyer personas; marketing strategies
135
TRACK - MARKETING STRATEGIES TO CREATE CUSTOMER VALUE
References
ADLIN T., PRUITT J. (2010). The essential persona lifecycle: Your guide to building and using personas, San Mateo, Morgan
Kaufmann
AILAWADI K.L., NESLIN S.A., GEDENK K. (2001), “Pursuing the value-conscious consumer: store brands versus national brand
promotions”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 65, n. 1, pp. 71-89.
AN J., KWAK H., JANSEN B.J. (2016), “Automatic generation of personas using YouTube social media data”, IEEE 4th
International Conference on Future Internet of Things and Cloud Workshops (FiCloudW) (pp. 206-211),
BLOMQUIST Å., ARVOLA M. (2002), “Personas in Action: Ethnography in an interaction design team”, in Bertelsen O.W. (ed.),
Proceedings of the second Nordic conference on Human-computer interaction (pp. 197-200), New York, ACM.
BROWN T. (2008), “Definitions of design thinking”, Design Thinking: Thoughts by Tim Brown, vol. 7
CAVUSGIL S.T., DAS A. (1997), “Methodological Issues in Empirical Cross-Cultural Research: A Survey of the Management
Literature and a Framework”, MIR: Management International Review, Springer.
CHAPMAN C.N., MILHAM R.P. (2006), “The personas new clothes: Methodological and practical arguments against a popular
method”, Proceedings of the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society 50th annual meeting (p. 634-636), San Francisco:
HFES
CHISNELL D.E., REDISH J.C., LEE A. (2006), “Understanding older adults as web users”, Technical Communication, vol. 53, n. 1,
pp. 39-59.
CHRISTENSEN C.M., HALL T., DILLON K., DUNCAN D.S. (2016), “Know your customers'" jobs to be done”, Harvard Business
Review, vol. 94, n. 9, p. 14.
EUMOFA. (2016). The EU Fish Market.
EUMOFA. (2017), EU Consumer Habits Regarding Fishery and Aquaculture Products.
EUROPEAN COMMISSION. (2016), Special Eurobarometer 450: EU Consumer Habits Regarding Fishery and Aquaculture
Products.
FRIESS E. (2012), “Personas and decision making in the design process: An ethnographic case study”, in Konstan J.A. (ed.),
Proceedings of the 2012 ACM Annual Conference on Human Factors in Computing Systems (p. 1209-1218), Austin: ACM.
GRUDIN J., PRUITT J. (2002), “Personas, participatory design and product development: An infrastructure for engagement”, in
Binder T., Gregory J., Wagner I. (eds.), Proceedings of the participatory design conference (p. 144-152), Malmö: PDC.
HAN S., YE Y., FU X., CHEN Z. (2014), “Category role aided market segmentation approach to convenience store chain category
management”, Decision Support Systems, 57, 296-308. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.dss.2013.09.017
ISMEA (2014), Il Comportamento Dei Consumatori Infrequenti Di Pesce.
JANSEN B.J., JUNG S.G., SALMINEN J., AN J., KWAK H. (2017), “Viewed by too many or viewed too little: Using information
dissemination for audience segmentation”, Proceedings of the Association for Information Science and Technology, vol. 54,
n. 1, pp. 189-196.
PIENIAK Z., VERBEKE W., SCHOLDERER J., BRUNSØ K., OLSEN S.O. (2007), “European consumers’ use of and trust in
information sources about fish”, Food Quality and Preference, vol. 18 n. 8, pp. 1050-1063.
REVELLA A. (2011), The Buyer Persona Manifesto, edited by Harris, J.R.
SEKARAN U. (1983), Methodological and theoretical issues and advancements in cross-cultural research. Journal of International
Business Studies, vol. 14, n. 2, pp. 61-73.
SMITH W.R. (1956), “Product differentiation and market segmentation as alternative marketing strategies”, Journal of Marketing,
vol. 21, n. 1, pp. 3-8.
TEECE D.J. (2010), “Business models, business strategy and innovation”, Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2-3, pp. 172-194.
136
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES
FOR A BETTER WORLD
Resources slack for social entrepreneurship: the genesis of social and strategic growth options
BEATRICE ORLANDO, ANTONIO RENZI, GIANLUCA VAGNANI, CRAIG WATTERS
CSR and organizational culture: the competitive advantage of organizations
MARCELA LEPORE
CSR strategy in the Internet era
PAOLO POPOLI
Enhancing entrepreneurship for social change in the Euro-Mediterranean Region:
Evidence from the UNIDO e4SC program
MICHAEL SHERIFF, MORENO MUFFATTO
Ethics perceived in IMIs socially responsible investments (SRIs):
some findings and perspectives on UK and Italian Asset Management companies
MAURO SCIARELLI, MARIO TANI, CATELLO GIOVANNI LANDI, LORENZO TURRIZIANI
Resources Slack for Social Entrepreneurship:
The Genesis of Social and Strategic Growth Options
BEATRICE ORLANDO* ANTONIO RENZI GIANLUCA VAGNANI CRAIG WATTERS**
Abstract
Objectives. This conceptual paper contributes to tackle some main research gaps in social entrepreneurship studies. Precisely,
from the literature analysis it emerges that: i) prior scholars provides vague definitions of the concept of social entrepreneurship, so
that it is hard to clearly categorize one new venture as an initiative with a specific social purpose, ii) mostly, scholars relegates
social entrepreneurship to the area of non-profit initiatives, but this conceptualization contrasts with the observation of the real
world, iii) there are almost none previous attempts to investigating the formation of growth options in the field of the social
entrepreneurship. Current work tries to fulfill such gaps by interpreting social entrepreneurship as a business model innovation, by
focusing on for-profit new ventures, and by explaining the mechanism of the formation of growth options in light of resources slack.
Methodology. We define a conceptual model for social ventures growth by extensively reviewing antecedent literature.
Findings. The main outcome of the literature analysis is the identification of the construct of social entrepreneurship.
Research limits. The conceptual model needs to be tested empirically by future scholars.
Practical implications. According to the model, a new initiative can be defined as social if it embeds and determines social
growth options. This cut-off definition improves, in practice, the recognition of the social nature of an entrepreneurial initiative.
Originality of the study. This study largely extends the knowledge in the field by providing a cut-off definition of social
entrepreneurship and by originally introducing the category of social growth options.
Key words: social entrepreneurship; business model; resources slack; strategic growth option; real options; social growth option.
*
**
Professor on term of Strategies for Business Growth - Sapienza University of Rome
e-mail: beatrice.orlando@uniroma1.it
Associate Professor of Management - Sapienza University of Rome
e-mail: antonio.renzi@uniroma1.it
Full Professor of Management - Sapienza University of Rome
e-mail: gianluca.vagnani@uniroma1.it
Associate Professor; Norman C. Stevenson Chair in School of Entrepreneurship; International Entrepreneurship Chair School of
Entrepreneurship - Executive Director, Riata Center for Entrepreneurship at Oklahoma State University
e-mail: craig.watters@okstate.edu
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
139
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.24
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
1. Introduction
The social entrepreneurship concept springs from the combination of two different, and apparently antithetical,
purposes: the social and the business-like goals. Often, the social mission is misguiding, in the sense that one could be
led to believe that all social ventures are non-profit (Austin et al., 2003). Actually, they are not: thus, a social venture
can be for-profit as well (Waddock 1988; Sagawa and Segal 2000). Recalling antecedent entrepreneurship theories, the
idea of a social mission in entrepreneurship is rather old, despite its young age as topic of study. Back to origins and
later developments, it is possible to select three main milestones amid the cornucopia of perspectives on the
entrepreneur and entrepreneurship, the Say’s (1836) and Schumpeter’s (1939; 1942) approaches, the thoughts of
Drucker (1985), and the other advancements proposed by Stevenson (1983). For Say (1836), the entrepreneur is a
venturesome person who moves resources across different business areas with the purpose of achieving a greater
reward. Schumpeter (1939, 1942) introduces a rather modern and break-through theory: an entrepreneur is an
individual who triggers a continuous gale of creative disruption, for what, for each and every intensive innovation that
comes to the world, a new business is created in face of the discontinuance of an old one. This enlightened thinking is
the reason why we call an innovation disruptive, when old ways of doing something cease to exist. The combination of
the Say and Schumpeter theories have determined the traditional school of thoughts in innovation and
entrepreneurship. After them, an endless mass of scholars followed these footprints. Some, as instance Drucker (1985),
put the focus on the entrepreneur as an opportunity-seeker. Likewise brilliantly, Stevenson (1983) make an important
statement: an individual is said to be a real entrepreneur only if he overcomes the burden of the resources constraint.
More specifically, the entrepreneur does not need to control the resources for the growth by the start, he takes them
externally. What is new in the genus of the social entrepreneurship is that the entrepreneur goes even beyond this list of
characteristics. He has a peculiar social mission witch guides his choices and patterns of value-creation, in a way that
the metric for the wealth creation has, as its parameter, the social value accrued. That sounds astonishingly new, a
concept rather cagey to relate to, because measures for the social value are blurred and they are far from traditional
business metrics. Not to mention that this species of entrepreneurs are the exception, indeed.
The Drucker’s (1985) and Stevenson’s (1983) approaches are ideally the antecedents of current work. By crossing
the two dimensions, the opportunity and resourcefulness, we seek to understand and we novel the literature on for-profit
social entrepreneurship with the introduction of an interpretation in terms of resources slack and strategic growth
options. Searching in depth and breadth, we have found that apparently these topics were never studied jointly before.
Our analysis of prior contributions further led to the identification of the following series of gaps: i) there is no
cut-off definition for social entrepreneurship, ii) academia does not agree on the non-profit or for-profit nature of
social initiatives, so that it is hard to label all those for-profit ventures that seek a social purpose iii) scholars do not
explain how one business can pursue a specific social benefit, which generally implies a sort charity, by leveraging the
economic value creation on the social mission itself, iiii) prior studies do not clearly distinguish social business from
social entrepreneurship, iiiii) literature also fails to explain why social entrepreneurship is different from any other
kind of entrepreneurship, since we can assume that each and every entrepreneurial initiative has some positive social
effects, more or less directly. Current conceptual study aims to tackle the identified gaps.
We provide a theoretical development through explaining how social growth options origin. In doing so, we
anchor our model to the theoretical underpinnings of path dependency, and, more generally, to a Penrosian view.
We hypothesize that social ventures peculiarly develop over time when they have the capability to exploit social
growth options. On the practical side, current contribution provides an easy-to-use heuristic for making a social
venture rewarding and long lasting.
Also, we propose the idea that social entrepreneurship is inherently a business model innovation. Thereby, the
“who”, the “what”, and the “how” of social entrepreneurship are, respectively, the social target segment, the prior
unmet social demand, and the requalification of a resources slack’s intrinsic meaning as a means for exploiting a social
growth option.
The very kick-start of current research is the consideration of how social venture can stay competitive and survive
over-time, given the unusual prospect and the landscape of hard-to-retrieve resources. Precisely, our explicative and
original view is based on the idea that the social entrepreneur exploits external resources slack, by converting their
initial business purpose into something that generates social value. This way he innovates by using existing resources in
a novel mode, he nurtures the intrinsic value of slack resources moving them cross business areas, he grasps a peculiar
opportunity related to social-wealth, but also, most importantly, he exploits a strategic growth option which has a
social value as well. The remainder of the work is structured as follows. After retracing the literature antecedents
carefully, we advance the theory by proposing a new conceptual model. In doing so, we clarify the meaning of social
entrepreneurship at first stance, via defining the target under investigation. Originality of the work and future
roadmaps for research are further discussed. Final sections are left for either managerial or practical implications and
for authors’ conclusions.
2.
Research gaps and aims of the work
Frolicking in the research domain of social entrepreneurship, the first thing one notices is that there are plenty of
research questions still open. Probably, this is caused by the relative newness of the field of study. It has been observed
140
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
that studies on social entrepreneurship grapple with a void of normative theories. Another important factor which has
not been addressed once and for all in academia is whether the business and social aspects coexist or not in social
entrepreneurship (Halberstadt and Kraus 2016). Furthermore, it is extremely surprising that is not possible to retrieve
any information by cross-searching for the words “social entrepreneurship” and “business model innovation” on both
EbscoHost and Google scholar. Additionally, to the extent of the authors’ knowledge, the joint study of social
entrepreneurship, resources slack and strategic growth options is unprecedented.
In general, it is possible to observe somewhat a confusion in the definition of social entrepreneurship. Most
authors offers a tautological description, for what a business initiative it is said to be social when it has a social
mission. The fuzziness of this conception has mostly led to the flourishing of inconclusive standpoints. As instance, a
large part of scholars consider as “social” only those non-profit initiatives. Nonetheless, there are many for-profit
firms that are actually social ventures. So, how is it possible to label them if we only accept that non-profit can be
social? Another issue is the constant overlapping between the two categories of social entrepreneurship and social
business. This blurred conceptualization of social entrepreneurship inevitably causes to consider this field of study as
the minor one. As a matter of fact, one might object that any entrepreneurial initiative has different and positive social
impacts. From this cue it descends that prior scholars missed to explain what is special in the economic value creation
process of social entrepreneurship.
First and foremost, this study aims to tackle these gaps. We define the concept of social entrepreneurship by
excluding the overlapping with social business, by specifically providing a more inclusive definition which allow to
label for-profit initiative as social, and by proposing a model which explain the distinctive trait of value-creation
dynamics in social entrepreneurship.
Specifically, current work proposes a normative theory on the genesis and development of a social business
venture.
Consistently, we define the following research questions:
a. Is social entrepreneurship a business model innovation?
b. Do the business and the social sides undo into each other to form a new zeitgeist?
c. How do opportunities surge and are caught in social entrepreneurship?
d. How does resources slack is deployed in social ventures?
e. How do strategic growth options are informed in this peculiar bundle of activities?
Precisely, we propose a normative approach to dual wealth creation in social business ventures to the end of
solving such a complex riddle. Non-profit activities rely outside the scope of our investigation. Hence, we pay attention
solely to those for-profit initiatives, as instance as: ecotourism, microfinance, working training programs. These
ventures adopt a business strategy to satisfy a prior unmet social demand. We solve the issue of tautological and
monologue-centered descriptions of such business types by explaining how the social entrepreneur pursues and exploits
opportunities. In doing so, we relate to the concept of resources slack. Our counter-intuitive insight is that social
growth options in social ventures are an hybrid form between two different spheres: the social and the economic one.
Another advancement we propose is the change of temporal perspective in opportunity search.
The research fashion in the field typically entails a retrospective approach (Benaroch, 2001; Orlando, 2013). We
turn upside-down this accustomed logic by adding a prospective sense to entrepreneurial recognition of shadow
options.
3.
Literature review
3.1 The meaning of social entrepreneurship
According to Dees (1998), a social entrepreneur is an individual who plays “the role of change agents in the
social sector” (Dees 1998, p. 4). Literature mostly describes this figure in heroic terms. It has been said that the social
entrepreneur is a passionate individual who combines capabilities to start up a new business with a willingness to
pursue a social benefit. For Mair and Marti (2006). social entrepreneurship is an innovative process which aims to
catalyze social change and address social needs. In general, most authors consider social entrepreneurship as the start
up of something innovative which scope is to correct market failures and solve a social problem (Alvord, Brown and
Letts 2004, Mort, Weerawardena and Carnegie 2002). Mair and Marti (2006) also states that in non-social businesses
the positive social effect is just a by-product of the economic value created, whilst in social entrepreneurship the focus
is on social value creation. In their literature review, Peredo and McLean (2006) explain why social entrepreneurship
is “social” and is “entrepreneurship”, whether the venture is for-profit or not. The two authors reach conclusions
similar to aforementioned works.
Besides, most previous authors consider the for-profit or non-profit nature as a matter of business model and,
implicitly, the also posit the basis to describe social entrepreneurship as the business model innovation (Mair and Marti
2006, Peredo and McLean 2006).
In this study, we define social entrepreneurship as a process concerning new for-profit business initiatives, which
simultaneously seeks both the economic and the social value creation. It is “entrepreneurship” because it refers to the
start-up of a new venture. So that, a social business which is not in its early stage cannot be accounted in the study of
social entrepreneurship. The entrepreneur imagines a new opportunity, combining profit with the pursuit of a social
141
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
goal. The label “social” depends on the fact that the economic wealth creation is leveraged by the social value
creation. More precisely, we assume that the strategic growth strictly depends on the capability of the firm to exploit
social growth options. In this conception, the for-profit nature is quite the essential trait, because we assume that the
two kinds of options are mutually dependent. So that, there is no social wealth creation without economic value
creation, and vice-versa. The social mission and firm’s effectiveness in reaching its social milestones are not just the
by-product of the business, but they are its very and purest core from the birth of the business idea. These peculiar traits
allow to distinguish social entrepreneurship from traditional business entrepreneurship.
3.2 Social entrepreneurship and the business model
Today, the cost of innovation has tremendously increased, whilst, in parallel, the life cycle of the product is shrunk
(Chesbrough, 2007). For these reasons, for a firm it is important to innovate its business model consistently. A business
model is what tells us how the firm creates and captures the value. According to Chesbrough, (2007) a business model
has six functions: it clears the value proposition, it identifies the market, it describes the value chain, it specifies the
cost-revenue-profit dynamics, it draws the value-network or ecosystem of the firm, it expresses how the firm competes
with rivals. The business model can be undifferentiated, differentiated, segmented, externally-oriented, innovationintegrated, or adaptive-platform based (Chesbrough, 2007). These forms are sorted by increasing openness and
strategic flexibility: the more the openness and adaptability, the greater the risk, but also the greater the business model
profitability. Additionally, open business models are hard to imitate. Besides, innovating a business model is quite the
tough work: it takes time and experimenting, plus, the quantum of required change often bumps into organizational
inertia. For these reasons, it is acknowledged that way too often the firms’ favorites are those business models which
are long established. Puranam and Vanneste (2016) refer to business models as those choices about the who, what, and
how of the firm.
An extensive part of the literature on business model is oriented exclusively toward for-profit businesses and it is
technology-related. As instance, for Chesbrough and Rosenbloom (2002), a business model is a heuristic to unlock the
technology potential and to create economic value. Similarly, other scholars came to surmise that the concept of
business model became popular with the mass-diffusion of digital technologies (Zott et al., 2011). Ulterior important
academic issues are - but they are not limited to - the business model innovation - types and barriers - (Chesbrough
2010; Amit and Zott, 2012), the design of the business model as a sort of funnel for beautifully wrapping good
technologies and succeed (Johnson et al., 2008), the determinants of business model disruption (Doz and Kosonen,
2010).
Some confusion on the definition of what a business model actually is emerges from the panorama of studies
(Morris et al., 2005; Zott et al., 2011): it has been seen as a statement (Stewart and Zhao, 2000) or a description
(Applegate 2001), a design (Mayo and Brown, 1999) or a representation (Morris et al., 2005), an architecture
(Timmers, 1998) or a structural template (Zott and Amit, 2008), a pattern (Brousseau and Penard, 2006), a method
(George and Bock, 2009), and many other references. Later scholars have placed themselves in one or the other
stream, echoing precursors. The result is the theoretical underpinnings are of no help when it comes to label clearly the
nature of this concept.
By the way, whatever it is, there are no doubts that business model causes the success or the failure of a venture.
This is the main reason why the topic shifted to the forefront of strategic studies. Apparently, a business model is the
core locus of value creation and value capturing and is the ultimate reason why a firm could either outreach rivals or
fail miserably.
Consistently, Zott and Amit (2008; p. 3) describe “firm’s business model as a new contingency factor that
captures the structure of firm’s boundary-spanning exchanges” and impacts firm performance (Zott and Amit, 2007).
The spawn of business model and its over-time dynamic are definitely linked to strategic agility (Doz and Kosonen,
2010) or, more in general, strategic flexibility. The strategic agility occurs when there are attention and awareness of
strategic developments, decision are made fast and timely, and there is an appropriate resource fluidity, which is the
attitude “to reconfigure capabilities and redeploy resources rapidly”. (Doz and Kosonen, 2010; p. 371). All these lead
to the thinking that managers can innovate the business model on purpose (Mitchell and Coles, 2003). However, it
seems that academia became fascinated by the concept of business model innovation only relatively recently.
Additionally, the number of contributions in the field is extremely exiguous when compared to the massive number of
articles on business model (Foss and Saebi, 2017). So, for now, this topic remains on the verge, a territory with copious
roads that are ought to be explored eventually. Markides (2006; p. 20) argues that a business model innovation is “the
discovery of a fundamentally different business model in an existing business”. Others suggest that “business-model
innovation occurs when a firm adopts a novel approach to commercializing its underlying assets”. (Gambardella and
McGahan, 2010; p. 263).
A business model innovation generally emerges from the re-design or reconfiguration of an existing business
model (Massa and Tucci, 2013) and it is aimed to undermining the position of competitors drastically, in a way they
cannot respond in any effective manner (Mitchell and Coles, 2003). This study undertakes the idea that social
entrepreneurship is a business model innovation, because, by nature, it inherently “involves innovative approaches to
address issues in the domains of education, environment, fair trade, health and human rights and is widely regarded as
an important building block of the sustainable development of countries”. (Mair and Noboa, 2006; p. 121). Despite it is
an exceptional form of business, the topic of social entrepreneurship was coming to the surge of academic interest
142
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
increasingly in the last twenty years. The label social entrepreneurship was forged by some ‘90ies scholars (Henton et
al., 1997; Leadbeater, 1997; Zadek and Thake 1997; Dees 1998).
At the time of the writing, by performing a quick Google Scholar search, it is possible to verify that there are more
than 68.000 contributions, which are strictly focused on or, at least, contains the words “social entrepreneurship”.
Mair and Noboa (2006) prompt that social entrepreneurs discover and exploit a peculiar category of opportunities:
thus, they are a catalyst for social transformation (Alvord et al., 2004). Whilst social entrepreneur does not differ that
much from common traits, characteristics, and behaviors of traditional entrepreneurs, he/she distances himself/herself
by far in terms of context, because he/she extremely values the moral judgment of the community (Mair and Noboa,
2006). Also, a social entrepreneur needs social support for the success of the initiative: this social support is expressed
in terms of trust and collaboration (Backman and Smith, 2000); plus, it enables the firm to exploit its social purpose.
As it happens quite frequently in strategic studies, there is few agreement on the meaning of social
entrepreneurship. Cho (2006) finds a void of normative content in this fields of research, asserting that most definitions
given by prior scholars were tautological and monological.
Some studies see this kind of initiatives as a means for fixing social problems by providing innovative social
solutions (Alvord et al., 2004). Others describe them as a multi-dimensional construct, a mix of virtuous behaviors,
moral complexity, and proactiveness aimed to achieve social goals (Mort et al., 2002). An acute consideration on the
meaning of social entrepreneurship was made by Mair and Marti (2006): beyond the social mission and the intent to
alter social structure positively, social entrepreneur seeks personal fulfillment as well as profits, like any other
entrepreneur. So, a large amount of scholarly attention is also received by the personality of social entrepreneur
(Drayton, 2002). Centrally for this work, Dees (1998) pays attention to the continuous innovation process triggered by
social entrepreneur. As the consequence, he/she does not feel bounded by the resources he/she already has in hands, on
the contrary, he/she envisages the prospect spectrum of growth and social options. Consistently, Hockerts (2006) labels
social entrepreneurship as “social purpose business ventures”. This category includes for-profit businesses, which exist
to fulfill a purpose that is social-value-accretive. The same author distinguishes three types of opportunity that can be
exploited by the social entrepreneur: activism, self-help, philanthropy. Many scholars embrace a perspective which is
similar in its substance (Waddock and Post, 1991; Henton et al., 1997; Dorado and Haettich, 2004; Larson, 2000).
Coherently, current work focuses on this specific genus of firms. In a nutshell, this research domain sees social
ventures as innovators (Perrini and Vurro, 2006; Choi and Majumdar, 2014), which overcome the burden of lack of
resources by retrieving them externally (MacLeod, 1997) and achieve the goal of realizing a social interest through
collaboration and networking (Perrini and Vurro, 2006). All of these activities are grounded on a very solid orientation
toward the financial reward (MacLeod, 1997). Very little has been written on business model and business model
innovation in social entrepreneurship. For example, Halberstadt and Kraus (2016) hypothesize that the younger a
business model, the more social-oriented it is. They think of the social entrepreneurship as a business model innovation.
Thereby, they propose a metric, the socialness, which measures to “what degree the idea was generated to solve social
problems” (Halberstadt and Kraus, 2016; p. 268). Other studies more or less implicitly entails an akin conception
(Novy-Hildesley, 2006; Sanchez-Ruiz and Watters, 2016; Sabatier et al., 2017; Mongelli et al., 2017).
By deduction from the publication year of contributions, we elicit the information that social entrepreneurship as
business model innovation is an absolutely recent conception. Apart from the single mentioned work, which explicitly
recognizes the role of social entrepreneurship as business model innovation, this field of research looms as the
completely virgin domain.
3.3 Resources slack, opportunities and strategic growth options
Organizational slack is a powerful concept that never stopped showing its practical and managerial validity from
the introduction so far. As in the slang we are used to say “give me some slack” to beg for some freedom and truce, so
in the managerial accounting organizational slack, also labeled resources slack, is a means for easing some investment
decisions. For being understood, resources slack must be studied tracing back to Cyert and March (1963), who
described it as a “disparity between the resources available to the organization and the payments required to maintain
the coalition” (Cyert and March, 1963; p. 36). Prior scholars have provided meticulous and variegated classifications
of slack. Despite this, there are some recurrences and commonalities in the midst of works. Mostly, slack is categorized
according to nature and recoverability of resources (Daniel et al., 2004; George, 2005; Bourgeois and Singh, 1983;
Sharfman, 1988; Smith et al., 1991; Wiseman and Bromiley, 1996; Mone et al., 1998). As for that, slack could be
absorbed, unabsorbed, and potential (Mishina et al., 2004).
Behavioral theory of the firm is one of the main conceptual building block for slack studies: slack leaves managers
some room for re-tuning the strategy and make it stay sounding over the context. Consistently, some authors qualify
these resources’ disposition as discretionary (Bourgeois, 1981; Bourgeois and Singh, 1983; Sharfman et al., 1988).
This space for maneuver kicks in as a positive disparity between the resources the firm has in hands and its needs: so,
by nature, a slack is a form of excess (Moses, 1992; Nohria and Gulati, 1997). The same quality can be useful or
useless. For this duality of meanings, there are no scant preaches on the counter-side of slack, which arises in terms of
inefficiency and maladaptive behaviors (Child, 1972). Precisely, this last school of thoughts dates back to Leibenstein
(1969) and to the broad field of research investigating resources slack in light of agency theory (Cyert and March,
1963; Jensen, 1986; Cheng and Kesner, 1997; Shahzad et al., 2016).
Another prominent stream of studies analyzes the relationship between slack and innovation (Nohria and Gulati,
143
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
1997). Nohria and Gulati (1997) suggest that innovation and organizational slack have an inverted u-shaped
relationship: only a small quantity of the slack is deployed to foster innovation, the remaining part is used to forage
other stakeholders’ interests. Recent works also underscore the hidden facets and complexity of the constructs. Using a
configurational approach, Marlin and Geiger (2015) find combinations of unabsorbed and potential slack impact
innovation positively. In a similar configurational fashion Renzi, Sancetta and Orlando (2017) argues that the
endowment of slack influences the structural capability of a firm when it comes to face a change. More precisely, R&D
expenses are leveraged by unabsorbed and potential slack directly; whereas, absorbed slack spreads its positive effect
only indirectly and in the long-run, as a sort of positive idiosyncracy (Orlando et al., 2017). Similar results are also
proposed by Suzuki (2018). As matter of fact, slack has a positive impact on performance in case of firm ambidexterity
(Luo et al., 2017).
At large, researches in the stream typically wonder if slack is a god or bad (Nohria and Gulati, 1996; Geigen and
Cashen, 2002) for firm performance. Whether we consider slack in an undifferentiated manner or not, results are yet
controversial (Vanacker et al., 2017). Tan (2003) proposes a curvilinear interpretation of the relationship between
slack and performance. Some recent findings seem to support this idea: unabsorbed and potential slack are good for
wealth creation, whilst absorbed slack has mostly a negative influence (Orlando et al., 2016). Thus far, The quest for
unveiling hidden functions of slack was alive and sounding. One aspect of extreme interest concerns how the slack
interplays with opportunity discovery, seeking and exploitation (Moses, 1992; Nohria and Gulati, 1996; Tan 2003; Ju
and Zaho, 2009; Peng et al., 2010). In general, slack is deemed as a means for catching opportunities, especially when
they emerge all of a sudden. As far as the level of slack rises, managers are more free to experiment and search for
novel external opportunities (Bourgeois and Singh, 1983). Also, Cheng and Kesner (1997) find that the presence of
slack increases firm’s effectiveness of seeking market opportunities. It has been said that organizational past
experience, strategic type and availability of slack resources influence organizational action directly (Lant and Mezias,
1992; Greve, 1998; Chattopadhyay et al., 2001). One line of argument in support of such insight is that slack eases the
managerial negative feeling of both loss of control and risk over threats and opportunities (Staw et al., 1981; Jackson
and Dutton, 1988; Ocasio, 1997). A far more dating back perspective undertakes a broader approach, suggesting that
this asset provides an opportunity to experiment with the new and the newness (Thompson, 1965; Rosner, 1968), thus
leading managers to more risk-taking behaviors (Moses, 1992). Said differently, we can argue that slack reserves
provide a sort of beyond-capability of overcoming poor outcomes with the flexibility of reinvesting in alternative
strategies, as instance as in inorganic growth (Alessandri et al., 2014; Lungeanu et al., 2016; Kuusela et al., 2017). On
the other hand, when a firm is plastered by absorbed slack, that definitely reduces its openness toward the external
context (Wang et al., 2017). Out of the choir, some authors argue that there is no evidence of firm’s philanthropy
interlacing with resources slack. In any case, academia assertively argues slack impacts the pursuing of opportunities
in a way or another. Opportunity is a core concern in entrepreneurial studies (Eckhardt and Shane, 2003; Klein, 2008).
The scholars arena considers the role of opportunity in wealth creation as of the utmost importance (Companys
and McMullen, 2007). Someone argues that opportunities pre-exist and it takes to the entrepreneur to discover them. As
instance, Shane and Venkataraman (2000) portray entrepreneurial opportunities as the discovery of a new relationship
means-ends, thanks to firm’s alertness (Kirzner, 1997). Others hint at the possibility that opportunities can be created
on purpose (Alvarez and Barney, 2007). Both fads of study are sizeable beyond describable. For a detailed literature
analysis and categorization see the works of Alvarez and Barney (2007) and Companys and McMullen (2007). Shane
(2000) states entrepreneurs discover opportunities related to the information that they already possess. So, if that is the
role of the entrepreneur, to what extent we can really call him/her an innovator? Apparently, neither the one nor the
other streams hold the truth. On the contrary, they both have gross shortcomings. Precisely, they both lack cohesion
with historical evidence. Experience teaches us that the knowledge of human being is not limited by the past, but it is
build upon it, in a sedimentary manner. On the other hand, our role is not limited to discovery something that already
exists at world. Perhaps, as Klein (2008) believes, the key to solve this riddle resides in entrepreneurial action:
opportunities are subjectively imagined. Embracing Klein (2008) logic, we believe that the role of entrepreneur is to
imagine something new by starting from existing resources. Resources slack forms a natural repository of options (Fox
and Marcus 1992). Bowman and Hurry (1993) explain that strategy emerges from resources, as a behavioral process of
incremental resource investment (Dixit, 1992) and as a bundle of options which generate strategic choices (Myers,
1997). An option “confers preferential access to opportunity for investment choice” (Bowman and Hurry, 1993; p.
762). According to the authors (Bowman and Hurry, 1993), entrepreneur role is to recognize opportunities and exploit
them, exercising a retrospective sense making (Hurry et al., 1992). They relate this process to the existence of shadow
options. Shadow options are options awaiting to come into existence after being recognized (Bowman and Hurry,1993).
Also, McGrath (1996) describes them as a problem which is perceived by entrepreneur and that can be solved at profit.
Differently, Gunasti (2008) interprets this construct as a sort of third choice, arising from a missing attribute
information and determined by the compromising effect. At large, they are deemed to be potential flexibility options
(Bowman and Hurry 1993; Orlando, 2013; Trigeorgis and Reuer, 2017). Orlando (2013) suggests that shadow options,
which are hidden in resources slack, are the antecedent of strategic growth options.
A sizeable body of works is concerned with determinants and effects of strategic growth options (Trigeorgis, 1995;
Kulatilaka and Perrotti, 1998; Lin and Kulatilaka, 2007; Tong and Reuer, 2006; Tong et al., 2008). A strategic growth
option is the value of an initial investment, which is paid to acquire the right to exploit future growth opportunities
(Kulatilaka and Perrotti, 1998). The peculiarity of this kind of option is they have a greater convexity than normal of ex
post profits (Kulatilaka and Perrotti, 1998). For that reason they contribute the most to firm’s value (Kester, 1984).
144
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
4.
A normative framework for social business ventures
4.1 A model for resources slack and strategic growth option in social business ventures: the rising of social growth
options
To find a perspective for investigating social entrepreneurship is somewhat “like listening to a lip that’s shut”
(Pavese, 1951). Thus, this study is thoroughly grounded on a twofold literature building block: on one hand we
embrace a path dependent and, broadly speaking, Penrosian view to resources (Demil and Lecocq, 2010); on the other
hand we assume an adaptive and evolutionary standpoint to social business ventures.
We originally introduce the concept of social growth option in business studies and we explain how they origin in
social business ventures. This concept is a though one, because of its fuzziness. Basically, it is hard to measure the
economic value of this kind of option, whereas it seems far more easy to give it a heuristic representation. We argue
that strategy of social business ventures is grounded on exercising social growth options. So that, strategy unfolds over
time as a bundle of meanings triggered by an initial slack, which is repurposed to accomplish a social goal lately.
Deployment of repurposed slack determines the variability of the initiative. Volatility is traceable in the passage
from one state of purpose to a social other. Such volatility determines the social option value. In current study, we label
this kind option as social growth option. Social option has a twofold value, which is both social and economic
simultaneously.
As any other commercial firm, social business venture has to make profits for survival and growth. However it has
a peculiar form of prospect reward: the creation of both economic and social wealth.
Consistently, we portray social business entrepreneur as the individual who images a social opportunity and
exploits it. At the first stance, social entrepreneur senses there could be an unexpressed and prospect social need. Thus,
he/she imagines how to manage and meet it. In this phase he/she distances him/herself from common entrepreneurs,
because he/she sees an opportunity were others have just seen a neglected resource. Plus, he/she peculiarly relates the
opportunity to social challenges. This way he realizes social innovation by giving a new meaning to an existent
resource and promoting societal advancement. The repurposed existent resource is a slack one.
As largely discussed in previous section, the slack could assume different roles and it can be of different types. Yet,
it could also fit differently basing on context characteristics. Building on an unusual and outlier perspective, we focus
on the plasticity of recoverable slack as a means for exploiting social growth options. Often, recoverable slack comes in
disguise. According to Moses, recoverable slack refers to “resources that have been absorbed into the systems excess
costs, but may be recovered. (Moses, 1992; p. 42). Recovering concerns working capital, inventories, receivables, fixed
assets, and other general expenses. The reservoir of recoverable slack is valuable when it has some intrinsic variety, or
number of states/configuration it can assume, so that “ variety is thus the reflection of a capacity of adaptation related
to the form: plasticity”. (Assens, 2000, p. 323). We suggest slack can be redeployed to generate a social growth option,
thanks to an inherent plasticity.
In social ventures, entrepreneur changes the initial meaning of resources slack beyond recognition. Rather than
merely recognizing or discovering an opportunity, the entrepreneur images it. He/she creates a strategic growth option
of an ascertained social value by making a bid on resources slack. Then, he/she adds a novel meaning to slack. Said
differently, he/she shapes a new heuristic for existent resources slack he/she puts hands on. He/she does not limit
him/her self to merely recognize or discover the hidden meaning of slack. Rather, he/she goes further by imaging this
meaning and thus creating ex ante the social option. Thus, growth occurs when he/she exploits a social option by
satisfying prior unmet social needs.
Previously, social slack was described as that part of population in excess to a certain regimen of economic
equilibrium (Day and Walter 1989, Baron, Harjoto and Jo 2011). In other words, social slack is formed by underdogs,
or individuals who, for various reasons, do not benefit from the institutional policies and whose needs remain unmet. In
our conception of social entrepreneurship, we consider social slack groups as the beneficiary of the social growth
option.
Social business venture’s agility and effectiveness is contingent upon the plasticity of recoverable slack, and it
occurs whether plasticity allows to redeploy the resource for social purposes. Poor availability of plastic and
recoverable slack might dramatically hamper the prospect of social venture. In sum, recoverable slack interlays
between growth of the firm and social mission. It takes to the entrepreneur to transform slack is something that is
socially valuable. He/she can do that when he/she perceives the shadow option and transforms it into a growth option.
This occurs by altering the meaning of resources slack and matching it with the prospect opportunity he/she has
imagined.
Bracketing all the assumptions together, we define the following hypotheses:
a. Hp1: economic business value of social business venture is positively related to exploitation of social growth
options;
b. Hp2: existence of social growth option is positively related to plasticity of recoverable slack;
c. Hp3: plasticity is positively related to variability of resources’ states;
d. Hp4: the greater the plasticity, the greater the social innovativeness as well.
In a next step, we define characteristics of the social growth option as follows:
i. spot price: cost for put hands on slack and recovering it;
ii. volatility: change in value over time from the time of repurposing and deploying recoverable slack onto social
145
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
initiative;
iii. strike price: cost for additional investments needed to repurpose the slack.
iv. dividends: earnings generated by the social initiative.
4.2 Discussion
The very prelude to current study is the series of wonders proposed by Robinson (2006): what is the unique
characteristic of opportunities in social entrepreneurship? how are they discovered?.
Uncovering the role of social entrepreneur as the individual who imagines a future business and social
opportunity, we portray the evolutionary pattern of social business venture as the deployment of recoverable slack by
leveraging on plasticity of resources and as the exploitation of social growth options. The hidden meaning of resources
slack shadows a prospect growth option. Such option leads to both economic and social wealth creation. The model
also unveils that recoverable slack might be used as a means to intrude in a hostile market and to alter its conditions in
a self-favorably way.
These arguments bear upon the way an opportunity emerges and is pursued. Basically, the logic of opportunity
recognition/discovery implicitly entails a Platonic epistemological orientation, for what archetypal ideas pre-exist in
the hyperuranion realm. An individual can only remember them. On the opposite, the stream of opportunity creation
misses the link with path dependency of development. Our view reconciles the two frameworks, by explaining the
process in terms of entrepreneurial ideation. To some extent, ideation ability depends on personality traits of
entrepreneur, such as counter-cultural orientation and ethic-consciousness. Besides, findings further provide the
evidence that social ventures are apparently committed to social innovation. Nicholls (2010) notes social innovation
construct could reconcile the debate around social entrepreneurship, offering space for legitimacy of this
entrepreneurship form.
5.
Conclusive considerations on the validity of current contribution
5.1 Managerial and practical implications
Current study tackle a main gap in the literature: it provides a clear definition and explanation of the meaning of
social entrepreneurship. In general, the research domain rarely focuses on providing a normative model.
In our opinion, the main issue is that previous studies fail to explain why and how social entrepreneurship is
different from other forms of entrepreneurship. More in detail, they do not identify the target of the social goal and how
the social mission is accomplished. Our explanation and our model largely extend the theory in the field, by clarifying
once and for all how social and economic wealth creation are combined each other. We explain what is social
entrepreneurship extensively. Differently from previous research, we identify the target of social entrepreneurship and
we explain the value creation mechanism. At a practical level, our model contributes in a twofold manner. First, it
allows to measure the value of growth options in social entrepreneurship. This marks a ground-breaking advancement
in the research field. Second, it originally provides specific clues on how to identify and categorize social new ventures.
5.2 Originality, suggestions for future research and limitations of the study
The study of social entrepreneurship is so much on the rising that in recent years it had a sharp hike, as witnessed
by the number of contributions included in EbscoHost and their date of publication. However, most scholars follow the
mainstream, focusing on types, divergent meanings, interplay with public institutions, and other similar research
questions.
Only very recently - the last two or three years, for being precise - some studies began to wonder and investigate
business model and social entrepreneurship.
Current work makes an attempt to advance theory under many prospects. In the first stance, we define the
roadmap of future research in the field by interpreting social entrepreneurship as business model innovation. Second,
we disentangle the meaning of social business ventures - those for-profit firms with a social purpose - from the
overwhelming confusion in this realm.
Third, we provide a normative framework for opportunity spawn and pursuing. Social entrepreneur harnesses
recoverable slack, leveraging on its plasticity, to exercise a social growth option. This specific insight of ours appears
as absolutely ground-breaking: it is the first contribution in its genus. Thus, we largely add to the managerial body of
knowledge by integrating slack and real options categories into social entrepreneurship studies.
This way we open up to multiple future research roadmaps. As instance, scholars should pay attention to the
following calls:
Is there any peculiarity in the growth mode of social entrepreneurship?
Can we, at least, roughly estimate the economic value of social growth options, at societal level?
Are social business ventures actually a distinct category in the entrepreneurship field?
What are the main factors affecting social opportunity ideation?
146
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
A main limitation affect this study: it lacks of empirical testing. The research domain mostly proposes case study
analyses. Clearly, qualitative methodology can only provide an anecdotal evidence. This fuzziness of results is the main
drawback of qualitative researches. For this reason, future scholars should extend their quantitative testing activity in
social entrepreneurship domain. Thus, we hope that future researches could provide empirical evidence of current
model.
5.3 Conclusions
Social entrepreneurship is now gaining its academic momentum, but it lags far behind the practice. In fact, the
construct emerges as poorly defined and blurring across different school of thoughts. Some might say that disparities
between scholarly definitions of social entrepreneurship are axiomatic (Certo and Miller, 2008; Short et al., 2009;
NicholLs, 2010; Hill et al., 2010). The definition’s domain is broad to such an extent that it encompasses either nonprofit (Austin et al., 2006; Sharir and Lerner, 2006) or profit (Emerson and Twersky, 1996; Robinson, 2006) firms. The
dissonance between definitions and streams might depend on the fact that this concept is “open in character” (Choi
and Majumdar, 2014; p. 369), an openness which drives this construct to be pliant and modifiable in such ways that are
unpredictable. Thereby, scholars have provided many systematic analysis to arrive at a sharp definition of social
entrepreneurship beyond all divergences (Zahra et al., 2009; Phillips et al., 2015). There is also a flourishing stream
which investigates how the opportunity recognition occurs peculiarly (Murphy and Coombes, 2009; Lehner and
Kansikas, 2012).
The main problem is that, often, academia underpins a heroic view of social entrepreneur. By gazing closer and
more accurately into social entrepreneurship construct, we try to defy the study fashion on heroism. Cho (2006) had an
intuition on how the concept of social interest is tied over Marx’s thoughts. The author is genuinely persuaded “the
social is inherently political - and what we think of as ‘social’ entrepreneurship is always already invested in political
agendas and struggles. When entrepreneurs organize their actions around values they have identified as ‘social’, they
have already made demanding epistemological and political claims about their ability and entitlement to articulate
what lies in the public’s interest”.(Cho, 2006; p. 42).
The way he doubts about existing theories on social entrepreneurship seems by far convincing. Consistently, we
promote a more business-grounded concept of social entrepreneurship, to the end of distancing social business ventures
from the plethora of authors confusing it with either no-profit institutions or political initiatives. Neither of them are
actually social entrepreneurship, nor they overlap with it. Perhaps, the core of the matter lies outside personal traits of
social entrepreneur, despite the mismatch with the traditional entrepreneurial figure can intrigue.
Many entrepreneurs share such moral attitude and profound convincement of improving and advancing societal
wellness. It can be said that these traits are a characteristic of the human being. Moreover, societal interests are
fragmented, contrasting, layered, complex: the good for someone can be the bad for someone else. So, the idea of social
entrepreneur as a world benefactor is extremely vulnerable, because different social interests are in competition among
each other. Social entrepreneur seeks a very segmented sake, which paradoxically can result in a bad for another part
of the society. Tracing our ancestry back to Cho (2006), we therefore propose a new and more far-reaching view of
social entrepreneurship.
Previous calls have also posited the questions of how the context shapes opportunity in social entrepreneurship
(Austin et al., 2006) and what is the “distinctive nature of the mission, processes, and resources leveraged in a social
entrepreneurial context”. (Dacin et al., 2010; p. 52). We distinguish ourselves by the mainstream of the opportunity
recognition logic (Wry and York, 2017). We suggest that opportunity ideation occurs as the alignment between
commercial and social purposes. We display how strategy of social venture unfolds via repurposing recoverable slack
and striking social growth options. In sum, this paper unveils how social entrepreneurship unravels over-time.
Paraphrasing Weich (1995), a good theory explains, predicts and delights. We attempt to illustrate that social business
venture hides far more than what meets the eye. Thus, we believe that our paper largely contribute to overcome the
shortcoming of existent theories in the field.
References
ALESSANDRI T., CERRATO D., DEPPERU D. (2014), “Organizational slack, experience, and acquisition behavior across varying
economic environments”, Management Decision, vol. 52, n. 5, pp. 967-982.
ALVAREZ S.A., BARNEY J.B. (2007), “Discovery and creation: Alternative theories of entrepreneurial action”, Strategic
Entrepreneurship Journal, vol. 1, n. 1‐2, pp. 11-26.
ALVORD S.H., BROWN L.D., LETTS C.W. (2004), “Social entrepreneurship and societal transformation: An exploratory study”,
The Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, vol. 40, n. 3, pp. 260-282.
AMIT R., ZOTT C. (2012), “Creating value through business model innovation”, MIT Sloan Management Review, vol. 53, n. 3, pp.
41.
APPLEGATE L.M. (2001), “Emerging e-business models: Lessons from the field”, HBS No. 9-801-172, Harvard Business School,
Boston, MA.
ASSENS C. (2000), “Stability and plasticity in self-organized networks”, European Journal of Economic and Social Systems, vol.
14, n. 4, pp. 311-332.
147
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
AUSTIN J., STEVENSON H., WEI‐SKILLERN J. (2006), “Social and commercial entrepreneurship: same, different, or both?”,
Entrepreneurship theory and practice, vol. 30, n. 1, pp. 1-22.
BACKMAN E.V., SMITH S.R. (2000), “Healthy organizations, unhealthy communities?”, Nonprofit Management and Leadership,
vol. 10, n. 4, pp. 355-373.
BARON, D. P., HARJOTO, M. A., & JO, H. (2011), “The economics and politics of corporate social performance.” Business and
Politics, vol. 13, n. 2, pp. 1-46.
BENAROCH M. (2001), “Option-based management of technology investment risk”, IEEE Transactions on Engineering
Management, vol. 48, n. 4, pp. 428-444.
BOURGEOIS L.J. (1981), “On the measurement of organizational slack”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 6, n. 1, pp. 29-39.
BOURGEOIS L.J., SINGH J.V. (1983; August), “Organizational Slack and Political Behavior Among Top Management Teams”, in
Academy of Management Proceedings (vol. 1983, n. 1, pp. 43-47), Academy of Management.
BOWMAN E. H., HURRY D. (1993), “Strategy through the option lens: An integrated view of resource investments and the
incremental-choice process”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 18, n. 4, pp. 760-782.
BROUSSEAU E., PÉNARD T. (2007), “The economics of digital business models: A framework for analyzing the economics of
platforms”, Review of Network Economics, vol. 6, n. 2, pp. 1446-9022.
CERTO S.T., MILLER T. (2008), “Social entrepreneurship: key issues and concepts”, Business Horizons, vol. 51, n. 4, pp. 267–271.
CHATTOPADHYAY P., GLICK W.H., HUBER G.P. (2001), “Organizational actions in response to threats and opportunities”,
Academy of Management Journal, vol. 44, n. 5, pp. 937-955.
CHENG J.L., KESNER I.F. (1997), “Organizational slack and response to environmental shifts: The impact of resource allocation
patterns”, Journal of Management, vol. 23, n. 1, pp. 1-18.
CHESBROUGH H. (2007),”Business model innovation: it’s not just about technology anymore”, Strategy & Leadership, vol. 35, n.
6, pp. 12-17.
CHESBROUGH H., ROSENBLOOM R.S. (2002), “The role of the business model in capturing value from innovation: evidence
from Xerox Corporation’s technology spin‐off companies”, Industrial and Corporate Change, vol. 11, n. 3, pp. 529-555.
CHESBROUGH, H. (2010), “Business model innovation: opportunities and barriers”, Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2-3, pp. 354363.
CHILD J. (1972), “Organizational structure, environment and performance: The role of strategic choice”, Sociology, vol. 6, n. 1, pp.
1-22.
CHO A H. (2006), “Politics, values and social entrepreneurship: A critical appraisal”, in Social Entrepreneurship (pp. 34-56),
Palgrave Macmillan, London.
CHOI N., MAJUMDAR S. (2014), “Social entrepreneurship as an essentially contested concept: Opening a new avenue for
systematic future research”, Journal of Business Venturing, vol. 29, n. 3, pp. 363-376.
COMPANYS Y.E., MCMULLEN J.S. (2007), “Strategic entrepreneurs at work: the nature, discovery, and exploitation of
entrepreneurial opportunities”, Small Business Economics, vol. 28, n. 4, pp. 301-322.
CYERT R.M., MARCH J.G. (1963), A behavioral theory of the firm, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey.
DACIN PETER A., DACIN M.T., MATEA M. (2010), “Social entrepreneurship: Why we don’t need a new theory and how we
move forward from here”, The Academy of Management Perspectives, vol. 24, n. 3, pp. 37-57.
DANIEL F., LOHRKE F.T., FORNACIARI C.J., TURNER JR. R.A. (2004), “Slack resources and firm performance: a metaanalysis”, Journal of Business Research, vol. 57, n. 6, pp. 565-574.
DAY, R. H., & WALTER, J. L. (1989), Economic complexity, chaos, sunspots, bubbles, and nonlinearity. Cambridge University
Press, Cambridge.
DEES J.G. (1998), “Enterprising nonprofits”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 76, n. 1, pp. 54-69.
DEMIL B., LECOCQ X. (2010), “Business model evolution: in search of dynamic consistency”, Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 23, pp. 227-246.
DIXIT A. (1992), “Investment and hysteresis”, Journal of Economic Perspectives, vol. 6, n. 1, pp. 107-132.
DORADO S., HAETTICH H. (2004), Social entrepreneurial ventures: Worth a careful look. Working Paper. UMASS–College of
Management, Boston.
DOZ Y.L., KOSONEN M. (2010), “Embedding strategic agility: A leadership agenda for accelerating business model renewal”,
Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2-3, pp. 370-382.
DRAYTON W. (2002), “The citizen sector: Becoming as entrepreneurial and competitive as business”, California Management
Review, vol. 44, n. 3, pp. 120-132.
DRUCKER P.F. (1985), “The discipline of innovation”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 63, n. 3, pp. 67-72.
ECKHARDT J.T., SHANE S.A. (2003), “Opportunities and entrepreneurship”, Journal of Management, vol. 29, n. 3, pp. 333-349.
EMERSON J., TWERSKY F. (1996), New social enterprise, REDF, San Francisco.
FOSS N.J., SAEBI T. (2017), “Fifteen years of research on business model innovation: how far have we come, and where should we
go?”, Journal of Management, vol. 43, n. 1, pp. 200-227.
FOX I., MARCUS A. (1992), “The causes and consequences of leveraged management buyouts”, Academy of Management Review,
vol. 17, n. 1, pp. 62-85.
GAMBARDELLA A., MCGAHAN A.M. (2010), “Business-model innovation: General purpose technologies and their implications
for industry structure”, Long Range Planning, vol. 43, n. 2-3, pp. 262-271.
GEIGER S.W., CASHEN L.H. (2002), “A multidimensional examination of slack and its impact on innovation”, Journal of
Managerial Issues, vol. 14, n. 1, pp. 68-84.
GEORGE G. (2005), “Slack resources and the performance of privately held firms”, Academy of Management Journal, vol. 48, n. 4,
pp. 661-676.
GEORGE G., BOCK A. (2009), “The business model in practice and its implications for entrepreneurship research”, Working Paper,
Imperial College, London.
GREVE H.R. (1998), “Performance, aspirations, and risky organizational change”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 43, n. 1,
pp. 58-86.
148
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
GUNASTI K., ROSS W. T. (2008), “Achieving the compromise effect with missing attribute information: Introducing shadow
options”, ACR North American Advances, vol. 35, eds. Angela Y. Lee and Dilip Soman, Duluth, MN : Association for
Consumer Research, pp. 748-749.
HALBERSTADT J., KRAUS S. (2016), “Social entrepreneurship: the foundation of tomorrow’s commercial business models?”,
International Journal of Entrepreneurial Venturing, vol. 8, n. 3, pp. 261-279.
HENTON D., MELVILLE J., WALESH K. (1997), “The age of the civic entrepreneur: restoring civil society and building economic
community”, National Civic Review, vol. 86, n. 2, pp. 149-156.
HILL T.L., KOTHARI T.H., SHEA M. (2010), “Patterns of meaning in the social entrepreneurship literature: a research platform”,
Journal of Social Entrepreneurship, vol. 1, n. 1, pp. 5-31.
HOCKERTS K. (2006), “Entrepreneurial opportunity in social purpose business ventures”, in Social entrepreneurship (pp. 142-154),
Palgrave Macmillan, London.
HURRY D., MILLER A.T., BOWMAN E.H. (1992), “Calls on high‐technology: Japanese exploration of venture capital investments
in the United States”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 13, n. 2, pp. 85-101.
JACKSON S.E., DUTTON J.E. (1988), “Discerning threats and opportunities”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 33, n. 3, pp.
370-387.
JENSEN M.C. (1986), “Agency costs of free cash flow, corporate finance, and takeovers”, The American economic review, vol. 76,
n. 2, pp. 323-329.
JOHNSON M.W., CHRISTENSEN C.M., KAGERMANN H. (2008), “Reinventing your business model”, Harvard Business
Review, vol. 86, n. 12, pp. 57-68.
JU M., ZHAO H. (2009), “Behind organizational slack and firm performance in China: The moderating roles of ownership and
competitive intensity”, Asia Pacific Journal of Management, vol. 26, n. 4, pp. 701-717.
KANTER R.M. (1999), “From spare change to real change. The social sector as beta site for business innovation”, Harvard business
review, vol. 77, n. 3, pp. 122-32.
KESTER W.C. (1984), Turning growth options into real assets. Division of Research, Graduate School of Business Administration,
Harvard University, Boston.
KIRZNER I.M. (1997), “Entrepreneurial discovery and the competitive market process: An Austrian approach”, Journal of
Economic Literature, vol. 35, n. 1, pp. 60-85.
KLEIN P.G. (2008), “Opportunity discovery, entrepreneurial action, and economic organization”, Strategic Entrepreneurship
Journal, vol. 2, n. 3, pp. 175-190.
KULATILAKA N., PEROTTI E.C. (1998), “Strategic growth options”, Management Science, vol. 44, n. 8, pp. 1021-1031.
KUUSELA P., KEIL T., MAULA M. (2017), “Driven by aspirations, but in what direction? Performance shortfalls, slack resources,
and resource‐consuming vs. resource‐freeing organizational change”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 38, n. 5, pp. 11011120.
LANT T.K., MEZIAS S.J. (1992), “An organizational learning model of convergence and reorientation”, Organization Science, vol.
3, n. 1, pp. 47-71.
LARSON A.L. (2000), “Sustainable innovation through an entrepreneurship lens. Business Strategy and the Environment, vol. 9, n.
5, pp. 304.
LEADBEATER C. (1997), The rise of the social entrepreneur (n. 25), Demos, London.
LEIBENSTEIN H. (1969), “Organizational or frictional equilibria, X-efficiency, and the rate of innovation”, The Quarterly Journal
of Economics, vol. 83, n. 4, pp. 600-623.
LIN L., KULATILAKA N. (2007), “Strategic growth options in network industries”, in Real Options Theory (pp. 177-198), Emerald
Group Publishing Limited, London.
LUNGEANU R., STERN I., ZAJAC E.J. (2016), “When do firms change technology‐sourcing vehicles? The role of poor innovative
performance and financial slack”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 37, n. 5, pp. 855-869.
LUO C., ZHANG D., LUO B., GE J. (2017), “Ambidextrous Strategy and Firm Performance: The Moderating Effects of
Organizational Slack and Organizational Life Cycle”, Business and Management Studies, vol. 3, n. 4, pp. 1-11.
MACLEOD G. (1997), “Globalizing Parisian thought-waves: recent advances in the study of social regulation, politics, discourse and
space”, Progress in Human Geography, vol. 21, n. 4, pp. 530-553.
MAIR J., MARTI I. (2006), “Social entrepreneurship research: A source of explanation, prediction, and delight”, Journal of World
Business, vol. 41, n. 1, pp. 36-44.
MAIR J., NOBOA E. (2006), “Social entrepreneurship: How intentions to create a social venture are formed”, in Social
entrepreneurship (pp. 121-135), Palgrave Macmillan, London.
MARKIDES C. (2006), “Disruptive innovation: In need of better theory”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 23, n. 1,
pp. 19-25.
MARLIN D., GEIGER S.W. (2015), “A reexamination of the organizational slack and innovation relationship”, Journal of Business
Research, vol. 68, n. 12, pp. 2683-2690.
MASSA L., TUCCI C.L. (2013), Business model innovation, in The Oxford Handbook of Innovation Management, Oxford
University Press, Oxford, pp. 420-441.
MAYO M.C., BROWN G.S. (1999), “Strategic Planning: The Business Model: Relied upon for years, the traditional business model
is on shaky ground”, Ivey Business Journal, vol. 63, n. 3, pp. 18-23.
MCGRATH R.G. (1996; August), “Options and the enterprise: toward a strategic theory of entrepreneurial wealth creation”, in
Academy of Management Proceedings (vol. 1996; n. 1, pp. 101-105), Academy of Management.
MISHINA Y., POLLOCK T.G., PORAC J.F. (2004), “Are more resources always better for growth? Resource stickiness in market
and product expansion”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 25, n. 12, pp. 1179-1197.
MITCHELL D., COLES C. (2003), “The ultimate competitive advantage of continuing business model innovation”, Journal of
Business Strategy, vol. 24, n. 5, pp. 15-21.
MONE M.A., MCKINLEY W., BARKER V.L. (1998), “Organizational decline and innovation: A contingency framework”,
Academy of Management Review, vol. 23, n. 1, pp. 115-132.
MONGELLI L., RULLANI F., VERSARI P. (2017), “Hybridisation of diverging institutional logics through common-note
practices-an analogy with music and the case of social enterprises”, Industry and Innovation, vol. 24, n. 5, pp. 492-514.
149
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
MORRIS M., SCHINDEHUTTE M., ALLEN J. (2005), “The entrepreneur’s business model: toward a unified perspective”, Journal
of Business Research, vol. 58, n. 6, pp. 726-735.
MORT G., WEERAWARDENA J., CARNEGIE K. (2002), “Social entrepreneurship: Towards conceptualization and
measurement”, in 2002 AMA Summer Marketing Educators Conference (vol. 13, pp. 5-5), American Marketing Association.
MOSES O.D. (1992), “Organizational slack and risk-taking behaviour: tests of product pricing strategy”, Journal of Organizational
Change Management, vol. 5, n. 3, pp. 38-54.
MURPHY P.J., COOMBES S.M. (2009), “A model of social entrepreneurial discovery”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 87, n. 3,
pp. 325-336.
MYERS S.C. (1977), “Determinants of corporate borrowing”, Journal of Financial Economics, vol. 5, n. 2, pp. 147-175.
NICHOLLS A. (2010), “The legitimacy of social entrepreneurship: reflexive isomorphism in a pre‐paradigmatic field”,
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice, vol. 34, n. 4, pp. 611-633.
NOHRIA N., GULATI R. (1996), “Is slack good or bad for innovation?”, Academy of Management Journal, vol. 39, n. 5, pp. 12451264.
NOHRIA N., GULATI R. (1997), “What is the optimum amount of organizational slack?: A study of the relationship between slack
and innovation in multinational firms”, European Management Journal, vol. 15, n. 6, pp. 603-611.
NOVY-HILDESLEY J. (2006), “From idea to impact: Funding invention for sustainability”, Innovations: Technology, Governance,
Globalization, vol. 1, n. 1, pp. 31-42.
OCASIO W. (1997), “Towards an attention-based view of the firm”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 18, summer special issue,
pp. 187-206.
ORLANDO B. (2013), Organizational Slack and Shadow Options: the path dependency effect on firm’s development. Aracne, Roma.
ORLANDO B., RENZI A., SANCETTA G., CUCARI N. (2017), “How does firm diversification impact innovation?”, Technology
Analysis & Strategic Management, vol. 30, n. 4, pp. 391-404.
ORLANDO B., RENZI,A., SANCETTA G. (2016), “How Much Organizational Slack and Attention Affect Firm’s Performance?”,
in ECIC2016-Proceedings of the 8th European Conference on Intellectual Capital: ECIC2016 (p. 186), “Academic
Conferences and publishing limited.
PAVESE C. (1951), Verrà la morte e avrà i tuoi occhi (vol. 31), Einaudi, Torino.
PENG M.W., LI Y., XIE E., SU Z. (2010), “CEO duality, organizational slack, and firm performance in China”, Asia Pacific Journal
of Management, vol. 27, n. 4, pp. 611-624.
PENROSE R. (1959), “The apparent shape of a relativistically moving sphere”, Proceedings of the Cambridge Philosophical Society,
vol. 55, n. 1, pp. 137-139.
PEREDO, A. M., & MCLEAN, M. (2006), “Social entrepreneurship: A critical review of the concept.” Journal of world business,
vol. 41, n. 1, pp. 56-65.
PERRINI F., VURRO C. (2006), “Social entrepreneurship: Innovation and social change across theory and practice”, in Social
Entrepreneurship (pp. 57-85), “Palgrave Macmillan, London.
PHILLIPS W., LEE H., GHOBADIAN A., O’REGAN N., JAMES P. (2015), “Social innovation and social entrepreneurship: A
systematic review”, Group & Organization Management, vol. 40, n. 3, pp. 428-461.
PURANAM P., VANNESTE B. (2016), “Corporate strategy: Tools for analysis and decision-making, Cambridge University Press,
Cambridge.
RENZI A., SANCETTA G., ORLANDO B. (2017), “Risk patterns, structural characteristics, and organizational configurations”,
Strategic Change, vol. 26, n. 4, pp. 373-383.
ROBINSON J. (2006), “Navigating social and institutional barriers to markets: How social entrepreneurs identify and evaluate
opportunities”, in Social Entrepreneurship (pp. 95-120), “Palgrave Macmillan, London.
ROSNER M.M. (1968), “Economic determinants of organizational innovation”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 12, n. 4, pp.
614-625.
SABATIER V., MEDAH I., AUGSDORFER P., MADUEKWE A. (2017), “Social business model design and implementation in
developing countries: Learning from an affordable medicine developed in Burkina Faso”, Journal of Management
Development, vol. 36, n. 1, pp. 48-57.
SAGAWA S., SEGAL E. (2000), Common interest, common good: Creating value through business and social sector partnerships,
Harvard Business Press, Boston.
SANCHEZ-RUIZ P., WATTERS C. (2016), “Social entrepreneurship through service learning and case example in Latin America”,
in United States Association for Small Business and Entrepreneurship, Conference Proceedings (p. BI1), “United States
Association for Small Business and Entrepreneurship.
SAY J.B. (1836), A treatise on political economy: or the production, distribution, and consumption of wealth, Grigg & Elliot,
Philadelphia.
SCHUMPETER J. . (1942), Capitalism, Socialism and Democracy, George Allen and Unwin, New York.
SCHUMPETER J.A. (1939), Business cycles. McGraw-Hill, New York.
SHAHZAD A.M., MOUSA F.T., SHARFMAN M.P. (2016), “The implications of slack heterogeneity for the slack-resources and
corporate social performance relationship”, Journal of Business Research, vol. 69, n. 12, pp. 5964-5971.
SHANE S. (2000), “Prior knowledge and the discovery of entrepreneurial opportunities”, Organization Science, vol. 11, n. 4, pp.
448-469.
SHANE S., VENKATARAMAN S., MACMILLAN I. (1995), “Cultural differences in innovation championing strategies”, Journal
of Management, vol. 21, n. 5, pp. 931-952.
SHARFMAN M.P., WOLF G., CHASE R.B., TANSIK D.A. (1988), “Antecedents of organizational slack”, Academy of
Management Review, vol. 13, n. 4, pp. 601-614.
SHARIR M., LERNER M. (2006), “Gauging the success of social ventures initiated by individual social entrepreneurs”, Journal of
World Business, vol. 41, n. 1, pp. 6-20.
SHORT J.C., MOSS T.W., LUMPKIN G.T. (2009), “Research in social entrepreneurship: Past contributions and future
opportunities”, Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, vol. 3, n. 2, pp. 161-194.
SMITH K.G., GRIMM C.M., GANNON M.J., CHEN M.J. (1991), “Organizational information processing, competitive responses,
and performance in the US domestic airline industry”, Academy of Management Journal, vol. 34, n. 1, pp. 60-85.
150
RESOURCES SLACK FOR SOCIAL ENTREPRENEURSHIP: THE GENESIS OF SOCIAL AND STRATEGIC GROWTH OPTIONS
STAW B.M., SANDELANDS L.E., DUTTON J.E. (1981), “Threat rigidity effects in organizational behavior: A multilevel
analysis”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 26, n. 4, pp. 501-524.
STEVENSON H.H. (1983), A perspective on entrepreneurship (vol. 13), Harvard Business School, Cambridge, Massachusetts.
STEWART D.W., ZHAO Q. (2000), “Internet marketing, business models, and public policy”, Journal of Public Policy &
Marketing, vol. 19, n. 2, pp. 287-296.
SUZUKI O. (2018), “Enabling or constraining? Unraveling the influence of organizational slack on innovation”, Industrial and
Corporate Change. doi.org/10.1093/icc/dtx046
TAI F.M., CHUANG S.H. (2014), “Corporate social responsibility”, Ibusiness, vol. 6, n. 3, pp. 117-130.
TAN J. (2003), “Curvilinear relationship between organizational slack and firm performance: Evidence from Chinese state
enterprises”, European Management Journal, vol. 21, n. 6, pp. 740-749.
THOMPSON V.A. (1965), “Bureaucracy and innovation”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 10, n. 1, pp. 1-20.
TIMMERS P. (1998), “Business models for electronic markets”, Electronic Markets, vol. 8, n. 2, pp. 3-8.
TONG T., REUER J.J., PENG M.W. (2008), “International joint ventures and the value of growth options”, Academy of
Management Journal, vol. 51, n. 5, pp. 1014-1029.
TONG T.W., REUER J.J. (2006), “Firm and industry influences on the value of growth options”, Strategic Organization, vol. 4, n. 1,
pp. 71-95.
TRIGEORGIS L. (Ed.), (1995), Real options in capital investment: Models, strategies, and applications, Greenwood Publishing
Group, London.
TRIGEORGIS L., REUER J.J. (2017), “Real options theory in strategic management”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 38, n. 1,
pp. 42-63.
VANACKER T., COLLEWAERT V., ZAHRA S.A. (2017), “Slack resources, firm performance, and the institutional context:
Evidence from privately held European firms”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 38, n. 6, pp. 1305-1326.
WADDOCK S.A. (1988), “Building successful social partnerships”, MIT Sloan Management Review, vol. 29, n. 4, pp. 17.
WADDOCK S.A., POST J.E. (1991), “Social entrepreneurs and catalytic change”, Public Administration Review, vol. 51, n. 5, pp.
393-401.
WANG Y., GUO B., YIN Y. (2017), “Open innovation search in manufacturing firms: the role of organizational slack and absorptive
capacity”, Journal of Knowledge Management, vol. 21, n. 3, pp. 656-674.
WEICK K.E. (1995), “What theory is not, theorizing is”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 40, n. 3, pp. 385-390.
WISEMAN R.M., BROMILEY P. (1996), “Toward a model of risk in declining organizations: An empirical examination of risk,
performance and decline”, Organization Science, vol. 7, n. 5, pp. 524-543.
WRY T., YORK J.G. (2017), “An identity-based approach to social enterprise”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 42, n. 3, pp.
437-460.
ZADEK S., THAKE S. (1997), “Send in the social entrepreneurs”, New Statesman, vol. 126, n. 458, pp. 31-31.
ZAHRA S.A., GEDAJLOVIC E., NEUBAUM D.O., SHULMAN J.M. (2009), “A typology of social entrepreneurs: Motives, search
processes and ethical challenges”, Journal of Business Venturing, vol. 24, n. 5, pp. 519-532.
ZOTT C., AMIT R. (2007), “Business model design and the performance of entrepreneurial firms”, Organization Science, vol. 18, n.
2, pp. 181-199.
ZOTT C., AMIT R. (2008), “The fit between product market strategy and business model: implications for firm performance”,
Strategic Management Journal, vol. 29, n. 1, pp. 1-26.
ZOTT C., AMIT R., MASSA L. (2011), “The business model: recent developments and future research”, Journal of Management,
vol. 37, n. 4, pp. 1019-1042.
151
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
152
CSR and organizational culture: the competitive advantage
of organizations
MARCELA LEPORE*
Objectives. Given the expansion of Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) as a new organizational paradigm;
and the inclusion of Job Satisfaction (JS) as an analytical and explanatory variable of managerial sciences, we will
witness a new relationship between employees and a socially responsible company (SRC). This relationship marks a
business model structured with the principles and foundations of CSR, which does not occur in a vacuum but rather
within a socially and collectively constructed Organizational Culture (OC) that involves the way the staff interacts; thus
observing the dynamics behind organizational identity.
An organization is defined as a formal and coordinated group of people, working towards specific goals where
they must manage resources everyday that will generate profits. The creation of a conscious and satisfied staff
promotes the development of the group of people that make up the organization, making progress for the company,
as well as for the people in it.
There is no doubt that CSR influences job satisfaction (Lepore, 2015), employee retention, and profitability,
shaping a socially responsible organizational culture that definitely sets its image and reputation.
In this sense, emerging trends in social responsibility indicate that (i) sustainability will increasingly become a
mandatory choice, and the only way to survive in the market and stay competitive, (ii) that the economic crisis will
come into play as an acceleration factor of the CSR implementation process, (iii) that sustainability will be
profitable and will generate economic value (Sodalitas, 2010)1
From this point of view, there is some room for optimism for Small and Medium Enterprises (SMEs), as long as
progress is made in analyzing their specific weaknesses, how these can be overcome, and what factors influence
them positively and negatively based on the observation of real experiences in the field analyzed. The objective must
focus in the redefinition of alternative scenarios, which allow the SME entrepreneurs to take ownership of the
environment, and develop a global vision focused on the long term.
A significant contribution of conclusions is expected, that will be useful for the development of strategies
directly applicable to the field of Argentinean SMEs and that will make possible their sustainable development
generating a competitive advantage, based on a socially responsible organizational culture. This research sets the
interpretative framework to analyze the factors that influence the generation of a socially and collectively
constructed organizational culture from the binomial “Corporate Social Responsibility and Job Satisfaction”
(Lepore, 2015).
Our objective is to (i) study the factors that contribute to the development of corporate culture, which, on the
basis of corporate social responsibility, provides the framework for its sustainability and permanence, involving all
stakeholders in a shared vision of the business and business mission; and (ii) analyze the perception of
entrepreneurs regarding the impact of this culture on the competitiveness of the organization.
Methodology. A qualitative type of research was chosen as a way to go deeper into the experiences and lessons
learned by the members of the organization while it was taking place; this type of research allows us to place
ourselves in the dimension of the whys and hows that serve as guidance in an investigation, in a way that this allows
us to further understand the complexity of the processes, experiences and meanings implicit in the processes of
consolidation of the organizational identity of a company. The Grounded Theory (GT) serves this purpose.
Qualitative techniques have gained ground within the field of organizational research (Mumford, 2009). It is
common to apply the Grounded Theory (GT) in management and organizations studies (Goulding, 2009; Bryant &
Carmaz, 2010; Eaves, 2001) as it shows its advantages when carrying out behavioral studies and studies on
organizational culture. (Martin & Turner, 1986); as it reveals what is really happening in the practical life of an
organization.
*
1
Associate professor of Business Administration and Graduate Professor of CSR Management - Researcher (Cat. IV) Universidad Nacional de Lomas de Zamora - Argentina
e-mail: marcelalepore@hotmail.com
Research carried out by Fondazione Sodalitas, an Italian institution that works for the promotion and development of Corporate
Social Responsibility, which analyzed the corporate social responsibility vision of 46 leaders (Presidents or Delegate
Administrators) of companies that have chosen the path of sustainability, Italian SME companies, and Large Companies.
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
153
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.25
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
It is a case study of multiple or comparative studies based on the methodological theory by Strauss and Glaser
(Grounded Theory). It suggests investigating several experiences jointly with the objective of addressing the
phenomenon in greater depth. This type of study poses the same questions in different cases, comparing the answers to
reach conclusions.
The subject of study analyzed are 8/10 SMEs2 with presence in the market that have chosen the path of
sustainability. The sample is divided into two groups of 4/5 companies each. The first group consists of companies that
meet the parameters established in the definition generated, in that they have chosen to carry out the implementation of
social responsibility programs, and observe the actions carried out to consolidate such process, the extent to which
these actions have been shared by the entire organization, and the way in which they have been carried out. The second
group, which shares the same characteristics, will allow reinforcing the observations analyzed in the first group and
the objective is to observe, first, whether actions have been implemented yet not sustained over time or have not been
shared by the entire organization and what are the possible explanations for these cases. In both groups, the analysis
will include (i) the perception of entrepreneurs about CSR in their company, (ii) the vision they have of their company
in terms of sustainability, and (iii) whether this vision is perceived as a competitive advantage.
The proposed scheme includes five main instances, namely (i) the preliminary theoretical model, (ii) the unit of
analysis, (iii) the collection of information, (iv) the joint analysis of the information, and (v) the determination of the
inductive model . In turn, these are divided into 8 extended stages to facilitate the organization and structuring of the
investigation: (1) Bibliographic review and theoretical analysis, (2) Construction of the theoretical model of
preliminary analysis and Design and Development of data collection instruments, (3) Field work I, (4) Preliminary
analysis of cases separately, (5) Field work II, (6) Preliminary analysis of cases separately, (7) Final analysis and
determination of the inductive model (preparation of conclusions and suggestions), and (8) Preparation of the final
report and presentation of final results.
According to the intended work schedule, the first 4 (four) stages initially defined have been completed to date
(April 2018).
1. Bibliographic Review and Theoretical Analysis
An initial bibliographic search can determine the state of the art in the problem, and highlights the general
theory and the main substantive theories in order to provide basis for the collected data and clarify the object of
study.
General Theories: Corporate Social Responsibility
Substantive Theories: (a) Job satisfaction (b) Organizational Culture (c) Competitive Advantage.
2. Construction of the Theoretical Model for Preliminary Analysis - Design and Development of Information Gathering
Instruments
An analysis of the factors that are part of both the CSR-JS binomial and the organizational culture and
competitive advantage is presented. This if followed by the study of the correlation of these factors with each other. To
meet the objectives set, and to check the validity of the initial research questions, we will work as Figure 1 shows. We
are now in the first stage of Fieldwork.
Fig. 1: Theoretical Model for Analysis
Source: Prepared by Authors
2
In terms of the number of cases, it should be noted that this is an arbitrary number defined a priori, although it may vary
according to the needs of the project, following a theoretical saturation criterion for this purpose. At the moment, we are
working on a sample of 4 companies. There is no defined criterion to determine the number of cases for the study (Pettigrew,
1990) and, following this logic, Chiva Gómez (2001) establishes that a case study would require a minimum of four units of
analysis, although the higher this number, the better replication and reliability can be achieved.
154
CSR AND ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE: THE COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE OF ORGANIZATIONS
The methodological instruments used in the case study, as well as the data source, can be of various types and
formats. The most common include: (i) survey/questionnaire, according to the format and type that best suits the type of
research, and (ii), interviews, according to its many methods, structured around a core topic.
A mixed methodology was chosen,3 as it generates multiple data sources for further triangulation: First, a
quantitative analysis was carried out through semi-structured surveys/questionnaires 4, provided to key interviewees,
based on those used in the previous investigation whenever possible (Lepore, 2015)5, using a modified wording to fit the
context for the current study. These surveys were structured based on two types of questions: a) dichotomous, in which
a dual response of the type “yes/no/or maybe” is possible, and b) multiple choice questions, where a set of options in
provided, such as: “good/very good/regular/bad”, or “very satisfactory/satisfactory/not satisfactory”. Second, a
qualitative analysis as expressed above was carried out, perfected through in-depth/focused/non-directed interviews6,
which allow dialogical and communicational dynamics according to the direction and trajectory that it describes in its
own linking process, thus facilitating the production/generation of data, information, and knowledge related to the
phenomenon under study (Merton, 1990), designed around a core topic made to expert subjects, very useful in terms of
obtaining technical and scientific information, and for qualitative and exploratory research (Hernández Sampieri,
1991)
The design of the script or narrative program of the in-depth interview was the result of the articulation of three
fundamental axes around which this work is structured: (i) the problem of research (ii), the general and specific
objectives, and (iii) the base hypothesis. These are the topics addressed:
CSR Concept
CSR Practices/Actions/Programs
Work/Organizational Environment
Job Satisfaction
Incentive Program
Incorporation/Evaluation of Personnel
Quality/Certifications
Internal/External Communication
Competitiveness
The survey/questionnaire made to key interviewees included the following parameters:
Unit of observation: employees of the companies selected for the first group shown in the Table 1.
Procedure: An initial contact was established with one of the main executives of each company to request their
authorization to carry out a series of surveys and interviews related to the perception of employees and managers on
CSR and job satisfaction, and their relationship with the culture of the organization within the framework of an
investigation directed by the Department of Administration of the Faculty of Economic Sciences of the National
7
University of Lomas de Zamora . After the authorization was obtained, participants were asked for their consent, duly
informed, to answer the survey, guaranteeing the privacy and anonymity of the answers, as well as their exclusive use
for research purposes. The surveys were analyzed and processed using the EXCEL 2010 program compatible with the
Windows XP environment.
Characteristics: (i) Comprehensiveness: the options for questions and responses satisfy the requirement of
comprehensiveness as they cover all cases and options related to CSR. And (ii) the options for questions and responses
satisfy the condition of being exclusive in that each question or option corresponds, in all cases, to a single answer.
3. Fieldwork I
Selecting the First Case Group
The size of the sample is closely related to the methodology and is influenced by its development, which is why
the final size is unknown at the beginning (Glaser, 1992). Thus, the initial sample included 4 (four) companies. These
cases met the inclusion criteria for the study: a) SME companies with presence in the market, and b) companies that
affirm to have chosen the path of sustainability.
3
4
5
6
7
According to Alonso (1998), the mere administration of surveys/questionnaires, previously codified as per structured models
is not an ideal instrument to analyze the perceptions and/or social representations that have arisen, in this case, from the
practices of the actors involved in CSR. Furthermore, the author establishes that the researcher must use the combination
(triangulation) of dialogical and interactive instruments, such as in-depth interviews.
Available at:
https://docs.google.com/forms/d/e/1FAIpQLSfJnUcKFc58sxpJ4G85ZwwkaBiOM3ebAjtLOYL3TaneeNbBaQ/viewform?c=0&w=1
https://1drv.ms/b/s!AmgJASAbBokDgiczpr3chlipJbkQ and https://1drv.ms/b/s!AmgJASAbBokDgij-ueRf7VFFrETo
Doctoral Thesis: CSR and Job Satisfaction - The Case of SMS - San Martin Suarez y Asoc. - UNLaM (2015)
Available at: https://1drv.ms/b/s!AmgJASAbBokDgilQJnrI42-QhKPG and https://1drv.ms/b/s!AmgJASAbBokDgiZeERzUWFh5K8pd
Director: Dr. Marcela Lepore - Research Professors: Alejandra Guidi and Mercedes Curbello - Research Student: Miss Giuliana
Velozo –
Interns: Miss Yamila Leila Allara (LOMAS CyT FCE 58 RES. 868/17 - Work Plan: Socially Responsible Organizational Culture
in SMEs in Almirante Brown and Lomas de Zamora - 2018 period) and Mr. Jorge Daniel Alvarez di Nardi (LOMAS CyT FCE
58 RES. 868/17 - Work Plan: CSR and Job Satisfaction in SMEs in Lomas de Zamora and Almirante Brown - 2018 period)
155
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
Tab. 1: List of SMEs by Sector and Approach to CSR - 1st Group
Company Name
SMS San Martín,
Suarez y Asoc.
BARBIERI
ARGENTINA
A.VÁZQUEZ E
HIJOS S.A.
Sector
Services/Consulting:
Company
highly
specialized in audit services, tax advice, and
consulting for companies. It offers integral
solutions in the different industrial,
commercial, and services sectors. For SMEs
and family businesses. 30 years in the
market.
Metallurgical
and
Plastics
Industry
manufactures galvanized steel profiles for
dry construction. 65 years in the market.
Transportation:
Comprehensive
management, collection and transport of
waste. 30 years in the market.
Plastics and Electronics: Manufacture of
labels and tags with and without adhesives.
Also RFID tagging, and thermal transfer
ribbons.
LABELTEC S.A
Approach to CSR
Internal CSR: Ongoing and systematic training, at local and
international level
External CSR: Competitiveness that sustains honesty and
respect for customers
Quality Management: services certified under Standards
ISO 9001:2000.
CSR at Community Level: Produces goods that add wealth
and value to the community.
Internal CSR: Dignifies the work and the people that are
part of the human group related to the company.
External CSR: Respect for customers. Builds mutually
beneficial and enduring relationships with suppliers.
Internal and External CSR: Works with ethics and
credibility.
External CSR: Establishes productive and lasting
relationships with clients.
CSR at Community Level: Is committed to the environment
and reflects life through actions.
Quality Management: meets current regulations.
CSR at Community Level: Produces quality products, while
respecting and preserving the environment. Focuses on an
integrated management system.
External CSR: continuous improvement of the quality of
products, processes and services, the preservation of the
environment, and customer satisfaction.
Internal CSR: allows all the personnel participate in the
objectives of the Company.
Quality Management: meets standards ISO 9001 and ISO
14001
Source: Authors’ elaboration
Results. This study will allow to further understand the complexity of the processes, experiences and meanings
implicit in the consolidation of a socially responsible organizational culture, which may or may not be perceived by the
organization as a competitive advantage.
4. Preliminary analysis of cases separately:
We can only make some assumptions based on the responses (40) surveys, and (12) in-depth interviews we have
received so far (April 2018). The first results, which were transcribed, analyzed, and interpreted following the
triangulation criterion proposed by the GT, allowed for a constant comparison in the field to redefine the subsequent
interviews. Preliminary results are listed below:
The preliminary bibliographical analysis, based, on the one hand, on the CSR/Job Satisfaction binomial
previously analyzed by Lepore (2015) and, on the other, on the triangulation of these results with current
measurements carried out by organizations and foundations, both at national and regional levels, on the status
of CSR and Argentine SMEs, which identified (i) that CSR practices in Argentina are part of an emerging area
in “non-consolidated” business environments with isolated manifestations. (ii) The incidence of CSR in the
SME sector is noticeably lower than in the case of large companies due, on the one hand, to the scarce
incidence in the sector of awareness campaigns in terms of CSR; and, on the other hand, due to the existing
paternalistic paradigm, meaning actions and/or programs are implemented with a strong welfare-oriented
focus. (iii) There is a limited number of analysis and intelligibility tools to address the implementation
dynamics in the SME sector in terms of sustainability practices and business processes in CSR environments
that prevents the detection of progressivity patterns. (iv) The organizational behaviors from which these CSR
processes are structured are hidden or underlying, so any CSR perception and/or representation will be subject
to preconceptions. (v) On the latter issue, organizational behaviors in a CSR environment should be analyzed,
no longer from its traditional conception as a dynamic axis of the efficiency and effectiveness of companies in
the capitalist sense of productivity, but rather with a holistic view, as a competitive advantage that contributes
to the increase in the benefits of the company as a whole, thus becoming the master key for an enhanced
management system.
The first results of the surveys show the following concepts as the most relevant related to the perception of
employees in terms of Social Responsibility (Graph 1). Interestingly, we observe the insignificant value that
Competitiveness has been given, in relation to the other concepts, that is, how interviewees perceive and/or
consider that corporate social responsibility can enhance the competitiveness of their company. We also
observed a tendency to link Social Responsibility with care for the environment, followed by good labor
practices.
156
CSR AND ORGANIZATIONAL CULTURE: THE COMPETITIVE ADVANTAGE OF ORGANIZATIONS
Fig. 2: Concepts associated with Social Responsibility
Source: Authors’ elaboration
The first approaches towards identifying key concepts as a result of the analysis of the surveys made to the first
expert subjects, show the following reasons why they consider Social Responsibility vital for their business. It is
striking that the perception that the entire organization shares the idea of sustainability, from the entrepreneur,
is 100%. This is followed by the idea that a good working environment increases productivity.
Fig. 3: Perception of the Business Owner in terms of his Company and Social Responsibility
Source: Authors’ elaboration
Limits to the Investigation. Limits connected to the characteristics of the sample. The study is carried out in a
single country, Argentina and on a population, social group, or specific group, i.e., the employees, managers, and
stakeholders of the companies under study. It is also focused on the analysis of the perception they have on CSR, and
age and/or gender variables, marital status, career or work history, socio-economic status, studies, etc. are not
considered. This means attention must be paid when extrapolating and generalizing the findings.
Measuring the impact of the socially responsible organizational culture based on the competitiveness of the
company is not a universally recognized and accepted system of measurement, but rather an evaluation expressed by
the company’s stakeholders. This adds to the limitations of case studies, specifically given that the results obtained
through this analysis technique are biased (Bonache, 1999; Arias, 2003). The so-called researcher bias consists in
defining the phenomenon to be studied, choosing the theoretical framework, pondering the relevance of the different
sources, and analyzing the causal relationship between the facts.
However, the use of a rigorous and replicable methodology for selecting cases, obtaining information, and
analyzing data can make this methodology more objective and reliable.
Practical Implications. The implications are managerial and competitive. There is a need for SMEs to deepen the
development of CSR programs, based on current sustainability trends. The study will provide useful conclusions for
managers in the development of strategies directly applicable to the field of Argentinean SMEs, and will enable their
sustainable development by generating a competitive advantage, based on a socially responsible organizational culture.
157
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
Originality of the Research. While the current literature already includes articles analyzing the impact of CSR
on job satisfaction, this research offers a contribution as it seeks to investigate an aspect that has not yet been explored
as much, which is the impact that this binomial produces in the development of a Socially Responsible Organizational
Culture that can bring about a competitive advantage for the company.
Key words: Corporate Social Responsibility; Job Satisfaction; Organizational Culture; Competitive Advantage;
Sustainability
References
ALABART Y., PORTUONDO A.L. (1998), “La Cultura Organizacional. Una Variable a considerar en la Competitividad
Empresarial”, Ciencias Holguín - Folletos Gerenciales, vol. 4, n. 2.
BARBA J. (2007), “Medición de la responsabilidad social en la empresa. Tendencias y dificultades”, En Alcoberro R. (coord.) Ética,
economía y empresa, Gedisa (pp. 217-237), Barcelona.
BASS B.M. (1965), Organizational psychology, Allyn & Bacon, Boston.
BENAVIDES-VINDAS S. (2005), “Las micro, pequeñas y medianas empresas como estrategia de distribución económica”, ABRA,
vol. 25, n. 34, pp. 11-29, Costa Rica.
HERNÁNDEZ SAMPIERI R., FERNÁNDEZ COLLADO C., LUCIO PILAR B. (1991), Metodología de la Investigación, Mc
Graw-Hill, México, (p. 37)
GARCÍA ÁLVAREZ C.M. (2006), “ Una aproximación al concepto de Cultura Organizacional”, Univ. Psychol, vol. 5, n. 1, pp.
163-174. Bogotá, Colombia
GLASER B., STRAUSS A. (2006), The discovery of Grounded Theory. Strategies for qualitative analysis, Aldine Transaction,
New Jersey.
GRUESO HINESTROZA M.P. (2009), “Responsabilidad Social Empresarial e igualdad de oportunidades en el empleo:
¿altruismo o legalidad?”, Universidad & Empresa, n. 17, pp. 244-251, Universidad del Rosario, Colombia.
LATHAM G.P. (2007), Work Motivation: History, Theory, Research, and Practice, Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, California:
LAURSEN K., FOSS N. (2003), “New human resource management practices, complementaries and the impact on innovation
performance”, Cambridge Journal of Economics, vol. 7, n. 2, pp. 243-263.
LEPORE M. (2015), Responsabilidad Social Empresaria y Satisfacción Laboral- El Caso SMS San Martín, Suarez y Asoc., Tesis
doctoral, UNLaM
MARISTANY J. (2000), Administración de Recursos Humanos, Buenos Aires: Prentice Hall. Dessler G. (2001) Administración de
Personal, Prentice Hall, México D.F.
MATHIS R., JACKSON J. (2003), Fundamentos de administración de recursos humanos: Perspectivas esenciales, México D.F.:
Thomson. Delgado S. (2005), Recursos Humanos, Thomson Paraninfo, Madrid.
NAVARRO ASTOR E. (2008), Aportación al estudio de la satisfacción laboral de los profesionales técnicos del sector de la
construcción: una aplicación cualitativa en la Comunidad Valenciana, Tesis Doctoral Inédita. Universidad Politécnica De
Valencia
PERERA ALDAMA L.R. (2011), Indicadores para la gestión de la RSE. En: Peinado-Vara (eds.) RSE La responsabilidad social
de la empresa en América Latina. Manual de Gestión. FOMIN/BID. HD60.5.L29 R47 (p. 287) New York.
PETTIGREW A.M. (1979), “On Studying Organizational Cultures”, Administrative Science Quarterly. Vol. 24, n. 4.
PLA JULIÁN I., GUEVARA De MOLINA S. (2013), “Hacia un enfoque integrador de la sostenibilidad: explorando sinergias entre
género y medio ambiente”, Revista CEPAL, n. 110, pp. 51-68
PUTNAM L.M., PACANOWSKY M. (cords.), Communication and organizations: an interpretive approach, Sage, Beverly Hills.
ROITSTEIN F. (2004), “ La responsabilidad social empresarial en Argentina: tendencias y oportunidades”, Academia. Revista
Latinoamericana de Administración, n. 32, pp. 5-28, Consejo Latinoamericano de Escuelas de Administración Organismo
Internacional
SCHEIN E.H. (1980), Organizational psychology, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, N.J.
SMIRCICH L. (1983), “Concepts of culture and Organizational Analysis”, Administrative Science Quaterly, n. 28, pp. 339-358.
VALLES M. (1997), Técnicas cualitativas de investigación social. Reflexión metodológica y práctica profesional, Síntesis, Madrid.
VIVES A., PEINADO-VARA E. (eds.) (2003), Conferencia Interamericana de Responsabilidad Social de la Empresa. La
Responsabilidad Social de la Empresa como Instrumento de Competitividad, BID Banco Interamericano de Desarrollo (p.
11), Panamá:
YIN R.K. (1994), Case Study Research: Design and Methods, Sage Publications, Thousand Oaks, CA.
Websites
http://www.iso.org/iso/discovering_iso_26000-es.pdf
158
CSR Strategy in the Internet Era
PAOLO POPOLI*
Objectives. This study in development aims to contribute to the corporate strategy literature through a conceptual
reflection on the formulation of a corporate social responsibility (CSR) strategy for a global firm in the light of the
global inter-stakeholder communication.
The idea of this study is born from the consideration that, in the Internet era, information spreads all over the
world at an incredible speed, and new media and their related technologies allow everyone to find out about what is
happening anywhere in the world with the result that every action or behaviour by a firm becomes an element to be
judged and evaluated worldwide (Jones et al., 2009; Russell and Russell 2010; Torres et al. 2012).
Nowadays, the world communicates through many means: newspaper and magazine articles, television and radio
broadcasts, Internet content, books, films, music, art, and advertising and marketing communications (Godes et al.
2005; Haas Dornas et al., 2014; McAlister et al., 2012). In addition, the incredible development of Internet marketing
has greatly accelerated the development of global communication. The speed at which news are shared in the global
context involves that what a firm does in one geographical context is known about all over the world in a very short
lapse of time, amplifying the role played by the media in the construction of corporate reputation (Aksak et al., 2016;
Mark-Herbert and von Shantz 2007; van Gelder 2002).
Therefore, in the age of the Internet and global communications, what a firm does in one country becomes a factor
of evaluation worldwide and goes beyond the boundaries of the local context (Mason and Simmons 2014; Pisani, et al.
2017; Rasche et al., 2017; Russell and Russell 2010).
On the basis of these premises, the main goal of this study is to increase the understanding of CSR approach for a
global firm in the light of the global communication. We formulate three interrelated research questions as follows: 1.
Does the relationship between CSR strategy and corporate reputation observe the same principles in the local context
as in the global context? 2. How does global communication affect the construction of a corporate reputation through
CSR strategy? 3. What is the best approach for a global firm in formulating of a CSR strategy in the Internet era?
Methodology. This study is primarily conceptual, based on the literature on corporate social responsibility,
analyzed within the theoretical framework of the Stakeholder Theory. Secondly, this study also shows the results of a
first empirical analysis providing a preliminary confirmation of the conceptualization hereby provided. For this, we
submitted a questionnaire, based on a set of original questions, to a sample of 326 Italian-based multinational
companies that operate in highly varied fields, to explore the different approaches in CSR strategies. The sample was
chosen from a list of 711 companies provided by the Think and Make Communications Group (Asti, Italy), which selects
only publicly traded companies with permanent production or distribution facilities abroad. The aim of this analysis
was to understand to what extent the survey participants would agree with our basic affirmations. Particular attention
was given to eliciting the degree of standardisation or adaptation in formulating CSR strategy applied by the company
in addressing the different geographical contexts in which they operate.
The questionnaire was submitted by e-mail and was composed of five questions that were intended to reveal the
approach followed by global firms in formulating a CSR strategy. In the current study, we present the findings
concerning our research question of whether global companies follow standardisation or adaptation approaches in the
formulation of their CSR strategies.
Findings. The response to the first research question of this study is that the relationship between CSR strategy
and corporate reputation does not present the same dynamics in the global context as it does in the local context; in
particular, while operating in a local context offers the opportunity to “select and prioritise” CSR expectations as an
effect of the selection and prioritisation of stakeholders that the action of a firm must handle (Aksak et al., 2016; Kolk,
2016), operating in a global context imposes a more complex consideration of CSR expectations, given the
interdependencies that are perforce created amongst stakeholders who, while scattered over diverse contexts, are
increasingly in direct communication with each other.
Companies operate in an environment that is becoming increasingly global and more harmonised in terms of the
expectations that the stakeholders have for corporate social behaviour. Thus, it is logical that the approach of
“national adaptation” in the formulation of CSR strategies will not appear to be satisfactory in the eyes of the
*
Associate Professor of Management - Parthenope University of Naples, Italy
e-mail: paolo.popoli@uniparthenope.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
159
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.26
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
company’s stakeholders, who currently judge the company on the basis of its behaviour on a global scale and no longer
on the local scale alone (Miska et al., 2016).
Therefore, in the global context, the different weights that are represented by the various dimensions of CSR tend
to cancel each other out, given that the judgment of a global firm by stakeholders concerns everything the firm does
anywhere in the world (research question n. 2). We place emphasis on the fact that global communication means “what
starts out local becomes global” and hold firms and their strategies and behaviours to worldwide evaluation.The
impossibility of selecting and prioritising CSR expectations expressed by global stakeholders is the consequence of the
fact that the expectations of global stakeholders are formed through a process that has a two-fold nature, additive and
compensative: additive because the expectations of stakeholders that the global firm must take into account are the sum
of the expectations in the different local contexts in which the firm is present; compensative because all of these
expectations and the powers of incidence and conditioning of stakeholders compensate each other reciprocally and
must be considered on a level of equal importance.
Consequently, we argue that a global firm should adopt a multidimensional and multi-stakeholder approach to
CSR strategy by defining a standardised CSR strategy that does not change in the various countries in which the firm
operates (research question n. 3).
With regard to the empirical analysis results, the number of replies received from the multinationals was low
relative to the mail-out, with only 40 companies returning a fully completed questionnaire. In spite of this low rate of
participation, the responses give a preliminary indication that the thesis proposed in our paper can be confirmed at the
empirical level and is worthy of more ample inquiry for further and more in-depth verification.
See below a summary of the data received from the questionnaires.
Question 1: Is your company’s approach to CSR primarily one of:
Source: our elaboration
Question 2: Overall, what percentage of your company’s CSR strategy shows standardisation and what
percentage shows adaptation?
Source: our elaboration
160
CSR STRATEGY IN THE INTERNET ERA
Question 3: In your company’s experience, universal principles such as environmental protection, community
development, education, health and well-being, and security:
Source: our elaboration
Question 4: To what extent do you agree with the following statement?
“Social responsibility or irresponsibility is evaluated by a stakeholder not only on the basis of what a company
does in its own country but also on the basis of what it does in all the countries where it operates.”
Source: our elaboration
Question 5: To what extent do you agree with the following statement?
“In a world of ever-greater globalisation and communications, the expectancies for CSR tend towards uniformity
in the different countries; thus, in CSR strategies, there will also be a trend towards the standardisation of elements and
a simultaneous reduction of adaptation to the different countries.”
161
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
Source: our elaboration
In response to the generic question, “Is your company’s approach to CSR primarily one of: a) standardisation; b)
adaptation to different local contexts”, 50% of the companies that participated in the survey replied “adaptation”, 45%
answered “standardisation”, and 5% reported that they adopt a mixed approach. Nevertheless, when they were asked
to specify what percentage of their CSR strategy is standardised and what percentage is adapted, the answers
contradicted the answer to the first question. In fact, only 27% of respondents declared a ratio in which adaptation
outweighed standardisation. The specific balance identified by these respondents was in all cases 70% adaptation/30%
standardisation, with no other ratios indicated. On the other hand, 44% declared a prevalence of elements of
standardisation in their CSR as follows: 5.5% indicated 90% standardisation/10% adaptation; 16.6% indicated 80%
standardisation/20% adaptation; the same percentage of 16.6% indicated 70% standardisation/30% adaptation; 22.2%
indicated 60% standardisation/40% adaptation. Finally, 5.5% of respondents indicated 50% standardisation/50%
adaptation. The data thus indicate that in general, the aspects of standardisation prevail over strategies that are
adapted from one nation to the next in global CSR strategies.
This affirmation is confirmed and seems justified by the answers to question 3, which asked about the feasibility of
adjusting the universal principles of CSR, such as environmental protection, development, education, security, health
and well-being, to the different cultures and expectations of local stakeholders. A full 67% of participants in the survey
held that universal principles “cannot be varied according to local circumstances”, while only 33% believe that they
can be “adapted to the different cultures and expectations of the local stakeholders”.
Questions 4 and 5 are directly connected to the central idea of the current study. Our primary purpose has been to
analyse the impact of global communications, which have now been available for some time and which promise to
become still more intense, on the formulation of CSR strategies by multinational companies. Question 4 is a preliminary
inquiry as to whether globally operating companies share our reasoning that CSR strategy must be multidimensional
and multi-stakeholder on the perception that “The social responsibility or irresponsibility of a company is evaluated by
a stakeholder on the basis of what it does in all the countries in which it operates”. As for the question of whether the
companies agree with this notion, the responses were: 39% of survey participants agree “very much” and 50% agree
“moderately”, while 11% agree “little”.
Finally, question 5 concerns the logical effect of the progressive increase in the intensity of global
communications on the formulation of a multinational company’s CSR strategy. We have argued that such an increase
serves as an amplifier of the impact of the company’s behaviour at the global level, thereby continuously reinforcing the
mechanisms of evaluation and judgement described in question 6. Thus, the answers to question 7 (for which almost
78% of the companies agree with this logic) strongly confirm the phenomenon of the homogenisation of the worldwide
stakeholders’ demand for CSR. In particular, we hold such homogenisation to be largely the result of the relatively new
and rapid diffusion of information on the Internet. In our opinion, the response of multinationals to the steadily
equalising demand for CSR will necessarily be a trend towards the standardisation of CSR strategy, which will then be
addressed to an overall global market.
The answers provided by the companies participating in this first empirical analysis appear to provide
confirmation that in the current global context, companies that operate in a number of countries increasingly tend to
standardise their CSR strategies due to the interdependencies that now exist between their stakeholders.
Research limits. From the conceptual analysis standpoint, we generally speak in this study of CSR strategies but
the analysis should be carried out more in depth in relation to the different CSR strategies, to identify those that are
162
CSR STRATEGY IN THE INTERNET ERA
most affected by the phenomenon of harmonization on a global scale.
From the empirical analysis standpoint, the main limitation of this study is the reduced number of global
companies of our sample that answered to our questionnaire. For this reason, a future research should take into
consideration in its empirical analysis more companies.
Practical implications. We contend that the criteria of selection and hierarchy of CSR expectations cannot be
used in the global context. Although the CSR expectations are specific and can be prioritised in local contexts, they
form a multidimensional framework on a global level, and this framework includes all of them. Even if local contexts
express a different order of priority to the various aspects of CSR, for a global firm the overall evaluation by
stakeholders is formed by observing its total social behaviour adopted all over the world.
A global firm is judged on the basis of what it does anywhere in the world; the social responsibility a firm
demonstrates in one country becomes a factor of evaluation for stakeholders worldwide, not only for those operating in
the specific country in which the firm has adopted that particular social behaviour. For instance, the negative
evaluation that Nike received a few years ago when the company used child labour in production processes in
Cambodia spread all over the world and affected consumer and stakeholder judgments on a world level. Indeed, the
disapproval of this behaviour was far greater in other parts of the world than in Cambodia itself. If a greater
“communicative isolation” and the separation between different countries once justified the adoption of a decentralised
local CSR strategy, this is no longer true in a world of global communications that put everything a firm does in the
process of conducting its business on display in a global shop window.
Therefore, it becomes necessary in a global context to have an overall strategic plan that the firm must be able to
define in a multidimensional and multi-stakeholder logic (Bondy et al., 2012; Govindan et al., 2014; Kumari 2014). It
is indeed necessary to consider the relations that the various categories of stakeholders maintain with each other and
the consequent reciprocal conditioning in positive and negative evaluations of the behaviour of the firm.
Originality of the study. Although many scholars have analysed the role of global communication (especially via
the Internet) regarding important brand-related issues (Christodoulides, 2009; de Chernatony, 2006; Godes et al.
2005; McAlister et al., 2012), we find that there is a gap in the corporate strategy literature regarding the impact of the
global communication on CSR strategy. Indeed, prior research highlights the fact that brand image is also the result of
communications that take place online (Jolly, 2001; Jones et al., 2009); Erdem and Swait (1998) pointed out that one of
the most important effects of the spread of the Internet and its related interactive technologies is that the information
asymmetry between consumers and firms that traditionally worked in favour of brands has been dramatically reversed
because of a many-to-many communication whereby consumers and stakeholders can interact not only with the firm but
also with other consumers and stakeholders; Jones, Temperley & Lima (2009) claimed that the power of web networks
has dramatically increased the speed and the reach of social communication, which can potentially damage company
image and create the perception of corporate irresponsibility. However, what the studies of international business has
not yet analysed so far is the impact of communication among stakeholders and among consumers on building the CSR
perceptions, and, as consequence, on the formulation of a CSR strategy especially for a global firm; the present study
deals with this unexplored topic.
Key words: CSR; Stakeholder theory; Globalization; Global communication
References
AKSAK E.O., FERGUSON M.A., DUMAN S.A. (2016), “Corporate social responsibility and CSR fit as predictors of corporate
reputation: A global perspective”, Public Relations Review, vol. 42, n. 1, pp. 79-81.
BONDY K., MOON J., MATTEN D. (2012), “An institution of corporate social responsibility (CSR) in multi-national corporations
(MNCs): form and implications”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 111, n. 2, pp. 281-299.
CHRISTODOULIDES G. (2009), “Branding in the post-internet era”, Marketing Theory, vol. 9, n. 1, pp. 141-144.
DE CHERNATONY L. (2006), From Brand Vision to Brand Evaluation, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford, UK.
ERDEM T., SWAIT J. (1998), “Brand equity as a signaling phenomenon”, Journal of Consumer Psychology, vol. 7, n. 2, pp. 131-57.
GODES D., MAYZLIN D., CHEN Y., DAS S., DELLAROCAS C., PFEIFFER B., LIBAI B., SEN S., SHI M., VERLEGH P.
(2005), “The firm’s management of social interactions”, Marketing Letters, vol. 16, n. 3/4, pp. 415-428.
GOVINDAN K., KANNAN D., SHANKAR K.M. (2014), “Evaluating the drivers of corporate social responsibility in the mining
industry with multi-criteria approach: A multi-stakeholder perspective”, Journal of Cleaner Production, vol. 84, pp. 214-232.
HAAS DORNAS K.B., CARVALHO DE MESQUITA J.M., PATROCINIO R. (2014), “The relationship between trust, value and
loyalty in the Internet era”, Journal of Business and Economics, vol. 5, n. 6, pp. 802-812.
JOLLY A. (2001), Managing Corporate Reputations, PRCA, London, UK.
JONES B., TEMPERLEY J., LIMA A. (2009), “Corporate reputation in the era of Web 2.0: the case of Primark”, Journal of
Marketing Management, vol. 25, n. 9/10, pp. 927-939.
KOLK A. (2016), “The social responsibility of international business: From ethics and the environment to CSR and sustainable
development”, Journal of World Business, vol. 51, pp. 23-34.
KUMARI N. (2014), “Business ethics and corporate social responsibility: A holistic approach”, British Journal of Business and
Management Research, vol. 1, n. 2, pp. 22-30.
163
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
MARK-HERBERT C., VON SHANTZ C. (2007), “Communicating corporate social responsibility - brand management”, Electronic
Journal of Business Ethics and Organization Studies, vol. 12, n. 2, pp. 4-11.
MASON C., SIMMONS J. (2014), “Embedding corporate social responsibility in corporate governance: A stakeholder systems
approach”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 119, n. 1, pp. 77-86.
MCALISTER L., SONNIER G., SHIVELY T. (2012), “The relationship between online chatter and firm value”, Marketing Letters,
vol. 23, n. 1, pp. 1-12.
MISKA C., WITT M.A., STAHL G.K. (2016), “Drivers of Global CSR Integration and Local CSR Responsiveness: Evidence from
Chinese MNEs”, Business Ethics Quarterly, vol. 26, n. 3, pp. 317-345.
PISANI N, KOURULA A., KOLK A., MEIJER R. (2017), “How global is international CSR research? Insights and
recommendations from a systematic review”, Journal of World Business, vol. 52, n. 5, pp. 591-614.
RASCHE A., MORSING M., MOON J. (2017), “The Changing Role of Business in Global Society”, in: Rasche, A., Morsing, M.,
Moon, J. (Eds), Corporate Social Responsibility: Strategy, Communication, Governance, Cambridge/New York: Cambridge
University Press, pp. 1-28.
RUSSELL D.W., RUSSELL C.A. (2010), “Here or there? Consumer reactions to corporate social responsibility initiatives:
egocentric tendencies and their moderators”, Marketing Letters, n. 21, pp. 65-81.
TORRES A., BIJMOLT T.H.A., TRIBÓ J.A., VERHOEF P.C. (2012), “Generating global brand equity through corporate social
responsibility to key stakeholders”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, vol. 29, n. 1, pp. 13-24.
VAN GELDER S. (2002), “General strategies for global brands”, Brand Meta - Global Brand Strategy, pp. 1-10.
164
Enhancing entrepreneurship for social change in the EuroMediterranean Region: Evidence from the UNIDO e4SC program
MICHAEL SHERIFF* MORENO MUFFATTO
Objectives. This ongoing study examines the profiles of 25 entrepreneurs for social change from the EuroMediterranean region participating in the UNIDO entrepreneurship for social change program (e4SC program), their
enterprises, and the contribution of the program to their entrepreneurial success and social impact.
Methodology. The study uses a case study approach to explore the phenomenon of entrepreneurs for social
change while seeking to enrich conceptual understanding. Multiple case studies are useful when answering the
questions of “why” and “how”, particularly with real-life phenomena that are still evolving and developing.
Findings. Interim findings show that there are various motivations and opportunity recognition of the
participants. However, the stories fail to mention the types of motivating factors. The themes that emerged from their
stories show that although they are from different backgrounds and educational levels, one thing they have in common
is the pursuance of positive social change in societies. The expectations of the participants on the practical and
emotional social support of the e4SC program range from the acquisition of skills and competencies to formation of
collaborative relationships and networks that will improve their personal and vocational wellbeing.
Research limits. The research is geographically limited to the Euro-Mediterranean region and the 25
participants were selected from the following 26 countries: Albania, Algeria, Bosnia and Herzegovina, Croatia,
Cyprus, Egypt, France, Greece, Israel, Italy, Jordan, Kosovo, Lebanon, Libya, Macedonia, Malta, Montenegro,
Morocco, Palestinian territories, Portugal, Serbia, Slovenia, Spain, Syria, Tunisia and Turkey. This factor limited our
analysis to qualitative methods.
Practical implications. The results will provide the academic community with a solid foundation to investigate the
construct of entrepreneurs for social change in different countries. This will enhance the mapping of concepts related to
this new construct. The results could be useful to policy makers when making informed decisions on policies and
strategies to promote entrepreneurship for social change. Prospective entrepreneurs for social change will use the
results to benchmark best practices.
Originality of the study. Despite the increasing interest of social entrepreneurship among scholars and
practitioners, very few studies tackle the topic of entrepreneurs for social change in a culturally, socially and politically
complex region like the Euro-Mediterranean.
Key words: entrepreneurs; social change; Euro-Mediterranean; UNIDO e4SC program
1. Introduction
Entrepreneurship for social change is a relatively new phenomenon with no exact definition. However, a similar
concept, which is social entrepreneurship, exist to create social value rather than personal wealth according to Simha
and Carey, 2012. Despite the increasing recognition of the contribution of social entrepreneurship to the social,
economic, cultural, and environmental wealth of nations (Fayolle & Matlay, 2010), research in social entrepreneurship
is somewhat fragmented, resulting in the concept not having a universal and consistent definition (Peredo and McLean,
2006; Short et al., 2009).
Various definitions introduce different perspectives of social entrepreneurship that brought in a plethora of
conceptualization of entrepreneurs involved in social entrepreneurship as social entrepreneurs, socially responsible
entrepreneurs, philanthropic entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs for social change. According to Mair and Marti (2006),
different aspects that vary according to the political, socioeconomic and cultural contexts can explain the dynamics of
social entrepreneurship.
Different types of entrepreneurs are actively involved in entrepreneurship for social change. However, there are
significant differences between a social entrepreneur, a socially responsible entrepreneur and an entrepreneur for
social change. Social entrepreneurs create new social organizations ex-nihilo while socially responsible entrepreneurs
*
Researcher in Entrepreneurship - School of Entrepreneurship - University of Padova
e-mail: michael.sheriff@unipd.it
Full professor of Innovation and Entrepreneurship - University of Padova
e-mail: moreno.muffatto@unipd.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
165
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.27
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
get involved into various charitable acts of donating part of their wealth and motivating others to do the same. On the
other hand, entrepreneurs for social change may operate in diverse sectors but their common denominator is to create
positive social change in communities.
The activities of entrepreneurs for social change influence lives across the globe by promoting non-violent social
change, since they target society as a whole. When the vision of one entrepreneur for social change from one stratum of
society is shared by another then a network of social change entrepreneurs is formed which flows through populations
irrespective of their economic development, cultural and religious stance.
However, for entrepreneurs for social change to succeed, they require not only an enabling environment, but also
training, mentoring, incubation and financial support. Through effective training and mentoring, entrepreneurs for
social change can play the role of change agents through social innovation by (a) adopting a mission to create and
sustain social value (b) recognizing and relentlessly pursuing new opportunities to serve this mission and (c) engaging
in a process of continuous innovation, adaptation and learning to ensure the success of their ventures.
Entrepreneurs for social change are compassionate toward suffering in communities. Such compassion may be
rooted in a general sense of empathy toward others based on one’s own similar life experiences, or a sense of sympathy
not based on similar experiences. Empathy and sympathy are motivational factors for prosocial activities (Powell and
Baker 2013). Examining entrepreneurs for social change in different contexts offers the potential of a richer
understanding of the motivations for prosocial activities.
There is curiosity to know what are the enabling and constraining factors that influence entrepreneurs for social
change and what support best addresses the barriers they face in launching and operating social enterprises. The 2017
participants of the UNIDO e4SC program provides a sample of entrepreneurs to examine these enabling factors and
constraining barriers in real time.
Entrepreneurs for social change are people who are passionate about making a difference. Often it is not the
actual ‘entrepreneurial venture’ that captures their imagination but the impact it will have for the social or
environmental issues they are seeking to address. Understanding the business models of these entrepreneurs can have
two key benefits:
(1) It can help young potential entrepreneurs for social change to understand, design, articulate and discuss the ‘nuts
and bolts’ of their business concept.
(2) It can help these entrepreneurs to test, and develop prototypes which will enable them to see if what they
passionately believe about their impact and entrepreneurial ventures actually ‘stacks up’ in practice.
According to Alter (2006), the hallmark of social entrepreneurship lies in its ability to combine social interests with
business practices to effect social change. Hence, the crux of the individual social enterprise lies in the specifics of its
dual objectives - the depth and breadth of social impact to be realized, and the amount of money to be earned: the
business model. Alter (2006) suggests three main categories defined by the emphasis and priority given to its financial
and social objectives: external, integrated, and embedded social enterprises.
In external social enterprises, social value creating programs are distinct from profit-oriented business activities.
The business enterprise activities are ‘external’ from the organization’s social operations and programs. In integrated
social enterprises, social programs overlap with business activities, but are not synonymous. Social and financial
programs often share costs, assets, and program attributes. In the embedded social enterprise, business activities and
social programs are synonymous. Social programs are self-financed through enterprise revenues and thus, the
embedded social enterprise can be a stand-alone sustainable program. The relationship between business activities and
social programs is comprehensive, financial and social benefits are achieved simultaneously. This work will focus on
innovations in embedded business models.
Understanding the hybridity of these models can bridge several divides according to the chosen criteria of
classification. For example, ultimate ends (for-profit, non-for-profit); societal sector (markets, civil society); products
status (goods, services); ownership (private, cooperative).
2. Research design
Entrepreneurs for social change and their enterprises do not exist in a bubble, it is therefore important to
understand the effects of organizations such as the UNIDO e4SC program that support these entrepreneurs. Other very
practical reasons to conduct an in-depth inquiry about entrepreneurs for social change include (i) to buttress evidence
that entrepreneurs for social change calls for a different kind of evaluation compared to that of conventional
entrepreneurship. (ii) to provide evidence that entrepreneurship is a promising instrument for advancing positive social
change. (iii) to give additional support in the form of legislations and other sorts of policies to promote positive social
change through entrepreneurship. (iv) to confirm that the mixture of skills and aptitude of entrepreneurs for social
change differs significantly from those of conventional entrepreneurship. (v) to identify best practices in
entrepreneurship for social change business model innovation. (vi) to identify the roles of customers in enhancing
entrepreneurship for social change.
The activities of these entrepreneurs are embedded in the social contexts in which the motivations and
opportunities surface, become recognized, and exploited. Examining motivations in isolation is static and limits the
understanding regarding the dynamic evolution of the entrepreneurial process (Shane, Locke, and Collins 2003) while
examining entrepreneurship for social change in different contexts offers the potential of a richer understanding.
166
ENHANCING ENTREPRENEURSHIP FOR SOCIAL CHANGE IN THE EURO-MEDITERRANEAN REGION: EVIDENCE FROM THE UNIDO E4SC PROGRAM
The life story method is a form of narrative analysis which is useful in examining entrepreneurial motivations in
general (Gartner 2010), and the motivations of entrepreneurs for social change in particular (Nicholls 2010). It is
considered to be an appropriate method for theory building as it enables a comprehensive examination of social
entrepreneurs sensemaking, that is, the delineation social entrepreneurs make between their motivations and patterns of
actions (Baron 2012). This theory-building approach allows an in-depth understanding of the research questions.
Research questions
We proposes a model with multiple cases for the development of a more vivid, illustrative and descriptive and
picture to answer a set of sub-questions of the main query i.e. ‘what motivates entrepreneurs for social change to start
entrepreneurial ventures?’ The set of sub-questions include:
Research Question 1: What factors motivate entrepreneurs for social change to start an entrepreneurial venture
and how do different motivations influence opportunity recognition?
Research Question 2: How do entrepreneurs for social change perceive that, there exist a social need and how do
they try to alleviate this need?
Research Question 3: What are some of the initial challenges entrepreneurs for social change face when setting
up entrepreneurial ventures and what factors help them overcome the initial challenges?
3. Methodology
The research philosophy for this study is based on “realism” shaped by social, political, cultural and economic
values. The methodology selected for the research is initially inductive, starting with a basic understanding of the way
entrepreneurs for social change are motivated to create their enterprises, permitting alternative explanations and
theories of this understanding within the context of events and using a flexible variety of data collection methods.
Case study strategy was chosen as it is considered useful when answering the questions “why” and “how”,
particularly with real-life phenomena that are still evolving and developing (Eisenhardt, 1989; Yin, 1981). A qualitative
case study approach is appropriate to explore the poorly understood phenomenon of entrepreneurs for social change
while seeking to enrich conceptual understandings and generate theory. To learn from entrepreneurs for social change
willing to share their stories and generate an instrumental case. In this study, the unit of analysis is the individual
entrepreneur for social change.
Extant literature focus on the entrepreneurial phenomenon, producing numerous conceptual paradigms,
frameworks, models and empirical tests. However, these frameworks are often developed elsewhere – very different
from the Euro-Mediterranean region, directly testing these frameworks quantitatively may be inadequate. As Burgess
and Steenkamp (2006) posited, by simply testing existing frameworks in a vastly different context may lead to an
imposed-etic view. This study therefore, adopted a qualitative methodology, more suitable for a novel combination of
populations that have not been widely studied.
4. Data collection and analysis
Data collection for case study research is extensive and draws from multiple sources such as direct or participant
observations, interviews, archival records or documents, physical artifacts, and audiovisual materials. For this
research, data collection involves examining archival records, documents, audiovisual materials, surveys and
interviews with the current participants, trainers, and mentors. Furthermore, we will analyze the websites of the social
enterprises.
Data shall be analyzed in a layered process using qualitative methods (pattern-matching, explanation-building).
The first layer of the analysis will be a basic content analysis of the information on the participants’ applications and
websites of the enterprises. Overall, the themes identified in the first stage of analysis will provide an initial
understanding of the patterns that emerged from the data. The next layer will be more interpretive in that theoretical
frameworks will be used to perform narrative analyses on the survey and interview data.
Interviews will be analyzed in two stages. First, each interview will be analyzed separately, based on the
meaningful life events told by the entrepreneur for social change. Followed by an analysis of the references made
between their past events (life events, experience in early childhood, and values they absorbed from their parents) and
actions they decided to take in the present and in the future. Each story will be examined with respect to internal
consistency to understand the internal coherence of the story and the inferences made between the story parts. Overall,
the themes identified in the first stage of analysis will provide an initial understanding of the patterns that emerged
from the data.
In the second stage, similar themes that emerged across the stories will be analyzed. References and identified
patterns that emerged regarding motivations and opportunity recognition will be categorized. The data analysis
process is based on both “within” case and “cross” case analysis (Eisenhardt 1989).
Furthermore, we propose to conduct a qualitative comparative analysis in its fuzzy set version, fsQCA (Ragin,
167
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
2008) to cross compare successful with less successful instances of entrepreneurs for social change business models.
For the successful business models, we aim to highlight the degree of innovation in business models ranging from
incremental adjustments to radical changes. Such analysis will provide useful suggestions for business models redesign.
5. Preliminary findings
The age distribution of the participants is as follows: 28 years (20%), followed by 31 years (16%) with the oldest
participants being 35 years old. The youngest participants (23 years) old occupy the third position with 12%. The age
distribution is similar to the GEM MENA (2017) Report where the highest prevalence of entrepreneurship activity is
among the 25-34 year olds.
There are 13 male and 12 female participants. Although many studies maintain that women face greater
challenges in becoming entrepreneurial, the e4SC program ensured that the number of male and female participants is
almost equal with 52% male and 48% female participants.
Participants from the engineering discipline tops the list with 24% followed by participants from the social and
development work discipline with 20%. In the third position are participants from the science discipline with 16%. This
is in line with the observation that individuals in the engineering and scientific disciplines are concern with providing
solutions to societies’ problems while individuals in social and development disciplines are concerned with improving
the social status of societies
The Master/MBA is the highest qualification with the highest percentage (56%). Participants with a Bachelor
degree are 36%. There are only a few participants with a High School Diploma (8%). It is evident that most of the
participants have attained university education (92%) which is a clear indication that the entrepreneurs have the
capability to undergo the training provided by the e4SC program.
The themes that emerged from the stories of the entrepreneurs’ show that they although they are from different
backgrounds and educational levels, one thing they have in common is to help bring positive change in societies. The
main beneficiaries targeted are vulnerable groups, children, youths and women. The deliverables of their
entrepreneurial projects are a mixture of goods and services. A majority of the participants have some experience from
previous work engagements. However, from their stories it is evident that for most of the participants, this is their first
entrepreneurial adventure.
About 84% of the enterprises are within the generally established age for entrepreneurial ventures, which is 3.5
years (Global Entrepreneurship Monitor definition). About 28% of the enterprises are in the process of being
established and 8% are at the idea stage. These last two categories of enterprises stand to gain more from the e4SC
program since they are not yet fully established; there is flexibility to accommodate the knowledge and skills acquired
from the program.
With 32% of the enterprises offering some kind of education and training, we deduced that the focus on capacity
building brings social benefits. About 24% of the enterprises are operating in industrial processes, which confirms that
most of the entrepreneurs have an engineering background. This enables the transfer of engineering skills to achieve
social benefits. Only 12% of the participants operate directly in the social sector group.
The main goal of a social entrepreneur is the creation of social wealth. However, their enterprises fall within two
polar positions videlicet: (a) for profit and (b) not for profit. It is not surprising that most of the enterprises 68% are the
for-profit type. A plausible explanation is the emergence of business models that enhance the shift from voluntary and
charity organizations to social enterprises that create revenue for financial sustainability.
The expectations of the participants on the practical and emotional social support of the e4SC program range
from the acquisition of skills and competencies to formation of collaborative relationships and networks that will
improve their personal and vocational wellbeing. The participants hope to meet with investors, receive support and get
feedback from peers as well as trainers and mentors.
6. Discussion
We observed that there are various motivations and opportunity recognition of the participants. However, the
stories fail to elucidate the types of motivating factors. There are two dominant motivating factors classified as (i) pull
factors that included prosocial behaviors based on past or current life events and (ii) push factors that include job
dissatisfaction and a search for meaning. Push factors may be associated with personal or external factors. Push
motivations characterize people who have fewer opportunities in the job market. In contrast, Pull factors are selfmotivations driven by internal choices, such as identifying opportunities and the desire to be active socially in order to
achieve social goals.
The next phase of the research will explore these factors through questionnaires and interviews. This will enhance
the development of a model that links motivations, opportunity recognition and the prosocial activities of the
participants to understand how the experiences of the participants created an awareness of unmet societal needs that
led to opportunity recognition and the formation of social enterprises for positive social change.
The activities of the next phase of the research will involve the distribution of questionnaires to all the
participants. To conduct interviews with the participants where possible. The aim of both approaches is to elicit enough
168
ENHANCING ENTREPRENEURSHIP FOR SOCIAL CHANGE IN THE EURO-MEDITERRANEAN REGION: EVIDENCE FROM THE UNIDO E4SC PROGRAM
information and data from the experiences of the entrepreneurs for social change.
Successive phases will explore the following:
Key challenges of entrepreneurs for social change and their enterprises
Interventions and support from E4SC to confront the challenges
Development of a conceptual predictive framework and a guide for entrepreneurs for social change
References
ALTER S.K. (2006), “Social Enterprise models and their mission and money relationships”, in Nicholls A., (Ed.), Social
Entrepreneurship - new models for sustainable social change, Oxford University Press, Oxford.
BARON R.A. (2012), Entrepreneurship: An Evidence-Based Guide, UK: Edward Elgar, Cheltenham.
BURGESS S.M., STEENKAMP J.B.E.M. (2006). “Marketing renaissance: how research in emerging markets advances marketing
science and practice”, International Journal of Research in Marketing, vol. 23, n. 4, pp. 337-356.
EISENHARDT K. (1989), Building theories from case study research. Academy of Management Review, vol. 14, n. 4, pp. 532-550.
FAYOLLE A., MATLAY H. (2010), “Social entrepreneurship: A multicultural and multidimensional perspective”, in Fayolle A.,
Matlay H. (Eds.), Handbook of research on social entrepreneurship (pp. 1-14, UK: Edward Elgar, Cheltenham.
GARTNER W.B. (2010), A New Path to the Waterfall: A Narrative on a Use of Entrepreneurial Narrative. International Small
Business Journal, vol. 28, n. 1, pp. 6-19.
GEM MENA (2017), Middle East and Africa Report
MAI J., MARTI I. (2006), “Social entrepreneurship research: a source of explanation, prediction, and delight”, Journal of World
Business, vol. 41, n. 1, pp. 36-44.
NICHOLLS A. (2010), “The Legitimacy of Social Entrepreneurship: Reflexive Isomorphism in a Pre-Paradigmatic Field”,
Entrepreneurship Theory and Practice vol. 34, n. 4, pp. 611-633.
PEREDO A.M., MCLEAN M. (2006), “Social Entrepreneurship: A critical review of the concept”, The Journal of World Business,
vol. 41, pp. 56-65.
POWELL E.E., BAKER T. (2013), How Can We Help? The Distinctive Impact of Empathy and Sympathy in the Emergence of
Social Venture Missions, Paper presented at the mini conference on social change, innovation, and entrepreneurial activity,
SASE, Milan, Italy.
RAGIN C.C. (2008), Redesigning social inquiry: Set relations in social research, Chicago University Press, Chicago.
SHANE S., LOCKE E.A., COLLINS C.J. (2003), “Entrepreneurial Motivation”, Human Resource Management Review, vol. 13, pp.
257-279.
SHORT J.C., MOSS T.W., LUMPKIN G.T. (2009), “Research in social entrepreneurship: past contributions and future
opportunities”, Strategic Entrepreneurship Journal, vol. 3, n. 2, pp. 161-194.
SIMHA A., CAREY M.R. (2012), “The Encyclical Letter (Caritas in Veritate) - A Shout-out to Social Entrepreneurship”, The
Journal of Entrepreneurship, vol. 21, no. 1.
YIN R.K. (1981), “The case study as a serious research strategy”, Science Communication, vol. 3, n. 1, pp. 9-114.
Websites
http://www.cueim.it
http://www.sinergiejournal.it
169
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
170
Ethics perceived in IMIs socially responsible investments (SRIs):
some findings and perspectives on UK
and Italian Asset Management companies
MAURO SCIARELLI* MARIO TANI CATELLO GIOVANNI LANDI LORENZO TURRIZIANI**
Objectives. In this still ongoing work, we look into the communication processes of IMIs in order to understand if a
potential investor is able to evaluate their ethical approach and if he perceives a gap between the IMIs activities, their
investment decisions, and the image they are communicating through their websites. We have focused only on the IMIs
websites and social media accounts as they are the main channel for the social voluntary disclosure of modern
companies (Castelo Branco and Rodriguez, 2008) and the main source of the company’s self-presentation (Esrock and
Leichty,1998; Maignan and Ralston, 2002). In particular, in accordance with the increasingly growing development
and use of new communication technologies by companies, social networking has granted new possibilities for
organizations to engage their stakeholders by allowing them to send information out quickly and to receive real-time
feedback (Lovejoy et al., 2012). Hence, in this perspective, social networks can be defined as those “virtual places”
driven by user-participation and user-generated content (Tredennick, 2006). Moreover, it can be argued that the social
media innovation has favored the creation of a closer relationship between the firm and its customers by the use of the
web and its tools, considering the importance they have gained in the latest years (Della Corte, Iavazzi, D’Andrea,
2015).
Hence, in order to analyze this, we formulated one starting hypothesis:
H1. Ethical IMIs have to be consistent in their values communication
According to the idea that corporation behavior should be transparent in order to obtain and maintain a
competitive advantage over the time (De Pelsmacker and Janssens, 2007), we have deployed this first hypothesis in two
sub-hypotheses in order to focus attention on the role of perceived quality of information and communication activity
realized by the ethical IMIs:
H1/a. Evaluators will look at the effect they have on society (sustainability)
H1/b. Evaluators will look for coherence in the IMI’s behavior
Firstly (H1/a), the study explores the relationship between sustainability and the degree of ethicality perceived by
potential investors with respect to each individual IMI’s activity. In fact, according to Keijzers (2002), the notions of
sustainability and ethics had shown separate paths in the past, while recently they have grown into convergence. As a
consequence, nowadays, customers, employees, suppliers, community groups, governments, and some shareholders
have encouraged firms to undertake additional investments in corporate social responsibility (CSR) (McWilliams,
2000). On the other hand, we tried to understand if a consistent behavior can be considered an important driver for the
IMI’s corporate evaluation by the potential investor (H1/b).
Indeed, despite the widely accepted idea of a shared value, many well-managed companies seem less interested in
totally integrating CSR with their business strategies and goals than in devising a cogent CSR program aligned with the
company’s purpose and values (Rangan et al., 2015). However, to maximize their positive impact on the social and
environmental systems in which they operate, companies must develop coherent CSR strategies (Rowe, 2006). So we
defined our second hypothesis as:
H2. Ethical IMIs will leverage Ethics in their Communication (a) and in their Funds Prospects (b)
*
**
Full Professor of Management - University of Naples Federico II
e-mail: mauro.sciarelli@unina.it
Research Associate in Management - University of Naples Federico II
e-mail: mario.tani@unina.it
Research Assistant in Management - University of Naples Federico II
e-mail: catellogiovanni.landi@unina.it
PhD Student in Management - University of Naples Federico II
e-mail: lorenzo.turriziani@unina.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
171
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.28
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
In this part of the study, we try to shed light on the level of depth and transparency of the ethically connoted
activities actually carried out by the IMIs. In fact, it is clear to understand that if the ethically and socially qualified
activities are communicated but not appropriately foreseen and bound within the official information documents
provided for each IMI’s SRI (KIIDs and financial prospects), then the ethics communicated through the web and social
networks can only be considered as a mere tool of ethical investor “fishing”. This aspect would be strongly linked to
social and green washing practices (Laufer, 2003). Indeed, with growing global environmental-related issues and the
general perception that businesses are among the major contributors to them, corporations are pressured to become
environmentally sustainable. Research has found that in response to pressures from the external context, some
companies respond symbolically with little to no substance (Westphal and Zajac, 2001), while others take substantive
actions to address their environmental performance. Firms engaging in either symbolic or substantive actions are
attempting to gain legitimacy among relative stakeholders.
Methodology. 1) Population - In order to test these hypotheses, we looked only to the IMIs that have explicitly
expressed an interest in SRIs and we have engaged students enrolled in a Business Ethics course in order to know how
they perceive the products (SRIs) and the IMIs generally.
We selected the IMIs starting from those that have chosen to be members in one of the national chapters of the
EUROSIF, the European Sustainable Investment Forum. Moreover, we have decided to focus on two countries that
have been already used in previous literature on the topics of Ethics, Sustainability, and CSR (Burlando, 2001;
Albareda, et al., 2006; Smith-Doerr, 2009) as they are deemed to be different: Italy and the UK. Moreover, as we
wanted to investigate the perception of a general retail investor, we focused only on those IMIs that are actively
involved in creating funds to sell at retail investors not considering those that operate only in the asset management or
in the impact investing segments of the financial market.
2) Approach - The analysis adopts a Content Analysis approach (Krippendorf, 1989; 2012; Neuendorf, 2002) in order
to get a richer evaluation of the IMIs starting from the way they communicate using their Websites. The Content
Analysis approach has been selected as it helps in understanding the meaning of a content taking into account the
context it has been selected out. Moreover, this method is considered to be a fundamental technique for studying online
information (Kim et al., 2014).
More specifically, we asked the students to evaluate the selected IMIs website on four main dimensions:
company’s self-presentation, financial products, web and social media communication and consistency. To make the
analysis on all the dimensions comparable to each other we also defined a general common process of analysis. This
process was divided into distinct steps for each of the four dimensions and we organized several meetings to clarify
doubts and to explain each steps in further detail; in the first step we explained the distinctive characteristics of the
specific dimension currently analyzed, then we asked the students to evaluate if the categories were relevant in the
analyzed texts (Kent and Taylor, 1998), then the students were asked to analyze each statements according to the
phase-relevant topics. Finally, after a detailed evaluation, the students provided an overall evaluation adopting a Likert
scale (1 to 5).
About the four dimensions explored, the students looked into the corporate part of the website in order to
understand the IMI’s self-presentation firstly (company’s mission, vision and history). In this way, they could evaluate
the role Ethics, sustainability and social responsibility had in the image each IMI has been trying to project on the
market. A second step in the analysis focused on how these institutions describe their methodology and on how they
present the ethic- and the sustainability- related topics in their financial documents (Methodological Approach, Fund
Reports, Key Investors Information Documents). Then, we asked them to evaluate the relevance of ethics, sustainability
and social responsibility in their communication channels. A specific part of this sub-analysis has been geared toward
the stakeholder engagement practices these IMIs do communicate as they have been already considered as a good
proxy for the communication transparency that is needed to be a legitimate actor in modern markets (Morsing, Schultz,
2006). Finally, an overall evaluation about the coherence between the three phases previously analyzed has been
requested.
As all variables evaluated are dichotomous with parameter values of 0 and 1, the value for each item represents
its relative frequency, that is, for each IMI, the percentage of web-site and social media communication which were
coded positively for that item. To address our hypotheses and to identify the strength of the relationship between the
perceived central role of ethics and central role of sustainability (HP 1/a), coherence in values (HP1/b), ethics in web
and social media (HP 2/a) and in financial products (HP 2/b), a multivariate descriptive analysis was performed.
(Blaikie, 2003).
172
ETHICS PERCEIVED IN IMIS SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE INVESTMENTS (SRIS
Findings.
Fig. 1:The relationship between ethics and sustainability
Source: research dataset
With regards to the first sub-hypothesis it is clear that more ethical IMIs (blue points) meets sustainability issues
according to evaluators [Hp1.a]. The strength of the relationship is almost perfectly linear, and this is probably linked
to the logical and meaningful link between the notion of sustainability within the more generic ethical one.
Fig. 2: The relationship between ethics and coherence in values
Source: research dataset
IMIs deploying a more ethical approach in their practices seem to be consistent in all phases under investigation
[Hp1.b]. This positive correlation confirms the assumption that the consistency between the IMIs activities carried out
impacts positively on the degree of ethicality perceived by the potential investor.
173
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
Fig. 3: The relationship between perceived ethics and ethical content in Web and social media activities
Source: research dataset
More ethical IMIs (blue points) tend to highlight their ethical commitment through web and social media
communication channels [Hp2.a]. As mentioned before, if IMIs want to attract resources from ethically oriented
investors, they should disclose their value-proposition broadly, making ethical aspects relevant and recognizable
(Morsing, 2006). Nowadays the web and social media seem to be the most effective channels to convey the ethical
content of IMIs business and to increase the ethical investors awareness.
Fig. 4: The relationship between perceived ethics and ethical content in SRI Activities
Source: research dataset
However, more ethical IMIs (blue points) give a lower relevance to ethics in their financial prospects (such as the
KIIDs) [Hp2.b]. The negative correlation suggests that probably the ethical content in SRI activities does not influence
the overall perceived ethical assessment of the potential investor. This aspect is linked to the Internet’s more efficient
mediating role in trying to engage stakeholders in dialogue than the traditional information channels represented by
standard documents, more technically connotated and often difficult to interpret for many kinds of investors. Indeed, ne
of the benefits of the internet in communicating information to stakeholders over traditional communication channels is
related to the possibility of providing information targeted to different and specific stakeholders and to obtain feedback
from them (Esrock and Leichty, 2001). Furthermore, new web features such as blogs or social networks provide IMIs
with the opportunity of attracting new and younger target groups (Ingenhoff and Koelling, 2008).
174
ETHICS PERCEIVED IN IMIS SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE INVESTMENTS (SRIS
Fig. 5: The relationship between ethics in IMIs financial products and ethics in web and social media activities
Source: research dataset
Finally, more ethical IMIs disclose their SRIs in web and social communication more markedly (though SRIs of
more ethical IMIs are not ethically framed in their prospects). From this point of view the Internet could also become
an effective medium for identity communication. It is especially relevant for communicating and constituting a “green
company” identity as the internet offers easy and low-cost mass-targeted communication (Biloslavo and Trnavčevič,
2009). Thus, the construction of a good identity through the web and social media seems to be sufficient to maintain a
high level of perceived ethics and coherence.
Research limits. One limitation of the present study is that each IMI has been evaluated from three to five times
only. Indeed, the research is based upon a relatively small population. Hence, future studies could extend the present
analysis on a more international level, not necessarily tied to asset management companies only. Furthermore, by using
a larger group of evaluators, our idea for a future development of the present work consists in the definition of a
multiple regression model able to verify the determinants of the perceived ethicality regarding the IMIs financial
activities; this would indicate whether the results obtained can be generalized broadly.
Another limitation of this study refers to the methodological approach; the likert scale (ranging from 1 to 5)
submitted to students for the overall evaluation, could be reductive. Furthermore, probably the students are not in the
main target of the evaluated IMIs. This criticism could lead us to rethink, for future research, to the group of
evaluators, differentiating it into distinct clusters and extending it to other categories of subjects with different
preferences, interests and competences.
Practical implications. This paper has many implications for the existing literature and practice of the use of social
networks and web-sites as a communication strategy. Firstly, as the results suggests, more ethical IMIs seem to give a
lower relevance to ethics in their financial prospects - such as KIIDs and prospects - [Hp2.b]. However, quite
paradoxically, more ethical IMIs disclose their SRIs in web and social communication strongly although more ethical
IMIs financial products are not ethically framed in their prospects. This apparent ambiguity is broadly linked to the
increasingly current debate about CSR issues and relative problems, in particular with reference to the famous critics
raised by Friedman (1971) who considered that the only social responsibility of the firm is to make profits. This can be
linked to the instrumental view of CSR: firms will be “responsible” only if it is a way to maximize their profits or their
market share. This skepticism may be reinforced by the greenwashing attitude. The phenomenon of greenwashing does
not mean that the IMI does not have to communicate around social or environmental considerations. However, if IMIs
perceived as more ethical by potential investors communicate the ethics of their SRIs through web channels and social
networks but, at the same time, from a substantial point of view, they do not build their products respecting ethical and
sustainability principles, then the perceived ethicality is not substantial but is only linked to market and customer
differentiation strategy reasons. Market external factors are so important drivers of greenwashing. In addition,
individual-level psychological and cognitive factors influence managers’ decision-making processes and thus influence
how external drivers translate into motivation for action (Schilliro and Graziano, 2011).
In this perspective, it could be interesting to investigate which phase of our analysis make the potential investors
aware about their IMIs assessment and how much perception is able to affect investment decision making of the
investor. In addition, our further researches could shed light on the clarification of the drivers of greenwashing,
according to the existing works in management, strategy, sociology, and psychology that has studied and established
the key factors that can influence firm and individual behavior under various circumstances.
175
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
Originality of the study. The analysis conducted has taken into account the perception of the degree of ethics about
the socially responsible investment funds by the potential investors. Indeed, if the company wants to attract resources
from ethically oriented investors, it has to communicate their value-proposition, making ethical aspects relevant and
recognizable. In relation to this, different authors (Hoeffler and Keller 2002; Sen and Bhattacharya, 2004) noted how
the benefit deriving from socially responsible behavior can only be obtained by managing to maintain constantly the
same conduct over time.
Despite all the limitation previously presented, this work has shed light on a criticality not properly treated so far in
business ethics studies, that relating to the ambiguity between the formal ethics communicated in the websites and
social networks and the substantial ethical commitment actually assumed within the IMIs key information documents.
This result is particularly relevant and current because it places the communication activity as the main strategic asset
and tool for creating a positive and ethically connoted corporate image over the time.
In fact, many companies have been taking advantage of the web to communicate their socially responsible activities
and, according to Castelo Branco and Rodriguez (2008), the study of this media is essential to understand how much a
company is sustainable. Moreover, companies use the web to make the stakeholders conscious about their socially
responsible activities (Williams and Pei, 1999) with more details than those they could provide otherwise (Esrock and
Leichty, 2000). Hence, facilitating interaction between an unlimited number of individuals, the Internet provides
organizations with the unique possibility of engaging publics in dialogue (Ingenhoff and Koelling, 2009). In particular,
with respect to the new models of online communication, social media are especially highlighted (Boyd and Ellison,
2007). Overall, there is a growing and substantial use of such technologies, since through them organizations provide
their stakeholders a place to exchange opinions and thoughts, resulting in an excellent source of information to predict
societal behavior (Schoen et al., 2013; Jungherr and Jurgens, 2013; Kalampokis et al., 2013).
This relationship of influence between web and social media communication and the perceived degree of ethicality
regarding the financial activities carried out by the IMIs configures new possible scenarios of study and research on
the reconsideration of new non-financial aspects so far not considered related to investment decisions.
Key words: Ethical Finance; Investment Management Institutions; Content Analysis; Social Voluntary Disclosure;
ESG Paradigm; Socially Responsible Investment
References
ALBAREDA L., TENCATI A., LOZANO J.M., PERRINI F. (2006), “The government's role in promoting corporate responsibility:
a comparative analysis of Italy and UK from the relational state perspective”, Corporate Governance: The International
Journal of Business in Society, vol. 6, n. 4, pp. 386-400.
BAUER R., KOEDIJK K., OTTEN R. (2005), “International evidence on ethical mutual fund performance and investment style”,
Journal of Banking & Finance, vol. 29, n. 7, pp. 1751-1767.
BEAUCHAMP T.L. (2001), Philosophical ethics: An introduction to moral philosophy, Mcgraw-Hill, New York.
BILBAO-TEROL A., ARENAS-PARRA M., CAÑAL-FERNÁNDEZ V. (2012), “Selection of socially responsible portfolios using
goal programming and fuzzy technology”, Information Sciences, vol. 189, pp. 110-125.
BILOSLAVO R., TRNAVČEVIČ A. (2009). Web sites as tools of communication of a “green” company”, Management Decision,
vol. 47, n. 7, pp. 1158-1173.
BLAIKIE N. (2003). Analyzing quantitative data: From description to explanation, Sage, London.
BOULSTRIDGE E., CARRIGAN M. (2000), “Do consumers really care about corporate responsibility? Highlighting the attitudebehaviour gap”, Journal of Communication Management, vol. 4, n. 4, pp. 355-368.
BRANCO M.C., RODRIGUES L.L. (2008), “Factors influencing social disclosure by Portuguese companies”, Journal of Business
Ethics, vol. 83, n. 4, pp. 685-701.
BURLANDO R.M. (2001), “Ethical finance: its achievements in Great Britain and Italy”, World Futures, vol. 56, n. 4, pp. 369-398.
DELLA CORTE V., IAVAZZI A., D’ANDREA C. (2015), “Customer involvement through social media: the cases of some
telecommunication firms”, Journal of Open Innovation: Technology, Market, and Complexity, vol. 1, n. 1, p. 10.
DOBSON J. (1993), “The role of ethics in finance”, Financial Analysts Journal, vol. 49, n. 6, pp. 57-61.
DOBSON J. (2010), “Behavioral assumptions of finance”, in Boatright J.R. (ed) Finance Ethics: Critical Issues in Theory and
Practice, John Wiley & Sons, Hoboken, NJ, pp. 45-61.
ELLISON N. B. (2007), “Social network sites: Definition, history, and scholarship”, Journal of computer-mediated Communication,
vol. 13, n. 1, pp. 210-230.
ESROCK S.L., LEICHTY G.B. (1998), “Social responsibility and corporate web pages: Self-presentation or agenda-setting?”,
Public Relations Review, vol. 24, n. 3, pp. 305-319.
ESROCK S.L., LEICHTY G.B. (2000), “Organization of corporate web pages: Publics and functions”, Public Relations Review,
vol. 26, n. 3, pp. 327-344.
HOCKERTS K., MOIR L. (2004), “Communicating corporate responsibility to investors: The changing role of the investor relations
function”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 52, n. 1, pp. 85-98.
HOEFFLER S., KELLER K.L. (2002), “Building brand equity through corporate societal marketing”, Journal of Public Policy &
Marketing, vol. 21, n. 1, pp. 78-89.
INGENHOFF D., KOELLING A.M. (2009), “The potential of Web sites as a relationship building tool for charitable fundraising
NPOs”, Public Relations Review, vol. 35, n. 1, pp. 66-73.
JUNGHERR A., JÜRGENS P. (2013), “Forecasting the pulse: how deviations from regular patterns in online data can identify
offline phenomena”, Internet Research, vol. 23, n. 5, pp .589-607.
176
ETHICS PERCEIVED IN IMIS SOCIALLY RESPONSIBLE INVESTMENTS (SRIS
KALAMPOKIS E., TAMBOURIS E., TARABANIS K. (2013), “Understanding the predictive power of social media”, Internet
Research, vol. 23, n. 5, pp. 544-559.
KEIJZERS G. (2003), “Creating sustainable directions: evolving stakeholder approach in seven multinationals”, The Journal of
Corporate Citizenship, vol. 10, s.n. , pp. 79-89.
KENT M.L., TAYLOR M. (1998), “Building dialogic relationships through the World Wide Web”, Public Relations Review, vol.
24, n. 3, pp. 321-334.
KIM D., CHUN H., KWAK Y., NAM Y. (2014), “The employment of dialogic principles in website, Facebook, and Twitter
platforms of environmental nonprofit organizations”, Social Science Computer Review, vol. 32, n. 5, pp. 590-605.
KRIPPENDORFF K. (1989), “Content analysis”, in Barnouw E., Gerbner G., Schramm W., Worth T.L., Gross L. (Eds.),
“International encyclopedia of communication”, (Vol. 1, pp. 403-407), Oxford University Press., New York, NY.
KRIPPENDORFF K. (2012), “Content analysis: An introduction to its methodology”, Sage.
LAUFER, W. S. (2003), “Social accountability and corporate greenwashing”, Journal of Business Ethics, vol. 43, n. 3, pp. 253-261.
LEICHTY G., ESROCK S. (2001), “Change and response on the corporate web site”, American Communication Journal
(Electronic version), vol. 5, n. 1, pp. 1-13.
LOVEJOY K., WATERS R.D., SAXTON G.D. (2012), “Engaging stakeholders through Twitter: How nonprofit organizations are
getting more out of 140 characters or less”, Public Relations Review, vol. 38, n. 2, pp. 313-318.
MAIGNAN I., RALSTON D.A. (2002), “Corporate social responsibility in Europe and the US: Insights from businesses’ selfpresentations”, Journal of International Business Studies, vol. 33, n. 3, pp. 497-514.
MCLACHLAN J., GARDNER J. (2004), “A comparison of socially responsible and conventional investors”, Journal of Business
Ethics, vol. 52, n. 1, pp. 11-25.
MCWILLIAMS A., SIEGEL D. (2000), “Corporate social responsibility and financial performance: correlation or
misspecification?”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 21, n. 5, pp. 603-609.
MORSING M., SCHULTZ M. (2006), “Corporate social responsibility communication: stakeholder information, response and
involvement strategies”, Business Ethics: A European Review, vol. 15, n. 4, pp. 323-338.
NEUENDORF K.A. (2002), The content analysis guidebook, Sage, London.
RANGAN K., CHASE L., KARIM S. (2015), “The truth about CSR”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 93, n. 1/2, pp. 40-49.
ROWE M. (2006), “Reputation, relationships and risk: A CSR primer for ethics officers”, Business and Society Review, vol. 111, n.
4, pp. 441-455.
SAUER D.A. (1997), “The impact of social-responsibility screens on investment performance: Evidence from the Domini 400
Social Index and Domini Equity Mutual Fund”, Review of Financial Economics, vol. 6, n. 2, pp.137-149.
SCHILIRO D., GRAZIANO M. (2011), “Choices and rationality in economic models: a multidisciplinary analysis”
SCHOEN H., GAYO-AVELLO D., TAKIS METAXAS P., MUSTAFARAJ E., STROHMAIER M., GLOO, P. (2013), “The power
of prediction with social media”, Internet Research, vol. 23, n. 5, pp. 528-543.
SEN S., BHATTACHARYA C.B., KORSCHUN D. (2006), “The role of corporate social responsibility in strengthening multiple
stakeholder relationships: A field experiment”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, vol. 34, n. 2, pp. 158-166.
SMITH-DOERR L. (2009), “Discourses of dislike: Responses to ethics education policies by life scientists in the UK, Italy, and the
US”, Journal of Empirical Research on Human Research Ethics, vol. 4, n. 2, pp. 49-57.
SPARKES R. (1998). “The challenge of ethical investment: activism, assets and analysis”, in The role of business ethics in
economic performance, Palgrave Macmillan UK, pp. 141-170.
TREDINNICK L. (2006), “Web 2.0 and Business: A pointer to the intranets of the future?”, Business Information Review, vol. 23,
n. 4, pp. 228-234.
WESTPHAL J.D., ZAJAC E.J. (2001), “Decoupling policy FROM practice: The case of stock repurchase programs”,
Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 46, n. 2, pp. 202-228.
WILLIAMS S.M., PEI C.A.H.W. (1999), “Corporate social disclosures by listed companies on their web sites: An international
comparison”, The International Journal of Accounting, vol. 34, n. 2, pp. 389-419.
177
TRACK - BUSINESS STRATEGIES FOR A BETTER WORLD
178
TRACK - COMPETITION
AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
Knowledge technology improvement in manufacturing systems.
Case analysis of ‘open strategy business model’
GIAN LUCA GREGORI, MARIA ROSARIA MARCONE
Advertising in extreme vs traditional sports. Is there a difference?
MICHELA C. MASON, ANDREA MORETTI, DANIELE SCARPI, FRANCESCO RAGGIOTTO
Who tells the story? Defining visual storytelling as a new territory in digital innovation narrative
REBECCA PERA
Le dinamiche coopetitive nell’ambito delle imprese multibusiness: un caso studio esplicativo
ROSANNA AMATA, GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO, ANNA MINÀ, PASQUALE MASSIMO PICONE
Il contributo della comunicazione al successo della strategia coopetitiva
SONIA C. GIACCONE, GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO, ALESSANDRA MAZZEI
Knowledge technology improvement in manufacturing systems.
Case analysis of ‘open strategy business model’
GIAN LUCA GREGORI* MARIA ROSARIA MARCONE
Objectives. A framework is proposed to study firms that deal with fashion, that operate in different competitive
contexts and that must launch new products frequently. The purpose of the research is to analyse relationship between
learning orientations in firms and the type of innovation that ensues (figure 1).
Nowadays R & D activities have been widely recognized as building blocks in modern companies.
In this research, we wanted to investigate whether the R&D area could contribute to rationalization of design and
specification activities and concretely found that, on the contrary, they could amplify the needs of defining projects and
features, especially in strategies for sustainability, which companies are increasingly sensitive, and in particular in
openness innovative strategies such as start-ups or incubators. R&D activities also in situations where they are applied
to the style office and manufacturing activity are still highly oversized compared to the operating needs of the
enterprise.
Innovation is central in the creative aspect of innovation processes as a market force. It is considered in the
literature that the first element is related to the introduction of a new product. The rest are considered to refer to
process innovations.
In managerial literature it has been affirmed that market orientation is the orientation of a company endorsing the
marketing concept. Two main conceptualizations of market orientation have emerged: on the one hand, market
orientation as composed of intelligence generation (i.e. the ability of the company to acquire information about the
marketing system), intelligence dissemination (i.e., the ability of the company to spread the information gathered about
the marketing system to all the units directly involved in the relationship with customers) and responsiveness (i.e. the
ability of the company to respond to changes in the marketing system in a timely manner to meet evolving expectations)
(Ulrich and Ellison, 2005; Besson et al., 2008; Tang, 2010). On the other hand, Narver and Slater (1990),
conceptualize market orientation as a three-dimensional construct composed of customer orientation, competitor
orientation (the key current and potential competitors) and inter-functional coordination. Market orientation, in both
cases, has been associated with the ability of the firm to establish collaborative relationships among units to increase
the ability to develop organization-wide responses to customer requirements (Darmon et al., 2011). the evidence of
peculiar architectural marketing skills at the base of the birth of new business units, makes the study of the forms of
internationalization of commerce more appropriate. We hypothesize the following.
H1. Market orientation has been positively associated with learning orientation and innovativeness.
The literature exploring innovation within the firm has primarily focused on the creative aspect of the creative
destruction concept by examining the sources of innovation for firms (Öberg, 2013). For example, our conceptual
model of innovation value chain (IVC) (Roper et al., 2008) focuses on knowledge sourcing and knowledge exploitation
at the firm level.
Most innovations are incremental in nature, and hence most are not radical enough to completely disrupt the
entire industries. Therefore, it is argued in this paper that firms are constantly going through their own stages of
creative destruction over time where they are creating knowledge (knowledge exploitation) and discontinuing them
(knowledge exploration or disruption), and therefore we outline the following hypothesis:
H2. Knowledge production (new and improved products/services) is associated with knowledge exploration
(destruction or discontinuity of products/services) and a ‘renewal effect’ of the firm’s products/services occurs.
The body of knowledge management study provides numerous approaches and classifications. We propose a
model-based approach, which can in turn be split into empirical investigation and building the structure project
“knowledge-portfolio” choices. We affirm that explorative learning creates new knowledge, which in turn provides new
products.
*
Full professor of Business Management - Marche Polytechnic University
e-mail: g.gregori@univpm.it
Full professor of Business Management - Marche Polytechnic University
e-mail: m.r.marcone@univpm.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
181
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.29
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
According to other theoretical frameworks, these are the ‘open innovation strategies’ (Poutanen et al., 2016)
construct, such as the fact that while open innovation activities are highly complex and involve multiple paradoxes and
multifaceted inter-organizational relationships, the open innovation literature fails to provide management with the
practical tools that enable all manufacturing companies, regardless of the manufacturing industry they belong to and
regardless of their size.
If at the open innovation is given an important strategic sense, it seems possible to consider open innovation as a
non-usual attempt for non-large companies to open up to emerging and participatory or crowd-based strategic
pathways recently conceptualized as an open innovation strategy (Appleyard and Chesbrough, 2017).
In this paper, innovative open innovation phenomena are being investigated by adopting Appleyard and
Chesbrough (2017) conceptualizations of openness as a business-level strategy. In this sense, the propensity to open the
design-engineering-production cycle is the desire to reconfigure the way to handle innovative activities in
manufacturing, creating a new business model. Such of this propensity is a significant part of the open strategy (Saebi
et al., 2015). In fact, criticism about the absoluteness of the cross-functional integration/NPD performance linkage has
emerged in time. For instance, too much diversity in the innovation processes within an organization may require the
commitment of significant resources (specific investments).
H3. A firm’s orientation towards the new innovative and open business model is vital in generating the success of
new products.
Fig. 1: Theoretical framework
Dynamic capabilities in MSEs that compete in the
knitwear sector
- Cognitive capabilities
OPERATIONS
- Entrepreneurial-managerial organizational capabilities
- Entrepreneurial-managerial organizational capabilities
- Integrated Production Cycle
- Internal Stylist Guidelines
- NPD activities
Inter-firm organisational relationship
- internationalization
- retailer relationships
- supplier relationships
IVC
Knowledge
competences
Proactive creation of
customer need
Intra-firm
interactivity
NPD Project Length
Business/Market Analysis
Technical Development
Product Testing
Product Commercialization
- BUSINESS MODEL CREATION
- INNOVATIVNESS (in a disruption sense)
- EXPORT ORIENTATION
- FINANCIAL NPD PERFORMANCE
- FINANCIAL NPD PERFORMANCE
NPD Project (start-up) Return
on Investments
Source: our elaboration
Methodology. The clothing industry in Italy was chosen as a target context, because many innovative pioneering
medium sized enterprises (MSEs) were operating in the industry.
This study analyses Italian knitwear manufacturers that operate both in international consumer and business
markets, and assesses the different forms of competition that exist between them. Because of the exploratory nature of
the research, a multiple case study approach is adopted in this study. It is based on empirical research conducted on
Italian firms that produce knitwear garments. The research has been carried out through a well-structured
questionnaire, as well as through repeated visits to the firms’ research centers in the course of which the hypotheses for
research among various area managers (styling, production, marketing, finance) are verified. The study uses both
inductive and deductive methods (with a prevalently positive-interpretative approach) in different phases of the study.
Three cases were investigated, which have been investigated over the past 5 years: they have been useful research
laboratories. Among the motivations that led to these cases are the following: they carry out internally the integrated
production cycle and generate on the national soil 80% of the total value created by the design-engineering and
production processes. The data were collected in three regions of Italy, Emilia Romagna, Marche, Umbria visiting
investigated companies over the five years (2012-2016).
182
KNOWLEDGE TECHNOLOGY IMPROVEMENT IN MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS. CASE ANALYSIS OF ‘OPEN STRATEGY BUSINESS MODEL’
We have followed an inductive approach to the case study. Our in-depth exploration has enabled us to understand
the problems, important issues and influences. This process is thus a nonlinear, non-sequential, iterative one of
systematic and constant movement between the literature, the model and the empirical world, during which the
conceptual framework is further developed as directed by empirical findings and continuous review of the literature
(Dubois and Gadde, 2002). One of the main reasons for choosing this methodology is the following: the possibility of
conducting research in a real-time environment; the observation of formal and informal processes within an
organization; contrary to the sampling methods of quantitative research, the selection of the case study was guided by
the richness of the case itself (Voss et al., 2002).
Findings. Our research has important implications for theory and practice.
In the current competitive context, more than in the past, it has become clear that creativity is a prerequisite for
effective innovation for all businesses, independently of their size and of the business in which they operate. In the field
of ‘economic enterprise’ the ‘prejudice’ of attributing the denomination of «knowledge intensive» only to a limited
number of sectors, has been overcome.
The stages of idea creation and production planning have to be carried out with an organizational-managerial
approach that is orientated towards problem solving. This necessity is made even more complex by the fact that all the
different stages need to be accomplished for the contemporaneous launch of numerous models of productsand birth of
new business organizations. These planning activities need to be realized quickly while respecting the high expectations
of productivity
Our core contribution is the recognition of the importance of managerial skills not only resulting in better
performance, but also adaptive capacity to technological change to new technologies, benefiting from enterprisespecific resources: the very heterogeneity of resources in the field (Aggarwal et al., 2017) seems to be able to favor the
research field made up of non-large enterprises.
As for business management improvement, many mature and well-known techniques have been proposed for the
manufacturing process analysis (planning choices, engineering activities) and optimization, including continuous
improvement and radical reengineering approaches (Lehnert et al., 2017).
The current paper investigates empirically the relationship between relatively radical changes in R & D firmchoices occurring within small time windows and an assessment of the extent of the firm’s exploratory knowledge
activity.
Drawing from extant managerial literature, the proposed structure shows which business model objects and
interactions within activities R&D-Manufacturing-Marketing (R&D-Mnf-Mkt) should be considered when engaging in
managing innovative and temporary project portfolio.
This study contributes to the knowledge management literature by adding to the body of knowledge about how
medium-sized firms use open innovation strategies based on research-manufacturing-marketing interplays. We affirm
that explorative learning creates new knowledge, which in turn provides new products.
According to many Authors, this research shows that operational learning expands the traditional organizational
literature: firstly, it extends the unit of analysis of individual and organizational learning to inter-organizational
learning; Secondly, it implies a shift from adaptive to higher-level transformative learning (Jaworski et al., 2000, Day
2002, Vargo and Lusch, 2011, Storbacka and Nenonen, 2015). the learning processes from which spring and which
continually support the innovative open strategies are both type ‘value creation’, customer one seen as the ones who,
and ‘value generation’, learning process of developing, designing, manufacturing and delivering: in this case it makes
use of the customer creation of ‘value in-use’ (Grönroos, 2011).
We believe that open strategy is potentially a rich and productive concept, capable of capturing major trends in
contemporary strategy practice. Specifically considering open initiative projects in the analyzed start up, we find that
open projects can drive down costs of development while enhancing quality due to the sheer volume of contributors and
their diversity. In addition, because transparency as a hallmark of open projects, results can be disseminated in more
timely and broader fashion systems.
Research limits. The level of openness in strategy-making, such as the level of inclusiveness and transparency of
the process, has increased markedly in recent years (Whittington et al., 2011; Lichtenthaler, 2011). The new theoretical
framework for open strategy observes that there are also questions about how much openness extends beyond the
traditional boundaries of the firm; the extent to which openness allows value creation and value capture; and how
sustainable open strategy programs are over time (Birkinshaw, 2017).
The developments in operational problems in manufacturing systems that we have analyzed will trigger scholarly
attention for theory building, metric development, case analysis and further surveys.
We must remember the vulnerability of the luxury fashion supply chain linked to the uncertainty of the information
system concerned with the uncertainties associated with the management of information flows via ‘systems’. Careful
integration of these systems through ‘systems’ would reduce the over-design phenomena of individual projects and
overcapacity: these effects would be greatly reduced if the design-engineering-manufacturing activities of fashion
collections were immediately accompanied by planning and scheduling of information flows at the ‘systems’ supply
chain.
It would be important to analyze what organizational skills should be developed to open up the knowledge of
external sources and to increase firm’s innovation potential.
183
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
The distinctive character of retrospective sense making in relationships remains significantly understudied.
Retrospective sense making is particularly relevant in contexts in which the uncertainty, risks and complexity of tasks
decrease the potential for effective learning from planning the development of valid predictions regarding the goal in R
& D offshoring (Henneberg et al., 2010).
Practical implications. In the fashion industry context, the evolution of modern companies depends on their
ability to find valuable and differentiated resources such as knowledge and dynamic capabilities in order to support
new products development. This emphasizes the capacity of companies to increase competitive value with more open
and collaborative innovation models and processes, by recognizing the value of external sources of knowledge. Moving
from these arguments, the value of this work is to explore how companies manage the specific setting of commercial
internationalization: especially in the cases of the ‘new born global business model’ (Fosfuri et al., 2013; Zander et al.,
2015).
Originality of the study. The Italian knitwear firms are more open in strategy-making processes. We think that in
many of these innovative startups come to life. This is an open strategy that invests in a predominantly single business
unit. Start-ups are provided by production systems other than those adopted by the parent, which are deeply
inspirational and respectful of the environment. This is a sustainable innovation: the inspirational strategic principle is
that of sustainability rather than a democratization of innovation.
The paper seeks to contribute to literature in two ways. First, it enriches the innovation literature, offering a
managerial model on the relationship between the open-mindedness of innovative processes in fashion companies and
the effect they have on their performance.
Secondly, the role of technological knowledge improved in R&D oriented firms belonging to manufacturing
Italian sectors.
Key words: Business model; R&D activities; knowledge management
References
AGGARWAL V.A., POSEN H. E., WORKIEWICZ M. J. (2017), “Adaptive capacity to technological change: a microfoundational
approach”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 38, n. 6, pp. 1212-131.
APPLEYARD M.M., CHESBROUGH H. (2017), “The Dynamics of Open Strategy: From Adoption to Reversion”, Long Range
Planning, vol. 50, n. 3, pp. 310-321.
BESSON M., LÖNING H., MENDOZA C. (2008), “Sticking together under Pressure: The Risk-sharing Approach and TrustBuilding in Sales Management”, European Management Journal, vol. 26, n. 1, pp. 11-23.
BIRKINSHAW J. (2017), “Reflections on open strategy”, Long Range Planning, vol. 50, n. 3, pp 423-426.
DAY G.S. (2002), “Managing the market learning process”, Journal of Business & Industrial Marketing, vol. 17, n. 4, pp. 240-251.
DARMON R.Y., MARTIN X.C. (2011), “A new Conceptual Framework of Sales Force Control Systems”, Journal of Personal
Selling and Sales Management, vol. 31, n. 3, pp. 297-310.
DUBOIS A., GADDE L. (2002), “Systematic combining: An abductive approach to case research”, Journal of Business Research,
vol. 55, n. 7, pp. 553-560.
FOSFURI A., LANZOLLA G., SUAREZ F. (2013), “Entry-timing strategies: he road ahead”, Long Range Planning, vol. 46, n. 4,
pp. 300-311.
GRÖNROOS C. (2011), “A service perspective on business relationships: the value creation, interaction and marketing interface”,
Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 40, n. 2, pp. 240-247.
HENNEBERG S. C., NAUDÉ P., MOUZAS S. (2010), “Sense-making and management in business networks - Some observations,
considerations, and a research agenda”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 39, n. 3, pp. 355-360.
JAWORSKI B., KOHLI A.K., SAHAY A. (2000), “Market-driven versus driving markets”, Journal of the Academy of Marketing
Sciences, vol. 28, n. 1, pp. 45-54.
LEHNERT M., LINHART A., ROEGLINGER M. (2017), “Exploring the intersection of business process improvement and BPM
capability development. A research agenda”, Business Process Management Journal, vol. 23, n. 2, pp. 275-292.
LICHTENTHALER U. (2011), “Open innovation: past research, current debates, and future directions”, Academy of Management
Perspectives, vol. 25, n. 1, pp. 75-93.
NARVER J.C., SLATER S.F. (1990), “The Effect of a Market Orientation on Business Profitability”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 54,
n. 4, pp. 20-34.
ÖBERG C. (2013), “Competence integration in creative Processes”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 42, n. 1, pp. 113-124.
POUTANEN P., SOLIMAN W., STÅLE P. (2016), “The complexity of innovation: an assessment and review of the complexity
perspective”, European Journal of Innovation, vol. 19, n. 2, pp. 160-172.
ROPER S., DU J., LOVE J.H. (2008), “Modelling the innovation value chain”, Research Policy, vol. 37, n. 6-7, pp. 961-977.
SAEBI T., FOSS N.J. (2015), “Business models for open innovation: matching heterogeneous open innovation strategies with
business model dimensions”, European Management Journal, vol. 33, n. 3, pp. 201-213.
STORBACKA K., NENONEN S. (2015), “Learning with the market: Facilitating market innovation”, Industrial Marketing
Management, vol. 44 (January), pp. 73-82.
TANG C. (2010) “A Review of Marketing-Operations Interface Models: From Co-Existence to Coordination and Collaboration”,
International Journal of Production Economics, vol. 125, n. 1, pp. 22-40.
184
KNOWLEDGE TECHNOLOGY IMPROVEMENT IN MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS. CASE ANALYSIS OF ‘OPEN STRATEGY BUSINESS MODEL’
ULRICH K.T., ELLISON D.J. (2005), “Beyond Make-Buy: Internalization and Integration of Design and Production”, Production
and Operations Management, vol. 14, n. 3, pp. 315-330.
VARGO S.L., LUSCH R.F. (2004), “Evolving to a new dominant logic for marketing”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 68, n. 1, pp. 1-17.
VOSS C.A., TSIKRIKTSIS N., FROHLICH M. (2002), “Case Research in Operations Management.” International Journal of
Operations & Production Management, vol. 22, n. 2, pp. 195-219.
WHITTINGTON R., CAILLUET L., YAKIS-DOUGLAS B. (2011), “Opening strategy: evolution of a precarious profession”,
British Journal of Management, vol. 22, n. 3, pp. 531-544.
ZANDER S.A., McDOUGALL-COVIN P.P., ROSE E.L. (2015), “Borns global and international business: Evolution of a field of
research”, Journal of International Business Studies, vol. 46, n. 1, pp. 27-35.
185
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
186
Advertising in extreme vs traditional sports. Is there a difference?
MICHELA C. MASON* ANDREA MORETTI DANIELE SCARPI FRANCESCO RAGGIOTTO**
Objectives. This paper provides an exploration of consumer reactions to advertising set in extreme sports and in
traditional sports.
In the United States alone, since 1987 participation in baseball is down 28 percent, involvement in softball has
dropped off 37 percent, volleyball has plunged 36 percent, and Basketball participation has declined 17 percent from
1997. At the same time, the extreme sports market has been exhibiting a rapid growth in popularity. For instance,
skateboarding has risen 49 percent from ten years ago, and nowadays has an estimated 14 million participants in the
US alone, snowboarding claims 7.2 million US participants, up 51 percent from 1999, and triathlon has grown by 400
percent in the last 18 years (Xtremesports, 2008; Team USA, 2016). Overall, more than 22 million athletes yearly
participate in extreme sports (TBI report, 2014) and even more do watch them (Nielsen Scarborough, 2017).
Accordingly, advertisers increasingly use extreme sports as the setting where to advertise, drawing from their
imagery related to communicate values and visions, and to enlarge the customer base.
Advertising within sport contexts can influence consumer perceptions of the appeals, brands and products
(Chandrasekaran et al., 2017). In their rush toward finding new trendy sport disciplines and attractive contexts,
marketers are nowadays making a massive use of extreme sports. Extreme sports are activities where participants are
subject to unusual physical and mental challenges such as speed, height or natural forces and that often require
extreme endurance and/or quick reflexes. They are pursued for strong sensations, achieved through challenges and
threatening situations. Thus, extreme sports are not only spectacular to watch or to do: they also pose a serious risk of
harming the participant (Brymer and Houge Mackenzie, 2016). This is to say, extreme sports adhere to a voluntary
risk-taking behavioral pattern, and that can be explained in light of Edgework Theory (Lyng, 1990). Indeed, the
literature in psychology agrees that extreme activities (sports are no exception) are a setting where individuals think
differently, displaying unique psychological drivers and reaction. So much that it has separated extreme from
traditional activities based on the deliberate willingness to seek risky situations in the former, as opposed to the
willingness to avoid them in the latter. Extreme activities are sought precisely because they require pushing the
physical and mental limits to the edge, and are challenges pursued to discover and push forward those limits (i.e., the
“edge”) (Brymer and Houge Mackenzie, 2016; Yan and Bonanno, 2015). The ultimate goal is providing strong
sensations by undergoing seemingly impossible challenges and difficulties (Yan and Bonanno, 2015) whose successful
overcoming feeds the idea of belonging to an elite group of “superior” men/women (Lyng and Matthews 2007). Thus,
difficulty and challenge are positive values in extreme sports, leading to rather than scaring away from their
undertaking (Kaiser et al., 2007), so much that in extreme sports extra difficulties are not uncommonly added to already
challenging situations to make them even harder and provide even more sensation. While marketers have grasped the
visual spectacular side of extreme sports, they might have sometimes dangerously neglected the psychological
underlying mechanisms.
To explain risk-related behaviors in traditional activities we adopt instead the perspective of cognitive adaptation
theory (Taylor, 1983). According to cognitive adaptation, difficulties and challenges are present in traditional
activities, but are unsought and actively minimized to restore a risk-free condition (Taylor 1983). Indeed, situations
pushing to the limits and exposing to extreme difficulty lead to painful psychological processes to rebuilt self-identity
and to minimize the perception of those challenges and difficulties (Jayawickreme and Blackie, 2014). Thus, while
sensationalism is not negative per se in traditional activities, it is sought by means different than voluntary risk-taking.
Coherently, self-preservation threatening actions are often against the rules in traditional sports. In summary, the
difficulties and challenges that can be found in traditional and extreme activities might even be the same, but the
mindset they activate is very different if not opposite.
*
**
Associate Professor of Management - University of Udine
e-mail: michela.mason@uniud.it
Full Professor of Management - University of Udine
e-mail: andrea.moretti@uniud.it
Associate Professor of Management - University of Bologna
e-mail: daniele.scarpi@unibo.it
Ph.D. Candidate in Managerial and Actuarial Sciences - University of Udine
e-mail: raggiotto.francesco@spes.uniud.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
187
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.30
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
Hence, we posit that advertising appeals related to difficulty and challenge might work quite differently in the
contexts of extreme and traditional sports. Should brands change something in their advertising when switching from
traditional to extreme sports as setting for their communication?
In the present research, we adopt the theoretical perspective of Edgework Theory to establish the link between the
ad and the sport type (extreme vs. traditional). Such theoretical base would help explain some of the contradictory
outcomes in the success of previous advertising campaigns by brands that staged themselves in the context of extreme
sports, and would provide a rationale for the do’s and don’ts for brands that are thinking to advertise in the context of
extreme sports.
Methodology. Stimuli selection underwent four phases with a total of 400 respondents recruited from one of the
largest crowdsourcing Internet communities for research and Human Intelligence Tasks worldwide. First, fifty
respondents (Mage = 30.1; 40% female) were shown pictures of various products asked about the match and
meaningfulness of the products with extreme and traditional sports on a scale from 1 (“not all”) to 7 (“completely”).
Watches were chosen as they scored equally high in extreme (M = 5.80) and traditional sports (M = 6.01, p > .10).
Observation of real ads suggests that indeed many brands of watches often set their advertising in traditional (e.g.,
Wyler, Citizen), extreme (e.g., Alpine, Sector) and often in both sport types (e.g., Seiko, Suunto, TagHeuer, Timex).
Second, fifty respondents (Mage = 32.65; 43% female) were shown in random order 15 verbal appeals from real
ads set in the context of sports. Respondents rated how much the appeals focused on difficulty or challenge (on two
items ranging from 1 = “not at all” to 7 = “completely”). Based on the absolute and relative ratings, we identified
three appeals: one scored highest on difficulty (“If it was easy, everyone would do it”; M = 5.86, p < .05) and one on
challenge (“Don’t Limit your challenges. Challenge your limits”; M = 6.12, p < .05). A third appeal was identified that
scored equally low (≤ 3) on both dimensions and was retained to serve as a baseline (“I live for these moments”; p >
.10).
Then, another fifty respondents (Mage = 34.61; 36% female) were shown in random order 40 images from
printed ads set in the context of sports. Respondents rated how much the images pertained to traditional or extreme
sports (on one item ranging from 1 = “traditional” to 9 = “extreme”). One image was selected for extreme (M1 = 7.65,
M2 = 8.02) and one for traditional sports (M1 = 2.01, M2 =1.88). The two images had a similar layout, referring to a
similar sport activity in its extreme and traditional version, and were equally liked (p > .10).
Then, an international graphic agency mocked-up 6 ads to be used as stimuli, joining the 3 appeals with the 2
images (controlling for color balance, saturation, proportions, size of the endorser, and overall “melting” the images
to make them graphically consistent). The six mock-up ads closely mimicked the structure, layout, size, and graphic of a
real ad by Tag Heuer and were used in the study. These brands were chosen to represent high and low involvement as
identified on another fifty respondents (Mage = 31.51; 40% females). Finally, the stimuli were tested on a sample of
another fifty respondents (Mage = 34.72; 44% females) that -on 7 points items- rated realism (all mean scores ≥ 5.99)
and readability (all mean scores ≥ 6.11). As the graphical elements of an ad might contribute to its overall appeal
alongside the written text, those respondents evaluated again the focus on difficulty and challenge (mean scores ≥ 6.02
on the respective focus; mean score ≤ 2.89 for the baseline appeal) and the extremeness of the sport (mean scores ≥
6.04 and ≤ 3.05 respectively; p < .05).
Respondents were randomly assigned to 1 of the 6 experimental conditions according to a 2 (sport type: extreme
vs. traditional) × 3 (ad focus: difficulty, challenge, baseline) between-subjects experimental design. Respondents were
asked ad persuasiveness (Chang, 2011), product attractiveness (Fuchs et al., 2015), brand attitude (MacKenzie and
Lutz, 1989) and purchase intention. Then, we asked sport extremeness as a manipulation check; match-up between
brand image and sport type (Liu et al., 2007) and sensation seeking (Hoyle et al., 2002) as controls. Items ranged from
1 (“not at all”) to 7 (“completely”). Finally, respondents were asked their demographics and sport participation
(active/passive; extreme/traditional). Two-hundred questionnaires were recruited from crowdsourcing online panels
(Mage = 35.02; 40.20% female; 50% active participants).
Results. Scale reliability ranges between .86 and .91; factor analysis (maximum likelihood; oblimin rotation)
confirms that brand attitude, ad persuasiveness and product attractiveness are 3 distinct factors (factor loadings ≥ .49;
75% of variance explained). Respondents correctly recognized the sport context of the ad as being traditional (M trad =
3.05) or extreme (Mextr = 6.01, p < .005). The match-up between brand image and sport type confirms that the chosen
brand has no particular affinity to one sport type (M trad = 4.31 vs. Mextr = 4.23, p > .10). Lovers of extreme sports
scored higher on sensation seeking than those of traditional sports (M trad = 4.01 vs. Mextr = 5.02, p < .005).
A Multivariate Analysis of Variance was run with ad appeal, sport type and participation as independent
variables, and with ad believability, brand attitude, product attractiveness, purchase intention and willingness-to payas dependent variables. No significant main effect was found for sport type (Wilks = .975, p > .10) or ad appeal
(Wilks = .955, , p > .10), but a significant appeal × sport interaction emerged (Wilks = .915, , p < .005). Follow-up
univariate analyses reveal that the interaction has an impact on ad persuasiveness p < .005), product attractiveness , p
< .05), marginally on purchase intention , p > .10), but not on brand attitude , p > .10).
We then run post-hoc comparisons among the appeals. We find that challenge- and difficulty-based appeals are
equally effective (ppersuas > .10, pattract > .10, ppurch > .10, pwtp > .10). However, in extreme sports they are more effective
than the baseline appeal in shaping persuasiveness (Mbase = 4.01 vs. Mchal&dif = 5.04; , p < .005), product attractiveness
(Mbase = 4.20 vs. Mchal&dif = 4.81; , p > .05), but not on purchase intention though the means are in a consistent
188
ADVERTISING IN EXTREME VS TRADITIONAL SPORTS. IS THERE A DIFFERENCE?
direction (Mbase = 2.74 vs. Mchal&dif = 2.97; , p > .10). Instead, we find a pattern switch in traditional sports, where it is
the baseline appeal to be more effective on ad persuasiveness (M base = 5.10 vs. Mchal&dif = 3.90; , p < .005), product
attractiveness (Mbase = 4.55 vs. Mchal&dif = 3.85; , p > .10), though not purchase intention though the means are in a
consistent direction (Mbase = 3.10 vs. Mchal&dif = 2.59; , p > .10).
Individual participation in sports can be passive (e.g., spectatorship), or active (i.e., actually doing sports).
Different drivers for active and passive participation have been identified in the literature, such as escapism from
ordinary life (Trail et al., 2003) and social significance (Jae Ko et al., 2011) for passive participation; competition
(Crofts et al., 2012) and willingness to pursue healthy lifestyles (Mallett and Hanrahan 2004) for active participation.
Yet, there is lack of consensus about the effects of active/passive participation and calls in the literature for their
comparison (Kaplanidou and Vogt, 2010; Ramchandani et al., 2015). Nonetheless, passive and active participation do
not exclude each other and can boost each the probability of engaging in the other (Weber and Hsee, 1998).
We hence addressed active/passive participation finding no significant main effect (Wilks = .989, p > .10) or
interaction (participation × sport: Wilks = .979, , p > .10; participation × appeal: Wilks = .962, , p > .10). Also,
results do not change between extreme and traditional sport-loving respondents (Wilks = .979, , p > .10) suggesting
that effects are due to the sport type used as context of the ad, rather than to the sport type preferred by the audience.
No gender- (Wilks = .988, , p > .10) or age-related effects (Wilks = .984, , p > .10) emerged.
Research limitations. The present research found that difficulty- and challenge-based appeals can efficiently
work for brands advertising in extreme sports, in the category of watches. Broadening the spectrum of product and
appeal types might result in a better understanding of the efficacy of advertising brands in extreme sports. Also,
comparing within the same product category high and low involvement products could provide further insights about
the boundaries of the effect. Regarding this latter consideration, the involvement construct has received great attention
in marketing and advertising research (Lee and Beeler, 2009). Further, extant contributions suggest the existence of
tight linkages between consumer involvement and those consumption situations in which sports exert a major role
(Kunkel, Hill, and Funk, 2013).
Furthermore, advertising practices vary greatly between Europe, North America and Asia. The findings from our
study are based on North-Americans and show a consistent pattern. Nonetheless, Europeans, South-Americans, African
and Asian consumers could have a different cultural sensibility toward -in general- risk perception and selfimprovement (Xtremesports, 2008). Thus, another potential avenue for future studies could involve exploring the effects
across different cultures.
Practical implications. Overall, the proposed theorization allows to offer an explanation of the phenomenon and
findings, and might help explaining some of the contradictory effects experienced by brand that advertise(d) in the
context of extreme and traditional sports.
Extreme sports are a multi-billions market that re gaining momentum as a setting for advertising, probably due to
their increasing popularity. However, we show that ads work differently in the context of extreme sports: emphasizing
difficulty and challenge works fine here, while it is not appropriate if you advertise your brand in the context of
traditional sports. Thus, jumping on the bandwagon of extreme sports as context for advertising is not always advisable
for brands and care is needed.
Results suggest brands should consider changes in their advertising strategies when it comes to advertise using
extreme sports or traditional sports as advert contexts; furthermore, what matters is the context you set your ad in, not
the way your audience lives sport. This is good news for practitioners, as they do not need to separate consumers based
on how they live sport (actively or passively). Finally, advertisers should be aware that extreme sport lovers don’t want
“common people” to meddle in their disciplines, and traditional sport lovers don’t want to see threatening challenges
and limit-pushing difficulties. Thus, give each context what it needs, and don’t mix the two up or your brand will be
messed up.
Overall, we propose an easy yet effective way to increase the efficacy of advertising in the context of extreme
sports - basing on edgework theory and cognitive adaptation - that appears useful to implement or at least to be aware
of. Namely, to focus on difficulty and challenge-based appeal for extreme sports, and for extreme sports only.
Originality. Although extreme sports have been extensively studied and received much attention in marketing
practice, few studies have investigated the efficacy of extreme sports as a setting for advertising. The present research
bases on the literature to identify two key elements of extreme sports, namely difficulty and challenge. We find that
difficulty and challenge -based appeals work positively for ads set in the context of extreme sports, but are negative
when applied to brands advertising in traditional sports. The results do not depend from the viewers’ sport
participation (i.e., active vs. passive) or favorite type of sport.
Advertising in extreme sports has received much attention in marketing practice; however, few if any studies have
investigated how advertising in extreme sports works. Thus, the question is still left open as to whether ads set in the
context of extreme rather than traditional sports work equally efficiently. And given the multi-billion dollars value of
extreme sports and the merchandising surrounding them, such question is no mere academic speculation.
Key words: extreme sports; appeal effectiveness; edgework; traditional sports; challenge; difficulty
189
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
References
BRYMER E., HOUGE MACKENZIE S. (2016), “Psychology and the extreme sport experience”, In Feletti F. (a cura di), Extreme
Sports Medicine (pp. 3-13), Springer. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-3-319-28265-7_1
CHANG C. (2011), “Feeling Ambivalent About Going Green”, Journal of Advertising, vol. 40, n. 4, pp. 19-32.
https://doi.org/10.2753/JOA0091-3367400402
CROFTS C., SCHOFIELD G., DICKSON G. (2012), “Women-only mass participation sporting events: does participation facilitate
changes
in
physical
activity?”
Annals
of
Leisure Research,
vol.
15,
n.
2, pp.
148-159.
https://doi.org/10.1080/11745398.2012.685297
FUCHS C., SCHREIER M., VAN OSSELAER S.M.J. (2015), “The Handmade Effect: What’s Love Got to Do with It?” Journal of
Marketing, vol. 79, n. 2, pp. 98-110. https://doi.org/10.1509/jm.14.0018
HOYLE R.H., STEPHENSON M.T., PALMGREEN P., LORCH E.P., DONOHEW R.L. (2002), “Reliability and validity of a brief
measure of sensation seeking”, Personality and Individual Differences, vol. 32, n. 3, pp. 401-414.
JAE KO Y., ZHANG J., CATTANI K., PASTORE D. (2011), “Assessment of event quality in major spectator sports”, Managing
Service Quality: An International Journal, vol. 21, n. 3, pp. 304-322. https://doi.org/10.1108/09604521111127983
JAYAWICKREME E., BLACKIE L.E.R. (2014), “Post-traumatic growth as positive personality change: Evidence, controversies
and future directions”, European Journal of Personality, vol. 28, n. 4, pp. 312–331. https://doi.org/10.1002/per.1963
KAISER A., KRAGULJ F., GRISOLD T., WALSER R., SCHREIER M., OBERHAUSER S., PRÜGL R. (2007), “Lead users and
the adoption and diffusion of new products: Insights from two extreme sports communities”, Marketing Letters, vol. 18, n. 12, pp. 15–30. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10551-011-0925-7
KAPLANIDOU K., VOGT C. (2010), “The Meaning and Measurement of a Sport Event Experience Among Active Sport Tourists”,
Journal of Sport Management, vol. 24, n. 5, pp. 544-566.
KUNKEL T., HILL B., FUNK D.C. (2013), “Brand architecture, drivers of consumer involvement, and brand loyalty with
professional sport leagues and teams”, Journal of Sport Management, vol. 27, n. 3, pp. 177-192.
https://doi.org/10.1123/jsm.27.3.177
LEE J., BEELER C. (2009), “An investigation of predictors of satisfaction and future intention: links to motivation, involvement,
and service quality in a local festival”, Event Management, vol. 13, n. 1, pp. 17-29.
https://doi.org/10.3727/152599509789130584
LIU M.T., HUANG Y.Y., MINGHUA J. (2007), “Relations among attractiveness of endorsers, match-up, and purchase intention in
sport marketing in China”, Journal of Consumer Marketing, vol. 24, n. 6, pp. 358-365.
LYNG S. (1990), “A Social Psychological Analysis of Voluntary Risk Taking”, The American Journal of Sociology, vol. 95, n. 4, pp.
851-886.
LYNG S., MATTHEWS R. (2007), “Risk, edgework, and masculinities”, in Hannah-Moffat K., O’Malley P. (a cura di), Gendered
Risks (pp. 75-97), Routledge.
MACKENZIE S.B., LUTZ R.J. (1989), “An Empirical Examination of the Structural Antecedents of Attitude toward the Ad in an
Advertising Pretesting Context”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 53, n. 2, pp. 48-65. https://doi.org/10.2307/1251413
MALLETT C.J., HANRAHAN S.J. (2004), “Elite athletes: Why does the “fire” burn so brightly?” Psychology of Sport and Exercise,
vol. 5, n. 2, pp. 183-200. https://doi.org/10.1016/S1469-0292(02)00043-2
MILOVANOVIC D. (2005), “Edgework: A subjective and structural model of negotiating boundaries”, In Lyng S. (a cura di),
Edgework: The Sociology of Risk Taking. New York: Routledge. https://doi.org/10.4324/9780203005293
NIELSEN SCARBOROUGH. (2017), Nielsen Scarborough. Retrieved January 18, 2018, from http://enus.nielsen.com/sitelets/cls/scarborough.html
RAMCHANDANI G., DAVIES L.E., COLEMAN R., SHIBLI S., BINGHAM J. (2015), “Limited or lasting legacy? The effect of
non-mega sport event attendance on participation”, European Sport Management Quarterly, vol. 15, n. 1, pp. 93-110.
https://doi.org/10.1080/16184742.2014.996583
TAYLOR S. (1983), “Adjustment to threating events: Theory of cognitive adaptation”, American Psychologist, vol. 38, n. 11,
pp.1161-1173.
TEAM USA. (2016), USA Triathlon Annual Membership Report - 2015 Update. Retrieved August 16, 2017, from
https://www.teamusa.org/usa-triathlon/about/multisport/demographics
TRAIL G.T., FINK J.S., ANDERSON D.F. (2003), “Sport Spectator Consumption Behavior”, Sport Marketing Quarterly, vol. 12,
pp. 8-17.
WEBER E.U., HSEE C. (1998), “Cross-cultural differences in risk perception, but cross-cultural similarities in attitudes towards
perceived risk”, Management Science, vol. 44, n. 9, pp. 1205-1217.
XTREMESPORTS.
(2008), Extreme
sport
growing in popularity.
Retrieved
August
16, 2017,
from
http://xtremesport4u.com/extreme-land-sports/extreme-sport-growing-in-popularity/
YAN O.H., BONANNO G.A. (2015), “How self-enhancers adapt well to loss: the mediational role of loneliness and social
functioning”, Journal of Positive Psychology, vol. 10, n. 4, pp. 370-382. https://doi.org/10.1080/17439760.2014.965266
YELKUR R., TOMKOVICK C., TRACZYK P. (2004), “Super bowl advertising effectiveness: Hollywood finds the games golden”,
Journal of Advertising Research, vol. 44, n. 1, pp. 143-159 https://doi.org/10.1017/S0021849904040085
190
Who tells the story? Defining visual storytelling as a new territory in
digital innovation narrative
REBECCA PERA*
Innovation and consumers’ responses to innovation are central to the Marketing function, and social media
affords consumers the opportunity to share those responses. Yet how consumers represent and share innovation
through social media has not been investigated. Furthermore, the nature and factors that govern visual production have
so far received little research attention. The study adopts a novel rhetorical figure analysis of illustrative shared images
of innovation to explore the text-image interplay that occurs in shared images to develop understanding of the symbolic
representation of innovation. Contributions to scholarship made by this paper include; that user-generated
photographs have become a vehicle for representing the construct of innovation, the identification of four key attributes
of innovation as shared on social media; triggers, opportunities, abilities and outputs. In addition, this paper develops
new insight regarding the symbolic representation of innovation as determined by consumers as opposed to
professional advertisers.
Introduction. Innovation and consumers’ responses to innovation are central to the Marketing function. Indeed,
the propensity of consumers to trial, and adopt new products gives the marketplace its dynamic nature (Hirschman,
1980). Whilst there exists a large body of literature focused on consumers’ response to innovation, for example; the
adoption of innovation by consumers and the diffusion of innovation (Rogers, 1996), the usage of innovations (Shih &
Venkatesh, 2004), and the emotional influence on use of innovation studies on consumers’ more proactive behaviours
towards innovation appear limited. In addition, there is disparity between marketers’ and consumers’ perceptions of
innovation (Goode et al., 2013).
More recently, the marketing and consumer behaviour research community, such as Füller et al. (2013) suggest a
shift from a company-centred innovation to a consumer-centred innovation paradigm. The rapid growth and increasing
relevance of user-generated content through social media, represents an important opportunity to see consumers as
active protagonists in the innovation endeavour. However, user-generated content is mainly investigated as Word-OfMouth communications, in terms of online reviews/ratings (Kozinets et al., 2010). According to Lamberton and Stephen
(2016), this is limiting, as one of the most interesting aspects of the rise of social media has been the emergence of new
ways of consumer interaction. Such new ways of interaction include the unprecedented production and consumption of
images.
Despite the increasing relevance of image-based content, a visual mode of meaning production concerning the
what and the how of consumers’ visual representation of innovation, embedded in user-generated content, has still to be
investigated. The nature and factors that govern user visual production have so far received little attention even though
an exploration of the overarching representation of the construct of innovation would offer opportunities for
companies. Gaining insight into consumers’ manifestations of innovations can provide a partial platform for the
strategic direction of innovation in an organisation (Bohlmann et al., 2013; Chatterji and Fabrizio, 2014; Pitta and
Franzak, 1996; Ngo and O’Cass, 2013).
Acknowledging the fact that there is an increasing relevance in both generation and consumption of shared visual
material through social media, this work aims to explore the representation of innovation through social media images.
The use of rhetorical figures represents a creative deviation able to affect consumers’ response. This study posits that
through the interplay between text and images similar dynamics occur in user-generated content.
Background
Innovation
Strategic marketing can and should be influenced by consumers as the roles between supplier and customers
continue to evolve (Gummesson et al., 2014). Future innovation development may be informed by user generated text
and images portraying what they consider innovation through the sharing of everyday experiences of innovation.
Innovation and the demonstration of innovativeness are two intertwined conceptualisations (Rogers and Shoemaker,
1971). Innovation as defined by Rogers and Shoemaker (1971:19) is “an idea, practice, or object perceived as new by
the individual”.
*
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università del Piemonte Orientale
e-mail: rebecca.pera@uniupo.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
191
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.31
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
Whilst there has been some recent research insight developed into the co-creation of innovation and innovative
products by consumers (Coviello and Joeseph, 2012; Füller et al., 2013 Roberts et al., 2014), new product evaluation
which incorporates visual aids and the perception by other consumers of these innovations (Schreier et al., 2012)
research remains limited on consumer generated conceptions of innovation. Despite the importance of innovation and
the communication of innovation, little research attention has been paid to how consumers communicate innovation to
each other.
Sharing of content
There is general consensus that social media is significantly transformative in its influence on society (Aral et al.,
2013). The enabling of written and or image based content to be shared and spread globally creates an environment in
which what is of interest to one person becomes communicated and noticed by someone else interested in the same
content. In this way communication transfers the personal to the collective, from one to many. Consumers have the
ability to create and share social media independent of any ‘owned’ space (Kaplan and Haenlein, 2010). Furthermore,
the sharing of words and or images with others via social media creates wide reaching and faster developed networks
(Couldry, 2012).
Photography as a symbolic communication medium
User-generated content and advertising share an important commonality: both take place in a cluttered
environment, and, despite having different goals, both kind of contents aim at a respondent’s psychological elaboration
(e.g. awareness, attention, recall, positive attitude, likeness). Rhetorical figures are a means to convey novelty to
advertising by requiring divergent thinking, twists, original associations (Ang et al., 2007). Deviation from expectations
is therefore a key pillar, along with meaningfulness (Berlyne, 1971). Following McQuarrie and Philips (2008) visual
rhetorical figures are, indeed, an important academic and practitioner trend in advertising that support picture
persuasiveness. According to the literature (see McQuarrie and Mick, 1999 for a general overview) a rhetorical figure
is an artful deviation from expectations which occurs when an expression deviates from expectation. However, the
reader does not reject the image as nonsensical or faulty. Instead, rhetorical figures are considered a stylistic device
that add interest to an advertisement, favouring positive psychological consumer responses.
Adopting McQuarrie and Mick’s (1999) taxonomy, which includes all rhetorical figures, this study proposes that a
photograph and the text tied to it, shared on visual social media, are characterized by the property of artful deviation as
defined above. This may occur in two different ways; first, by excessive regularity (through operations of repetition and
reversal); second, by means of irregularity (through operations of substitution and destabilization). Examples of the
first category of operations are alliterations, rhymes or antithesis. Examples of the second are hyperboles, ellipsis,
metaphors, and irony.
Methodology. Instagram was selected as the lens through which to explore the phenomenon of innovation and
how images, self-selected by consumers, are communicated as it is a pre-eminently a visual social media platform in
which text plays a supporting role. 32% of all global internet users use Instagram whilst only 24% use Twitter (Pew
Internet Organisation, 2016). Recently, Instagram has been used as a research data source to; categorise the images
people post (Hu et al., 2014), for content analysis of hashtags and to understand the motivations for its use (Lee et al.,
2015).
The research involves a content analysis of a purpose subset (n.30) of the shared 11,321 Instagram #innovation
images in order to explore the representation of the #innovation images. Researchers have long adopted this method
when interested in examining communication such as advertisements, media stories, and web sites (Kassarjian, 1977).
Content analysis is appropriate here because it offers a systematic and objective way to compare content for a sample
of user-generated content. The dimensions were drawn both from the literature and from an inductive analysis of a
user-generated content conducted by the authors. In particular, McQuarrie and Mick’s (1996) taxonomy from
advertising was applied to this study and was considered appropriate for the analysis of user-generated content owing
to its relevance and impact in the consumer and marketing literature. The interplay between image and text was
investigated as well (Barthes, 1977), along with the kind of value such interplay enacted (Floch, 1988) (see Table 1).
Tab. 1: Integrated analysis approach
Items analysed
Basic Visual features Feature complexity
(Donderi, 2006; Rosenholz et al. 2007; Pieters et
al., 2010)
Basic feature manipulation
Design complexity structural complexity
(Donderi 2006; Pieters et al., 2010)
Quantity of objects
Irregularity of objects
Dissimilarity of objects
Asymmetry of object arrangement (Scott, 1994)
Definition
Photographs that contain more detail and variation in their basic visual features, colour,
luminance, and edges are complex.
Visual clutter (high level of detail pattern of colour, luminance, and edges)
Visual simplicity (low level of detail pattern of colour, luminance, and edges)
Alterations (B&W; shadowing; cropping)
Elaboration in terms of shapes, objects, patterns and arrangement
Design complexity is higher when the photograph contains more rather than fewer objects
Design complexity is higher when the objects in the photograph are irregularly rather than
regularly shaped
Design complexity is greater when the objects in the photograph are dissimilar rather than
similar in shapes, textures, orientations, and/or colours
Design complexity is greater when the objects in the photograph form asymmetric rather than
symmetric arrangements.
192
EFFETTI COMPETITIVI DELLA SHARING ECONOMY NEI SERVIZI RICETTIVI
Rhetorical symbols - Figurative language
(McQuarrie & Mick 1996)
Text-Image interplay
Barthes (1977; Kress & van Leeuwen, 2006)
The text elaborates the image of the photograph
(Barthes, 1977)
The text extends the meaning of the photograph
(Barthes, 1977)
Floch’s Semiotic Square
Four broad categories of value (Floch, 1988)
Use of the three-level taxonomy figurative language. Visual metaphors fundamentally
represent artful deviations
from expectations
Whereas Barthes sees the relationship in terms of dependence of the image on the text, Kress
and van Leeuwen claim that they are connected but independent.
New meanings are added to complete the message, or viceversa (relay)
The same meanings are stated in a more definite and precise restatement of the image
(anchorage)
Practical (communication of utility); critical values (communication of cost-effectiveness);
ludic (communication of enjoyment and fun), and utopic values (communication of a social
sense)
Source: Our elaboration
Results. The interpretative analysis of the shared social media photographs evidenced four recurrent semantic
attributes (triggers, abilities, opportunities, and outcomes) which build the construct of innovation.
Albeit the analysis of the images may be regarded as elementary, they convey a meaning of how innovation is
represented and shared among consumers. At this level, the strength of the representation does not lie in the single
image, but is found, instead, in a shared collective imagery that suggests a specific expression of innovation. Innovation
is collectively represented as a journey that starts from a need and ends in an outcome. Four attributes constitute such
imagery. The triggers as the drivers that instigate the individual to activate an innovation process; the specific abilities
needed by individuals in the process, the opportunities as environmental features that facilitate and nurture innovation;
and the outcomes as perceived evidence of an innovation process. In order to offer a general understanding of both
levels of analysis the study presents four photographs, chosen as prototypical examples of the four categories
mentioned (see Figures 2 and 3).
Fig. 1: Semantic visualization map of #innovation
Source: Our elaboration
The first image “Trigger Attribute Example” is an example of the photographs belonging to the category that
communicates the “triggers” of innovation. Starting with a synthetic feature analysis (Pieters et al., 2010) the image
presents a high level of detail, representing a cluttered environment. Despite the high dissimilarity among the objects,
the author has arranged them into a balanced, regular and symmetric manner, forming a triangle shape. The image has
been carefully arranged, where a design process, maybe not deliberate, emerges. The triggers are the drivers of
innovation in terms of the constraints/limits that challenge the mind to look for unconventional ways to get around such
obstacles. The problem of “when you have no bowl or spoon” to eat cereal makes the author feel “desperation” is what
activates an alternative/different use of common artefacts meant for other purposes in order to solve a problem. A
perceived need is the detonator for innovation. Consumers represent innovation as a daily/real/close problem-solving
activity. The rhetoric enactment supports the argumentation by giving light to the change-displacement dimension of
innovation and to its intrinsic perceived ludic value. The kitchen tongs embody a strong rhetoric figure, an oxymoron,
juxtaposing the functions that appear to be contradictory in nature. The artefact’s function is divorced from its usual
purpose and used as if it were a spoon (McQuarrie and Mick 1996). The text supports the image by utilizing the
hyperbole rhetoric figure twice. “Desperation” and “Tedtalks”, confer an exaggerated emphasis both to the initial
emotional state and to the solution the author found, conveying to the process a ludic/ridiculous value (Floch, 1988).
193
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
The second image “Ability Attribute Example” refers to the photographs belonging to the individual “abilities”
dimension for innovation. The synthetic feature analysis (Pieters et al., 2010) returns an image, where in a cluttered
environment, both in terms of quality and quantity of objects included in the shot, the protagonist emerges. The cup,
symbol of success, represents the recognition of an innovative solution generated by somebody that could be any of us.
Age “You are never too young (or too old) to innovate!” and geographic provenance “AfricaBeHeard” are not
perceived determinants in the process. Normal people are able to achieve innovation; which, is, therefore, for
everybody. Ideas for new solutions originate from abilities that are rooted in passion and motivation. Such motivation
can be intrinsic, as for other examples, but also extrinsic, meaning that competition, symbolized by the cup, is
represented as a positive determinant. Apart from a mild encomium in the text that contains praise in favour of the
argumentation that innovation is for everybody, no specific rhetoric enactment is detected (McQuarrie and Mick 1996).
Considering the kind of solution found by the young girl, rooted with social connotations, the interplay between the text
and the image conveys a utopian value to innovation (Floch, 1988).
The third image “Opportunity Attribute Example” represents the photographs belonging to the “opportunity”
dimension of innovation. The category refers to the environmental context that nurtures innovation. The image presents
a high level of detail, representing a complex, cluttered environment, where objects are highly dissimilar and irregular
(Pieters et al., 2010). The image enacts the concept of a place/space where a “maker”, do-it-yourself philosophy
emerges. Manual experimentation is what activates innovation, fuelled by an alternative use/reuse of scraps of
materials that become the input of something new. The textual, figurative metaphor acts as support of the concept of
innovation as a transforming process. The text “Something is cooking in my design kitchen!!!” is a rhetorical
enactment that occurs through the use of a metaphor where a transfer from the source of the “kitchen” conceptual
domain is mapped onto the target innovation/environment conceptual domain. Along with the quality of transformation,
the analogy with the kitchen domain, in terms of eating and pleasure of eating, supports the representation of
innovation as a hedonic experience (McQuarrie and Mick 1996). The text serves to offer a more definite statement of
the image, in terms of making the abstract concept of “transformation/production” attributed to innovation, more
concrete. Both domains concur to the notion of innovation where the environment is meant to favour a handson/manual experimentation approach to innovation. The kind of value embedded in the interplay between text and
image is ludic, in terms of entertainment and pleasure associated to the process (Floch, 1988).
The fourth image “Outcome Attribute Example” is an example of the photographs belonging to the “outcome”
category of innovation. The image presents a high level of detail, representing an averagely complex and balanced
external environment, where one object emerges by being highly incongruent with its setting (Pieters et al., 2010). The
image under analysis enacts a misplacement of the artefact. The photograph depicts one woman captured by an
appearing free-standing nail varnish pack, in the process of spilling its content on the floor. Two processes enact the
deviation: first, a visual ellipsis that seems to omit any kind of support for the nail varnish pack (which instead stands
up by using a hidden support embedded in the dripping fluid). Second, a displacement in terms of size and function. The
exaggeration of the size of the pack is the main theme of the photograph. Along with this, by viewing the nail varnish
pack in a public environment, infers a change of the function of the artefact (McQuarrie and Mick 1996). Differently
from the first photograph, this image is a visual documentation-testimony of an innovative outcome, not generated by
the author of the photograph. Confirming the use of deviation and misplacement as qualities of innovation, this final
category indorses the previous ones by carrying ludic values of entertainment and visual pleasure (Floch, 1988).
Discussion and Implications. The study confirms the mismatch between marketers’ and consumers’ perception of
innovation suggested by Goode et al. (2013). While literature on innovation displays a common narrative built on
concepts of market and technical breakthroughs (e.g. Garcia and Catalone, 2002) or radical new products (e.g.
194
EFFETTI COMPETITIVI DELLA SHARING ECONOMY NEI SERVIZI RICETTIVI
O’Connor, 2008), the user-generated narrative is quite different. Despite the different domains inferred by the images,
innovation seems to indicate a hedonic experience, where visual rhetorical figures are utilized to express how
innovation is a way to experience pleasure by challenging new ways of doing things. Rhetorical figures per se are a
stylistic creative deviation from what is expected. As innovation is a deviation from mainstream and well-established
actions, rhetorical figures (especially the ones that operate through destabilization) are an effective means to highlight
the DNA of innovation.
The findings confirm that although user-generated photographs are often technically poor compared to
professional advertising, consumers are able to adopt creative strategies that are within the realm of the advertising
world. The use of rhetorical figures can be considered as creative mental operations that are an expression of the active
role consumers have in representing the concept of innovation and not only in responding to it.
Relatively little systematic attention has been given to the content and form of user-created visual content. This
exploratory study contributes to the marketing and consumer behaviour literature in several ways. First, by proposing
that user-generated photographs have become a vehicle for representing the construct of innovation. Second, this
research has identified four attributes of innovation as shared on social media; triggers, opportunities, abilities and
outputs. Third, this paper has developed scholarship regarding the symbolic representation of innovation as determined
by consumers.
The value of user-generated images does not lie in the technical aspect but in their ability to capture how
innovation is perceived and most of all represented and communicated through everyday life. Consumers can be
regarded as active cultural producers of a wider notion of innovation than currently realised. By understanding what
and how consumers visually represent about innovation, marketing managers will be better equipped to define the best
ways to engage consumers in marketing activities regarding innovation.
Limitations and future research. Whilst acknowledging that social media facilitate and require cognitive and
social interaction between producers and consumers of images, this study has focused only on the production and
sharing dimension of images. In addition, this study has explored data collected from only one social media platform
while there are many others that contain image based content.
Key words: Innovation; social media; symbolic representation; image sharing
References
ANG S.H., LEE Y.H., LEONG S.M. (2007), “The ad creativity cube: Conceptualization and initial validation”, Journal of the
Academy of Marketing Science, vol. 35, n. 2, pp. 220-232.
ARAL S., DELLAROCAS C., GODES D. (2013), “Introduction to the special issue-social media and business transformation: a
framework for research”, Information Systems Research, vol. 24, n. 1, pp. 3-13.
BARTHES R. (1977), Rhetoric of the Image, Image-Music-Text. Ed. Stephen Heath, Hill and Wang, New York, pp. 32-51.
BENNETT W.L., SEGERBERG A. (2013), The logic of connective action: Digital media and the personalization of contentious
politics, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
BERLYNE D.E. (1971), “Aesthetics and psychobiology (Vol. 336), Appleton-Century-Crofts, New York.
BOHLMANN J.D., SPANJOL J., QUALLS W.J., ROSA J.A. (2013), “The interplay of customer and product innovation dynamics:
an exploratory study”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 30, n. 2, pp. 228-244.
CHATTERJI A.K., FABRIZIO K.R. (2014), “Using users: When does external knowledge enhance corporate product innovation?”,
Strategic Management Journal, vol. 35, n. 10, pp. 1427-1445.
COVIELLO N.E., JOSEPH R.M. (2012), “Creating major innovation with customers: insight from small and Young Technology
firms, Journal of Marketing, vol. 76, n. 6, pp. 87-104.
DONDERI D.C. (2006), “Visual complexity: a review”, Psychological bulletin, vol. 132, n. 1, pp. 73.
FENTON N., BARASSI V. (2011), “Alternative media and social networking sites: The politics of individuation and political
participation”, The Communication Review, vol. 14, n. 3, pp. 179-196.
FÜLLER J., SCHROLL R., VON HIPPEL E. (2013), “User generated brands and their contribution to the diffusion of user
innovations”, Research Policy, vol. 42, n. 6, pp. 1197-1209.
GARCIA R., CALANTONE R. (2002), “A Critical Look at Technological Innovation Taxonomy and Innovativeness Terminology:
A Literature Review”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 19, n. 2, pp. 110-32.
GOODE M.R., DAHL D.W., MOREAU C.P., (2013), “Innovation aesthetics: The relationship between category cues, categorization
certainty, and newness perceptions”, Journal of Product Innovation Management, vol. 30, n. 2, pp. 192-208.
GUMMESSON E., KUUSELA H., NÄRVÄNEN E. (2014), “Reinventing marketing strategy by recasting supplier/customer roles”,
Journal of Service Management, vol. 25, n. 2, pp. 228-240.
HIRSCHMAN E.C. (1980), “Innovativeness, Novelty Seeking, and Consumer Creativity”, Journal of Consumer Research,
7(December), pp. 283-295.
HU Y., MANIKONDA L., KAMBHAMPATI S. (2014, June), “What We Instagram: A First Analysis of Instagram Photo Content
and User Types”, In ICWSM, Proceedings of the 8th International conference on neblog and social media, pp. 535-538.
KAPLAN A.M., HAENLEIN M. (2010), “Users of the world, unite! The challenges and opportunities of Social Media”, Business
Horizons, vol. 53, n. 1, pp. 59-68.
KASSARJIAN H., KASSARJIAN H. (1977), “Content Analysis in Consumer Research”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 4, n.
6, pp. 8–18
KOZINTES R., DE VALCK K., WOJNICKI A.C., SARAH J.S. WILNER (2010), “Understanding Word-of-Mouth Marketing in
195
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
Online Communities”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 74, n. 2, March, pp. 71-89.
KRESS G., VAN LEEUWEN T. (2006), “Reading Images: The Grammar of Visual Design. London: Routledge.
KRONROD A., DANZIGER S. (2013), “Wii will rock you! The use and effect of figurative language in consumer reviews of
hedonic and utilitarian consumption”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 40, n. 4, pp. 726-739.
LAMBERTON C., STEPHEN A.T. (2016), “A Thematic Exploration of Digital, Social Media, and Mobile Marketing: Research
Evolution from 2000 to 2015 and an Agenda for Future Inquiry”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 80, n. 6, pp. 146-172.
LEE E., LEE J.A., MOON J.H., SUNG Y. (2015), “ Pictures Speak Louder than Words: Motivations for Using Instagram”,
Cyberpsychology, Behavior, and Social Networking. vol. 18, n. 9, pp. 552-556.
MCQUARRIE E.F., MICK D.G. (1999), “Visual rhetoric in advertising: Text-interpretive, experimental, and reader-response
analyses”, Journal of Consumer Research, vol. 26, n. 1, pp. 37-54.
MCQUARRIE E.F., PHILLIPS B.J. (2008), “It’s not your magazine ad: Magnitude and direction of recent changes in advertising
style”, Journal of Advertising, vol. 37, n. 3, pp. 95-106.
NGO L.V., O’CASS A. (2013), “Innovation and business success: The mediating role of customer participation”, Journal of
Business Research, vol. 66, n. 8, pp. 1134-1142.
O’CONNOR G.C. (2008), “Major Innovation as a Dynamic Capability: A Systems Approach”, Journal of Product Innovation
Management, vol. 25, n. 4, pp. 313–30.
PEW
INTERNET
ORGANISATION
(2016),
Social
Media
Update,
November
2016,
available
at
http://www.pewinternet.org/2016/11/11/social-media-update-2016/.
PIETERS R., WEDEL M., BATRA R. (2010), “The stopping power of advertising: measures and effects of visual complexity”,
Journal of Marketing, vol. 5, n. 74, pp. 48-60.
PITTA D., FRANZAK F. (1996), “Boundary spanning Product development in consumer markets: learning organization insights”,
Journal of Consumer Marketing, vol. 13, n. 5, pp. 66-81.
RATHNAYAKE C., SUTHERS D.D. (2016), “Networked Solidarity: An Exploratory Network Perspective on Twitter Activity
Related to# illridewithyou”, In 2016 49th Hawaii International Conference on System Sciences (HICSS) (pp. 2058-2067),
“January.IEEE.
ROBERTS D., HUGHES M., KERTBO K. (2014), “Exploring consumers’ motivations to engage in innovation through co-creation
activities”, European Journal of Marketing, vol. 48, n. 1/2, pp. 147-169.
ROGERS E.M., SHOEMAKER F.F. (1971), Communication of Innovations, The Free Press, New York.
ROGERS E.M. (1996), Diffusion of lnnovations, 3d ed. New York: The Free Press.
ROSENHOLTZ R., LI Y., NAKANO L. (2007), “Measuring visual clutter”, Journal of vision, vol. 7, n. 2, pp. 17-17.
SCHREIER M., FUCHS C. DAHL D.W. (2012), “Innovation effect of User design: exploring consumers’ innovation perceptions of
firms selling products designed by users”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 76, n. 5, pp. 18-32.
SCOTT L.M. (1994), “Images in Advertising: The need for a theory of visual rhetoric”, Journal of Consumer Research,
21(September), pp. 252-273.
SHIH C.F., VENKATESH A. (2004), “Beyond Adoption: Development and Application of a Use Diffusion Model”, Journal of
Marketing, vol. 68, n. 1 (January), pp. 59-72.
SOJKA J.Z., GIESE J.L. (2006), “Communicating through pictures and words: Understanding the role of affect and cognition in
processing visual and verbal information”, Psychology and Marketing, vol. 23, n. 12, pp. 995-1014.
STEPHAN M. (2016), “A transformation theory of aesthetics, Routledge, London.
196
Le dinamiche coopetitive nell’ambito delle imprese multibusiness:
un caso studio esplicativo
ROSANNA AMATA* GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO ANNA MINÀ
PASQUALE MASSIMO PICONE**
Obiettivi. La letteratura economico-manageriale ha ampiamente esplorato l’efficacia della strategia di
diversificazione (Benito-Osorio et al., 2012; Palich et al., 2000; Picone e Dagnino, 2016; Wan et al., 2011). In questo
dibattito - che affonda le sue radici nei pioneristici contributi di Ansoff (1957), Chandler (1962) e Rumelt (1974) -, si
inseriscono anche gli studi sulle relazioni di cooperazione e competizione tra le divisioni di un’impresa diversificata (o
multibusiness). Se, da un lato, la cooperazione tra le divisioni di un’impresa multibusiness è da considerarsi una
condizione indispensabile per l’emergere delle sinergie potenziali e latenti, dall’altro lato, le divisioni competono
sovente fra di loro per l’assegnazione di maggiori risorse (in particolare quelle finanziarie) rispetto alle altre divisioni
(Hill et al., 1992). La coesistenza di relazioni competitive e cooperative fra le divisioni appare di estremo interesse in
una prospettiva economico-gestionale, soprattutto quando le divisioni in competizione si trovano a dover condividere
risorse tangibili e intangibili, come avviene nelle imprese che hanno implementato una strategia di diversificazione
correlata (Wan et al., 2011) e, anche in misura anche maggiore, nel caso di intra-industry diversification (Li e
Greenwood, 2004; Zahavi e Lavie, 2013).
Gli studi esistenti su coopetition (Bengtsson e Kock, 2014; Czakon et al., 2014a) mostrano come, al di là della
convenzionale dicotomia competizione-cooperazione (Luo, 2007), la contestuale coesistenza di comportamenti
competitivi e cooperativi fra attori (ossia la coopetizione), consente il perseguimento di una serie di vantaggi per
entrambi gli attori (Brandenburger e Nalebuff, 1996), anche in termini di stimolo e di attivazione di processi innovativi
(Gnyawali e Park, 2009). Tuttavia, gli studi su coopetition si sono principalmente focalizzati sulle relazioni interimpresa (Ritala et al., 2009) e al momento il tema delle relazioni coopetitive tra divisioni di imprese multibusiness
risulta scarsamente investigato (Bengtsson e Raza-Ullah, 2016). Inoltre, si rileva che i pochi studi esplorativi su
coopetition a livello intraimpresa mostrano anche risultati parzialmente contraddittori (Luo, 2005). Alla luce del
contributo di Czakon et al. (2014b), si potrebbe argomentare che i risultati contrastanti sulla relazione tra coopetition
e performance sono da attribuire al “paradosso interno” che caratterizza la relazione coopetitiva stessa. Dunque, per
poter comprendere come si può gestire la coopetition all’interno di un’impresa multibusiness, occorre indagare le
tensioni cooperative e competitive che emergono tra le divisioni e le attività dell’impresa (Le Roy e Fernandez, 2015;
Raza-Ullah et al., 2014; Seran et al., 2016). In effetti, identificare le fonti delle tensioni cooperative e competitive e
discutere i meccanismi di gestione può essere di supporto ai manager per comprendere in qual modo ciascuna
divisione dovrebbe agire (Le Roy e Czakon, 2016; Le Roy e Fernandez, 2015). Pertanto, questo lavoro si pone
l’obiettivo di indirizzare e rispondere alla seguente domanda di ricerca: in che modo le imprese multibusiness
gestiscono le simultanee tensioni cooperative e competitive che sussistono tra le divisioni?
Metodologia. Bengtsson et al. (2010) suggeriscono di utilizzare la metodologia dei casi studio per indagare come
gestire le dinamiche coopetitive. In effetti, la metodologia dei casi studio consente di esplorare in che modo le tensioni
competitive e cooperative emergono e si evolvono seguendo un determinato percorso (Eisenhardt, 1989; Gerring,
2006). Sulla scorta di questa intuizione, la nostra ricerca focalizza l’attenzione sui processi di allocazione delle risorse
produttive in AD2Microelectronics (AD2M). Come frequentemente accade nell’ambito di una ricerca qualitativa, il
nome dell’impresa oggetto di analisi è stato modificato per garantirne la riservatezza. Si tratta di una delle cinque più
grandi imprese di semiconduttori attualmente esistenti e operanti a livello globale. L’impresa si occupa di produrre
una vasta gamma di dispositivi per i sistemi di telecomunicazione, computer, elettronica di consumo, nel settore
automobilistico, automazione industriale e sistemi di controllo. In dettaglio, AD2M progetta, sviluppa, produce e
commercializza circuiti integrati e dispositivi discreti. Quindi, l’impresa in parola segue una strategia di
*
**
Dottore in Finanza Aziendale - Università degli Studi di Catania
email: rosanna_amata@live.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - University of Rome LUMSA
e-mail: g.dagnino@lumsa.it
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli Studi di Enna “Kore”
e-mail: anna.mina@unikore.it
Ricercatore di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli Studi di Bergamo
e-mail: pasqualemassimo.picone@unibg.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
197
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.32
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
diversificazione intrasettoriale. Tale strategia richiede che le divisioni cooperino per allocare la capacità produttiva e
che, contestualmente, competano al fine di raggiungere gli obiettivi interni alla singola divisione.
Come è noto, gli studi di matrice qualitativa richiedono l’utilizzo di un’ampia varietà di dati a supporto della
ricerca (Yin 2013). Tale varietà di dati dovrà essere combinata e giustapposta al fine di rendere possibile la
triangolazione dei fatti (Jick, 1979). Tali procedure sono state rispettate al fine di accrescere la validità dello studio
stesso.
La ricerca fa leva su un ampio insieme di informazioni di fonte interna all’impresa, e altresì di un database tratto
da interviste semi-strutturate. In particolare, sono stati intervistati dodici manager di AD2M altamente competenti e
operanti a vari livelli gerarchici e in varie aree funzionali (Eisenhardt e Graebner, 2007). La maggior parte delle
interviste sono state condotte nel periodo compreso fra giugno e settembre 2015. Le interviste sono state registrate,
laddove possibile. Le interviste hanno una durata che oscilla dai 47,35 minuti alle 2 ore. La durata media di
un’intervista è di 1,36 ore.
Al fine di analizzare il contenuto delle singole interviste, in modo tale da renderlo comparabile e codificabile
anche con le altre interviste, gli autori hanno sviluppato uno schema di codifica. In particolare, gli autori hanno
suddiviso le parole contenuti nei testi delle interviste e creato delle categorie di contenuti basate su regole di codifica
chiare (Berelson, 1952; Weber, 1990) e come tali utili per identificare dei collegamenti fra il contenuto delle frasi e il
significato sottostante le frasi stesse. Successivamente, per confermare se la corrispondenza fra la codifica e le frasi
identificate fossero ben rappresentative, si è utilizzato anche il Word Cruncher in ATLAS.ti.
Risultati. Mentre la letteratura esistente ha offerto attenzione principalmente alle relazioni di coopetizione
interimpresa (Gnyawali e Park, 2011; Ritala, 2012), questo studio contribuisce agli studi sulla coopetizione
focalizzando l’attenzione a livello intraimpresa. Un risultato di interesse è dato dalla possibilità di identificare una
sequenza temporale della coopetizione fra le divisioni nell’ambito di un’impresa multibusiness secondo la quale
inizialmente le divisioni competono tra loro e, successivamente, avviano processi di cooperazione. Questa condizione
inverte la sequenza temporale della coopetizione che si osserva tradizionalmente nell’ambito delle relazioni
interimpresa, dove le imprese inizialmente cooperano nella fase di creazione del valore e competono successivamente
nella fase di appropriazione del valore. In tal modo, mentre alcuni studi precedenti tengono conto dell’emergere della
coopetizione all’interno di contesti cooperativi (Padula e Dagnino, 2007), questo studio estende la letteratura sulla
coopetizione, esaminando in profondità il caso della coopetizione all’interno di un contesto competitivo. Inoltre, esso
contribuisce alla letteratura sulla strategia di diversificazione rendendo intellegibile (almeno per quanto concerne la
funzione produzione) come tale strategia implichi l’emergere di relazioni coopetitive che debbono essere gestite.
Limiti della ricerca. I limiti del lavoro sono riconducibili all’estendibilità dei risultati. Come già accennato, il
caso studio preso in considerazione ha uno specifico focus sulla funzione produzione. Pertanto, ulteriori studi
dovrebbero offrire una più ampia rassegna delle relazioni coopetitive intraimpresa considerando anche altri processi
d’interesse come, ad esempio, quelli riguardanti le strategie di ricerca e sviluppo. Dopo aver analizzato le tensioni a
livello di singoli processi, si potrebbero quindi esplorare gli influssi reciproci.
In secondo luogo, alcuni autori hanno posto in luce l’esistenza della coopetizione fra le funzioni operative di una
singola impresa. In linea teorica, si ritiene possibile che le dinamiche coopetitive fra le divisioni siano, almeno in parte,
condizionate dalla coopetizione intraimpresa fra le funzioni. Questo aspetto che la nostra ricerca non indaga è
certamente d’interesse per futuri studi.
Infine, questo lavoro di ricerca si basa sulle evidenze di un singolo caso e, quindi, non può che avere l’ambizione
di fornire solamente dei risultati preliminari. Naturalmente, le intuizioni teoriche e manageriali che scaturiscono dalla
nostra ricerca sono corroborate con analisi statistico-quantitative.
Implicazioni pratiche. Questo paper evidenzia il ruolo delle tensioni cooperative e competitive all’interno di
un’impresa multibusiness. Durante l’analisi dei processi di assegnazione delle capacità è possibile rilevare una
divergenza di interessi tra le divisioni (Dagnino, 2009). Com’è noto, il problema di allocazione delle risorse di
un’impresa multibusiness potrebbe portare alla riduzione della competitività e della quota di mercato. Tuttavia, tale
aspetto di preminenza della competizione è controbilanciato dalla presenza di una terza parte (cioè il livello corporate)
che interviene nel tentativo di garantire maggiore convergenza degli interessi fra le divisioni (Castaldo et al., 2010;
Mariani, 2009). Da una parte, il livello corporate prova a soddisfare la richiesta di capacità delle divisioni. Dall’altra
parte, esso promuove l’allineamento fra i piani di produzione delle divisioni e le strategie e gli obiettivi delle divisioni.
Pur riconoscendo il rilievo di indagare i driver all’emergere della coopetition (Czakon et al., 2014a), gli studi
precedenti non hanno fornito un quadro esauriente delle fonti della coopetizione a livello intraimpresa. Lo studio
qualitativo qui presentato consente di comprendere il ruolo chiave giocato dal livello corporate all’emergere della
coopetizione tra le divisioni in un’impresa (Mariani, 2007, 2009). In questo senso, il lavoro fornisce un contributo
parallelo allo studio di Luo et al. (2006) che richiama l’attenzione sulla coopetizione intraimpresa fra le funzioni per
ottenere un vantaggio competitivo. Inoltre, lo studio in parola conferma la loro tesi secondo cui la coopetizione è
sovente forzata dal livello corporate dell’impresa, che è guidata da una razionalità collettiva, contrariamente alla
visione delle divisioni che sono maggiormente guidate da una razionalità individuale (Shu et al., 2017).
198
LE DINAMICHE COOPETITIVE NELL’AMBITO DELLE IMPRESE MULTIBUSINESS: UN CASO STUDIO ESPLICATIVO
Originalità del lavoro. Muovendo dal lavoro Dagnino (2009), il paper riconosce che la coopetizione a livello
intraimpresa si verifica nella misura in cui sussista una parziale convergenza di interessi fra le divisioni, che si trovano
a cooperare e a competere contestualmente (Chen, 2008), a dal quale emergono tensioni coopetitive fra le divisioni
(Raza-Ullah et al., 2014).
Tuttavia, sulle orme di Ritala et al. (2009) e di Soekijad e van Wended de Joorde (2009), è possibile affermare che
una chiara separazione temporale della competizione e della cooperazione è una condizione che consente l’affermarsi
di una relazione coopetitiva che sia duratura e sostenibile (Bengtsson e Kock, 2000). Si mostra a tal riguardo come, la
coopetizione intraimpresa si manifesta attraverso un processo che include molteplici pratiche coopetitive (Tidström e
Rajala, 2016), quali, ad esempio, l’imposizione della cooperazione per favorire l’utilizzo pieno della capacità
produttiva e la gestione della competizione fra le divisioni quando esse aspirano ad acquisire capacità produttiva
aggiuntiva.
Parole chiave: coopetition; impresa multibusiness, cooperazione imposta, tensioni coopetitive
Bibliografia
ANSOFF H.I. (1957). “Strategies for diversification”, Harvard Business Review, vol. 35, n. 5, pp. 113-124.
BENGTSSON M., ERIKSSON J., WINCENT J. (2010). “Co-opetition dynamics-an outline for further inquiry”, Competitiveness
Review: An International Business Journal, vol. 20, n. 2, pp. 194-214.
BENGTSSON M., KOCK S. (2000), “«Coopetition» in business Networks-to cooperate and compete simultaneously”, Industrial
Marketing Management, vol. 29, n. 5, pp. 411-426.
BENGTSSON M., KOCK S. (2014), “Coopetition-Quo vadis? Past accomplishments and future challenges”, Industrial Marketing
Management, vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 180-188.
BENGTSSON M., RAZA-ULLAH T. (2016), “A systematic review of research on coopetition: Toward a multilevel understanding”,
Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 57, n. Agosto, pp. 23-39.
BENITO-OSORIO D., ÁNGEL GUERRAS-MARTÍN L., ÁNGEL ZUÑIGA-VICENTE J. (2012), “Four decades of research on
product diversification: A literature review”, Management Decision, vol. 50, n. 2, pp. 325-344.
BERELSON B. (1952), Content Analysis in Communications Research, Glencoe, Ill.: The Free Press.
BRANDENBURGER A.M., NALEBUFF B.J. (1996), Co-opetition, Currency Doubleday, New York.
CASTALDO S., MOLLERING G., GROSSO M., ZERBINI F. (2010), “Exploring how third-party organizations facilitate
coopetition management in buyer-seller relationships”, in Yami S., Castaldo S., Dagnino G.B., Le Roy F., Coopetition
Winning Strategies for 21st Century, Edward Elgar Publishing, pp. 141-165.
CHANDLER A.D. (1962), Strategy and structure: Chapters in the history of the American enterprise, MIT Press, Cambridge (MA)
CHEN M.J. (2008), “Reconceptualizing the competition-cooperation relationship: A transparadox perspective”, Journal of
Management Inquiry, vol. 17, n. 4, pp. 288-304.
CZAKON W., FERNANDEZ A.S., MINÀ A. (2014). “Editorial-From paradox to practice: the rise of coopetition strategies”,
International Journal of Business Environment, vol. 6, n. 1, pp.1-10.
CZAKON W., MUCHA-KUS K., ROGALSKI M. (2014). “Coopetition research landscape: a systematic literature review 19972010”, Journal of Economics & Management, vol. 17, pp. 121-150.
DAGNINO G.B. (2009), “Coopetition Strategy: A New Kind of Interfirm Dynamics for Value Creation, in Dagnino G.B., Rocco E.
(a cura di). Coopetition Strategy: Theory Experiments and Cases: pp. 25-43, Routledge.
EISENHARDT K.M. (1989), “Building theories from case study research”, Academy of Management Review, vol. 14, n. 4, pp. 532550.
EISENHARDT K.M., GRAEBNER M.E. (2007), “Theory building from cases: Opportunities and challenges”, Academy of
Management Journal, vol. 50, n. 1, pp. 25-32.
GERRING J. (2006). Case study research: Principles and practices, Cambridge University Press.
GNYAWALI D.R., PARK B.J.R. (2009), “Co-opetition and technological innovation in small and medium-sized enterprises: A
multilevel conceptual model”, Journal of Small Business Management, vol. 47, n. 3, pp. 308-330.
GNYAWALI D.R., PARK B.J.R. (2011), “Co-opetition between giants: Collaboration with competitors for technological
innovation”, Research Policy, vol. 40, n. 5, pp. 650-663.
HILL C.W., HITT M.A., HOSKISSON R.E. (1992), “Cooperative versus competitive structures in related and unrelated diversified
firms”, Organization Science, vol. 3, n. 4, pp. 501-521.
JICK T.D. (1979), “Mixing qualitative and quantitative methods: Triangulation in action”, Administrative Science Quarterly, vol. 24,
n. 4, pp. 602-611.
LE ROY F., CZAKON W. (2016), “Managing coopetition: the missing link between strategy and performance”, Industrial
Marketing Management, vol. 53, n. February, pp. 3-6.
LE ROY F., FERNANDEZ A.S. (2015), “Managing coopetitive tensions at the working group level: The rise of the coopetitive
project team”, British Journal of Management, vol. 26, n. 4, pp. 671-688.
LI S.X., GREENWOOD R. (2004), “The effect of within-industry diversification on firm performance: Synergy creation, multimarket contact and market structuration”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 25, n. 12, pp. 1131-1153.
LUO X., SLOTEGRAAF R.J., PAN X. (2006), “Cross-functional «coopetition»: The simultaneous role of cooperation and
competition within firms”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 70, n. 2, pp. 67-80.
LUO Y. (2005), “Toward coopetition within a multinational enterprise: a perspective from foreign subsidiaries”, Journal of World
Business, vol. 40, n. 1, pp. 71-90.
LUO Y. (2007), “A coopetition perspective of global competition”, Journal of World Business, vol. 42, n. 2, pp. 129-144.
MARIANI M.M. (2007), “Coopetition as an emergent strategy: Empirical evidence from an Italian consortium of opera houses”,
International Studies of Management & Organization, vol. 37, n. 2, pp. 97-126.
199
TRACK - COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
MARIANI M.M. (2009), “Emergent coopetitive and cooperative strategies in interorganizational relationships: empirical evidence
from Australian and Italian operas”, in Dagnino, G.B., Rocco, E. (a cura di), Coopetition strategy: theory, experiments and
cases, Routledge.
PADULA G., DAGNINO G.B. (2007), “Untangling the rise of coopetition: the intrusion of competition in a cooperative game
structure”, International Studies of Management & Organization, vol. 37, n. 2, pp. 32-52.
PALICH L.E., CARDINAL L.B., MILLER C.C. (2000), “Curvilinearity in the diversification-performance linkage: an examination
of over three decades of research”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 21, n. 2, pp. 155-174.
PICONE P.M., DAGNINO G.B. (2016), “Revamping research on unrelated diversification strategy: perspectives, opportunities and
challenges for future inquiry”, Journal of Management & Governance, vol. 20, n. 3, 413-445.
RAZA-ULLAH T., BENGTSSON M., KOCK S. (2014), “The coopetition paradox and tension in coopetition at multiple levels”,
Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 189-198.
RITALA P. (2012), “Coopetition strategy-when is it successful? Empirical evidence on innovation and market performance”, British
Journal of Management, vol. 23, n. 3, pp. 307-324.
RITALA P., VÄLIMÄKI K., BLOMQVIST K., HENTTONEN K. (2009), “Intrafirm coopetition, knowledge creation and
innovativeness”, in Dagnino G.B., Rocco E. (a cura di), Coopetition strategy: Theory, experiments and cases, Routledge.
RUMELT R. P. (1974). Strategy, structure and profitability, Harvard University Press.
SERAN T., PELLEGRIN-BOUCHER E., GURAU C. (2016), “The management of coopetitive tensions within multi-unit
organizations”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 53, n. February, pp. 31-41.
SHU C., JIN J.L., ZHOU K.Z. (2017), “A Contingent View of Partner Coopetition in International Joint Ventures”, Journal of
International Marketing, vol. 25, n. 3, pp. 42-60.
SOEKIJAD M., DE JOODE R.V.W. (2009), “Coping with coopetition in knowledge-intensive multiparty alliances”, in Dagnino,
G.B., Rocco, E. (a cura di). (2009), Coopetition strategy: theory, experiments and cases, Routledge.
TIDSTRÖM A., RAJALA A. (2016), “Coopetition strategy as interrelated praxis and practices on multiple levels”, Industrial
Marketing Management, vol. 58, n. October, pp. 35-44.
WAN W.P., HOSKISSON R.E., SHORT J.C., YIU D.W. (2011), “Resource-based theory and corporate diversification:
Accomplishments and opportunities”, Journal of Management, vol. 37, n. 5, pp. 1335-1368.
WEBER R.P. (1990), Basic content analysis (No. 49). Sage, Newbury Park, California.
YIN R.K. (2013). Case study research: Design and methods, Sage, Thousand Oaks (CA)
ZAHAVI T., LAVIE D. (2013), “Intra-industry diversification and firm performance”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 34, n. 8,
pp. 978-998.
200
Il contributo della comunicazione al successo
della strategia coopetitiva
SONIA C. GIACCONE* GIOVANNI BATTISTA DAGNINO ALESSANDRA MAZZEI
Obiettivi. Questo paper affronta in modo congiunto due temi di ricerca molto rilevanti nell’ambito degli studi di
management, seppur differenti in termini di background teorici ed approcci di studio, specificamente la comunicazione
e la coopetizione. Sebbene ciascuna delle due aree di studio abbia ricevuto ampia attenzione da parte degli studiosi, in
letteratura non vi sono ad oggi contributi che affrontano i due temi in modo complementare.
Il lavoro intende investigare in che modo i processi di comunicazione tra i soggetti coinvolti possano contribuire a
costruire ed alimentare la relazione coopetitiva, incrementandone l’efficacia ed i risultati generati per la imprese.
La coopetizione è comunemente definita come la coesistenza di competizione e cooperazione tra organizzazioni
che, seppur in concorrenza tra loro sul mercato, scelgono di condividere progetti miranti a creare valore in modo
congiunto, e in tale direzione allineano i loro interessi e comportamenti verso obiettivi comuni forieri di opportunità
competitive per ciascuna delle imprese coinvolte (Brandenburger, Nalebuff, 1996). Si tratta di una scelta strategica che
può essere assunta in modo deliberato dalle imprese (Dagnino, 2009) o svilupparsi in modo emergente, attraverso
diversi livelli di interazione (Bengtsson, Cock, 2000).
Sebbene il tema della coopetizione come scelta strategica sia relativamente recente, ha interessato nel tempo molti
studiosi (Dahl et al., 2016; Tidstrom, Rajala, 2016) ed animato un vivace dibattito soprattutto per le sue implicazioni
sui processi e sulle performance aziendali. Le ricerche condotte ne hanno esplorato diversi aspetti, dall’analisi dei
drivers che spingono le imprese ad intraprendere relazioni di coopetizione (Bengtsson, Raza Ullah, 2016), ai processi
di creazione e trasferimento della conoscenza (Ghobadi, D’Ambra, 2012; Zhang et al., 2010), alle opportunità di
vantaggi competitivi (Ahuja, 2000; Garrette et al., 2009) attraverso non solo l’attività interna di ricerca e sviluppo per
l’innovazione (Huang, Yu, 2011; Park et al, 2014; Le Roy et al., 2016), ma anche il network di relazioni esterne
dell’impresa (Bengtsson, Raza-Ullah, 2016) e l’esplorazione di opportunità di business sui mercati internazionali
(Yang et al., 2014; Park et al., 2014; Czakon et al., 2016).
Ciò che ancora non è stato adeguatamente studiato è la natura della relazione tra la coopetizione e la
comunicazione tra i soggetti in essa coinvolti; in particolare, non vi sono ricerche che indagano il ruolo che la
comunicazione riveste per migliorare l’efficacia delle relazioni coopetitive.
Riteniamo che tale aspetto meriti un adeguato approfondimento per le sue implicazioni sulla competitività delle
imprese che intraprendono una strategia di coopetizione.
Al fine di colmare il suddetto gap di conoscenza, questo lavoro intende rispondere alle seguenti domande di
ricerca: qual è la relazione tra comunicazione e coopetizione? E in che modo la comunicazione contribuisce a
sviluppare la relazione coopetitiva tra le imprese?
L’individuazione di una chiave di lettura comune ai due temi, seppur complessa a causa delle differenze negli
approcci di studio, risulta fondamentale per poter dare una risposta alle domande di ricerca, ed offre altresì
l’opportunità per sviluppare il sistema di conoscenze su entrambi gli ambiti di ricerca.
A questo proposito riteniamo che il concetto di “pratica” possa rappresentare la giusta chiave per comprendere il
nesso tra comunicazione e competizione; pertanto, nel lavoro la coopetizione è analizzata adottando l’approccio
strategy-as-practice (Dahl, Kock, Lundgren-Henriksson, 2016; Stadlerm Van Wassenhove, 2016; Seidl, Whittington,
2006), che ne enfatizza la natura sociale, considerandola un’attività che si realizza attraverso le interazioni tra le
persone, a livello intra-organizzativo o inter-organizzativo (Tidstrom, Rajala, 2016; Jarzabkowski, Spee, 2009;
Jarzabkowski et al., 2007; Vaara, Whittington, 2012). Coerentemente, il tema della comunicazione viene affrontato
attraverso le lenti dell’approccio costruttivista, che enfatizza il ruolo centrale della comunicazione nella creazione
dell’organizzazione e nello sviluppo della sua identità (Weick, 1979; McPhee, Zaug 2000; Aschcraft et al., 2009;
Fairhurst, Putnam, 2004). L’adozione dell’approccio costruttivista consente di integrare in modo appropriato ed
efficace gli studi di coopetizione e quelli di comunicazione, in modo da riuscire ad identificare il valore che deriva da
una loro analisi combinata e complementare.
*
Ricercatore Confermato di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università degli Studi di Catania
e-mail: s.giaccone@unict.it
Ordinario di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università di Roma LUMSA
e-mail: g.dagnino@lumsa.it
Associato di Economia e Gestione delle Imprese - Università IULM Milano
e-mail: alessandra.mazzei@iulm.it
Sinergie-SIMA 2018 Conference
Transformative business strategies and new patterns for value creation
14-15 June 2018 - Ca’ Foscari University Venice (Italy)
201
Referred Electronic Conference Proceeding
ISBN 97888943937-2-9
DOI 10.7433/SRECP.EA.2018.33
TRACK N. COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
Metodologia. Muovendo dal convincimento che vi sia una relazione imprescindibile e sinergica tra
comunicazione e coopetizione, che la coopetizione sia intrisa di comunicazione e che quest’ultima nutra la relazione
coopetitiva favorendone il raggiungimento degli obiettivi, il paper intende comprendere in che modo la comunicazione
possa contribuire al successo della strategia coopetitiva.
In tale direzione, seguendo una metodologia di analisi di tipo deduttivo, è stata svolta una ricognizione della
letteratura sui temi studiati adottando le prospettive teoriche sopra menzionate. In considerazione del filo conduttore
rappresentato dal concetto di “practice”, tra gli studi di coopetition sono stati selezionati quelli basati su un approccio
di tipo strategy-as-practice che evidenziano la natura sociale della coopetition, mentre, per quanto concerne gli studi di
comunicazione, la scelta è ricaduta su quelli che adottano un approccio costruttivista alla comunicazione che
costruisce ed alimentata, attraverso continue interazioni tra le persone, l’organizzazione e le sue strategie.
La ricerca è stata altresì affinata concentrando l’analisi sui lavori che indagassero le forme di comunicazione
utilizzate nella relazione di coopetition ed i benefici ad esse conseguenti.
Tale analisi ha consentito di ricostruire un quadro degli studi di coopetizione con riferimenti, seppur non
sistematici, alla comunicazione, al fine di comprendere se ed in che modo la comunicazione possa rappresentare un
volano per la relazione coopetitiva. Così sono state poste le premesse per una rilettura in chiave comunicazionale della
coopetizione.
In particolare, attraverso l’analisi delle attività di comunicazione utilizzate nell’ambito delle relazioni di
coopetizione e dei benefici da esse prodotti rispetto agli atteggiamenti ed ai comportamenti dei collaboratori coinvolti
nella strategia competitiva, lo studio mostra in che modo la comunicazione contribuisce all’efficacia della coopetizione
ed al raggiungimento delle performance attese.
Risultati. Un primo risultato dell’analisi condotta è la ricostruzione delle diverse forme di comunicazione
associate alle relazioni coopetitive. La letteratura considera molteplici modalità di comunicazione, da quella verbale a
quella non verbale, da quella scritta a quella orale, da quella per immagini e suoni alla comunicazione multimediale,
evidenziandone la rilevanza ai fini del sensemaking e della costruzione della strategia di coopetizione secondo
l’approccio strategy as practice (Seidl, Whittington, 2014).
Attraverso l’adozione di alcuni criteri di categorizzazione, e specificamente il grado di interazione sociale tra gli
individui e la fonte emittente dei messaggi, le diverse forme di comunicazione sono state ricondotte alle seguenti: il
dialogo, per una comunicazione informale tra pari o tra capi e collaboratori (Weick et al., 2005; Whittington, 2006;
Hardy et al., 2005; Kuhn, 2008); il meeting, come occasione comunicazione di piccoli gruppi, adeguata sia
all’interazione tra pari che alla diffusione di messaggi top-down (Tidstrom, Rajala, 2016; Blaschke et al., 2012;
Whittington, 2006; Luo et al., 2006; Quinn, Dutton, 2005); i messaggi inviati dal livello corporate, che attraverso varie
modalità che prevedono generalmente un basso grado di interazione, diffondono comunicazioni ed istruzioni operative
ai collaboratori (Stadtler, Van Wassenhove, 2016; Fernandez et al., 2014; Blaschke et al., 2012; Whittington, 2006); le
attività di training e mentoring, per formare le competenze ed allineare atteggiamenti e comportamenti dei
collaboratori verso gli obiettivi aziendali (Stadtler, Van Wassenhove, 2016; Fernandez et al., 2014); l’interazione nel
lavoro in gruppo e le routines/pratiche di tipo informale, come modalità per sviluppare l’interazione sociale tra i
collaboratori e stimolare l’apprendimento organizzativo e lo scambio di conoscenze (Dahl et al., 2016; Tidstrom,
Rajala, 2016; Raza-Ullah et al., 2014; Yang et al., 2014; Luo et al., 2006).
L’analisi e l’interpretazione dei contributi della letteratura ha altresì condotto ad un secondo risultato della
ricerca, specificamente la ricostruzione degli effetti collegati alle attività di comunicazione e lo sviluppo di un
framework interpretativo che spiega il ruolo cruciale della comunicazione nella relazione competitiva, evidenziando
altresì il circolo virtuoso tra comunicazione e competizione.
Basandoci sulla teoria della gerarchia degli effetti (Lavidge, Steiner, 1961) sviluppata negli studi
sull’apprendimento sociale e sui processi decisionali e comportamentali degli individui (Ki, Hon, 2012), che evidenzia
come le percezioni influenzino gli atteggiamenti, che a loro volta influenzano i comportamenti, ammettendo un ordine
sequenziale degli effetti, riteniamo che la comunicazione, all’interno delle relazioni coopetitive, generi effetti positivi
consequenziali nella relazione coopetitiva.
Sebbene le diverse attività di comunicazione permeino la relazione coopetitiva e si realizzino in modo
concomitante, il framework interpretativo proposto individua come elemento di avvio del circolo virtuoso, le attività di
comunicazione provenienti dal livello corporate. Attraverso i messaggi inviati ai collaboratori, le attività di training, le
routines organizzative, l’azienda non soltanto trasmette comunicazioni di tipo operativo, ma anche messaggi miranti a
diffondere la cultura ed i valori dell’azienda, a coinvolgere i collaboratori, facendoli sentire parte integrante e
fondamentale del progetto strategico, così da stimolare la formazione di atteggiamenti mentali positivamente orientati
verso la coopetizione e la condivisione degli obiettivi aziendali. Tali attività di comunicazione generano dunque un
doppio effetto positivo, dapprima sull’atteggiamento degli individui, favorendo lo sviluppo di fiducia e commitment, e
stimolando così la loro disposizione positiva verso una partecipazione attiva alla coopetizione (Weick, Sutcliffe,
Obstfeld, 2005); e conseguentemente sul loro comportamento nell’ambito della relazione, favorendo, ad esempio, la
partecipazione attiva nelle conversazioni e nei meeting, la collaborazione all’interno delle attività del team al fine di
perseguire gli obiettivi comuni. L’adozione di tali comportamenti fortemente basati sulla comunicazione tra gli
individui coinvolti nella strategia coopetitiva influenza profondamente e positivamente anche gli effetti prodotti. Questi
ultimi sono identificabili nell’attribuzione di significati condivisi alla relazione (Weick, Sutcliffe, Obstfed, 2005; Kuhn,
2008; Stadtler, van Wassenhove, 2016), nella creazione di una identità condivisa (Stadler, Van Wassenhove, 2016;
202
IL CONTRIBUTO DELLA COMUNICAZIONE AL SUCCESSO DELLA STRATEGIA COOPETITIVA
Hardy, Lawrence, Grant, 2005), nell’allineamento delle azioni con gli altri partecipanti (Koschmann, Kuhn, Pfarrer,
2012; Blaschke, Schoeneborn, Seidl, 2012), nel bilanciamento delle tensioni coopetitive (Fernandez et al., 2014; RazaUllah et al., 2014; Tidstrom, 2014), nella condivisione e creazione di nuova conoscenza (Dahl, 2014; Ghobadi,
D'Ambra, 2012). Tali effetti prodotti dalla comunicazione sulla relazione competitiva sono fondamentali sia perché
favoriscono l’efficacia della coopetizione ed il raggiungimento dei risultati attesi, declinabili, ad esempio, in termini di
innovazioni e performance finanziarie; sia perché contribuiscono a rinforzare gli atteggiamenti positivi verso la
competizione, alimentando così il circolo virtuoso di comunicazione-coopetizione. Infine, è stato notato come anche le
performance derivanti dalla strategia competitiva possono contribuire ad alimentare tale circolo virtuoso, poiché
stimolano ulteriori flussi di comunicazione dal livello corporate verso i collaboratori.
L’interpretazione della letteratura sottostante all’elaborazione del frame work sopra descritto ha condotto alla
formulazione delle seguenti propositions:
Proposition 1a: La comunicazione aziendale incoraggia l'atteggiamento positivo dei collaboratori nei confronti
della strategia coopetitiva; più specificamente, essa è positivamente correlata allo sviluppo della fiducia e del
commitment tra le persone coinvolte nella coopetizione.
Proposition 1b: La comunicazione aziendale, sollecitando atteggiamenti positivi verso la coopetizione, promuove
comportamenti ad alto contenuto di comunicazione tra i dipendenti, come partecipazione attiva a dialoghi, meeting ed
interazione in lavori di gruppo.
Proposition 2: I comportamenti ad alto contenuto di comunicazione tra i collaboratori sono positivamente
correlati con l’ottenimento di risultati della comunicazione, che favoriscono l’efficacia della coopetizione, e che sono
riconducibili a: creazione di senso ed identità condivisa nella relazione, collaborazione attiva, creazione e condivisione
della conoscenza, orientamento coordinato delle azioni, bilanciamento di tensioni coopetitive.
Proposition 3: Gli esiti dell’attività di comunicazione sono positivamente correlati alle performance della
coopetizione, misurabili ad esempio in termini di innovazioni generate o risultati finanziari.
Proposition 4: Il circolo virtuoso comunicazione-coopetizione si alimenta nel tempo poiché:
i risultati della comunicazione favoriscono lo sviluppo di atteggiamenti positivi di fiducia e commitment dei
partecipanti verso la coopetizione;
-le performance della coopetizione favoriscono nuove attività di comunicazione che dal livello corporate sono
indirizzate ai collaboratori.
Limiti della ricerca. Questa ricerca di tipo teorico propone un framework interpretativo che, evidenziando la
natura sociale e comunicazionale della coopetizione, spiega gli effetti che la comunicazione produce sull’efficacia della
coopetizione; in particolare è posto in evidenza il ruolo della comunicazione nello sviluppo di atteggiamenti e
comportamenti dei collaboratori orientati alla coopetizione.
Tuttavia, un limite di questo lavoro consiste nell’assenza di una verifica empirica del framework interpretativo
proposto, che potrebbe essere oggetto di futuri sviluppi della ricerca miranti a testare le propositions formulate.
Implicazioni pratiche. Il paper offre degli spunti di riflessione ai manager coinvolti nella progettazione e
gestione di strategie coopetitive sul ruolo strategico della comunicazione sia top-down che tra i lavoratori impegnati
nella coopetizione. Contribuendo a sviluppare e fortificare le relazioni sociali tra gli individui, i loro atteggiamenti ed
i loro comportamenti, la comunicazione rappresenta infatti un fattore centrale e rilevante nella costruzione della
strategia di competizione e del suo successo. In particolare, i risultati dell’analisi svolta mettono in evidenza la
necessità di utilizzare un insieme di strumenti di comunicazione, da quelli gestiti a livello corporate volti a inviare
messaggi fino a quelli più interattivi e informali tipici delle “pratiche”.
Originalità del lavoro. Attraverso una lettura in chiave comunicazionale, il paper propone una visione nuova
della coopetizione, che evidenzia come la comunicazione rappresenti una linea guida ed un elemento imprescindibile
per l’implementazione ed il successo della strategia coopetitiva.
Il lavoro offre tre principali contributi al corpus di conoscenze esistenti sui temi affrontati.
In primo luogo, esso contribuisce agli studi sulla coopetizione perché propone una lettura in chiave
comunicazionale, enfatizzando il ruolo della comunicazione come filo conduttore per lo sviluppo ed il successo della
strategia coopetitiva. Più in particolare, sottolinea il ruolo della comunicazione nella costruzione di un contesto
relazionale basato sulla fiducia, il commitment, la creazione di un’identità condivisa e di significati comuni da
attribuire alla relazione.
In secondo luogo, contribuisce agli studi di comunicazione in quanto, mentre ricerche precedenti hanno
enfatizzato l'approccio linguistico (Koschmann, Khun e Pfarrer, 2012), questo lavoro esamina la comunicazione
attraverso una esplicita prospettiva manageriale, enfatizzandone il suo valore strategico nel successo della
coopetizione. La comunicazione, infatti permea la coopetizione, divenendo così uno strumento strategico per attivare
un circolo virtuoso che favorisce l’efficacia ed il successo della strategia coopetitiva. In particolare, questo studio ha
chiarito come la comunicazione, nelle relazioni di coopetition, svolga un ruolo chiave a due livelli: corporate e dei
collaboratori. A livello corporate, la comunicazione supporta le strategie coopetitive di tipo deliberato, convogliando
messaggi che sostengono le attitudini dei collaboratori verso la coopetizione e li mettono nelle condizioni di essere
comunicatori strategici nel corso delle stesse relazioni. A livello dei collaboratori, la comunicazione sostiene le
strategie coopetitive di tipo emergente e sostiene i processi di sensemaking, di creazione di un’identità coopetitiva e di
203
TRACK N. COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
bilanciamento delle tensioni. Gli studi futuri sono chiamati a chiarire il concetto di comportamento di comunicazione
dei collaboratori e dei relativi antecedenti.
In terzo luogo, il lavoro arricchisce le conoscenze in merito all’applicazione dell’approccio strategy-as-practice
alla coopetizione, sottolineando il ruolo del coinvolgimento sociale e delle interazioni tra i collaboratori partecipanti
ed evidenziando al contempo l’interazione cruciale tra gli approcci deliberato ed emergente alla formulazione della
strategia coopetitiva.
Parole chiave: coopetizione; comunicazione; strategy-as-practice; costruttivismo; comportamenti; performance.
Bibliografia
AHUJA G. (2000), “The duality of collaboration: inducements and opportunities in the formation of interfirm linkages”, Strategic
Management Journal, vol. 21, n. 3, pp. 317-343.
ASHCRAFT K.L., KHUN T.R., COOREN F. (2009), “Constitutional amendments: 'Materializing' organizational communication”,
The Academy of Management Annuals, vol. 3, n. 1, pp. 1-64.
BENGTSSON M. KOCK S. (2000), “Coopetition” in business networks – to cooperate and compete simultaneously”, Industrial
Marketing Management, vol. 29, pp. 411-426.
BENGTSSON M. KOCK S. (2014), “Coopetition – quo vadis? Past accomplishments and future challenges”, Industrial Marketing
Management, vol. 43, pp. 180-188.
BENGTSSON M., RAZA-ULLAH T. (2016), “A systematic review of research on coopetition: toward a multilevel understanding”,
Industrial Marketing Management, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.05.003
BLASCHKE S., SCHOENEBORN D., SEIDL D. (2012), “Organizations as networks of communication episodes: turning the
network perspective inside out”, Organization Studies, vol. 33, n. 7, pp. 879-906
BRANDENBURGER A.M., NALEBUFF B.J. (1996), Co-opetition, Doubleday, New York.
CZAKON W., MUCHA-KUS K., SOLTYSIK M. (2016), “Coopetition strategy - What is it for all? A study of common benefits in
the polish energy balancing market”, International Studies of Management & Organization, n. 46, pp. 80-93.
DAGNINO G. B. (2009), “Coopetition strategy: A new kind of interfirm dynamics for value creation”, in G.B. Dagnino & E. Rocco
(Eds.), Coopetition strategy: Theory, experiments, and cases (pp. 25-43), New York: Routledge.
DAHL J. (2014), “Conceptualizing coopetition as a process: an outline of change in cooperative and competitive interactions”,
Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 272-279.
DAHL J., KOCK S., LUNDGREN-HENRIKSSON E.L. (2016), “Conceptualizing coopetition strategy as practice: a multilevel
interpretative framework”, International Studies of Management & Organization, n. 46, pp. 94-109.
FAIRHURST G.T., PUTNAM L.L. (2004), “Organization as discoursive contructions”, Communication Theory, vol. 14, n. 1, pp. 526.
FERNANDEZ A.S., LE ROY F., GNYAWALI D.R. (2014), “Sources and management of tension in co-opetition case evidence
from telecommunications satellites manufacturing in Europe”, Industrial Marketing Management, vol. 43, n. 2, pp. 222-235.
GARRETTE B., CASTANER X., DUSSAGE P. (2009), “Horizontal alliances as an alternative to autonomous production: product
expansion mode choice in the worldwide aircraft industry 1945-2000”, Strategic Management Journal, vol. 30, n. 8, pp. 885894.
GHOBADI S., D’AMBRA J. (2012), “Knowledge sharing in cross-functional teams: a coopetitive model”, Journal of Knowledge
Management, vol. 16, n. 2, pp. 285-301.
HARDY C., LAWRENCE T., GRANT D. (2005), “Discourse and collaboration: the role of conversation and collective identity”,
Academy of Management Review, n. 30, pp. 58-77.
HUANG K.F., YU C.M.J. (2011), “The effect of competitive and non competitive R&D collaboration on firm innovation”, Journal
of Technology Transfer, vol. 36, n. 4, pp. 383-403.
JARZABKOWSKI P., BALOGUN J., SEIDL D. (2007), “Strategizing: the challenges of a practice perspective”, Human Relations,
vol. 60, n. 1, pp. 5-27.
JARZABKOWSKI P., SPEE A.P. (2009), “Strategy-as-practice: a review and future directions for the field”, International Journal
of Management Reviews, vol. 11, n. 1, pp. 69-95.
KOSCHMANN M.A., KUHN T.R., PFARRER M. (2012), “A communicative framework of value in cross-sector partnerships”,
Academy of Management Review, vol. 37, n. 3, pp. 332-354.
KI E.J., HON L.C. (2012), “Causal linkage among relationship quality perceptions, and behavior intention in a membership
organization”, Corporate Communications: An International Journal, vol. 17, n. 2, pp. 187-208.
KUHN T. (2008), “A communicative theory of the firm: developing an alternative perspective on intra-organizational power and
stakeholder relationships”, Organization Studies, n. 29, pp. 1197-1224.
LAVIDGE, R.C., STEINER, G.A. (1961), “A model for predictive measurements of advertising effectiveness”, Journal of
Marketing, n. 25, pp. 59–62.
LE ROY F., ROBERT M., LASCH F. (2016), “Choosing the best partner for product innovation”, International Studies of
Management & Organization, n. 46, pp. 136-158.
LUO X., SLOTEGRAAF R.J., PAN X. (2006), “Cross-functional co-opetition: the simultaneous role of cooperation and competition
within firms”, Journal of Marketing, vol. 4, n. 1, pp. 67-80.
MCPHEE R.D., ZAUG P. (2000), “The communicative constitution of organizations: a framework for explanation”, The Electronic
Journal of Communication, vol. 10, n. 1-2, pp. 1-16.
PARK B.J.R., SRIVASTAVA M., GNYAWALI D.R. (2014), “Walking the tight rope of coopetition: impact of competition and
cooperation intensities and balance on firm innovation performance”, Industrial Marketing Management, n. 43, pp. 210-221.
QUINN R.W., DUTTON J.E. (2005), “Coordination as energy-in-conversation”, Academy of Management Review, n. 30, pp. 36-57.
RAZA-ULLAH T., BENGTSSON M., KOCK S. (2014), “The coopetition paradox and tension in coopetition at multiple levels”,
204
IL CONTRIBUTO DELLA COMUNICAZIONE AL SUCCESSO DELLA STRATEGIA COOPETITIVA
Industrial Marketing Management, n. 43, pp. 189-198.
SEIDL D., WHITTINGTON R. (2014), “Enlarging the strategy-as-practice research agenda: towards taller and flatter ontologies”,
Organization Studies, vol. 35, n. 10, pp. 1407-1421.
STADTLER L., VAN WASSENHOVE L.N. (2016), “Coopetition as a paradox: integrative approaches in a multi-company, crosssector partnership”, Organization Studies, pp. 1-31. DOI: 10.1177/0170840615622066
TIDSTROM A, RAJALA A. (2016), “Coopetition strategy as interrelated praxis and practices on multiple levels”, Industrial
Marketing management, http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.indmarman.2016.05.013
TIDSTROM A. (2014), “Managing tensions in coopetition”, Industrial Marketing Management, n. 43, pp. 261-271.
VAARA E., WHITTINGTON R. (2012), “Strategy-as-practice: taking social practices seriously”, The Academy of Management
Annals, vol. 6, n. 1, pp. 285-336.
WEICK K.E. (1979). The Social Psychology of Organizing, Reading, Mass. Addison-Wesley Publishing.
WEICK K.E., SUTCLIFFE K.M., OBSTFED D. (2005), “Organizing and the process of sensemaking”, Organization Science, vol.
16, n. 4, pp. 409-421.
WHITTINGTON R. (2006), “Completing the practice turn in strategy research”, Organization Studies, vol. 27, n. 5, pp. 613-634.
YANG S.M., FANG S.C., FANG S.R., CHOU C.H. (2014), “Knowledge exchange and knowledge protection in interorganizational
learning: the ambidexterity perspective”, Industrial Marketing management, n. 43, pp. 346-358.
ZHANG H.S., SHU C.L., JIANG X., MALTER A.J. (2010), “Managing knowledge for innovation: the role of cooperation,
competition, and alliance nationality”, Journal of International Marketing, vol. 18, n. 4, pp. 74-94.
205
TRACK N. COMPETITION AND COLLABORATION IN BUSINESS
206